Triumphs and Wonders of the 19th Century - The True Mirror of a Phenomenal Era

By Author	[ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z \| Other Symbols ]
By Title	[ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z \| Other Symbols ]
By Language

Download this book: [ ASCII ]

Look for this book on Amazon

We have new books nearly every day.
If you would like a news letter once a week or once a month fill out this form and we will give you a summary of the books for that week or month by email.

Title: Triumphs and Wonders of the 19th Century - The True Mirror of a Phenomenal Era
Author: Boyd, James P. (James Penny)
Language: English
As this book started as an ASCII text book there are no pictures available.

*** Start of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "Triumphs and Wonders of the 19th Century - The True Mirror of a Phenomenal Era" ***

[Illustration: “TRIUMPHS AND WONDERS OF THE NINETEENTH CENTURY.”

This picture explains and is symbolic of the most progressive one
hundred years in history. In the center stands the beautiful
female figure typifying Industry. To the right are the goddesses
of Music, Electricity, Literature and Art. Navigation is noted in
the anchor and chain leaning against the capstan; the Railroad,
in the rails and cross-ties; Machinery, in the cog-wheels,
steam governor, etc.; Labor, in the brawny smiths at the anvil;
Pottery, in the ornamented vase; Architecture, in the magnificent
Roman columns; Science, in the figure with quill in hand. In the
back of picture are suggestions of the progress and development
of our wonderful navy. Above all hovers the angel of Fame ready
to crown victorious Genius and Labor with the laurel wreaths of
Success.
]

TRIUMPHS AND WONDERS
OF THE
19TH CENTURY

THE
TRUE MIRROR OF A PHENOMENAL ERA

A VOLUME OF ORIGINAL, ENTERTAINING AND INSTRUCTIVE HISTORIC
AND DESCRIPTIVE WRITINGS, SHOWING THE MANY AND
MARVELLOUS ACHIEVEMENTS WHICH DISTINGUISH

AN HUNDRED YEARS
OF
Material, Intellectual, Social and Moral Progress

EMBRACING AS SUBJECTS ALL THOSE WHICH BEST TYPE THE GENIUS,
SPIRIT AND ENERGY OF THE AGE, AND SERVE TO BRING INTO
BRIGHTEST RELIEF THE GRAND MARCH OF IMPROVEMENT
IN THE VARIOUS DOMAINS OF
HUMAN ACTIVITY.

BY
JAMES P. BOYD, A.M., L.B.,

_Assisted by a Corps of Thirty-Two Eminent and Specially Qualified
Authors._

Copiously and Magnificently Illustrated.

[Illustration]

PHILADELPHIA
A. J. HOLMAN & CO.

INTRODUCTORY

Measuring epochs, or eras, by spaces of a hundred years each, that
which embraces the nineteenth century stands out in sublime and
encouraging contrast with any that has preceded it. As the legatee of
all prior centuries, it has enlarged and ennobled its bequest to an
extent unparalleled in history; while it has at the same time, through
a genius and energy peculiar to itself, created an original endowment
for its own enjoyment and for the future richer by far than any
heretofore recorded. Indeed, without permitting existing and pardonable
pride to endanger rigid truth, it may be said that along many of the
lines of invention and progress which have most intimately affected the
life and civilization of the world, the nineteenth century has achieved
triumphs and accomplished wonders equal, if not superior, to all other
centuries combined.

Therefore, what more fitting time than at its close to pass in
pleasing and instructive review the numerous material and intellectual
achievements that have so distinguished it, and have contributed in so
many and such marvelous ways to the great advance and genuine comfort
of the human race! Or, what could prove a greater source of pride and
profit than to compare its glorious works with those of the past, the
better to understand and measure the actual steps and real extent of
the progress of mankind! Or, what more delightful and inspiring than
to realize that the sum of those wonderful activities, of which each
reader is, or has been, a part, has gone to increase the grandeur of a
world era whose rays will penetrate and brighten the coming centuries!

Amid so many and such strong reasons this volume finds excellent cause
for its being. Its aims are to mirror a wonderful century from the
vantage ground of its closing year; to faithfully trace the lines which
mark its almost magical advance; to give it that high and true historic
place whence its contrasts with the past can be best noted, and its
light upon the future most directly thrown.

This task would be clearly beyond the power of a single mind. So rapid
has progress been during some parts of the century, so amazing have
been results along the lines of discovery and invention, so various
have been the fields of action, that only those of special knowledge
and training could be expected to do full justice to the many subjects
to be treated.

Hence, the work has been planned so as to give it a value far beyond
what could be imparted by a single mind. Each of the themes chosen
to type the century’s grand march has been treated by an author of
special fitness, and high up in his or her profession or calling, with
a view to securing for readers the best thoughts and facts relating to
the remarkable events of an hundred years. In this respect the volume
is unique and original. Its authorship is not of one mind, but of a
corps of minds, whose union assures what the occasion demands.

The scope, character, and value of the volume further appear in its
very large number and practical feature of subjects selected to show
the active forces, the upward and onward movements, and the grand
results that have operated within, and triumphantly crowned, an era
without parallel. These subjects embrace the sciences of the century
in their numerous divisions and conquests; its arts and literature;
industrial, commercial, and financial progress; land and sea prowess;
educational, social, moral, and religious growth; in fact, every field
of enterprise and achievement within the space of time covered by the
work.

A volume of such variety of subject and great extent affords fine
opportunity for illustration. The publishers have taken full advantage
of this, and have beautified it in a manner which commends itself to
every eye and taste. Rarely has a volume been so highly and elegantly
embellished. Each subject is illuminated so as to increase the pleasure
of reading and make an impression which will prove lasting.

As to its aim and scope, its number of specially qualified authors, its
vigor and variety of style and thought, its historic comprehensiveness
and exactness, its great wealth of illustration, its superb mechanism,
its various other striking features, the volume may readily rank as one
of the century’s triumphs, a wonder of industrious preparation, and
acceptable to all. At any rate, no such volume has ever mirrored any
previous century, and none will come to reflect the nineteenth century
with truer line and color.

Not only is the work a rare and costly picture, filled in with
inspiring details by master hands, but it is equally a monument, whose
solid base, grand proportions, and elegant finish are in keeping with
the spirit of the era it marks and the results it honors. Its every
inscription is a glowing tribute to human achievement of whatever kind
and wherever the field of action may lie, and therefore a happy means
of conveying to twentieth century actors the story of a time whose
glories they will find it hard to excel. May this picture and monument
be viewed, studied, and admired by all, so that the momentous chapters
which round the history of a closing century shall avail in shaping the
beginnings of a succeeding one.

AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS

JAMES P. BOYD, A. M., L. B.,
WONDERS OF ELECTRICITY.

REAR-ADMIRAL GEORGE WALLACE MELVILLE,
_Chief of Bureau of Steam Engineering, Navy Department,
Washington, D. C._
THE CENTURY’S NAVAL PROGRESS.

SELDEN J. COFFIN, A. M.,
_Professor of Astronomy, Lafayette College, Easton, Pa._
ASTRONOMY DURING THE CENTURY.

THOMAS MEEHAN,
_Vice-President Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia_.
STORY OF PLANT AND FLOWER.

MARY ELIZABETH LEASE,
_First Woman President of Kansas State Board of Charities_.
PROGRESS OF WOMEN WITHIN THE CENTURY.

ROBERT P. HAINS,
_Principal Examiner of Textiles, United States Patent Office,
Washington, D. C._
THE CENTURY’S TEXTILE PROGRESS.

GEORGE EDWARD REED, S. T. D., LL. D.,
_President of Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa._
THE CENTURY’S RELIGIOUS PROGRESS.

JAMES P. BOYD, A. M., L. B.,
GREAT GROWTH OF LIBRARIES.

WILLIAM MARTIN AIKEN, F. A. I. A.,
_Former United States Supervising Architect, Treasury Department,
Washington, D. C._
PROGRESS OF THE CENTURY IN ARCHITECTURE.

HARVEY W. WILEY, M. D., PH. D., LL. D.,
_Chief Chemist of Division of Chemistry, Agricultural Department,
Washington, D. C._
THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN CHEMISTRY.

RITER FITZGERALD, A. M.,
_Dramatic Critic “City Item,” Philadelphia_.
THE CENTURY’S MUSIC AND DRAMA.

JAMES P. BOYD, A. M., L. B.,
THE CENTURY’S LITERATURE.

MORRIS JASTROW, JR., PH. D.,
_Professor of Semitic Languages, University of Pennsylvania_.
THE RECORDS OF THE PAST.

MAJOR HENRY E. ALVORD, C. E., LL. D.,
_Chief of Dairy Division, United States Department of Agriculture,
Washington, D. C._
PROGRESS IN DAIRY FARMING.

SARA Y. STEVENSON, Sc. D.,
_Secretary of Department of Archæology and Paleontology,
University of Pennsylvania_.
THE CENTURY’S MORAL PROGRESS.

CHARLES McINTIRE, A. M., M. D.,
_Lecturer on Sanitary Science, Lafayette College, Easton, Pa._
PROGRESS OF SANITARY SCIENCE.

LIEUTENANT-COLONEL ARTHUR L. WAGNER,
_Assistant Adjutant General United States Army_.
THE CENTURY’S ARMIES AND ARMS.

WALDO F. BROWN,
_Agricultural Editor “Cincinnati Gazette.”_
THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN AGRICULTURE.

WALTER LORING WEBB, C. E.,
_Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering, University of Pennsylvania_.
PROGRESS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING.

D. E. SALMON, M. D.,
_Chief of Bureau of Animal Industry, Agricultural Department,
Washington, D. C._
THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN THE ANIMAL WORLD.

MAJOR-GENERAL JOSEPH WHEELER,
_United States Army, and Member of Congress from Eighth Alabama
District_.
LEADING WARS OF THE CENTURY.

GEORGE J. HAGAR,
_Editor of Appendix to Encyclopædia Britannica_.
THE CENTURY’S FAIRS AND EXPOSITIONS.

HON. BRADFORD RHODES,
_Editor of “Banker’s Magazine.”_
THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN COINAGE, CURRENCY, AND BANKING.

H. E. VAN DEMAN,
_Late Professor of Botany and Practical Horticulture, Kansas State
Agricultural College_.
THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN FRUIT CULTURE.

EMORY R. JOHNSON, A. M.,
_Assistant Professor of Transportation and Commerce, University of
Pennsylvania_.
THE CENTURY’S COMMERCIAL PROGRESS.

FRANKLIN S. EDMONDS, A. M.,
_Assistant Professor of Political Science, Central High School,
Philadelphia_.
THE CENTURY’S ADVANCES IN EDUCATION.

THOMAS J. LINDSEY,
_Editorial Staff Philadelphia “Evening Bulletin.”_
“THE ART PRESERVATIVE.”

GEORGE A. PACKARD,
_Metallurgist and Mining Engineer_.
PROGRESS IN MINES AND MINING.

JOHN V. SEARS,
_Art Critic Philadelphia “Evening Telegraph.”_
ART PROGRESS OF THE CENTURY.

J. MADISON TAYLOR, M. D., AND
JOHN H. GIBBON, M. D.,
_Surgeons Out-Patients Departments of Pennsylvania and Children’s
Hospitals_.
THE CENTURY’S ADVANCE IN SURGERY.

FRANK C. HAMMOND, M. D.,
_Instructor in Gynæcology, Jefferson Medical College_.
PROGRESS OF MEDICINE.

E. E. RUSSELL TRATMAN, C. E.,
_Assistant Editor of “Engineering News,” Chicago, Ill._
EVOLUTION OF THE RAILROAD.

LUTHER E. HEWITT, L. B.,
_Librarian of Philadelphia Law Association_.
ADVANCE IN LAW AND JUSTICE.

MICHAEL J. BROWN,
_Secretary of Building Association League of Pennsylvania_.
PROGRESS OF BUILDING AND LOAN ASSOCIATIONS.

REV. A. LEFFINGWELL,
_Rector Trinity Church, Toledo, O._
EPOCH MAKERS OF THE CENTURY.

ANALYSIS OF CONTENTS

WONDERS OF ELECTRICITY

I. AT THE DAWN OF THE CENTURY:—Earliest Observations on Electricity
—Study of Amber—Earliest Electric Machines—Conduction of
Electricity—The Leyden Jar—Franklin’s Discoveries. II. NEW
NINETEENTH CENTURY ELECTRICITY:—Galvanism—The Voltaic Pile
—Davy’s Arc-light—The Electro-magnet—Faraday’s Discoveries
—The Induction Coil—Fields of Force. III. THE TELEGRAPH:—
First Successful Telegraphy—The Morse System—Improvements
in Telegraphy—Ocean Telegraphy. IV. HELLO! HELLO!—Invention
of the Telephone—Principle of the Telephone—Transmitter and
Receiver—Uses of the Telephone—The Phonograph, Gramophone, and
Graphophone. V. DYNAMO AND MOTOR:—The First Motor—Perfection
of the Dynamo—How it generates Electricity—Principle and
Uses of the Motor. VI. “AND THERE WAS LIGHT:”—Various Lights of
the Past—Era of Electric Lighting—Arc and Incandescent Lamps
—Principles of Each—Value of Electric Light. VII. ELECTRIC
LOCOMOTION:—Passing of the Horse and Traction Car—Introduction
of the Trolley—Features of the Electric Railway—The Storage
Battery and Horseless Carriage. VIII. THE X RAY:—Discovery of
—What the X Ray is—Photographing by Means of the X Ray. IX.
OTHER ELECTRICAL WONDERS:—Electric Clocks—Electrotyping and
Electroplating, etc. X. ELECTRICAL LANGUAGE 19–54

THE CENTURY’S NAVAL PROGRESS

I. INFLUENCE OF SEA POWER:—Sea Powers throughout the World—
Enumeration of Great Naval Wars. II. THE CENTURY’S GROWTH IN NAVAL
STRENGTH:—American Navies at Different Eras—European Fleets
—South American and Chinese Navies. III. THE BATTLESHIP PAST AND
PRESENT:—The Old Fighting Frigate—Evolution of the Modern
Man-of-War—Comparison of Frigate with Ironclad. IV. PROGRESS OF
NAVAL ENGINEERING:—Nelson’s Vision—The 14,500 Miles Steaming of
the Oregon—Revolution in Mechanism and Material—Types of Great
Battleships—Introduction and Advantages of Steam—Invention
of the Screw Propeller—Improvement in Boilers and Engines—
The Revolving Turret—Cruiser and Torpedo Craft—Phenomenal
Speed. V. THE GROWTH OF ORDNANCE:—Description of Various Guns and
Projectiles—Power of Modern Explosives. VI. THE DEVELOPMENT OF
ARMOR:—Its Necessity in Naval Warfare—How it is made, tested,
and put on. VII. THE RAM AND TORPEDO:—Evolution of the Ram—
Introduction of the Torpedo—Various Kinds of Torpedoes. VIII. THE
UNITED STATES FLEET:—Whence it sprang and how it has grown—Its
Ships, Officers, and Men—Official Naval Ranks—The Naval Academy
—Passage of the United States to a World Power 55–86

ASTRONOMY DURING THE CENTURY

I. ASTRONOMY A CENTURY AGO:—Discovery of Uranus. II. HOW “BODE’S
LAW” PROMOTED RESEARCH:—Further Discovery of Planets—Celestial
Photography. III. HOW NEPTUNE WAS FOUND:—Le Verrier, “First
Astronomer of the Age.” IV. METEORITES:—Meteoric Showers—
Various Large Meteorites. V. DO METEORS OFTEN STRIKE THE EARTH:
—The “Fire-ball” of 1860. VI. ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATORIES:
—Their Equipment and Work—Number of Observatories. VII.
IMPROVED INSTRUMENTS:—Their Effect on the Science. VIII. THE
SPECTROSCOPE:—Its Triumphs—Elements discovered. IX. WORK
IN A LARGE OBSERVATORY:—Discovery of Comets and Nebulæ. X.
WASHINGTON NATIONAL OBSERVATORY:—Its Instruments. XI. STAR
MAPS AND CATALOGUES:—Number of Stars—The Planisphere. XII.
ASTRONOMICAL BOOKS AND WRITERS:—Number of Students of Astronomy.
XIII. PRACTICAL USES OF ASTRONOMY:—Its Help in Navigation—Uses
in Geodesy. XIV. NOTABLE ASTRONOMICAL EPOCHS:—Clock Regulation
—Invention of Chronograph and Spectroscope—Great Telescopes.
XV. DISCARDED THEORIES:—Are Planets inhabited—The Orrery. XVI.
FUTURE ASTRONOMICAL PROBLEMS:—How long will the Sun endure? 87–104

STORY OF PLANT AND FLOWER

Early History of Botany—The Father of Modern Botany—Botany
at the Beginning of the Nineteenth Century—Natural System of
Classification—Advance in Study of Plant Behavior—Illustrations
from the Peanut and Grape-vine—Plant Motions as regards Forms—
Origin and Development of Plant Life—The Doctrine of Evolution
—Nutrition of Plants—Fertilization of Flowers—Insectivorous
and Cruel Plants—Vegetable Physiology—Advance in Relation to
Cryptogamic Plants—Geographical Botany—Herbariums and Botanical
Gardens 105–114

PROGRESS OF WOMEN WITHIN THE CENTURY

Woman’s Misconception of her Rights—Former Oppression—Cosmic and
Moral Processes—What Christianity has done for Women—Hardship
of the Pauline Grip—The True Mission of Woman—Improvement in
her Education—Female Occupations—Competition with Men—Woman
in the Literary Field—In Philanthropy and Morals—Women’s Clubs
—Woman in Politics—The constantly Broadening Field of Woman’s
Influence 115–124

THE CENTURY’S TEXTILE PROGRESS

Antiquity of Textile Industry—The Distaff, Spindle, and Loom among
Chinese, Egyptians, and Greeks—Introduction of the Spinning-wheel
—Loom of the Eighteenth Century—The Fly-shuttle—Textiles at
the Beginning of the Nineteenth Century—Invention of the Spinning
Jenny—Arkwright’s Drawing-rollers—Whitney’s Cotton-gin—Its
Influence—Invention of the Spinning-mule—The Spinning-frame
—Rapid Improvements in Spinning Machinery—Evolution of the
Spindle—Increase of Speed—Introduction of the Carding-machine
—Carding-combs—Advent of Power-looms—Description of their
Machinery and Products—The Jacquard Loom—Of Pile Fabrics—The
Bigelow Loom—How Tufted Pile Fabrics are made—Weaving of Fancy
Cloths—Various Forms of Looms—Hair-cloth Looms—Weaving of
Tubular Fabrics—Infinitude of Uses to which the Loom can be put—
The Coming Automatic Loom—Advent of the Knitting-machine—Its
Wonderful Perfection and Products—The Century’s Patents of Textile
Machinery—Beauty of Textile Art—Its Influence on Taste and
Comfort 125–146

THE CENTURY’S RELIGIOUS PROGRESS

Religious Status in Eighteenth Century, in England, France, and on
the Continent—Condition in the United States—The Reign of
Skepticism—Doctrinal Divisions in the Churches—The Nineteenth
Century Revival—Variety and Growth of Religions in the United
States—Freedom of the Church—Kinship of Denominations—
Increase in Material and Spiritual Forces—Church Edifices and
Capacities—Religious Population—Number of Communicants
—Distribution of Communicants—Ministers and Organizations
—Missionary Enterprises—Service of Religion in Education,
Philanthropy, and Reform—Gifts to Educational Institutions
—Growth of Charitable Institutions—Religion and Republican
Institutions 147–158

GREAT GROWTH OF LIBRARIES

Antiquity of Libraries—Evidences of Civilized Progress—Character
of Ancient Writings—Books of Clay—Mesopotamian Literature
—Egyptian Hieroglyphics—Papyrus Manuscripts—Sacred Books
of Thoth—Greek Libraries—Their Number and Extent—Roman
Libraries—Imperial Library of Constantinople—Effects of
Christianity upon Literature—Church Book-making and Collecting—
All Books written or copied by Priests—Fate of Monastic Libraries
—Early Libraries in France—Royal Libraries in Europe—The
French National Library—Introduction of Copyright—Growth and
Extent of European Libraries—Their Location and Management—The
British Museum—Libraries of Great Britain—Canadian Libraries
—English Colonial Libraries—Libraries of the Latin Republics
—Phenomenal Growth of Libraries in the United States—Wide
Ramification of the System—The Oldest United States Library—
Colonial Libraries—Libraries of 1800—Number founded during the
Century—State Libraries—School-district Libraries—Library
Systems—The Library of Congress—Its Vast Extent and New
Repository—Copyright System—United States Free Libraries—
Noted Libraries of the Country—Libraries of over 100,000 Volumes
—Munificence of Library Founders—Noted Givers to Libraries—
Progress in Library Management 159–170

PROGRESS OF THE CENTURY IN ARCHITECTURE

English Architecture at the Beginning of the Century—The Queen
Anne Style—French Architecture and Architects—Architectural
Styles in Germany, Austria, Italy, Greece, Turkey, and throughout
Europe—Canadian Styles and Notable Buildings—Early Architecture
in the United States—Old New England and Southern Homes—The
Colonial Styles—The White House and United States Capitol—
Progress in Public Building Architecture—Notable Changes after
the War of 1812—The Gothic Cottage and Italian Villa—The
First School of Architecture—Comparison of Styles in Different
Cities—Introduction of Iron—Styles for Hotels and Summer
Resorts—Effect of Chicago and Boston Fires on Architecture—
How the Centennial Exposition changed Styles—Church and Library
Architecture—The Congressional Library and Other Notable Specimens
of American Architecture—Advent of the Sky-scraper—General
Review of Architectural Effects—Monumental Works the Poetry of
Architecture 171–190

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN CHEMISTRY

Status of Chemical Science at Beginning of the Century—The Century’s
Main Lines of Progress: I. INORGANIC AND PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY:—
Lavoisier’s Cardinal Propositions—Rapid Advance of Chemical
Science—Sir Humphrey Davy’s Achievements—Elementary Bodies
of Eighteenth Century—Same in Nineteenth Century. II. PHYSICAL
CHEMISTRY:—Properties of Elements—Of Matter and Energy—Rates
of Reaction—Conditions of Equilibrium. III. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY:
—Of Carbon Compounds—Theory of Substitution—Atoms in the
Molecule—Space Relations—The Carbon Atom—The Organic
Body. IV. ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY:—Development of the Blow-pipe—
Gas Analysis—Electricity as a Factor—Discovery of Spectrum
Analysis. V. SYNTHETICAL CHEMISTRY:—Building up of Complex Forms
—Synthesis of Coloring Matters and Sugars—Future Food of Man.
VI. METALLURGICAL CHEMISTRY:—Oldest Branch of Chemical Science
—Reduction of Ores—Advantage to Agriculture. VII. AGRICULTURAL
CHEMISTRY:—Utilization of Fertilizers—Nitrogen as a Plant Food
—Advantages to Practical Agriculture. VIII. GRAPHIC CHEMISTRY:
—Fundamental Principles—Daguerreotype and Photograph. IX.
DIDACTIC CHEMISTRY:—The Student and the Laboratory—Advantages
of Laboratory Training. X. CHEMISTRY OF FERMENTATION:—Bacterial
Action—Process of Digestion—Decay of Meats and Vegetables—
Sterilization—Fermentation. XI. ELECTRO-CHEMISTRY:—Combination
of Carbon with Metals—Uses of Electricity in Chemistry.
CONCLUSION. 191–206

THE CENTURY’S MUSIC AND DRAMA

I. EIGHTEENTH CENTURY MUSIC:—Leading Composers—Nineteenth
Century Music—The Great Composers and their Works—Different
Schools and Styles of Composition—Analysis of Operas—Musical
Characteristics of the Nations—Verdi and Wagner compared—
The American Opera. II. THE DRAMA:—The Theatre of the Past—
Great Modern Improvement—Scenery and Appointments—Actors and
Actresses—The Century’s Illustrious Role—Theatres in the
United States—Character of Actors—Public Estimation of the
Drama 207–214

THE CENTURY’S LITERATURE

Contrast with Eighteenth Century Literature—Tone of Modern
Literature—How it types Progress—English Literature—
Literature of Other Nations—Various Authors—English Criticism
of American Literature—Newspaper Literature—Evolution of
the Newspaper—Newspapers of the Nations—Nineteenth Century
Journalism—Beginning of Newspaper Enterprise in the United States
—Colonial Papers—Papers of the Revolution—Appearance of
the Daily—The Penny Press—Newspaper Growth up to 1861—War
Journalism—The Sunday Newspaper—Illustrated Journalism—
Reaction in Newspaper Prices—Cost of running a Newspaper—Number
of World’s Newspapers—The Comic Paper—Evolution of the Magazine
—Growth of Magazine in the United States—Character of Magazine
Literature—Advent of the Cheap Magazine—Features of
Publication 215–230

THE RECORDS OF THE PAST

Extension of Knowledge into the Past—Spade of the Archæologist—
General View of the Revelations—Documents of Stone, Clay, and
Papyrus—Assyrian Revelations—Egyptian Explorations—Eloquence
of Obelisk, Tomb, and Pyramid—Cuneiform Scripts of Babylon—
Discovery of the Rosetta Stone—Champollion’s Key—Story of
the Ruins in Greece and Rome—Revelation of Temples and Statues
—Phœnician Remains—The Moabite Stone—Ruins in Palestine—
Revelations in Jerusalem—Hittite Remains—Continuing Interest in
Archæological Discovery—Vast Importance from an Historic Point of
View 231–244

PROGRESS IN DAIRY FARMING

Requisites for Successful Dairying—Enterprise of Dairying Districts
—Advantages of Dairying—Dairying Areas—Dairying at the
Beginning of the Century—Early Methods—The Great Change
midway of the Century—Improvement in Milch Cows—Growth of
Cheese-Making—Institution of Creameries—Application of
Mechanics to Dairying—Dairy Associations—Best Dairy Breeds—
Invention of the Separator—Its Operation and Advantages—The
Fat-test for Milk—Growth in Butter-making Illustrated—Labor
in Dairying—Dairy and Food Commissions—Dairying Publications
—City Milk Supplies—Annual Production of Cheese—Character
of Cheeses—Annual Butter Product—Butter and Cheese-producing
States—Number and Value of Cows—Dairy Values as compared with
Value of Other Products—Necessity for guarding Dairy
Interests. 245–260

THE CENTURY’S MORAL PROGRESS

Morals among the Ancients—Moral Precepts common to all Communities
—Evolution of Ethics—Early Christian Morals—Spirit of the
Reformation—Low Moral Condition of the Eighteenth Century—Birth
of a New Moral Epoch—A National Conscience—Abolition of Slavery
—Larger Application of the Principles of Right and Justice—How
Women are affected—Effect of Invention and Education on Social
and Moral Conditions—Broadening of Woman’s Sphere—Increase of
Self-respect—Influence of Women on Moral Status—Legislation and
Morals—How to meet Ethical Problems—Business Success and the
Moral State—Rights and Duties of Capital and Labor—Cruelties
of War and Blessings of Peace—The Century’s Moral Gain—Changed
Treatment of Vice and Poverty—The Principle of Well-doing—
Growth of Tolerance and Altruism—A Higher Individual and Public
Conscience 261–270

PROGRESS OF SANITARY SCIENCE

Hygienic Code of Moses—Hippocrates and Disease—Sanitation
and Sanitary Science—Foundation Rules—Spirit of Scientific
Investigation—Effect of Act of Parliament of 1837—Value of
Official Figures—The Riddle of Samson—Health Reports in
United States—Duty of Separate States—Mortality in London of
Filth Diseases—Progress of Sanitation—Diminution of Scourges
—Effect of Sanitation upon the Weak and Helpless—Value of
Culture Tubes—Discovery of Disease Causes—Of Trichinæ in Pork
—Communicable Diseases caused by Living Organisms—Infectious
and Contagious Diseases—Uses of Biology in Sanitary Science—
Purification of Waters—Of Consumption and Cholera—Effects of
Filtration—What Bacteria are—Of Isolation and Disinfection—
Modern Quarantines—Fumigation of Ships—Lowering of Death Rates
—Influence of the Sanitarium—Improved Construction of Dwellings
—Care for Paving and Sewage—Disposal of Refuse—Of Food
Inspection—State Boards of Health—Care of Employees—Of Play
and Athletic Grounds—Public Breathing Spaces—Duty of Caring for
Personal Health—Bearing of Public Health on Community and
Nation 271–282

THE CENTURY’S ARMIES AND ARMS

Armies and Arms of the Eighteenth Century—Alteration in War Methods
—European Army Systems—Changes made by Napoleon—Battle
Weapons and Tactical Movements—Growing Use of Cannon—The
Congreve Rocket—Infantry Formations—The Introduction of the
Rifle—The Crimean War and Rifled Siege Guns—The Italian War
and Rifled Cannon—Advent of the Breech-loader—Introduction
of Heavy Guns—Arms and Tactics in the Civil War—Use of Steam
and Electricity in War—Advantage of Railroad and Telegraph—
Introduction of Armored Vessels—Siege Artillery—Advent of the
Machine Gun—New System of Entrenchment—German Military System
—Coming of the Needle Gun—French Military System—Comparison
of Russian and Turkish Methods—Strength of the World’s Armies—
United States Army Organization—Steel Guns and Smokeless Powder
—Improvement in Mortars—The Dynamite Gun—Modern Shrapnel—
Sea-Coast Guns—Perfection of Modern Rifles—Their Great Range
and Power—The Gatling Gun—The Maxim Automatic—Introduction
of the Torpedo—General Review of the Increase in Military
Efficiency 283–306

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN AGRICULTURE

I. VICISSITUDES OF EARLY FARMING:—First National Road—Canal
Building—Coming of Railroads—Farming Conditions before the
50’s—Hardships of Marketing. II. IMPROVEMENTS IN FARM IMPLEMENTS
AND MACHINERY:—Farmers’ Draft upon Nature—The Sickle, Flail,
and Cradle—Coming of Harvesters—Improvement in Threshers
—Portable and Traction Engines—Separators and Stackers—
Improvements in Other Implements. III. IMPROVEMENT IN STOCK:—
Various Breeds of Cattle—Breeding of Horses, Sheep, and Swine
—Best Breeds. IV. IMPROVEMENT IN FARMING METHODS:—In Drainage
—Care of Animals—Barns and Stabling—Proper Food Rations
—Fencing. V. HOME IMPROVEMENTS:—Home Architecture—The
Yard and Garden—Maintaining Soil Fertility—Proper Manures
—Soil Analysis—Use of Modern Fertilizers. VI. IMPROVEMENT IN
AGRICULTURAL KNOWLEDGE:—Agricultural Literature—Farmers’ Clubs
and Institutes—Granges—Agricultural Colleges—Experimental
Stations—The Department of Agriculture—Bureau of Animal
Industry—Agricultural Newspapers and Periodicals—Summary of
Agricultural Progress 307–338

PROGRESS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING

I. AN INTRODUCTORY VIEW:—Antiquity of Engineering—Ancient Roads
and Bridges—Nineteenth Century Advances. II. BRIDGES:—Primitive
Bridges—Iron and Steel Bridges—The Brooklyn Bridge—Niagara
Suspension Bridge—Pecos River Viaduct—The Forth Bridge—
Remarkable Arches—Stone Bridges. III. CAISSONS:—Invention of
the Caisson—Its Principle and Use—Caisson Adventures. IV.
CANALS:—The First Suez Canal—Nicaragua and Panama Canals
—Modern Suez Canal—The Manchester Canal—Chicago Drainage
Canal—What it is for. V. GEODESY:—Ancient Methods of Earth
Measurements—The Century’s Advance in Methods of Measurement.
VI. RAILROADS:—Their Invention and Development—Immense Value.
VII. TUNNELS:—Ancient Origin of—Tunnels of Egypt, Babylonia,
and India—Roman Tunnels—Of the Modern Tunnel—Advance in
Machinery and Constructive Processes—Mount Cenis Tunnel—Tunnel
Surveying and Excavating—The Hoosac Tunnel—St. Gothard Tunnel
—St. Clair Tunnel—Its Construction and Commercial Effects 339–360

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN THE ANIMAL WORLD

I. OF ANIMAL DISEASES:—Effect of Napoleonic Wars—Various
Animal Diseases—How controlled. II. INCREASE IN NUMBER OF
ANIMALS:—Showing in Europe, United States, and Other Countries.
III. IMPROVEMENT OF BREEDS:—Shortening the Time of Growth—
Development of Dairy and Beef Breeds—Improvement in Wool Growing
—Poultry Breeds—Thoroughbred Horses—The American Trotter—
Animal Exports—Foreign Animal Imports—Displacement of Horses by
Mechanical Motors—Prices of Animal Products—American Command of
World’s Animal Markets 361–374

LEADING WARS OF THE CENTURY

I. WARS OF THE UNITED STATES:—First War with Barbary States—
Indian Wars—War of 1812—Battles by Land and Sea—Exploits on
the Lakes—Victory of New Orleans—Second War with Barbary States
—The Mexican War—General Taylor’s Victories—Siege of Vera
Cruz—General Scott’s March and Battles—Capture of Mexico—
Results of the War—The Civil War, 1861–65—Secession of States
—Calling out the Armies—Building of the Navies—The First
Battles—Operations in 1862—Battles of 1863—The Emancipation
Proclamation—The Turning Point at Gettysburg—Opening of the
Mississippi—Chickamauga and Missionary Ridge—Battles of 1864
—Appomattox and Surrender—The Spanish-American War—Its
Causes—Destruction of Spanish Fleet in Manila Bay—Destruction
of Cervera’s Fleet—Capitulation of Santiago—Invasion of Porto
Rico. II. FOREIGN WARS:—Wars of Napoleon—Battle of Marengo
—Treaty of Amiens—Third Coalition against France—Battle of
Austerlitz—Nelson’s Victory at Trafalgar—Wars of the Fourth
Coalition—Wars of the Fifth Coalition—Wars of the Sixth
Coalition—Battle of Waterloo—Final Defeat of Napoleon—Greek
Wars for Independence—Battle of Navarino—Greek Independence—
French Revolution of 1830—Polish Insurrection—England’s Wars in
India—French Republic of 1848—Hungarian Wars for Independence
—Italian Wars—The Crimean War—Sebastopol and Balaklava—
Peace of Paris—The Indian Mutiny—Wars of the Alliance against
Austria—Battle of Solferino—Danish Wars—Wars for German
Unity—Verdict of Sadowa—The Franco-Prussian War—Siege and
Capture of Paris—The French Republic—The Turco-Russian War—
Chino-Japanese War—Greco-Turkish War—Interference of the Powers
—Wars in the Soudan—Review of the Century’s Martial
Results 375–420

THE CENTURY’S FAIRS AND EXPOSITIONS

The Primitive Fair—Growth and Influence of Fairs—Their History
in Different Countries—Of Agricultural Fairs, Societies, and
Institutes—Their Origin and Purpose—National and State
Agricultural Departments—Sanitary Fairs—Special Exhibitions
—Evolution of International Expositions—The First World’s
Exposition at London—Expositions at Dublin, Paris, New York—
Continental Expositions—Second and Third Expositions at London
and Paris—The Vienna Exposition—The Centennial at Philadelphia
—Description of Subsequent Expositions at Atlanta, Louisville, New
Orleans, Chicago, Nashville, and Omaha—The American Commercial
Museums 421–442

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN COINAGE, CURRENCY, AND BANKING

I. BANKS AND BANKING RESOURCES:—Banks as Gauges of Wealth—
Civilization reflected in Monetary Machinery—Features of United
States Financial Policy—Gold Store of Various Countries—
Banking Resources—Number and Resources of Banks. II. COINAGE
AND PRODUCTION OF PRECIOUS METALS:—Why Gold is a Standard—
Primitive Measures of Value—History of Coinage—First United
States Mint—Coin Ratios—Gold and Silver Production and Mintage
—Exports and Imports of Precious Metals—Circulation per Capita
—Coinage Act of 1873. III. EARLY BANKING IN THE UNITED STATES:
—First Banking Associations—First United States Bank and its
Branches—Early State Banks—Second United States Bank—How
it fell—State Banks and Independent Treasury. IV. HISTORY OF
LEGAL TENDER NOTES:—The Treasury Reserve—Treasury Notes—
Manner of Issue and Redemption. V. THE NATIONAL BANKING SYSTEM:—
Formation of National Banks—Law’s and Regulations—Number and
Circulation. VI. FOREIGN BANKING AND FINANCE:—Banks of England and
the Continent of Europe—Their Strength and Methods. VII. UNITED
STATES GOVERNMENT DEBT SINCE 1857:—Gross Receipts and Expenditures
—Interest Charges. VIII. POSTAL SAVINGS BANKS:—Why they are not
adopted in the United States. IX. SAVINGS BANKS IN THE UNITED
STATES:—Their Number and Strength. X. THE CLEARING HOUSE:—How
conducted—Its Economic Uses. XI. PANICS OF THE CENTURY AND
THEIR CAUSES 443–470

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN FRUIT CULTURE

Early Cultivation of Fruits—Beauty and Uses of Fruits—Fruits
brought to the New World—Culture at the Beginning of the Century
—Early Fruit Districts—The Experimental Stage—Pioneers in
Culture—The Age of Progress—First Commercial Orchards—The
Age of Triumph—Spread of Culture in Various States and Areas—
Revolution in Science of Fruit Growing—Success and Failure of
Different Species—Vine Culture—Improved Culture with Implements
—Home Consumption and Export of Fruits—Our Fruits a Favorite
in Europe—Apple Culture—Uses of Apples—Typical Orchards—
Notable Varieties—Extent of Apple Orchards—Apple Exports—
Progress in the Culture of Other Fruits—Varieties and Best Soils
—History and Progress of Berry Culture—The Citrous Fruits—
Where and how grown—Their Great Value to Man—General Review of
Fruit Culture and Fruits 471–490

THE CENTURY’S COMMERCIAL PROGRESS

I. WORLD’S COMMERCE AT END OF EIGHTEENTH CENTURY:—Methods of Traffic
—Volume of Trade. II. REVOLUTION IN COMMERCE:—Change from Sails
to Steam—First Ocean Steamers—Steamship Lines—Change from
Wood to Iron—The Compound Engine—Advent of Steel Vessels—
The Twin Screw—Immense Size of Ships—Their Great Velocity—
Appointment and Service. III. IMPROVEMENT IN COMMERCIAL AUXILIARIES:
—Betterment of Waterways—Ship Canals—Harbor Improvements—
Cable and Banking Facilities. IV. EXPANSION OF INTERNATIONAL TRADE:
—European Commercial Growth—Food Importations. V. TRADE OF THE
UNITED STATES:—Extent of Domestic and Foreign—Vast Extension
—Imports and Exports—Character of. VI. THE AMERICAN MARINE:—
Former Carrying Trade—Modern Carrying Trade—Decline of United
States Maritime Importance. VII. AMERICAN SHIPBUILDING. VIII. CAUSES
FOR THE CENTURY’S COMMERCIAL PROGRESS:—Economic, Political, and
Social Causes. IX. THE TWENTIETH CENTURY PROSPECT 491–514

EDUCATION DURING THE CENTURY

Education a Hundred Years ago—Pestalozzi’s Influence—Froebel’s
Kindergarten System—Its Introduction into the United States—
English and German Schools—Great European Teachers—Foundation
of Public School Systems in the United States—The Battles for
Public Schools—Immensity of Common School Systems—Number
of Schools and Pupils—Expenditure for Schools—Primitive
Schoolhouses—Old-time Teachers and Methods—The Modern
Schoolhouse—Improvements in Teachers and Methods—Of the High
School—College and University—Teachers’ Institutes—State
Associations—School Publications—National Bureau of Education
—Normal Schools—Teachers’ Salaries—Girls’ Seminaries—
Change to Female Teachers—Modern School Furnishings—Text-books
—University Courses of Lectures—Schools of Manual Training and
Business—Education of the Negro Race—Experiment of Booker T.
Washington—School Funds—Compulsory Education 515–542

“THE ART PRESERVATIVE”

I. THE PRINTING PRESS:—Printing Art in the Eighteenth Century—
Franklin’s Influence—The Hand Press—Various Improved Presses
—Coming of the Power Press—Order of the Countries in Printing
Progress—Impetus to Printing in the United States—Wonderful
Improvement in Presses—How a Swift-motioned Press operates—
Quadruple Presses—Printing, Folding, and Pasting—Counting and
Delivering—The Sextuple Press—Its Wonderful Achievements—
Color Printing Presses. II. THE SETTING OF TYPE:—The Art at the
Beginning of the Century—Dawn of Mechanical Composition—First
Type-setting Machines—The Linotype—How it sets Type. III. OTHER
EVENTS IN THE PRINTING LINE:—Old Methods of spreading News—
Modern Electric Methods—Cables and Overland Wires—Vast Extent
of Newspapers—Code Systems. IV. TYPE-MAKING, STEREOTYPING, AND
PICTURE-MAKING:—From Wood to Metal Type—Introduction of the
Type Foundry—The Stereotyping Process—How it preserves Type
—Introduction of Electrotyping—Its Advantages in Printing—
Disappearance of Wood Engraving—The Art of Illustration—Triumph
of Mechanical Processes in Printing—Tendency of the Future 543–570

PROGRESS IN MINES AND MINING

Search for American Mines—Progress of Mining prior to 1800—
Methods at Beginning of the Century—Coal Mining Methods—
Hoisting and Ventilation—Introduction of Steam—European and
South American Mines—Mining in the United States—Opening of
Mines—Various Working Appliances—Invention of Davy’s Safety
Lamp—The Safety Fuse—Mine Elevators—Mining at the Middle of
the Century—Gold and Copper Mines of United States—Uses of Man
Engine—Hoisting Machines—Pumping Engines—Introduction of
Machine and Dynamite—Uses of Compressed Air—Mine Ventilation—
Improved Fans—Coal-cutting Machines—Placer and Hydraulic Mining
for Gold—The Timbering of Mines—Lake Superior Iron Mining—
Room Mining—Rise of Mining Schools and Societies—Mining Laws
in England and United States—Unwise Action of Congress—Mining
Claims and Rights—Miners’ Qualifications 571–586

ART PROGRESS OF THE CENTURY

I. PAINTING:—Effect of the French Revolution on Fine Art—Rapid
Advance of French Art—Artists and their Works—Revolution
of 1830—English Art and Artists—Landscape Art—Millet’s
“Angelus”—The Landseer Family—Ruskin’s Influence on English
Art—Edwin Abbey as a Colorist—Works of Rosa Bonheur—Later
English Masters—Continental Artists—American Masters—Rise of
American Art Schools—Their Influence on Art—Some Distinguished
Schools—Era of Excessive Coloring—American Landscapes—Women
Artists of America—Their Style and Influence—Scandinavian
Artists—Modern Art in Scotland—Masterpieces in European
Galleries—Masters of Current Art in America—Some of their
Great Works. II. SCULPTURE:—Old World Sculptors at Beginning of
Century—Centres of the Art—Advance in Different Countries—
Masterpieces—American Sculpture—Notable Artists and their Works
—Characteristics of Sculptors—Effect of the Columbian Exposition
—Names and Works of Modern Sculptors 587–614

THE CENTURY’S ADVANCE IN SURGERY

Surgery at the Dawn of the Century—Methods in Early Part of the
Century—Discovery of Anæsthesia—Its Great Advantages—
Antiseptic Surgery—Healing by First Intent—Setting of Fractures
—Modern Treatment of Bone Diseases—Of Amputations—Control
of Hemorrhages—Advance in Wound Treatment—Surgery of the
Alimentary Canal—Stomach Surgery—Kidney and Bladder Surgery—
Hernia or Rupture—Of Diseases of Female Organs—Modern Brain
Surgery—Its Wonderful Advance—Astounding Operations—The
Röntgen or X Rays—Their Value in Surgery—General Review of
Surgical Progress 615–630

PROGRESS OF MEDICINE

Early Medical Science—Progress to Beginning of Nineteenth Century
—Famous Ancient Physicians—Noted Schools of Medicine—Medical
Charlatans—Evolution of Medical Remedies—Important Changes in
Treatment—First American Schools of Medicine—Advance in Materia
Medica—Growth of Medical Associations—Medical Literature—
High Standard of Modern Medical Education—Students and Colleges
—Tendency to Special Practice—Great Importance of Modern
Medical Discoveries—Use of Anæsthetics in Medicine—Advance in
Physiology and Anatomy—Importance of Trained Nurses—Review of
Medical Progress 631–642

EVOLUTION OF THE RAILWAY

First Railways—Vast Development—Uses of Railways—Importance
to Farmers and Producers—Various Railway Systems—Government
Ownership and Operation—Mileage of Railways—The World’s Great
Railways—Methods of building and operating Railways in Different
Countries—Bridge Structures—Use of Steel Rails—Railway
Signals—The Block System—Single and Double Tracks—First
Steam Locomotives—Weight and Power of Modern Locomotives—The
Old-fashioned Passenger Car—Luxury of the Modern Palace Car—
Improvement in Freight Cars—The Modern Air-brake—Advance in
Train Equipment and Service—Rates of Speed—Railway Mail Service
—Passenger and Freight Rates—Railway as compared with Water
Transportation—Railway Labor—Relief Associations and Insurance
—Mountain Railways—Rapid Transit—Military Railways—
Portable and Ship Railways 643–664

ADVANCE IN LAW AND JUSTICE

Progress in International Law—Its Subdivisions—Law-making Bodies
—Powers and Duties of Legislators—Courts of Justice—Duties
of Judges—Of Jurors—Of Civil Procedure—Codification of
Laws—Criminal Jurisprudence—Punishments for Crimes—Capital
Punishment—Police Powers—Rights of Married Women under Law—
Laws regarding Parents and Children—Transfer of Real Estate—
Copyright Laws—Their Effect on Publication—Admiralty Laws—Of
Seamen and Shipping—Advance in Corporation Laws—Laws relating
to Religion—Of Religious Freedom—General Review of Legal
Progress 665–676

EVOLUTION OF BUILDING AND LOAN ASSOCIATIONS

I. GENERAL PRINCIPLES:—Objects and Uses of Building Associations—
Explanation of the System—The Various Plans of Operation—Loan
Series—Maturity and Payment of Shares—Cost of Shares and Loans
—Early History of These Associations—Their Character abroad—
History of American Associations—The First Founded—Eulogies
of Building Societies—Vast Membership and Capital—Management
in Respective States—Amounts returned to Members—Teachers of
Practical Thrift—Value of One’s Own Home—Comfort for Those
of Modest Means—Makers of Better Citizens—Duties of Officers
and Members—Responsibility of Members—Size and Cost of Houses
usually built—Typical Houses—The Social Features of Building
Societies 677–690

EPOCH-MAKERS OF THE CENTURY

Statesmen, Orators, and Jurists—Great Generals—Naval Heroes—
Noted Preachers and Teachers—Eminent Historians—Distinguished
Editors—Noted Scientists—Leading Philanthropists—Famous
Inventors—Popular Novelists—Greatest Poets—Best Actors and
Lyric Dramatists 691–720

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

PAGE

“Triumphs and Wonders of the XIX Century” _Frontispiece_

Puck 19

Old Franklin Electrical Machine 20

Leyden Jar 22

Franklin Institute, Philadelphia 23

Induction Coil 25

Magnetic Fields of Force 26

Daniell’s Cells 27

Morse Telegraph and Battery 27

Samuel Finley Breese Morse 28

Cyrus W. Field 28

Ocean Cable 29

Great Eastern laying an Ocean Cable 31

A String Telephone 32

Thomas Alva Edison. _Full page_ 32

A Graphophone 35

A Dynamo 37

The Golden Candlestick 39

An Ancient Lamp 39

A Tallow Dip 40

Modern Lamp 40

Electric Arc Light 43

Electric Locomotive. From _Electrical Age_ 45

Electric Railway—Third Rail System 47

Geissler’s Tubes 49

Sciagraph or Shadow Picture 50

An August Morning with Farragut 56

British Battleship Majestic 57

French Battleship Magenta 57

German Battleship Woerth 58

Italian Battleship Sardegna 59

Nelson’s Flagship Victory 60

Constitution (1812) under Sail. Permission of the artist.
_Full page_ 61

Side View of Constitution. _Full page_ 63

The U. S. Steamship Oregon. Copyright by W. H. Rau. _Full page_ 65

Action between Monitor and Merrimac 66

The Turbinia—Fastest Craft afloat. Permission of S. S. McClure
Co. 67

Engine of U. S. Steamship Powhatan, A. D. 1849. _Full page_ 68

Engine of U. S. Steamer Ericcson 69

Battle of Trafalgar. _Full page_ 71

The Growth of Ordnance. Four cuts. _Full page_ 73

The Distribution of Armor. Twelve cuts. _Full page_ 78–79

The Growth of Armor. Eight cuts. _Full page_ 81

The Movement of Uranus and Neptune 89

Professor James H. Coffin 91

The Lick Observatory, Mount Hamilton, Cal. _Full page_ 93

The Spectroscope 94

Yerkes Telescope, University of Chicago. _Full page_ 95

Professor William Harkness 97

Zenith Telescope, made for University of Pennsylvania 100

Three-inch Transit. By Warner & Swasey 103

Carolus Linnæus of Sweden 105

The Green Rose 106

Head of White Clover, with Branch from Centre 107

The Peanut-Pod Magnified 108

Outline of White Dogwood Flower 109

Yellow Toad-Flax in Peloria State 110

Grained Corn-Tassel 111

Banana Flowers 112

The Cruel Plant 113

Old Potato penetrated by Rootlet 113

Fungus growing from Head of Caterpillar 114

Mary Elizabeth Lease 117

Emma Willard 119

George Eliot 121

Frances Willard 123

Distaff and Spindle 126

Spinning Wheel 126

Primitive Hand Loom 127

Early Spinning Jenny 128

Ginning Cotton. Old way prior to 1800 129

Ginning Cotton. New way 129

The Modern Mule 130

Hand Comb of the Eighteenth Century 131

Noble Comb of 1890 132

Plain Power Loom, 1840 133

Weaving. The Old Way 135

Weaving. The New Way 135

Loom of 1890 136

Jacquard Machine 137

Smith and Skinner Loom for Moquette Carpets 139

Circular Loom 141

The First Knitting Machine, Lee 143

Knitting in the Old Way 145

Knitting in the New Way 146

Ancient Birmingham Meeting-house 148

Salisbury Cathedral, England. _Full page_ 148

P. E. Cathedral of St. John the Divine (?) 150

Father Damien, Missionary to Leper Colony 151

Young Men’s Christian Association, Philadelphia 153

Baptist Mission School, Japan 155

Methodist Episcopal Hospital 157

The New Library of Congress, Washington, D. C. _Full page_ 161

Ridgway Branch of Philadelphia Library. _Full page_ 163

Public Library of the City of Boston. By permission of librarian.
_Full page_ 164

John Russell Young 166

Carnegie Free Library, Pittsburgh. _Full page_ 169

Arc de l’Étoile, Paris 173

Natural History Museum, Kensington, London. _Full page_ 175

Glass Covered Arcade, Milan 177

United States Capitol, Washington, D. C. _Full page_ 179

The White House, Washington, D. C. _Full page_ 180

Library Building, University of Virginia 181

Trinity Church, New York. _Full page_ 183

St. George’s Hall, Philadelphia 185

Trinity Church, Boston 187

American Surety Company’s Building, New York 188

Sir Humphrey Davy 192

Michael Faraday 197

William Crookes, F. R. S. 200

Sir Henry Bessemer 202

Louis Jacques Daguerre 203

Louis Pasteur 205

Beethoven in His Study. _Full page_ 208

Giuseppe Verdi 208

Grand Opera House, Paris 209

Metropolitan Opera House, New York 210

William Richard Wagner 211

Edwin Forrest 211

Charlotte Saunders Cushman 212

Scenes from Shakespeare’s Romeo and Juliet. _Full page_ 213

George Bancroft 216

John G. Whittier 217

Alfred Tennyson 218

Henry W. Longfellow 219

Benjamin Franklin 223

Horace Greeley 224

John W. Forney 225

Joseph Medill 226

Record Building, Philadelphia. _Full page_ 227

The “Black Obelisk” of Shalmaneser II 232

The Moabite Stone. _Full page_ 232

Ruins of Philæ, Egypt. _Full page_ 235

So-called Sarcophagus of Alexander the Great 239

Cuneiform Letters from Lachish 241

Arch of Titus, Rome 242

Hittite Inscription from Jerabis. _Full page_ 243

A Typical Dairy Farm. _Full page_ 247

Modern Creamery and Cheese Factory 249

A Typical Dairy Cow—Ayrshire 251

Centrifugal Cream Separator in Operation. _Full page_ 253

Milk Tester (Open) 254

Butter-making on Farm—The Old Way. _Full page_ 255

Butter-making—The New Way 257

The Dairy Maid. _Full page_ 259

Czar Alexander II., of Russia 265

Sir Edward Bulwer 266

Captain Alfred Dreyfus 269

Mortality Chart 273

Map Showing “Registration States” 275

Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. _Full page_ 277

Sand Filter Bed 279

A Quarantine Station 281

Old Style Shrapnel 284

Congreve Rocket 285

Minié Ball 286

United States Rifle Musket, 1855 286

General Winfield Scott. _Full page_ 286

Armstrong Field Gun 287

Rodman Gun 288

Old Smooth-bore Mortar 289

Spencer Carbine 291

Metallic Cartridge of 1864–65 292

Prismatic Powder 298

Mortar on Revolving Hoist. _Full page_ 299

Modern Shrapnel 301

Krag-Jorgensen Rifle 302

Penetrating Power of Guns and Bullets. _Full page_ 303

Gatling Gun 304

Nordenfeldt Rapid Fire Gun 305

Soil Pulverizer. Furnished by author 309

Columbia Harvester and Binder. Furnished by author 311

Improved Thresher, with Blower and Self-feeder. Furnished by
author 312

Automatic Stacker with Folding Attachment. Furnished by author 313

Disc Harrow. H. P. Denocher & Co., Hamilton, Ont. 314

Acme Harrow. Furnished by author 315

Double Corn Cultivator. Long-Alstatten Co., Hamilton, Ont. 317

Modern Clover Huller. Gaar, Scoot & Co., Richmond, Ind. 319

Hereford Cow, “Lady Laurel.” Furnished by author 320

Group of Aberdeen-Angus Cattle. Courtesy of D. Bradford & Son,
Aberdeen, O. 321

Jersey Cow, “Ida,” of St. Lambert. Miller & Sibley, Franklin, Pa. 322

Poland-China Hog. Furnished by author 323

Merino Sheep. John Pow & Son, Salem, O. 325

Double Corn Planter. H. P. Denocher & Co., Hamilton, Ont. 326

Hand Garden Plow. H. P. Denocher & Co., Hamilton, Ont. 327

Success Anti-Clog Weeder. D. Y. Hallock & Co., York, Pa. 331

Aspinwall Potato Planter. Furnished by author 335

Brooklyn Suspension Bridge. _Full page_ 341

The Niagara Railway Arch. Courtesy of Grand Trunk R. R.
_Full page_ 343

The Firth of Forth Bridge, General View. Credit “Bridges,”
Chicago. _Full page_ 344

Pecos River Viaduct 345

Formal Opening of Suez Canal 347

Manchester Ship Canal 349

Complete Rock Cut Chicago Drainage Canal. Courtesy of Lidgerwood
Man. Co. _Full page_ 351

An “Atlas” Powder Blast under Cableway. Copyright by Charles
Stadler, Chicago. _Full page_ 353

American Portal of St. Clair Tunnel. Courtesy of Grand
Trunk R. R. 358

Interior of St. Clair Tunnel. Courtesy of Grand Trunk R. R. 359

Thoroughbred. _Full page_ 363

Watering the Cows 365

A Temperance Society. (Herring) 367

Art Critics. (Gebler) 368

French Coach-Horse “Gladiator” 369

Pacing Horse “Star Pointer.” Time 1m. 59 1-4s 371

Automobile or Horseless Carriage. Courtesy of Electric
Automobile Co. 373

Commodore Stephen Decatur 376

Commodore Perry at Battle of Lake Erie 377

Schoolship Saratoga. Courtesy of Philadelphia Bourse Book 379

Robert E. Lee at Battle of Chapultepec. _Full page_ 381

Castle William. Military Prison, New York Harbor 383

Generals Robert E. Lee and Stonewall Jackson 385

General Ulysses S. Grant. _Full page_ 387

Sherman’s March to the Sea. _Full page_ 389

Lee’s Surrender at Appomattox 391

Morro Castle, Santiago Harbor 392

Admiral George Dewey. _Full page_ 393

Main Deck of Cruiser Chicago 394

Dewey’s Guns at Manila. _Full page_ 395

General Joseph Wheeler 397

The Truce before Santiago 398

Aguinaldo, the Tagal Leader 399

Napoleon, 1814. (Meissonier.) _Full page_ 401

Admiral Horatio Nelson 403

Napoleon’s Retreat from Waterloo. _Full page_ 405

Capture of the Malakoff. _Full page_ 409

Battle of Magenta. _Full page_ 411

Louis Adolphe Theirs 415

Cavalry Charge at Gravelotte. _Full page_ 416

Battle of Yalu River. _Full page_ 417

Munich Exposition, 1854 423

New Orleans Exposition, 1884. _Full page_ 425

Eiffel Tower, Paris Exposition, 1888 427

Court of Honor, Chicago Exposition, 1893 429

Women’s Building, Chicago Exposition, 1893 431

Agricultural Building, Atlanta Exposition, 1895 433

Machinery Hall, Atlanta Exposition, 1895 434

Women’s Building, Nashville Exposition, 1897 435

Art Building, Nashville Exposition, 1897 437

Grand Court, Omaha Exposition, 1898. Photograph by H. C. Hersey 439

National Export Exposition, Philadelphia, Sept. 14 to Nov. 30,
1899. Electro supplied by Commercial Museum. _Full page_ 441

Old United States Mint, Philadelphia 447

New United States Mint, Philadelphia. Courtesy of Philadelphia
Bourse Book. _Full page_ 451

Carpenter’s Hall, Philadelphia, First Site of First United States
Bank. _Full page_ 453

Girard Bank, Philadelphia, Second Site of First United States
Bank 455

Second United States Bank, Philadelphia, now Custom House 457

Bank of England, London 463

German Bank, Bremen 464

The Bourse, Paris. _Full page_ 464

New York Clearing House 468

Cocoanut Tree, Palm Beach, Fla. Photograph by author.
_Full page_ 473

Packing Apples for Export, St. Catherines, Ont. _Full page_ 477

Lady de Coverly Grapes, Maryville, Cal. Photograph by author.
_Full page_ 483

Orange Orchard, Sanford, Fla. Photograph by author 487

Olive Orchard, San José, Cal. Photograph by author 488

Pineapple Field, Palm Beach, Fla. Photograph by author 489

A Clipper Ship. Permission of Whittaker & Co. 493

Robert Fulton 494

The Clermont, Fulton’s First Steamboat 495

S. Cunard, Founder of First Ocean Packet Line. Courtesy of
Cunard S. S. Co. 497

The Oceanic, 1899—Largest Ship Afloat. Courtesy of White Star
Line. _Full page_ 499

Steamer Campania, of Cunard Line. Courtesy of Cunard S. S. Co.
_Full page_ 509

Cramps’ Shipyard on the Delaware. _Full page_ 512

Pestalozzi, of Yverdun 517

Froebel, Founder of Kindergartens 519

Dr. Thomas Arnold, Rugby, England 520

An Old Log Schoolhouse 521

Schoolhouse at Sleepy Hollow 524

Interior of Sleepy Hollow Schoolhouse 525

Child’s Guide. _Full page_ 527

Dr. Charles W. Eliot, President of Harvard University 531

William T. Harris 533

Ideal Schoolhouse and Grounds 534

Suggestions for planting a Schoolground 535

New High School, Philadelphia. _Full page_ 537

Dr. William H. Maxwell, Superintendent “Greater New York”
Schools 538

Booker T. Washington, Principal Tuskegee Institute 539

Dr. E. Benj. Andrews, Superintendent of Schools, Chicago, Ill. 541

Early Hand Printing Press 543

The Columbian Press 545

Washington Hand Press 546

Old Wooden Frame Adams Press 547

Double Cylinder Press 549

First Perfecting Press 551

Four-roller Two-Revolution Press 553

Lithographic Press 555

Numbering Card Press 557

Linotype (Type-setting) Machine—Front View 559

Octuple Stereotype Perfecting Press and Folder. _Full page_ 560

Outline of Type-setting Machine 561

Sinking, Drifting, and Stoping in Mining 573

Air Compressor 574

The “Sergeant” Rock Drill 575

Steam-Driven Air Compressor 576

Driving a Railway Tunnel. _Full page_ 577

Straight Line Air Compressor 578

Duplex Air Compressor 579

Electric Coal-Mining Machine. _Full page_ 581

Gold Dredging on Swan River, Colorado. _Full page_ 583

Power Plant at Jerome Park 585

The Holy Women at the Tomb 589

Christmas Chimes. (Blashfield.) _Full page_ 591

Whispers of Love. (Bouguereau.) _Full page_ 592

Greek Girls playing at Ball. (Leighton) 593

Landseer and his Favorites. (By himself.) _Full page_ 595

The Horse Fair. (Rosa Bonheur.) _Full page_ 597

At the Shrine of Venus. (Alma Tadema) 601

Napoleon I. (Canova) 603

Statue of Benjamin Franklin. (Boyle) 605

The Washington Monument, Fairmount Park 607

Photographic View of New York City 611

Surgical Operating Room, Howard Hospital, Philadelphia 617

Clinical Amphitheatre, Pennsylvania Hospital. _Full page_ 621

Pennsylvania Hospital, Philadelphia. From its “History.”
_Full page_ 624

X-Ray Photograph of a Compound Fracture of Forearm 628

X-Ray Picture of a Dislocated Elbow. _Full page_ 629

Dr. Oliver Wendell Holmes 637

Dr. Nathan Smith Davis, of Chicago. Courtesy of Dr. Davis 639

Starling Medical College and St. Francis Hospital, Columbus,
Ohio. Courtesy of Spahr & Glenn. _Full page_ 640

J. Marion Sims, A. B., M. D., New York. Courtesy of Wm. Wood
& Co. 641

The Old Stage Coach 644

First Train of Steam Cars 645

A Railway Train in Belgium 647

Loop in the Selkirks, showing Four Tracks. _Full page_ 649

Entrance to St. Gothard Tunnel, Switzerland 651

Railway Signals 652

An American Express Locomotive 653

An American Freight Locomotive 655

Exterior of Latest Sleeping Car 656

Interior of Pullman Sleeping Car 657

Railway Suspension Bridge, Niagara Falls. From American Society
of Civil Engineers. _Full page_ 659

Hagerman Pass on Colorado Midland R. R. 661

View near Verrugas, on line of Oroya Railway, Peru 663

Independence Hall and Square—Winter Scene 666

Hon. Melville Fuller, Chief Justice U. S. Supreme Court 669

State, War, and Navy Building, Washington, D. C. 673

Portia and Bassanio. Trial Scene from “Merchant of Venice.”
_Full page_ 675

Paying their Dues. _Full page_ 679

First Building and Loan Association Advertisement 681

Row of $1400 Houses 686

Plan of $1400 Houses 687

Building Association Banquet. _Full page_ 689

Abraham Lincoln 691

Jefferson Davis 692

William E. Gladstone 693

Thomas Jefferson 695

Otto E. L. Von Bismarck 697

William McKinley 698

Grant’s Tomb, Riverside Drive, New York City 699

Duke of Wellington 700

Count Von Moltke 701

General Giuseppe Garibaldi 703

Charles H. Spurgeon 705

William Wilberforce 706

Thomas B. Macaulay 707

Florence Nightingale 712

Clara Barton 713

Sir Walter Scott 715

Charles Dickens 716

Lord Byron 717

Queen Victoria 723

[Illustration: PUCK.]

WONDERS OF ELECTRICITY

BY JAMES P. BOYD, A.M., L.B.

I. AT THE DAWN OF THE CENTURY.

When, in his “Midsummer Night’s Dream,” Shakespeare placed in the mouth
of Puck, prince of fairies, the playful speech,—

“I’ll put a girdle round about the earth
In forty minutes,”

he had no thought that the undertaking of a boastful and prankish
sprite could ever be outdone by human agency. Could the immortal bard
have lived to witness the time when the girdling of the earth by means
of the electric current became easier and swifter than elfin promise or
possibility, he must have speedily remodeled his splendid comedy and
denied to the world its delightful, fairy-like features.

An old and charming story runs, that Aladdin, son of a widow of Bagdad,
became owner of a magic lamp, by means of whose remarkable powers he
could bring to his instant aid the services of an all-helpful genie.
When Aladdin wished for aid of any kind, he had but to rub the lamp. At
once the genie appeared to gratify his desires. By means of the lamp
Aladdin could hear the faintest whisper thousands of miles away. He
could annihilate both time and space, and in a twinkling could transfer
himself to the tops of the highest mountains. How the charm of this
ancient story is lost in the presence of that marvelous realism which
marks the achievements of modern electrical science!

The earliest known observations on that subtle mystery which pervades
all nature, that silent energy whose phenomena and possibilities are
limitless, and before which even the wisest must stand in awe, are
attributed to Thales, a scholar of Miletus, in Greece, some 600 years
B. C. On rubbing a piece of amber against his clothing, he observed
that it gained the strange property of at first attracting and then
repelling light objects brought near to it. His observations led to
nothing practical, and no historic mention of electrical phenomena is
found till the time of Theophrastus (B. C. 341), who wrote that amber,
when rubbed, attracted “straws, small sticks, and even thin pieces of
copper and iron.” Both Aristotle and Pliny speak of the electric eel as
having power to benumb animals with which it comes in contact.

Thus far these simple phenomena only had been mentioned. There was no
study of electric force, no recognition of it as such, or as we know
it and turn it to practical account to-day. This seems quite strange
when we consider the culture and power to investigate of the Egyptians,
Phœnicians, Greeks, and Romans. True, a few fairy-like stories of how
certain persons emitted sparks from their bodies, or were cured of
diseases by shocks from electric eels, are found scattered through
their literatures, but they failed to follow the way to electrical
science pointed out to them by Thales. Even in the Middle Ages, when a
few scientists and writers saw fit to speak of electrical phenomena as
observed by the ancients, and even ventured to speculate upon them in
their crude way, there were no practical additions made to the science,
and the ground laid as fallow as it had done since the creation.

[Illustration: OLD FRANKLIN ELECTRICAL MACHINE.

(By permission of Franklin Institute.)]

After a lapse of more than two thousand years from the experiment of
Thales, Dr. Gilbert, physician to Queen Elizabeth (A. D. 1533–1603),
took up the study of amber and various other substances which, when
subjected to friction, acquired the property of first, attracting
and then repelling light bodies brought near them. He published his
observations in a little book called “De Magnete,” in the year A. D.
1600, and thus became the first author of a work upon electricity. In
this unique and initial work upon simple electrical effects, the author
added greatly to the number of substances that could be electrified by
friction, and succeeded in establishing the different degrees of force
with which they could be made to attract or repel light bodies brought
near them.

Fortunately for electrical science, and for that matter all sciences,
about this time the influence of Lord Bacon’s Inductive Philosophy
began to be felt by investigators and scientific men. Before that,
the causes of natural phenomena had not been backed up by repeated
experiments amounting to practical proofs, but had been accounted
for, if at all, by sheer guesses or whimsical reasons. Bacon’s method
introduced hard, cold, constant experiment as the only sure means of
finding out exactly the causes of natural phenomena; and not only this,
but the necessity of series upon series of experiments, each based
upon the results of the former, and so continuing, link by link, till,
from a comparison of the whole, some general principle or truth could
be drawn that applied to all. This _inductive_ method of scientific
research gave great impetus to the study of every branch of science,
and especially to the unfolding of infallible and practical laws
governing the phenomena of nature.

For very many years electrical experiments followed the lines laid
down by Dr. Gilbert; that is, the finding of substances that could be
excited or electrified by friction. By and by such substances came to
be called _electrics_, and it became a part of the crude electrical
science of the time to compute the force with which these electrics,
when excited, attracted or repelled other substances near them.
Among the ablest of these investigators were Robert Boyle, author of
“Experiments on the Origin of Electricity,” Sir Isaac Newton, Otto
von Guericke, and Francis Hawksbee, the last of whom communicated his
experiments to the English Royal Society in 1705. Otto von Guericke
used a hard roll of sulphur as an electric. He caused it to revolve
rapidly while he rubbed or excited it with his hand. Newton and
Hawksbee used a revolving glass globe in the same way, and thus became
the parents of the modern and better equipped electrical machine used
for school purposes.

The next step in electrical discovery, and one which marks an epoch in
the history of the science, was made by Stephen Gray, of England, in
1729. To him is due the credit of finding out that electricity from an
excited glass cylinder could be conducted away from it to objects at a
remote distance. Though he used only a packthread as a conductor, he
thus carried electricity to a distance of several hundred feet, and his
novel discovery opened up what, for the time, was a brilliant series
of experiments in England and throughout France and Germany. Out of
these experiments came the knowledge that some substances were natural
conductors of electricity, while others were non-conductors; and that
the non-conductors were the very substances—glass, resin, sulphur,
etc.—which were then in popular use as electrics. Here was laid the
foundation of those after-discoveries which led to the selection of
copper, iron, and other metals as the natural and therefore best
conductors of electricity, and glass, etc., as the best insulators or
non-conductors.

Up to this time an excited electric, such as a glass cylinder or
wheel, had furnished the only source whence electricity had been drawn
for purposes of experiment. But now another great step forward was
taken by the momentous discovery that electricity, as furnished by
the excited but quickly exhausted electric, could be bottled up, as
it were, and so accumulated and preserved in large quantities, to be
drawn upon when needed for experiment. It is not known who made this
important discovery; but by common consent the storage apparatus,
which was to play so conspicuous a part in after-investigations, was
named the _Leyden Jar_ or _Phial_, from the city of Leyden in Holland.
It consisted of a simple glass jar lined inside and out with tinfoil
to within an inch or two of the top, the tinfoil of the inside being
connected by a conductor passing up through the stopper of the jar
to a metallic knob on top. This jar could be charged or filled with
electricity from a common electric, and it had the power of retaining
the charge till the knob on top was touched by the knuckle, or some
unelectrified substance, when a spark ensued, and the jar was said to
be discharged. By conductors attached to the knob, guns were fired off
at a distance by means of the spark, and it is said that Dr. Benjamin
Franklin ignited a glass of brandy at the house of a friend by means
of a wire attached to a Leyden jar and stretched the full width of the
Schuylkill River at Philadelphia.

[Illustration: LEYDEN JAR.]

At this stage in the history of eighteenth century electricity there
enters a character whose experiments in electricity, and whose
writings upon the subject, not only brought him great renown at home
and abroad, but perhaps did more to systematize the science and turn
it to practical account than those of any contemporary. This was the
celebrated Dr. Benjamin Franklin, of Philadelphia, Pa. He showed to the
world that electricity was not created by friction upon an electric,
but that it was merely gathered there, when friction was applied, from
surrounding nature; and in proof of his theory he invaded the clouds
with a kite during a thunder-storm, and brought down electricity
therefrom by means of the kite-string as a conductor. The key he hung
on the string became charged with the electric fluid, and on being
touched by an unelectrified body, emitted sparks and produced all the
effects commonly witnessed in the discharge of the Leyden jar.

Franklin further established the difference between positive and
negative electricity, and showed that the spark phenomenon on the
discharge of the Leyden jar was due to the fact that the inside tinfoil
was positively electrified and the outside tinfoil negatively. When
the inside tinfoil was suddenly drawn upon by a conductor, the spark
was simply the result of an effort upon the part of the two kinds
of electricity to maintain an equilibrium. By similar reasoning he
accounted for the phenomenon of lightning in the clouds, and by easy
steps invented the lightning-rod, as a means of breaking the force
of the descending bolt, and carrying the dangerous fluid safely to
the ground. Here we have not only a practical result growing out
of electrical experiments, but we witness the dawn of an era when
electricity was to be turned to profitable commercial account. The
lightning-rod man has been abroad in the world ever since the days of
Franklin.

Thus far, then, electrical science, if science it could yet be called,
had gotten on at the dawn of the nineteenth century. No electricity
was really known but that produced by friction upon glass, or some
other convenient electric. Hence it was called _frictional_ electricity
by some, and _static_ electricity by others, because it was regarded
as electricity in a state of rest. Though a thing fitted for curious
experiment, and a constant invitation to scientific research, it had
no use whatever in the arts. An excited electric could furnish but a
trivial and temporary supply of electricity. It exhausted itself in the
exhibition of a single spark.

II. THE NEW NINETEENTH CENTURY ELECTRICITY.

By a happy accident in 1790, Galvani, of Bologna, Italy, while
experimenting upon a frog, discovered that he could produce alternate
motion between its nerves and muscles through the agency of a fluid
generated by certain dissimilar metals when brought close together.
Though this mysterious fluid came to be known as the galvanic fluid,
and though galvanism was made to perpetuate his name, it was not until
1800 that Volta, another Italian, showed to the scientific world that
really a new electricity had been found.

[Illustration: FRANKLIN INSTITUTE, PHILADELPHIA.

(From photo furnished by Institute.)]

Volta constructed what became known as the galvanic pile, but more
largely since as the voltaic pile, which he found would generate
electricity strongly and continuously. He used in its construction
the dissimilar metals silver and zinc, cut into disks, and piled
alternately one upon the other, but separated by pieces of cloth
moistened with salt water. This simple generator of electricity was the
forerunner of the more powerful batteries of the present day, and which
are still popularly known as voltaic cells or batteries.

But the importance of Volta’s discovery did not lay more in the
construction of his electrical generator than in the great scientific
fact that chemistry now became linked indissolubly with electricity
and electrical effects. The two novel and charming sciences, hitherto
separate, were henceforth to coöperate in those majestic revelations
and magnificent possibilities which so signally distinguish the
nineteenth century. By means of greatly improved voltaic cells or
batteries, that is, by jars containing acid in which were suspended
dissimilar metals, electricity could be produced readily and in
somewhat continuous current. By increasing the number of these cells
or jars or batteries, and connecting them with conductors, the current
could be made stronger and more effective. In contradistinction to the
old frictional or static electricity, the new became known as chemical
or current electricity.

As was to have been expected, Volta’s invention and discovery excited
the whole domain of electrical science to new investigation, and
brought in their train a host of wonderful results, growing more and
more practical each year, and pointing the way more and more clearly to
the commercial value of electricity as a familiar, inexhaustible, and
irresistible power. Thus, in 1801, Nicholson showed that an electric
current from a voltaic pile would, when passed through salt water,
decompose the water and resolve it into its two original gases, oxygen
and hydrogen. In 1807, Sir Humphrey Davy, carrying electricity further
into the domain of chemistry, showed, by means of the electric current,
that various metallic substances embraced in the earth’s crust, and
before his time supposed to be elementary, were really dissoluble and
easily resolved into their component parts, whether solids, or gases,
or both. Two years later, in 1809, he made the equally momentous
discovery of something which was to prove a veritable _sit lux_, “Let
there be light,” for the nineteenth century, and illuminate it beyond
all others. Though it had been known almost from the date of the
first voltaic pile that, when the ends of its two conducting wires
were brought close together, a spark was seen to leap in a curved or
arc line from one wire to the other, which phenomenon was known as
the voltaic arc, it remained for Davy to exhibit this arc in all the
beauty of a brilliant light by using two charcoal (carbon) sticks or
electrodes, instead of the wires, at the point of close approach. Here
was the first principle of the after-evolved arc light to be found
by the end of the century in every large city, and to prove such a
source of comfort and safety for their millions of inhabitants. This
principle was simply that a stream of electricity pouring along a
conducting wire will, when interrupted by a substance such as carbon
(charcoal), which is a slow conductor, throw off a bright light at the
point of interruption. The phenomenon has been very aptly likened to a
running stream of water in whose bed a stone has been placed. The stone
obstructs the flow of water. The water remonstrates by an angry ripple
and excited roar. In Davy’s experiment with the pieces of charcoal,
both became intensely hot while the electricity was making its
brilliant arc leap from one to the other, and would, of course, soon
be consumed. He, therefore, in showing the principle of a permanent
luminant, failed to demonstrate its practical possibilities. These last
were not to be attained till the nineteenth century was well along, and
only after very numerous and very baffling attempts.

Between 1810 and 1830, many important laws governing electrical
phenomena were discovered, which tended greatly to render the
science more exact, and to give it commercial direction. Oersted, of
Denmark, discovered a means of measuring the strength and direction
of an electric current. Ampère, of France, discovered the identity
of electricity and what had before been called galvanism. Ritchie,
of England, made the first machine by which a continuous motion was
produced by means of the attractions and repulsions between fixed
magnets and electro-magnets. This machine was an early suggestion of
the dynamo and motor of the coming years of the century. It meant that
electricity was a source of power, as well as of other phenomenal
things.

In speaking of the electro-magnet in connection with Ritchie’s machine,
it is proper to say that the electro-magnet was probably discovered
between 1825 and 1830, but precisely by whom is not known. It differs
from the natural magnet, or the permanent steel horseshoe magnet, and
consists simply of a round piece of soft iron, called a core, around
which are wrapped several coils of fine wire. When an electric current
is made to pass through this wrapping of wire, called the helix, the
iron core becomes magnetized, and has all the power of a permanent
magnet. But as soon as the electric current ceases, the magnetic
power of the core is lost. Hence it is called an electro-magnet, or a
temporary magnet, to distinguish it from a permanent magnet.

[Illustration: INDUCTION COIL.]

While the discovery of the electro-magnet was very important in the
respect that it afforded great magnetic power by the use of a limited
or economic galvanic force, or, in other words, by the use of smaller
and fewer Voltaic batteries, it was not until Faraday began his
splendid series of electrical discoveries, in 1831, that a new and
exhaustless wellspring of electricity was found to lay at the door
of science. Faraday’s prime discovery was that of the induction of
electric currents, or, in other words, of manufacturing electricity
directly from magnetism. He began his experiments with what became
known as an induction coil, which, though then crude in his hands, is
the same in principle to-day. It consists of an iron core wrapped
with two coils of insulated wire. One coil is of very lengthy, thin
wire, and is called the secondary coil. The other is of short, thick
wire, and is called the primary. When a magnetic current is passed
through the primary coil, with frequent makes and breaks, it induces
an alternating current of very high tension in the secondary coil,
thus powerfully increasing its effects. In Faraday’s further study of
electric induction, he showed that when a conductor carrying a current
was brought near to a second conductor it induced or set up a current
in this second. So magnets were found to have a similar effect upon one
another.

[Illustration: MAGNETIC FIELDS OF FORCE.]

The secret of these phenomena was found to lie in the fact that
a magnet, or a conductor carrying a current, was the centre of a
field of force of very considerable extent. Such a field of force
can be familiarly shown by placing a piece of glass or white paper
sprinkled with fine iron filings upon the poles of a magnet. The
filings will be drawn into concentric circles, whose extent measures
the magnet’s field of force. So also the extent of the field of force
surrounding a conductor carrying a current may be familiarly shown.
In these instances the filings brought within the fields of force are
magnetized. So would any other conducting substance be, and would
become capable of carrying away as an independent current that which
had been induced in it. Here we have the essential principle of the
modern dynamo-electric machine, commonly called simply dynamo. Faraday
actually constructed a dynamo, which answered very well for his
experiments, but failed in commercial results because the only source
of energy he could draw upon in his time was that supplied by the
rather costly voltaic cells.

During Faraday’s time and subsequently, electricians in Europe and the
United States were active in formulating further laws relative to the
nature, strength, and control of electrical currents, and each year was
one of preparation for the coming leap of electrical science into the
vast realm of commercial convenience and profit.

III. THE TELEGRAPH.

From the date of the discovery that electricity could be conducted
to a distance, dreams were indulged that it could be made a means of
communicating intelligence. In the eighteenth century, many attempts
were made to carry intelligent signals over electric wires. Some of
these were quite ingenious, but in the end failures, because the
old-fashioned frictional electricity was the only kind then known and
employed. Even after the discovery of the voltaic cell or battery,
which afforded an ample supply of chemical electricity to operate a
telegraphic apparatus, the time was not ripe for successful telegraphy,
for up till 1830 no battery had been produced that was sufficiently
constant in its operation to supply the kind of current required.
For feasible telegraphy, two important steps were yet necessary. One
was the discovery of the electro-magnet, 1825–30. The other was the
discovery of the Daniell’s battery or cell, in 1836, by means of which
a constant electric current could be sustained for a long time.

[Illustration: DANIELL’S CELLS.]

But even before these two indispensable requisites had been supplied
by human genius, much had been done to develop the mechanical methods
of conveying intelligence. In 1816, Ronalds, of England, constructed
a telegraph by means of which he operated a system of pith-ball
signals which could be understood. In 1820, Ampère suggested that the
deflection of the magnetic needle by an electric current might be
turned to account in imparting intelligence at a distance. In 1828,
Dyar, of New York, perfected a telegraph by means of which he made
tracings and spaces upon a piece of moving litmus paper, which tracings
and spaces could be intelligently interpreted through a prearranged
code. A little later, 1830, Baron Schilling constructed a telegraph
which imparted motion to a set of needles at either end.

[Illustration: MORSE TELEGRAPH AND BATTERY.]

From this time up to 1837, which last year was a memorable one in the
history of telegraphy, the genius of such distinguished men as Morse
in America, Wheatstone and Cooke in England, and Steinhill in Munich,
was brought to bear on the further evolution of the telegraph. While
all these names have been associated with the invention of the first
practical telegraph, it is impossible, with justice, to rob that of
Morse of the distinguished honor. Morse conceived his invention on
board the ship Surry, while on a voyage from Havre to New York, in
October, 1832. It consisted, as conceived, of a single circuit of
conductors fed by some generator of electricity. He devised a system
of signs, which was afterwards improved into the Morse alphabet,
consisting of dots or points, and spaces, to represent numerals. These
were impressed upon a strip of ribbon or paper by a lever which held
at one end a pen or pencil. The paper or ribbon was made to move along
under the pencil or pen at a regular rate by means of clockwork. In
accordance with these conceptions, Morse completed his instrument
and publicly exhibited it in 1835. He gave it further publicity, in
much improved form, in 1837. In this form it was entirely original in
the important respects that the ribbon or paper was made to move by
clockwork, while a pen or pencil gave the impressions, thus preserving
a permanent record of the message conveyed.

[Illustration: SAMUEL FINLEY BREESE MORSE.]

Though under systems less original and effective than that of Morse,
a first actual telegraph had been operated between Paddington and
Drayton, England, a distance of 13 miles, in 1839, and one at Calcutta,
India, for a distance of 21 miles, it was not until 1844 that the
world’s era of practical telegraphy actually set in under the Morse
system, which speedily superseded all others. In that year, amid the
jeers of congressmen and the adverse predictions of the press, Morse
erected the first American telegraph line in America, between Baltimore
and Washington, a distance of 40 miles, and, to the confusion of all
detractors, sent the first message over it on May 27 of that year. From
that date the fame of Morse was established at home, and soon became
world-wide. His system of telegraphy, with slight modifications, became
that of all civilized countries.

[Illustration: CYRUS W. FIELD.]

As was to be expected in a century so full of enterprise as the
nineteenth, a science so attractive, so useful to civilization, so
commercially valuable, so full of possibilities, as telegraphy, could
not remain at rest. Everywhere it stimulated to improvement and new
invention and discovery; and as the century progressed, it witnessed
in steady succession the wonders of what became known as duplex
telegraphy, that is, the sending of different messages over the same
wire at the same time. Again, the century witnessed the invention of
quadruplex telegraphy, that is, the sending of four separate messages
over the same wire, two in one direction and two in another. This was
followed by the invention of Gray’s _harmonic system_, by means of
which a number of messages greater than four are transmitted at the
same time over the same wire; and this again by Delaney’s _synchronous
multiplex system_, by means of which as many as 72 separate messages
have been sent over the same wire at the same time, either all in one
direction, or some in one direction and the rest in an opposite.

For a time successful telegraphy was limited to overland spaces, the
conductors or wires, consisting of iron or copper, being insulated
where they passed the supporting poles. In the cities, supporting
poles proved to be unsightly and dangerous, and they were succeeded
by underground conduits carrying insulated wires. In 1839, we read of
what may be reckoned the first successful experiment in telegraphing
under water by means of an insulated wire, or cable, as a conductor.
The experiment was tried at Calcutta, and under the river Hugli. In
1842, Morse experimented at New York with an under-water cable, and
showed that a successful submarine telegraphy was practical. In 1848,
a cable, insulated with gutta-percha, was laid under water between New
York and Jersey City, and successfully operated. In 1851, a submarine
cable was laid and successfully operated under the English Channel.
An enterprising American, Cyrus W. Field, of New York, now took up
the subject of submarine telegraphy, and suggested a cable under the
ocean between Ireland and Newfoundland. One was laid in 1857, but it
unfortunately parted at a distance of three hundred miles from land. A
second was laid under Mr. Field’s auspices in 1858, but the insulation
proved faulty, and after working imperfectly for a month, it gave out
entirely.

[Illustration: OCEAN CABLE.]

These disasters, though furnishing much valuable experience, checked
the enterprise of submarine telegraphy for a number of years. Not
until 1861, when a deep-sea cable was successfully laid and operated
between Malta and Alexandria, and in 1864, when one was laid across the
Persian Gulf, did enterprise gain sufficient courage to dare another
attempt to cable the Atlantic. In 1865, that attempt was made. Again
the cable broke, but this did not dissuade from another and successful
attempt in 1866. This signal triumph was the forerunner of others,
equally important to international commerce and the world’s diplomacy.
Countries far apart, and isolated by oceans, have, by means of deep-sea
cables, been brought into intimate relation, and made sharers of one
another’s intelligence, enterprise, and civilizing instincts. What
the overland telegraph has done toward bringing local states and
communities into contact, the submarine cable has done for the remote
nations.

In form, an ocean cable differs much from the simple wire which
constitutes the conductor of an overland or even underground telegraph.
It is made in many ways, but mostly with a central core of numerous
copper wires, which are more flexible than a single wire. These are
thickly covered with an insulating material, such as gutta-percha,
after first being heavily wrapped in tarred canvas or like material.
The central cores may be one, two, three, or even more in number. Where
a cable is likely to be subjected to the abrasion of ship-bottoms,
rocks, or anchors, it has an outer covering or guard composed of
closely united steel wires. In submarine telegraphy, the instruments
used in sending and receiving the message are very much more ingenious,
delicate, and costly than in overland telegraphy.

Whereas at the beginning of the nineteenth century electric telegraphy
was an unknown science, and even up to the middle of the century was
of limited use and doubtful commercial value, nevertheless the end of
the century witnesses in its growth and application one of its most
stupendous marvels. From the few miles of overland wires in 1844, the
total mileage of the century has expanded to approximately 5,000,000,
and the submarine to 170,000. A single company (the Western Union) in
the United States operates 800,000 miles of wire, conveying 60,000,000
messages per year, while throughout the world more than 200,000,000
messages per year serve the purposes of enlightened intercourse. The
capital employed reaches many hundreds of millions of dollars.

The close of the nineteenth century opened possibilities in telegraphy
that may be classed as startling in comparison with its previous
attainments. It would seem that the intervention of the familiar
conducting wire is not absolutely necessary to the transmission of
intelligence. The old and well-established principle of induced
currents has lately been turned to account in what is termed
“telegraphy without wires.” As an instance, a telegraph wire, when
placed close alongside of a railroad track, will take up and convey to
and from the stations the induced pulsations of a magneto-telephone
placed within a passing car, and connected to the metallic roof of the
car. This system has been put to practical use on at least one railway,
and pronounced feasible.

But a greater marvel than this springs from the discovery of Hertz,
about 1890, that every electrical discharge is the centre of
oscillations radiating indefinitely through space. The phenomenon
is likened to the dropping of a stone in a placid lake. Concentric
undulations of the water are set up,—little waves,—which gradually
enlarge in diameter, and affect in greater or less degree the entire
surface. Could an apparatus be invented to detect and direct the
oscillations made in space by an electric generator,—to perceive, as
it were, the ether undulations, just as the eye notes those on the
lake’s surface?

In 1891, Professor Branley found that the electric vibrations in ether
could be detected by means of fine metallic filings. No matter how good
a conductor of electricity the metal in mass might be, when reduced
to fine filings or powder it offered powerful resistance to a passing
current; in other words, became a very poor conductor. An electric
discharge or spark near the filings greatly decreased their resistance.
If the filings were jarred, their original resistance was restored.
Branley placed his filings in a tube, into either end of which wires
were passed. These were connected with a galvanometer. Ordinarily, the
resistance of the filings was such as to prevent a current passing
through them, and the galvanometer remained unaffected. But when an
electric spark was emitted near the tube, the resistance was so much
decreased that the current passed readily through the filings, and was
detected by the galvanometer. This is simply equivalent to saying that
the discharge of the electric spark made the filings to cohere and
become a better conductor than when lying loosely in the tube. Here,
then, was opportunity for an instrument which had but to regulate the
number of sparks and indicate the presence of the electric waves in
order to produce dots and dashes similar to those used in the common
telegraph. Such an instrument was brought nearest to perfection by
Signor Marconi, a young Italian, in 1896. With it he succeeded in
sending electric waves through ether or space, and without the use of
wires, a distance of four miles, upon Salisbury Plain, England. Later,
he transmitted messages by means of space (wireless) telegraphy across
Bristol Channel, a distance of 8.7 miles, and subsequently across the
English Channel, a distance of 18 miles. Mr. W. J. Clarke, of America,
has improved upon Marconi’s methods of space telegraphy, and shown some
remarkable results. Whether space telegraphy will eventually supersede
that by wires is one of the problems that time only can solve. But
such are the possibilities of electrical science that we may well be
prepared for more wonderful revelations than any yet made.

[Illustration: THE GREAT EASTERN LAYING AN OCEAN CABLE.]

IV. HELLO! HELLO!

Telegraph (Gr. _tele_, far, and _graphein_, to write) implies the
production of writing at a distance by means of an electric current
upon a conductor. Telephone (Gr. _tele_, far, and _phone_, sound)
implies the production of sound at a distance by the same means, though
the word telephone was in early use to describe the transmission of
sound by means of a rod or tightly stretched string connecting two
diaphragms of wood, membrane, or other substance. This last plan of
transmitting sound came to be known as the string telephone, and it
retained this name until the invention of the electric telephone.

Like the electric telegraph, the electric telephone was an evolution.
The string telephone, in the hands of Wheatstone, showed, as early as
1819, that the vibrations of the air produced by a musical instrument
were very minute, and could be transmitted hundreds of yards by means
of a string armed with delicate diaphragms. But while the string
telephone served to confirm the fact that sounds are vibrations of
the atmosphere which affect the tympanum of the ear, it remained but
a toy or experimental device till after electric telegraphy became
an accepted science, that is, in the year 1837 and subsequently. One
of the earliest steps toward the evolution of the electric telephone
was taken by Mr. Page, of Salem, Mass., in 1837, who discovered
that a magnetic bar could emit sounds when rapidly magnetized and
demagnetized; and that those sounds corresponded with the number of
currents which produced them. This led to the discovery, between
1847 and 1852, of several kinds of electric vibrators adapted to the
production of musical sounds and their transmission to a distance.
All this was wonderful and momentous, but a little while had still
to elapse before one arose bold enough to admit the possibility of
transmitting human speech by electricity. He came in 1854, in the
person of Charles Bourseul, of Paris, who, though as if writing
out a fanciful dream, said, “We know that sounds are produced by
vibrations, and are adapted to the ear by the same vibrations which
are reproduced by the intervening medium. But the intensity of the
vibrations diminishes very rapidly with the distance, so that it is,
even with the aid of speaking-tubes and trumpets, impossible to exceed
somewhat narrow limits. Suppose that a man speaks near a movable disk,
sufficiently flexible to lose none of the vibrations of the voice, that
this disk alternately makes and breaks the current from a battery,
you may have at a distance another disk, which will at the same time
execute the same vibrations.”

[Illustration: A STRING TELEPHONE.]

Bourseul further showed that the sounds of the voice thus reproduced
would have the same pitch, but admitted that, in the then present
state of acoustic science, it could not be affirmed that the syllables
uttered by the human voice could be so reproduced, since nothing was
known of them, except that some were uttered by the teeth, others by
the lips, and so on. The status of the telephone then, according to
Bourseul, was that voice could be reproduced at a distance at the pitch
of the speaker, but that something more was needed to transmit the
delicate and varied intonations of human speech when it was broken into
syllables and utterances. To transmit simply voice was one thing; to
transmit the _timbre_ or quality of speech was another.

[Illustration: THOMAS ALVA EDISON.]

Bourseul made plain the problem that was still before the investigator.
And now comes one of the most remarkable episodes in the history of
electricity,—a chapter of mingled shame and glory. In the village of
Eberly’s Mills, Cumberland County, Pa., lived a genius by the name of
Daniel Drawbaugh, who had made a study of telephony up to the very
point Bourseul had left it. He had transmitted musical sound, sound of
the voice, and other sounds in the same pitch. He had said that this
was all that could be done till some means was discovered of holding
up the constant onward flow of the electric current along a conducting
wire by introducing into such flow a variable resistance such as would
impart to simple pitch of voice the quality or _timbre_ of human
speech. Drawbaugh achieved this in his simple workshop as early as
1859–60, according to evidence furnished to the United States Supreme
Court at the celebrated trial of the cases which robbed him of the
right to his prior invention. He did it by introducing into the circuit
a small quantity of powdered charcoal confined in a tumbler, through
which the current was passing. The charcoal, being a poor conductor and
in small grains, offered just that kind of variable resistance to the
current necessary to reproduce the tones and syllables of speech. He
transmitted speech between his shop and house, and proved the success
he had met with before audiences in New York and Philadelphia. But he
neglected to care for the commercial side of his discovery, though many
of his patents antedated those which contributed to deprive him of
deserved honor and profit.

In 1861, Reis, of Germany, came into notice as the inventor of a
telephone which transmitted sound very clearly, but failed to reproduce
syllabified speech. However, the principle and shape of his transmitter
and receiver were accepted by those who followed him. Two men now
came upon the scene who had reached the conclusion already arrived at
by Drawbaugh, and who became rivals over his head for the honor and
profit of an invention by means of which the quality of the voice in
speaking could be transmitted. These two were Elisha Gray, of Chicago,
and Alexander Graham Bell, of Boston. Their respective devices seem
to have been akin, and to have been presented to the patent office
almost simultaneously; so nearly so, at least, as to make them a part
of that long, costly, and acrimonious legal contention over priority of
invention which did not end till 1887.

Both Bell and Gray reached the conclusion that the transmission of
articulate speech was impossible unless they could produce electrical
undulations corresponding exactly with the vibrations of the air
or sound waves. They brought this similarity about by introducing
a variable resistance into the electric current by means of an
interposing liquid, just as Drawbaugh had done years before with
his tumbler of powdered charcoal. Bell exhibited his instrument
with comparative success at the Centennial Exhibition in 1876 in
Philadelphia; but much had yet to be done to perfect a telephone of
real commercial value.

The years 1877–78 were years of great activity among electricians,
whose prime object was to perfect a telephone transmitter and receiver,
by means of whose mutual operations at opposite ends of a circuit all
the modulations of speech could be preserved and passed. To this end
Berliner introduced into a transmitter or sender the then well-known
principle of the microphone (Gr. _mikros_, small, _phone_, sound),
which magnified the faint sounds by the variation in electrical
resistance, caused by variation of pressure at loose contact between
two metal points or electrodes. Edison quickly followed with a
similar transmitter or sender, in which one of the electrodes was of
soft carbon, the other of metal. Then came (1878) Hughes and Blake
with senders, in which both of the electrodes were of hard carbon.
Subsequently came other and rapid modifications of the sender, both in
the United States and Europe, till the form of telephone now in popular
use was arrived at, and which, strange to say, is, in its method of
securing the necessary variable resistance in the circuit, quite like
that employed by Mr. Drawbaugh; to wit, the introduction of fine carbon
granules into a small metal cup just behind the vibrating diaphragm
or disk of the sender. The circuit goes into the diaphragm in front,
passing through the carbon granules and out through the back of the
instrument. The action of talking into the sender causes the granules
to be agitated, thus opening and closing the circuit and producing
the conditions necessary to the transmission of articulate speech.
The diaphragm or disk is the very thin covering of the cup containing
the granules. It is sometimes made of carbon, but generally of hard
metal, as steel. On being struck by the sound waves of the voice, it
vibrates to correspond. The same vibrations are reproduced in the
receiver at the opposite end of the circuit, and thus one listens to
the phenomenon of transmitted human speech. The current for telephonic
purposes is furnished by one or more batteries or cells, whose effect
is heightened by the presence of an induction coil. The tendency now
is to make “bipolars”—two contacts at the diaphragm—in place of a
single contact. This style is becoming more in vogue in order to meet
the demands of long-distance work. To each telephone is attached a
generator or device for ringing a little bell as a signal that some one
wishes to communicate. To such perfection have telephones been brought
that it is quite possible to converse intelligibly at the distance
of a thousand miles, with a less satisfactory service at twice or
thrice that distance. The possibilities of clear speech-transmission
at indefinite distance are without measure. Like the telegraph, the
telephone has opened an immense and profitable industry, involving
hundreds of millions of dollars. At the end of the century it is,
unfortunately, monopolistic; but the time is near when a reasonable
charge for service will enable every business house to communicate with
its customers, and when even the remote corners of counties will be
brought into touch with their capitals and with one another. Along the
lines of civilizing contact the telephone fairly divides the wonders
of the century with the telegraph, while for intimate intellectual
communication it is a triumph of genius without parallel. It is the
dispenser of speech in city, town, and village; in factory and mine,
in army and navy; throughout government departments; and in Budapest,
Hungary, it is a purveyor of general news, like the newspaper, for the
“Telephone Gazette” of that city has a list of regular subscribers,
to whom it transmits, at private houses, clubs, cafes, restaurants,
and public buildings, its editorials, telegrams, local news, and
advertisements.

A very natural outgrowth of the telephone was that curious invention
known as the phonograph (Gr. _phone_, sound, and _graphein_, to write).
It is not only an instrument for writing or preserving sound, but for
reproducing it. As a simple recorder of sound, it was an instrument
dating as far back as 1807, when Dr. Young showed how a tuning-fork
might be made to trace a record of its own vibrations. But Young’s
thought had to go through more than half a century of slow evolution
before the modern phonograph was reached; for in the phonautograph
of Scott, the logographs of Barlow and Blake, and the various other
attempts up to 1877 to make and preserve tracings of speech, there were
no successful means of reproducing speech from those tracings hit upon.

[Illustration: A GRAPHOPHONE.]

In that year (1877), Edison, in striving to make a self-recording
telephone by connecting with its diaphragm or disk a stylus or metal
point which would record its vibrations upon a strip of tinfoil,
accidentally reversed the motion of the tinfoil so that the tracings
upon it affected the stylus or tracing-point in an opposite direction.
To his surprise, he found that this reverse motion of the tinfoil,
tickling, as it were, the stylus oppositely, reproduced the sounds
which had at first agitated the diaphragm. It was but a step now to
the production of his matured phonograph in 1878. He made a cylinder
with a grooved surface, over which he spread tinfoil. A stylus or fine
metal point was made to rest upon the tinfoil, so as to produce a
tracing in it, following the grooves in the cylinder when the latter
was made to revolve. This stylus was connected with the diaphragm of an
ordinary telephone transmitter. When one spoke into the transmitter,
that is, set the diaphragm to vibrating, the stylus impressed the
vibratory motions of the diaphragm, or, in other words, the waves
of the exciting sound, in light indentations upon the tinfoil. In
order to reproduce the sounds thus registered in the tinfoil of the
cylinder, it was made to revolve in an opposite direction under the
point of the stylus, and as the stylus was now affected by precisely
the same indentations it had first made in the tinfoil, it carried
the identical vibrations it had recorded back to the diaphragm of the
telephone, and thus reproduced in audible form the speech that had
at first set the diaphragm to vibrating. The speech thus reproduced
was that of the original speaker in pitch and quality. Ingenious and
wonderful as Edison’s machine was, it was susceptible of improvement,
and soon Bell and others came forward with a phonograph in which the
recording cylinder was covered with a hardened wax. This was called
the graphophone. Again, Berliner improved upon the phonograph by using
for his tracing surface a horizontal disk of zinc covered with wax.
By chemical treatment, the tracings made in the wax were etched into
the zinc, and thus made permanent. Edison made further and ingenious
improvements upon his phonograph by attaching hearing tubes for the
ear to the sound receiver, and by the employment of an electric motor
to revolve the wax cylinder. By the attachment of enlarged trumpets
and other devices, every form of modern phonograph has been rendered
capable of reproducing in great perfection the various sounds of
speech, song, and instrument, and has become a most interesting source
of entertainment.

V. DYNAMO AND MOTOR.

Dynamo is from the Greek _dunamis_, meaning power. Motor is from the
Latin _motus_, or _moveo_, to move. Dynamo is the every-day term
applied to the dynamo-electric machine. Motor is the every-day term
applied to the electric motor. The dynamo and motor are quite alike
in principle of construction, yet direct opposites in object and
effect. Perhaps it might be well to designate both as dynamo-electric
machines, and to say that, when such machine is used for the conversion
of mechanical energy or power of any kind into electrical energy or
power, it is a dynamo. When a reverse result is sought, that is, when
electrical energy or power is to be converted into mechanical energy or
power, the machine that is used is a motor. In practical use for most
purposes they are brought into coöperation, the dynamo being at one
end of an electric system, making and sending forth electricity, the
motor being at the other end, taking up such electricity and running
machinery with it. Both machines were epoch-making in the midst of a
wondrous century, and both were results of those marvelous evolutions
in electrical science which characterized the earlier years of the
century.

We have seen how the simple glass cylinder or sulphur roll became, when
rubbed, a generator of electricity. In a later chapter of electrical
history, we saw a new and more powerful generator of electricity in
the voltaic cell, by means of opposing metals acted upon chemically
by acids. The greatest, grandest, most powerful, and most economic
of all generators of electricity was yet to come in the shape of the
dynamo. We see its beginnings in those investigations of Faraday which
led to the discovery of the induction coil and the principles of
magneto-electric induction. In 1831, he invented a simple yet, for that
date, wonderful machine, which was none the less the first dynamo in
principle, because he modestly called it “A New Electrical Machine.” He
mounted a thin disk of copper, about twelve inches in diameter, upon a
central axis, so that it would revolve between the opposite poles of a
permanent magnet. As the disk revolved, its lower half cut the field
of force of the magnet, and a current was induced which was carried
away by means of two collecting brushes, fastened respectively to the
axis and circumference of the disk. This was the first electric current
ever produced by a permanent magnet. The Faraday machine and others
that derived the mechanical energy which was converted into electric
current from a permanent magnet were classed as magneto-generators.
Soon the electro-magnet took the place of the permanent magnet,
because it produced a much stronger field of force. But then the
electro-magnet had to have a current to excite it. This current was
supplied by a magneto-generator, placed somewhere on the dynamo. Now
came the thought, suggested by Brett in 1848, that the induced currents
of the dynamo could themselves be turned to account for increasing
the strength of the electro-magnets used in inducing them. This was a
most progressive step in the history of the dynamo. It led to rapid
inventions, whose principle was based on the fact that every dynamo
carried within the cores of its magnets enough of unused or residual
magnetism to render the magnets self-exciting the moment the machine
started. So the outside means of magnetizing the fields of force of the
dynamo passed away.

The dynamo speedily grew in size and importance. The electro-magnets
or fields of force were greatly increased in number, size, and power.
There were great improvements in the construction and efficiency
of the wire coils or armatures which cut the fields of force, and
a corresponding increase in their number. Commutators and brushes
underwent like improvement. So, at last, the well-nigh perfect and
all-powerful dynamo of the end of the century was evolved, with a
capacity for delivering, in the form of electricity, ninety per cent
of the mechanical energy which set it in motion. In the application of
steam to machinery, eighty per cent, and sometimes more, of the energy
supplied by a ton of coal is lost.

[Illustration: A DYNAMO.]

With the perfection of the dynamo, its uses multiplied. It became a
prime factor in electric lighting. Trolley systems sprang up in city,
town, and village, taking the place of horse and traction cars. In
certain places, as in the Baltimore tunnel, the dynamo superseded the
engine for hauling freight and passenger cars. The mighty dynamos which
convert the inexhaustible energy of Niagara Falls into electricity
send it many miles away to Buffalo, to be applied to lighting and to
every form of machinery. The end of the century sees a power plant in
operation in New York city capable of furnishing one hundred thousand
horse-power, or enough to supply the lighting, rapid transit, and
thousand and one mechanical needs of the entire municipality. The
essential parts of an ordinary dynamo are: (1.) The electro-magnets,
which, however numerous, are arranged in circular form upon part of
the framework of the machine. (2.) The iron coils or armatures, mounted
in a circle upon a wheel. When the wheel revolves, the armatures pass
close in front of the electro-magnets, cutting through their fields
of force, and thereby inducing electric current. (3.) The commutator,
which consists usually of a series of copper blocks arranged around the
axle of the armatures, and insulated from the axle and from each other.
The current passes from the armatures to the commutator. If the current
be an alternating one, the commutator changes it into a continuous one,
and the reverse may also be accomplished. (4.) The brushes, which are
thin strips of copper or carbon, are brought to bear at proper points
upon the commutator, making connection with each coil or sets of coils.
They carry the corrected current to the outside line or lines. (5.) The
outside line or lines, to carry the current away to the motor. (6.) The
pulley for strap-belting, by means of which the water or steam power
used is made to turn the dynamo machine.

But we must not forget the motor as a companion of the dynamo, as its
indispensable brother, in turning to practical account the electricity
sent to it. As we have seen, the motor is the reverse of the dynamo, at
least in its effects. It is fed by the dynamo, and it imparts its power
to the machinery which it is to set in motion. It is to the dynamo
what the water-wheel is to the water. In one sense it is an even older
invention than the dynamo, but its extended commercial application was
not possible until the dynamo had reached certain stages of perfection.
It is generally agreed that the first motor of importance was that
constructed by Professor Jacobi, through the liberality of the Czar
Nicholas, of Russia. Jacobi used two sets of electro-magnets, by
means of whose mutual attraction and repulsion he rotated a wheel on
a boat with a power equal to that of eight oarsmen. But as Jacobi’s
electro-magnets required an electric current to magnetize them, and as
there were then no means of producing such current except by the costly
use of the voltaic battery, his invention was unripe as to time.

In 1850, Professor Page, of the Smithsonian Institution, constructed
a motor which worked ingeniously, but was still open to the
objection of cost in supplying the necessary electric current for
the electro-magnets. Though various inventions came about having
for their object a commercially successful motor, such a thing was
impossible till Gramme produced his improved and effective dynamo
in 1871. This dynamo was found to work equally well as a motor, and
hence it became necessary for electricians to greatly enlarge their
understanding of the nature of electro-magnetic induction. They soon
discovered many curious things respecting the behavior of induced
currents, with the result that rapid and simultaneous improvements
were made in both dynamos and motors. One of the most curious of these
discoveries was that a motor automatically regulates the amount of
current that passes through its circuit in proportion to the work it
is called upon to do; that is, if the work the machine has to do is
decreased, the motor attains a higher speed, which higher speed induces
a counter electro-motive force sufficient to check up the amount of
current passing through the motor. So when the motor is required to do
increased work, the machine slows up; but with this slowing up, the
counter electro-motive force decreases, and consequently the current
passing through the motor increases.

As with the dynamo, one of the marvels of the motor is its efficiency.
In perfect machines, ninety to ninety-five per cent of the electrical
energy supplied can be converted into mechanical energy. For this
reason it has become a competitor with, and even successor of, steam
in countless cases, and especially where water-power can be commanded.
A prime motor, in the shape of a water-wheel, may be made to drive
scores of secondary motors in places hundreds of miles away. The power
developed by the waterfall at Lauffen, Germany, is transmitted one
hundred miles to Frankfort, with a loss of only twenty-five per cent of
the original horse-power.

[Illustration: THE GOLDEN CANDLESTICK.]

In its adaptation for practical use, the motor, like the dynamo,
assumes all sizes and embraces a host of ingenious devices, yet its
power and usefulness always centre around, or are contained in, its two
efficient parts, its armatures and fields of force. We have seen how
in the dynamo the armatures became the source of induced currents by
being made to cut the fields of force of electro-magnets. Now, a dynamo
can be made to work in an opposite way; that is, by making the magnetic
fields of force rotate in front of the coils or armatures. In the
motor, the field of force is mostly established by the current directly
from the dynamo. This current passes also through the armature, which
begins to rotate, owing to the force of the field upon it. This
rotation of the armature through the field of force produces in the
armature conductors an electro-motive force, which is the measure of
the power of the motor, be the same great or small.

VI. “AND THERE WAS LIGHT.”

[Illustration: ANCIENT LAMP.]

Mention of the “candlestick of pure gold” (Ex. xxv. 31) may lead to the
inference that the primitive artificial light was that of the candle.
But “candlestick” in connection with the lighting of the temple is
clearly a misnomer. The lamp was the original artificial light-giver,
unless we choose to except the torch; and if less indispensable than
in patriarchal times, it is still a favorite dispenser of nightly
cheer. Prior to the middle of the eighteenth century, the lamp had
practically no evolution. It was the same in principle at that date as
when it illuminated the desert tabernacle. Even the splendid enameled
glass or decorated Persian pottery lamps of Damascus and Cairo, and the
magnificent brass or bronze lamps of Greece, Rome, and the European
cathedrals, gave forth their dull, unsteady flame and noisome smoke
by means of a crude wick lying in a saucer or similar receptacle of
melted lard, tallow, oil, or some such combustible liquid. A prime
improvement was made in lamp-lighting in 1783, by Leger, of Paris, who
devised the flat, metallic burner, through which he passed a neatly
prepared wick. A further improvement was made in 1784 by Argand, of
Paris, who introduced a burner consisting of two circular tubes,
between which passed a circular wick. The inner tube was perforated
so as to admit of a draught of air to feed the flame on the inside of
the wick. In order to similarly feed the flame on the outside of the
wick, he invented the lamp chimney, which was at first a crude thing of
metal. It, however, soon gave way to the glass chimney, which has up
to the present taken on many improved forms, designed to secure more
perfect combustion and a brighter, steadier glow.

[Illustration: TALLOW DIP.]

[Illustration: MODERN LAMP.]

Improvement in lamp-lighting during the nineteenth century has
consisted of an indefinite number of inventions, all aiming at economy,
brilliancy, steadiness, convenience, beauty, and so on. But in no
respect has this improvement been more rapid and radical than in the
adaptation of lamps to the various combustible fluids that have bid
for favor. While the various oils, animal and vegetable, were almost
solely in vogue as illuminants at the beginning of the century, they
were largely superseded at a later period by the burning-fluid known
as camphene. This was a purified oil of turpentine, which found
great favor on account of its economy, convenience, cleanliness, and
brilliancy of light. But it was very volatile, and its vapors formed
with air a dangerously explosive mixture. Yet with all this it might
have held its own for a long time, had not Gesner, in 1846, discovered
that a superior mineral oil, which he called “kerosene,” could be
readily and profitably distilled from the coal found on Prince Edward
Island. This kerosene or hydrocarbon oil speedily displaced camphene
as an illuminant. Its manufacture rapidly developed into an important
industry in the United States, and large distilling establishments
arose, both on the Atlantic coast, where foreign coal was used, and
throughout the country, wherever cannel or other convertible coal
was found. With the discovery of petroleum in paying quantities on
Oil Creek, Pa., in 1859, there came about a great change in kerosene
lamp-lighting. It was found, upon analysis, that crude petroleum
contained about fifty-five per cent of kerosene, which constituted its
most important product. The manufactories of kerosene from cannel or
other coal, therefore, went out of existence, and new ones, larger in
size and greater in number, sprung up for the manufacture of kerosene
or, popularly speaking, coal oil, from petroleum. This illuminant
came into almost universal favor for lamp use, owing to its cheapness
and brilliancy. It is not free from danger when improperly distilled,
but under the operation of stringent laws governing its preparation
and testing, danger from its use has been reduced to a minimum. In
rural districts, in smaller towns and villages, wherever economy
and convenience are essentials, and when beauty in lamp effects is
desirable, the kerosene illuminant has become indispensable.

The discovery of petroleum helped further to light the world and
distinguish the century. It gave us gasolene, naphtha, gas oil,
astral oil, and the very effective “mineral sperm,” which is almost
universally used in lighthouses and as headlights for locomotives. With
the addition of kerosene, a favorite light of the beginning of the
century—the tallow dip of our grandmothers—began to fall into disuse.
The homelike pictures of housewives at their annual candle-dippings,
or in the manipulation of their moulds, became venerable antiques.
Candle-light paled in the presence of the higher illuminants. Though
still a convenient light under certain circumstances, it plays a
gradually diminishing part amid its superiors.

One of the signal triumphs of the century has been the introduction of
gas-lighting. Though illuminating gas made from coal was known as early
as 1691, it did not come into use, except for experiments or in a very
special way, until the beginning of the nineteenth century. In 1809, a
few street lamps were lit with gas in London. An unsuccessful attempt
was made to introduce gas into Baltimore in 1821. Between 1822 and
1827, the gas-light began to have a feeble foothold in Boston and New
York. Other cities began to introduce it as an illuminant in streets
and, eventually, in houses. But the process was very slow, owing to
intense opposition on the part of both savants and common people, who
saw in it a sure means of destruction by poison, explosion, or fire. It
was not much before the middle of the century that prejudice against
illuminating gas was sufficiently allayed to admit of its general
use. But meanwhile many valuable experiments as to its production and
adaptation were going on. The most productive source of illuminating
gas was found to be bituminous coal. Though gas could be produced by
distillation from other substances, such as shale, lignite, petroleum,
water, turf, resins, oils, and fats, none could compete in quality,
quantity, and economy with what is known as ordinary coal gas, at
least, not until the time came, quite late in the century, when it was
found that non-luminous gases, such as water gas, could be rendered
luminous by impregnating them with hydrocarbon vapor. This became known
commercially as water gas, and it is now largely used in place of coal
gas, because it is cheaper and, for the most part, equally effective as
a luminant.

Gas-lighting has, of course, its limitations. It is not adapted for use
beyond the range of cities or towns whose populations are sufficient
to warrant the large expenditures necessary for gas plants. It is a
special rather than general light. Yet within its limited domain of use
it has proved of wonderful utility,—a source of cheer for millions, a
clean, safe, and economic light, a convenience far beyond the candle,
the lamp, or any previous lighting appliance. In the street, it is a
source of safety against thieves and way-layers. In the slums, it is
both policeman and missionary, baffling the wrong-doer, exposing the
secrecy that conduces to crime, laying bare the hotbeds of shame. It
is as well a source of heat as light, and consequently convertible into
power for light mechanical purposes. In the kitchen, it is more and
more becoming a boon to the housewife, who by means of the gas range
escapes, in cooking, much of the dust, smoke, worry, and even expense
of the coal cook stove and range. In the parlor, library, or sick-room,
it is a cheerful and effective substitute for the coal grate, and
may be made to assume the cosy qualities and fantastic shapes of the
old-fashioned wood fire. Coincident with the discovery of petroleum,
its inseparable companion, natural gas, came into prominence as a
source of both light and heat, or this became true, at least, after it
was ascertained that natural gas regions existed which could be tapped
by wells, and made to give forth their gaseous product independent of
the oil that may have at one time existed near or in connection with
it. This natural source of light and heat became as interesting to the
geologist, explorer, and capitalist as the source of petroleum itself,
and soon every likely section was prospected, with the hope of finding
and tapping those mysterious caverns of earth in which the pent-up
luminant abounded in paying quantities. It was found that workable
natural gas regions were numerous in the United States, especially in
proximity to petroleum or bituminous coal deposits, and little time
was lost in their development. As if by magic, a new and profitable
industry sprang into existence. The natural gas well became almost
as common as the oil well, and at times far more awe-inspiring as
it shot into space its volcanic blasts which, when ignited through
carelessness, as sometimes happened, carried to the vicinage all the
dangers and terrors of Vesuvius or Stromboli. Powerful as was the
force with which natural gas sought its freedom, wonderful as was
the phenomenon of its escape from the subterranean alembic in which
it was distilled, human genius quickly harnessed it by appliances
for conservation and carriage to places where it could be utilized.
Sometimes great industries sprang up contiguous to the wells; at
others, it was carried through pipes to cities many miles distant,
where it became a light for street, home, and store, and a prodigious
energy in factory, furnace, forge, and rolling-mill. In fact, no marvel
of the century has been at once so weird and inscrutable in its origin
as natural gas, or more potential as an agency within the areas to
which its use is limited. The question is ever uppermost in connection
with natural gas, will it last? The gas springs of the Caucasus
Mountains have been burning for centuries. But that is where nature’s
internal forces have their correlations and compensations. Where it is
quite otherwise, that is, where the vents of natural gas reservoirs
are abnormally numerous, or where those reservoirs are drained to the
extreme for commercial purposes, not to say through sheer wastefulness,
the geologist is ready to surmise that the natural gas supply cannot be
a perpetual one.

But one of the most magnificent triumphs of the century in the matter
of light came about through the agency of electricity. We have already
seen the beginnings of electric lighting in the discovery of Sir
Humphrey Davy, in 1809, that when the ends of two conducting wires,
mounted with charcoal pieces, were brought close together, a brilliant
light, in the shape of an arc or curve, leaped from one piece of
charcoal to the other. Davy’s charcoal pieces or carbons were consumed
by the fierce heat evolved; but the principle was established that an
electric current, so interrupted, was a vivid light-producer, and
might be made permanently so if a substance capable of resisting the
heat could be substituted for his charcoal tips, and a generator of
electricity of sufficient power and economy in use could be substituted
for his voltaic batteries or cells.

Upon these two essentials hung the future of the electric light. The
first essential, that of a substance at the ends of the wires or in the
midst of the electric circuit which would resist the heat, was soon met
by the use of specially prepared and hard graphite carbon tips, in the
shape of candles. But the second essential, a generator of electricity
cheaper and more powerful than the voltaic cell, was not met with till
the dynamo machine reached an advanced stage of perfection; that is,
about 1867.

[Illustration: ELECTRIC ARC LIGHT.]

The two grand essentials now being at command, invention of electric
light appliances went on rapidly upon two lines, eventuating in two
systems, which became known as arc lighting and incandescent lighting.
By 1879–80, the arc light was sufficiently advanced to meet with
favor as an illuminant for streets, railway stations, markets, and
any large spaces, in which places it became a substitute for gas and
other lights. The essential features of the arc light are: (1.) The
dynamo machine, situated in some central place, for the generation of
electricity. (2.) Conducting wires to carry the electricity throughout
the areas or to the places to be lighted. (3.) The arc lamp, which
may be suspended upon poles in the streets, or upon wires in stores
and other covered places. Its mechanism consists of two pencils or
candles of graphite carbon, very hard and incombustible, adjusted
above and below each other so that their tips or ends are very close
together, but not in contact. By means of a clockwork or simple gravity
device these carbon tips are brought into contact at the moment the
electric current is turned on, and then are slightly separated as
soon as the current has heated them. The air between the heated tips,
having also reached a high temperature, becomes a conductor, and the
electricity leaps in the form of an arc or curve through it, rendering
it brilliantly incandescent. Should the current be diminished in
strength for any reason, the above-mentioned clockwork or gravity
device brings the carbons a little closer together; and should the
current be increased, the carbons are separated a little wider; thus
the steadiness of the light is regulated. There are also various
automatic devices for thus regulating the proximity of the carbons
and maintaining the evenness of the glow. The power of an arc light
is measured by candles. An ordinary arc light under two amperes of
current gives a light equal to twenty-five candles, while under fifty
amperes of current it gives a light equal to twenty thousand candles.
In searchlights on board vessels, and where very large areas are to
be lighted, both heavier currents and larger carbons are used than
in the arc lamps for ordinary street purposes. No light surpasses
the arc light in brilliancy, excepting the magnesium light. There are
few cities in this country and Europe that do not employ the arc lamp
as a means of street, station, and large-area lighting, owing to its
superiority as an illuminant and the wonderful policing effect it has
upon the slum sections.

The incandescent lamp, or electric lighting by incandescence, underwent
a somewhat longer evolution at the hands of inventors than the arc
lamp, owing to the difficulty of finding a substance suitable for the
production of the necessary glow. The discovery of such substance may
be accredited to Edison more fully than to any other. The incandescent
or glow lamp is a glass bulb from which the air is exhausted. There
passes into the bulb a filament of carbon, which, after a turn or two
inside the bulb, passes out at the end through which it entered. When
a current from a voltaic battery is sent through this carbon filament,
it brings it, in the absence of oxygen within the bulb, to a high white
heat without combustion. The portion of this high white heat which is
radiated is the light-giving energy of the incandescent lamp. Metal
filaments were at first tried in the bulb, but they quickly burned
out. Carbon filaments were at length found to be the only ones capable
of resisting the heat. They moreover had the advantage of cheapness,
and of greater radiating energy than metals. Many substances, such as
silk, cotton, hair, etc., were used in the preparation of the carbon
filaments, but it was found that strips cut from the inside bark of the
bamboo gave, when brought to a white heat by an electric current and
then properly treated, the most tenacious and best conducting carbon
filament.

The quality of light produced by an incandescent lamp is a gentler glow
than that produced by the arc lamp, and in color more nearly resembles
the light of gas or the oil lamp. The incandescent light speedily
became for the home, hotel, hall, and limited covered area what the arc
light became for the street and railway station, and, if anything, the
former outstripped the latter in the extent and value of the industry
it gave rise to.

In the arc lamp, the carbon pencils have to be renewed daily. In the
incandescent lamp, the carbon filament, though very delicate, may last
for quite a time, because incandescence takes place in the absence
of oxygen. If the favor in which the electric light is held, and the
great extent of its use, rested solely on the question of cheapness of
production, such question would give rise to interesting debate. And,
indeed, the debate would continue, if the question were the superior
fitness of electric lighting for lighthouses and like service, where
extreme brilliancy does not seem to penetrate a thick atmosphere as
effectively as the more subdued glow of the oil lamp. But the debate
ceases when the question is as to the beauty and efficiency of the
electric light in the home, street, station, mine, on shipboard, and
the thousand and one other places in which it has come to be deemed
an essential equipment. In all such places the question of economy of
production and use is subordinate to the higher question of utility and
indispensability.

VII. ELECTRIC LOCOMOTION.

The dawn of the nineteenth century saw, as vehicles of locomotion,
the saddled hackney, the clumsy wagon, the ostentatious stage-coach,
the primitive dearborn, the lumbering carriage, the poetic “one-hoss
shay.” The universal energy was the horse. A new energy came with the
application of steam, and with it new vehicular locomotion,—easier,
swifter, stronger, for the most part cheaper, rendering possible what
was hitherto impossible as to time and distance.

This signal triumph of the century may not have been eclipsed by
the introduction of subsequent locomotive changes, but it was to be
supplemented by what, at the beginning, would have passed for the
idle dream of a visionary. The horse-car came, had its brief day, and
went out with all its inconveniences, cruelties, and horrors before,
in part, the traction-car, and, in part, the rapidly revolutionizing
energy of electricity.

[Illustration: ELECTRIC LOCOMOTIVE.]

The first conception of a railway to be operated by electricity dates
from about 1835, when Thomas Davenport, of Brandon, Vt., contrived
and moved a small car by means of a current from voltaic cells placed
within it. In 1851, Professor Page, of the Smithsonian Institution,
ran a car propelled by electricity upon the steam railway between
Washington and Baltimore, but though he obtained a high rate of speed,
the cost of supplying the current by means of batteries—the only means
then known—prohibited the commercial use of his method.

With the invention of the dynamo as an economic and powerful generator
of electricity, and also the invention of the motor as a means of
turning electrical energy to mechanical account, the way was open,
both in the United States and Europe, for more active investigation
of the question of electric-car propulsion. Between 1872 and 1887,
different inventors, at home and abroad, placed in operation several
experimental electric railways. Few of them proved practical, though
each furnished a fund of valuable experience. An underground electric
street railway was operated in Denver as early as 1885; but the one
upon the trolley plan, which proved sufficiently successful to warrant
its being called the first operated in the United States, was built
in Richmond, Va., in 1888. It gave such impetus to electric railway
construction that, in five years’ time, enormous capital was embarked,
and the new means of propulsion was generally accepted as convenient,
safe, and profitable.

The essential features of the electric railway are: (1.) The track of
two rails, similar to the steam railway, (2.) The cars, lightly yet
strongly built. (3.) The power-house, containing the dynamos which
generate the electricity. (4.) The feed-wire, usually of stout copper,
running the length of the tracks of the system, and supported on
poles or laid in conduits. (5.) The trolley-wire over the centre of
the track, supported by insulated cross-wires passing from poles on
opposite sides of the tracks, and connected at proper intervals with
the feed-wire. (6.) The trolley-pole of metal jointed to the top of
the car, and fitted with a spring which presses the wheel on the end
of the pole up against the trolley-wire with a force of about fifteen
pounds, and which also serves to conduct the electricity down through
the car to the motor. (7.) The motor, which is suspended from the car
truck, and passes its power to the car axle by means of a spur gearing.
The power requisite for an ordinary trolley-car is about fifteen
horse-power. The speed of trolley-cars is regulated in cities to from
five to seven miles per hour, but they may be run, under favorable
conditions, at a speed equal to, or in excess of, that of the steam-car.

As a means of city transit, and of rapid, convenient, and economic
intercourse between suburban localities and rural towns and villages,
the electric traction system ranks as one of the greatest wonders of
the century. The speed with which it found favor, the enormous capital
it provoked to activity, the stimulus it gave to further study and
invention, the surprising number of passengers carried, go to make
one of the most interesting chapters in electric annals. The end of
the century sees thousands of these electric roads in existence; a
comparatively new industry involving over $100,000,000; a passenger
traffic running into the billions of people; a prospect that the
trolley will succeed the steam-car for all utilizable purposes within
the gradually extending influence of cities and towns upon their rural
surroundings.

In speaking of the passing of the horse-car and its substitution by
the trolley, a distinguished writer has well said: “Humanity in an
electric-car differs widely from that in the horse-car, propelled
at the expense of animal life. It is more cheerful, more confident,
more awake to the energy at command, more imbued with the subtlety
and majesty of the propelling force. The motor confirms the ethical
fact that each introduction of a higher material force into the daily
uses of humanity lifts it to a broader, brighter plane, gives its
capabilities freer and more wholesome play, and opens fresh vistas for
all possibilities. We applaud Franklin for seizing the lightning in
the heavens, dragging it down to earth, and subjugating it to man. Let
this pass as part of the poetry of physics. But when ethics comes to
poetize, let it be said that electricity as an applied force lifts man
up toward heaven, quickens all his appreciations of divine energy,
draws him irresistibly toward the centre and source of nature’s forces.
There is no dragging down and subjugation of a physical force. There
is only a going out, or up, of genius to meet and to grasp it. Its
universal application means the raising of mankind to its plane. If
electricity be the principle of life, as some suppose, what wonder that
we all feel better in an electric-car than any other? The motor becomes
a sublime motive. God himself is tugging at the wheels, and we are
riding with the Infinite.”

[Illustration: ELECTRIC RAILWAY. THIRD RAIL SYSTEM.]

Enthusiasts say the trolley is only the beginning of electric
locomotion, and that there is already in rapid evolution an electric
system which will supersede steam even for trunk-line purposes. In
vision, it presumes a speed of one hundred and twenty-five miles an
hour instead of forty; greater safety, cleanliness, and comfort; and
what is most momentous and startling, an economy in construction and
operation which will warrant the sacrifice of the billions of dollars
now invested in steam-railway properties. The proposition is not to
sacrifice the steam-railway track, but to add to it a third rail, which
is to carry the electric current. Then, by means of feed-conduits
alongside of the track, and specially constructed electric locomotives
and cars, the system is supposed to reach the practical perfection
claimed for it. Experiments with such an electrical system, made upon
branch lines of some of our trunk-line railways, as the Pennsylvania,
New York Central, and New Haven & Hartford, give much encouragement to
the hypothesis that it may become the next great step in the evolution
of electrical science.

Another means of electric propulsion was provided by the investigations
of Planté, which resulted in his invention of the “accumulator” or
“storage battery,” in 1859. His battery consists of plates of lead
immersed in dilute sulphuric acid. By the passage of an electric
current through the acid, it is electrolytically decomposed. By
continuing the current for a time, first in one direction and then in
another, the lead plates become changed, the one at the point where
the current leaves the cell taking on a deposit of spongy lead, and
the one at the point where the current enters the cell taking on a
coating of oxide of lead. When in this condition, the battery is said
to be stored, and is capable of sending out an electric current in any
circuit with which it may be connected. After exhausting itself, it can
be re-stored or re-charged in the same way as at first. Faure greatly
improved on Planté’s storage battery in 1880, by spreading the oxide
of lead over the plates, thus greatly reducing the time in forming the
plates. Subsequently, further improvements were made, till batteries
came into existence capable of supplying a current of many hundred
amperes for several hours. One of the first practical uses to which the
storage battery was put was in the propulsion of street-cars; but its
weight proved a drawback. It was found better adapted for the running
of boats on rivers, and, in the business of water-freightage for short
distances, has in many instances become a rival of steam. It found one
of its most interesting applications in helping to solve the problem
of the _automobile_, or “horseless carriage,” either for pleasure
purposes or for street traffic. In this problem it has, at the end of
the century, an active rival in compressed air; but as the “horseless
carriage” is rapidly coming into demand, means may soon be found to
utilize the strong and persistent energy of the storage battery,
without the drawback found in its great weight.

VIII. THE X RAY.

An astounding electrical revelation came during the last years of the
century through the discovery of the X, or unknown, or Roentgen ray. A
hint of this discovery was given by Faraday during his investigation
of the effect of electric discharges within rarefied gases. He also
invented the terms _anode_ and _cathode_, both of which are in
universal use in connection with instruments for producing the X rays;
the anode being the positive pole or electrode of a galvanic battery,
or, in general, the terminal of the conductor by which a current enters
an electrolytic cell; and the cathode being the negative pole or
electrode by which a current leaves said cell.

Geissler followed Faraday with an improved system of tubes for
containing rarefied gases for experimentation. He partially exhausted
his tubes of air, introduced into them permanent and sealed platinum
electrodes, and produced those wonderful effects by the discharge
obtained by connecting the electrodes with the terminals of an electric
machine or induction coil, which from their novelty and beauty became
known as Geissler effects, just as his tubes became known as Geissler
tubes. In the attenuated atmosphere of the Geissler tube, the current
does not pass directly from one platinum point or electrode to the
other, but, instead, illuminates the entire atmospheric space. When
other gases are introduced in rarefied form, they are similarly
illuminated, but in colors corresponding to their composition. In his
further experiments, Geissler noted that the gases in the tube behaved
differently at the anode, or positive terminal, and the cathode, or
negative terminal. A beautiful bluish light appeared at the cathode,
while the anode assumed the same color as the illuminated space in the
tube. It was also noted that after the electric discharge within the
tube, there remained upon the inner surface of the glass a fluorescent
or phosphorescent glow, which was attributed to the effect of the
cathode.

[Illustration: GEISSLER’S TUBES.]

This brought the study of the _cathode_ rays into prominence, and
through the investigations of Professor William Crookes, in 1879 and
afterwards, a conclusion was reached that a “Fourth State of Matter”
really existed. He perfected tubes of very high vacuum, by means of
which he showed that molecules of gas projected from the cathode moved
freely and with great velocity among one another, and so bombarded the
inner walls of the tube as to render it fluorescent.

Subsequently, Hertz showed that the cathodic rays would penetrate thin
sheets of metal placed within the tube or bulb; and soon after, Paul
Lenard (1894) demonstrated that the cathodic ray could be investigated
as well outside of the tube or bulb as within it. He set an aluminum
plate in the glass wall of the bulb opposite the cathode. Though
ordinary light could not penetrate the aluminum plate, it was readily
pierced by the cathodic rays, to a distance of three inches beyond its
outside surface. With these rays, thus freed from their inclosure, he
produced the same fluorescent effects as had been noted within the
bulb, and even secured some photographic effects. These cathodic rays
produced no effect on the eye, which proved their dissimilarity to
light. Lenard showed further that the cathodic rays outside of the tube
could be deflected from their straight course by a magnet, that they
might pass through substances opaque to light, and that in so passing
they might cast a shadow of objects less opaque, which shadow could be
photographed. Now Professor Roentgen came upon the scene. He had been
conducting his experiments in Germany, along the same lines as Lenard,
and had reached practically the same results as to the penetrative,
fluorescent, and photographic effects of the cathodic rays. But he
had gone still further, and, in 1896, fairly set the scientific world
aflame with the announcement that all the effects produced by Lenard
in the limited space of a few inches could also be produced at long
distances from the tube, and with sufficient intensity to depict solid
substances within or behind other substances sufficiently solid to
be impermeable by light. Professor Roentgen claims that his X ray is
different from the cathodic ray of Lenard and others, because it cannot
be deflected by a magnet. This claim has given rise to much controversy
respecting the real nature of the X ray, a controversy not likely to
end soon, yet one full of inspiration to further investigation.

[Illustration: SCIAGRAPH OR SHADOW PICTURE.

By X Ray process.]

The essential features of the best approved apparatus designed to
produce the X ray and to secure a photograph of an invisible object,
are: (1.) A battery or light dynamo as a generator of the electric
current, accompanied, of course, by the necessary induction coil,
which should be so wound as to give a spark of at least two inches in
length in the tube where a picture of a simple object, as a coin in
a purse, is desired; a spark of four inches in length where pictures
of the bones of the hands, feet, or arms are desired; and a spark of
from eight to ten inches in length where inside views of the chest,
thighs, or abdomen are desired. (2.) The second essential is the glass
tube. The one in common use is the Crookes tube, usually pear-shaped,
and resting upon a stand. Into it is inserted two aluminum electrodes
or disks, the one through the smaller end of the tube being used as
the cathode, and the one from below and near the large end being used
as the anode. (3.) A fluoroscope with which to observe the conditions
inside the tube necessary to the production of the X ray, to decide
upon its proper intensity, and to establish the proper degree of
fluorescence. The favorite fluoroscope for this purpose is the one
invented by Edison. It is in the form of a stereopticon, in which
is a dark chamber after the manner of a camera. In front are two
openings, admitting of a view within of both eyes. At the opposite,
and greatly enlarged, end is a screen which is rendered fluorescent
by means of a new substance (tungstate of calcium) discovered by Mr.
Edison after some eighteen hundred experiments. Such is the power of
this fluoroscope that it may be used as an independent instrument in
cases of minor surgery to locate bullets or other objects buried in the
flesh, even before a photograph has been taken. (4.) The photographic
plate, which is prepared with a sensitized film and mounted in a
frame as in ordinary photography. Upon this film the object to be
photographed is laid, say, for instance, the human hand, care being
taken to have the film or plate at a proper distance from the Crookes
tube. Current is now turned into the tube, the X ray is developed, the
film is exposed to its effects, and the result is a negative showing
the interior structure of the hand,—the bones or any foreign object
therein. This negative is developed as in ordinary photography.

The discovery and application of the X ray has proved of immense value
in medicine and surgery. By its means the physician is enabled to
carry on far-reaching diagnoses, and to ascertain with certainty the
whole internal structure of the human body. Fractures, dislocations,
deformities, and diseases of the bones may be located and their
character and treatment decided upon. In dentistry, the teeth may
be photographed by means of the X ray, even before they come to the
surface, and broken fangs and hidden fillings may be located. Foreign
objects in the body, as bullets, needles, calculi in the bladder,
etc., may be localized, and the surgery necessary for their safe
removal greatly simplified. The beating of the heart, movement of the
ribs in respiration, and outline of the liver may be exhibited to the
eye. It has been boldly suggested that in the X ray will be found an
agent capable of destroying the various bacilli which infest the human
system, and become germs of such destructive diseases as cholera,
yellow fever, typhoid fever, diphtheria, and consumption. Even if this
be speculative as yet, there is still room for marvel at the actual
results of the discovery of the X ray, and its future study opens a
field full of the grandest possibilities.

IX. OTHER ELECTRICAL WONDERS.

The novel idea of keeping time by means of electricity originated
quite early in the century, and culminated in two kinds of electric
clocks, one moved directly by the electric current, the other moved
by weights or springs, but regulated by electricity. The former have
the advantage of running a very long time without attention, but as
it is impossible to keep up an unvarying electric current, they are
not so accurate as the latter in keeping time. Though the latter are
popularly called electric clocks, they are really only clocks regulated
by electricity, and in such regulation the electric current comes to
be a most important agent, as is proved at all centres of astronomical
and other observations, as at Greenwich and Washington. At such centres
the astronomical time-keeper is set up so as to run as infallibly as
possible. This central time-keeper, say at Washington, is electrically
connected with other clocks, at observatories, signal-service stations,
railway stations, clock-stores, city halls, etc., throughout the
country. Should any of these clocks lose or gain the minutest fraction
of time as compared with that of the central time-keeper, the electric
current corrects such loss or gain, and so keeps all the clocks at a
time uniform with one another and with the central one. Electrical
devices are also often attached to individual clocks, as those upon
city hall towers and in exposed places, for the purpose of meeting
and correcting inequalities of time occasioned by weather exposure,
expansion and contraction by heat and cold, etc.

The fatherhood of the very useful and elegant arts of electrotyping
and electroplating is in dispute. Daniell, while perfecting his
battery, noticed that a current of electricity would cause a deposit
of copper. In 1831, Jacobi, of St. Petersburg, called attention to the
fact that the copper deposited on his plates of copper by galvanic
action could be removed in a perfect sheet, which presented in relief,
and most accurately, every accidental indentation on the original
plates. Following this up, he employed for his battery an engraved
copper plate, caused the deposit to be formed upon it, removed the
deposit, and found that the engraving was impressed on it in relief,
and with sufficient firmness and sharpness to enable him to print from
it. Jacobi called his discovery galvanoplasty in the publication of
his observations in 1839. It was but a step from this discovery to
the application of the electrotyping process to the art of printing.
A mould of wax, plaster, or other suitable substance is made of an
engraving or of a page of type. This mould is covered with powdered
graphite (black lead) so as to make it a conductor of electricity.
It is then inserted in a bath containing a solution of sulphate of
copper. An electric current is passed through the bath, and the copper
is deposited on the mould in sufficient quantity to give it a hard
surface capable of offering greater resistance in printing than the
types themselves, and also of producing a clearer impression. In
electroplating, practically the same principle is employed. The bath is
made to contain a solution of water, cyanide of potassium, and whatever
metal—gold, silver, platinum, etc.—it is designed to precipitate on
the article to be electroplated. The current is then passed through the
bath, and the article—spoon, knife, fork, etc.—to be electroplated
receives its coating of gold, silver, German silver, platinum, or
whatever has been made the third agent in the bath.

The various modern submarine devices for the destruction of ships,
known as torpedoes, submarine mines, etc., depend upon electricity for
their efficiency. It is the lighting or firing agent, and is carried to
the torpedo or mine by means of stout wires or cables from some safe
shore-point of observation.

In railroading, electricity has become an indispensable agent for
the operation of signal systems, opening and closing of switches,
and limitation of safety sections. It moves the drill in the mine,
sets off the blast, and supplies the light. It enables the dentist
to manipulate his most delicate tools and do his cleanest and least
painful work. In medicine it is a healing, soothing agent, boundless
in variety of application and wondrous in results. It is a stimulus
to the growth of certain plants, and has given rise to a new science
called Electro-horticulture. It may be made a prolific source of heat
for warming cars, and even for the welding of iron and steel. The
electric fan cools our parlors and offices in summer, and the electric
bell simplifies household service. In fact, it would appear that, in
contrasting the electrical beginnings with the electrical endings of
the nineteenth century, the space of a thousand rather than a hundred
years had intervened, and that in measuring the agents which conduce to
human comfort and convenience, electricity is easily the most potential.

X. ELECTRICAL LANGUAGE.

Out of the various discoveries and applications of electricity almost
a new language has sprung. This is especially so of terms expressive
of the measurements of electric energy, and of the laws governing the
application of electric power. For a time, various nations measured and
applied by means of terms chosen by themselves. This led to a jargon
very confusing to writers and investigators. It became needful to have
a language more in common, as in pharmacy, so that all nations could
understand one another, could compute alike, and especially impart
their meaning to those whose duty it became to apply discovered laws
and actual calculations to practical electric operations. This was a
difficult undertaking, owing to the tenacity with which nations clung
to their own nomenclatures and terminologies. But the drift, though
slow, finally ended at the Electrical Congress in Paris in 1881, in the
adoption of a uniform system of measurements of electric force, and an
agreement upon terms for laws and their application, which all could
understand.

Three fundamental units of measurement were first agreed upon,—the
_Centimetre_ (.394 in.) as a unit of length; the _Gramme_ (15.43
troy grains) as a unit of mass; the _Second_ (1/60 of a minute) as a
unit of time. These three units became, when referred to together
by their initial letters, the basis of the C. G. S. system of units.
Now by these units of measurement something must be measured, as, for
instance, the electric force; and when so measured, an absolute unit of
force must be the result.

DYNE:—This is but a contraction of _dynam_, force. It was adopted
as the name of the “Absolute Unit of Force,” or the C. G. S. unit of
force, and is that force which, if it act for a second on one gramme of
matter, gives to it a velocity of one centimetre per second.

AMPERE:—Electrical force produces electrical current. Current must
be measured and an absolute unit of current strength agreed upon. The
“Absolute Unit of Current” was settled as one of such strength as that
when one centimetre length of its circuit is bent into an arc of one
centimetre radius, the current in it exerts a force of one dyne on a
unit magnet-pole placed at the centre. But the absolute unit of current
as thus obtained was decided to be ten times too great for practical
purposes. So a practical unit of current was fixed upon, which is just
one tenth part of the above absolute unit of current. This practical
unit of current was called the ampere, in honor of the celebrated
French electrician, Ampère. It may be ascertained in other ways,
as when a current is of sufficient strength to deposit in a copper
electrolytic cell 1.174 grammes (18.116 grains) of copper in an hour,
such current is said to be of one ampere strength; or a current of one
ampere strength is such a one as would be given by an electro-motive
force of one volt through a wire offering one ohm of resistance.

VOLT:—This was named from Volta, the celebrated Italian electrician,
and was agreed upon as the unit of electro-motive force. It is that
electro-motive force which would be generated by a conductor cutting
across 100,000,000 C. G. S. lines in a field of force per second; or it
is that electro-motive force which would carry one ampere of current
against one ohm of resistance.

OHM:—So called from Ohm, a German electrician. It is the unit of
resistance offered by a conductor to the passage of an electrical
current. As an absolute unit of resistance, it is equal to
1,000,000,000 C. G. S. units of resistance. As a practical unit, and
as agreed upon at the International Congress of Electricians (Chicago,
1893), it represents the resistance offered to an electric current at
the temperature of melting ice by a column of mercury 14.451 grammes
in mass, of a constant cross-sectional area, and 106.3 centimetres in
length. This is called the international ohm. The resistance offered by
400 feet of ordinary telegraph wire is about an ohm.

These three units—ampere, volt, and ohm—are the factors in
Ohm’s famous law that the current is directly proportional to the
electro-motive force exerted in a circuit, and inversely proportional
to the resistance of the circuit; that is,—

Current = Electro-motive force / Resistance

or,

Electro-motive force = Current × Resistance

Resistance = Electro-motive force / Current.

ERG:—From the Greek _ergon_, work, is the unit of work required to
move a force of one dyne one centimetre. One foot-pound equals 13,560
ergs.

CALORIE:—Latin _calor_, heat, is the unit of heat; being the amount
of heat required to raise the temperature of one kilogram of water one
degree centigrade.

COULOMB:—In honor of C. A. de Coulomb, of France. It is the practical
unit of quantity in measuring electricity, and is the amount conveyed
by one ampere in one second.

FARAD:—From FARADAY, the physicist. It is the unit of electric
capacity, and is the capacity of a condenser that retains one coulomb
of charge with one volt difference of potential.

GAUSS:—From Carl F. Gauss (1785–1855). The C. G. S. unit of
flux-density, or the unit by which the intensity of magnetic fields are
measured. It equals one weber per normal square centimetre.

GILBERT:—The unit for measuring magneto-motive force, being produced
by .7958 ampere-turn approximately.

HENRY:—From Joseph Henry, of the Smithsonian Institution, Washington,
D. C. The practical unit for measuring the induction in a circuit when
the electro-motive force induced is one international volt, while the
inducing current varies at the rate of one ampere per second.

JOULE:—The C. G. S. unit of practical energy, being equivalent to the
work done in keeping up for one second a current of one ampere against
a resistance of one ohm. Named from J. P. Joule, of England.

OERSTED:—From Oersted, the electrician. It is the practical unit for
measuring electrical reluctance.

WATT:—The practical electrical unit of the rate of working in a
circuit, when the electro-motive force is one volt, and the intensity
of current is one ampere. It is equal to 107 ergs per second, or .00134
horse-power per second. Named from James Watt, of Scotland.

WEBER:—The practical unit for measuring magnetic flux. Named from W.
Weber, of Germany.

THE CENTURY’S NAVAL PROGRESS

BY REAR ADMIRAL GEORGE WALLACE MELVILLE, U. S. N.

I. INFLUENCE OF SEA POWER.

The share of navies in the great movements which have moulded human
destiny and shaped the world’s progress, although long obscure and
undervalued, has met in our time full recognition. Within a decade the
influence of sea power upon history has become the frequent theme of
historians and essayists who, in clear and striking form, have shown
the cardinal importance, both in war and commerce, of the fleet—the
nation’s right arm on the sea. It is fitting, therefore, that in the
retrospect of a hundred years navies should have their place; that, in
looking backward with history’s unclouded vision, we should mark, not
only their growth and change, but, as well, their achievement in some
of the most memorable conflicts of our race.

The century had but begun when, at Copenhagen, Nelson, with one titanic
blow, shattered the naval strength of Denmark and the coalition of the
Northern powers. His signal there, ever for “closer battle,” told in
few words the life story of the Great Admiral, and foreshadowed his
end. Four years later, at Trafalgar, the desire of his eager heart
was satisfied, when he met in frank fight the fleets of France and
Spain. Amid the thundering cannonade of that last victory his life-tide
ebbed, bearing with it the power of France upon the seas and the broken
fortunes of Napoleon. In the war of 1812, our disasters upon the land
met compensation in victory afloat. The United States was then among
the feeblest of maritime powers; and yet Macdonough and Perry on the
lakes and our few frigates on the ocean opposed, with success, the
swarming squadrons of a nation whose naval glory, as Hallam says, can
be traced onward “in a continuous track of light” from the days of the
Commonwealth. The oppression of the Sultan was ended for a time when,
in 1827, the Turkish and Egyptian fleets were annihilated, in sudden
fury, by the allied squadrons in that brief engagement which Wellington
termed the “untoward event” of Navarino.

A generation later, the command of the sea enabled England and France
to despatch, in unarmed transports, 63,000 men and 128 guns to the
Crimea, and to land them, without opposition, for the red carnage of
the Alma, Balaklava, Inkerman, and Sebastopol. Following closely upon
the disease and death, the fatuity and the glory, of the Crimea, came
the great war of modern times, in which the gun afloat played such a
gallant part, as the blockade, with its constricting coils, slowly
starved and strangled the Confederacy to death, and Farragut, on inland
waters, split it in twain. Passing over the sea-fights of Lissa,—in
which imperial Venice was the stake,—of South America and the Yalu, we
note, lastly, the swift and fateful actions off Santiago and in Manila
Bay, which destroyed once again the sea power of Spain, won distant
territory for the United States, and opened up for us a noble pathway
of commercial expansion to the uttermost island of the broad Pacific
and the vast Asian littoral beyond. Who will say, in the retrospect of
the century, that the fleets of the world have not had their full share
in the making of its history?

II. THE CENTURY’S GROWTH IN NAVAL STRENGTH.

The United States fleet, in the year 1800, comprised 35 vessels, 10 of
which were frigates mounting 32 guns or more. In 1812, America entered
the lists against a navy of a thousand sail, with a fleet of but 20
ships, the largest of which was a 44-gun frigate. The operations of
the Civil War were begun with but 82 vessels, 48 of which were sailing
craft. Before the close of that gigantic struggle there were added,
by construction or purchase, 674 steamers. In 1898, during the war
with Spain, there were borne on the Naval Register, as building or
in service, 13 battleships and 176 other vessels, including torpedo
craft, with 123 converted merchantmen. The total naval force during
hostilities was 22,832 men and 2382 officers, excluding the Marine
Corps.

[Illustration: AN AUGUST MORNING WITH FARRAGUT.

(Battle of Mobile Bay.)]

At London, in 1653, there was printed “A List of the Commonwealth
of England’s Navy at Sea, in their expedition in May, 1653, under
the command of the Right Honorable Colonel Richard Deane and Colonel
George Monk, Esquires, Generals, and Admirals.” This quaint record of
that early time gives the force afloat as 105 ships, 3840 guns, and
16,269 men. In Britain’s strife for that ocean empire, which is world
empire, that fleet had grown, by the year 1800, to 757 vessels, built
or building, with an aggregate tonnage of 629,211, and carrying 26,552
guns, 3653 officers, and 110,000 men. The stately three-decker, with
its snowy canvas and maze of rigging, has vanished with the past; but,
despite time and change, that mighty fleet still dominates the seas.
Its strength, on February 1, 1898, was 615 vessels—61 of which were
battleships,—carrying a total force of 110,050 officers and men.

[Illustration: BRITISH BATTLESHIP MAJESTIC.]

[Illustration: FRENCH BATTLESHIP MAGENTA.]

Colbert, when the Grand Monarch was at the zenith of his power, found
France with a few old and rotten vessels, and left her with a noble
fleet of 40 ships of the line and 60 frigates, which, under D’Estrée,
Jean Bart, Tourville, and Duquesne, carried her flag to every sea.
A state paper of the time gives the force at the beginning of this
century as 61 ships of the line, 42 corvettes, and a numerous, although
unimportant, flotilla of small craft. With Aboukir and Trafalgar, the
maritime power of France wasted away; and, by the year 1839, there
were afloat but three effective sail of the line. In 1840, however,
the revival began, and during the modern era the French fleet has,
at times, been a formidable rival of that of England. It comprised,
in 1898, 446 vessels, including torpedo craft, 26 of the total being
battleships. The force afloat numbered 70,925, of all ranks and ratings.

[Illustration: GERMAN BATTLESHIP WOERTH.]

Germany’s navy is of modern creation. It began, a little less than
half a century ago, with one sailing corvette and two gunboats; and,
in 1898, comprised 13 battleships and 179 other vessels of all types,
carrying 23,302 officers and men. The fleet of united Italy had its
inception, also, within the age of steam. It was on March 17, 1860,
that Italian national life began with the ascension of the throne
by Victor Emmanuel. From the beginning, the kingdom has been lavish
with its fleet, its expenditures within the first six years reaching
$60,000,000. In 1898 there were in the Italian navy 265 vessels of all
types, 17 of which were battleships. The force afloat was 24,200, of
all ranks and ratings.

The Crimean war found Russia but little advanced, either on the Black
Sea or the Baltic, in the substitution of steam for sail. Since that
time, however, she has re-created her battle fleet, which is now
especially strong in torpedo craft and cruisers of great steaming
radius. Her navy, in 1898, comprised 20 battleships and 263 other
vessels, with a force of 32,477 officers and men. Japan began her fleet
in 1866 with the purchase of an armor-clad from the United States. In
1898, she had a total of 145 vessels, built and building—8 of which
were battleships—carrying 23,000 men of all ranks and ratings.

[Illustration: ITALIAN BATTLESHIP SARDEGNA.]

Of minor navies little need be said. Austria had, in 1898, a fleet
of 115 vessels of all types, including 13 battleships and 79 torpedo
craft. Holland’s force was 185 vessels, 3 being battleships and 93
torpedo craft. The fleets of Turkey, Greece, Spain, and Portugal are
“paper-navies” mainly. Norway and Sweden have a combined strength
of 171 vessels of all types. Denmark, which began the century with
overwhelming naval disaster at Copenhagen, has now a force of 3000
men borne on 50 vessels, half of which are torpedo craft. Argentina,
Brazil, and Chili have afloat 102 torpedo vessels and 49 of other
types. The vast growth in naval armaments during the century may be
measured from the fact that the personnel of the leading navies of
Europe, with those of Japan and the United States, comprised, in the
year 1898, 368,028 officers and men, with a total force of 2749 vessels
of all types, including torpedo craft.

III. THE BATTLESHIP,—PAST AND PRESENT.

In tracing the evolution of the modern man-of-war, it will be
instructive to compare with her the type of the sailing age. There are
two ships of the old time which hold chief places in the memory of the
Anglo-Saxon race,—the Victory, Nelson’s flagship at Trafalgar, and the
Constitution, whose achievements under Hull, Bainbridge, and Stewart,
rang around the world. There were, even before the days of steam,
war-vessels twice as large and powerful as “Old Ironsides,” but over no
sea, in any age, has there sailed a ship with a more gallant record.
Plate I shows her as she was in her prime—before the wind, with all
sail set. On Plate II there is given a side view of her hull, which
is of historic interest, in that it is reproduced from the original
drawing made in October, 1796.

[Illustration: NELSON’S FLAGSHIP VICTORY.]

When her power and dimensions are compared with those of the Oregon,
our sea-fighter of to-day, one sees what time has wrought. The frigate
carried 456 men, the armor-clad, 500; and yet, with this approximately
equal force, the Oregon has a displacement 6½ times that of her famed
predecessor; and although the number of the guns—44—is the same
in each, she discharges a broadside 8.3 times heavier and in energy
overwhelmingly superior. The speed of the battleship is one half
greater than that of the Constitution, and she carries armor varying
from 18 inches to 4 inches thick, which the frigate wholly lacked. The
longitudinal section of the Oregon indicates the immense advance in
other directions. Her hull is, for safety, minutely subdivided, and is
provided with engines for propulsion, steering, lighting, drainage,
and ventilation, numbering in all 84, with miles of piping and
hundreds of valves. The time-honored frigate was but a sail-propelled
gun-platform, whose wants were as few as her construction was
simple; the steel-clad battleship is a mass of mechanism, a floating
machine-plant, which for full efficiency must be manned by a personnel
not only brave and daring as of old, but expert in many arts and
sciences, which in the age of sail were but rudimentary or unknown.

[Illustration: PLATE I. CONSTITUTION (1812) UNDER SAIL.]

IV. THE PROGRESS OF NAVAL ENGINEERING.

“_I have just read the project of Citizen Fulton, Engineer, which you
have sent me much too late, since it is one which may change the face
of the world._”

So, in the beginning of the century, wrote the first Napoleon from his
Imperial camp at Boulogne. Wrapped in his day-dream of a descent upon
the Thames, he saw, with prophetic vision, in the plans of the American
engineer, the future of navigation, and he strove to grasp—but too
late—the opportunity which might have made his armada victorious over
wind and tide.

His words, however, rang truer than he knew. On the sea, as on the
land, the engineer has indeed “changed the face of the world;” and in
no department of human progress has his influence been more radical or
more far-reaching than in the mechanism, the scope, and the strategy
of naval war. Fleets move now with a swiftness and surety unthought
of in the days of sail. Over the same western ocean which Nelson, in
his eager chase of Villeneuve, crossed at but four knots an hour, the
United States cruiser Columbia swept, ninety years later, at a speed
nearly four and three quarters times that of his lagging craft. When,
in 1898, war came, the great battleship Oregon, although far to the
northward on our western coast, was needed in the distant battle-line
off the Cuban shore. In 79 days she steamed 14,500 miles, making a run
which is without parallel or approach by any warship of any navy in
the world’s history. The magnificent manhood, the unconquerable pluck,
the engineering skill, which brought her just in time off Santiago,
won their reward when the Colon struck her flag. Speed has been a
determining factor in many a naval action. It was that which gave the
power to take and hold the old-time “weather-gauge.” None knew its
value better than Nelson, the chief fighter of the age of sail. Once
he said that there would be found, stamped upon his heart, “the want
of frigates,” the swift and nimble “eyes of the fleet” in his day. If
his career in warfare on the sea had been a century later, he would
be found foremost among the advocates of high-speed battleships and
quick-firing guns.

It is, however, not only in the speed of warships that steam and
mechanism have revolutionized fleets. For example, the displacement of
the battleship of to-day is fully three and one half times greater than
that of her heaviest ancestor of the sailing age. With due limitation
as to length of hull, it is evident that the wind would be, at best,
a wholly inadequate and untrustworthy motor for this huge structure
with its great weight of armor. It is true that, during the era of
transition, sail and steam were both applied to iron-clads—this
absurdity reaching its climax in the British Agincourt and her sisters,
which were 400 feet long, 10,600 tons’ displacement, and were fitted
with five masts. It is said that a merchant steamer narrowly escaped
collision at night with one of these vessels, believing from her length
and rigging that there were _two_ ships ahead, between which she could
pass. What these large displacements mean, in contrast with those of
past days, will be, perhaps, best illustrated by the statement that the
Italia of 13,600 tons—a ship with which, in her day, Italy challenged
the criticism of the world—carries on her deck a weight, in armor
and armament, of 2500 tons, or one fourth more than that of Nelson’s
flagship Victory.

[Illustration: PLATE II. SIDE VIEW OF CONSTITUTION FROM ORIGINAL
DRAWING.

(Furnished by the Author.)

Length 174 ft. 10½ ins.
Beam 43 ft. 6 in.
Mean Draught 20 ft. 0 in.
Displacement 2200 tons.

WILLIAM DOUGHTY, Fecit. 1796, Oct.

Joshua Humphreys, of Philadelphia, Designer. Cloghorne and Hartley, of
Boston, Builders. Launched Oct. 21, 1797.]

Again, the largest naval gun in the year 1800 was one firing but a
42-pound shot, while in the United States navy we have now the 13-inch
rifle of 60 tons, with a projectile of 1100 pounds, and Great Britain
has afloat 1800-pounder breech-loaders which weigh 111 tons. Before
monster ordnance such as this, the strength of man, unaided, is but
crude and futile. He must call to his help—as he has done—steam as
the source of power for the electric, hydraulic, or pneumatic engines,
which load, elevate, and train the gun.

In summing up the service of steam, directly or indirectly, to the
ship-of-war, it will be seen that the speed of the battleship has been
increased by fully 50 per cent., and that of the cruiser has been
doubled; that the displacement of the battleship is now three and
one half times that of her sailing predecessor; and that, since the
century’s birth, the gun has grown to such extent that the projectile
for the Oregon’s main battery weighs 26 times that of the heaviest shot
in the year 1800. This, however, is not all. Steam acts primarily,
as well, to raise the anchor, to steer the ship, and to effect her
lighting, heating, drainage, and ventilation. To the genius of James
Watt there must be ascribed the possibility for the growth and change
which have produced the modern man-of-war.

Closely allied with mechanism in this evolution, has been the
transformation of the structural material of the hull, which has passed
from the hands of the shipwright in wood to the engineer who works with
steel. The reasons for this are not far to seek. They lie, firstly,
in the greater strength of the metal construction to withstand the
vibration of swift and heavy machinery, and the strains arising from
the unequal distribution of massive weights in a hull which pitches or
rolls with the waves. With wooden ships, the present proportions would
have been unattainable. Again, there is a marked saving in the weight
of the hull proper of the steel vessel, which is not only stronger but
lighter. This weight in the days of timber averaged fully one half
of the displacement; while in the Oregon, whose tonnage, at normal
draught, is 10,288, the hull percentage is 44.06, leaving a gain over
the wooden vessel of 611 tons to be applied to armor, armament, or
equipment. Finally, the durability of the metal vessel, with adequate
care, greatly exceeds that of the wooden war steamer, whose average
life was but 13 years.

The creation of the steam machinery of navies has been the achievement
of the engineers of practically but three great nations. The daring of
France, the inventive genius of America, and the wide experience and
sound judgment of Great Britain, have united in this work. Our country
has led time and again in the march of improvement; although our
progress has been fitful, since, more than a generation ago, we turned
from the sea to the development of the internal resources of this
continent. Limits of space permit but brief review of a history which
has had its full share of triumphs, not only in battle, but over wave
and wind.

[Illustration: THE U. S. S. OREGON.]

A contemporary authority states that, when British Admiral Sir John
Borlase Warren ascended the Potomac River, during the war of 1812, his
expedition was reconnoitred by an American steamer. This appears to be
the first record of the use of such craft for military purposes. In
1814 the United States built the first steam war-vessel in the world’s
history. She was called the Demologos, later the Fulton, and her
completion marked truly, as her commissioners said, “an era in warfare
and the arts.” She was a double-ended, twin-hulled floating battery
of 2475 tons, carrying twenty 32-pdr. guns, protected by 4 ft. 10 in.
of solid timber. She was driven by a single central paddle-wheel; her
speed was 5½ miles per hour; and she was both handy and seaworthy.
France, in 1820, sent a commission to America to report upon steam
vessels of war; and in 1830 the French had nine armed steamers afloat
and nine building. In 1821, the Comet, a small side-wheeler, was
commissioned as the first steam war-ship in the British navy, and in
1840, at the bombardment of Acre, steam vessels fought their first
battle.

[Illustration: ACTION BETWEEN MONITOR AND MERRIMAC.]

The growth of steam in navies had been retarded by its application
solely to paddle craft, whose wheels and machinery were incapable of
protection in action. During the years 1842–43, however, the United
States built the sloop-of-war Princeton, of 954 tons. This vessel
was the product of the genius of John Ericsson, the ablest marine
engineer the world has ever seen. She was the first screw-propelled
steam warship ever built, and, in other respects, foreshadowed the
advances which were to come. Thus, her machinery was the first to be
placed wholly below the water-line beyond the reach of hostile shot;
her engine was the first to be coupled directly to the screw shaft, and
blowers, for forced draft, were with her first used in naval practice.
She was virtually the herald of the modern era.

The Princeton was followed closely by the Rattler, the first screw
vessel of the British fleet, and in 1843–44 the French 44-gun frigate
Pomone was fitted with propellers. In 1843, also, the English Penelope
was the first man-of-war to be equipped with tubular boilers, and the
year 1845 was notable for the building of the ill-fated Birkenhead,
the first iron vessel of the British fleet. In 1850, when the French
constructed the screw line-of-battle ship Napoleon, the English became
alarmed, and began with vigor the renovation of their navy with regard
to screw propulsion.

France, in 1854, laid the keels of four armored batteries, three of
which, forming the first ironclad squadron in history, went into action
a year later under the forts of Kinburn in the Crimea. They were of
1600 tons’ displacement, carried 4⅓ inch armor and sixteen 68-pdr.
guns, and had a speed of four knots. In 1862, Ericsson launched the
famous Monitor, the first sea-going ironclad with a revolving turret,
and an “engineers’ ship” from keel to turret top.

[Illustration: THE TURBINIA.]

The Civil War found us with a sailing navy, and left us one of steam.
Passing over its victories, in which steamers played always the chief
part on sea and river, we come to that most notable triumph of Chief
Engineer Isherwood, the cruiser Wampanoag of 4200 tons’ displacement.
This vessel, phenomenal in her day, steamed in February, 1868, from
Barnegat to Savannah, over a stormy sea, in 38 hours. Her average was
16.6 knots for the run, and 17 knots during a period of six consecutive
hours—a speed which for 11 years thereafter was unapproached by liner
or by warship. In 1879, the British despatch vessel Mercury, of 3730
tons and 18.87 knots, wrested the palm from America; but, in 1893, it
was won again for the United States by the triple-screw fliers Columbia
and Minneapolis of 7475 tons, with speeds respectively of 22.8 and
23.073 knots. The laurels rest now with the Buenos Ayres, which,
though built in England in 1895, flies the flag of Argentina. She has a
tonnage of 4500 and a speed of 23.202 knots.

[Illustration: ENGINE OF U.S.S.POWHATAN. A.D. 1849.

PLATE III.]

The British ironclad Pallas, completed in 1866, was remarkable for
having the first successful naval engines on the compound principle,
in which the steam is admitted at high pressure to a small cylinder,
and passes thence to a larger one which it fills by its expansion. To
Great Britain the world owes also the development of triple expansion,
i. e., the use of steam successively in three cylinders. This system
was inaugurated in naval engines by the British, in 1885–86, and is
now universally employed. Prior to 1879, the boilers of all modern
war-vessels had been those of the Scotch type, in which the flame
passes through tubes fixed in a cylindrical shell containing water. In
that year, however, France began a revolution in the steam generators
of navies by equipping a dispatch-vessel with the Belleville tubulous
boiler, in which the water to be evaporated is contained within tubes
surrounded by flame confined in an outer casing. The water-tube
principle, also, bids fair to become of universal application. It has
had its most noteworthy naval installation in the British cruisers
Powerful and Terrible, of 14,200 tons and 25,886 horse-power, completed
in 1895.

[Illustration: PLATE IV. ENGINE OF U. S. S. ERICSSON.]

The use of more than one screw for propulsion dates back to 1853.
During our Civil War multiple screws figured, to a small extent, in the
“tin clads” and larger monitors. The application of twin screws, in the
modern era, begins with the British ironclad Penelope of 1868. France,
in the years 1884–85, blazed the way for another naval advance of much
importance in conducting a series of trials with the launch Carpe,
equipped with triple screws. The system, however, although of much
value, from engineering and tactical points of view, was not adopted
in large, high-powered vessels until the advent of the French armored
cruiser Dupuy de Lôme in 1890, and the protected cruisers Columbia and
Minneapolis of the United States navy in 1893. It has now won full
approval in the navies of continental Europe, and triple-screw ships,
aggregating 500,000 tons, are built or building there.

The limits of space forbid more than a passing note of the triumphs
of the engineer in torpedo craft, the light cavalry of the sea. With
steamers of normal proportions, the speed and power depend largely
upon, and increase with, the displacement. As has been stated, the
maximum performance of large cruisers is now 23 knots on a tonnage
of 4500. These particulars give a faint glimpse of the extraordinary
problem which has confronted the torpedo-boat designer in driving
hulls of, at present, about 150 tons at a speed which now approximates
to 30 knots. With the brilliant record of success in this task, there
will be linked always the names of Yarrow and Thornycroft in England,
of Schichau in Germany, and of Normand in France. The achievement but
recently of a British inventor, the Hon. Charles Algernon Parsons, in
giving the Turbinia of 44.5 tons a speed of over 31 knots, has drawn
the attention of engineers the world over to the possibilities of the
steam turbine on the sea. This performance is phenomenal with such a
displacement. The French Forban, of 130 tons, has made 31.2 knots,
and a reported speed of 35 knots gives a Schichau boat her temporary
laurels as the fastest craft afloat.

A brief glance at the improvements which have made possible these
extreme speeds in cruisers and torpedo craft will be of interest. The
progress which has been made has been, firstly, in the economy in the
use of steam arising from higher pressures and multiple expansion;
secondly, in the reduction of weight, per horse power, due to increase
in strength of materials and in engine-speed with the employment of
forced draft—which was reintroduced by France—and the water-tube
boiler; and, finally, in the application of a more efficient propelling
instrument. The advances of half a century in propelling machinery are
shown, in some respects, by Plates III and IV, which contrast, on the
same scale, the side-wheel machinery of the United States war-steamer
Powhatan, of 1849, with the engines of the United States torpedo boat
Ericsson of to-day. The data of the former vessel are: horse-power,
1172; steam pressure 15 lbs.; weight of machinery per horse-power 972
lbs.; while, for the Ericsson, the figures are: horse-power, 1800;
steam pressure, 250 lbs.; weight of machinery per horse-power, 56 lbs.
This comparison, however, must be qualified by the statement that the
older engine was for a steamer of about 3760 tons, while the torpedo
boat is but 120 tons in displacement. The contrast lies, therefore,
only in the reduced weight of material per horse-power developed and in
the increased steam pressure, which, however, are in themselves most
striking.

V. THE GROWTH OF ORDNANCE.

At Trafalgar, the Victory drifted before the wind into action. In her
slow advance, at a speed of one and one half knots through but 1200
yards, she was for half an hour under the prolonged fire of 200 guns,
and yet she closed, practically unhurt, with her foes, and lived, not
only to win the day, but to bring undying glory to the English flag.
What a contrast the latest sea-fight of the century presents in the
power of modern ordnance as compared with the puny guns of Nelson’s
time! Our battleship Oregon, at a range of nearly five miles, with
one 1100-pound shell, drove the Colon, an armored cruiser, not only
shoreward, but to surrender, stranding, and wreck.

The largest naval guns in the year 1800 were the long 32 and
42-pounders, smooth-bore muzzle-loaders, with a range of about
1200 yards. Carronades—short pieces with a heavy shot but limited
range—found favor also, especially with British sailors, eager for
that close-quarter fighting in which the “Smasher”—as General Melville
called his carronade—would be most effective in shattering timbers
and in sending clouds of splinters among the foe. The projectiles were
spherical shot, canister, and grape, the diabolical shriek of the shell
being yet unheard. Both gun and shot were of cast metal, and the
mount was a wooden carriage on low trucks. The training, or horizontal
angle of the gun, was effected by rope tackles, and the amount of
elevation of its muzzle depended upon the position of a “quoin,” or
wooden wedge, thrust beneath the breech. The recoil was limited by
rope “breeching,” passing through the cascabel,—a knob behind the
breech,—and secured to ring-bolts in the ship’s side. The gun was
harnessed, as a horse is, in the shafts.

[Illustration: BATTLE OF TRAFALGAR.]

Aiming was largely a perfunctory process, since the gun had no sights
and the shot had excessive “windage,” its calibre being from one fifth
to one third inch less than the bore, making its outward passage
a series of rebounds and its final direction a matter of chance.
“Windage,” however, was essential to facilitate muzzle-loading and to
provide for the expanded diameter of red-hot shot. It is true that in
1801 a proposition to use sights was made to Lord Nelson. He, however,
rejected it with the words:—

“I hope we shall be able, as usual, to get so close to our enemies that
our shot cannot miss the object.”

His blind courage in this cost his countrymen dearly when, in 1812–14,
their shot flew wild, while their ships were hulled and their gallant
tars fell before the then sighted guns of the United States.

To ignite the charge the slow-match was still used, as is shown by
the sharp words of a sailor of that time. Hailed in the darkness by a
British ship and ordered to send a boat, his quick answer was:—

“This is the United States frigate Constitution, Edward Preble,
commodore, commanding, and I’ll be d—d if I send a boat!”

Then to his men, silent and eager by the shrouded battle-lanterns:—

“Blow your matches, boys!”

A full crew for a 32-pounder consisted of 14 men. An old rule as to
this was one man to every 500-lbs. weight of the gun, which would give
the Oregon 1100 men to handle the four 13-inch rifles of her main
battery, or more than twice her whole crew. Steam and mechanism have
wrought a magic change in this.

The slow-match remained in use until well into the nineteenth century,
although, until 1842, the flint lock was generally employed in the
British navy, having replaced the priming horn and match in 1780.
In 1807 there was discovered a composition which could be ignited
by friction or concussion, and in 1839 the French had adopted the
percussion lock, which exploded the cap and retracted, uncovering the
vent before the backward rush of the gas could strike it. Later, a
similar composition was used with “friction-primers,” or tubes filled
with mealed powder and capped with composition, the tube forming a
train leading to the charge, and the composition being fired by the
friction of a rough wire drawn briskly through it. Percussion and
friction have been in turn largely displaced by the electric primer,
which consists essentially of a fine wire, or “bridge,” passing through
a highly inflammable mixture. The bridge offers a resistance to the
electric current, is heated thereby, ignites the composition, and fires
the gun.

The older type of the cast-iron smooth-bore gun for solid shot reached
its ultimate development in the 68-pounder, which endured until the
advent of armor. In 1819 the system of firing shells loaded with
gunpowder from smooth-bore guns was suggested by General Paixhans, of
France. In 1824, it was introduced into the French navy, and about
1840 into that of the United States. At Sinope, in 1853, the terrible
effect of shell fire upon wooden ships startled the world, when a
Russian fleet destroyed absolutely 11 Turkish vessels, with their force
of 4000 men. The Paixhans gun was modified and its form improved by
Admiral Dahlgren, U. S. N., and in the late 50’s the armament—designed
by him—of United States vessels was superior to that of any other in
the world. The 9, 11, and 15-inch Dahlgrens formed the bulk of our guns
afloat during the Civil War, the remainder being almost wholly rifles
of the Parrott type.

[Illustration: _The Growth of Ordnance_

_32pdr 6m Smooth-bore, Muzzle-loader
Weight 3600 lbs. Muzzle Energy, 642 Foot-tons_

_U S (Dahlgren) 440pdr 15m Smooth-bore, Muzzle-loader
Weight 42000 lbs. Muzzle Energy, 7273 Foot-tons_

_Italian (Armstrong) 2000pdr 17in Rifle, Breech-loader
Weight 101.5 tons, Muzzle Energy, 51930 Foot-tons_

_U S Naval 1100pdr 13in Rifle, Breech-loader
Weight 60 tons, Muzzle Energy, 33627 Foot-tons_

PLATE V.]

The resistance which spherical projectiles met from the air, their
deviation in flight, owing to the frequent lack of coincidence of the
centres of gravity and form, their excessive “windage,” and their light
weight relatively to calibre, led to the adoption of the rifled gun
and the cylindrical projectile. The principle of the former—making
the shot act as a screw-bolt and the bore as a screw-thread—is very
old, there being at Woolwich a barrel of this type bearing date of
1547. The objects aimed at in rifling are to give a pointed cylindrical
shot rotation on its axis that it may keep steady during flight,
and secondly, to obtain increased weight in the projectile from its
elongated form. As to the latter consideration, it may be noted that
the old 32-pounder smooth-bore was of 6-inch calibre, while the United
States 6-inch rifle of to-day throws a shot of 100 lbs. weight.

France, during the Crimean War, brought out the first heavy rifled gun.
In 1860–61, Armstrong rifles were introduced in the British navy. The
labors of Krupp met such success that at Paris, in 1867, he exhibited
a rifle weighing 50 tons with a projectile of 1080 pounds. The Parrott
rifle was brought out about 1856 in the United States, and was so
developed that in 1862 it was the most powerful gun, for its weight and
size, in existence. The adoption of rifling was the first great step
on the road which engineering had laid toward the growth in power of
modern ordnance.

Having thus secured a projectile of great weight and moderate calibre
which would bore through the air a true path to the distant mark,
there remained to seek but four chief elements in the magnificent
advance made within a generation by the naval artillery of our day.
These factors were: 1st. Increased strength in the material of the
gun. 2d. A method of construction which would not only permit enormous
pressures in the powder-chamber, but would make possible the continuous
acceleration of the projectile during its passage through the bore.
3d. An explosive which would satisfy the objects of the method of
construction; and, 4th. A system of loading which would enable guns of
great length to be charged with ease. The mounting of ordnance of any
weight, its control, and its rapid and facile handling were but minor
matters of engineering.

In a paper such as this, of limited length and addressed to laymen,
it is possible to give but a glance at the progress in the various
elements of gun-construction which have been noted. Of material, little
need be said. The rifle of Crimean days was a cast-iron piece; Parrott
ordnance was of cast and wrought iron; and the first Armstrong gun was
built of wrought iron and steel. Cast and compound materials, however,
have vanished with the past. Steel—hardened and toughened to the last
degree by every refinement of manufacture—forms the “reeking tube” for
the “iron shard” of the century’s close.

The method of construction is the “built-up” process, shown by the
partial section on Plate V., the barrel being reinforced by tubes
which are shrunk on—like the tire of a wagon-wheel—so as to produce
initial compression. The explosion in the powder chamber strains and
expands temporarily the barrel, and the application of the shrinkage
principle enables a portion of the strength of the tubes to be employed
in preliminary internal pressure. The barrel thus supported can be
strained by the charge, not only to its own limit of safety, but to an
additional amount equal to this initial compression. The all-steel,
built-up gun has a possible rival in wire-wound ordnance, a system
which replaces the tubes, to a greater or less extent, by layers of
wire, wound while in tension around the barrel.

Powder is the soul of the gun; it transforms the huge inert mass into
a flaming engine of death. The great development of explosives began
but a generation since. The researches of Robins and Rumford in the
last century, and of Hutton in the dawn of this, formed the world’s
knowledge of the gun’s internal ballistics until the year 1870. To the
genius of Noble and Abel is due the stimulus to growth since then.
The powders have kept pace with gun-construction in its advance.
The increased strength of the chamber has been met by heavier and
slow-burning charges—cocoa, brown prismatic, and the like—which have
given not only greater initial velocity, but a continuous acceleration
through bores whose maximum length has exceeded 47 feet. Indeed, to
the production of this lingering combustion is due the great linear
dimension and power of modern guns. Initial pressure had its limit;
advance lay only in the subsequent acceleration given by late ignition
of a portion of the charge.

Gunpowder, however, after a reign of more than five hundred years,
has been dethroned. The “villainous saltpetre” of the monk, with its
allies, charcoal and sulphur, yields now to nitro compounds, which
produce not only far greater energy, but are as well smokeless. The
sea-fights of our war with Spain saw the last contending fleets to
be wrapped in a cloud, lingering and baffling, of their own making.
Cordite, one of these compounds in use abroad, is prepared in long
“cords” from di-nitro-cellulose and nitro-glycerine. The new smokeless
“powder” of the United States navy is made from nitro-cellulose
dissolved in ether alcohol. France was the first in employing
explosives such as these, which, in their offensive and tactical
advantages, form one of the signal triumphs of the century’s last years.

The long gun of modern days is of necessity breech-loading. The
development of other elements gave, as a resultant, great length;
and this, in turn, required a system of charging which would
permit protection for the men while loading, and would obviate the
intolerable inconvenience of ramming home powder and shot in a long
muzzle-loader—an operation which was, in fact, impossible beyond a
certain limit of length. The advocates of the older construction,
especially in England, urged long and earnestly its simplicity and
the superior strength of a solid breech; but the logic of events was
against them, and the breech-loader won a complete triumph. It is
worthy of note that it, like rifling and the principle of building up,
was but a revival. From the warship Mary Rose, sunk in 1545 in action
off Spithead, there were recovered in 1836 a number of guns, some of
which are of wrought iron, built-up and breech-loading. There are in
use two methods of closing the breech when the gun is loaded from the
rear. In French, English, and American ordnance an axial screw-plug is
inserted; in the Krupp system a cylindro-prismatic breech-block slides
in a horizontal opening cut across the bore. The former, or interrupted
screw mechanism, was first set forth in the United States’ patent of
1849 to Chambers.

In projectiles the tendency of the modern era has been towards
simplification. Bar-shot, chain-shot, and grape have disappeared, while
canister and solid shot are becoming obsolete. There remain shrapnel as
the “man-killer” of this age, and explosive shell, differentiated into
armor-piercing and that for attack on unarmored structures. Lieutenant
Shrapnel, in 1796, invented the projectile which bears his name. In its
modern form, it consists of a steel case containing lead or iron balls
and a light bursting charge of powder, ignited by a time-fuse carried
in the head. This projectile is most formidable against bodies of men,
boats, and the embrasures of forts, since, when it is ruptured, the
balls are dispersed, covering a wide area.

The use of explosive shell in high-angle discharge dates back to
the fifteenth century. From Paixhans’ works, “La Nouvelle Arme,”
published in 1821, came the stimulus to its development and to its
deadly service, in our time, in horizontal fire. The “common shell”
for the United States 13-inch rifle is made of forged steel, weighs
1100 pounds, and carries within it a bursting charge of 50 pounds of
powder, ignited by a percussion fuse set in its base. It will penetrate
6 or 7 inches of armor and then explode within the ship. The United
States “armor-piercing shell” is manufactured from crucible steel,
alloyed with chromium; it is tempered to extreme hardness at the point,
which carries a cap of soft metal. The function of the latter would
appear to be that of a support to the shoulder of the projectile, or
as a lubricant thereto, since, without the cap, the shell is broken or
deformed in the attack on armor of surface hardened steel. To resist
the crushing strain in its passage through massive plate, the walls
of this shell must be so thick that no charge of gunpowder will burst
it. Hence, as a rule, the shell is fired unloaded, although recently
there have been adopted to some extent bursting charges of some high
explosive, such as gun-cotton, joveite, or picric acid.

In closing this brief review of the progress of ordnance, but passing
mention can be made of matters minor, but in themselves of much
importance. Gun carriages, or mounts, are now intricate mechanisms,
practically the whole service of large ordnance being performed by
electric and hydraulic machinery. The rapid fire principle has been
extended to pieces of 6-inch calibre, and bids fair to pass beyond that
limit. Its success in increasing largely the number of shots within a
given time lies in special breech-blocks, aiming devices, and prepared
cartridges. Machine guns of rifle-calibre, partly or wholly automatic,
have been so developed as to be capable of firing 1200 rounds per
minute. The discharge of high explosives in large quantity was effected
with success by the United States steamer Vesuvius off Santiago. The
torpedo-gun afloat, however, would appear to be still in a tentative
condition.

A brief lapse into technical terms may be permitted in summarizing the
gun’s growth in power. The term “muzzle energy” is used to describe the
work which the projectile is capable of performing when it leaves the
bore. It is expressed in foot-tons, i. e., the number of tons which
the energy stored in the shot would lift to a height of one foot. The
figures as to this for the 32-pounder of the century’s beginning, for
the United States 13-inch rifle and for the 111-ton English gun, are,
respectively, 642, 33,627, and 54,690 foot-tons. Again, the round shot
from the 32-pounder lost from the resistance of the air, in a range of
1200 yards, 76 per cent of its energy; while this loss, with the United
States 13-inch, in a range of 1000 yards, is but 11 per cent. Finally,
if the cast-iron shot of the 32-pounder were fired against armor-plate,
it would lose, in breaking itself up, two thirds of its remaining
energy, leaving at 1200 yards but 51 foot-tons for effective work;
while with the modern armor-piercing shell the entire energy left at
the end of the range is expended upon the armor-plate.

It will be seen then that the immeasurable superiority of modern guns
is owing both to their great increase in energy and to their wiser
disposition of that which has been attained. The gun has maintained
fully during the century its primacy among naval weapons. It is
true that, in theory and on paper, its supremacy has at times been
questioned; but as to its two rivals, the ram would seem to be rather
the weapon of accident than action, and the torpedo has yet to score
in battle against ships in motion, while the precision, rapidity, and
power of the gun grow more deadly with every passing year.

VI. THE DEVELOPMENT OF ARMOR.

Armor and the gun are natural and now hereditary foes. The function
of the one is to resist, that of the other ever to attack. Since the
beginning of the modern era in navies, there has been ceaseless strife
for mastery between these two elements of warship design, the gun
ever becoming more powerful, and the armor—at first through growing
thickness and later through improved material—opposing a steadily more
stubborn front. The official report of an English committee made in the
year 1860 states that,—

“Vessels clothed in rolled-iron plates of four and a half inches’
thickness are to all practicable purposes invulnerable against any
projectile that can be brought to bear against them at any range.”

The advance which forty years have seen may be shown by the single
statement that the Krupp 15.7-inch gun develops sufficient energy to
penetrate at the muzzle 47 inches of wrought iron. The battleship is at
best but a series of compromises, each factor of the structure yielding
or growing as the skill or whim of her designer may indicate. In the
present stage of this unceasing change, the gun would appear to be
the victor, and the power of this mighty 132-ton rifle seems scarcely
needed on the sea. The distinguished chief of ordnance of the United
States navy, in his annual report for 1898, says:—

“The development of the 12-inch gun has been so great and its power so
much increased that the Bureau is of opinion that hereafter it will
be the maximum calibre that it will be advisable to install on future
battleships.”

With armor, as with the torpedo, the talent of Europe reaped where
the genius of America had sown. John Stevens of New Jersey was the
first inventor of modern times to suggest the application of armor to
a floating battery, his plans being submitted to the United States
government during the war of 1812. They received, however, no serious
consideration, and to France, forty-two years later, fell the honor of
attaining the first practical results in the building of ironclads.
Members of the Stevens family, however, continued the experiments of
its founder, until by the year 1841 they had determined the thickness
of iron necessary to stop spherical projectiles at point blank range,
and the comparative resisting powers of iron and oak. These results led
to an appropriation by Congress, in 1854, of $500,000 to begin work
upon an ironclad,—the Stevens battery,—which vessel, however, never
left the ways and was eventually broken up.

[Illustration: PLATE VI. THE DISTRIBUTION OF ARMOR.]

[Illustration: PLATE VII. THE DISTRIBUTION OF ARMOR.]

General Paixhans, who revolutionized naval artillery by the invention
of the modern shell, prophesied, in an official letter to the French
government in 1824, that the new projectile would force the creation
of armored ships. In 1841 he recommended officially the clothing of
vessels with iron armor, as a protection against his own missiles; and
in 1853 his words of warning met complete and terrible fulfillment in
the annihilation by shell guns of the Turkish fleet at Sinope. This
action was the immediate cause of the introduction of armor in modern
navies.

The British admiralty, in 1843, had duplicated the Stevens experiments,
using a target of 14 plates of boiler iron riveted together, which gave
a total thickness of 6 inches; and experiments on laminated plating
had been also at this time carried on at Gavres, in France. In 1845
Dupuy de Lôme, the famous naval architect, submitted to the French
government the first European design for an armored frigate. His plans
were, however, rejected; and only with the outbreak of the Crimean War
was the construction of armored vessels begun. On October 17, 1855,
the three French batteries which were the first results of this new
departure went into action off Kinburn, in the Crimea, silencing in
four hours forts which had held at bay the combined fleets of England
and France. Armor had won its first victory, and had shown most
signally its position as one of the main factors in the warship design
of the years which were to come.

These vessels, with three similar batteries constructed immediately
thereafter by the British government, were clad with solid iron plates
4½ inches thick, backed by 27¾ inches of oak, comparative experiments
at Vincennes, France, having shown the marked superiority of solid
over laminated plating. They were, however, in but a most limited
sense sea-going ships, their low speed and other inferior qualities
being radical defects as to this. France led in a further advance,
beginning in 1857 and completing in 1859 the transformation of the
wooden line-of-battle ship Napoleon into the armored vessel of 5000
tons, which, as La Gloire, is famous as the first sea-going ironclad.
She carried a strake of 4¾-inch plating at the water line, and 4½-inch
plates in wake of the battery. England answered the challenge of her
hereditary foe with the Warrior, an iron vessel of 9210 tons, completed
in 1861. While her rival had a fully armored side, but 212 of the
Warrior’s 380 feet of length carried plating. Its thickness was 4½
inches.

[Illustration:

_“La Gloire” (France) 1857.
Side Armor Iron 4½ in. Solid._

_“Warrior” (England) 1859.
Side Armor Iron 4½ in. Solid._

_U.S. Monitor “Passaic” 1862.
Side Armor Iron 3 to 5 in. Laminated.
Turret Armor Iron 11 in. Laminated._

_“Inflexible” (England) 1876.
Belt & Citadel Armor Iron Sandwiched._

_“Duilio” (Italy) 1876.
Belt Armor Steel Solid._

_U.S. Battleship Oregon.
Belt Armor Harveyed Nickel Steel Solid.
13 in. Turret Armor Harveyed Nickel Steel Solid._

PLATE VIII. THE GROWTH OF ARMOR.
]

At the outbreak of the Civil War in the United States, the government
appointed a special naval committee to report upon types of ironclads.
The conclusions of this board are of interest, in showing the state of
armor development at that period. They required rolled armor of solid
iron, whose minimum thickness was 4½ inches. Ericsson’s Monitor,
however, carried laminated plating from 3 to 5 inches thick on her
low sides, and 11 layers, each one inch thick, on her turret. This
construction, which the difficulties in the manufacture of solid plate
necessitated, made the record of endurance of this type far from good.
The defect lay mainly with fastening bolts, which broke frequently,
thus loosening or detaching the side armor, and the heads or nuts of
which, flying off with violence when the armor was struck by shot,
became sometimes fatal missiles against those within the turrets. In
contrast with this, the behavior of the New Ironsides, clothed with
solid armor, was most excellent. She was a casemated ironclad frigate
with unarmored ends, her plating was 4½ inches thick, and inclined
throughout the citadel, at an angle of 30° from the perpendicular. For
two years she was subjected to the most severe test that a war-vessel
must meet, the tossing and straining of blockade duty and the fiery
ordeal of close action with fortifications. In one engagement, she
sustained alone a fight against the combined fire of the forts in
Charleston harbor, and, although struck on her side-armor sixty times,
came out of the struggle unhurt. The record of this ship is one which
does honor to the flag.

The achievement of the Confederacy during this war, in the matter of
armor, was remarkable. With iron worth almost its weight in gold, and
with most limited facilities for manufacturing, they yet succeeded in
constructing some of the most formidable ironclads of their day. The
Merrimac, for instance—with 3-inch armor, in two layers of narrow
bars, at an angle of 30° with the horizontal—sustained no material
damage to her plating from the fire of the Monitor; although had the
full charge of 30 lbs. of powder been used in the 11-inch smooth-bores
of the latter, the story would have been different. Every fair blow
would have smashed a hole completely through the armor, and driven a
shower of splinters about the battery-deck. Again, the armor of the
Atlanta and the Tennessee—both casemated ships, with the sides of the
citadel inclined at a sharp angle to the horizontal—was sufficiently
strong, with the former vessel, to withstand, at 500 yards, the 11-inch
projectile fired with a 20-lbs. charge, and, with the latter, the same
shot practically at the muzzle, although the 15-inch projectile broke
through completely in both cases.

It is unnecessary to follow in detail, through its many tests in peace,
the advance of iron armor. Its growth in strength, as the power of
the gun developed, came almost solely from increase in thickness, the
latter reaching its maximum with the British Inflexible, completed
in 1876, which carries from 16 to 24 inches of iron on her belt and
citadel. This plating, however, is divided and “sandwiched” with wood,
there being, exterior to the skin, 6 inches of teak, then 12 inches
iron, 11 inches teak, and an outer 12-inch plate. As armor, iron
received its death-blow in the famous tests at Spezia, Italy, during
the autumn of 1876, when the 100-ton gun, with a full charge, at a
range of 100 yards, attacked solid and “sandwich” targets of iron and
solid targets of steel—the single or aggregate thickness of metal
in each case being 22 inches. These trials were undertaken through
Italy’s desire to build, in the Duilio and Dandolo, the most formidable
vessels afloat. Steel won the day, and the roar of that mighty gun,
thundering from the Spezia firing ground, sounded the knell of iron
armor, deprived the as yet unlaunched Inflexible of her crown of
invulnerability, and demanded, with success, a revolution in the armor
manufacture of Europe.

As a compromise, compound armor, i.e., iron faced with steel, became
popular for a time. As with steel, its beginnings were old, dating
back at least to the year 1857. The first perfected compound plate,
made by Cammel & Co., of England, was tested at Shoeburyness in 1877.
It was composed of 5 inches of iron with a 4-inch face of steel; the
iron being raised to a welding heat and the molten steel poured on its
top. The great heat partially fused the contact face, the two metals
were united, and the combination was assured by immediate rolling.
Compound plates sprang in 1877 from obscurity to popularity; by 1879
iron armor had become obsolete with progressive naval powers, and, in
1880, both compound and steel plates had reached such development that
they were close rivals, the leading competitors being Cammel in England
and Schneider in France. Steel, however, slowly forged ahead during
the next decade; and, at its close, compound armor was practically
out of the race. In steel’s victory, its alloy with nickel, in minute
proportions, has materially aided; the combination imparting hardness
without decreasing the toughness of the plate. This material gave
superior results from the beginning. Its first plate, tested in 1889,
was 9⅓ inches thick; it was pierced by a Holtzer shell, whose body
did not pass wholly through and whose energy was 1.6 times that just
necessary to perforate a wrought-iron plate of the same thickness. To
the increased strength given by nickel there has been added a further
gain through the application of face-hardening processes—such as that
of the American, Harvey—which produce superficial carbonization,
transforming the surface into a high grade of very hard steel,
without the pronounced plane of demarcation between the two qualities
of metal, as in the weld of the compound plate. A 10¼-inch nickel
steel Harveyized plate, tested at the Indian Head Proving Grounds in
1892, showed a strength which previously had never been equaled in
the history of armor, and established beyond question the value of
the face-hardening process, which, by various methods, is applied to
the nickel-steel plating of to-day. The distribution of armor in the
development of battleship construction is shown by the shaded sections
on Plates VI and VII, and its relative thicknesses, on various vessels
during this progress, by Plate VIII.

VII. THE RAM AND THE TORPEDO.

For two thousand years the ram—the razor-edged “beak” of the swift
galley—was the chief naval weapon. With the advent of sail-power and
the employment of gunpowder, it vanished from the seas; but to reappear
when the coming of steam gave again controllable propulsion. In 1859
there was built into the French frigate Magenta a sharp spur,—the
first modern ram. British construction of the modern era, from the
Warrior down, has also recognized this weapon, and it is to-day a
factor, although a minor one, in the design of all vessels of high
speed.

The ram has, however, but a scant record of service in action, while in
accidental collision it has wrought more than once appalling disaster.
The ironclad Merrimac rammed and sank in Hampton Roads, in March,
1862, the United States sailing sloop-of-war Cumberland, which, under
the gallant Morris, went down with guns thundering and ensign flying.
On July 20, 1866, during the action off the island of Lissa, in the
Adriatic, the Austrian flagship Ferdinand Maximilian rammed the Italian
armorclad Re d’ Italia, which, with many of her 800 men, sank with
a swiftness that chilled the blood of those who watched. Like this,
in its sudden tragedy, was the destruction of the British battleship
Victoria by her consort, the Camperdown, off Tripoli, Syria, in the
summer sunlight of a June day in 1893. The ram of the latter vessel cut
a deep and fatal gash in the Victoria, which within ten minutes turned
bottom upward and went down, bow first, bearing with her 321 officers
and men, whose unfaltering discipline gave a heroic splendor to their
end. Despite these occasional instances of its deadly power, the ram
holds a secondary place among naval weapons. To strike a modern vessel
at high speed will require more than the skill of the swordsman.

The torpedo, like the ironclad, was an American invention, whose
neglect by the United States government brought retribution when this
deadly engine of war in 1861–65 destroyed not a few war-vessels flying
our flag. Bushnell of Connecticut during the Revolution appears to have
invented both the submarine boat and the marine torpedo, the latter
being fired by clock-work. Fulton also met success in similar work
during the period extending from 1801 to 1812. All of the elements of
modern torpedo warfare, excepting the use of steam, compressed air, or
electricity as a motive power, had been thus conceived by the early
dawn of this century. The torpedoes of our day are practically of but
two classes: the “mine,” or stationary (either “buoyant” or “ground,”
as its position in the water determines), and the automobile, or
“fish” torpedo. The former type is fired either by closing an electric
circuit in a station on shore, or by the ship herself in contact,
or in electric closure. During the Civil War nearly thirty vessels
were sunk by mines, usually wooden barrels filled with gunpowder and
fired by hauling lines or slow-burning fuses. It was a mine-field
over which Farragut charged at Mobile Bay, when he uttered his famous
oath and went “full speed ahead,” with the cases of the fortunately
impotent torpedoes striking the Hartford’s bottom; it was a mine which,
it is claimed, sunk the Maine; and it was a mine-field which kept
Sampson’s battleships from entering the harbor of Santiago de Cuba.
The stationary torpedo is now charged with gun cotton or other high
explosive.

The origin of the most prominent of the automobile torpedoes is due
to Captain Lupuis of the Austrian navy, and its development from 1864
onward to Whitehead, an Englishman. It is a cigar-shaped submarine
vessel from 14 to 19 inches maximum diameter and from 14 to 19 feet
long, which is blown from a torpedo-tube or gun within the ship by
compressed air or an impulse charge of gunpowder. Twin-screw engines
contained within its hull, and driven by compressed air stored in
a reservoir therein, drive it at about thirty knots speed through
an effective range of 600 yards. In its nose or “war-head” there
is carried a large charge of gun cotton or other high explosive,
which is fired by contact with the enemy’s hull. It is provided with
both horizontal and vertical rudders, the depth of immersion being
regulated by intricate machinery contained in the “balance-chamber.”
The Whitehead has a somewhat formidable rival in the United States in
the torpedo invented by Rear Admiral Howell, U. S. N. The automobile
torpedo has never yet scored in battle against ships in motion. Its
position in the naval warfare of the future is yet unfixed. The one
certainty is, that its blow when struck home is almost surely fatal to
ship and crew. The development of the submarine torpedo-boat, whose
weapon is the Whitehead, has in recent years received much attention
through the labors of the American Holland and others. France, in the
Gustavus Zede, of 260 tons, has a diving boat of this character, for
which much is claimed.

VIII. THE UNITED STATES FLEET.

Until the advent of the ironclad, the ships of the United States were
equal, if not superior, in seaworthiness and fighting qualities to any
in the world. The high standard set by the Constitution and her class
of 1797 was maintained for sixty years; and, especially during the
period from 1840 to 1860, the officers and men of the United States
navy trod the decks of the finest ships afloat. They felt—as their
successors feel—that, ton for ton and gun for gun, they had no foe to
fear. The early steamers of the Powhatan class built in the late 40’s
were a credit to the nation; the five screw frigates of the Merrimac
type (1856–57) aroused the admiration and imitation of foreign experts,
and the five corvettes which followed them in 1858–59–60, of which the
noble Hartford was the chief, bore their full share in the war which
was so soon to come. The gallant Kearsarge was the leader of a new
class introduced in 1859.

During the Civil War two vessels, the Monitor and the New Ironsides,
appeared which have left lasting traces on all battleship construction
since their day. The great fleet of monitors, “tin-clads,” “90-day
gunboats,” “double-enders,” and the like, which preceded and followed
them during those dark years, served their country well. With the
ending of that war, in the internal task of reconstruction and
development, our maritime power was neglected and our fleet dwindled
away. Its _renaissance_ dates from the appointment of the first Naval
Advisory Board in June, 1881. The growth since then has been so much
a matter of national interest and pride that it needs no detailed
recounting here; its results have been summarized previously herein.

The sea-going personnel of the United States navy includes the
line, medical, pay, and marine officers, the chaplains and warrant
officers—a total on March 1, 1899, of 1589, with an enlisted force of
17,196 blue-jackets and 3166 marines. The officers who serve on shore
are the naval constructors, civil engineers, and the professors of
mathematics, a total of 69.

Line officers are the commanders, navigators, gunners, and, by recent
law, the engineers of our ships of war. Marine officers have charge
of the policing of ships and shore-stations and of the guns of light
calibre afloat. The duties of the remaining officers are indicated by
their titles. The titles of line officers and their relative rank, as
compared with that of officers of the army, are:—

NAVY. ARMY.

Admiral General.
Rear-Admiral Major or Brigadier-General.
Captain Colonel.
Commander Lieutenant-Colonel.
Lieutenant-Commander Major.
Lieutenant Captain.
Lieutenant Junior Grade First Lieutenant.
Ensign Second Lieutenant.

Line and marine officers and naval constructors are educated at
the United States Naval Academy; all other officers are appointed
from civil life. The Academy was founded in 1845 and is located at
Annapolis, Md. The course comprises four years at the school and two
years at sea on a naval vessel. The number of cadets at Annapolis is
usually about 260.

It is by reason of wars that navies exist, and a few words as to
our—now happily ended—conflict with Spain, may fitly close this
review of naval progress. The military lessons of that struggle
have been fully set forth by able writers. More important, by far,
than these is its teaching as regard to our state and future as a
nation. The world has learned that the people of these United States
are stirred still by the same stern and dauntless spirit which, in
Revolution and Civil War, has made and kept us a nation. Furthermore,
with one swift stroke, the bounds which in theory and in territory
circumscribed us have been swept away, and the United States have
passed from a continental to a world power. This is not chance. It is
but the leading onward to a destiny whose splendor we may not measure
now, whose light and peace and prosperity shall traverse a hemisphere.
The one note of sadness in it all is the memory of the gallant dead,
of the heroes who fell that this might be. To them, in Cuba and the
Philippines, Columbia—with a smile of pride and a sob of pain—drinks
in the wine of tears to-day, as the smoke of battle fades.

ASTRONOMY DURING THE CENTURY

BY SELDEN J. COFFIN, A.M.,

_Professor of Astronomy, Lafayette College, Easton, Pa._

ITS PROGRESS, ACHIEVEMENTS, AND NOTABLE RESULTS

Astronomy, the oldest of all the family of sciences, is not a whit
behind its sister branches in activity of research and brilliance of
discovery. The assiduity and zeal of its devotees are marvelous. The
celestial field is so wide, the depths of space between the stars so
vast, that no assurance can ever be given to an astronomer that a
lifetime of faithful and intelligent research will be rewarded with
even a single discovery of importance. In this respect it differs
materially from other branches of science.

Nevertheless the patient labor of those who serve in its temple has
rarely failed to receive an adequate reward. The discovery made in
August, 1877, by Professor Asaph Hall, of Washington, that the planet
Mars is attended by two satellites, is a convincing illustration
of this peculiarity of the pursuit of astronomy as a study. An
indefatigable watcher of the skies for many years, Professor Hall,
looking at this planet at its opposition in 1877, when it was unusually
near to the earth, was surprised to note two tiny points of light
quite close to it; seeing them again the next evening, changed in
their positions relative to Mars, it flashed upon him that the firm
tradition that Mars had no moons was now disproved. His name will
be forever associated with these two bodies, Deimos and Phobos, as
their discoverer, although they are but wee orbs, only seven miles in
diameter.

I. ASTRONOMY A CENTURY AGO.

The end of the eighteenth century found the Copernican theory of
astronomy well established, the principles laid down by Kepler and
Newton fully elaborated, and the application of the higher mathematics
to the needs of astronomy complete. But there were, as yet, no large
telescopes, and observatories were few. In Germany, a great disposition
to make observations in this science and in meteorology was displayed
in 1783 and for a few years following, and the records then made have
proved of much value in confirming discoveries announced at later
periods.

When Sir William Herschel, on March 13, 1781, pointed out a little star
in the constellation of the Twins, and found that it had a perceptible
disk and a slight motion, and was therefore not a star, but a newly
found planet, to which the name Uranus was soon given, a careful
inspection of the notebooks of previous observers showed that Uranus
had been observed and recorded as a fixed star on twenty previous
occasions in that century. One man had seen it twelve times, and made
his record of it on a paper bag purchased at a perfumer’s. Had he been
a man of sufficient order and method to have penned what he saw on the
regular records of his observatory, to him would have come the glory of
the great discovery of that century.

II. HOW “BODE’S LAW” PROMOTED RESEARCH.

An erroneous guess, if it is a good guess, sometimes produces excellent
results. In 1778, Bode, of Berlin, published a “law” that states the
distances of the various planets from the sun. It is often expressed
simply in this way: Set down 4, and add to it successively the numbers
3, 6, 12, 24, etc., and the sums obtained, viz., 4, 7, 10, 16, 28,
etc., represent the relative distances of all the planets from the
sun, viz., Mercury 4, Venus 7, Earth 10, Mars 16, [Asteroids 28],
Jupiter 52, etc. In reference to all the planets then known to exist,
the correspondence of the alleged law to the facts was remarkable. The
one point in which the alleged system utterly failed was in requiring
the existence of a planet to fill the gap between Mars and Jupiter. So
boldly did Biela press his convictions of the correctness of this law
upon the notice of his fellow-workers, that they resolved, in 1800,
to divide the zodiac into twenty-four zones, to be apportioned among
them, for the express purpose of searching for undiscovered planets.
This well-organized effort was, erelong, rewarded by the surprising
discovery of four new planets, the first one on the first night of
the new century, January 1, 1801, and three more soon after. As no
more seemed to be forthcoming, the search was relinquished in 1816.
A fifth was found in 1845, and nearly five hundred since. Since 1891
photography has been wondrously serviceable in finding these bodies.
A sensitive plate, on being exposed toward that part of the sky which
it is desired to examine, will record all the perceptible stars as
round disks; while any planets that appear in the field of view will,
by their motion, leave their trace in the form of elongated trails or
streaks, thus betraying themselves at once on the photographs. In this
way Charlois, of Nice, Italy, has found nearly ninety small planets.
All these planetoids, as the minor planets are often termed, are quite
small, being but twenty to one hundred miles in diameter, and not
consequential members of the solar system. Bode’s law thus fulfilled
its temporary mission; but egregiously failed when Neptune claimed
admission to a place in the solar system, for its distance from the sun
was utterly out of harmony with that required by the law of Bode.

III. HOW NEPTUNE WAS FOUND.

The patience of Job had a strong parallel in the labors of those
tireless toilers to whose minute computations we owe our knowledge of
Neptune’s path in the skies. For this far-off planet was discovered
not by the use of a telescope, or any optical instrument, but simply
by a process of mathematical reasoning. The story is simply this. For
sixty years after Uranus was recognized, there were irregularities in
its motion that could not be satisfactorily accounted for. In the orbit
that it was believed to pursue, it was sometimes in advance of its
proper position, and sometimes it seemed to fall behind. Sometimes it
appeared to be drawn a little to the right, and at other times as far
the other way.

The thought at last came separately to several penetrating minds, not
that the observations of its position were in error, but that Uranus
must be drawn away from its supposed path by the attraction exercised
upon it by some unseen body. And if such an object existed, was it
a planet? Where was it? How large was it? What was its path in the
far-off ether?

[Illustration: THE MOVEMENT OF URANUS AND NEPTUNE.

The inner circle shows the position of Uranus at various dates; the
outer circle the position of Neptune. The arrows show the direction
toward which Uranus was drawn.]

In the year 1842, the Royal Society of Sciences of Göttingen proposed
as a prize question the full discussion of the theory of the motions
of Uranus. It was specially sought to learn the cause of the large
and increasing error of Bouvard’s Tables that had been relied upon to
show its motion and its precise position at any time. Several able
mathematicians undertook this intricate problem. Among them were
John C. Adams, of Cambridge University, England, Sears C. Walker,
of Washington, a man whose sad fate it was to pass away ere his
magnificent abilities could receive extended recognition, and M. Le
Verrier, of Paris. Working unknown to each other, they reached similar
conclusions almost at the same time. Though not the first to solve
the problem, the brilliant Frenchman was the first to announce his
result, which he did by writing a letter to Dr. Galle, of the Berlin
Observatory, where there was one of the largest telescopes in Europe,
and asking him to search for his computed planet, and assigning its
supposed place in the heavens. The very night he received the letter
Dr. Galle found the planet within one degree of the point designated.
The next night it had moved one minute of space, and was also seen to
have a perceptible disk. This settled the question, and stamped it as
a planet. Le Verrier well merited the title bestowed upon him, “First
astronomer of the age.”

IV. METEORITES.

The nineteenth century will be forever memorable for its witnessing
the closing career and final destruction of a famous comet. First
noticed in France, in 1772, and rediscovered, in 1826, by an Austrian
officer named Biela, it bears his name. His computation showed that it
traversed its orbit in six and one half years. When it reappeared in
1846, and again in 1852, it was seen to have split into two unequal
fragments. It has not been seen since; but at every time when its
return should have taken place the earth has passed through showers of
meteors supposed to be its constituent particles, and to indicate its
entire disintegration.

During the meteoric shower of 1885, on the 27th of November, a large
iron meteorite fell in Mazapil, Mexico, and chemical and physical
investigation joined to pronounce it a part of the lost Biela’s comet.

The large cabinets of the world contain hundreds of specimens of
meteorites, known to be such by their chemical composition, but only
a few have actually been seen to fall. The most remarkable fall ever
witnessed was that of May 10, 1879, in Iowa, in which the heaviest
stone weighed 437 pounds. On April 8, 1893, an aerolite fell near
Osawatomie, Kansas, and struck the monument to John Brown that had
been erected through the efforts of Horace Greeley in 1863. The meteor
broke off the left arm of the statue. A Texas meteorite, owned by Yale
University, weighs 1635 pounds. A meteorite that fell in Jiminez, in
1892, now deposited in the city of Mexico, weighs twenty tons; and one
lying on the coast of Labrador, which it is proposed to bring to the
United States, is said to be still more massive.

V. DO METEORS OFTEN STRIKE THE EARTH?

It must not be thought that meteors usually strike the earth. In truth,
but few of them do. The earth is surrounded by them, cold, dark,
invisible, because unillumined. It is only when they become heated by
rapidly impinging on the atmosphere that they can be seen at all; and
unless they come near enough to become subject to the dominant power of
the earth’s attraction, they pass off into space unnoticed, and their
presence unsuspected.

[Illustration: JAMES H. COFFIN,

Late Professor of Astronomy, Lafayette College, Easton, Pa.]

A case in point is the brilliant “fire-ball” of July 20, 1860, that
moved rapidly over the United States, from Wisconsin to Cape Cod, and
then passed off into the skies. The entire time of its visible flight
over a path of thirteen hundred miles was about two minutes. It was
seen about ten o’clock in the evening. It was estimated to be from one
hundred to five hundred feet in diameter, allowing for an increase as
it expanded by reason of its striking with such velocity the lower
and denser layers of the air. Its size and brilliancy were such as to
arrest the attention of hundreds of persons, some of whom crouched in
fear, and even alleged that they heard it hiss as it flew over their
heads. Some fishermen in Lake Huron had ropes over the sides of their
boat, ready to spring into the water if it came too near.

James H. Coffin, LL. D., then Professor of Astronomy in Lafayette
College, made an exhaustive study of this unusual phenomenon, and,
under the patronage of the Smithsonian Institution, published a volume
containing many observations that he collected, with the mathematical
results derived from them. Professor J. Hann, of Vienna, the highest
authority on this subject, said that it was the most comprehensive
study of a meteor’s path ever accomplished. Six years were spent in
making the computations.

Self-illumined by the heat evolved in striking the various layers of
the earth’s atmosphere, it became sufficiently bright to be first seen
when seventy miles above the surface of the earth. It was within forty
miles of touching us at the time it was over the Hudson River, when
the great heat acquired by its rapid transit caused it to burst into
two masses, which—like Biela’s comet—continued to pursue separate
courses, side by side, until they were lost to view in their ascending
flight, being last seen from the deck of a vessel off the island of
Nantucket.

No part of the fire-ball struck the earth. Its orbit was an hyperbola,
a curve not often found in nature, such that it can never come near us
again unless, by the superior attraction of some celestial body, its
course may be changed, and a new orbit result.

VI. ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATORIES.

The Royal Observatory, at Greenwich, England, was founded by Charles
the Second in 1675. Its main purpose was to extend astronomical
knowledge, so that navigators might better find the position of
their ships at sea. This institution retains its prominence. All the
longitudes on our maps are reckoned from it, and Greenwich time is used
on every ship that traverses the ocean. The “Nautical Almanac,” issued
by the Observatory, was an indispensable part of the outfit of every
sea captain until, in 1852, the United States provided its own American
Ephemeris, a collection of tables of the motions and places of the
sun, moon, and planets for every day and hour, and occultations of the
stars, with rules for calculating longitude and the like.

Many valuable observations of the transit of Venus in 1769 were made
at points near Philadelphia; but almost seventy years ensued before
America witnessed the erection of any permanent buildings devoted to
the purposes of this science.

President John Quincy Adams, who was highly versed in science, and held
the position of president of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences
in Boston for twenty years, often urged this matter on the attention of
Congress, but without success.

President Thomas Jefferson, who was also a man of no small scientific
information, as evidenced in his keeping a systematic weather record
at his home in Monticello, Virginia, proposed an elaborate survey of
the national coast. This was authorized by Congress in 1807. In the
year 1832, in reviving an act for the continuance of the Coast Survey,
Congress was careful to append the proviso “that nothing in the act
should be construed to authorize the erection or maintenance of a
permanent astronomical observatory.”

The expected return of Halley’s comet in 1835 again stimulated popular
interest in the science, and aroused an intense desire to provide
serviceable instruments, and to establish buildings suitable for
their care and use. To Williams College, Massachusetts, belongs the
honor of erecting, in 1836, the first astronomical observatory on
this continent. Under its revolving dome was mounted an Herschelian
telescope of ten feet focus, which later became the property of
Lafayette College, where it is still preserved. In 1843, John Quincy
Adams laid the corner-stone of the Longworth Observatory in Cincinnati,
and delivered a commemorative address, his last great oration. The
construction of the United States Naval Observatory at Washington soon
followed, and before 1850 there were fourteen observatories established
in this country. Nearly all the instruments they contained were made
abroad, chiefly in Munich and London. Since then the number has risen
to two hundred recognized observatories, of which twenty-four are of
superior order, where systematic work is daily pursued, and the results
are regularly published in book form. About two hundred observatories
exist in other nations.

VII. IMPROVED INSTRUMENTS; THEIR EFFECT ON THE SCIENCE.

The great improvements in telescopes made during the century have been
fruitful in two ways; a better knowledge of the surface of the moon and
of the planets has been gained, and we have been enabled to learn with
precision the exact motions and times of revolution of these bodies
and of their accompanying moons. This information, by the use of the
laws ascertained by Kepler and La Place, gives us their exact distance,
dimensions, and mass. With the increase of telescopic power, the census
of the starry host has been so augmented that the number of stars
within reach of our modern instruments exceeds 125,000,000. But we had
gone little beyond this sort of information until the invention of the
spectroscope.

Previous to the year 1859 a few meteors, composed chiefly of stone
or iron, some of which had been actually seen to fall from the sky,
had been subjected to chemical analysis; but outside of this naught
was known of the physical constitution of other worlds than ours. Our
ignorance on this point was complete. All our attempts to become better
acquainted with the structure of the planets, the composition of the
sun, and the nature of the fixed stars would probably have been in vain
but for the invention of the spectroscope. This surprising instrument
is a master-key with which to unlock many of Nature’s mysteries; her
recesses are brought to view, and the farthest star is subjected to an
accurate chemical analysis, so far as the light that comes from it is
sufficient to disclose the materials of which it is composed.

[Illustration: THE LICK OBSERVATORY, MOUNT HAMILTON, CALIFORNIA.]

The wondrous use of electricity as an agent for the production of
light, heat, and power is no greater achievement, in its way, than is
Spectrum Analysis in bringing to our earthly laboratories the work of
the Divine Hand performed in distant regions of space. Yet the story
of the spectroscope is easily told. In its essential elements it is
merely this: A ray of light, entering a darkened room through a hole
in the window shutter, produces a bright beam on the opposite wall. A
triangular glass prism held close to the crevice turns this beam into a
band of rainbow hues. If the hole can be changed into a small slit, say
one fourth of an inch high and one fiftieth of an inch wide, and if the
light can further be made to pass in succession through several prisms,
instead of through one, the band will be so elongated thereby that its
various and surprising markings can be thoroughly traced and fully
studied.

[Illustration: THE SPECTROSCOPE.]

To this band of bright colors Sir Isaac Newton gave the name of the
solar spectrum. The image formed by the light of any luminous body,
after it has passed through a prism, is said to be the spectrum of that
body.

VIII. THE SPECTROSCOPE AND ITS TRIUMPHS.

The spectroscope consists essentially of three tubes joined in the
form of the letter Y, one of which is a small telescope, in the focus
of which a narrow slit is placed to admit the ray of light that is to
be examined; a prism, or a ruled grating that disperses the light, so
as to form a spectrum; and a view telescope, with which to observe the
various parts of the spectrum.

By using a small telescope to view the spectrum of the sun, Fraunhofer,
a German optician, in 1814, discovered that the whole length of
the spectrum was crowded with dark lines, very narrow, indeed, but
scattered all through the seven hues. He found that sunlight, whether
taken directly or reflected from clouds or from the moon or planets,
invariably gave the same spectrum; but in no case did light from the
stars give a spectrum of the same sort as that from the sun.

[Illustration: YERKES TELESCOPE, UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO.

Largest in the World.]

Dr. Kirchhoff, of Heidelberg, in 1859, explained the origin of the
dark lines, and showed that there are three kinds of spectra: first,
that of an incandescent solid or liquid, which is always perfectly
continuous, showing neither dark lines nor bright; second, the spectrum
of a glowing gas, which consists of bright lines or bands separated by
dark spaces. These lines are characteristic of the chemical elements
that cause them; and so, from the composition of the bright lines in
a spectrum, it is possible to tell their origin. Third, a spectrum
crossed by dark lines; which occurs when an incandescent solid is
viewed through absorbent vapors.

In the solar eclipse of 1868, M. Janssen first noticed that the solar
prominences gave a spectrum of the second kind, and thus proved that
the prominences consist of glowing gas. Since that time the march of
discovery has been exceedingly rapid.

This simple instrument has thus led the way to a knowledge of the
elements composing every heavenly body, no matter what its distance,
provided only it is giving out light intense enough to reach our gaze.
For the perfection both of the telescope and spectroscope we owe
much to the optical skill and mechanical dexterity of the Clarks and
Rowland, Hastings and Brashear, all Americans.

About forty chemical elements have now been recognized in the sun.
The most prominent are iron, calcium, hydrogen, nickel, and sodium.
A distortion, or displacement, of some of the lines in the spectrum
enables us to calculate the speed at which the gases are rushing toward
or from us. A given line in the spectrum of Aldebaran is displaced
toward the violet in such a way as to show that the star is approaching
the sun at the rate of thirty miles a second; while a similar line, in
the case of Altair, so deviates toward the red end of the spectrum as
to prove that it is receding from the solar system at a velocity of
twenty-four miles a second. By this principle, recognized by Doppler in
1842, the motions of about one hundred stars toward or from the solar
system have been ascertained.

There is no question but that the solar system, as a whole, is steadily
moving away from Sirius, and toward the constellation of Hercules;
whether faster than at a rate of twelve miles every second is still
scarcely decided; but this rate would be about a million miles a day,
or three hundred and seventy million miles a year.

IX. WHAT IS DONE IN A LARGE OBSERVATORY; ITS WORK.

A visitor who wants to know what is done in a great observatory might
go to Harvard some evening. He would probably find the large refractor
pointed toward the satellites of Jupiter, Uranus, or Neptune, with a
view of noting their precise places, so as to compute tables of their
exact motions; or he might find a laborious observer watching such
double stars as have considerable proper motion, and making drawings of
conspicuous nebulæ, so that future astronomers may be able to decide
whether time has wrought any changes in their constitution or figure.
The great glass at Princeton, under the charge of Professor Charles A.
Young, is largely used for spectroscopic work, examining the sun’s
photosphere by day, and noting the spectra of the stars at night.
Spectral observation is an important part of the routine at the Yerkes
Observatory in Wisconsin.

Many faint comets have been successfully photographed at the Lick
Observatory, on Mount Hamilton, California, and elsewhere by the use of
very sensitive plates and a long exposure.

S. W. Burnham, of Chicago, is famed for his acuteness of vision, tested
in having detected and measured over one thousand double stars which
to other eyes had appeared only as single stars. The discovery of
these objects belongs wholly to the nineteenth century; for in 1803,
Sir William Herschel first announced the existence of sidereal systems
composed of two stars, one revolving around the other, or both moving
about a common centre. Some of these binary systems have periods of as
great a length as fifteen hundred years; and some are as brief as four,
and even two days. Some of them afford curious instances of contrasted
colors, the larger star red or orange, and the smaller star blue or
green.

X. THE NATIONAL OBSERVATORY AT WASHINGTON.

[Illustration: PROFESSOR WILLIAM HARKNESS,

Astronomical Director U. S. Naval Observatory, Washington, D. C.]

Professor William Harkness, U. S. N., M. D., LL. D., is widely known
as the author of numerous astronomical and physical papers and books.
He has also designed a number of instruments and made important
discoveries. He has long been connected with the United States Naval
Observatory, and now holds the position of Astronomical Director. His
report for the year 1898 shows that the twenty-six inch reflector at
Washington is now nightly engaged in mapping the relative positions of
Rhea and Iapetus, the fifth and eighth satellites of Saturn, with the
intention of securing a new and final determination of the mass of that
planet, which has been heretofore reckoned as one 3492d of the sun.
The twelve-inch telescope is chiefly employed in studying comets and
asteroids, and on Thursday evenings is at the service of the public. In
the year 1898, 3778 observations were made with the nine-inch transit
circle, for which two men were detailed, with the services of five
computers.

A transit circle and an altazimuth instrument, each turned out of
solid steel, have recently been added to the equipment, and are of a
workmanship that compares favorably with anything ever manufactured
in Europe. It is asserted that the latter instrument will give more
accurate measurements of declination than a transit circle, which is an
innovation on long-cherished ideas.

Professor Simon Newcomb, of the United States Navy, is about to
issue new tables of Mars, Uranus, and Neptune, and a “Catalogue of
Fundamental Stars for the Epoch 1900.” During the year 1898 three
thousand copies of the American Nautical Almanac were published. This
is but an illustration of the scientific labor accomplished at this
busy hive of industry. During the year this observatory issued to
the navy 230 chronometers, 200 sextants and octants, and 1400 other
nautical instruments of value.

XI. STAR MAPS AND CATALOGUES.

In the year 128 B. C. Hipparchus put out a catalogue of 1025 stars
observed at Rhodes. Twenty such works succeeded this up to the year
1801, when Lalande, of Paris, brought out a list of 47,390 stars. It
will be remembered that few stars have names, except those known to the
Arabians of old, but are designated by their positions in the heavens.
It is customary to refer to them by their declinations and right
ascensions, as so many degrees north or south of the celestial equator,
and so many degrees, or hours, east of the vernal equinox—fifteen
degrees being the equivalent of an hour of right ascension—just like
the latitude and longitude of cities on a common globe.

During the nineteenth century many celestial atlases and astronomical
catalogues have been published. These contain lists of comets and
nebulæ, and the places of the double stars and of the fixed stars. Of
the latter alone over one hundred have appeared, of which Argelander’s
is by far the largest, as it contains the places of more than 310,000
stars. The catalogue prepared by the British Association in 1845 is
of great value, containing 8377 stars. Yarnall’s, of 10,658 stars,
published in Washington in 1873, is most accessible to us.

Professor C. H. F. Peters, of the Hamilton College Observatory,
Clinton, N. Y., the discoverer of so many asteroids, has prepared a
valuable series of star charts. By dividing the heavens into small
squares and carefully photographing each of them, the places of a vast
number of stars can be recorded with far greater accuracy than by the
old plan of a separate instrumental measurement of the position of the
stars. By the use of microscopes the determination of their positions
can be made with precision. These plates are preserved with care, and
when those of the same region of the skies, made in different years,
are compared, any variation in the relative positions of the objects
can be detected with certainty. The perfection of this method of
star-mapping is justly deemed one of the most important achievements of
the century.

For an amateur star-gazer who is not provided with a set of maps,
Whitall’s Planisphere is a very ready aid, as it can be instantly
adjusted to any day and hour. The inexperienced, and those who have no
instruments, can use it with ease and satisfaction to locate a thousand
of the most conspicuous stars.

XII. ASTRONOMICAL BOOKS AND THEIR WRITERS.

In England this attractive study has been popularized chiefly by the
interesting works of the two Herschels, who were voluminous writers,
the lectures of Proctor, and the admirable compend of facts so
assiduously gathered by G. F. Chambers in his delightful treatise on
astronomy.

In our own country the heights of theoretical astronomy have been
scaled by such minds as Benjamin Pierce, the profound mathematician of
Harvard University; James C. Watson, of Ann Arbor, whose early death
was a great loss to science; and Simon Newcomb, the genial savant
of Washington. Chauvenet and Loomis have taught us the meaning of
practical astronomy; and Olmsted, Young, Todd, and not a few others of
distinction have prepared text-books that fully present the elements of
the science.

Nor is this fascinating study limited to the students of the 484
colleges and universities of the land. The last report of the United
States Commissioner of Education shows that in the public and private
high schools of the nation there are over nine thousand boys and
sixteen thousand girls pursuing the study of astronomy.

XIII. THE PRACTICAL USES OF ASTRONOMY AS AN AID TO NAVIGATION AND
GEODESY.

The practical value of this science is best appreciated by the
navigator, who sees in the sun and moon his clock, and in the stars and
planets the ready means of learning his latitude and longitude. It is
one of the first tasks of the midshipman to become familiar with the
use of the sextant, by which he works out the problem of ascertaining
the exact place of the ship upon the ocean. Navigation is helpless
without the assistance of astronomy. Yet it is only the A, B, C of the
science that the sailor has any use for; its higher mysteries are away
beyond his needs and of no practical profit to him.

Nathaniel Bowditch, of Salem, Mass., in 1802, issued a book entitled
“The New American Practical Navigator,” which is still a standard
treatise for seamen. His rare acquirements as a mathematician were
signally displayed, and in a form that has proved enduring, when, in
1814–17, he translated into English, accompanied with copious notes of
his own, the profound work, “Celestial Mechanics,” penned by the gifted
La Place in 1799. Although in name a translation of a foreign book with
a commentary, it is in many respects an original work. Professor Elias
Loomis, who left to Yale University three hundred thousand dollars as
an endowment fund to aid in prosecuting astronomical research, said of
him, in 1850, “Bowditch has probably done more for the improvement of
physical astronomy than all other Americans combined.” Dr. Bowditch
published the work in four ponderous quarto volumes wholly at his own
private cost. These volumes he did not expose for sale, but generously
gave them to such persons as proved to him their ability to appreciate
and comprehend them. This outlay impaired the fortunes of his family,
but became his own unique monument.

This work remains one of the most profound efforts of mathematical
research on record. Bowditch’s accuracy has passed into a proverb.
He gave the latitude of all the principal seaports of the world with
marked precision; while some of the longitudes are now found to be
slightly in error, it is surprising that his determinations of those of
Boston and Philadelphia should be exactly the same as those obtained by
the best methods in use to-day. But he makes San Francisco and Halifax
seven miles too far to the east, and New York eight miles too far west.
But we are to remember that for this computation the best available
instruments were the chronometers of a century ago, and that lunar
observations were made with the old-time sextant.

[Illustration: ZENITH TELESCOPE.

Made for University of Pennsylvania by Warner & Swasey.]

As applied to geodesy, astronomy has added a process of ascertaining
geographical latitude with marvelous accuracy and speed by the use of
the zenith telescope, an instrument devised by Major Talcott in 1835.
This instrument can be set in a vertical direction with ease, and be
pointed alternately to two stars that cross the meridian at a brief
interval of time, the one north and the other south of the zenith.
Difficulties that arise from refraction are avoided, and the resulting
latitude is quickly computed. This method is largely employed in the
surveys of the public lands, as also in establishing the boundary
between the United States and British America.

XIV. NOTABLE EPOCHS IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY.

Worth marking as epochs of the nineteenth century were such dates
as October 10, 1846, when the first determination of difference of
longitude of two places was made by the use of the telegraph wire.
Sears C. Walker, in Washington, and E. Otis Kendall, in Philadelphia,
compared their clocks by interchanging telegraphic signals, and thus
found their respective longitudes.

In 1850, Professor William C. Bond, of Harvard College, invented the
chronograph. Through the urgency of Sir David Brewster, it was shown
in the great exhibition of that year in London, where a medal was
awarded for it. The chronograph was speedily adopted throughout Europe,
and together with other apparatus made by Bond constituted what there
became known as the “American method” of recording observations.
Through it the errors for which the “personal equation” is a partial
remedy are largely eliminated, and a superior definiteness of record is
obtained.

On August 7, 1869, the first application of the spectroscope to
the examination of the corona of the sun was the beginning of the
revelation of the inner mysteries of the constitution and activities
of the great luminary. The transit of Venus that occurred on December
6, 1882, was fruitful in measurements, by which the estimates of the
distance of the sun were reduced from the long-accepted figures, 95 to
92 millions of miles. Yet this loss of three millions of miles resulted
from the apparently trifling change of reckoning the sun’s parallax at
8.82″, instead of 8.57″. An occurrence of vast practical advantage to
the whole nation was that of November 18, 1883, when the four standard
meridians of railroad time were adopted and put into use. From that
day the clocks of the Union were set to keep either Eastern, Central,
Mountain, or Pacific Coast time.

Professor Edward E. Barnard had used the magnificent telescope of
thirty-six inches aperture, belonging to the Lick Observatory in
California, but a short time before he astonished the world by
discovering a fifth satellite of Jupiter, although it appeared as but
a faint speck of light. Besides other honors for this achievement, in
1894 the French Academy of Sciences awarded him the Arago medal, of the
value of a thousand francs, a distinction given but twice before, first
to Le Verrier, for the discovery of Neptune in 1846, and to Asaph Hall,
for finding the two moons of Mars in 1877.

“Personal equation” is the name given to the amount of error to which
any person is habitually liable in attempting to note the time of a
fixed occurrence. When the astronomer looks at a star passing the
cross-wires of his transit, he is likely to make the record one or
two tenths of a second after the true time, or possibly a like small
amount of time before the actual occurrence, by anticipation. This is
not a matter of wrong intention, nor due to willfulness. But in precise
observations, especially where comparisons are to be made between the
records of several persons, the “personal equation” must be determined,
if possible, and allowed for. Various methods of correcting this
inaccuracy have been used. But the best is that of Frank H. Bigelow,
of the Nautical Almanac Office, Washington, who, in 1890, devised a
process of taking star transits by photography. It entirely does away
with this source of error, and has proved of great value.

XV. DISCARDED DOCTRINES AND ABANDONED IDEAS.

A few generations ago an eight-day clock was to be found only in the
homes of well-to-do people, and a gold watch was a symbol of wealth,
such as to subject its wearer to a special tax. In this age of dollar
clocks and Waterbury watches, almanacs are no longer indispensable. We
do not regulate our time-pieces by the rising and setting of the sun;
nor can a future Jay Gould lay the foundation of his fortune, as did
the one best known by that name, by setting up rural noon-marks for a
fixed fee.

Some pleasant dreams of past decades have vanished in the light of
recent knowledge. The nebular hypothesis, that wondrous conception of
Swedenborg, elaborated by La Place and espoused by William Herschel and
so many others, as affording a full explanation of the method by which
our worlds were shaped into their present forms, has ceased to have
general acceptance. M. Maedler, director of the Dorpat Observatory in
1846, had a firm persuasion that the collective body of stars visible
to us has a movement of revolution about a centre situated in the group
of the Pleiades, and corresponding to the star Alcyone. But this notion
of a central sun around which all the solar system is circling has lost
ground.

The distortion in the orbit of the planet Mercury has been accounted
for by the urgent suggestion that there must be some planet, as yet
undiscovered, that disturbs the regularity of Mercury’s movements, but
whose orbit is so near to the sun as to baffle all ordinary efforts to
see it. It has received, by anticipation, the prenatal name of Vulcan.
Many eyes have peered most intently into the region indicated, and
some few have imagined they had found what they sought. A physician
of the village of Orgeres, France, M. Lescarbault by name, on March
20, 1859, saw such an object pass over the sun’s disk. The skillful Le
Verrier was much impressed by this physician’s minute account of the
occurrence. But there was no confirmation of the alleged discovery.
At the time of subsequent eclipses that part of the heavens has been
repeatedly examined closely, but in vain. So we must wait longer before
believing that Vulcan does exist.

When, in 1877, Professor Hall, through the powerful telescope at
Washington, saw that Mars was attended by two tiny satellites, he put a
permanent injunction on the further use of the once favorite phrase,

“The snowy poles of moonless Mars.”

And so of the question oft discussed in the old-time debating
societies, “Are the planets inhabited?” It may still be left in the
hands of young collegians, notwithstanding the fact that our largest
telescopes give only negative testimony.

In a solar eclipse in February, 1736, that was annular in shape, just
before the sun was completely hidden, the narrow horn of light seemed
to break into a series of dots, or luminous points, which, when noted
again a century later and described by Francis Baily, received the
name of “Baily Beads.” It was attempted to explain this as caused by
the moon’s mountains cutting off the last rays of sunlight, or else as
produced by irradiation. But with the advent of stronger telescopic
power the phenomenon has come to an end.

David Rittenhouse, of Norristown, whom Thomas Jefferson considered
“second to no astronomer living,” built an orrery worth a thousand
dollars, to illustrate mechanically the motions of all the planets,
and though the instrument is still treasured in the University of
Pennsylvania, and its duplicate at Princeton, among the relics of a
past age, it is assigned to the category of toys. Mural circles, much
depended upon to measure the declination of heavenly bodies, have
fallen into disuse, supplanted by improved transit instruments.

[Illustration: THREE-INCH TRANSIT, BY WARNER & SWASEY.]

XVI. PROBLEMS FOR FUTURE STUDY.

Many problems are in store for the future. The field for research still
opens wide. How the solar activity is to be maintained was answered by
Newton in the suggestion that comets falling into it kept up its supply
of matter and energy. Waterston, in 1853, propounded the thought that
meteoric matter may be the aliment of the sun. Now the prevalent theory
is that a contraction of the sun’s volume, constantly in progress,
but so slight as to be invisible to the most powerful telescope, is
competent to furnish a heat supply equal to all that can have been
emitted during historic periods.

Professor Newcomb answers the question, “How long will the sun endure?”
by saying, “The physical conclusion to which we are led by a study of
the laws of nature is that the sun, like a living being, must have a
birth and will have an end. From the known amount of heat which it
radiates we can, even in a rude way, calculate the probable length of
its life. From fifteen to twenty millions of years seems to be the
limit of its age in the past, and it may exist a few millions of years,
perhaps five or ten, in the future.”

[Illustration: CAROLUS LINNÆUS OF SWEDEN, FATHER OF MODERN BOTANY.

This illustration was prepared by a Swedish society, and represents
the famous botanist after his return from the exploration of
Lapland, and with a bunch of his favorite flower (_Linnæa
borealis_) in his hand.
]

STORY OF PLANT AND FLOWER

BY THOMAS MEEHAN,

_Vice President Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia_.

Botany, in its general sense, signifies the knowledge of plants. In the
earlier periods of human history plants appealed to mankind as material
for food or medicine; and down to comparatively recent times botanical
studies were pursued mainly in these directions. Dioscorides, a Greek,
who lived in the first century of the Christian era, is the earliest
writer of whom we have knowledge that can lay a claim to botanical
distinction, but the medical property of plants was evidently the chief
incentive to his task. It was not until the beginning of the sixteenth
century that botany, in its broad sense, became a study, and Le Cluse,
a French physician, who died in 1609, may be regarded as one of its
patriarchs. Still the medical uses of plants were steadily kept in
view. The English botanist, John Gerarde, who was a contemporary of Le
Cluse, or Clusius, as botanists usually call him, wrote a remarkable
work on botany,—remarkable for his time,—but this was styled a
“Herbal,” as were other famous botanical works down to the beginning of
the present century.

Following the year 1700, the knowledge of plants individually became so
extended that systematic arrangement became desirable. The first real
advance in this direction was made by Carl Von Linné, commonly known by
its Latin form, Linnæus, a Swede, born in 1707, and whose talents for
botanical acquirements seemed almost innate. In his twenty-third year
he saw the need of a better system, and commenced at once the great
work of botanical reform. He saw that plants with a certain number of
stamens and pistils were correlated, and he founded classes and orders
on them. Flowers with five stamens or six stamens would belong to
his class pentandria or hexandria, respectively, and those with five
pistils or six pistils pentagynia, or hexagynia, accordingly; and so on
up to polyandria, or polygynia—many stamens or pistils—of which our
common buttercup is an illustration. He further showed that two names
only were all that is necessary to denote any plant, the generic name
and its adjective, as, for instance, _Cornus alba_, the white Dogwood;
and that the descriptions should be brief, covering only the essential
points wherein one species of plant differed from another. This
became known as the sexual system. It fairly electrified intelligent
circles. People generally took to counting stamens and pistils, and
large numbers took pride in being botanists because they could trace
so easily the classes and orders of the plants they met. The grand old
man died in 1778, and though his artificial system had to give way to
a more natural method, he is justly regarded as the father of modern
botany.

[Illustration: THE GREEN ROSE.

Flower with leaves for petals.]

With the incoming of the nineteenth century, botany took a rapid start.
It ceased to be a mere handmaid to the study of medicine. Chemistry,
geography, teleology, and indeed the chief foundations of biology had
become closely interwoven with botanical studies; and thus the progress
of botany through the century has to be viewed from many standpoints.

In classification, what is known as the natural system has replaced
the sexual. Plants are grouped according to their apparent
relationships. Those resembling in general character the Rose form
the order _Rosaceæ_; the Lily, _Liliaceæ_. Sometimes, however,
a striking characteristic is adopted for the family name, as
_Compositæ_, or compound flower, for the daisy and aster-flowered
plants; _Umbelliferæ_, or umbel-flowering, as in carrot or parsley;
_Leguminosæ_, having the seed vessels as legumes, like peas and beans.

[Illustration: HEAD OF WHITE CLOVER, WITH A BRANCH FROM THE CENTRE.]

Classification has, however, derived much assistance from a wholly
new branch of the science known as Morphology. This teaches that all
parts of plants are modifications of other parts. What Nature may have
intended to be a leaf may become a stem; the outer series of floral
envelopes, or calyx, may become petals; petals may become stamens;
and even pistils may become leaves, or even branches. The green rose
of the florists is a case in which the leaves that should have been
changed into petals to form a perfect rose flower have persisted in
continuing green leaves, though masquerading as petals; and it is not
unusual to find in the rose cases where the pistils have reverted
to their original destination as the analogue of branches, and have
started a growth from the centre of the flower. So in an orange, the
carpels, or divisions, are metamorphosed primary leaves. Two series of
five each make the ten divisions. Sometimes the axis starts to make
another growth, as noted in the rose, but does not get far before it
is arrested, and then we have a small orange inside a larger one, as
in the navel orange. Just the reverse occurs sometimes. The lower
series is suppressed, and only the upper one develops to a fruiting
stage, when the small red oranges known as the Tangerines are the
results. Illustrations of these transformations of one organ to another
are frequent if we look for them. The annexed illustration shows a
condition of the white clover, which, instead of the usual round head,
has started on as a raceme or spike.

These wanderings from general forms were formerly regarded as monsters,
of no particular use to the botanical student, but are now welcomed as
guiding stars to the central features of Morphology. The importance of
this branch of botany, in connection with classification, can readily
be seen.

The studies in the behavior of plants have made remarkable progress
during the century, and this also derives much aid from morphology. The
strawberry sends out runners from which new plants are formed; but,
tiring of this, eventually sends the runner upward to act as a flower
stalk. What might have been but a bunch of leaves and roots at the end
of the runner is now converted into a mass of flowers and pedicels
at the end of a common peduncle. In some cases Nature reverses this
plan. After starting the structure as an erect fruit-bearing stem, it
sends it back to pierce the ground as a root should do. This is well
illustrated by the peanut.

In the common _Yucca_, the more tropical species have erect stems;
but in the form known in gardens as Adam’s needle and thread—_Yucca
filamentosa_—the erect stem is sent down under the surface of the
ground, and is then a rhizome, instead of a caudex, or stem.

[Illustration: PEANUT.

A pod magnified.]

Modification in connection with behavior is further illustrated by
the grapevine and Virginia creeper. The whole leading shoot is here
pushed aside by the development of a bud at the base of the leaf, that
takes the place of a leading shoot. The original leader then becomes a
tendril, and serves in the economy of the plant by clinging to trees
or rocks, or in coiling around other plants in support. Great progress
has been made in this department of botany within recent years. Darwin
has shown that the tendrils of some plants continue in motion for some
time in order to find something to cling to. The grapevine especially
spends a long time in this labor if there is difficulty in reaching a
host. The plant preserves vital power all this time, but no sooner is
support found, than nutrition is cut off, and the tendril dies, though,
hard and wiry, it serves its parent plant as a support better dead
than alive. The amount of nutrition spent in sustaining motion is found
to be enormous. A vine that can find ready means of support grows with
a much more healthy vigor than one that has difficulty in finding it.
Many plants present illustrations.

Much advance has been made in the knowledge of the motions of plants
as regards their various forms. Growth in plants is not continuous;
but is a series of rests and advances. In other words it is rhythmic.
The nodes, or knots, in the stems of grasses are resting-places.
When a rest occurs, energy may be exerted in a different direction,
and a change of form result. This is well illustrated by the common
Dogwood of northern woods, _Cornus florida_ on the eastern, and
_Cornus Nuttallii_ on the western slope of the American continent. On
the approach of winter the leaf is reduced to a bud scale, and then
rests. When spring returns these scales resume growth and appear as
white bracts. In the annexed illustration the scales that served for
winter protection to the buds are seen at the apex of the bracts. In
other species of Dogwood the bud scales do not resume growth. Energy
is spent in another direction. In this manner we have an insight as to
the cause of variation, which was not perceived even so recently as
Darwin’s time. We now say that variation results from varying degrees
of rhythmic growth—force; and that this again is governed by varying
powers of assimilation.

[Illustration: OUTLINE OF A WHITE DOGWOOD FLOWER (_Cornus florida_),
SHOWING BUD-SCALES DEVELOPED TO BRACTS.]

The Darwinian view, that form results from external conditions of which
the plant avails itself in a struggle for existence, is still widely
accepted as a leading factor in the origin of species. Those which can
assume the strongest weapons of defense continue to exist under the
changed conditions. The weaker ones do not survive, and we only know of
them as fossils. This is termed the doctrine of natural selection.

The origin and development of plant-life, or, as it is termed,
evolution, has made rapid advancement as a study during the century.
That there has been an adaptation to conditions in some respects, as
contended by Mr. Darwin and his followers, must be correct. The oak
and other species of trees must have been formed before mistletoe and
other parasites could grow on them. In the common Dodder—species of
_Cuscuta_—the seeds germinate in the ground like ordinary plants. As
soon as they find something to attach themselves to, they cut loose
from mother earth and live wholly on the host. As a speculation it
seems plausible that all parasites have arisen in this way. Some,
like the mistletoe, having the power, at length, to have their seeds
germinate on the host-plant, have left their terrestrial origin in
the past uncertain. A number of parasites, however, do not seem to
live wholly on the plants they attach themselves to. These are
usually destitute of green color. The Indian pipe, snow plant of the
Pacific Coast, and Squaw root of the Eastern States are examples;
the former called ghost-flower from its paleness. These plants have
little carbonaceous matter in their structure, and hence are regarded
as having formed a kind of partnership with fungi. This is known
now as symbiosis, or living together of dissimilar organisms, each
dependent mutually. The fungus and the flowering plant in these cases
are necessary to the existence of each other. They demand nitrogen
instead of carbonhydroids. The Squaw root, _Conopholis Americana_,
though attached to the subterranean portions of the trunks of trees,
is probably sustained by the fungus material in the old bark, or even
in the wood, rather than by the ordinary food of flowering plants.
Lichens, as it is now well known, are a compound of fungi and water
weeds (algæ), and this doctrine of symbiosis is regarded as one of the
great advances of the century.

It is but fair to say that the doctrine of evolution by the influence
of external conditions in the change of form, though widely accepted
at this time, is not without strong opponents, who point to the
occasional development or suppression of parts on the same plant,
though the external conditions must be the same. For instance, there
are flowers that have all their parts regular, as in the petals of a
buttercup; and irregular, as in the snap-dragon or fox-glove. But it
has been noted that irregular flowers have pendulous stalks, while the
regular ones are usually erect. But once in a while, on the same plant,
flowers normally drooping will become erect. In these cases the flowers
are regular. In the wild snap-dragon or yellow toad-flax, _Linaria
vulgaris_, one of the petals is developed into a long spur; the other
four petals have, in early life, become connate and transformed into
parts of the flower wholly unlike ordinary petals. But now and then
the original petals will all develop spurs, resulting in the condition
technically known as peloria.

Linnæus gave this name to this condition because it was supposed to be
“monstrous,” or something opposed to law and order. Through the advance
in morphological botany we have learned to regard it as the result of
some normal law of development, innate to the plant, and which could
as well be the regular as the occasional condition. In other words,
there is no reason why Nature might not make the five-spurred flower as
continuous in a wild snap-dragon as in a columbine. Many similar facts
are used by those who question the Darwinian law of development.

[Illustration: YELLOW TOAD-FLAX.

Flower in the peloria state.]

That nutrition has more to do in the evolution of form than external
forces has received much aid, as a theory, from the advance during
recent times of a study of the separate sexes of flowers. On coniferous
trees, notably the firs, pines, and spruces, the male and female
flowers are produced separately. The female, which finally yield the
cones, are always borne on the most vigorous branches. When these
branches have their supply of nutrition shortened and become weak, only
male flowers are produced. On the other hand, branches normally weak
will at times gain increased strength, and then the male flowers give
female ones. This is often seen in corn fields. The generally weak
tassel will have grains of corn through it. It is not infrequent to
find what should normally be perfect ears on stalks weaker than usual.
In these cases the upper portion of the ear will have male flowers only.

[Illustration: GRAINED CORN-TASSEL.]

In connection with the doctrine of development, much attention has been
given during the century to fertilization of flowers and the agency of
insects in connection therewith. On the one hand it is contended that
in all probability the flowers in the earlier periods of the world’s
history had neither color nor fragrance. In this condition they were
self-fertilizers, that is, were fecundated by their own pollen. In
modern phraseology they were in and in breeders. When the struggle for
existence became necessary, those which could get a cross with outside
races became more vigorous in their progeny, and thus had an advantage
in the struggle. In brief, without an occasional introduction of new
blood, as it might be termed, there was danger of a race dying out.
To support this view, Mr. Darwin published the result of a number of
experiments. Many of them favored either side, but the average was
in favor of the view that crossing was advantageous. Against this it
has been urged that an average in such cases is not conclusive. If a
number, though the minor number of cases, showed superiority by close
breeding in his limited experiments, a new set of observations might
have changed the averages, so as to make the minor figures in one
instance the major in others. Again, it is contended that to increase
a plant by other means than by seeds must be the closest kind of
reproduction; yet some plants, coeval with the history of man, have
been continued by offsets and are as strong and vigorous as ever. The
Banana is an illustration. Under cultivation it produces only seedless
fruits. It is raised wholly from young suckers or offsets from the
roots. Mythology gives it a prominent place in the Garden of Eden, and
its botanical name, _Musa paradisiaca_, originated in this legend.

Though much has been recorded in this line to weaken the force of the
speculations that flowers late in the history of the earth developed
color and sweet secretions in order to attract insects to aid in
cross-fertilization, they are strongly supported by the fact that a
large number of species, notably of orchids, are seldom fertilized
without insect aid in pollination.

But there are anomalies even here. Some plants capture and literally
eat the insects that should be regarded as their benefactors. These
are classified as insectivorous plants. Some seem to catch the insects
in mere sport, while in the act of conveying pollen to them. These are
known as cruel plants. There are numerous illustrations of this among
the families of _Asclepias_ and _Apocynum_, the milk-weed family. In
our gardens a Brazilian climber, _Arauga_, or _Physianthus albens_,
is frequently grown for its waxy flowers and delicious odor, but the
treacherous blossoms are frequently strung with the insects it has
caught.

In the northern part of America a common wild flower of one of these
families, _Apocynum androsmæfolium_, has this insect-catching habit.
Numerous small insects meet death, and hang to the flowers like scalps
to the wild Indian.

Considerable advance has been made in vegetable physiology, though
no one has as yet been able to reach the origin of the life-power in
plants. The power that enables an oak to maintain its huge branches in
a horizontal direction, or that can lift or overturn huge rocks, or
split them apart as the lightning rifts a tree trunk, is yet unknown.
On the opposite page is an illustration of a circumstance frequently
observed, wherein even a delicate root fibre can pierce a potato or
other structures.

[Illustration: BANANA FLOWERS.]

Possibly the greatest botanical advance of the century is in relation
to cryptogamic plants, those low organisms which as mildews and moulds
are most familiar to people generally. As microscopes increase in
power, new forms are discovered. Over forty thousand species have
already been described, and we may fairly say that there are nearly
half as many forms of vegetable life invisible to the naked eye as can
be seen by our unaided visual organs. Their wants and behaviors are
very much the same as in the flowering plants or higher orders, as
they are usually termed. But there is one great difference in this,
that they feed mainly on nitrogen, and have no use for carbon. They
care little for light, but yet have an upward tendency under certain
forms, as do those which seek the light. The agarics that revel in
the darkness of a coal mine, yet curve upward as heartily as a corn
sprout in the open air. Just as in flowering plants, also, they are
mostly innocuous, and indeed many absolutely beneficial to man, a very
small portion only being poisonous, or connected with the diseases of
the human race. Even in these cases their power is closely guarded
by nature. The spores of fungi are found to require such a nice
combination of conditions before they germinate, that, unless these
occur, they will retain their vegetative power many years in a state
of absolute rest. The mycelium of the mushroom, as the real plant—the
cobwebby portion under ground—only starts to grow when just so many
degrees of heat, neither more nor less, with just so much moisture, and
the proper food, are all at hand together; and large numbers are known
to be very select in the kind of food they will make use of at all.
One genus, known as _Cordyceps_, will only start when the spore comes
in contact with the head of a caterpillar. And various species of the
genus will avoid a kind of caterpillar that another would enjoy. In our
own country we have one that feeds on the larvae of the May Beetle,
and is known as _Cordyceps Melolonthæ_. In Australia is a very pretty
species, which takes on the appearance of the antlers of a deer. This
is known as _Cordyceps Andrewsii_.

[Illustration: THE CRUEL-PLANT.

Butterfly caught in the flower.]

[Illustration: OLD POTATO PENETRATED BY ROOTLET WITH A NEW POTATO.]

The most minute of these are known as microbes. They are chiefly
composed of a single cell, in the midst of which is the protoplasm, or
material in which life resides, but the exact nature of which is still
a mystery.

[Illustration: A FUNGUS (_Cordyceps Andrewsii_) GROWING FROM THE HEAD
OF A CATERPILLAR.]

One of the most useful and fascinating studies in modern times is
Geographical Botany. It is found to have a close relation to the
history of man, and to the changes which have occurred on the surface
of the earth. Plants follow man wherever he wanders; and though every
other trace of man should be abolished on the American continent,
the plants that came with him from the Old World would enable the
future historian to follow his tracks here pretty well. No one has any
historical evidence that what is now the Pacific Ocean was once land,
and that the area between the Pacific Ocean and the Mississippi was
once a huge sea, but botany tells the plain story. Only for botany we
should not know that the land now serving as the poles was once within
the tropics; and mainly by fossil gum trees on the American continent,
and the existence still of a few plants common to Australia, have we
the knowledge of some land connection between these distant shores.
Island floras, some of the species of which are now found only in
very limited areas, tell of large tracts submerged of which only the
mountain peaks are left as small islands, lonely in a wide expanse of
water, while other islands, with only a limited number of well known
species, tell of new upheavals within modern times.

It is in these lines chiefly that botany has advanced during the
century. Herbariums for dry and botanic gardens for living plants are
essential. The latter are not as necessary to the study as formerly, as
the facilities for travel bring the votaries of the science to distant
places in a short time. Nature furnishes the living material for study
at a less outlay of time and money than in the old way of growing
the plants for the purpose. Few modern botanic gardens have the fame
of those of the past. It is the great Herbarium of Kew, rather than
the living plants, that makes that famous spot the great school for
botany to-day. In our own country, the Herbariums of Cambridge, Mass.;
Columbia College, New York; the National at Washington; and that of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, are the most famous in
America.

PROGRESS OF WOMEN WITHIN THE CENTURY

BY MARY ELIZABETH LEASE,

_Ex-President Kansas State Board of Charities_.

The whole woman question may be briefly summed up as a century-old
struggle between conservatism and progress. Women are moving
irregularly, and perhaps illogically, along certain lines of
development toward a point that will probably be reached; while
conservatism, halting and fearful, is struggling blindly to hold points
and maintain lines that must be given up.

Unfortunately for the rapidity of women’s advancement, women themselves
have no thoroughness, no clearness, as to the fundamental cause of
their grievances or the ends to be attained, and are not yet alive to a
consciousness of the fact that the question of woman’s rights is simply
and purely a question of human rights, the basic solution of which, on
the broad plane of justice, will solve all the social, political, and
industrial problems of which the woman question forms a part.

The time when woman suffered silently and toiled patiently without
once questioning the justice of her lot has happily passed forever.
Confusion and antagonism are engendered because of misunderstanding of
the real movement. Women are consciously or unconsciously struggling
for that selfhood which has hitherto been denied them, and are seeking
for opportunity to develop that personality which Browning, Ruskin,
and other broad thinkers declare “is the good of the race.” The most
discouraging feature of the situation is the fact that women as a
whole do not realize that a politically inferior class is a degraded
class; a disfranchised class, an oppressed class; and that her economic
dependence upon man is the basic cause of her inferiority.

The grievances openly proclaimed by the advocates of woman suffrage
as causes of hostility are too frequently childish, unreasonable, and
unworthy of serious attention. In the majority of cases they centre
around some fancied wrong that is a result rather than a cause. The
keynote not only to the woman question, but to the labor question may
be found in the words of that deep thinker and able writer, August
Bebel: “The basis of all oppression is economic dependence upon the
oppressor.” The widespread discontent with present social conditions
is an augury of hope for the future. There is no element in the unrest
which need excite grave apprehension. Thoughtful people perceive
clearly that women are intensely human, nothing more, and that as human
beings they are entitled not only to food, clothes, and shelter, but to
an opportunity for development.

It is only as we are familiar with the oppression that has been the
common lot of women since the beginning of time that we can realize
that her lot has been sweetened, her condition ameliorated, and her
progress within the century marvelous indeed. The woman question,
historically considered, contains all the physical subjugation and
consequent inferiority which constituted all the differentiation
between the physical and mental powers of men and women. It contains
all the humiliation, uncertainty, and ultimate hope of her future.
The history of the woman question is analogous with the history of
the labor question, with the difference that woman slavery had its
origin in the peculiarities of her sexual being, while the laborer’s
slavery began when he was robbed of the land which is the birthright
of every human being. It will be seen, therefore, that woman’s slavery
antedates the thralldom of the thrall, and “was more humiliating, more
degrading, because she was treated and regarded by the laborer as his
servant, his inferior.” This condition largely prevails among laborers
to-day, and was indirectly given utterance to a few weeks ago, when
some of the members of the American Federation of Labor formulated
a traditional resolution demanding that “women be excluded from all
public work and relegated to the home,”—a demand that would be to
some extent reasonable, and no doubt acceptable, to the great army of
working-women, had the chivalrous laborers who formulated the demand
the ability and industry to provide a home for the women whom they
would render paupers by deprivation of work, and for the children for
whom their fathers were unable to provide. It is gratifying to know
that this resolution was lost in the committee room, and that its
formulation was greeted by the press of the whole country with a storm
of deserved disapproval.

Inasmuch as the rapidly increasing number of bread-winners among women
makes it evident that men are either unable or incompetent to provide
for them, it remains for the working-women of the country to formulate
a resolution demanding that men be excluded from all work that has
hitherto been considered as belonging to or peculiarly adapted to
women. What an army of mosquito-legged men from the eating-houses,
laundries, and dry-goods establishments would rise up to proclaim the
idiocy of women and protest against such injustice!

On the threshold of the world’s morning, says a distinguished writer
and worker in the German Reichstag of to-day, we may correctly assume
that woman was man’s equal in mental and physical power. But she became
his inferior physically, and consequently dependent upon his bounty,
during periods of pregnancy, childbirth, and child-rearing, when her
helplessness forced her to look to him for food and shelter. In the
childhood of the race might made right; brute strength was the standard
of superiority; the struggle for existence was crude and savage; and
thus this occasional helplessness became the manner of her bondage.

That nature is primarily responsible for the centuries of woman’s
enslavement there can be no doubt. And as nature’s laws are unchanging,
the advocates of woman’s political advancement would do well to
remember that woman’s greatest importance as a public factor can only
begin when the function of motherhood ceases. “In a real sense, as a
factory is meant to turn out locomotives or clocks, the machinery of
nature is designed in the last resort to turn out mothers. Life to the
human species is not a random series of random efforts; its course is
set as rigidly as the pathway of the stars; its laws are as immutable
as the laws of the Medes and Persians.” (Drummond’s Ascent of Man.)

Nature’s great work for the individual is reproduction and care of the
species. The first, Drummond terms the cosmic process; the second,
the moral process. Statistics show that one child out of every three
dies before maturity, and nature’s task is incomplete unless at least
two children be reared to the adult age by every family. Every couple,
then, at marriage, assumes the responsibility to society and posterity
of bringing three children into the world. Woman’s part in the
stupendous economy of nature is first and distinctively most important,
that of motherhood. She can only pay her debt to nature, fulfill her
mission to the world, and discharge her obligations to humanity by
faithfully discharging the duties of motherhood. But as the function
of motherhood ceases when the woman is in the prime of life, ripened
by experience and fortified by maternal ties, she may yet have ample
opportunity to exert her far-reaching influence in public work when
she has exemplified in her own life the words, Home, Love, Mother. And
there is, there can be, no rational objection to granting the fullest
suffrage to woman at this period.

[Illustration: MARY ELIZABETH LEASE]

Having located the basic cause of her dependence, it will be seen that
the only solution possible for the complete emancipation and mental
and physical development of woman is to render her, through industrial
freedom, so economically independent in every way of man’s grudging
bounty that she will scorn his pity, resent his abuse, and claim her
right to fullest individuality and opportunity as a human being.

For countless ages women were separated from the world by a barrier
as effective as the myriad-miled wall of China; vacillating between
the condition of slave and superintendent of the kitchen; taught
nothing but those flimsy accomplishments that would catch the eye
of the prospective husband and master; sneered at, ridiculed, and
abused whenever she attempted to cross the line which hoary prophets
and patriarchal slaveholders had marked across her path; subject to
man’s whim and caprice; her physical development, in time, became
meagre and crippled. And as her mental faculties were repressed and
imprisoned in the narrowest circle of feminine opinions, it became
difficult for her to rise above the most commonplace trivialities of
life. Thus it came about that the term “Weaker Sex,” originally used to
convey only the acknowledged truth that women are inferior to men in
physical strength, came to include the mind as well as body. Be this
as it may, the position of women for long centuries was inevitably one
of extreme cruelty and oppression. Countless bitter and unnecessary
limitations hedged her pathway and obstructed her development from
the cradle to the grave. It is not to be wondered at that she in time
became so inured to her degrading servitude as to accept it as her
natural position. Madame De Staël has truly said, “Of all the gifts and
faculties which nature has lavishly bestowed upon woman, she has been
allowed to exercise fully but one, the faculty to suffer.” The extent
of this suffering and the deteriorating influence which it has exerted
upon the race can never be estimated till Finis is written to the story
of humanity.

In the noonday of Grecian power and learning, woman trod not beside
man as helpmate and companion, but followed as his slave. Demosthenes
defines the wife as the “bearer of children, the faithful watch-dog
who guards the house for her master.” At the Council of Macon, held in
the sixth century, the question of the soul and humanity of women was
gravely weighed and debated, profound doctors of theology maintaining
that “woman is not a subject but an object for man’s use and pleasure.”
For centuries theological divines whetted their wit on helpless woman;
and the church in holy zeal persecuted the woman who was guilty of a
fault as a “daughter of the devil,” and held her up to public contumely
as the concentration of all evil.

Christianity, indeed, offered emancipation to women. It proclaimed a
startling doctrine,—the equality of the rich and the poor, the weak
and the strong, in the sight of God the Father. And it became evident
that such teachings would inevitably break down the barriers of class
and caste, eliminate injustice, and usher in a time when all should
stand equal before the law. But alas, the world, with the exception
of isolated and individual instances, has never been offered an
opportunity to test the efficacy of the all-corrective principles of
the religion which Christ gave to the world. The repression of women
biased the reformatory tendencies of Christianity, and rendered it as
ineffective as a medium of relief to the oppressed as our one-sided
political system of to-day. Christianity, under masculine domination,
was lost in the rubbish of churchianity, which, professing but failing
to practice the religion of Christ, has held woman in the same contempt
in which she has been held by all the ancient and idolatrous religions
of the world. Yet despite the fact that the great Master, were He to
come to-day, would scarcely recognize in the churches a trace of the
code which He lived and died to exemplify, it must not be forgotten
that the vital principle of religion never dies. It eventually attains
fullest development, and becomes identified with the progress of
civilization and the highest purpose of a people. Therefore, we may
reverently believe that in the ultimate triumph and rehabilitation of
practical Christianity lies the hope of the oppressed, and true liberty
not only for women, but for every human being.

[Illustration: Emma Willard]

Even now the mists are lifting. The great change in the position of
women—legal, social, and educational—within a hundred years is
breaking even the hard shell of orthodox usage. Whole denominations
have dropped the word “obey” from the marriage service. Many ministers
frequently omit it, or, if administered, it is pronounced by the bride
with mental reservation and looked upon as a word that has only the
most remote and shadowy significance. The new wine is breaking the old
bottles; the spirit of the nineteenth century is too progressive for
the usages and traditions of the eleventh century. Modern churchianity,
realizing that women constitute three fourths of its membership,
no longer wages a merciless warfare upon them. It has relaxed its
Pauline grip upon her throat, “I suffer not a woman to speak in the
churches.” And the more advanced theological bodies have offered her
the intellectual hospitality of the pulpit, where her eloquence is a
pleasing change to those who have grown tired of preachers’ platitudes.
Clerical decrees are no longer hurled at her defenseless head. The
doors of churches, schools, and colleges are swinging wide at her
approach, though they sometimes creak on their hinges. The ministers
no longer openly advocate that the gates of opportunity be bolted and
barred against her. There is everything to stimulate hope; the wings
of feminine nature have expanded till a return to the chrysalis is
impossible.

It is true that a very large number yet profess to believe that a
woman fulfills her whole mission in the world when she makes herself
as pretty and agreeable as possible, and devotes all her time and
attention to the discharge of domestic duties. But there has been a
wonderful modification of opinion since Schopenhauer declared that
“woman is not called to great things. She pays her debt to life by the
throes of birth, care of the children, and subjection to her husband.”
Two things have tended to bring about this modification of opinion;
the broader education and increased opportunities for development
attendant upon the growth of individual liberty and republican forms
of government; and the capability of self-maintenance due to improved
mechanical appliances. It is not mere inclination on the part of the
individual, nor is it the voice of the agitator, that is bringing about
these changes; it is the irresistible logic of events.

One hundred years ago the education of women in the most progressive
and wealthy families went little beyond reading and writing. In 1819,
when Mrs. Emma Willard issued an address to the members of the New
York legislature advocating the endowment of an institution for the
higher education of women, there was not a college in the country for
girls. In 1892, the colleges of the United States numbered more than
50,000 female students. In 1888, the ratio of female students to the
whole number of students pursuing a higher course of education in
universities and colleges in this country was 29.3 per centum, or a
little more than one fourth. At the same time the ratio in England was
11 per centum; in France, 2 per centum; while in Germany, Austria, and
Italy the ratio was so slight as to be but a mere fraction of 1 per
centum.

Such a thing as a female president of a college was unknown and
probably undreamed of in the eighteenth century; but we learn from the
Report of the Commissioner of Education for 1887–88 that there are in
the United States forty-two colleges and institutions for the superior
instruction of women having a woman for president.

In the high and secondary schools, in 1888, over one half of the
students were girls. And in the same year, tabulated statistics reveal
that 63 per centum of the teachers were women. And this percentage will
become greater and greater as we grasp the truth that woman is, by
gift of greater intuition and sympathy, the natural instructor of the
human race. The salaries paid to women teachers are grossly unfair when
compared to the pay of male teachers for the same or less work. But as
the difference in compensation is growing smaller every decade, there
is at least room for hope that this injustice will soon be righted.

The law of evolution is the discoverer and formulator of woman’s
advancement. The invention and use of gunpowder placed the peasant on
an equal war-footing with the mailed knight. The enormous increase
in mechanical appliances and productive machinery has taken woman
out of the rank of unpaid menials, has given her leisure for mental
development, opportunity to receive recompense for toil, and is largely
breaking down the physical barriers which had hitherto been considered
unsurmountable. Statistics show that there are forms of machinery
in the operation of which the production of a woman is even greater
than that of a man, thus furnishing an actual proof of the falsity of
the idea that woman is incapacitated for competition with man in the
physical world. And the trend of events is indicated by the statistics
given in the Report of the Commissioner of Labor, from which we learn
that in some trades and professions the percentage of women engaged has
increased fivefold in the last decade.

While woman’s work has always been a recognized factor in the world’s
progress, yet her admittance to the field of remunerative work is
limited to the last one hundred years; is, in fact, the prominent
feature of the nineteenth century. There is overwhelming evidence
that her work in every department to which she has been admitted is
as capable, acceptable, and in every way as faithfully performed as
the work of her brother man. In the last century it is estimated that
not more than 1 per centum of artists and teachers of art were women;
while in 1890 women comprised 48.08 per centum, or nearly one half of
that profession. Nearly the same proportion of increase is found in the
ranks of teachers and musicians,—women now forming over 60 per centum
of the teachers of the United States.

There are now about three million women and girls in this country
who earn their own livelihood. And the eleventh census reveals
the startling information that in the city of New York there are
twenty-seven thousand men who are supported by their wives. Yet these
men, useless to society, a burden to the women who support them, are
permitted the immunities and privileges of law and custom, while women
have equality only in the duties and punishments.

At the beginning of the eighteenth century there were but few
occupations in which women were permitted to engage. Their abilities
and ambitions were restricted to the school and the home. In the latter
they received food and shelter as compensation; in the former, but
one half or one third the salary allowed to male teachers. The first
noticeable change in woman’s condition, when she became something
more than a mere household drudge, whose busy hands carded and wove,
spun and knit, the family supply of cloth, dates from the first bale
of cotton grown in this country in the early years of the eighteenth
century. In that bale of cotton lay the seeds of not only a new
movement in labor, but the beginning of a new epoch for woman, in which
her work and wages were destined to take coherent shape and form. In
all industrial progress since that time women have taken an active part
while receiving a meagre share of the product. Forced by the course of
events to emerge from seclusion and repression, she has passed from
one stage of development to another, always a step or two behind man
in the progress of social evolution, till the close of the nineteenth
century reveals myriad changes and the actual realization of Tennyson’s
prophetic lines in the “Princess,” “We have prudes for proctors,
dowagers for deans.”

[Illustration: GEORGE ELIOT.]

One hundred years ago it was the duty of a woman to efface herself.
She was expected to make of herself a mental blank-book upon which her
husband might inscribe what he would. Thus it is only lately that women
have begun actively to compete with men in expression of any kind.
Indeed, previous to that time, with a few notable exceptions, they
were denied recognition of individual life. The woman, if unmarried,
was merged in the family, or, if married, merged in the husband. Her
name, her religion, her gods, were changed on marriage. But, married
or single, the absorption was complete. So it has happened that woman,
throbbing with poetic sympathy, has, with the exception of Sappho,
produced less high and unmistakable poetry than man. With more harmony,
more music in her nature, her very soul attuned to symphony and rhythm,
she has been little known as a composer. With far vision and clear
literary insight, she has been suppressed in art and literature.
George Eliot gave her sublime literary productions to the world under
a masculine _nom de plume_, because of the prejudice of even that not
remote day. Fanny Mendelssohn was compelled by her family to publish
her musical compositions as her brother’s. Mary Somerville met only
discouragement and ridicule in her mathematical studies. In every
sphere, in every department of science and art, abuse, injustice, and
the croaking of reactionary frogs have greeted each step of her upward
way. The wonder is, then, not that she has accomplished so little, but
that she is not in the same condition to-day that she was when Paul
thrust a gag in her mouth in the shape of a Corinthian text, “And if a
woman would learn anything, let her ask her husband at home.” It will
be seen, therefore, that the oft-repeated assertion that women have not
given to the world as much evidence of genius as men is a Lilliputian
assertion tainted somewhat with envy. “There has been no Shakespeare
among women,” says the advocates of man’s supremacy. With all the world
as their own, and the gates of boundless opportunities swinging wide,
there has been but one Shakespeare among men. It has been asserted
that George Eliot is the Shakespeare among women and Mrs. Browning
the counterpart of Bacon. But their immortality has not been tested.
They lived but a little while ago. But there is one woman, at least,
who has established her claim thoroughly, and whose genius twenty-five
centuries have tested. Sappho is truly immortal. Her fame and genius
have been sealed by the approval of all the great literati of the
centuries. Coleridge, who occupies no uncertain place in the world
of letters, says of her, “Of all the poets of the world, of all the
illustrious artists of all literature, Sappho is the one whose every
word has a peculiar and unmistakable poetic perfume, a seal of absolute
perfection and illimitable grace.” Swinburne, the greatest living
master in the world of verbal music, declares that, “Her verses are the
supreme success, the final achievement, of poetic art.” Sappho’s claim
to immortality exceeds that of Shakespeare’s by twenty-three hundred
years.

Men, viewing the literary productions of women, are apt to give them
the color and bias of masculine thought. As instance the poetic critic
of a New York periodical, who wantonly affronts the gifted author of
“Poems of Passion” by declaring that her “fervent verses are but the
burning of unseemly stubble that fails to give forth light or heat.”
Yet Ella Wheeler Wilcox, all fair-minded critics will admit, has won
a place in the ranks of poetic genius. Her poems throb with human
sympathy, and from the exalted plane of her splendid womanhood she
reaches down, fulfilling the law of Christly service, to lift up the
fallen and soothe and bind the bruised and bleeding. Such masculine
criticism is dying out, but it has not been uncommon in the past. Mrs.
Browning and Jane Austen were accused of “breaking down by their
writings the safeguards of society,” and they were admonished to “cease
their literary efforts and devote themselves to sewing and washing
dishes if they would retain the chivalrous respect of men.” “Jane Eyre”
was pronounced too immoral to be ranked as decent literature. “Adam
Bede” was classed as the “vile outpourings of a lewd woman’s mind.” Yet
Charlotte Brontë, George Eliot, Mrs. Browning, and Jane Austen have
won an exalted and enviable place in the ranks of literature. Their
writings have thrilled, uplifted, and sweetened humanity.

The test of literary genius is to create a character of universal
acceptance. The record of half a century has but one world-wide,
world-known character of that kind. That character was created by a
woman. In all literature, no book since the Bible has been so widely
circulated, so extensively translated, or has so thoroughly commanded
the profound attention of all classes as Harriet Beecher Stowe’s “Uncle
Tom’s Cabin.” Mrs. Stowe impressed her genius upon the race and time,
and marked a new epoch for freedom. Previous to the publication of
her book only a few men recognized slavery as wrong, but a woman’s
sympathetic heart and throbbing genius laid bare the evil and disclosed
to a horrified world the wrong underlying slavery.

In philanthropy and the domain of morals there is none who is doing
more heroic and effective work than Mrs. Elizabeth B. Grannis. She
deals not with theories, but with real conditions. Her sympathies, her
broad work, her manifold charities, go out to flesh and blood, men and
women. She has the intuitive faculty of probing deep into human nature,
leading those she would reform to mourn real defects, rejoice in real
victories, and hope and struggle for better things.

[Illustration: FRANCES WILLARD.]

The constantly broadening sphere of woman’s usefulness is in a large
measure due to the organized forms of intellectual activity among women
known as clubs. Half a century ago club-life for women was unknown.
Their social sympathies were limited to the political party that
claimed the franchise of their male relatives, or the church at whose
shrine the women worshiped. But so rapid has been woman’s development
in this direction that to-day women’s clubs form a chain from ocean to
ocean, binding them as one great whole. The effect upon the members is
magical; nature is enlarged; charity broadened; capacity for judgment
increased; and hitherto unsuspected faculties are called into life and
power.

The first organized demand by women for political recognition in the
United States was made in 1848, at what was known as the Seneca Falls
Convention. Ridiculed, persecuted, kicked like a football from one
generation to another, this brave demand for political recognition was
destined to become an agency that would work a peaceful revolution.
That the movement is progressing, and will eventually succeed, is
evinced by the record of half a century. In that time school suffrage
has been granted in twenty-three States and Territories, partial
suffrage for public improvements in three States, municipal suffrage
in one, and in four States full political equality. Wyoming was the
first State to accord citizenship to her women, and she bears testimony
to its efficacy in the progress, honor, and sobriety of her people.
In 1893, the Wyoming state legislature passed resolutions highly
commendatory of woman suffrage and its results, and among other things
said, “We point with pride to the fact that after nearly twenty-five
years of woman suffrage, not one county in Wyoming has a poor-house,
that our jails are almost empty, and crime, except that by strangers in
the State, is almost unknown.”

From the banks of the far-off Volga come the good tidings that even
Russia is preparing to take a great step in advance by granting to
women many legal and political privileges now enjoyed only by men.
England granted municipal suffrage to women a quarter of a century
ago, and has more recently granted partial parliamentary suffrage.
And to the influence of English law, more particularly the Married
Women’s Act, is largely due the betterment of the legal status of
women throughout the world. In England we find women prominent in art,
literature, politics, the school and the church. While in this country
the middle classes have heretofore carried on the suffrage agitation,
in England it finds active workers among the peerage.

Woman in politics meets with the opposition of job politicians, but
she realizes that every step of her progress, from the unveiling of
her face to a seat in the legislature of a State, has been taken in
the face of fierce opposition and in violation of conventionalities
and customs. Undismayed she advances for the ultimate betterment of
humanity.

The historian of the future will record the nineteenth century as
the Renaissance of womankind. And the ultimate effect upon the human
race of having individuals, not servants, as mothers will surpass the
progress made in science and in art.

The eighteenth century found woman an appendage; the nineteenth
transformed her into an individual. The wonderful altruistic twentieth
century, whose dawn even now is breaking, will so develop this
individuality that women will contend for all the rights of the
individual, coöperating with the nation in the fulfillment of its
mission, and with the world in the development of the eternal law of
progress.

“Through the harsh voices of our day
A low, sweet prelude finds its way;
Through clouds of doubt and storms of fear
A light is breaking calm and clear.”

THE CENTURY’S TEXTILE PROGRESS

BY ROBERT P. HAINS,

_Examiner of Textiles, U. S. Patent Office_.

Antiquity conceals nothing more completely than the origin of the
textile industry. Back in the dark ages and beyond authentic records,
evidence is furnished that this art was not unknown. Egyptian mummies
shrouded in fine linen fabrics give their silent testimony of ancient
knowledge, but when or where the art had its inception still remains
wrapped in mystery. Nearly every nation of the earth lays claim to its
invention at some epoch in traditional existence. Thus the Chinese
attribute it to the wife of their first emperor, the Egyptians to Isis,
the Greeks to Minerva; but probably it had its birth in the Orient,
where the making of cloth was known and practiced from the earliest
times.

Whatever the merits of rival claimants, certain it is that for many
centuries the simple distaff and spindle were the only instruments
used for spinning, while the warp and weft were woven together by hand
implements not less primitive in structure.

In the first spinning device, a mass of fibre was arranged on a forked
stick, and, as drawn therefrom by hand, it was twisted between the
fingers and wound on a spindle. During the reign of Henry VIII. of
England, however, the spinning-wheel replaced the distaff and spindle,
and in every cottage and palace it became an indispensable article of
household equipment. The young women in all walks of life were taught
to spin. Spinning became the female occupation of the age, and it is
interesting to note that the modern term spinster, meaning an unmarried
woman of advanced age, here had its origin.

The spinning-wheel, though superior to the distaff and spindle, was
yet a crude machine. It consisted of a stand on which was mounted in
horizontal bearings a spindle driven by a band from a large wheel
propelled by hand or foot, and as twist was imparted to the fibre drawn
through the fingers, the resulting yarn was wound on the spindle.

The art of weaving was not more advanced. It is true that the middle of
the eighteenth century found the hand loom developed from the original
Indian structure to contain many of the essentials of the modern power
loom. It embodied the heddles, the lay, the take-up and let-off beams,
the shuttle for passing the weft, and in 1740, John Kay added the fly
shuttle motion, whereby the shuttle was thrown through the shed by a
sudden pull on the picking stick; then in 1760, Robert Kay, son of John
Kay, invented the drop box, whereby several colors of filling might be
employed.

Brilliant as these achievements were, the hand loom remained the crude
embodiment of the simple principles of weaving until near the dawn of
the nineteenth century, when, by the invention of Cartwright, a period
of development was introduced in all lines of textile manufacture
unsurpassed in the annals of industrial progress. The first great
stride, and that which opened the door for further advance, was the
creation of the spinning-jenny, in England, by Hargreaves, about 1767,
whereby eight or ten yarns could be spun at one time. Drawing rollers
were subsequently added by Arkwright, and then traverse motion was
given the bobbins in order to automatically build the yarn into a cop.
It has developed since that the drawing-rollers constituted one of the
most important fundamental improvements in the spinning art. Their
function was to draw out the fibres into a proper size of roving, and
to feed this to be spun. Without them the modern spinning-frame would
not have been possible. Arkwright’s drawing-rollers and Hargreaves’s
spinning-jenny combined under the invention of Crompton to produce, in
principle at least, the modern spinning-mule.

[Illustration: DISTAFF AND SPINDLE.]

Fairly good machines were thus provided on the advent of the nineteenth
century for spinning unlimited quantities of yarn, but this, in turn,
required proper loom structures to use the same and a corresponding
supply of raw material. Inventive genius was abroad, and the necessity
met by Eli Whitney, who, while at the home of General Greene, of
Georgia, built the first practical machine for separating cotton fibre
from its seed.

Whitney’s gin was constructed on the broad and simple principle that
cotton fibre could be drawn through a smaller space than the attached
seed, and this same principle is the soul and spirit of every saw-gin
of the present day. Prior to Whitney’s gin, cotton fibre was separated
from the seed by hand, a day’s work being represented by two or three
pounds of cleaned fibre. The daily product of the gin now reaches
between three and four thousand pounds.

[Illustration: SPINNING WHEEL.]

Such figures demonstrate the important position taken by the cotton
gin among the developing agents of the cotton growing States. It has
rendered possible and profitable the cultivation of large districts
of otherwise waste lands; it has stimulated cotton production; given
employment to thousands of idle hands; cheapened the price of cotton
cloths, and placed within the reach of the humblest people wearing
apparel of fine and beautiful texture.

Unlimited supply of raw material being thus provided, attention
reverted to perfecting the machines for spinning it, and under the
magical touch of Richard Roberts, of Manchester, England, in 1830, the
crude mule of Crompton took practical shape. He gave to it the quadrant
winding motion, provided for the harmonious working of the counter and
copping faller wires, perfected the “backing off” and “drawing up”
mechanisms, and gave attention to construction of details that placed
the mule before the world as a practical success.

Equipped in its present form, the self-acting mule presents one of the
most striking examples of complex automatic mechanisms that can be
found in the industrial world. The work of the attendant is confined to
piecing broken ends and supplying roving, the machine passing through
the entire cycle of its complicated movements without human direction.
An idea may be had of its delicate and accurate operation when it is
considered that one pound of cotton has been spun by it into a thread
one hundred and sixty-seven miles long. Improvements have been made,
indeed, on Roberts’s mule, but aside from changes in details and form,
the machine, as it left the hands of this mechanical genius in 1830,
remains unchanged.

[Illustration: PRIMITIVE HAND LOOM.]

During this period, the fly frame was developed from the machines of
Hargreaves and Arkwright, but while it constituted a great advance over
these machines, it presented no radical departure in principle.

We may pause here, as we pass through the third decade of the present
century, to witness the introduction of a spinning-frame, which, for
originality of conception and far reaching influence on the textile
industry, closely approximates the achievements of the pioneer
inventions of this art. Reference is made to the ring frame in which
the flyer is omitted, the bobbin being attached to the spindle and
revolving with it. On the traverse rail, and surrounding each bobbin,
is secured a flanged ring having loosely sprung thereon a light
traveler, through which the yarn, as it comes from the drawing-rolls,
is led to the bobbin. Revolution of the bobbin carries the traveler
around the ring imparting twist to the yarn, and as it is spun it is
wound on the bobbin in proportion to the feed of the drawing-rolls.

The invention of this machine is attributed to John Thorpe, of Rhode
Island, in 1828, and so popular did it become by reason of decreased
power necessary to drive it, incidental to the omission of the flyers,
and good quality of yarn produced, that, between 1860 and 1865, it
nearly replaced all other machines in America for spinning cotton.

The speed of the ring frame, as well as its output, appeared unbounded;
but at high speeds, under unbalanced loads, the spindles were found to
vibrate in their bearings, and the quality of yarn, in consequence,
degenerated, the spindle bearings became worn, and the limit seemed
to be reached at five thousand revolutions per minute. A careful
examination of the ring frame revealed no vulnerable part of its
general structure that could be improved so as to readily secure
increased speed and steadiness of the spindles when unevenly loaded;
but with admirable foresight, developing intellects set to improve
the spindles themselves, and, in 1871, Jacob H. Sawyer introduced and
patented a spindle and bearing, which was one of the most important
improvements in the ring frame. He chambered the bobbin, and by
carrying the bolster T well up inside supported the former near its
load centre.

[Illustration: EARLY SPINNING JENNY.]

The evolution of the spindle was not yet complete. The Sawyer type, at
more than seven thousand revolutions, would vibrate, and of the many
attempts to cure the defect none succeeded fully until the very simple
change made by Mr. Rabbeth in 1878. He gave the spindle a small amount
of play by making the bolster loose in its supporting case, and placed
a packing between the two.

A. H. Sherman improved upon the Rabbeth structure by making the bolster
and step in one piece and omitting the packing, the cushioning being
dependent upon the lubricating oil.

[Illustration: GINNING COTTON. THE OLD WAY, PRIOR TO 1800.]

[Illustration: GINNING COTTON. THE NEW WAY.]

The acme of development in this small but most important part of the
ring frame was now reached; and in its approved form it embodies the
sleeve whirl extending into the bobbin, the loose, yet adjustable
bolster, tapering spindle, removable step, and lubricating reservoir.
Such spindles are capable of unlimited speeds,—twenty thousand
revolutions per minute have been given,—and under absurdly unbalanced
loads they run steadily and with less expenditure of power than the
older forms at their slower speeds.

Increased speed in the spindles, however, brought increased breakage
in the yarn, and although stop motion devices had been employed for
several years, yet economy demanded ready means of piecing broken
ends. This has been provided recently by mounting the stop clamp upon
the roving rod well up near the first pair of drawing rolls, so that
on pulling the stop wire into place the roving is at once fed between
the drawing rolls and issues in front, over the spindle, to be easily
pieced by one hand. Prior to this, the operative was required to reach
over the machine, feed the roving to the rolls with one hand, hold the
stop wire down with the other, and the broken end of yarn in his teeth.

[Illustration: THE MODERN MULE.]

Excessive ballooning was also incidental to the use of high speed
spindles, and, while inventive skill has never mastered it, yet the
injurious effects have been obviated by an ingenious mounting of
separators, one between each two spindles.

Aside from minor details perfecting the mechanical construction,
such has been the evolution of the modern spinning frame. In 1830,
it required the constant attention of one spinner to oversee twenty
slow-running spindles, whereas, in 1896, the same attendant could, with
less effort, “tend” seventy-five or more of the high speed type; and
whereas, in 1790, when the first American cotton mill was established
by Samuel Slater in Rhode Island, there were only seventy-five spindles
on cotton fibre, in 1830, the number had increased to 1,246,703, and in
1890, to 14,188,103.

Under such competition no wonder the spinning-wheel of our grandmothers
has followed the economic law, that the fittest alone survive, and has
been relegated to the wood-pile or garret, or, bedecked with ribbons,
finds a resting-place in the chimney-corner as a decorated curiosity.
Its mighty rival is here. Its attendants have been liberated to more
ennobling pursuits. The homespun has been replaced by beautiful
fabrics, and the monster spinning frames of to-day pour forth their
hourly product in miles of spun fibre, where the wheels of our
grandmothers were taxed to the utmost to produce a very small fraction
of the amount. To appreciate the wonderful change, pause beside the
domestic wheel used within the memory of the living, and compare its
“whirr,” in slowly producing its single thread, to the “buzz” of the
modern spinning frame turning out its product from a thousand spindles.

[Illustration: HAND COMB OF THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY.]

The production of yarn required something more than spinning. The
fibres in the massed cotton or wool, as delivered to the manufacturer,
must be opened, untangled, straightened out, and laid parallel by a
series of preparing machines prior to being spun, among which the
carding engine ranks first. In the incipient form, this machine dates
as far back as the middle of the eighteenth century, when, by hand
manipulation, two cylinders covered with small teeth and working in
close proximity disintegrated the fibrous mass; but the fibres were
much broken and not evenly arranged. The addition of the workers and
strippers around a rapidly revolving swift gave increased utility to
the machine, and Bramwell’s feed, in 1871, so regulated the amount of
fibre fed at intervals that the resulting lap possessed the desired
even character. This feed weighs the fibre as it is fed, stops the
lifting apron while the scale pan dumps its load, resets the scale pan,
and automatically starts the lifting apron to again feed the scale,—a
cycle of operations indicating a near approach to human intelligence.

One additional machine at least, the comb, requires notice before
passing to the all-important progress made in the loom structure.
With advancing civilization and refinement came demands for superior
fabrics, which could only be answered by a supply of better fibre.
Such fibre could only be secured from the bale by separating the long
from the short, a problem well calculated to tax the ingenuity of an
enlightened age. Attempts had been made to do this by hand implements
not unlike the curry-comb of to-day, except that the teeth were long
and tapering. This remained the only means employed for years, while
other textile machinery passed through its phenomenal period of
development. At last, in 1841, it occurred to Heilman, while watching
a lady comb her hair, that a machine might be constructed to comb wool
by drawing a bunch of fibres over pins. He constructed a device on this
principle, and in a developed form it is used still and known as the
Heilman or nip comb.

[Illustration: NOBLE COMB OF 1890.]

In 1853, James Noble gave to the world the circle comb, wherein two
flat circular rings, having projecting from one face vertical pins,
were mounted, one eccentrically within the other, and revolved in the
same direction, the object being to dab the fibre on the rings where
they met; and then as they revolved and separated the short fibre
would be drawn off the large ring, leaving the long fibre freed from
the short. These machines were successful, and above all they were
practical—the operation of the hand comber disappeared from the face
of the earth.

The sudden birth and rapid development of mechanically perfect means
for preparing and spinning fibres were due largely to the comparatively
simple movements required to draw and twist the yarn, but in the loom
no such problem was presented. Here the movements were complicated
and varied, and the application of power to the manipulation of the
delicate threads was not susceptible of sudden and successful solution.
The warps, stretched in a sheet between two beams, had to be opened
to form the shed, the shuttle had to be passed therethrough, the weft
beaten to place, and means provided to feed the warp and to take up
of the fabric an amount at each beat-up corresponding to the size
of the weft. These were the movements necessary in the most simple
kind of weaving, and though fully understood for many centuries,
as evidenced by the Indian and Egyptian looms, and as embodied in
hand machines of the seventeenth century, it was not till 1787 that
they were clothed with the application of power. Even then the first
embodiment did not emanate from the hands of a weaver or engineer,
but from Dr. Cartwright, a clergyman in the church of England. It was
not surprising that these looms failed of their expectations, for the
shuttle would frequently get trapped in the shed, the driven power-lay
would break out the warp threads, the take-up and let-off motions were
not graduated to compensate for the decrease of the warp and increase
of the cloth beams, resulting in thin and thick places in the cloth.
But this application of power to the loom was the initial step in
the industrial supremacy of the machine, which to-day works with the
perfect cadence of an automaton.

[Illustration: PLAIN POWER LOOM, 1840.]

The first years of the present century were of unsurpassed activity in
the inventive field. The spinners were putting forth more yarn than
the hand-looms could use. It remained for the loom to keep pace with
the times. Miller, in 1800, Todd and Horrocks in 1803, Johnston in
1807, Cotton in 1810, Taylor in 1815, and many others, concentrated
their efforts to develop the plain power-loom; but the second decade of
the present century saw the old hand-loom with its slow and cumbrous
movements still mistress of the art.

The name of Richard Roberts stands preëminent at this period, between
1820 and 1825, as giving to the power-loom several perfecting touches
in the means for letting off the warp the small amount necessary at
each pick, the means for taking up the finished cloth, the means for
shedding the warp for the passage of the shuttle, and the adaptation
of the stop motions of his predecessors. These changes gave practical
life to the machine, and overthrew the barrier that obstructed the
advance of the textile industry. They were, however, only a few of the
improvements added in perfecting the power-loom, such as the automatic
temple to hold the cloth extended and prevent drawing of the weft, the
shuttle-guard to prevent accidental jumping of the shuttle from the
race, the perfect weft-stop to bring the loom to a stand on breakage or
failure of the weft, the protector mechanism to obviate a “smash” when
the shuttle failed to box, and the loose reed, all of which stand out
in bold relief as evidences of the progressive tendencies of the age,
and combined in about the year 1838, more than a half century after
Cartwright’s first conception of the idea, to complete the practical
power-loom.

The loom had not reached a stage of mechanical perfection; much yet
remained to be done, but the plain power-loom of this period was both
a practical and financial success. By its immediate predecessor, the
hand-loom, a good weaver and assistant could work from forty to fifty
picks per minute, and weave plain cloth. By the power-loom of 1840,
one weaver could “tend” two looms running from 100 to 120 picks per
minute and produce the same cloth. Without passing through the various
steps which culminated in the power-loom for plain cloth, now in use,
and tracing the causes that led to perfection of details, the amazing
advance from the ancient and 18th-century hand loom to the power-loom
of 1840 and that of to-day may well be shown by comparing the machines
themselves.

Such was the simple form of the power-loom. One half of the warps
were alternately raised and lowered for the shot of weft; but as a
woven fabric is one in which the warp and weft are united by passing
them over and under each other, the figure or pattern of the cloth
will be varied as the threads are crossed in different combinations,
and this will depend on the order of raising and lowering the warp
threads, and the introduction of different characters and colors of
weft. This brings up for review the most important parts of the loom
structure—the shedding mechanism and shuttle-box motions—through
whose agencies the most beautiful and complicated designs are produced.

[Illustration: WEAVING. THE OLD WAY.]

[Illustration: WEAVING. THE NEW WAY.]

Shedding mechanism was present of course in all looms, but in the
power-looms of the early part of this century it was confined to
tappets adjusted on a revolving shaft, and the number of heddles was
limited to six or eight. Fairly good twills and other like fabrics
could be produced within the limits of the few heddles, but with the
introduction of the “dobbie,” or that part of the loom which raises and
lowers the harness-frames, a new era in fancy weaving was inaugurated.
By this ingenious device as many as thirty-six or even forty heddles
could be used and raised at will to form figures. The creation of the
dobbie belongs to the 19th century, and it is found in practical form
about 1863 in the United States under the name of the American or
Knowles dobbie. The essentials are the two cylinder gears revolving
constantly, the vibrating gears, carried on the end of pivoted arms and
having teeth on a part of their periphery, the harness jacks connected
to the heddle frames, and the links joining the vibrating gears and
harness jacks in such manner that part revolution of the former causes
the latter to move the connected heddle frame, and consequently the
warp threads, up or down. A pattern chain determines what vibrator
gears shall engage the cylinder gears, and, once the chain is fitted
to the design to be woven, nothing remains for the loom tender but to
oversee the operation of the machine.

[Illustration: LOOM OF 1890.]

Another form of dobbie, not less popular than the Knowles, developed
into a perfect automatic device about fifty years ago in England. Here
two reciprocating knives are engaged, under the direction of a pattern
chain, by one of two hooked jacks connected to the harness levers, and
the shed is again formed without human intervention. Other forms of
dobbie structures have been evolved during the last fifty years, but
these two, with some modifications and additions of details, have come
extensively into practical use, and represent the zenith of development
at the present time. By their aid great variety is rendered possible in
the design on the resulting fabric. The figured tablecloths, damasks,
twills, satins, bordered and cross-bordered fabrics, are now possible
at a cost of a thousandth part only of that incurred when produced by
any of the old types of machines.

[Illustration: JACQUARD MACHINE.]

The subject of shedding, i. e., of opening the warp-threads to afford
a passage for the shuttle, is so inseparably connected with the name
of Jacquard, that attention is now carried to that wonderful invention
evolved in the first few years of the present century, and by the use
of which it may truly be said that anything can be woven as figure
in a fabric that can be designed by the hand of man. It is as well
adapted for the finest silks as for heavy carpets and figured velvets,
and by an operation theoretically so simple as to excite wonder that
it remained hidden until this age. Jacquard was a native of France
and exhibited his machine complete in 1804, but so bitter was the
opposition that the first machine was destroyed and burned. Its
merits were clear, however, and reconstruction and general adoption
in France followed soon after. It has since been applied not only for
shedding but for every purpose where mechanical operations could be
controlled by a pattern. In brief, this machine simply controls each
warp thread separately by a cord having a hook attached. These hooks
are arranged near the path of a reciprocating griffe or frame carrying
cross bars, and are controlled, as to engagement with the bars, by a
card perforated according to a pattern; thus any one or any number of
threads can be raised at will. The dobbie controls harness frames each
carrying a large number of warp threads; the Jacquard controls every
thread separately. The greatly increased capacity of the latter machine
is apparent. Thus a 1500-hook Jacquard will do the work of thirty
dobbies of fifty jacks each.

The hand-shuttle box mechanism of Kay’s time has developed into the
machine operated as a sliding or revolving shuttle-box controlled by
pattern devices, which, being added to a dobbie or Jacquard equipped
loom within the last twenty-five years, presents the highest point
of perfection attained in the textile art. In such looms the warp
threads, arranged in any colors, may be raised at will collectively or
individually, any one of ten or twelve different colored wefts may be
introduced as desired, and combinations may thus be formed to produce
designs of the most complicated nature.

Pile fabrics, cut, uncut, and tufted, represent a type quite distinct
from those produced on the ordinary fancy loom just described, and, in
the form of velvets, imitation animal skins, and Brussels carpet, were
almost unknown prior to the invention of Samuel Bigelow of Boston, in
1837. Fabrics of this character, if made at all, were the products of
tedious hand methods, and on account of the consequent high price were
the exclusive property of the very wealthy. Carpets with pile surface
had been made by the Persians and Turks ages ago, by tying pieces
of woolen yarn around longitudinal or warp threads, and binding the
whole together by a weft at intervals; and such tufts, being carefully
selected as to color, were made to present rich designs, but, like all
other hand-produced fabrics, these were the property of the few.

The pile fabric loom of Bigelow opened the way for an advance
in the carpet industry which continues to the present time; its
ultimate effect being to place carpets within the reach of the
humble cottager; and floors which were strewn with brush, or at best
concealed by the home-made rag carpet, now became covered by a soft
and beautifully figured fabric. This loom was a practical machine,
and at once commended itself to the manufacturer. It consisted of the
old power-loom provided with a Jacquard, already well understood, to
which was added an attachment to introduce wires at intervals as false
weft, and bind the warp around them by the usual weft threads. The
wires being withdrawn after a few shots had been woven, left the warp
loops standing, and these loops being formed under the dictates of the
Jacquard, any character of beautiful design could be produced. Velvets,
brocades, even the fine imitation of sealskin, are the simple products
of this form of power-loom when the pile loops are cut. Greater
cheapness in weaving cut pile fabrics has been secured by a slight
modification in the Bigelow loom, so that two fabrics could be woven
at one time. This idea was introduced about 1850, and it contemplated
weaving the two fabrics face to face, keeping them separated by the
usual pile wires of Bigelow, and passing the pile threads from one
fabric to the other. Upon cutting the two cloths apart through the
threads uniting them, two cut pile or velvet fabrics resulted. This
loom required the service of two shuttles and double the number of
warp-beams, but it worked well, and is to-day largely in use and well
adapted to its purpose.

[Illustration: SMITH AND SKINNER LOOM FOR MOQUETTE CARPETS.]

The demand for tufted pile fabrics, meaning those in which the pile is
formed from tufts or yarns, individually tied to the foundation fabric,
and of which the rich Turkish and Persian rugs are examples, had not
been met by the Bigelow loom; in fact it was only about forty years
ago that the mechanical production of such fabrics became possible.
Smith and Skinner were the pioneers to enter this field, and the
first, by the aid of machinery, to compete with the cheap hand-labor
of the orientals. The invention of a machine that will select any
desired color from a large number of yarns, carry it between the
warp-threads at the exact spot necessary to form the figure, tie it
around these threads, cut it off to the length necessary to form an
even and smooth surface, return the unused portion to place, and do
all quickly, accurately, and with little cost, is an achievement that
may rightly claim the admiration of the industrial world. Yet this
is what the machine inaugurated by Smith and Skinner does to-day. The
general movements and complicated parts of the power-loom are present
as for weaving a plain fabric, and on beams or large spools carried by
a chain, under the control of a pattern, are arranged the tuft yarns,
in the order in which they should appear in the figure. Through the
pattern devices the proper spool or beam is brought into position to be
seized by a pair of fingers which rise, take the spool from the chain,
lower it to the warp, pass the ends of the tuft yarn through and around
the proper warp thread, hold them till the insertion of a binding weft,
then, when they have been properly cut to length, return the spool into
its place in the chain. This creation of mechanical genius takes rank
with the wonders of the spinning mule and, like that machine, passes
through its entire operation with the _precision of an automaton_. By
its aid close imitations of the oriental hand-made rugs are placed
before the world at one quarter the former price, and, as a result, the
fine moquette and axminster carpets lend their beauty to nearly every
home in the land.

The credit for improving the power-loom so as to adapt it for weaving
fancy cassimeres and suitings, belongs to William Crompton, a native of
England, who came to the United States in 1836, and shortly thereafter,
in the Middlesex Mills at Lowell, Mass., constructed and operated
the first fancy cassimere power-loom, not only in this country, but
in the world. Prior to this the harness for all woolen and worsted
power-looms was worked by cams, and the cloth was woven plain; but
Crompton’s loom of 1840 started a new era in the woolen industry,
rendering it possible to produce any fancy weave by an arrangement of
pattern chain and large number of harnesses in connection with the
change shuttle-boxes. Improvements followed, by the substitution of the
reverse shuttle-box motion in 1854, the perfection of the general loom
structure in 1857, the addition of the upright lever harness motion in
1864, and the centre-stop in 1879, so that at the present time this
machine is adapted to run at high speeds and weave at moderate cost the
most complicated designs in woolen and worsted—such as shawls, checks,
suitings, and all forms of fancy cassimeres.

The general industrial activity in all matters pertaining to textile
manufacture between the years 1835 and 1860, brought forth many forms
of looms of special adaptation to meet the increasing demands of
society. The narrow-ware loom appeared in the third decade of this
century, and the addition of the dobbie, or Jacquard, later, equipped
this loom for the simultaneous production of several ribbons, or
narrow fabrics, side by side, having plain or figured effect. The lay
was divided into several reed spaces, and a corresponding number of
shuttles, operated by rack and pinion, carried the weft-threads through
the adjacent warp.

About the middle of this century, and until the adoption of the more
rich and delicate fabrics, hair-cloth was the accepted covering for
furniture, and power-looms for its production quickly answered the
demand. They reached such a degree of perfection and efficiency in this
country that almost the entire industry was centred here. This fabric
was made from the hair of horses’ tails as weft, and a strong cotton
warp; and as the weft could not be wound upon bobbins, as usual, each
separate hair was inserted by an ingenious device made to reciprocate
through the shed, and select one out of a bundle of hairs cut to the
same length. The conception of a power device capable of the delicate
operation necessary to weave hair-cloth, could never have been realized
except in a highly intelligent manufacturing community; but in 1870,
Rhode Island alone produced on such machines over 600,000 yards,
consuming thereby the hair of about eight hundred thousand horse-tails.

[Illustration: CIRCULAR LOOM.]

The evolution of the lappet loom started between 1840 and 1850 in
England and Germany. It sought to enhance the pleasing effect of plain
fabrics, by placing an embroidered or raised figure over the surface
during the weaving process. Near the lower edge of ladies’ skirts,
on the ends of neckties and like articles, an embroidered effect was
desirable; and this has been secured by the lappet attachment to
the present power-loom. In this a needle is mounted in appropriate
location, usually back of the lay, and through an eye in the end
thereof the lappet thread is led from a suitable supply. This needle
is normally either above or below the warp. When a spot or figure is
wanted, it is caused to move into the plane of the opposite warps
of the shed, under the direction of suitable controlling pattern
mechanisms. The shuttle being then shot, the lappet thread appears
upon the surface, and it may be made to thus appear as often as
desired; its position being shifted as necessary under the guidance of
a pattern-chain to form, in embroidery effect, any character of small
design.

Closely allied to the lappet loom in the effect produced is the
swivel-shuttle loom, which has come extensively into use during the
last thirty years to supply demands for spotted or embroidered figures.
The loom is of the plain type, having small swivel-shuttles movable
in carrier blocks, which are secured to the supporting bar near the
top of the lay-reed, in convenient location to permit the shuttles
to be depressed into the shed. Each swivel-shuttle is provided with
a rack engaging a suitable operating pinion to move the shuttles
simultaneously from one carrier to the next. Normally these shuttles
are held above the warp plane, and the loom in this condition weaves
tabby or twill. At the desired moment, the supporting-bar is lowered by
a cam or Jacquard to bring the shuttles in the shed; the shuttles are
moved from one carrier to the next adjacent, and then all are raised to
their normal position above the warp. The ground weft is laid and the
beat-up takes place. Repetition develops a spot or figure at intervals
across the entire fabric, and with the use of different colored
swivel-threads the greatest diversity of embroidered effect is secured
over the entire ground. Some of the most beautiful spotted silks for
ladies’ dresses and fancy scarfs, never before contemplated, are now
woven on this loom at prices that are very moderate for such a class of
goods.

A radical departure from the paths traveled by prior inventors was
inaugurated about 1859, in adapting the power-loom for weaving tubular
fabrics, resulting twenty years later in perfecting a machine in which
the warp threads were arranged in circular series and the weft laid in
the circular shed by a continuously moving shuttle. Fire-hose and like
tubular cloths resulted. Rapid development continued from the middle
of the present century, so that nearly every conceivable form of loom,
from the light running plain fabric and gingham looms to the heavy
structures for weaving canvas and wire cloth, claimed the attention
of the inventor; and in this last decade of the century looms are
constructed to weave anything that can be woven. Wire, slats, cane,
straw, and glass, as well as the light fibres of cotton, wool, or silk,
are now easily manipulated on the power-loom and woven into cloths,
mattings, baskets, cane-seats for furniture, bottle-covers, and ever so
many irregular forms that, in the dormant condition of this industry
prior to the nineteenth century, were quite beyond consideration of the
most active enthusiast of the art.

Wonderful as these achievements have been, the restless ambition of
inventive genius remains unsatisfied. Improvements continue—especially
in the United States, under the fostering care of a liberal patent
system—and attempts are now being made, and with success, to form
the power-loom into a thoroughly automatic machine incapable of
producing any but the best quality of cloth. Upon the breakage or
undue slackening of a warp thread, the loom would continue to weave
and produce imperfect fabric until the attendant had pieced the broken
end or adjusted the slack thread. Means were devised some years ago
to remedy this defect, but with only partial success until near the
close of this century. Breakage or failure more often occurred in the
weft, however, and though the weft stop-motion successfully detected
the fault and stopped the loom, yet much valuable time was lost, and
constant attention was needed to supply new filling. Progressive
tendencies of the closing years of this decade have sought to meet this
difficulty. As a result, means are now provided whereby, on failure or
breakage of the weft, the loom discharges its imperfect filling from
the shuttle, supplies itself with a new weft from the hopper, places
it in the shuttle, and continues to weave. Such a loom provided with a
warp stop-motion is almost incapable of producing imperfect cloth, and
so long as the warps remain intact and the hopper is kept supplied with
weft-bobbins, it will continue to weave. In fact, in many mills of the
New England States these looms are now left to run during the dinner
hour without an attendant, and no imperfect cloth is produced.

Such machines are almost independent of human attention, yet they are
the evolution of the old-time hand loom. Just one hundred years ago
the hand loom, running at 40 or 50 picks to the minute, required the
watchful care of an expert weaver; in 1840, the same weaver could
“tend” from two to four power-looms running 100 to 120 picks; to-day he
oversees from 10 to 16 looms running from 150 to 200 picks.

[Illustration: THE FIRST KNITTING MACHINE. LEE.]

The homespun, with its old familiar butternut dye, has disappeared. The
spinning-wheel and loom no longer occupy a part of every home. In their
stead, the farmer, as he looks beyond the thriving cornfields, beholds
the reeking chimneys of a thousand mills as they proclaim the majesty
of the power machines. The fabrics produced are beautiful and varied in
design, and their cost so low as to excite wonder that such progress
could have been the result of one hundred years of industrial activity.

The emancipation of knitting, as a domestic occupation, dates from the
romantic experiences of William Lee, a subject of Queen Elizabeth,
of whom it is related that while watching the deft fingers of his
lady-love guide the knitting needle from loop to loop, conceived the
idea of performing the operation by mechanical means. It is a singular
coincidence also that the invention of this the first machine for
knitting purposes, like that of the power-loom for weaving, should have
emanated from the hands of a student and clergyman, unfamiliar with the
art.

Lee’s device was naturally crude. It contained only twelve needles,
arranged in a row with about seven or eight to the inch, but it
successfully formed a knitted web. Further progress in the art was
slow, on account of the strong opposition to all machines which seemed
likely to deprive the hand artisan of occupation. The Queen refused
to grant a patent to Lee for this reason, and knitting remained the
exclusive prerogative of women for many years. Like the spinning-wheel,
however, the hand knitting-needle beheld a rival, which in the
diversity of human wants was destined to create one of the great
industrial pursuits of the age.

Stockings, like all other garments, were first made by sewing together
pieces of linen, silk, cotton, or woolen cloth, resulting in a poorly
fitting article, prolific of uncomfortable seams. Knitting the entire
hose in a single piece by hand needles overcame these defects to an
extent, and the Lee machine opened the way for the production of such
articles on a scale that now furnishes the civilized world.

Lee’s machine produced a straight web which required to be cut and sewn
to shape; then to it was added the ribbing device and the narrowing and
widening attachment, to shape the web to fit the body without cutting;
but still a seam existed in the stocking where the edges united. In
1816, however, M. I. Brunel built a circular machine having an endless
row of needles, and in 1831, Timothy Bailey, of New York, applied power
to the knitting frame; the result being that at this time a tubular
seamless fabric could be produced on a power machine.

The latch-needle, which has given to the knitting machine great
capacity and diversity of product, was not invented until about 1847,
by Mr. Aiken, of New Hampshire. A period of development then set in
that continues to the present time. The needles by cam mechanism
were made independently operative in a circular carrier; narrowing
and widening devices to produce pouches, such as the heels and toes
of stockings, were added, as was also feeding mechanism for the
introduction of different colored yarn, or a reinforcing thread. Such
machines, of 1868 and 1870, would form a stocking or undergarment
well fitted to the form; but they required the constant attention of
a skilled knitter, until pattern mechanism was introduced to control
the time of introduction of the colored or additional thread, and the
place for formation of the narrowed or widened web. In forming the heel
and toe pockets, a part of the needles are thrown out of action, and
the movements to operate the active needles are changed from round and
round, or circular work, to reciprocating. At each reciprocation one or
more needles, at the end of the series, are rendered inactive, until
one half the required pocket is formed; then they are successively
returned to action, and circular knitting resumed. It may be also an
additional thread is introduced to reinforce the wearing qualities of
the heel and toe, or a differently colored yarn may be thrown in to
give figure, but all such movements are now automatically controlled
by a pattern mechanism. The ribbed leg portion of a stocking is formed
either in the same machine that fashions the foot or in a separate
machine to which the foot is transferred, but in either case the
pattern mechanism again controls.

[Illustration: KNITTING IN THE OLD WAY.]

Within the last twenty years this art has been so greatly improved,
especially in the hosiery line, that the automatic machine of to-day
passes through the entire operation of knitting the article, finishing
it off, and starting afresh without other aid than a supply of yarn.
Moreover, the machine now to be considered practical must be so
constructed that it will continue thus to operate without repairs or
loss of time from month to month; and its daily output will average
more than the old hand machines could accomplish in a week. By hand
knitting one hundred loops could be formed per minute; by Lee’s machine
as many as fifteen hundred were possible in the same time; but to-day,
the automatic machine will average between 300,000 and 400,000 loops,
and at the same time will produce a finer web, shaped to fit the form
of the wearer.

Such comparisons reveal the vitally important progress made in the
knitting industry, through which most of our underwear, stockings,
scarfs, neck-comforts, and woolen gloves are supplied. The labor and
time saving devices developed in this class of machines, and the fact
that unskilled workmen may “tend” from fifteen to twenty of them,
largely accounts for the universal adoption of warm and comfortable
wearing apparel by all classes of society.

The number of patents granted on textile machinery during the
nineteenth century furnishes an index to the progress made. Prior to
1800, less than one hundred patents were granted in the United States,
while since that time, and up until July, 1895, about 15,200 patents
were issued, covering tangible and material improvements over the old
structures. The beneficent effects of these inventions are attested
by the wonderful and continuous reduction in cost to the consumer of
all kinds of textile fabrics. For the manufacturer, these have made
possible increased production in a given time with less manual labor.
When it is remembered that the labor cost is about one half the total
cost of production of textile fabrics, it will be apparent that the
beneficial effects of any labor-saving device are felt as well by the
consumer as the producer.

In 1870 the number of textile establishments in the United States was
3035, giving occupation to 146,897 employees, and consuming annually
359,420,829 pounds of textile fibres, while in 1890 the number of
establishments had increased to 4114, employing 511,897 hands, and
consuming the enormous amount of 1,572,548,933 pounds of fibres;
representing progress and growth in the textile arts not excelled by
any other manufacturing industry.

Food and clothing constitute the primary wants of man. The former
grew ready for his use as a natural product of the soil. The latter
he had to produce by artificial means to afford that protection which
nature failed to provide. Next to agriculture, therefore, man’s early
attention was directed to securing a covering for the body. Looking
back through the vista of years dimmed by the mists of very remoteness,
we find the animal and vegetable kingdoms destined to contribute to his
needs. There were the blue flax-fields; cotton-bolls, scattered like
powdered snow about the land, coquetting in wanton abandon with winds
tempered by an all-wise Power to the shepherd-watched sheep; goats
roaming the vale of Cashmere; silk-worms of Ceres, and the grasses of
spring, overflowing with allurements of assistance for his adornment.
With these essentials has man wrought a mighty miracle. The genius
of Industrial Art, awakened by the fascinating influence of Nature,
invoked the Goddess of Invention, approaching her temple not with loud
acclaim, as marked the herculean strides in other arts and sciences,
but modestly, though tenaciously and most effectually. For not more is
woman emancipated by the sewing machine than both sexes by the doing
away of the spinning-wheel, the household knitter, and hand-worked
loom. Not more do electricity and steam power facilitate the various
occupations of man than do the many textured fabrics add to his needs.

[Illustration: KNITTING IN THE NEW WAY.]

In all the phases of social life is this industry manifest. If the
banquet hall is warmed and lighted by electricity, so, also, is it
adorned with tapestries, silken and artistic, napery surpassingly
smooth, and laces intricately wrought.

How like a fairy tale reads the evolution of textile progress!
Conceptions, infinite in range and variety, alike pleasing to the eye
and gratifying to vanity, have been spun, woven, knit, and embroidered,
until, standing as we do at the dawn of another century, upon the
summit of unparalleled achievements, we ask, “Can the mind conceive,
the heart desire, or the hand execute more.”

THE CENTURY’S RELIGIOUS PROGRESS

BY GEORGE EDWARD REED, S.T.D., LL.D.,

_President Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pa._

The closing years of the nineteenth century, both in Europe and the
United States, are characterized by a religious life as phenomenal with
respect to development and influence as those of the eighteenth were
phenomenal for lethargy and decline. “Never,” says a writer in the
North British Review, “has a century risen on England so void of soul
and faith as that which opened with Anne (1702), and reached its misty
noon beneath the second George (1732–1760),—a dewless night succeeded
by a sunless dawn. The Puritans were buried and the Methodists were not
born.” In this opinion, all historians and essayists concur.

Among the clergy were many whose lives were of the Dominie Sampson
order, described in Scott’s “Guy Mannering”—men whose lives were the
scandal and reproach of the church; who openly taught that reason is
the all-sufficient guide; that the Scriptures are to be received only
as they agree with the light of nature; pleading for liberty while
running into the wildest licentiousness. Montesquieu, indeed, did not
hesitate to charge Englishmen generally with being devoid of every
genuine religious sentiment. “If,” he says, “the subject of religion is
mentioned in society, it excites nothing but laughter. Not more than
four or five members of the House of Commons are regular attendants at
church.”

From the colleges and universities, the great doctrines of the
Reformation were well-nigh banished, a refined system of ethics,
having no connection with Christian motives, being substituted for the
principles of a divinely revealed law.

On every side faith seemed to be dying out; indeed, would have died out
but for the tremendous reformation in life and morals induced by the
self-denying and heroic labors of the Wesleys and their coadjutors,
to whom, more than to any beside, England owes her salvation from a
relapse into barbarism,—a service which in later years won for the
Wesleys a memorial in Westminster Abbey.

On the Continent, religious conditions were no better. In France the
masses were yet reeling amid the excesses of the Revolution. Voltaire
and Rousseau were the oracles and prophets of their times,—the popular
idols of the hour. Voltaire, indeed, openly boasted that he alone
would laugh Christianity out of the court of public opinion, declaring
the whole system to be outgrown and powerless. Germany, given over to
theological speculation, crushed beneath the weight of the Napoleonic
wars, and torn by internal dissensions, gave but little hope that upon
her altars the dying fire of the great Reformation would ever again
flame forth as in the older and more heroic days.

In the United States, similar conditions prevailed, especially
during the last decade of the eighteenth century and the first of
the nineteenth. Forms of infidelity the most radical and revolting
prevailed throughout the land. Many of the leading statesmen, in
private at least, did not scruple to confess themselves atheists or
deists. Thomas Paine was the popular idol; his “Age of Reason” almost
as common as the Bible itself. The majority of the men taking part with
him in the founding of the government, with but few exceptions, held
theological sentiments akin to his, although declining to participate
in his violent and brutal assaults upon the Scriptures and the
institutions of Christian society.

[Illustration: BIRMINGHAM MEETING-HOUSE (ANCIENT).]

Speaking of the earlier days of the century, Chancellor Kent, in one
of his published works, declared that in his younger days the men of
his acquaintance in professional life who did not avow infidelity were
comparatively few. Bishop Meade, of Virginia, in his autobiography,
states that “scarcely a young man of culture could be found who
believed in Christianity.”

The colleges and universities were so filled with youthful skeptics
that when, in 1795, Timothy Dwight assumed the presidency of Yale,
he found but four or five willing to admit that they were members
of churches. So far did they go in their devotion to the French
infidelity prevalent at the time, that the seniors of the college were
commonly known among themselves by the names of Diderot, D’Alembert,
Robespierre, Rousseau, Danton, and the like. Harvard, Princeton,
William and Mary, the University of Virginia,—all the colleges
indeed,—were as thoroughly hotbeds of skepticism as nurseries of
learning.

The period, too, was one of internecine strife among the feeble
churches themselves. Divisions on doctrinal lines were incessant;
departures from the faith as numerous as they were disastrous. Of
the missionary spirit so gloriously characteristic of the nineteenth
century there was not even a trace. Up to 1793, not a missionary
society was in existence on either side of the ocean. The same was
true of hospitals, asylums, of every form of organized effort for the
reclamation of the masses or the amelioration of human ill.

In Boston, as late as 1811, men of literary or political distinction,
eager to listen to the marvelous revival preaching of the celebrated
Dr. Griffin, attended his services surreptitiously, or in disguise,
fearful lest knowledge of attendance upon religious services of such
vulgar character should detract from the dignity of their social
standing.

If, however, the times were bad, the outlook for Christianity dark,
the period, nevertheless, was not wholly without gleams of light.
The spiritual leaven imparted by Whitefield in his mighty preaching
tours, by Edwards, Dwight, Asbury, Griffin, and others of equally
heroic stamp, gradually began to work,—slowly at first, but with ever
accelerating movement,—until at last the triumphant successes of
the present century began their stately march. By degrees a new life
appeared among the churches, heralding the dawn of a new and brighter
day. Revivals of religion, many of them powerful and sweeping, broke
out in many parts of the country. Massachusetts, Virginia, Kentucky,
Tennessee, the Carolinas, Georgia, were in succession the theatres of
movements which, before they had spent their force, had completely
revolutionized the conditions of unfaith, immorality, and spiritual
apathy so long prevailing. These upheavals of spiritual power,
continuing during the first twenty-five years of the century, laid
broad and deep the foundations of the mighty achievements of the church
which we are now to consider. How extensive, how wonderful, have been
these achievements can perhaps best be understood by a consideration of
the changed conditions marking the close of the century.

In the first place, that the people of the United States are a
religious people may be inferred from the amazing number and variety
of religions abounding and flourishing within our borders. It may be
doubted that in any other Christian country of the earth there can be
found so many varieties of religion, so many church organizations, so
many and diverse peculiarities of doctrine, polity, and usage, as here.
It is a land of churches; churches for whites, churches for blacks;
churches large and churches small; churches orthodox and churches
heterodox; churches Christian and churches pagan; churches Catholic
and churches Protestant; churches liberal and churches conservative,
Calvinistic and Armenian, Unitarian and Trinitarian; representing
nearly every phase of ecclesiastical and theological thought. As
Americans have distanced the world in the extent and variety of their
material inventions, so have they distanced the world in the extent
and variety of their theological and ecclesiastical forms. The state
cannot control the church, and the church is as free as the state. As
a man may freely transfer his citizenship from one State to another,
to each in turn, so may he, if he shall so desire, pass from one
ecclesiastical communion to another, until he shall have exhausted the
list. If, perchance, no one of the one hundred and forty-three distinct
denominations enumerated in the census tables shall suit him, there
remain innumerable separate, independent congregations, no one of
which lays claim to denominational name, creed, or connection, in some
one of which he yet may find an ecclesiastical home. The principle of
division, indeed, has been carried so far in America that it would be a
difficult task to find the religious body so small as, in the judgment
of some, to be incapable of further division.

[Illustration: CATHEDRAL OF ST. JOHN THE DIVINE (PROTESTANT EPISCOPAL)
UNDER PROCESS OF ERECTION IN NEW YORK.]

It is to be observed, however, that the differences of the one hundred
and forty-three denominations into which our religious population is
divided are, in many instances, so slight that, should consolidation
be attempted, the one hundred and forty-three could easily be reduced
to a comparatively small number, and this with but little change
in doctrine, polity, or usage. Consolidation into organic union,
however, is hardly likely to occur in the near future, even were
such consolidation desirable. In the first place such a result would
be contrary to the genius of Protestantism, based, as it is, on the
absolute right of private judgment with respect to matters of faith
and morals, and, in the second place, it would be contrary to human
experience. “Religious controversies,” as Gladstone says, “do not, like
bodily wounds, heal by the genial forces of nature. If they do not
proceed to gangrene and mortification, at least they tend to harden
into fixed facts, to incorporate themselves into laws, character, and
tradition, nay, even into language; so that at last they take rank
among the data and presuppositions of common life, and are thought as
inexorable as the rocks of an iron-bound coast.” In religion, when men
separate, the severance is like the severance of the two early friends
of whom the poet speaks:—

“They parted, ne’er to meet again,
But neither ever found another
To free the hollow heart from paining.
They stood aloof, the scars remaining,
Like cliffs which have been rent asunder,
A dreary sea now rolls between.”

[Illustration: FATHER DAMIEN, MISSIONARY TO HAWAIIAN LEPER COLONY.]

If, however, the diversities are great—increasing rather than
diminishing—the “unity of the spirit in the bonds of peace” with
respect to all essentials of doctrine is as remarkable as the diversity
in the outward form. Never, indeed, since the dawn of Christianity,
were the members of the diversified bodies of the general church of
Christ in such thorough accord, in such closeness of attachment,
with such generous recognition of all that is good in each of the
several bodies, as now. Even the Roman Catholic Church, intolerant
in all lands where its sway is practically undisputed, in the United
States, at least, has caught something of the broader toleration of
Protestants, giving to its millions of communicants a better and truer
gospel than in those countries where it does not come into contact with
Protestantism, while freely coöperating with other churches in various
works of philanthropy and reform.

In the next place, that we are a religious, a Christian people may be
argued from the steady and enormous increase during the century of the
material and spiritual forces of the church of Christ, an increase
phenomenal even amid the wonders of a phenomenal century. Whether we
look at the increase of edifices or the multiplication of communicants,
the results in either case are sufficient for both congratulation and
amazement. Were it possible to obtain from the earlier records exact
statistics of the actual number of edifices and communicants existing
at the opening of the century, comparison would be comparatively easy.
Such, however, is not the case, the records having been imperfectly
kept and indifferently preserved. The census of 1890, indeed, was the
first to furnish exhaustive and really reliable results.

Taking that census as a basis, and adding to its figures those to be
obtained from the year books of the various bodies up to and including
1894, the religious strength of the United States may be summarized
as follows: Churches, 189,488; religious organizations, 158,695;
ordained ministers, 114,823; members or communicants, 15,217,948;
value of church property, $670,000,000; seating capacity of churches,
43,000,000, while in the 23,000 places where organizations which own
no edifices hold their services, accommodations could be found for
2,250,000 more. In the majority of the Protestant churches, at least
two services are held on each Sabbath; in the Catholic, six or seven.

Granting these premises, it is but reasonable to say that if, on any
given day, the entire population of the country should desire to attend
at least one religious service, accommodations could readily be found
for the entire number,—ample proof that the spiritual interests of the
millions are by no means neglected so far as privileges of worship are
concerned. It is a showing all the more remarkable when we consider
that all this vast provision is furnished on the basis of voluntary
offerings, the state contributing not a dollar for religious purposes.
It is probable that in these churches and edifices, on Sabbaths and
on weekdays, not less than 15,000,000 services are held each year, to
say nothing of sessions of Sunday-schools, meetings of Young People’s
Associations, and gatherings of kindred character. In them, too, not
less than ten millions of sermons and addresses on religious themes are
annually delivered.

The number of enrolled communicants, or members, however, by no means
expresses the real strength of the religious life of the nation. To
get at that, we must multiply each Protestant communicant by the 2.5
adherents allowed in all statistical calculations. Proceeding on this
basis, omitting for the time all Catholics, Jews, Theosophists, members
of Societies for Ethical Culture, Spiritualists, Latter-Day Saints, and
kindred bodies, and multiplying the 15,200,000 Protestant members by
2.5, we have over 50,000,000 as the total Protestant population of the
country. Adding to these 50,000,000 the Catholic population, estimated
by Catholic authorities as being 15 per cent. larger than the number
of Catholic communicants, we have 57,062,000 as the total Christian
population, leaving only about 7,000,000 who are neither communicants
nor adherents. Of the 7,000,000 opposed, for various reasons, to the
churches, comparatively few are to be reckoned as either infidels or
atheists; while, on the other hand, it is true that of the 57,000,000
reckoned as either communicants or adherents, millions are Christians
only in name, either never attending the services of the churches, or
at the best only at rare intervals. Gratifying as is this splendid
exhibit of religious devotion on the part of the American people, the
fact that there are millions in our land whose allegiance to Christian
doctrine is but nominal, with millions more upon whose lives religion
exercises no appreciable influence whatever, is a sufficient proof of
the enormous task yet confronting the churches of Christ, if we are
to stand before the nations as the great distinctive Christian nation
of the world. The stupendous gain, however, in ninety-four years, of
over 14,853,076 in Protestant churches alone is a record of religious
progress unparalleled in the history of the world.

[Illustration: SALISBURY CATHEDRAL, ENGLAND. (WEST FRONT.)]

Advancing to the question of distribution of the religious forces
enumerated, we find that while these forces are distributed throughout
every State and under one hundred and forty-three denominational
names, they are, nevertheless, massed largely in a few denominations
and in a comparatively few States. Competent authorities estimate
that the five largest denominations comprise fully 60 per cent. of
the entire number of communicants; the ten largest, 75 per cent. With
respect to communicants, the Catholic Church is first, with 7,510,000;
the Methodist (all bodies) second, with 5,405,076; the Baptist third,
with 3,717,373; the Presbyterian fourth, with 1,278,332; the Lutheran
fifth, with 1,233,072.

[Illustration: YOUNG MEN’S CHRISTIAN ASSOCIATION BUILDING,
PHILADELPHIA.]

With respect to population, reckoning the Catholic population at
7,510,000—which figures include children under ten years of age—and
adding to the communicant strength of the four other bodies mentioned
the 2.5 adherents allowed for each communicant, we have the following:
Methodist population, 18,918,466; Baptist, 12,990,805; Presbyterian,
5,525,162; Lutheran, 4,358,752; total Protestant population,
50,000,000; Catholic, 7,510,000.

With respect to value of church property, the Methodists are
first with $132,000,000; the Catholics second, $118,000,000; the
Presbyterians third, with $95,000,000; the Episcopalians fourth, with
$82,835,000; the Baptists fifth, with $82,390,000. The total value of
church property, reckoning all denominations, reaches the enormous sum
of $670,000,000.

To further particularize with respect to the lesser groups into which
the religious forces are divided is impossible within the limits
allowed for this chapter. To do it would require a volume instead of a
chapter. The following summary, however, may suffice to show the gain
of a century of religious effort:—

+-------+------------+----------------+--------------+
| Year. | Ministers. | Organizations. | Communicants |
| | | | or Members. |
+-------+------------+----------------+--------------+
| 1800 | 2,651 | 3,030 | 364,872 |
| 1850 | 25,555 | 43,072 | 3,529,988 |
| 1870 | 47,609 | 70,148 | 6,673,396 |
| 1880 | 69,870 | 97,090 | 10,065,963 |
| 1890 | 98,185 | 151,172 | 13,823,518 |
| 1894 | 114,823 | 158,695 | 15,217,948 |
+-------+------------+----------------+--------------+

When one remembers that one hundred years ago it was a common boast of
infidels that “Christianity would not survive two generations in this
country,” the above exhibit shows a religious progress unequaled in the
history of the kingdom of God in any land or any age.

Turning to the field of missionary effort, we find that the spread of
the Christian religion by missionary efforts, particularly during the
last one hundred years, forms one of the brightest chapters in the
records of human progress. Within this period, the triumphs of the
first three centuries have been far more than repeated.

Following these early victories of the Christian faith came on, as all
know, ages of darkness, dreary centuries, during the progress of which
the power of the church gradually waned, and, with respect to purely
spiritual activities, seemed to die away. The voice of exhortation
ceased to be heard. Christian song was hushed. Even prayer closed
its supplicating lips, and the church, overladen with corruption,
worldliness, and human ambition, passed into the thick darkness of
the long and disastrous eclipse of the Middle Ages. But amid the
widespread darkness enveloping the world, even the ages known as the
“Dark Ages” were not without their gleams of light. Among the Saracens
and in the lands of the Orient, always were to be found heroic men
and women toiling ceaselessly for the conversion of heathen nations
to the Christ. Later on, subsequent to the thirteenth century, and
especially during the centuries immediately following the discovery of
the New World, the desire for the Christianizing of the world flamed
into an all-absorbing passion. The tremendous labors of Xavier, of
Loyola, and their followers, in every quarter of the globe, have long
been the wonder and admiration of the world. Checked in Europe by the
rise of the great Protestant Reformation, the Catholic Church turned
its energies to the acquisition of spiritual power in other lands, and
with enormous success. Along the banks of the St. Lawrence, amid the
wilds of Canadian forests, far away on the shores of the Great Lakes,
thence southward to the Ohio, along the Mississippi, even to the Gulf;
in far Cathay, in Ceylon, in Japan, in China, in Africa,—everywhere
its missionaries could be found, heedless of hunger, of cold, of peril,
reckless even of life, if by any means, whether by life or by death,
they might “sprinkle many nations” and establish the holy emblem of the
Christian faith.

[Illustration: BAPTIST MISSION SCHOOL, JAPAN.]

Absorbed in the struggles going on in their own lands, Protestants made
but little effort for the extension of the gospel in foreign fields,
save the few but successful attempts made by the Moravians of Germany,
always the most zealous of all Protestant bodies in lines of missionary
service. What, however, was lacking in the way of missionary effort in
the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries has been more than made good
in the glorious nineteenth, the distinctive missionary century of the
Christian era. In the room of seven societies organized for world-wide
gospel evangelization at the end of the last century, there are now in
Europe and America between seventy and eighty organizations, employing
a force of nearly three thousand American and European missionaries,
and perhaps four times that number of native assistants. Full
$10,000,000 are annually raised among the Protestant bodies alone for
missionary service, while the great Roman Catholic Church prosecutes
its work with a zeal equally unflagging. A brief survey of the progress
of a hundred years of missionary effort will make it clear to all minds
that the day is not far distant when the declaration of the prophet,
“The earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the glory of the Lord,
even as the waters cover the sea,” shall have abundant and magnificent
realization.

At the beginning of this century, every island of the vast Pacific
was closed against the gospel. To-day, nearly every one is under
the influence, more or less extended, of Christian civilization.
India, from Cape Comorin to the Punjaub, from the Punjaub to the
Himalayas, from the Himalayas to Thibet,—at whose gates the gospel is
now knocking,—has been covered with a network of mission stations,
schools, colleges, and churches, closer by far in its interlacings than
that which at the close of the third century had spread itself over
the vast empire of the Cæsars. Of the Indian Archipelago, Sumatra,
Java, Borneo, the Celebes, New Guinea, not to mention smaller groups of
islands, are feeling the new life ever imparted by the advent of the
Cross. Japan, too, hungry for reform, and full of the stir of the age,
by granting entrance to the gospel, has within its borders already a
numerous Christian population with scores of evangelical congregations.
The same is true of the hermit nation, Corea. In the lands of Islam,
from Bagdad to the Balkans, from Egypt to Persia, and throughout all
Turkey, are to be found centres of missionary enterprise, the vast
influence of which is now being sensibly felt in the changing life of
those remarkable peoples. In Burmah, and recently in Siam, after years
of patient and apparently hopeless service, fields are everywhere
“white unto the harvest.” China, most populous of all heathen lands,
is open to missionary effort from Canton to Peking, from Shanghai
to Hon-Chow. Africa also, once, in its northern sections at least,
the home of the learning, the art, the science, the religion of the
world, awakening from the sleep of long and dreary centuries under the
influence of Christian civilization, again demands the attention of
the great nations of the world. Everywhere, east, west, north, south,
it is being invaded all along the line of Cecil Rhodes’ great railway,
stretching northward from Cape Town for three thousand miles, to meet
the twenty-six hundred pushing down from the north,—from Senegal to
Gaboon and from Gaboon to the Congo; on the shores of Tanganyika and
along the banks of the Zambesi shine the lights of the gospel, which,
wherever it has gone, has been the harbinger of a new and brighter
day. Within the mighty domains of our own continent, upon the immense
plains reaching from Labrador to the Pacific, upon the sterile coasts
of Alaska, in the land of the Montezumas, in Central America, in South
America, from Panama to Terra-del-Fuego, equally marvelous have been
the steady gains resulting from a Christianity the forces of which,
like the waters that enrich the continent, penetrate all the bays and
estuaries of human society and influence all classes and conditions
of men. Looking upon the transformations effected by the labors of a
single century of Christian effort, one may surely say, “The peoples
that walked in darkness have seen a great light; they that dwell in the
land of the shadow of death, upon them hath the light shined.”

Equally wonderful have been the vast contributions of the church in
America to the great causes of education, philanthropy, and reform,
particularly in the line of educational work. The service of the church
in the great cause of education has never yet been fully recognized.
Men forget, when charging the church with hostility to human progress,
to freedom of thought and action, that until within a period of
seventy years nearly everything accomplished for popular education was
carried out under the auspices of the churches rather than under the
direction of the state. Until 1825, the state had done next to nothing
even in the development of its common schools. In the great State
of Pennsylvania, the system had no existence until the year 1835.
Even to-day, among the four hundred and fifty institutions of higher
education in the various States, nearly all owe their foundation to
the energy and sacrifice of Christian men and women. The total gifts
of the churches to the cause of education, still existent in plant, in
grounds and buildings, or in the form of endowment funds, reach the
enormous aggregate of nearly $350,000,000, while the total of gifts to
institutions of learning, largely from Christian sources, aggregate
nearly $10,000,000 per year.

[Illustration: METHODIST EPISCOPAL HOSPITAL, PHILADELPHIA.]

The religious activity of the century is further manifested in the
enormous sums raised and expended for purposes of charity, reform, and
general philanthropy. It would require an octavo volume of four hundred
pages to catalogue the various benevolent and charitable organizations
in the city of New York alone. Add to that volume the hundreds more
which would be required to enumerate the additional thousands to be
found in Philadelphia, Chicago, Boston,—in fact in every city, town,
and hamlet from the Atlantic to the Pacific, nine tenths of which are
distinctively Christian,—and you have a faint idea, at least, of
the vastness of the spiritual forces at work in these closing years
of the century for the amelioration of human ill, the dispelling of
moral and spiritual darkness, and the ushering in of the era of peace
and good will, for the coming of which the church has so ceaselessly
prayed. What these philanthropies are we cannot in detail enumerate.
Classified, they are for the poor, for the laboring classes, for the
sick, for fallen women, for free schools, for the aged, for the blind,
the deaf, the insane, the impotent, the degraded, the outcast, for
sailors, for the protection of animals, for city evangelization, for
home missions, for foreign missions, for religious publications, for
the publishing of the Holy Scriptures, for peace, for Young Men’s
Associations, Young Women’s Associations, for every cause that appeals
to the sentiment of brotherhood so characteristic of the age. In
number they are legion. In origin, three fourths are the outgrowth of
that spirit of Christian love without which they could not have been
originated, and by which they are maintained and perpetuated. Those
who assert that within this century Christianity has done more for
humanity than in all the centuries preceding are doubtless correct. It
has made men kind, made them humane. It has penetrated prisons, and
with beneficent change. It has lifted the prisoner from damp and dreary
dungeons into commodious structures, the pride of city and State. So
far, indeed, have the reforms inspired by the gospel been carried, that
men are beginning to inquire whether the limit has not been reached
beyond which it may be dangerous to go.

Such are the general facts of the religious progress of a century in
the United States. Reviewing them, we can easily discern the vast
and commanding influence of religion—the Christian religion—upon
the character and fortunes of our people. Among the forces working
for the upbuilding of the Republic, religion stands preëminent, the
most powerful, the most pervasive, the most irresistible of them all.
A free church in a free state, all its edifices have been built by
private contribution, all its magnificent benefactions sustained by
voluntary offerings, induced in every instance by the principle of
Christian love. A corporation, it holds its vast properties for the
common good of all. A relief society, the scope of its sympathies
is as wide as the wants of man. A university, it does more for the
education of the masses than the public school system itself. An
employer of labor, it utilizes the brains and energies of the most
highly educated body of men to be found in the Republic’s broad domain.
An organized beneficence, it outwatches Argus with his hundred eyes,
outworks Briareus with his hundred arms. An asylum, it gathers within
its protecting arms the halt, the maimed, the wounded of life’s great
battle, comforting them in trouble, sustaining them in adversity,
while ceaselessly pointing them to Him “who taketh away the sins of
the world.” “Every corner-stone it lays,” as one has said, “it lays
for humanity; every temple it opens, it opens for the world; every
altar it establishes, it establishes for the salvation of men. Its
spires are fingers pointing heavenward; its ministers are messengers
of good tidings; its ambassadors, ambassadors of hope; its angels,
angels of mercy.” Under all our institutions rest the Bible and the
school-house,—Christianity and Education. Without them, the Republic
is impossible; with them, we have Republican America for a thousand
years.

GREAT GROWTH OF LIBRARIES

BY JAMES P. BOYD, A.M., L.B.

Libraries are as old as civilization. Nothing marks civilized progress
more distinctly than the collections of writings, whether on clay,
stone, wood, papyrus, or parchment, which went to make up the libraries
of ancient peoples. Such writings generally related to religion,
laws, and conquests, and found their abode, in the form of archives,
in capitals and temples. Recent explorations in Mesopotamia reveal
collections, or libraries, of books inscribed on clay tablets, many of
whose dates are beyond 650 B. C. These libraries seem to have found a
home for the most part in royal palaces, and to have contained works
abounding in instruction for the kings’ subjects. As unearthed and
their contents deciphered, they throw much valuable light upon the
remote history, as well as the arts, sciences, and literatures of
Babylonia and Assyria.

In ancient Egypt collections of hieroglyphic writings were made in
temples and in the tombs of kings from the earliest known dates. Some
hieroglyphics still extant bear date prior to 2000 B. C., and one
papyrus manuscript has been discovered whose supposed date is 1600
B. C. What were known as the sacred Books of Thoth—forty-two in
number—constituted the Egyptian encyclopædia of religion and science,
and became such a fruitful source of commentary and exposition, that by
the time of the Grecian conquest they had grown in number of volumes to
36,325.

Of the libraries of the Greeks we have little positive knowledge,
though it is abundantly asserted by late compilers that large
collections of books (writings) once existed in the various Grecian
cities. Pisistratus is said to have founded a library at Athens as
early as 537 B. C. Strabo says that Aristotle collected the first
known library in Greece, which he bequeathed to Theophrastus (B. C.
322), and which, by the vicissitude of war, finally found its way to
Rome. At Cnidus there is said to have existed a special collection of
works upon medicine. Xenophon speaks of the library of Euthydemus.
Euclid and Plato are mentioned as book collectors. But by far the most
renowned book collectors of the Greeks were the Ptolemies of Egypt, who
gathered from Hellenic, Hebrew, and Egyptian sources that wonderful
collection of volumes, or rolls, which became famous as the Alexandrine
Library. This was composed of two libraries, one estimated at 42,800
volumes, or rolls, connected with the Academy, the other estimated at
490,000 volumes, or rolls, deposited in the Serapeum. It is said that
these immense collections were regularly catalogued and kept under the
supervision of competent librarians, till consumed by the Saracens at
the time of their conquest of Egypt, A. D. 640.

The Romans at first paid little attention to literature. It is not
until the last century of the republic that we hear of a library at
Rome, and then it was not a native collection but a spoil of war. It
was captured from Perseus of Macedonia and brought to Rome in B. C.
167. So Sulla captured the library of Apellicon, at Athens, in B. C.
86, and brought it to Rome. Lucullus brought to Rome a rich store of
literature from his eastern conquests (B. C. 67). Wealthy men and
scholars now began to form libraries at Rome, some of which became
very large and valuable. It is here we first hear of the dedication
of libraries to the public,—a step which made Rome for a time the
resort of scholars from other nations, especially Greece. The most
famous of the many imperial libraries of Rome was that founded by
Ulpius Trajanus. It was called the Ulpian Library, and was at first
founded in the forum of Trajan, but afterwards removed to the baths of
Diocletian. In the fourth century there are said to have been as many
as twenty-eight public libraries in Rome. Great, indeed, must have been
their destruction under various vicissitudes, for when the Emperor
Constantine moved the Roman capital to Constantinople, and founded his
imperial library there, it numbered but a few thousand books. It was,
however, greatly enlarged after his death—some say to 100,000 volumes.
It was destroyed in A. D. 476, with the close of the Western Empire.

With the spread of Christianity there arose a new incentive to write
and collect books. The church required both a literature and libraries
as part of its organization. Pamphilus is said to have collected a
library of 30,000 volumes, chiefly religious, at Cæsarea (A. D. 309),
his object being to lend them out to readers. But as book-making and
collecting became narrowed to the church, general literature was
proscribed and libraries ceased to flourish, except as encouraged by
the monastic orders. Such libraries were necessarily small and of a
private character. Their books were manuscripts written or copied by
the priests, up to the date of the invention of printing. The libraries
of this class which grew in importance were those of the Swiss and
Irish monasteries, not omitting those in England, as at Canterbury and
York. The invasion of the Norsemen, in the ninth and tenth centuries,
was generally fatal to the monastic libraries on both sides of the
English channel.

In France, the library at Fulda seemed to retain its books and respect.
It was greatly enlarged by Charlemagne, who also founded a more
ostentatious one at Tours. With the revival of learning, and with the
hope of opening a wider field to secular literature, Charles VI., of
France, founded a royal library which numbered 1100 volumes by A. D.
1411. A similar library in England, that of the British crown, numbered
329 volumes at the time of Henry VIII. In contrast with these early
royal efforts stood that of Corvinus, king of Hungary, whose library
numbered 50,000 volumes, mostly manuscripts, in 1490. This imperial
collection was burned by the Turks in 1540. About this time the nucleus
of the modern Laurentian Library of Florence was formed.

In 1556, the Bibliothèque Nationale, or royal library of France, at
Paris, was endowed by the king with power to demand a copy of every
book printed in France. This power became the basis of the copyright
tax, now universally levied by civilized nations, and which has been
the means of greatly enriching all government libraries. In 1556 the
royal library of France could boast of but 2000 volumes. In 1789 it
contained 200,000 volumes, the largest number of any library then
existing. At the end of the nineteenth century it still retains
the distinction of being the most extensive library in the world,
containing approximately 3,000,000 volumes.

[Illustration: THE NEW LIBRARY OF CONGRESS, WASHINGTON, D. C.]

In Italy the libraries, though venerable and very rich in rare
collections of manuscripts, are not noted for the number of books which
represent modern literature. The most noted library is the Biblioteca
Vaticana, or library of the Vatican. It traces a vague history back to
the fifth century, but its real foundation was in 1455. The number of
volumes and manuscripts on its shelves is approximately 300,000.

In Spain and Portugal are national libraries in their respective
capitals, Madrid and Lisbon. The national library of Spain contains
some 560,000 volumes and manuscripts, while that of Lisbon contains
over 200,000. Belgium and Holland are rich in libraries. The royal
library at Brussels contains over 400,000 volumes. In 1830 it was
made a part of the state archives and thrown open to the public. The
national library of Holland was established in 1798 by uniting the
library of the princes of Orange with the smaller libraries of the
defunct states. It thus became the library of the States-General,
but in 1815 it was converted into the present national library. It
has a very valuable collection of books, numbering over 400,000. One
of the best arranged and managed libraries in Europe is the Royal
Library at Copenhagen. It was thrown open to the public in 1793, and
has since been conducted under national auspices. Two copies of every
book published in the kingdom must be deposited in this library. Its
volumes have increased very rapidly during the nineteenth century, and
now number over 550,000. The Royal Library of Sweden is located at
Stockholm. It contains over 350,000 valuable volumes, and is admirably
arranged and conducted. The University Library at Upsala is also a very
valuable one, containing 300,000 volumes. There is also an excellent
library of over 100,000 volumes connected with the university at Lund.
The libraries of Norway, though not so large as those of Sweden,
are numerous, valuable, and well managed. The University Library at
Christiana contains over 330,000 volumes. In Russia, large and valuable
libraries are not numerous outside of the cities of St. Petersburg,
Moscow, and Warsaw. The Imperial Library at St. Petersburg ranks as the
richest in Europe, excepting the libraries of Paris and the British
Museum. It is open to the public, and contains approximately 1,200,000
volumes.

[Illustration: RIDGWAY BRANCH OF PHILADELPHIA LIBRARY.]

Germany, with her multiplicity of minor capitals, her love of books and
book-making, her numerous universities, excels every other European
country in the number, extent, and value of her libraries. The largest
is the Royal Library at Berlin, with approximately 1,000,000 volumes.
It was founded by the “Great Elector” Frederick William, and opened
as a public library in 1661. The Royal Library at Munich long rated
as the largest in Germany, with its 1,200,000 volumes, inclusive of
pamphlets, the latter numbering some 500,000. But it was thought to
be unfair to class so many small and inconsequential works as books,
so that the library at Berlin was given precedence. Still the Munich
library is particularly rich in incunabula and other treasures derived
from the monasteries, which were closed in 1803. The University library
at Munich is also very rich in similar treasures. It contains well
nigh 500,000 volumes. The other large libraries of Germany are the
University library at Leipsic, with over 500,000 volumes; the Royal
and City library at Augsburg, with 123,000; the Royal, at Bamberg,
with 300,000 volumes; the University at Bonn, with 220,000 volumes;
the Grand Ducal at Darmstadt, with 400,000 volumes; the Royal Public,
at Dresden, with 410,000 volumes; the University at Erlangen,
with 185,000 volumes; the City, at Frankfort, with 190,000 volumes;
the University at Freiburg, with 250,000 volumes; the University at
Giessen, with 160,000 volumes; the Ducal Public, at Gotha, with 210,000
volumes; the Royal University at Göttingen, with 490,000 volumes; the
City at Hamburg, with 510,000 volumes; the University at Heidelberg,
with 410,000 volumes; the University at Jena, with 200,000 volumes;
the University at Kiel, with 225,000 volumes; the University at
Rostock, with 310,000 volumes; the University at Strassburg, with over
700,000 volumes; the University at Tübingen, with 320,000 volumes;
the Grand Ducal at Weimar, with 230,000 volumes; the Brunswick Ducal,
at Wolfenbüttel, with over 300,000 volumes. Besides these there are
numerous others attached to various universities or publicly organized
which have 100,000 volumes each.

In Austria-Hungary, the largest library is that of the Imperial Public,
at Vienna. It was founded in 1440 by Emperor Frederick III., and
has ever since been munificently supported by the Austrian princes.
Few libraries in Europe contain more important collections or are
better organized and housed. Its volumes number 540,000. Admission
to its reading room is free, but the books are loaned out under
rigid restrictions. The University Library of Vienna was founded by
Maria Theresa, and has grown very rapidly, numbering nearly 500,000
volumes. In Vienna alone the number of libraries exceed one hundred,
many of them of considerable extent. The various university libraries
throughout Austria-Hungary are rich in volumes, particularly that at
Cracow, with over 306,000 volumes, and at Innsbruck, with 175,000
volumes. The National Library at Budapest, Hungary, and also the
University at the same place, have rich collections, numbering 465,000
and 212,000 volumes respectively.

In Switzerland libraries are very numerous and well conducted. The
largest is that at Basel. It is called the Public University Library,
and numbers 187,000 volumes. The next largest is the City Library, at
Zurich, with 135,000 volumes. The smaller libraries of Switzerland
exceed two thousand in number, and are, as a rule, rich in literary
treasures descended from the ancient monasteries.

[Illustration: THE PUBLIC LIBRARY OF THE CITY OF BOSTON.]

Though by no means as ancient as some others, the leading library
of Great Britain, and the second in extent and importance in the
world,—the National, at Paris, France, being first,—has had a
phenomenal growth. It is located at London, and is known as the British
Museum. It dates from 1753, when Parliament purchased, for £20,000, the
Sir Hans Sloane collection, and afterwards consolidated therewith many
other valuable collections. It was given the privilege of copyright,
by which means, and by frequent and fortunate private bequests of
books, it grew apace and became a national repository, not only of
home-written works, but of the literature and rarities of all nations.
The number of its volumes at present exceeds 1,650,000. London does not
contain many public libraries, but there are numerous collections of
scientific and special works of great value to those pursuing certain
lines of knowledge. The second largest and most important collection in
England is that of the Bodleian Library of Oxford, with some 530,000
volumes; followed by that of the University of Cambridge, with some
510,000 volumes. Next in extent and importance in Great Britain is
the library of the Faculty of Advocates, in Edinburgh, Scotland.
It dates from 1682, and contains at present about 400,000 volumes.
The library of Trinity College, Dublin, was founded contemporaneously
with the Bodleian, and easily ranks as the largest and most important
in Ireland, with its 200,000 volumes, to which about 3000 are added
annually. What has been said of the dearth of public libraries in
London is in part true of all Great Britain. There are not a score of
libraries in all her European domain that number over 100,000 volumes,
and it is only within the nineteenth century that the public or free
library system began to grow in favor. Indeed, such growth may be
said to date from as late a period as 1850, when the Manchester Free
Reference Library was established. It has shown in fifty years a most
marvelous growth, and contains at present some 255,000 volumes.

Great Britain has not neglected to encourage the use of libraries among
her colonists. At Ottawa, Canada, is the library of Parliament. It was
founded in 1815, and grew slowly till 1841, when the two libraries of
Upper and Lower Canada were consolidated. It was subsequently destroyed
by fire, and in 1855 reëstablished. Since then it has grown rapidly,
and at present contains over 150,000 volumes. The Laval University
library, at Quebec, is the next most extensive in Canada, containing
over 100,000 volumes. The South African Public Library was founded at
Cape Town in 1818, and has grown to contain some 50,000 volumes, many
of them of great importance as bearing on the languages and customs
of African peoples. In Australia are many libraries of considerable
extent, whose volumes are, as a rule, free to all readers. The largest
of these is at Melbourne, and is called the Public Library of Victoria.
It is a collection of considerably over 150,000 books and pamphlets,
many of which relate to Australasian themes. The Sidney Free Public
Library is next to that at Melbourne in importance. It is said to
contain the largest collection of works special to Australia in the
world.

The book collections of China, and indeed throughout the Orient, are
by no means inconsiderable, and the favorite works relate to religion,
philosophy, poetry, history, and the sciences. They are generally large
and of encyclopædic style and proportions. Thus a Chinese history of
national events from the third century B. C. to the seventeenth A. D.
occupies sixty-six volumes, as bound in European style for the British
Museum. Libraries in Japan are more numerous, convenient, and extensive
than in China and elsewhere in the Orient. The University library at
Tokio, Japan, contains well nigh 200,000 volumes.

Of South American libraries the largest is the National, at Rio
Janeiro, Brazil, with some 240,000 volumes. The other republics of
South America which passed through their wars for independence and
their formative periods, not to say their internal jealousies and
strifes, during the nineteenth century, have had but little opportunity
or inclination to collect large libraries. Yet the spirit of education
is by no means dormant, and the nuclei of many libraries have been
formed, in which much pride is taken, and which bid fair to grow great
in importance as scholarship expands and other fostering conditions
come to prevail more generally. Even in the small and tumultuous
republics of Central America there are some valuable collections of
books which, in the course of time, will be greatly augmented and
prove a source of literary and national pride. Notwithstanding all the
ups and downs of the Mexican republic during the century, she has,
since the separation of church and state in 1857, evolved a creditable
educational system, and built up many excellent libraries, especially
in the capital, Mexico. The largest of these is the National, which
contains over 100,000 volumes.

[Illustration: JOHN RUSSELL YOUNG.

First Librarian of New Library of Congress.]

The growth of libraries in the United States during the nineteenth
century has been phenomenal. If its leading libraries have not yet
matched those of the old world in extent, they are, nevertheless,
unique in their freshness, exceptional in their number, original in
their systems, and most effective in their uses. And what is here said
of the leading libraries is still more true of the smaller, for in no
country has the library system so ramified as in the United States,
and come down to such close touch with the people. Not only cities,
towns, and even villages have their libraries, but States, schools, and
myriads of special organizations, all of which are centres of culture
and sources of literary pride.

The oldest library in the United States is that of Harvard College. It
was founded in 1638, and was destroyed by fire in 1764. It was speedily
restored, and became the recipient of many private donations, which
not only greatly increased the number of its volumes, but placed it
in possession of a handsome endowment fund. Since its removal to Gore
Hall, in 1840, it has been open to the public for reading within its
walls, but only the students of the university and other privileged
persons may borrow books. Its present collection numbers over half
a million of volumes of books and pamphlets. In the year 1700, two
other libraries were founded,—that of Yale College, and that which
afterwards became known as the New York Society Library. The first of
these grew very slowly until the beginning of the nineteenth century,
when it took on new life, and at the end of the century contains
some 250,000 volumes. The latter also grew very slowly, and in 1754
became a subscription library. It is peculiarly the library of the old
Knickerbocker families and their descendants, and the number of its
volumes gravitates around 100,000.

In 1731, Benjamin Franklin projected what he called a “subscription
library” at Philadelphia. It was incorporated as the Library Company
of Philadelphia, and grew rapidly through bequests of books and money.
In 1792 it absorbed the very valuable Loganian Library, and in 1869
Dr. Benjamin Rush left a bequest of over $1,000,000 to found its
Ridgeway Branch. The building erected for this purpose is, with the
exception of the new Library of Congress structure at Washington, the
handsomest, most commodious, and best arranged for library purposes
of any in the United States. The collection of the Library Company of
Philadelphia, commonly called the Philadelphia Library, now numbers
well nigh 200,000 volumes. Of the sixty-four libraries in the United
States reported to have been founded before the year 1800, thirty were
established between 1775 and 1800. The more important of these—that
is, those which rank as 20,000-volume libraries and over—are the
Massachusetts Historical Society Library, at Boston, founded in 1791;
the Georgetown College Library, at Georgetown, D. C., founded in 1791;
the Dartmouth College Library, at Hanover, N. H., founded in 1769; the
Columbia College Library, New York City, founded in 1754; the library
of the College of Physicians, at Philadelphia, founded in 1789; the
College of New Jersey Library, at Princeton University, founded in
1746; the Brown University Library, at Providence, R. I., founded in
1768; the Department of State Library and House of Representatives
Library, Washington, D. C., founded in 1789; the Williams College
Library, at Williamstown, Mass., founded in 1793.

From this standpoint we get a fair view of the tremendous strides of
library growth in the United States during the nineteenth century. The
sixty-four libraries of 1800 have grown to well nigh four thousand, not
counting those of less than 1000 volumes; and the less than 500,000
volumes of 1800 have increased to well nigh 30,000,000, omitting
those in libraries of less than a thousand volumes. Over six hundred
libraries in the United States take rank as 20,000-volume libraries
and over, at the end of the century; and in the six statistical years
between 1888 and 1893, which mark the greatest ratio of increase in
volumes, there was a growth equal to 66 per cent over all that had
preceded.

Nor has the century been more triumphant and wonderful in the
accumulation of volumes and the number of book repositories than
in the variety of systems and multiplicity of agencies by means of
which library information is arranged and disseminated. Conspicuous
among these has been the inauguration and growth of the free library
system, by means of which public funds are provided for the support
of libraries whose use is free to all. Hardly less conspicuous, and
perhaps even more far reaching, has been the adoption by many States
of the school-district library system, which draws upon a certain
proportion of the school fund for the collection and maintenance of the
district library. Again, most of the States have established libraries
of their own for public use, and as centres to which may be gathered
and whence may be disseminated the knowledge that appertains to the
respective State localities. Special library systems have grown into
great favor, covering and encouraging collections of historic works,
of scientific literature, of information relating to law, medicine,
theology, etc. In fact, there is hardly a line of investigation and
mental activity that has not come to be represented in its library
collections.

[Illustration: THE CARNEGIE FREE LIBRARY, PITTSBURGH, PA.]

At the head of all the century’s library triumphs in the United States
stands the Library of Congress. It is the national repository, and
is to the country what the British Museum is to Great Britain and
the Bibliothèque Nationale is to France. It was founded in 1800,
when the seat of government was moved to Washington. In 1814 it was
burned by the British soldiers, its home being then in the Capitol,
which was also destroyed. The government purchased Thomas Jefferson’s
collection of 7000 volumes as the nucleus of a new library. This grew
to contain 55,000 volumes by 1851, when all but 20,000 volumes were
again destroyed by an accidental fire. In 1852 it was refitted, the
government appropriating $75,000 for the purpose. On the restoration of
its halls in the Capitol, in fire-proof form, it began to grow rapidly
in volumes. In 1866, it received the 40,000 volumes which constituted
the library of the Smithsonian Institute. In 1870, the privilege of
copyright was transferred to it from the Patent Office. This, together
with the annual appropriation made by Congress, served to give it a
more rapid growth than ever, and to nationalize its importance. It
speedily grew rich in collections of history, science, law, and every
branch of literature appertaining to this and other countries. Under
its privilege of copyright, two copies of every volume desiring such
protection are required to be deposited within it. It must, therefore,
ere long become quite fully representative of the literary productions
of the country. In 1882, it was augmented by the presentation of the
private collection of the late Dr. Joseph M. Toner, of Washington,
containing 27,000 volumes and nearly as many pamphlets. By 1890 it had
outgrown its ability to accommodate its collections, and Congress made
a very liberal appropriation for the erection of a new and separate
library building, which was completed and occupied by 1897–98, the late
Hon. John Russell Young being its first librarian. It is the largest,
most elegant, and best fitted repository of books in the world, being
capable of accommodating over 2,000,000 volumes. The public are
privileged to use its books within the building, but only members of
Congress and certain designated officials of the Departments may take
them away. It is open from 9 A. M. to 4 P. M., except upon Sundays and
other legal holidays. Its location is on Capitol Hill, quite contiguous
to the Capitol itself.

A pioneer of the system of free libraries, and the one which comes next
to the Library of Congress in the number of its volumes, is the Public
Library of Boston, founded in 1848. It has had a phenomenal growth,
and is the centre of a wide range of literary influence. Its numerous
branches extend throughout the city and surrounding towns, bringing
free reading to every locality. The number of its volumes exceeds
700,000. The free library system stands sponsor for a host of libraries
throughout the larger cities. The Public Library of Cincinnati was
founded upon this basis in 1867. It at once attained great popularity
and speedily grew till, by the end of the century, its volumes
numbered approximately 220,000. The same popularity and rate of growth
characterized the Public Library of Chicago and that of Philadelphia.
The former was founded in 1872, and now contains over 220,000 volumes.
The latter was not founded until 1891, but by the year 1900 it grew
to contain 203,102 volumes, with fifteen branches, or divisions,
throughout the city, and an annual circulation of 1,778,387 volumes.

Other libraries of the United States founded or rehabilitated during
the nineteenth century, and which ere its close have taken rank as
libraries containing over 100,000 volumes, are the New York State
Library, at Albany, with approximately 190,000; the State Library at
Annapolis, Md., with 100,000 volumes; the Enoch Pratt Free Library,
at Baltimore, with 165,000 volumes; the Peabody Institute Library, at
Baltimore, with 125,000 volumes; the Athenæum Library, at Boston, with
185,000 volumes; the City Library, at Brooklyn, N.Y., with 120,000
volumes; the University Library, at Chicago, with nearly 400,000
volumes; the Newberry Library, at Chicago, with 125,000 volumes; the
Public Library at Detroit, with 135,000 volumes; the Cornell University
Library, at Ithaca, N. Y., with 175,000 volumes; the library of the
State Historical Society, at Madison, Wis., with 110,000 volumes; the
Mercantile Library, at Philadelphia, with 175,000 volumes; the library
of the University of Pennsylvania, with 120,000 volumes; the Astor
Library, New York City, with 265,000 volumes; the Mercantile Library,
New York City, with 250,000 volumes; the Public Library at St. Louis,
Mo., with 105,000 volumes; the Sutro Library, at San Francisco, with
210,000 volumes.

Of those libraries founded during the century in the United States,
and which have secured a rank as over 20,000-volume libraries, there
are very many that approach the 100,000 mark, and their average of
volumes would gravitate around 50,000. It is by no means true that the
importance and usefulness of a library must be measured by its number
of volumes. Very many of the best managed, serviceable, and popular
libraries contain even less than 20,000 volumes.

The spirit of knowledge which has created in the United States such
a demand for libraries has been happily supplemented by a spirit of
liberality. Nowhere in the world have there risen so many and such
munificent donors of means to found and support libraries. Without
appearing invidious, mention may well be made of some of these
munificent givers and founders. Conspicuous among them is John Jacob
Astor, founder of the Astor Library in New York City, with its splendid
endowment fund of $1,100,000; James Lenox, who founded the Lenox
Library of New York City, and invested in buildings and endowment
$1,247,000; George Peabody, who founded, in 1857, at Baltimore, the
Peabody Institute and Library, with an endowment of $1,000,000; Walter
L. Newberry, of Chicago, who, in 1889, left $2,000,000 to found a
free public library in the northern part of the city; John Crerar,
of Chicago, who left an immense estate to found and endow the Crerar
Library; Enoch Pratt, of Baltimore, who gave $1,150,000 to found the
Enoch Pratt Free Library; Dr. James Rush, of Philadelphia, who left, in
1869, a bequest of over $1,000,000 to form the Ridgway Branch of the
Philadelphia Library; Andrew Carnegie, who founded the Pittsburgh Free
Library and several others in different places.

The century’s progress in library management has kept pace with the
growth of volumes. Cataloguing and arranging of books have been reduced
to a science. Training of librarians and of students in the use of
books has become an educational course in many higher institutions
of learning. Library architecture and the numerous appliances for
distributing books or rendering them accessible on the shelves, have
all been improved, so that the library of the end of the century is as
much a seductive retreat as a world of knowledge.

PROGRESS OF THE CENTURY IN ARCHITECTURE

BY WILLIAM MARTIN AIKEN, F.A.I.A.,

_Former U. S. Supervising Architect_.

Towards the close of the last century there arose in England a decided
fashion for Greek columns and pediments, which was brought about by
the publication in 1762 of the discoveries by Stuart and Revett at
Athens, and was still further stimulated by the bringing to England of
the Elgin marbles in 1801, so that every building of any importance,
whether church or school or country residence, had its portico with
Doric, Ionic, or Corinthian columns. Thus began the Greek revival;
then followed the more slender columns, with arches and vaults, of the
Roman; and to these were very shortly added the cupola or the dome and
the balustrade of the Renaissance.

In London, the Bank of England by Sir John Soane, the British Museum by
Robert Smirke (a pupil of Soane’s), the University by Wilkins, were all
built early in this century, as were the Fitzwilliam Museum, Cambridge,
and the High School at Edinboro, magnificent colonnades adorning
the front of each. St. Pancras Church, in London, has a spire of
superimposed copies of the Temple of the Winds at Athens—each smaller
than the one beneath it,—and there are side porches which reproduce
the caryatid portico of the Pandroseum. But the most successful
building in England which was designed upon Greek lines is St. George’s
Hall, Liverpool, which has a central hall lit from above; at either end
is a court-room, and beyond, at one end, is an Odeon, or Music Hall.

The taste for classical design gradually declined in England, and a new
cult was assiduously propagated through the writings of Pugin, Brandon,
Rickman, and Parker, whose text was that classicism represented
paganism, and this, together with the remodeling of Windsor Castle,
in 1826, by Sir Jeffrey Wyatville, caused a general interest in the
revival of Gothic architecture; for some time, however, much illiterate
work was done in the adjustment of old forms to new conditions.

Throughout the last half of this century, the battle of the styles
has been maintained by the adherents of the differing schools with
varying success, and, although there may be notable examples to the
contrary, it has virtually resulted in the adoption of Gothic designs
for ecclesiastical buildings, conditions being much the same as
formerly for these structures; whereas, for secular buildings, with
ever-changing requirements, the classic or the Renaissance, which has
shown even greater pliability, has been considered more appropriate.

Among those whose success has been greatest in Gothic work may be
mentioned Sir Charles Barry, who was knighted for designing the
Parliament Buildings, begun in 1840 and completed twenty years later;
George Gilbert Scott, who did the Assize Courts, in Manchester, and New
Museum, Oxford; George Edmund Street, whose Law Courts in London are so
full of defects in plan yet so excellent in details; Alfred Waterhouse,
whose interesting (Norman) Museum of Natural History gave substantial
encouragement to the use of terra cotta; T. G. Jackson, the author of
much collegiate architecture at Oxford and elsewhere; J. L. Pierson,
the designer of eight churches in London; William Burgess, Sir Arthur
Blomfield, and James Brooks, all well known for the high character
of their work, as is also J. D. Sedding, whose broad sympathies and
refined spirit ranked him as one of the most talented men of his day.

The first international exposition was held in London in 1851, and
the single building in which it was contained was perhaps the most
marvelous exhibit. It was designed by Sir Joseph Paxton, and was the
first example of the use of iron and glass on a scale of such gigantic
proportions.

The so-called “Victorian Gothic” was used to a great extent for secular
work as late as 1870, and as it was much stimulated by the writings
of Street upon Spain and Northern Italy and by Ruskin’s “Stones of
Venice,” there were frequent attempts at polychromy, shown in the use
of different colored stone, brick, and terra cotta, and, in the Albert
Memorial, by means of mosaic.

R. W. Edis and E. W. Godwin were among the foremost practitioners of
the time, but in spite of the cleverness and boldness of design shown
in some of their city and suburban buildings, neither they nor others
could prolong the life of the fashion, and it presently yielded to the
revival of a previous one, and the Renaissance forms of the time of
Queen Anne became the vogue, especially for country houses,—nowhere
more homelike than in England.

In the suburb of Bedford Park, in Lowther Lodge, as in his designs
for the Alliance Assurance Company and the new Scotland Yard, Norman
Shaw showed the facility of his clever pencil, and Ernest George Peto
gave many evidences of his skill and taste; their work, however, often
having a flavor of the Flemish.

The building of the Thames Embankment, the opening of new
streets,—such as Holborn Viaduct and Shaftesbury Avenue,—with
the widening and straightening of others, have done much for the
improvement of modern London.

In France, there were very many important public buildings begun in
the first ten years of this century,—during the reign of Napoleon
I.,—although some of them were not completely finished until the
time of Napoleon III. (1848–1870). Among those in Paris were the Arc
de l’Étoile by Chalgrin, the largest triumphal arch ever built, being
similar in height and width to the front of Notre Dame Cathedral,
omitting the upper portion of the towers; Arc du Caroussel by Percier
& Fontaine—both these arches commemorating the victories of Napoleon;
the churches of the Madeleine by Vignon, and of Ste. Geneviève, in
honor of the great men of France; and the wing connecting the palaces
of the Tuileries with the Louvre, parallel to (but furthest from) the
river.

The Corps Législatif, which was formerly the Palais Bourbon, was
remodeled in 1807 by Poyet, and has for its river front a portico with
pediment sustained by twelve columns, a greater number than any other
existing building can show.

If there be one style more than any other which needs sunshine and a
clear atmosphere to show it to advantage, it is the classic; and a
Greek or Roman temple in the atmosphere of fog, rain, and snow, of
Edinboro, London, Munich, or even Paris, does not produce at all the
same impression as if it were under the blue skies of Italy, Sicily, or
Greece; however, the frequent employment of classical _motifs_ since
the beginning of the century has contributed, to a degree unprecedented
in modern times, towards placing Paris in the very foremost rank among
the capitals of the world in the dignity and impressiveness of its
public buildings.

[Illustration: ARC DE L’ÉTOILE, PARIS.]

The encouragement given to architecture in France by Napoleon I. was
revived by Napoleon III. The remodeling of the streets, avenues, and
boulevards of Paris, under the direction of Baron Hausmann, while it
swept away many landmarks of mediæval Paris, contributed wonderfully
to its stately elegance as well as to its hygiene; the work begun
upon the Louvre was completed from designs by Visconti & Lefuel, and
much entirely new work erected. There was a group of men, some of
whom brought about the Neo-Grec movement, whose work was especially
interesting, and although not extensively copied, yet exerted a marked
influence for many years afterwards. These men were Labrouste, who
designed the Library of Ste. Geneviève, about 1830; Duc, who remodeled
the Palais de Justice; Duban, who built the library for the School of
Fine Arts, about 1845; Viollet le Duc, who restored the Château de
Pierrefonds, and wrote treatises and dictionaries upon architecture,
furniture, etc., and was instrumental in the organization of the
Society for the Preservation of Historical Monuments.

Still later than these works are Vaudremer’s Neo-Grec Church of St.
Pierre de Montrouge, built in 1860, and Abadie’s Byzantine Church of
the Sacred Heart, still unfinished; Baltard’s Church of St. Augustin,
of brick and cast-iron, and Central Market, of cast-iron and glass;
Garnier’s Opera House, Hitorff’s Northern Railway Station; the
Trocadéro, built for the Exposition of 1878; the Machinery Hall and
Eiffel Tower, for that of 1889; together with a host of other public
buildings, not only in Paris, but in other portions of France, many of
which have served as examples to the student of architecture in other
lands.

In this connection we should not forget the debt we owe to the French
nation. During the reign of Louis XIV. the School of Fine Arts was
founded in Paris, where free instruction in painting, sculpture, and
architecture is still given to all who pass satisfactorily the entrance
examinations; and in this school many of our successful architects
have received gratuitous instruction from some of the distinguished
men above mentioned. In the Department of Architecture the chief
characteristics are the thorough and systematic study of the plan, and
the adaptation of building materials to the conditions of the design.

Other European cities besides Paris have profited by the general
prosperity of the century. St. Petersburg produces the effect of a city
of palaces, the many residences of grand dukes and nobles, the number
of public institutions, the riding schools,—much used on account
of the severity of the climate,—and even the barracks, in spite of
the free use of stucco, each contributing to a certain impression of
stateliness; the palace of the Archduke Michael, built by an Italian,
Rossi, in 1820, is perhaps the most refined and dignified. Muscovite
architecture is most conspicuous in the elaborate and bulbous domes,
curious not only in form, but in color, of the churches of St.
Petersburg, of Moscow and Warsaw.

King Louis of Bavaria, having lived in Rome when Crown Prince,
cultivated so great a fondness for the architecture of Greece and
Italy, that when he came to the throne he commissioned his architects
to design for his capital city of Munich the Walhalla, Ruhmeshalle,
Glyptothek, and Pinakothek, after classical models.

In Dresden, the most interesting buildings designed upon Greek or
Italian traditions are the theatre and the picture gallery, by Semper,
who will long be ranked as the foremost German architect of his day.

In Berlin there is a theatre,—unique of its kind, with stage in the
centre, and an auditorium for winter use at one end and one for summer
at the other,—designed by Titz; at Carlsruhe, Stuttgart, and Strasburg
there are theatres and schools in the same style. The present Emperor
has added many schools throughout the empire, but they are of late
German Renaissance.

The public buildings of Germany and Belgium show few designs of
interest in recent years; the Parliament House at Berlin, by Wallot,
and the Palais de Justice at Brussels, by Polaert, being colossal in
mass and clumsy in detail. Many of the private houses designed in the
Italian Renaissance were very elegant and attractive, but within the
past decade there has been a woeful deterioration in the character of
both surface and line—the grotesque replacing the graceful.

[Illustration: NATURAL HISTORY MUSEUM, KENSINGTON, LONDON.]

The villages built for their employees by Krupp, the gun manufacturer,
and Stumm, the maker of steel, are notable instances of the application
of private capital to the improvement of the domestic conditions of
the laboring class.

In Austria, Vienna has developed wonderfully since the days of Maria
Theresa. The classic Parliament House by Hansen, in 1843, is one of
the most delightful of its kind to be found anywhere; Schmitt’s Gothic
town-hall is interesting, but cannot be said to be so successful in
design; the Votive Church by Ferstel, in 1856 (also Gothic), the
Opera House by Siccardsburg and Van der Nüll, with the City Theatre,
an elaborate Renaissance structure, by Semper and Hasmauer, are all
worthy of note. The University with the two Museum buildings, facing
each other upon a small park, and other public buildings and residences
along the Ring Strasse, are extremely satisfactory, in spite of the
fact that stucco has been so extensively employed.

Only a few years ago the municipality of Buda-Pesth offered immunity
from taxation for fifteen years to all prospective builders, under
certain conditions as to character and cost of buildings, with the
result that the newer portion of the Hungarian capital was quickly
occupied by buildings of the most desirable kind; the Parliament
House, Opera, Cathedral, Technical School, and several club-houses and
private residences, each testify to the spirit with which the citizens
responded to this desire to beautify the city.

Since the unification of Italy there has been considerable building in
some of the principal cities, but very little of special importance.
In Rome, the changes are more perceptible than elsewhere; the
excavations of the Forum, the embankment of the Tiber, the widening and
straightening of the Corso, and the opening of the Via Nationale and
other streets, have destroyed comparatively little of the picturesque
that was worth retaining, have brought to light many treasures of art,
and, supplemented by the drainage of the Campagna by Prince Torlonia,
have certainly made it a healthier city to live in. The monument to
Victor Emmanuel, the National Museum, and the Braccia Nuovo of the
Vatican Museum, are among the few public structures of interest; the
many blocks of apartments and tenements are orderly and inoffensive,
though brick and stucco are the materials used in their construction.

Turin is the modern manufacturing city, while Florence preserves its
mediæval air, and Venice dreams of the bygone days when the splendor of
the Renaissance attracted the wealth, beauty, and talent of all Europe
to the city of the Doges.

Bologna and Genoa have each built in the suburbs a magnificent Campo
Santo, or cemetery, with chapels, colonnades, and other accessories of
architectural value; in Milan and Naples there are lofty glass-covered
arcades through the centre of a block and connecting with cross
streets, and the semi-circular colonnades of St. Francesco di Paolo, at
Naples, surround a piazza which is the great public resort of summer
evenings.

During the reign of King George a new Athens has sprung up alongside
of and overlapping the old city; although the nation is not wealthy,
the individual bequests of certain Greeks have given her the Museum,
University, and Academy, each of strict classic design, and a hospital
of Byzantine design. Under the sunny skies of Greece those buildings
certainly appear to much greater advantage than if in a more northern
atmosphere, and their statuary and polychromy show the value of these
accessories to such architecture in this climate.

[Illustration: THE WHITE HOUSE, WASHINGTON, D. C.]

Abdul Aziz, the predecessor of the present Sultan of Turkey, had so
great a fondness for building that his extravagance in this respect was
one of the causes which led to his downfall. The Dolma Bagtche palace,
erected directly upon the shores of the Bosphorus from the designs of
Balzan, an Armenian architect, suggests Spanish work of the sixteenth
century. In Constantinople and at Therapia,—a summer resort at the
northern end of the Bosphorus,—many of the foreign governments have
built official residences for their representatives.

[Illustration: GLASS COVERED ARCADE, MILAN.]

As for the architecture of our near neighbors on the north, the
buildings of Canada have been sturdy and substantial rather than
comely; but the long continuance of cold weather and the lack of means
have often hampered the builders. Since the completion of the Canadian
Pacific Railroad, the prosperity of city and country seems more
assured; the older cities growing in importance and extent, and new
towns springing up along the line to the West. In Ottawa the Parliament
Buildings and the octagonal Library, in Toronto, and, to some extent,
in Montreal, the Universities’ buildings, are Victorian Gothic. The
later buildings of the University in Montreal, excepting the Girls’
College, are not so interesting; but there are two railroad stations,
a hotel, cathedral, with several banks, insurance buildings, and
residences that call for more than passing notice. Perhaps the finest
building in all Canada is the Château Frontenac, in Quebec,—built by
Bruce Price of New York,—on the Dufferin Terrace, overlooking the St.
Lawrence River, and commanding a view that is hardly surpassed on the
Bosphorus, the Rhine, or the Hudson.

Although the history of architecture in America cannot be written
without some reference to contemporary work in Europe,—since so
much of our architecture in the first half of the century is adopted
from that of our ancestors and adapted to our uses, and in the last
half so many of our architects have studied there and so many of our
citizens have traveled there,—the problems and their conditions in
the Old World are very different from those of the New. Europe was
already mature when steam and electricity were introduced; precedent
was always to be considered, and modern requirements were often forced
to conform to existing circumstances. There has, therefore, been
comparatively less change there during the century than during the past
thirty years with us. With our republican institutions, many of the
monarchical formulas soon became obsolete, though the general trend
of our architecture has been in the direction of classic models. As
the country has grown larger and more wealthy, the problems given to
architects have become more complex; less reliance could be placed upon
precedent and a premium was placed upon originality, which, in spite of
innumerable vagaries, has brought American architecture, at the end of
the century, to be the most notable of the day.

At the end of the eighteenth century, this republic consisted of hardly
more than a number of communities extending at intervals along the
Atlantic seaboard, with an occasional settlement beyond the Alleghany
Mountains and across the Ohio River. Their resources were extremely
limited, their wants very few, and their intercommunication irregular;
but their methods of living were simple and frugal, and their courage
and endurance phenomenal.

Among the settlers of New England were many mechanics and
manufacturers, and these soon began to replace the primitive log
cabins with frame dwellings; those of the Southern States were chiefly
planters, who imported much of their labor, and often the bricks as
well as the glass, hardware, tiles, and other materials for their
houses. Many of those who colonized the Middle States had come from
countries in Europe where these materials were made, and brought their
secrets with them, while others were farmers and stock growers, whose
snug little cottages and enormous barns may be seen to this day in New
York and Pennsylvania.

At the beginning of the nineteenth century we possessed a national
style of architecture, which, although it had come to us from Italy,
through France and England, was yet distinctly American. It was,
however, almost exclusively confined to residences, and there were very
few public buildings of any description, except certain churches,—said
to have been designed by followers of Sir Christopher Wren, some of
whom were doubtless ship carpenters who had studied the works of Sir
William Chambers.

[Illustration: THE UNITED STATES CAPITOL, WASHINGTON, D. C.]

The Colonial style, as we now term it, was sufficiently elastic in
its adaptability to conform to the requirements of the merchant,
manufacturer, or mariner living at Salem, Boston, or Newport, as well
as to those of the planter living at Charleston or Savannah. There were
certain differences, more or less pronounced, peculiar to each section
and to each city, but all houses were alike in this respect,—there was
no gas or water, and the open fireplace was depended upon for heat.

In New England the dwelling-houses were placed near the ground; the
chimneys built in an interior cross wall, the kitchen, with its
accessories, as near to the dining-room as possible; the ceilings
were low, with cornices sometimes of plaster, sometimes of wood. The
roof,—which was often hipped and often of the gambrel shape, but
rarely a gable of even slope,—was always covered with shingles, which
covering was occasionally used also on the exterior walls.

In the South, some of the characteristics were the high basement, broad
piazzas, frequently at the level of the second as well as the first
story, and placed on the south and west sides; the chimney on outside
walls; the kitchen in a separate building, detached from the dwelling;
a broad hall through the centre, giving access to large rooms with high
ceilings; the roof quite as frequently hipped as gabled, and often—in
either case—a huge fanlight set in a low gable on the front for
ventilation of the attic; dormers were seldom used, as the attic was
not inhabited; the gambrel roof was uncommon; slate, and occasionally
tile or shingle, was used for roof covering.

Our first public buildings of any importance, and which show the
influence of contemporary work in England, were the White House,
designed by Hoban in 1792; the Capitol, begun by Dr. Thornton in
1793 and completed by B. H. Latrobe in 1830; the wings, containing
the present Senate and House of Representatives, were added later;
the dome, designed by Thomas U. Walter, was begun in 1858, but not
completed until 1873.

Our early Presidents took much interest in architecture, Washington
directing and criticising the planning of the Capitol and building
his own home at Mount Vernon, and Jefferson designing the dome and
colonnades of the University of Virginia, at Charlottesville, and his
own home at Monticello.

Massachusetts was the first State to erect its capitol,—the State
House in Boston, by Bulfinch, dating from 1795.

The City Hall of New York was our first work of unmistakable French
character, and shows the influence of the time of Louis XVI. It was
designed by Mangin, a Frenchman, begun in 1803, and completed in 1812.

After the war of 1812, many state and national buildings were erected;
from that time colonnades and domes seem indispensable to the proper
dignity of the capitol or court house. The use of both brick and stone
became more general, and, for private houses, the form of the gambrel
roof gradually disappeared in favor of the hip and gable. Subsequent
to 1830, the accepted type of the larger or more pretentious house was
the Italian villa, with a square tower accentuating the front entrance,
often one story higher than the main building; all roofs of low pitch,
covered with tin; the exterior walls faced with stucco. About this time
bay windows and sliding doors for principal rooms of first story, and
better facilities for the use of heat, light, and water were introduced
and the symmetrical disposition of parts often neglected.

The very steep pointed Gothic roof denoted the modest cottage,
and the perforated wooden tracery of windows and porches, or the
barge-boards of gables, became the simple beginning of that riotous
growth of jig-sawed fretwork afterwards so prominent upon those houses
constructed with Mansard or French roofs of rectilinear, concave, or
convex form. The works and writings of Downing had much influence at
this time, and it was shown not only in these Italian villas or Gothic
cottages, but also in landscape gardening about suburban residences.

The political disturbances in various countries of Europe in 1848
brought very many immigrants to our shores, and the discovery of gold
in California, in 1849, was the beginning of that steady flow of
settlers which has since then peopled so many of our Western States and
Territories.

[Illustration: LIBRARY BUILDING, UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA.

(Thos. Jefferson, Designer.)]

Then followed our own Civil War, from 1861 to 1865, and subsequent to
that the period of reconstruction, during which time there was some
building, but very little architecture, throughout the country.

In 1869 the Pacific Railroad was completed, and this not only gave a
new impetus to Western mining and farming, but created a new market for
Eastern manufactures.

So great was this manufacturing and commercial activity that vast
fortunes were made, and there were many opportunities calling for
the services of architects; but as they had hitherto been rarely
employed, except in a few of the larger cities, upon churches or
public buildings, a great proportion of them were untrained amateurs
or self-taught carpenters and masons. However, the first school of
architecture had just been organized at the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology, in Boston, and to William E. Ware,—who was its professor
of architecture from 1866, and who organized a similar school at
Columbia College, New York, in 1880,—the profession and the public owe
more than to any other one man for well-directed efforts towards the
development of such, qualifications as may eventually give a national
character to our architecture. These schools came none too soon, and
within the past twenty-five years many others have been founded and
many traveling scholarships endowed; collections of books, photographs,
and casts have been provided in various cities; architectural
periodicals published, and architectural societies and sketch clubs
formed, each of which has contributed to the higher education of the
profession and to the greater appreciation by the public.

Prior to this time, each section and each city had certain
peculiarities of architecture, as of speech, which were unmistakable.
The white New England meeting-house, the red school-house, the country
house with its kitchen, wash-room, and wood-shed trailing in the
rear, or the swell-front city house, were as characteristic as the
endless blocks of brown stone, high stoop houses of New York, or the
monotonous rows of red brick dwellings with white marble trimmings of
Philadelphia, or the broad verandas and halls of the Southern home.

Cast-iron was the recognized material for the front of business
buildings, the designs being chiefly in the Corinthian or composite
orders, and the arch or lintel used indiscriminately; and when the dry
goods store of A. T. Stewart & Co. was built, in 1872, to occupy the
whole block from Broadway to Fourth Avenue, and from Ninth to Tenth
Streets, it was the largest and most important of its kind. Before this
class of commercial architecture disappeared, a front was designed
by R. M. Hunt, about 1878, for a store on Broadway, near Broome
Street, where the plastic forms of the tile and stucco of Saracenic
architecture were used as being more logical for this material than an
imitation of Roman forms in stone.

There were not many summer resorts, and a few weeks at Saratoga,
Newport, or the Virginia Springs was the limit of the annual vacation;
the orthodox hotel was a rectangular frame building, with veranda on
one or more sides, covered by a flat roof supported by square piers
having the height of several stories; the length, width, and height
of the building were governed by no other proportion than that of the
number of guests.

In the South and West there were virtually no hotels, and the belated
traveler applied for food and shelter for himself and his horse to the
nearest friendly farm.

These were the prevailing conditions when the _nouveau riche_ appeared
upon the scene; to him as citizen prosperity meant a better home, to
the congregation a larger church, to the community a new city hall or
court house, to the State a more expensive capitol.

While these buildings were being everywhere erected, in accordance
with the time honored fashions of construction and with elaborate
finish, the disastrous conflagrations of 1871 in Chicago, and of 1872
in Boston, called general attention to the necessity for more permanent
building; and the precautions now taken against similar occurrences
were the beginning of efforts toward methods of fireproof construction.
Granite, marble, and limestone were discarded in favor of sandstone,
brick, and terra cotta; iron beams carrying brick or concrete
(subsequently hollow terra cotta) arches were introduced, and metal
laths were substituted for the wooden strips to a certain degree; but
as these fires were mainly in the business districts, such reforms have
been confined almost exclusively to commercial architecture.

[Illustration: TRINITY CHURCH, NEW YORK.]

In 1873 the financial panic gave a check to many building operations,
but it was of comparatively short duration, for in 1876 all the other
nations of the earth were invited to unite with us at Philadelphia in
celebrating the centennial anniversary of our independence.

This was our first international Exposition, and it was not remarkable
that in our eagerness to learn, and in the enthusiasm of prosperity, we
sought inspiration from all those peoples who had brought their goods
for our inspection. At once we began to build Queen Anne cottages or
to remodel existing houses with many bays and towers, rooms set at all
angles, floors at different levels, walls of many materials, and roofs
of varying slopes, as well as to apply many tints and shades of color
within and without.

The summer hotel and summer cottage began to appear at the seashore,
in the mountains, and along the shores of the great lakes, and the
winter resorts of the Carolinas, Florida, and California to attract the
seekers for health and pleasure.

The interior decoration of our houses was the chief lesson of 1876, and
having once seen the European and Oriental hangings, draperies, rugs,
and bric-à-brac, we set about furnishing our rooms with them.

Hitherto American architecture had been most influenced by English
precedent, and the Victorian Gothic had able advocates, especially
in Boston, where the Art Museum by Sturgis & Brigham, as well as
many stores, residences, and churches by Cummings & Sears, Peabody &
Stearns, and others, showed much vigor and originality. William A.
Potter, as supervising architect for the Government, adopted this
style, in 1875, for his buildings at Fall River, Mass., Nashville,
Tenn., and Covington, Ky., and R. M. Upjohn designed for Hartford,
Conn., the only Gothic State Capitol in this country.

R. M. Upjohn and Henry M. Congdon of New York had already done much
Gothic ecclesiastical work and, with the possible exception of
Grace Church in 1840, and St. Patrick’s Roman Catholic Cathedral in
1886 by Renwick, there is no example of this style which shows such
appreciation of proportion or of form, in mass and in detail, as
Trinity Church (1843) by the first-named architect.

It was perhaps rather fortunate that just as the Queen Anne fashion,
with its multiplicity of detail, was brought to us from England, H. H.
Richardson, of Boston, called our attention to the bigness and (almost
brutal) simplicity of the Romanesque from Southern France. From the
date of the building of Trinity Church, in Boston (1876), may be
reckoned the parting of the ways. Heretofore everything we had done of
any importance had an English stamp upon it; henceforth the work that
was done showed the result of training of the Parisian _atelier_ or of
the well-filled sketch books of Continental travel.

Not only in this church, but in his libraries at Woburn, North Easton,
Quincy, Milford, Burlington, and New Orleans, did Richardson show his
grasp of the subject. Trinity is unmistakably a Christian temple, and
its bigness most conducive to the sense of awe and reverence. His
libraries leave no doubt as to their having been built for the storing
and reading of books; his stone buildings, whether the Court House and
jail in Pittsburg, the Chamber of Commerce in Cincinnati, or private
houses in Buffalo or Chicago, show their purpose and emphasize their
material; his brick buildings, whether a college building at Cambridge,
railway station at New London, or residence at Washington, tell their
story in brick; and his country houses about the suburbs of Boston, to
be what they are, could not have been other than of wood.

His influence upon the architecture of the day was therefore not
surprising, but there was a subtleness in the character of his
designs that his imitators could never acquire and even his immediate
successors could not long retain after his personality was lost to
them; and from the lack partly, perhaps, of true sympathy, partly from
the modification of conditions, his art may be said to have died with
him.

[Illustration: ST. GEORGE’S HALL, PHILADELPHIA.]

As R. M. Hunt had the last word on the cast-iron front, so he had the
first on the modern sky-scraper, a peculiarly American production; the
walls of the Tribune Building, however, carry both their own weight,
and that of the floors, being built before the days of the methods
of steel skeleton construction. Hunt was trained in Paris, as was
Richardson, and had assisted in the design of the Pavillon de Flore
under Lefnel, and he showed his appreciation of the Neo-Grec movement
in his design for the Lenox Library. It is somewhat unusual for an
artist to do his best work in his latest years, but surely no better
work of its kind has been done in modern times than the residences
which he designed for three members of the Vanderbilt family at
Newport, in New York city, and at Biltmore, N. C. The design which he
left for the Fifth Avenue front of the Metropolitan Museum, now being
carried out by his son, is a magnificent Corinthian order, whereas much
of his other work is late French Gothic.

That he was called upon to design the base for Bartholdi’s Liberty in
New York Harbor, and the Administration Building at the International
Exposition of 1893, and that a portrait bust has been erected to his
memory, all testify to the appreciation in which he was held by the
profession.

To McKim, Mead & White, of New York, we are greatly indebted for their
influence upon secular architecture, and their Casino at Newport, built
in 1880, was probably more far-reaching in its effect upon country
houses than any other building at that time. Among the other work from
their office may be mentioned the Boston Public Library, the Madison
Square Garden (reproducing in its tower the Giralda of Seville), the
Library and other buildings for Columbia College, the Metropolitan and
University Clubs, the Agricultural Building (of staff) in Chicago in
1893, now being reproduced in marble for the Brooklyn Institute, the
Tiffany, the Villard, and other city houses, and a host of country
houses at Newport, Lenox, and elsewhere.

There is another architect whose talents should be acknowledged; for
about 1880, when the shingle house had just begun to take shape, there
was none more clever at that sort of thing than W. R. Emerson, of
Boston, and his resources seemed endless in harmonizing form and color
with conditions of seashore or mountain, as shown in his houses at Bar
Harbor, Milton, Newport, and many other summer resorts.

Philadelphia, which had hitherto always been extremely conservative
in architecture, soon began to erect some of the most singular and
fantastic structures that could well be imagined; but fortunately the
refined simplicity and fertile originality of such men as Wilson Eyre,
Frank Miles Day & Bro., and Cope & Stewardson have prevailed, and in
both city and suburban work they and certain others have done and
are doing much to counterbalance the character of the eccentricities
of their predecessors, as shown in buildings for the University of
Pennsylvania and the Academy of Arts and Sciences.

But the restless activity of Eastern loom and machine shop, and of
Western farm and mine, seemed to meet and concentrate in Chicago—the
_entrepôt_ for the raw material of the West and the finished product of
the East. The unprecedented increase in value of land, the low price of
iron and steel, with the introduction of high-speed elevators, combined
to develop a new type of sky-scraper; and as the nature of the soil
was entirely unlike that of other cities, the foundations of these
buildings presented problems which were solved by Chicago architects in
various ways hitherto untried. The Rookery by Burnham & Root, Pullman
Building by S. S. Beman, and the Auditorium (opera house, hotel, and
office building in one) by Adler & Sullivan, at the time of their
completion were most notable examples of architectural engineering,
and were soon followed by many others more or less similar, designed
by W. L. B. Jenny, Holabird & Roche, Henry Ives Cobb, and others.
The buildings for the Chicago University, the Athletic Club, and
Newbury Library, by the last-named architect, show a high degree of
ability; the peculiarly rich arabesque ornamentation designed by Louis
H. Sullivan, and the direct and rational handling of the buildings
upon which it was used, are certainly indicative of the spirit of
enthusiasm and conscientiousness of a well-trained mind. It is by such
characteristics that John W. Root was able to accomplish so much for
the advancement of architecture in the West.

What Krupp and Stumm had done for the employees in their works in
Germany, Pullman determined to do for his men and their families here;
and a town, with dwellings, schools, churches, water-works, etc., for
many thousand inhabitants was designed and built by S. S. Beman, which
has been reported by experts to be the best of its kind.

In Chicago, in 1893, was held our second international Exposition; and
that the exhibits should be suitably housed, some of the most prominent
architects of the country were called together, buildings were assigned
to each of them, and Frederick Law Olmsted was appointed to lay out the
grounds, waterways, and bridges.

[Illustration: TRINITY CHURCH, BOSTON.]

Except for the difference in material, never did Rome in the days of
Augustan magnificence show buildings similar to those grouped about the
Court of Honor. A Greek would surely have been proud to walk through
the Peristyle, or to have visited the Art Galleries, and a Roman to
have sauntered about the Terminal Station or the triumphal arches of
the Manufactures Building. Right nobly was the Spanish aid to Columbus
acknowledged in the design of Machinery Hall; but to France, whose
generosity had trained so many of our architects, sculptors, and
painters to do such things, was the greatest triumph in the unanimity
with which they had all worked and the success which crowned their
labors.

The building occupied by the Federal Government was one of the few
unworthy of its location or of the occasion. While the architecture of
the people had been advancing steadily for fifty years, that provided
by the Treasury Department in Washington had been quite as steadily
retrograding. The Custom House, Boston; Sub-Treasury, New York;
the Mint, in Philadelphia; the Treasury, Post Office, and Interior
Department buildings, in Washington, have stood almost alone since the
middle of the century. The few Gothic buildings referred to previously
were honest and intelligent attempts to improve the quality of design
for the government, but the politicians decided that artistic ability
was not a prerequisite for the office of Supervising Architect.

Since 1895, there has been some infusion of new life into the
designing-room, and such work as the designs by William Martin Aiken,
for the Buffalo and San Francisco Post Offices and Court Houses, the
Denver and the Philadelphia Mints, and the New London Post Office, were
about being materialized, when once again the politicians, who cared
not a whit for one design more than another, interfered to oblige the
government contractor. But the good seed had been planted, and the work
of the present incumbent, James Knox Taylor, is likely to show a marked
advance over that of many previous years.

[Illustration: THE AMERICAN SURETY COMPANY’S BUILDING, NEW YORK.]

The general scheme of the Congressional Library was conceived by
Smithmeyer & Pelz, the details carried out subsequently by General
Casey and his able assistants and successors, and the building opened
to the public in 1896. The experiment of the collaboration of sculptor
and painter with the architect had resulted so favorably in Chicago,
that the artists invited to decorate this building gladly responded;
and although the remuneration was inconsiderable, their loyalty to
the country, as to Art, resulted in such mural decoration as had not
been seen since W. M. Hunt decorated the Senate Chamber in Albany, or
La Farge did the figures in Trinity Church, Boston, and St. Thomas
Church, New York. Blashfield’s dome, typifying all the nations of the
earth; Vedder’s Minerva, in mosaic; H. O. Walker’s large lunettes,
illustrating English poems, and Simmons’ small lunettes, filled with
exquisite little figures, are but a few of the many interesting works
in color. Two of the main entrance doors of bronze were modeled by Olin
L. Warner, but he did not live to complete them. The marble stairway is
by Martini, and the statues which adorn the main reading-room are by
Adams, Bartlett, Partridge, Ward, and others.

The plan of the building is that of a central octagon containing the
general reading-room, connected by wings containing the book-stacks
with a surrounding hollow square containing rooms for special
collections. There are ample reading-rooms for representatives,
senators, and the public, and a tunnel by which books are sent to
the Capitol. This is the last building of considerable importance
constructed by the government, and it was built on time and within
the appropriation of $6,000,000; it may be said to be dignified and
suitable to its purpose, and to be representative of the people at the
close of the century.

It now seems probable that New York will build the handsome library
designed by Carrère & Hastings; the Egyptian lines of the reservoir
occupying the site—emphasized by the varying hues of the ivy for so
many seasons—will give place to those of an example of modern French
Renaissance.

Among the changes incidental to the growth of this city is the recent
disappearance of the old Tombs prison, which was another building
of Egyptian architecture, good of its kind, and quite dignified and
impressive.

There are certain other buildings designed in the style of a country
almost as tropical as Egypt, and as light and airy as that is sombre
and gloomy, but which seem quite as appropriate for their different
purposes: they are the Casino Theatre and the Synagogue at Fifth
Avenue and Forty-third Street,—each an excellent example of Saracenic
architecture,—the former of brick and terra cotta, and the latter
of vari-colored sandstones. Another synagogue, by Brunner & Tryon,
further up the avenue and facing Central Park, has a decided Byzantine
flavor,—the large arch accentuating the entrance, carrying a small
arcade, and being surmounted by the traceried dome.

The largest and most expensively elaborate hotel in America is the
Waldorf-Astoria; and although certain features of the exterior may not
be justified by interior arrangements, it has certainly been planned
with a view to great comfort and luxury.

While New York has the largest and most expensive private residences,—
the chief of these is that of Cornelius Vanderbilt,—Philadelphia
has the greatest number of small houses owned by their occupants;
and of late years, there are a greater number of attractive homes in
St. Louis than anywhere else in this country. Very many of them have
been designed by Eames & Young, or by Shepley, Rutan & Coolidge; and
with much open space about them, they have an air of elegance and
hospitality that is lacking to the homes in most other cities.

New York, from its position as the commercial and financial centre of
the country, in spite of its situation on a long, narrow island, may
be accepted as the typical city. What is done here architecturally
is done (only to a different degree) elsewhere, and its growth
horizontally in the northern portion of the city has kept pace with
its perpendicular growth in the more congested business portion. This
general expansion has altogether changed the character of many streets,
the residences becoming apartment houses, and the shops becoming office
buildings from ten to twenty stories,—or even more,—the masses
becoming larger and the detail proportionately less prominent.

The sky-line has entirely changed; the spire of Trinity is lost in
such surroundings as the Bowling Green, Empire, Washington Life, and
American Surety buildings, and in the vicinity where the Tribune tower
was once conspicuous, now the St. Paul Building rises twenty-five
stories, and the Ives Syndicate Building even higher; further and
further up Broadway, and to the right and left of it, these monster
buildings continue to rise. But among them all there is not one
which shows a more masterly handling of the problem than the Surety,
where the architect, Bruce Price, has emphasized the entrance with
a colonnade and six figures of much dignity and grace, and has
concentrated the ornament about the upper part of the building,
crowning it with a fine cornice, which is more effective from the
simplicity of the four walls beneath. This building holds its own among
such others as the Washington Life and St. James buildings, New York,
or the Ames Building, Boston, Harrison Building, Philadelphia, Schiller
Theatre, Chicago, Wainwright Building, St. Louis, or Examiner Building,
San Francisco.

It is impossible, in so brief a survey of the field, to enumerate more
than a very small fraction of the buildings illustrating the progress
of the architecture of the century; and aside from the residences,
apartments, and hotels where we live winter or summer, and commercial
buildings in which our working hours may be occupied, there are very
many examples of churches, schools, colleges, libraries, and museums,
donated, equipped, and endowed for our instruction, theatres and music
halls for our entertainment, railroad stations for transportation,
storage warehouses for the safety of valuables, and armories for the
use of our militia.

Besides these, there are engineering works of considerable importance,
such as the Eads Bridge, at St. Louis, or the Roebling Bridge, between
New York and Brooklyn, and the works of the sculptor St. Gaudens, the
Washington Arch by Stanford White, the Farragut and Lincoln statues
in New York and in Chicago, which should surely be mentioned, since
monumental works are the poetry, whereas the secular and commercial
works are but the prose of architecture.

As we review our productions, we should certainly feel encouraged to
believe that if we continue to meet and solve each problem in the same
direct, honest way that we have been doing for the last quarter of the
century, there need be no misgivings as to the future of architecture
in these United States.

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN CHEMISTRY

BY HARVEY W. WILEY, M.D., PH.D., LL.D.,

_Chief Chemist Agricultural Department, Washington, D. C._

The science of chemistry, as it is known to-day, had its real origin
towards the end of the eighteenth century. Before and up to that
time it is true there were many great workers in chemistry, whose
names are associated with investigations in chemical science, such as
Boyle, Stahl, Black, and Scheele. Contemporary with the close of the
eighteenth century and the beginning of the nineteenth must also be
mentioned particularly the names of Priestly (1733–1804), Cavendish
and Humphry Davy (1778–1829). All these workers had to contend, first
of all, with erroneous theories, which made it difficult to rightly
interpret the data of experiment. The old theory of phlogiston produced
an environment in which it was difficult for true scientific methods to
survive. The great investigator, who did more than any other one man to
overturn this false theory and place chemistry on a firm foundation,
was Lavoisier (1743–1794). Born near the middle of the eighteenth
century, his scientific activity began about 1770, and before he was
twenty-five he was made a member of the French Academy of Sciences. At
the age of forty he was recognized as the foremost scientist of his age.

Priestly discovered oxygen in 1774, but failed to recognize its true
relations to other bodies. It was Lavoisier who discovered oxidation
(1776), an achievement which meant more to chemistry than the discovery
of oxygen.

The observation that metals when heated in confined air increased in
weight while the volume of the confined air decreased, is the crucial
experiment upon which the whole science of chemistry rests. This
experiment was made most rigorously by Lavoisier, and the apparatus
which he used is still preserved in the Museum of L’École des Arts et
Métiers in Paris. This apparatus, simple in character and yet almost
perfect in construction, has for the chemist a peculiar significance
and sacredness, producing an impression similar to that inspired in the
devout Christian by the relics of the Cross and the Holy Sepulchre.

In the brief space which is assigned for a discussion of the progress
of chemistry during the nineteenth century, economy of words will be
secured by briefly tracing some of the salient points in the progress
of some of the more important branches of chemical science. In the
following pages, therefore, will be found a brief statement of what has
been accomplished, of the most important character, in the science of
chemistry, under the following heads:—

Inorganic chemistry; physical chemistry; organic chemistry; analytical
chemistry; synthetical chemistry; metallurgical chemistry; agricultural
chemistry; graphic chemistry; didactic chemistry; chemistry of
fermentation; and lastly electro-chemistry.

No attempt will be made in this paper to enter upon the discussion
of the progress which has been made in medical, pharmaceutical, and
physiological chemistry. The discussion outlined under the above heads
does not by any means embrace the whole subject. It will be sufficient
to indicate only the lines of progress along which the greatest
advances have been made.

I. INORGANIC AND PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.

[Illustration: H Davy Pres RS.]

The three propositions established by Lavoisier, which serve as the
foundation for inorganic and physical chemistry, are the following:—

1. Bodies burn only in contact with pure air.

2. The air is consumed in the combustion, and the increase in weight of
the burnt body is equal to the decrease in weight of the air.

3. In combustion the body is generally changed, by its combination with
the pure air, into an acid, and metals are changed into metal calx.

The total number of elementary bodies known at the beginning of the
century was probably less than thirty. Many had been recognized as such
since remote antiquity, but none of the non-metallic elements, except
oxygen and sulphur, was known, and even their properties were not
established with any degree of precision.

Not only did Lavoisier establish the fundamental principles of modern
chemistry, but in connection with Fourcroy (1755–1809), Berthollet
(1748–1822), and Guyton de Morveau (1737–1816), laid the foundation of
modern chemical nomenclature.

The contributions to chemical knowledge at this time were greatly
increased by the works of the Swedish chemist, Scheele (1742–1786),
and in the beginning years of the century the great work which was
accomplished by Sir Humphry Davy advanced very rapidly the general
knowledge of chemical science.

Davy’s first works served to elucidate the connection between
electricity and chemical processes, and it was through the classical
experiment with an electric current that he isolated (1807) the metals
sodium and potassium, and described their properties.

This achievement of Sir Humphry Davy’s was the second great step in the
progress of chemistry, after the one taken by Lavoisier. By means of
the metals sodium and potassium other metallic elements were separated,
notably aluminium by Wöhler (1845). Basing his work upon the above
experiment, Sainte Claire Deville developed the metallurgy of aluminium
(1854), and Bussy isolated magnesium (1830).

In 1811 iodine was discovered by Courtois, and its properties examined
simultaneously (1814) by Davy and Gay-Lussac.

The contributions made by Berzelius (1779–1848), who was a contemporary
of Davy and Gay-Lussac (1778–1850), were of the most important
character. Berzelius not only added to the knowledge of inorganic
chemistry but also established many of the important theories on which
chemical action depends. His elaboration of the employment of the
blowpipe in chemical analysis was of the greatest practical value.

In 1807 Dalton published a work entitled “New System of Chemical
Philosophy,” in which was announced for the first time the law of the
definite proportions of bodies forming a definite union. The atomic
theory of matter was also developed by Dalton, who gave it a definite
form and expression. Chemists now began to consider the elements as
definite indestructible particles of matter, forming unions among
themselves and with different kinds of atoms to form molecules, which
were considered as the units of substances. As a result of this
supposition, the development of the principle of the relative weight
with which bodies combine was the logical consequence.

Now for the first time the elements began to assume not only names
and descriptions of properties but also numbers, showing the relative
weight of their atoms or final conditions of existence. It was only
necessary, therefore, to assume the standard of comparison for any
one element, in order to determine the relative weights with which it
combined with others. Thus the system of atomic weights was developed.

As a result of the law of chemical action, that most elementary bodies
exist in a condition where two atoms are joined together to form a
molecule, it follows, that in most instances the molecular weights of
the elements are double their atomic weight. There are, however, many
notable exceptions to this rule.

The supposition of the existence of atoms was followed soon by another
theoretical proposition, advanced by Prout (1815). Assuming that the
atomic weight of hydrogen was one, Prout’s hypothesis asserted that the
atomic weights of all other elementary bodies were multiples of that
of hydrogen. The most rigid investigations of recent years have shown
that Prout’s hypothesis is untenable; but the remarkable fact still
remains, that in a great many cases the atomic weights of the elements
are almost whole numbers, or differ from whole numbers by almost a half
unit.

The determination of the atomic weights of the various elements
during the past one hundred years has been worked on by hundreds of
chemists whose names it would be impracticable to mention. The most
important of them are Berzelius, Cooke, Cleve, Delafontaine, Dumas,
Hermann, Marchand, Marignac (1817), Morley, Noyes, Pelouse (1807–1867),
Richards, Schneider, Stas (1813–1891), and Thompson. Of all these
workers Stas, a Belgian chemist, is perhaps the most renowned. Among
those mentioned, Cooke, Morley, Noyes, Delafontaine, and Richards are
citizens of the United States.

From the less than thirty elements which were known at the beginning
of the century, there are known to-day seventy-two with certainty,
and perhaps one or two more whose identity has not yet been fully
established. The chemists who have become most renowned by the
discovery of elementary bodies are: Cavendish, Scheele, Berzelius,
Wöhler (1800–1882), Davy, Gay-Lussac, Priestly, Bunsen (b. 1811),
Crookes (b. 1832), and Ramsay.

The following elements, twenty-eight in number, were known before 1800:

ELEMENTS KNOWN BEFORE 1800.

1. Copper Known to Ancients.

2. Gold ” ” ”

3. Iron ” ” ”

4. Lead ” ” ”

5. Silver ” ” ”

6. Tin ” ” ”

7. Carbon ” ” ”
(But three forms not identified until 1786–1800.)

8. Mercury Known to Ancients.

9. Antimony Fifteenth Century.

10. Bismuth ” ”

11. Zinc ” ”

12. Phosphorus 1669

13. Arsenic (Isolated) 1697
” (Studied) 1733

14. Cobalt 1733

15. Platinum 1735–1748

16. Nickel 1751

17. Hydrogen 1766

18. Nitrogen 1772

19. Oxygen 1774

20. Manganese (Studied in compounds,
isolated at unknown date) 1774

21. Barium 1774

22. Tungsten 1781–1785

23. Molybdenum 1782

24. Tellurium 1782–1798

25. Strontium 1790

26. Yttrium 1794

27. Chromium 1797

28. Beryllium 1798

Four additional elements were known to exist before that date, but they
had not been isolated and identified. These are:—

ELEMENTS KNOWN BUT NOT ISOLATED OR EXAMINED BEFORE 1800.

Chlorine {Compound known 1774
{Isolated and studied 1810

Titanium {Known in compounds 1791
{Isolated 1824

Uranium {Known in compounds 1789
{Isolated 1824

Zirconium {Known in compounds 1789
{Isolated 1824

The following elements, forty-nine in number, have been discovered
since 1800:—

ELEMENTS DISCOVERED SINCE 1800.

1. Niobium 1801

2. Vanadium 1801

3. Tantalum. Studied about 1802–1803
(Not yet isolated.)

4. Cerium 1803

5. Iridium 1803

6. Osmium 1803

7. Palladium 1803

8. Rhodium 1803

9. Potassium 1807

10. Sodium 1807

11. Calcium 1808

12. Boron 1808

13. Silicon 1810

14. Iodine 1812

15. Cadmium 1817

16. Lithium 1817

17. Selenium 1817

18. Bromine 1826

19. Aluminium 1827

20. Thorium 1828

21. Ruthenium 1828–1845

22. Magnesium 1830

23. Lanthanum 1839

24. Terbium. Studied about 1839
(Not yet isolated.)

25. Erbium 1843

26. Neodymium 1843

27. Praseodymium 1843

28. Rubidium 1860

29. Cæsium 1860

30. Thallium 1861

31. Indium 1863

32. Gallium 1875

33. Decipium. (Name given in 1878 to
mixture of Samarium and Decipium.)
Isolated 1878

34. Ytterbium 1878

35. Thulium. (Name given by Cleve in
1879 to a metal in Gadolinite.
Has not yet been isolated, and
elementary nature is disputed.)

36. Scandium. Known since 1879
(Not yet isolated.)

37. Germanium 1885

38. Samarium. (A name given to a metal
found in Gadolinite. Elementary
nature very doubtful.)

39. Holmium. (Not yet isolated.)

40. Argon 1895

41. Helium 1896

42. Metargon 1898

43. Krypton 1898

44. Neon 1898

45. Polonium 1898

46. Coronium 1898

47. Xenon 1898

48. Monium 1898

49. Etherion (?) 1898

50. Gadolinium (?) 1885

51. Radium (?) 1898

The date in each case is that of the discovery. Numbers 49, 50, and
51 are not yet sufficiently well known to justify being considered
elements, and are therefore properly followed by an interrogation point.

II. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.

In strictly physical chemistry the relations of electricity and heat
to chemical action have been extensively developed during the century.
The specific heats of the elements and of most of their compounds have
been carefully determined, and thermo and physical chemistry under the
leadership of such master minds as Berthollet, Thompson, Van’t Hoff,
and Ostwald have been brought to the highest degree of perfection.

The chemist now does not consider that he knows any body until he knows
thoroughly its relations to heat and to electricity. The action of
light must also be included, but this subject will be more thoroughly
discussed under graphic chemistry.

The nature of solutions has also been developed by the studies of
Ostwald and Van’t Hoff, and as a result of these studies, a flood of
light has been thrown upon the constitution of compound bodies.

In the development of physical chemistry, attention should be directed
to the help afforded by Newlands (1864) and Mendelejeff (1869) and
others, showing that the elements form groups which tend to recur with
a periodicity which is sufficiently definite to enable the investigator
to foretell to some extent the properties of the elements which have
never yet been discovered, and whose existence is necessary in order to
fill up the gaps in existing groups.

By this method the existence, atomic weight and properties of scandium,
gallium, and germanium were foretold years before their discovery.
Such actual realization of a scientific-prophetic method is one of
the strongest indications of the basis of fact upon which it rests.
Although a rigid application of the principles of the periodic law is
not possible, yet its discovery and elaboration mark one of the great
forward steps of chemical philosophy.

If we regard any material system by itself, i.e., independently of any
other system or influence by which it may be surrounded, we recognize
it as consisting of essentially two things,—matter and energy. A
precise definition of either matter or energy is difficult, if not
impossible; but what is connoted by these names is sufficiently well
understood by their well-known properties. Both energy and matter are
essential to each and every system. They are coexistent. In the light
of human experience, we cannot conceive of one existing without the
other; and in the study of any material system, consideration of one of
these components without the other can only be regarded as incomplete.
But, for the sake of convenience, this has been the practice, and,
generally speaking, chemists have concerned themselves with matter
changes of equilibria, while physicists have more especially directed
their attention to energy equilibria. The object of the physical
chemist is to follow equilibria changes in given systems, having due
regard for both the matter and energy involved.

Berthollet may be regarded as the first true physical chemist, on
account of his classical views on mass action. Largely because the time
was not ripe for it, his views were not generally adopted.

A quarter of a century later (1867), Guldberg and Waage gave a precise
mathematical expression of the law, but still it attracted very little
attention from investigators. A tremendous impetus was given to the
subject by the electrolytic dissociation theory of Arrhenius (1887),
and the extension of the additive laws of gases to dilute solutions,
by Van’t Hoff (1885). This was but a comparatively small field in
the subject, but it stimulated activity along the whole line, the
wonderful increase of our knowledge concerning the velocity or rates of
reaction, the heat changes involved, and the marvelous development of
electrolytic chemistry being pertinent instances.

The generalization of Gibbs, known as the phase rule (1876), which
accurately states the condition for equilibrium in the system, and
the Theorem of Le Chatelier (1884), that any change in the factors
of equilibrium from outside is followed by a reverse change within
the system, together with the mass law, now give us a consistent
theoretical foundation for the subject. In general terms, it may be
said that all chemistry, at least all theoretical chemistry, properly
belongs to the province of physical chemistry, and the title, while in
many ways convenient, is misleading.

III. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.

Compounds containing carbon enter into all the products of a living
cell. For this reason the chemistry of carbon compounds came to be
known as organic chemistry. This should not be taken as a definition,
however, without limitations. Many of the compounds containing carbon
are not known to enter into living tissue in any way, and their
connection with it is very remote and not essential. On the other
hand, it should be remembered that many organic compounds, and those
even of most importance, contain some other element,—nitrogen, for
example,—as the significant one.

While nearly all the known elements can enter into organic compounds,
the vast majority of such substances are composed of but very few. For
instance, those classes of which sugar, starch, the fats, etc., are
examples, contain only carbon, oxygen, and hydrogen. With nitrogen,
sulphur, and phosphorus added to these elements, almost the entire
range of organic chemistry is covered. Organic chemistry, therefore,
differs from inorganic chemistry in that, while the number of compounds
is much larger, the number of elements involved is very limited.

[Illustration: MICHAEL FARADAY.]

Berzelius may be regarded as having founded organic chemistry in the
beginning of this century. As a result of his analyses of the salts
of organic acids, he clearly demonstrated that the laws of definite
and multiple proportions hold equally for organic compounds and for
inorganic ones. The work of this master was ably furthered by Liebig
(1803–1873), who devised most elegant methods for the analytical
investigation of organic compounds, methods which are in use to-day
without any essential change.

Very soon, however, it was found that organic compounds existed having
the same percentage composition, but quite dissimilar properties,
physical and chemical, as, for instance, sugar and starch. Other
striking examples are Faraday’s discovery (1825) of a compound
identical in composition with ethylene, but wholly different in
properties; and Wöhler’s classical synthesis (1828) of urea by the
transformation of ammonium cyanate. Similar facts in the domain of
inorganic chemistry, though now well known, were at that time wanting,
and thus this most fruitful idea, designated as isomerism, was
introduced into the science.

The next great step was the introduction of the theory of radicles,
first suggested tentatively by Berzelius (1810), but put forward in
a definite way as one of the results of the classical investigation
on benzoyl by Liebig and Wöhler (1832). That is to say, a group of
elements, or radicle, can pass through a series of compounds, from one
to the other, as though the group were one single element. For years
this idea was the guiding principle in chemical investigations, and
was most useful in aiding the classification of chemical compounds and
bringing order out of the chaos of accumulating observations.

But the search for radicles was in a sense a vain one. We now know
that _no_ radicle exists as such by itself. Meanwhile, Dumas and
his pupil Laurent had introduced and developed the theory of types,
whereby all chemical compounds could be classified under four types,
which marked a distinct step in advance. Laurent, together with his
colleague Gerhardt (1816–1856), recognized the shortcomings of both
the radicle and type theories in their earlier forms, and showed
their inter-relation, when modified so as to do away with certain
inconsistencies.

Dumas had before this demonstrated the theory of substitution
(1834),—that is, that in certain compounds one or more of the elements
can be driven out and replaced by others without changing the essential
characteristics of the compound. For instance, chloracetic acid,
in which part of the hydrogen of acetic acid has been replaced by
chlorine, contains all the essential characteristics of acetic acid; in
fact, some of them—its acidic properties, for example—being markedly
accentuated. This theory was fiercely assailed at first, notably by
Liebig. Like all theories of science, it was in the beginning pushed
to the extreme, and put forward to explain things to which it was
not applicable. It gradually came to demonstrate its own right to
existence, largely as a result of the work of Laurent and Gerhardt,
and made its influence felt in the exposition of their ideas, to which
reference has just been made.

The development of these theories, about the middle of the century, was
greatly hastened by the work of many brilliant investigators, notably
Wurtz (1817–1884), Hofmann (1818–1892), Williamson (1824–), Kolbe
(1818–1884), and Frankland (1825–) among others.

Kekulé proposed a new type, marsh gas or methane. Shortly afterwards,
his well-known formula for benzene, the starting-point and foundation
of the vast class of aromatic bodies, was proposed. He insisted that
the time had come when chemists must ask what those ultimate particles,
or atoms, of the elements themselves were doing in these compounds
of various types. The answer was a grand one, and the result, our
magnificent store of information concerning the _constitution_ of
organic compounds, or the way in which the atoms are connected with
each other. It is not to be inferred that our knowledge on this
subject, in any one case, is complete. Far from it! Much that is most
interesting and important is apparently as remote from our grasp as
ever. But we do know something about the general relations of the atoms
in the molecule, and our knowledge, so far as it goes, is definite and
precise.

Somewhat later, Van’t Hoff and Lebel, at the same time but
independently, introduced the study of the space relations of organic
compounds by suggesting the simplest possible space formula (the
tetrahedron) for marsh gas or methane, of which all other organic
compounds may, theoretically at least, be regarded as derivatives.
Many inexplicable relations, especially among isomers, now became
clear. The theory was at first bitterly assailed, especially by Kolbe.
It found an able champion in Wislicenus (1838–), however, and has so
thoroughly established itself, that it may be safely said that at the
present day it is the controlling idea in the large majority of organic
investigations.

The carbon atom is characterized by a wonderful facility in uniting
not only with other elements, but with itself. It would even appear as
though its influence in this regard extended to other elements united
with it, as nitrogen, for instance, shows an unexpected ability to
unite with nitrogen in organic compounds.

Further, the carbon atom is characterized by an unusually constant
valency, namely, four. These two characteristics account for homology,
that is, for a series of similar compounds differing in composition
one from the other by—CH2, and enables us to trace back all organic
compounds to one mother substance—marsh gas or methane.

These ideas have also been more or less successfully applied to the
study of the composition of inorganic compounds. The assistance organic
chemistry has given to the general subject is incalculable. Finally,
it may be said, that while in the nature of the case our ideas of
structure in organic compounds cannot be regarded as proved, or as
not subject to possible future modifications, we have, at least, a
consistent theory and good working hypothesis. A homely illustration of
our present ideas may be drawn from the modern high city building. The
skeleton of this building is made of iron, about which are grouped the
brick, stone, wood, and other materials to form a complete building.
So the organic body is built on a chain or frame-work or skeleton of
carbon atoms, about which are grouped the atoms of hydrogen, oxygen,
and nitrogen, or radicle compounds thereof.

It is not possible here to even name some of the more eminent workers
who for a quarter of a century have contributed to our knowledge of
organic chemistry. This branch of chemistry has been the vogue, and has
been pushed almost to the limit of possibility since 1875. Many almost
unexplored fields still remain, but chemists recognize the fact that
in theory and practice organic chemistry has reached a high degree of
perfection, and they are returning to continue the researches in other
fields which have for so long been almost neglected.

IV. ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.

No branch of chemical science has a more general interest for the
public than that which relates to the determination of the materials of
which bodies are composed, and the proportions in which they exist.

At the beginning of the century considerable progress had been made
in this branch of knowledge by the researches of Boyle (1626–1691),
Hoffmann, Margraff (1709–1780), Scheele and Bergmann (1735–1784).
Berzelius, as has already been mentioned, had added a new and valuable
factor to chemical analysis by the development of the blowpipe, and
in the early part of the century mineral analysis was still further
advanced by Klaproth (1743–1817), Rose (1798–1873), and many others.

No one man did so much to advance this branch of chemical science as
Fresenius (1818–1897). He collated and proved all the proposed methods
of analysis, both qualitative and quantitative, and out of a confused
mass of material formed a logical system of procedure, which has proved
invaluable to the progress of chemical science in all its branches.

The volumetric methods of analysis, which save so much time and labor
without sacrificing accuracy, were developed by Gay-Lussac, Vauquelin
(1763–1879), Mohr (1806–1879), Volhard, Sutton, Fehling, and Liebig.

The methods of gas analysis have been worked out chiefly by Bunsen,
ably assisted by Winkler and Hempel.

The methods of determining the elementary bodies in organic compounds
have been developed by Dumas, Liebig, Will, Varrentrap, and Kjeldahl,
to the last of whom chemical analysis owes a debt of gratitude for the
invention of a speedy and accurate method of determining nitrogen.

Not much less is the debt due to Gooch for the invention of the
perforated platinum crucible, carrying an asbestos felt for securing
precipitates by filtration, in a form suitable to ignition without
further preparation.

[Illustration: WILLIAM CROOKES, F. R. S.]

Through the classic researches of Arago (1786–1853) and Biot
(1774–1862), polarized light has been made a most valuable adjunct
to chemical research, serving as it does to measure the quantity of
various alkaloids, essential oils, and sugars.

Based on these researches of Biot and Arago, Ventzke, Soleil,
Scheibler, Duboscq, Landolt, and Lippich have constructed apparatus,
which have made an exact science of optical saccharimetry. Optical
analysis is not without its relation to theoretical chemistry, for by
it has been proved the assumption that optically active bodies contain
an asymmetrical carbon atom,—that is, one which combines with four
different atoms or radicles.

Electricity has become also one of the most useful factors in chemical
analysis. Many metals are easily deposited by electrolytic action, and
their separation and determination rendered easy and certain.

Chemical analysis has not only given us accurate knowledge of the
constituents of matter, but by revealing the deportment of molecules
and groups of molecules in inorganic and organic compounds, has opened
up a path for organic and synthetic chemistry which otherwise must have
remained forever closed.

The discovery and development of spectrum analysis is one of the great
achievements of the nineteenth century in chemical science.

Wollaston, in 1802, first noticed that the spectrum of the sun’s
light, when greatly magnified, was not composed of colors gradually
changing from one to the other, but that the continuity of the colors
was interrupted by dark bands. Fraunhofer, in 1814, had made a map
of the solar spectrum, showing 576 of these dark lines. Fraunhofer
was entirely ignorant of the cause of these dark lines, but when he
had found them, not only in the light from the sun, but also from the
moon and the fixed stars, he properly concluded that they were due to
something entirely independent of the earth.

It remained for Bunsen and Kirchhoff, in 1860, to point out the
fact that these dark lines were characteristic of certain chemical
elements existing in the sun and its photosphere, and this fact is the
foundation of spectrum analysis. The broad black band in the sun’s
spectrum, called by Fraunhofer D, corresponded exactly in position
and in width with the yellow band produced by a flame containing
incandescent sodium. There was no doubt whatever, therefore, that
the two phenomena were due to the same cause; but why in the one case
should the band be black and in the other yellow? This question was
answered by the discovery of the fact that a ray of light colored by
incandescent sodium, passing through a luminous atmosphere of the same
metal, would lose by absorption all of its yellow color, and would
display a black band where before the yellow color existed.

Based upon this observation, the development of spectrum analysis went
forward with amazing rapidity. The hundreds of lines in the sun’s
spectrum were found to occupy exactly the position of luminous lines
in the spectra of various metals, and thus it was possible for the
chemist to extend his investigations beyond the limits of the earth,
and distinguish the chemical elements in the sun and in the fixed stars
billions of miles farther away from us than the sun itself. Celestial
chemistry has thus become a fixed and definite science.

But the value of spectral examinations has extended still farther. Many
luminous lines were observed in the spectrum which were not found in
the spectra of any known element. The inference then logically arose
that there were elements yet undiscovered to which these lines were
due. From this starting point investigations proceeded which have led
to the discovery of a large number of elementary bodies. Among the
important elements that have been discovered by means of spectrum
analysis may be mentioned: cæsium, rubidium, thallium, indium, gallium,
ytterbium, and scandium.

Spectrum analysis is also extremely useful in proving the verity of
supposed new elements; for if a supposed new element should be found to
give a series of spectral lines coincident with those already known, it
would be a positive proof of the fact that the supposed new element was
but a mixture of bodies already known to exist.

V. SYNTHETICAL CHEMISTRY.

This branch of chemical science has for its object the building up of
the more complex from the simpler forms of matter. In the early part
of the century, Chevreul and Wöhler laid the foundation of the science
by the synthesis of fatty-like bodies and urea. Berthellot and Friedel
(1832–) in France, and Williamson and Frankland in England, added much
to our knowledge. Kolbe, in Germany, made salicylic acid so abundantly
as to banish the natural article from the market. The synthesis of
coloring matters resembling indigo was also a great blow to that
industry. From the products of the distillation of coal, chemists were
able to make thousands of valuable bodies of the greatest utility. Many
medicinal substances and nearly all the common dyes trace their origin
to coal.

Fischer (b. 1852), in Germany, has contributed his remarkable
results in the synthesis of sugar to the last years of the century.
Lillienfeld, in Austria, has gone still further, and has built up a
body which has many of the properties of protein, one of the most
highly organized of organic substances.

[Illustration: SIR HENRY BESSEMER.]

In the inorganic world synthesis is not so difficult a matter as the
vast number of compounds attest. By means of the electric furnace,
Moissan, in France, has succeeded in uniting carbon with many of the
metallic elements, and thus opened the path for new achievements in
passing directly from inorganic to organic compounds.

The progress of chemical synthesis has already blotted out the old
distinction between inorganic and organic chemistry, and we can no
longer say of organic bodies that they are the products of living
cells. Organic bodies are those which contain a carbon or other
elementary skeleton, to which are attached the elements or groups of
elements forming the complete body.

The claim which has been made that synthetical chemistry would in the
near future produce the food of man, and thus relegate agriculture
to the domain of the useless or forgotten arts, is, however, wholly
without scientific foundation. The function of the farmer will not
be usurped by the chemist. The future will see the most important
contributions to chemistry coming from the field of organic chemistry,
but it will also see the farmer following in the furrow, and man
depending for his food on the fields of waving grain.

VI. METALLURGICAL CHEMISTRY.

This is the oldest branch of chemical science, and naturally the
one which was furthest advanced at the beginning of the century.
Nevertheless, the advances which the past one hundred years have seen
in this science are most surprising. Gold and silver are now secured
from ores so poor as to have rendered them of no value a hundred years
ago. The Bessemer process of steel making (1856) has revolutionized the
world, and made possible railroads and steamships. The basic Bessemer
process of making steel from pig-iron rich in phosphorus, has opened up
rich mines of iron ore hitherto valueless. The basic phosphatic slag,
resulting from this process, is of the highest value in the fields,
and has brought agriculture and metallurgy into intimate relationship.
The electric furnace has made aluminium almost as cheap as iron, bulk
for bulk, and electric welding bids fair to take the place of the old
process, with the cheapening of metals.

VII. AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY.

Sir Humphry Davy, in the beginning of the century, delivered a course
of lectures on the relations of chemistry to agriculture, and these
were published in book form. In France, important contributions
were made to agricultural chemical science by Vauquelin, Chevreul
(1786–1889), and Boussingault (1802–1887), who made important
researches before the middle of the century. The most important work in
agricultural chemistry, however, was done by Liebig. His achievements
so overshadowed those of his predecessors that he is generally
regarded, although improperly, as the father of that branch of the
science.

The early achievements of these workers showed the relatively small
portions of the crops that were derived from the soil. The study
of the ash constituents of plants laid the foundation of rational
fertilizing, and the utilization of the stores of plant food preserved
in great natural deposits.

Beginning with the middle of the century, the attention of agronomists
was called to the desirability of utilizing the deposits of guano,
found in the islands along the west coast of South America; of the
deposits of phosphate rock existing in many localities; and later, of
the potash salts, discovered near Stassfurt, which completed the trio
of available natural foods most useful to plants.

The establishment of an agricultural experiment station by Sir John
Lawes at Rothamstead (1834), before the middle of the century, set an
example which has been followed by the establishment of experiment
stations in all the civilized countries of the world.

Under the great stimulus given to agricultural research by these
stations, progress during the latter half of the century has been very
rapid. There now exist in Europe nearly one hundred stations devoted to
agricultural research, and in this country the number is half as great.

Conspicuous achievements, marking the closing years of the century,
have been the discovery of the methods whereby organic nitrogen is
rendered suitable for plant food, and atmospheric nitrogen fixed and
rendered available by leguminous plants. In the first instance, it has
been established that organic nitrogen in the soil can only be utilized
by plants after it has been oxidized by bacterial action. In the case
of leguminous plants, nitrogen is rendered available for nutrition by
means of bacteria inhabiting nodules in the roots of the legumes. These
two great discoveries have proved of incalculable benefit to practical
agriculture. Chemical science in its relations to agriculture has shown
that the fertility of the soil may be conserved and increased, while
the magnitude of the crops harvested is sustained or augmented. Thus,
no matter how rapid may be the increase of population, agricultural
chemistry will provide abundant food.

VIII. GRAPHIC CHEMISTRY.

[Illustration: LOUIS JACQUES DAGUERRE.]

The honor of discovering that prints could be made by the action of
light on certain salts, such as those of silver, belongs to Daguerre,
in 1839.

The fundamental principle of graphic chemistry is that metallic salts,
sensitive to the light, when in contact with organic matter, suffer
a complete or partial reduction and are rendered insoluble. The
intensity of the reduction is measured exactly by the intensity of the
light. When light is reflected from any object capable of producing
different degrees of intensity, as from the hair and face of a man,
the reduction of the metal is greatest by the light from that portion
of the physiognomy which gives the greatest reflection. Thus, when
the unreduced metallic salt is washed out, a permanent record, the
negative, of the object is left.

It is a long step from the first daguerreotype to the modern
photograph, but the principle of the process has remained unchanged.

Photographs in natural colors have of late years been obtained.
One method is by interposing a film of metallic mercury behind the
sensitive plate which must be transparent. The reflected rays of light,
having different wave lengths, precipitate the metal in superimposed
films, corresponding to the wave or half-wave length. When a negative
thus formed is seen by reflected light, the emergent rays from the
superimposed films acting as mirrors are transformed into the original
colors of the photographed object.

The various methods of printing by heliotypes, photolithographs,
photogravures, etc., are illustrations of the application of graphic
chemistry to the arts.

IX. DIDACTIC CHEMISTRY.

The lectures of Davy and Faraday in England, of Wöhler and Liebig in
Germany, of Chevreul and Dumas in France, and of Silliman (1779–1864)
in this country, made the study of chemistry attractive and easy during
the early part of the century.

It was noticed, however, that the students who finished these courses,
while well versed in the principles of the science, were not able to
apply them in practice. Towards the middle of the century, therefore,
a radical change in the system of instruction was inaugurated. The
student was put to work and taught to question nature for himself. The
universities of France and Germany were equipped with working desks
where students of chemistry put into practice at once the principles
of the science which they heard elucidated in the lecture room. Cooke,
at Harvard, was the chief apostle of the laboratory method in this
country, and this method of instruction has now spread, until even the
high and grammar schools have their chemical laboratories.

In our universities, students may now begin their chemical studies
associated with laboratory practice in the first year of their course,
and continue it to the end. Graduates of such courses are not only
grounded in the theories of chemistry, but are thoroughly familiar with
its practice. Under this system, coupled with the demand for chemical
services in every branch of industry, the number of trained chemists
has speedily increased. At this time (1899) there are more than four
thousand trained chemists in the United States.

X. CHEMISTRY OF FERMENTATION.

Our knowledge of fermentation and bacterial action is practically all
comprised in the achievements of the nineteenth century. Prior to this
time it was known that fermentation took place, but its causes and
character were wholly mysterious. The great work of Pasteur (1859)
resulted in the fact that fermentations were chiefly caused by the
activity of living cells, which have the capacity of reproduction. The
most common form of fermentation is that whereby sugar is converted
into alcohol and carbon dioxide. The name of the organism that produces
this change is _saccharomyces cerevisiae_.

Another class of fermentation is seen in the process of digestion. This
species of fermentation is typified by the action of sprouted barley
on starch, whereby the starch is converted into sugar. The active
principle of the saliva, ptyalin, has the same property, and when
starchy bodies are masticated, a part, at least, of the starch which
they contain is converted into sugar. The active principle of malt is
known as diastase, and this, as well as ptyalin, belongs to a class of
ferments which are incapable of reproduction.

[Illustration: LOUIS PASTEUR.]

All the decompositions of organic matter, such as the decay of meats
and vegetables, are now known to be forms of fermentation, due to the
action of certain organisms known by the group name of bacteria. This
discovery led naturally to the process of preserving organic compounds
by sterilization. The principles on which this process depends are
very simple. If an organic body, such as a fruit or vegetable, be
subjected for some time to a high temperature,—that of boiling water
will usually suffice,—the fermentation germs which it contains will be
destroyed. If then it be sealed in such a way, either hermetically or
with a plug of sterilized cotton, so that no living germ can reach it,
decomposition cannot take place. Certain chemicals, such for instance
as salicylic acid and formaldehyde, have the property of paralyzing or
suspending germ action, and hence organic bodies treated with these
substances may also be protected against decomposition.

The activity of fermentation is made use of in the technical arts.
Bread is made light by fermentation, and wine, beer, and cider are made
by the fermentation of fruits and grains. Alcohol is produced by the
fermentation of grains and potatoes, their starch having previously
been converted into sugar by malt.

Buchner has lately shown that all fermentation is of one kind, namely,
that due to ferments of the diastase type. The fermentation produced
by yeast, for instance, is not due, according to his observations, to
the living cells, but to the products of their activity. By destroying
yeast cells, by grinding and high pressure, and using their contents,
he has secured a vigorous fermentation similar in every respect to that
caused by the cells themselves.

XI. ELECTRO-CHEMISTRY.

The electric furnace, which affords a higher heat than chemists had
been able to secure, has been the promoter of great advances in
inorganic chemistry. Moissan (b. 1852), a French chemist, has been
the most successful in applying the heat of the electric furnace to
analytic and synthetic studies. One of the practical results which
has come from these studies has been the virtual bridging over of the
chasm which has been supposed to exist between organic and inorganic
compounds. Under the influence of the heat of the electric furnace,
carbon, which is the keystone of organic compounds, has been made to
combine directly with the metals, forming a series of bodies known as
metallic carbides. The carbide of calcium, under the action of water,
yields a gas known as acetylene, which by a series of reactions can be
converted into alcohol. Thus alcohol, which only a short time ago was
supposed to be solely the product of organic life, is shown also to
result from a simple inorganic reaction such as has been shown above.

The importance of electrolysis in metallurgical and analytical
chemistry has already been noticed. So rapid has been the progress
along these lines that the terms metallurgical chemistry and
electro-chemistry are in some respects almost synonymous.

Electricity has also been employed in many of the chemical arts; _e.
g._, in the promotion of crystallization and purification of organic
solutions as practiced in the sugar industry.

[Illustration: DRIVING A NAIL WITH A HAMMER MADE OF FROZEN MERCURY.]

Though belonging rather to analytical than to electro-chemistry, one
may here mention the wonders of that discovery which belongs to the
close of the nineteenth century, and which is known as “liquid air.”
Until 1877 air—oxygen and nitrogen—was regarded as a permanent gas.
Oxygen liquefies at 300° below zero and nitrogen at 320°. When air
is cooled to those degrees it assumes a misty form and falls like
raindrops to the bottom of the vessel. It then gives off vapor, like
boiling water. If poured out on a conductor, as iron or ice, it assumes
the gaseous state so rapidly as to amount to an explosion. The many
experiments with it are simply wonderful, and the practical claims for
it are without end. Already it runs an engine and motor vehicles. It is
claimed that it will complete the problem of aerial navigation; that
it is the coming power in gunnery and blasting; that it affords the
ideal sanitation; that in surgery it offers the most perfect chemical
cauterization.

CONCLUSION.

There is no branch of science that holds such an intimate relation
to the progress and welfare of man as chemistry. First of all, it
is chiefly instrumental in providing him with food and clothing, as
has been shown in the paragraph on agricultural chemistry. In the
second place it has extended his domain over matter and, in connection
with physics, has established the identity of the composition of the
universe with that of the earth. The universe has thus been shown to
be of a single origin and of uniform properties. By understanding
the constitution of matter, with which he is surrounded, man is able
to utilize to the best advantage the material at his disposal. Thus
invention is promoted and the application of chemical knowledge in the
arts extended.

THE CENTURY’S MUSIC AND DRAMA

BY RITER FITZGERALD, A.M.,

_Dramatic Critic “City Item,” Philadelphia_.

I. MUSIC.

Music finds its highest artistic development in the happy combinations
which go to make up the opera. These combinations passed through
various historic stages, and ripened into noble maturity by the end
of the eighteenth century, under the guiding genius of the Handels,
Mozarts, and Glucks of the times. Their legacy passed, in the
nineteenth century, to a host of worthy successors, among whom stands,
as a central figure, Verdi, the great Italian operatic composer; while
Wagner, of Germany, has striven with herculean might to revolutionize
the lyrical drama by polemical writing, by twofold authorship of
words and notes, and by a new application of principles gathered from
antecedent reformers. His efforts produced a commotion in the art
world which might be compared to that excited by the rivalry between
Buonocini and Handel in London, or Piccini and Gluck in Paris, but for
the fact that in each of these instances the contention was between
one composer and another, whereas in the case of Wagner it was the
opposition of one composer to all others in the world, save the few
who, believing in the man, his teachings, and his wonderful powers
of application, undertook propagandism as a duty, and endeavored to
make proselytes to their faith. He did not live to see the day when
his efforts could be called completely successful, and his death in
1883 left judgment quite wide open as to his theoretical and practical
merits. The nineteenth century closes with the question still on as
to the permanence or evanescence of his many unique, ponderous, and
revolutionizing productions.

Verdi, who still lives, surpasses all the composers of his time in the
beauty of his melodies and the intensity of his dramatic power.

Rossini, whose “Guillaume Tell,” which was produced in Paris in 1829,
was his masterpiece, ruled the operatic world before Verdi, until he
died in Paris in 1868.

Meyerbeer, whose principal operas are “Les Huguenots,” “Le Prophète,”
and “L’Africaine” (the latter produced in Paris in 1865, the year after
its composer’s death), was regarded as a remarkable composer, whose
knowledge of effect was unsurpassed, and whose fine intelligence and
musical knowledge almost made the world forgive him for frequent lack
of inspiration.

Halévy, whose only lasting success was “La Juive,” composed other
operas, such as “Charles VI.,” “La Reine de Chypre,” “L’Eclair,” and
“Les Mousquetaires de la Reine,” that achieved a certain amount of
success in France, which success was interrupted by Halévy’s death at
Nice in 1862.

Gounod, in 1859, made his most remarkable success with his greatest
opera, “Faust,” which, after the subject had been treated by Spohr,
Lindpainter, Schumann, Berlioz, and other distinguished composers, has
remained the only completely successful opera on the subject, although
Boito’s “Mefistofile” (another version of the subject) achieved a
marked success in Italy in 1868, and placed Boito among the remarkable
composers of the day. As for Gounod, his other operas never equaled his
“Faust.” Next in merit comes “Roméo et Juliette” (produced in Paris in
1867) and then his “Mireille,” which appeared in 1864, and “Philémon
et Baucis,” an exquisite little comic opera produced in 1860. His last
opera, “Le Tribut de Zamora,” was given at the Grand Opera, Paris, in
1881, and failed.

[Illustration: GIUSEPPE VERDI.]

Donizetti, who died in Bergamo in 1848, was for many years one of the
most popular operatic composers. He possessed undoubted ability, but
wrote carelessly, as the Italians did in that day. But his operas
contain much that is beautiful, and often show fine dramatic power. His
“Lucia” contains inspired pages, while other portions are inexcusably
commonplace. The same remark applies to his “Lucrezia Borgia,” “La
Favorita,” and “Maria di Rohan;” while in his comic operas, such as
“Don Pasquale” (which was composed in three weeks), his “L’Elisire
d’Amore” and “La Fille du Régiment,” Donizetti appears to better
advantage. They are melodious and very agreeably written. His fertility
may be imagined when you are told that he composed over sixty operas
during his career, as well as other compositions.

Bellini, whose career was a short one, as he was born in 1802 and died
in 1835, was badly trained and could not be called a well-schooled
musician, being rather a musician by instinct. But he possessed
remarkable ability, and, perceiving that the persistently florid style
of Rossini (which all the composers of that time blindly imitated)
was approaching an end, treated his melodies with a simplicity and
directness that at once attracted attention and met with approval.

Bellini’s knowledge of instrumentation was childish, but his intimacy
with Rubini, the famous tenor, aided him in achieving an admirable
treatment of the voice. His operas were very sweet and melodious. The
two operas by which he will be remembered are “La Sonnambula” and
“Norma,” the latter being, with all its faults, a great opera.

Another talented and prolific operatic composer was Mercadante, whose
“Il Giuramento” (produced in 1837) achieved considerable popularity.
But Mercadante’s successes were generally confined to Italy. He
composed sixty operas, and died in 1870 in Naples.

Ponchielli, who was born in 1834 and died in 1886, will be principally
remembered by his remarkably beautiful opera, “La Gioconda” (produced
in 1876), which, together with a re-written version of his first opera,
“I Promessi Sposi,” gave him great popularity in Italy and spread his
reputation to other countries.

[Illustration: BEETHOVEN IN HIS STUDY.]

As for Italy’s young composers that profess to represent the modern
Italian school of opera, they are led by Puccini, whose “Manon Lescaut”
and “La Bohême” are melodious and full of merit.

Mascagni and Leoncavallo, whose “Cavalleria Rusticana” and “I
Pagliacci” achieved popularity, have not realized expectations. Nor has
Giordano, whose “Andrea Chenier” was well received in Italy.

Bizet, whose “Carmen” is one of the most remarkable of modern operas,
died in Paris in 1875. “Carmen” has remained in the repertoire. His
other opera, “Les Pécheurs de Perles,” only achieved a moderate success.

[Illustration: GRAND OPERA HOUSE, PARIS.]

One of France’s greatest musicians, Hector Berlioz, was born in 1803
and died in 1869. His operas, “Les Troyens,” “Benvenuto Cellini,” his
“Damnation de Faust,” his “Roméo et Juliette” symphony, are all great
and afforded Wagner a model that he imitated persistently.

In 1871 France lost one of its most talented operatic composers, Auber,
whose “Masaniello” and “Fra Diavolo” are two of the most popular operas
ever written by a Frenchman. Auber composed comic operas charmingly,
and his “Domino Noir,” “Diamants de la Couronne,” “Haydée,” and other
works of a similar character, entertained the French people for many
years. Auber’s death has left a vacancy that has not been filled.

The modern French composers cannot be called great. Saint-Saens,
whose most successful work is “Samson et Dalila” (which is more of an
oratorio than an opera, and which was produced in 1877), has composed
other operas, such as “Henri VIII.,” “Ascanio,” et cetera, which lack
originality and inspiration.

Massenet has composed “Le Roi de Lahore,” “Hérodiade,” “Manon,”
“Werther,” et cetera, that have had passing successes.

Both Saint-Saens and Massenet have attempted to follow Wagner in their
sonorous orchestration; but their works lack distinction. The French
composers of to-day have been demoralized by Wagner’s affectations.

The death of Ambroise Thomas, in 1895, caused France the loss of one of
her most successful and accomplished operatic composers, whose “Mignon”
will be long admired as a very charming opera comique, while his
“Hamlet,” though containing portions that are ably written, has never
attained outside France any remarkable success.

[Illustration: METROPOLITAN OPERA HOUSE, NEW YORK.]

Reyer, whose “Sigurd” was produced in 1884 with considerable success,
is a follower of Meyerbeer. His “Salammbo” was produced in 1890, but
did not attract the attention expected outside of France.

German opera of the latter part of the century has been so demoralized
by the influence of Wagner that the German composers have become little
more than imitators of his pronounced mannerisms.

Weber’s “Der Freischütz” remains the most popular of German operas,
just as Verdi’s “Il Trovatore” is the most popular of Italian operas.

Spohr, Lindpainter, and many other German composers of ability have
been laid on the shelf.

Marshner, who died in Hanover in 1861, showed in his “Hans Heiling”
that he was a follower of Weber, as well as in his “Templar and Jewess.”

[Illustration: WILLIAM RICHARD WAGNER.]

Cornelius, who died in Mainz in 1874, made his principal success with
his “Barber of Bagdad,” a comic opera in which the manner of Wagner was
imitated. In 1864 “The Cid” was produced in Weimar, but it was found
depressingly heavy and labored.

Goldmark, a follower of Meyerbeer, made a success in 1875 with his
“Queen of Saba” that was not equaled by his “Merlin,” produced in 1886,
or his “Prisoner of War,” produced in 1899.

To return to the great leader of opera—Verdi—one may say of him that
his operas are divided into three periods. The first included the
works written in the old Neapolitan style as he had found it. To this
class belong “Nabucco,” “Attila,” et cetera. To the second period,
which shows remarkable dramatic color and beautiful melody, belong
“Rigoletto,” “Ernani,” and “Ballo in Maschera” (in which Verdi began
to pay attention to his instrumentation). To the third period belongs
“Aïda,” which is his most characteristic and remarkable opera, in which
the melody is wonderfully fresh and beautiful, combined with remarkable
science.

[Illustration: EDWIN FORREST.]

“Otello” is also a great work, written at a time of life when most
composers retire, and broadly dramatic in its treatment of the
situations, illuminated by rich and expressive instrumentation.

As for “Falstaff,” the latest opera that Verdi has written, and
probably the last he will write, it is the greatest modern comic opera,
just as Mozart’s “Nozze di Figaro” is the greatest comic opera of the
past. It convinces the world that Verdi’s genius is inexhaustible.

Next to Verdi comes Wagner, the anarchist of music, who began in
“Rienzi” and “The Flying Dutchman” by imitating the Italian forms of
melody. In “Tannhäuser,” portions are very beautiful and melodious;
in “Lohengrin,” portions are fine; but Wagner’s idea of effect was
bad and he never knew when to stop, so that many of the scenes are
interminable. This fault increased as Wagner composed the “Nibelungen”
series for the crazy king of Bavaria. Melody vanished, the singers
became secondary to the orchestra, which was persistently noisy.
Wagner’s effort was to create a new school of opera, in which
everything should be minutely descriptive. He went too far and opened
the question of failure. In opera the voices claim the first place,
and the orchestra is an accompaniment, so that Wagner’s method was
radically wrong.

Independent of this, he attempted to infuse life into the “Nibelungen”
series, whereas he adopted a tangled and childish fairy-story that
was more absurd than impressive. The later Wagner operas, which the
composer calls “music dramas,” are tiresome and monotonous to such a
degree that, with all the remarkable talent of Wagner, they may never
become popular, and may be eventually laid on the shelf, to be regarded
in the future as musical curios.

The musicians of the United States are steadily developing, and for
so young a country we have a large number of composers of first-class
ability, such as Macdowell, Foote, Lang, Chadwick, Gilchrist, and many
others who have produced important compositions.

In opera the American composers have done nothing, for the reason that
there are no opportunities for the production of such works. If there
were, we should soon have many operatic composers, and should speedily
take high rank in the lyric drama.

II. DRAMA.

[Illustration: CHARLOTTE SAUNDERS CUSHMAN.]

The theatre of the latter part of the century shows a remarkable
advance, in certain respects, over the theatre of the past, which
consisted of a “star,” an inferior company, poor scenery and
appointments, et cetera; whereas to-day there are many more really
good actors and actresses, the theatres are far more comfortable and
artistic, the scenery, costumes and details are beautiful and correct.

We have no Mrs. Siddons, no Kemble, no Rachel, no Talma; but we are
confident that the actors and actresses of to-day are like the theatre
of to-day,—they have more finish, and the results, while they may not
rise to the plane of the school of Shakespeare, are nearer nature than
they have ever been.

The school of declamation, which belonged to the plays of the past,
is the severest loss the stage of to-day has felt. The actors and
actresses fail in elocution. They do not know where to put their
emphasis. They seem lost when they appear in costume, and Shakespeare
to-day has no distinguished exponents.

The English-speaking stage of the century has been adorned by such
eloquent interpreters and powerful tragedians as Edwin Forrest,
Charlotte Cushman, Edwin Booth, and Henry Irving. But this illustrious
roll has been almost extinguished by death; and, especially if applied
to America, the question may well be asked, where is the actor or
actress who can play Hamlet, or Macbeth, or King Lear, or Shylock as we
were wont to see them rendered by those masters of the dramatic art, or
as they should be rendered? Salvini and Rossi have both passed away.
Irving verges on retiracy. Of the great dramatic actresses left to the
closing of the century, Mme. Sarah Bernhardt stands preëminent. The day
of the imposing declamatory drama seems to have lost its lustre at the
sunset of the century.

[Illustration: SCENE FROM SHAKESPEARE’S PLAY OF “ROMEO AND JULIET.”]

But the modern dramas and comedies are acted, even in the smaller
parts, with admirable intelligence and effect, and we may add that the
vice that disgraced the stage of the past is by no means so visible in
the theatre of the present.

The coarseness that clung so long to the theatre is gradually
disappearing, and the theatre-goers of to-day have discovered that the
theatre, which was created to entertain the world, can do so without
recourse to vulgarity.

The theatres of the United States are the handsomest and most
convenient in the world. This Mme. Sarah Bernhardt acknowledged the
other day, while criticising the theatres of Paris, which lack many
conveniences.

Up to within twenty-five years of the close of the century, plays
written by American authors were rare. Managers had to rely upon those
composed in Europe. But at present the United States possesses many
able and successful playwrights, just as it does its artists in all
departments. There has not been a time during the century when the
personal character of actors and actresses has escaped discussion, and
sometimes violent criticism, by those prejudiced against the theatre.
This does not seem to have lessened the estimation in which dramatic
art is held, nor to have seriously diminished in number the legion
who find in the drama their most pleasurable recreation and keenest
intellectual delight. In answer to challenges of the morality of the
stage, Bronson Howard has fittingly said: “I have never yet seen
anybody who wanted a bad picture just because it was painted by a good
man. It is society that corrupts the stage, not the stage that corrupts
society.”

THE CENTURY’S LITERATURE

BY JAMES P. BOYD, A.M., L.B.

In contrasting the world’s nineteenth century literature with that of
the eighteenth, one is impressed with the many remarkable differences.
But by no means all of such differences are to the discredit of the
older literature. As instances, the prose literature of the nineteenth
century may not surpass that of the eighteenth in elegance and
accuracy of expression, though its progress has been very marked in
the diversity of its applications to mental needs; and the poetical
literature of the nineteenth century may not excel that of the
eighteenth in beauty and virility, though it has advanced in loftiness
of theme and tenderness of mode. And so, when literature is divided
into its many minor branches, as history, philosophy, the sciences,
etc., various features of the old compare favorably with the new.

It is in its general tone and universal aptitude that the literature
of the nineteenth century stands out preëminent. The wonderful
intellectual activity of the century has been, as it were, compelled
to go forth along literary lines quite parallel with those that
distinguish other fields of activity. This may have had a tendency in
some instances to rob the century’s literature of some of the sweetly
imaginative elements, and to harden it in some of its essential forms,
but the process was necessary to secure for it just that quality which
would best meet a progressive demand. As the drift of human energy
was toward the practical, so the dominant literary thought took on
the form of direct and exact expression. There was less and less room
for the indulgence of literary foible or speculative whimsicality.
Even where elegance of style met with occasional sacrifice, it was
more than compensated by that general rise in literary tone which
has characterized the century. Literature could not be untruthful
amid active inquiry and scientific progress. It must reflect, more
accurately than ever before, its birth inspirations and its legitimate
uses. It must keep even pace with the demands for it. A world crying
for intellectual bread could not be put off with an antiquated stone.

Without closer analysis, the above is true of the literature of all
reading and writing peoples who have kept touch with the century’s
progress. But it is especially true in the literature of English
speaking peoples. History has, in accordance with a growing spirit of
research, become more truthful, philosophy more expressive, and science
more exact. The outcrop of books shows the yearnings of the century,
not only as to their number but as to theme and treatment. Authors have
multiplied as during no other world’s era, and the proportion of those
who have attained permanent distinction was never larger.

“German literature,” says Professor Ford, in “Self Culture” for
February, 1899, “has had its measure of ups and downs, but its first
age was its golden age. From the beginning of the century to the
present day is a far cry in German letters. Romanticism, idealism,
realism—the Fatherland has lived through them all. And for what? In
a land of scholars no great philosopher; among hosts of verse-makers
no great poet; among innumerable story-writers, not one who has become
known over a continent.

[Illustration: GEORGE BANCROFT.]

“Still these last years in Germany have not been without some good work
done, though often achieved under the spur of wrong ideals and improper
motives. From the days of ’48, when Young Germany felt for the first
time the seductive charm of revolutionism, a new feeling has possessed
German literature—a feeling that the past is past and out of date,
potent once but potent no longer, and that the new age of man demands
new principles, new ideals, a new faith. And so the modern literature,
particularly so since 1870, has been marked by iconoclasm and startling
innovation; it has discarded sentiment and line writing, and made a
plea for scientific methods, with the privilege of exhibiting exact,
scientific results. Crimes, disease, and grinning skeletons have
been dragged forth to the public gaze, for art is no longer art that
portrays the ideal and not the true. Such, in short, is the creed by
which the realistic or naturalistic school has thought to overthrow
the old, conventional, and frivolous, to foster the spirit of the new
nationality, and prepare a balm for the wounds of the poor.

“Two men stand to-day as leaders of this new movement,—Hermann
Sudermann and Gerhardt Hauptmann,—the most commanding figures in
contemporaneous German literature.”

During the nineteenth century the United States took a high and firm
place in the domain of literature, and, it may be said, has evolved
a literature that in scope and style is peculiar to her institutions
and environment. Her array of authors, both in number and reputation,
compares favorably with that of countries boasting of a thousand years
of literary domination, and her literature is as diversified and
practical as her activities. Among the many illustrious historians of
the century she numbers her Bancroft, her Hildreth, her Prescott, her
Motley, worthy counterparts of England’s Lingard, Hallam, Macaulay,
Buckle, and Kinglake. Among her poets are Longfellow, Whittier, Bryant,
Lowell, Halleck, fit companions of Tennyson, Browning, Wordsworth,
Scott, Swinburne. Among her novelists are Cooper, Hawthorne, Stowe,
worthy congeners of Dickens, Thackeray, and Eliot. And so, the
comparison holds in travel, philosophy, theology, law, and science.

If in dramatic literature the United States has, during the century,
produced few authors of permanent reputation, and perhaps none to be
compared with Knowles, Boucicault, Taylor, and Robertson, of the Old
World, nevertheless it cannot be said of these that their plays have
had more than a stage value. The drama of the century in following
the demand for artistic and commercial results has sustained only in
part the reputation of its literature. But in lieu of this partial
decadence, there have sprung up new branches of literature which are,
in a measure, compensatory. Among these are the critical literature
of arts and design, the literature of philology, or of language, and
the literature of political and social science. To these must be added
two other kinds or classes of literature which, if not peculiar to the
century, have yet found in it their most surprising evolution, greatest
glory, and widest influence. These are the literature of the newspaper
and magazine, as distinguished from that of the book.

[Illustration: JOHN G. WHITTIER.]

But before making further mention of these, let us read somewhat of New
World literature as viewed from a critical English standpoint. Says
the critic, “English critics are apt to bear down on the writers and
thinkers of the New World with a sort of aristocratic hauteur; they
are perpetually reminding them of their immaturity and their disregard
of the golden mean. Americans, on the other hand, are hard to please.
Ordinary men among them are as sensitive to foreign censure as the
_irritable genius_ of other lands. Mr. Emerson is permitted to impress
home truths on his countrymen, as ‘Your American eagle is very well;
but beware of the American peacock.’ Such remarks are not permitted to
Englishmen. If they point to any flaws in transatlantic manners or ways
of thinking with an effort after politeness, it is ‘the good-natured
cynicism of well-to-do age;’ if they commend transatlantic institutions
or achievements, it is, according to Mr. Lowell, ‘with that pleasant
European air of self-compliment in condescending to be pleased by
American merit which we find so conciliating.’

“Now that the United States have reached their full majority, it is
time that England should cease to assume the attitude of guardian,
and time that they should be on the alert to resent the assumption.
Foremost among the more attractive features of transatlantic [American]
literature is its _freshness_. The authority which is the guide of old
nations constantly threatens to become tyrannical; they wear their
traditions like a chain; and, in canonization of laws of taste, the
creative laws are depressed. Even in England we write under fixed
conditions; with the fear of critics before our eyes, we are all bound
to cast our ideas into similar moulds, and the name of ‘free thinker’
has grown to a term of reproach. Bunyan’s ‘Pilgrim’s Progress’ is
perhaps the last English book written without a thought of being
reviewed. There is a gain in the habit of self-restraint fostered by
this state of things; but there is a loss in the consequent lack of
spontaneity; and we may learn something from a literature that is ever
ready for adventures. In America the love of uniformity gives place
to impetuous impulses; the most extreme sentiments are made audible,
the most noxious ‘have their day and cease to be;’ and the truth being
left to vindicate itself, the overthrow of error, though more gradual,
may at last prove more complete. A New England poet can write with
confidence of his country as the land

“‘Where no one suffers loss or bleeds
For thoughts that men calls heresies.’

[Illustration: ALFRED TENNYSON.]

“Another feature of American literature is _comprehensiveness_. What it
has lost in depth it has gained in breadth. Addressing a vast audience,
it appeals to universal sympathies. In the Northern States, where
comparatively few have leisure to write well, almost every man, woman,
and child can read, and does read. Books are to be found in every
log-hut, and public questions are discussed by every scavenger. During
the Civil War, when the Lowell factory-girls were writing verses, the
‘Biglow Papers’ were being recited in every smithy. The consequence is,
that, setting aside the newspapers, there is little that is sectional
in the popular religion or literature; it exalts and despises no
class, and almost wholly ignores the lines that in other countries
divide the upper ten thousand and the lower ten million. Where manners
make men, the people are proud of their peerage, but they blush for
their boors. In the New World there are no ‘Grand Seigniors’ and no
human vegetables; and if there are fewer giants, there are also fewer
manikins. American poets recognize no essential distinction between
the ‘village blacksmith’ and the ‘caste of Vere de Vere.’ Burns speaks
for the one; Byron and Tennyson for the other; Longfellow, to the
extent of his genius, for both. The same spirit which glorifies labor
denounces every form of despotism but that of the multitude. Freed of
the excesses due to wide license, and restrained by the good taste and
culture of her nobler minds, we may anticipate for the literature of
America, under the mellowing influences of time, an illustrious future.”

In treating of newspaper literature, one cannot proceed without
blending its origin, style and aims with the business enterprise
that cultivates and supports it. And this may be done all the more
cheerfully and properly, for the reason that there is no history
more interesting than that of the evolution of the newspaper, and no
consummation of mental and physical energy that places the nineteenth
century in more vivid contrast with preceding centuries.

[Illustration: HENRY W. LONGFELLOW.]

For the fatherhood of the newspaper we have to travel to a land and
date calculated to rob modern civilization of some of its boastfulness.
The oldest known newspaper is the “Tsing-Pao,” or “Peking News,”
mention of whose publication is made in Chinese annals as far back
as A. D. 713, when it was then, as now, the official chronicler of
the acts of the emperor, the doings of the court, and the reports of
ministers. It has appeared daily for nearly fourteen hundred years, in
the form of a yellow-covered magazine, some 3¾ by 7½ inches in size.
The pages number twenty-four, and are printed from wooden movable type.
Two editions are published, one on superior paper, for the Court and
upper classes; the other on inferior paper, for general readers. Its
editorship is in the Grand Council of State, which furnishes to scribes
or reporters the news deemed fit for publication. As an official organ,
it first finds circulation among the heads of provinces, and is by
them further distributed to patrons. This ancient purveyor of news
seems to have pretty fully gratified the Chinese taste for that kind
of literature; for even at the present day there are few newspapers
in the empire published in the native language. The few that have
sprung up are confined to the larger cities, as Shanghai, Hongkong, and
Peking, where they are liberally patronized. But their circulation and
influence do not extend far into the interior, owing to the lack of
postal facilities. The modern Chinese newspaper can hardly be called a
native enterprise. It grew out of the necessity for a literature and a
means of news communication which arose at the time the Chinese ports
were forced open to the world’s commerce. As a consequence, a majority
of the Chinese publications have found their inception in foreign
brains and capital, and remain under the management of foreigners. The
same is true of Japan, where the modern native newspaper practically
dates from the arrival of the foreigner. But by reason of their greater
mental and commercial activity, and the rapidity with which they
adjusted themselves to modern modes of civilization, the Japanese have
far outstripped the Chinese in their evolution of newspaper literature
and enterprise. Whereas, what may be called the first modern Japanese
newspaper was founded in 1872, there sprang up in the following twenty
years the almost incredible number of 648 newspapers and periodicals,
not only due to native capital and enterprise, but under native
control. This wonderful growth took place, too, in the face of the
severest code of press laws existing in any country.

In Europe, the earliest inklings of a newspaper literature consisted of
news pamphlets of infrequent and uncertain publication, and dependent
for circulation upon temporary demand. The earliest departure from
this stage was in Germany, in 1615, when the “Frankfurter Journal” was
organized as a weekly publication, for the purpose of “collecting
and circulating the news of the day.” Antwerp followed with a similar
enterprise in 1616. The first attempt to do likewise in Great Britain
was in 1622, when “The Weekly News” was founded in London. None
of these enterprises were by editors, in a modern sense, but by
stationers, in the line of their ordinary trade. They did not depend
for patronage on regular subscribers, but sold their publications on
the streets through the agency of hawkers, corresponding to our modern
newsboys, though they bore the classical name of “mercuries.”

The foundation of the first newspaper in France that attained
permanence and fame was in 1631. It was called the “Gazette de
France,” and owed its origin to a demand for mingled news and original
discussion. It was largely under the control of Richelieu, and, of
course, reflected his sentiments. In these beginnings of the newspaper,
we find little or no attempt at journalism, as now understood and
practiced; no promise and potency of a literature peculiar to newspaper
enterprise. The journalist had yet to come into being. He first
appeared as a writer of “news-letters,” generally from some capital,
or seat of legislation, or commercial centre. His duty was to keep a
line of masters or patrons supplied with news during their absence from
court, legislative hall, or business mart. His duty evolved into a
calling. His patrons became regular paying subscribers, to each of whom
he wrote. These letters, coming from all countries of the continent
of Europe, and covering a wide field of information, became of great
interest, and many collections of them are still in existence in
libraries, adding no little to their historic value.

The step was easy from this journalistic stage to the regular periodic
publication, open not only to the “news-letter,” but to discursive
thought. Thus, in 1641, “The Weekly News,” of London, began the
publication of parliamentary proceedings in addition to its budget of
“news-letters.” This era witnessed a rapid establishment of weekly
newspapers, requiring editorial supervision and regular contributions.
They were not without their vicissitudes. Many of their careers were
brief and marked with pecuniary losses; yet out of the wreckage sprang
some of the most important of the modern journals.

By 1703 Great Britain was ripe for a daily newspaper, and in that year
one appeared under the name of “The Daily Courant.” The advent of this
enterprise gave further impetus to newspaper publication. The English
press of the eighteenth century rose into great popular favor. It was
able, and quite too independent for royalty and royal courtier. For
corrupt and ambitious government it often became a whip of scorpions,
and in revenge was both severely taxed and invidiously censored. But
it seemed to prosper amid opposition and persecution, and by 1776
fifty-three newspapers were published in London alone. During the
reign of George III. (1760–1820) the history of the English newspaper
is one of criminal persecutions, amid which editors and contributors
were repeatedly defeated, and sometimes severely punished; yet it
is doubtful if at any period the press gained greater strength from
protracted conflict, or turned ignominious penalties into more signal
triumphs. It is significant that out of this dark, tumultuous, and
forbidding era sprang many of the newspapers whose influence is most
potential to-day in English affairs of state and in the literature
of journalism. The era marks the turn in newspaper values. The
establishment became a concrete thing, a lively property, an energy
composed of practical business minds, surrounded and supported by the
best procurable literary talent, adapted for treating diversified
topics. Thus “The London Morning Chronicle,” founded in 1789, rose
to be a property in 1823 which sold for $210,000; while “The Morning
Post” not only gave to Coleridge his fame as one of the greatest of
publicists, but enlisted the brilliant attainments of Mackintosh,
Southey, Young, and Moore. The sturdy “London Times,” which dates
from 1785, and for years encountered malignant royal hostility,
proved itself strong enough to brave the government and at the same
time sufficiently enterprising to introduce steam printing and every
mechanism calculated to give it precedence as a metropolitan journal.
As a property, it is to-day worth a figure incredible at the beginning
of the century, and so powerful was its hold on popular favor for the
first half of the century that no other daily could compete with it.
Indeed, it may be said to have had a lone field up to the establishment
of “The Daily News,” in 1846, “The Daily Telegraph,” in 1855, and “The
Standard,” in 1857.

The nineteenth century journalism of Great Britain is characterized
by its great plenitude. Morning and evening papers abound in all the
centres. The weekly paper is still an important literary and news
factor. Class papers are numerous and excellent in their way. Again,
the century’s journalism is characterized by its property value.
Many of the leading English journals have become immense properties
worth millions of dollars each, and requiring the ablest management
to improve and perpetuate them. Further, the English press is
characterized by able and conservative, if prosaic, editorial methods.
Its correspondence is cautious, and covers every important field. Its
news columns, so far as they depend on the telegraph and telephone, are
sprightly and well filled, but limited and dull when the local reporter
is the source of supply.

As already stated, the annals of French journalism began with the
founding of the “Gazette de France” in 1631. The evolution of the
French newspaper was not rapid till the eighteenth century was well
along, when the era of the first revolution called for a news and
literature peculiar to bloody and exciting times. Myriads of newspapers
sprang into existence, all but two of which found their graves with
the passing of the emergency which called them into being. Early in
the nineteenth century (1836) the introduction of cheap journalism
gave great impetus to enterprise, and by the middle of the century the
number and circulation of French newspapers had more than trebled.
This rate has been, in great part, sustained throughout the latter
half of the century, and the French people are to-day abundantly
supplied with a newspaper literature which for vivacity and amplitude
is unexcelled. It may not have the solid and lasting influence of the
soberer outcrop of other nations, but it is singularly adapted to a
sprightly and mercurial people, and is well sustentative of the great
political transition of the people and empire since the beginning of
the nineteenth century.

The evolution of the newspaper in Germany was slow. Between 1615, the
date of the founding of the “Frankfurter Journal,” and 1798, when the
“Allgemeine Zeitung” (General News) was founded by the bookseller
Cotta, at Leipsic, no journals of a high order made their appearance,
and it needed the inspiration of the French Revolution to beget in the
German mind a desire for a livelier newspaper literature than had
preëxisted. Thus, the “Zeitung” soon sprang into great popularity as
a purveyor of news and as a medium of discussion, and has ever since
maintained a leading place in the German political press. It not only
set the style of the press at the turn of the century, but proved to
be a pioneer in that wonderful journalistic march which spread over
all German-speaking countries during the nineteenth century, giving
to them media of news and discussion as able and influential as exist
in any land. By 1870 there existed in Germany proper 3780 newspapers
and periodicals; in Austria-Hungary, 700; in Switzerland, 300; not
to mention the many hundreds printed in German in other countries,
especially in the United States. A proportionate increase would greatly
augment the above figures by the end of the century. The rise of German
socialism proved to be a prolific source of journalism. The socialist
seems to be a born editor and literary combatant. He is also a great
reader and bold and independent thinker. Under the socialistic demand
for a literature peculiar to itself, there has arisen a score of German
printing-offices and perhaps fifty political journals, a third of which
are dailies.

In the Netherlands, Belgium, Denmark, Norway, Sweden, Russia, Italy,
Spain, Portugal, and other European countries, the press of the
nineteenth century has kept pace with the mental needs and spirit of
enterprise of the respective peoples. Indeed, there is no such an
accurate criterion of the general make-up of a people, of their place
in the lines of progress, of their influence upon civilization, as
that afforded by their press. The Belgian press is nimbly commercial,
that of the Netherlands prosy and substantial, while that of the
Scandinavian countries is rugged, accurate, and solemnly influential.
The Russian press, where free, is despotic and unprogressive. But it is
so frequently under censorship that it can hardly be said to reflect
with any degree of certainty the popular spirit of the empire. The
Italian press is indolent and easy-going, inaccurate, spicy by spasms,
of little relative influence, except as it has been improved since the
unification of the Italian States. Spain is a country of 18,000,000
people, but has fewer newspapers and periodicals than the single State
of New York. Of Spain’s 1200 papers, only 500 are newspapers. Of the
rest, 300 are scientific journals, mostly monthly, 100 are devoted to
religion, and 30 to satire, music, poetry, art, etc. Barcelona and
Madrid are the great centres of journalistic literature. The political
papers are the most powerful. The reading public of Spain is limited,
and the average circulation of a Spanish newspaper is only about 1200
copies.

In the New World the demand for newspaper literature during the
nineteenth century has proven quite as strong as in the Old World,
and, in certain localities, even stronger. Even among the youthful and
tumultuous republics of South America, with their large percentages
of lower classes and illiterates, there are few centres of importance
that do not support respectable and fairly influential journals. The
news-gathering and news-consuming spirit may not be so active as
elsewhere, nor the commercial sense so acute, yet the century has laid
the groundwork of journalistic enterprise so firmly that future years
can afford to build upon it with certainty. The same may be said of
journalism in Mexico and the other Latin republics of North America.

[Illustration: BENJAMIN FRANKLIN.]

In Canada, the century shows a highly complimentary growth in newspaper
literature and influence. Great pride is taken in accurate and able
editorship, and in that kind of management which is best calculated
to convert investment into permanent and profitable property. What
they lack on the reportorial, or strictly newsy, side, they make up
in free, clean, and independent discussion. The people are readers
and, therefore, generous supporters of the enterprises designed to
supply them with their periodical literature. During the century
the newspapers and periodicals of Canada increased in number from
a very few to 862, as reported in 1894. Of these, 87 are dailies,
583 weeklies, 138 monthlies, 3 tri-weeklies, 22 semi-weeklies, 6
bi-weeklies, 21 semi-monthlies, 2 quarterlies. The largest centres
of circulation are the province of Ontario with 507 newspapers and
periodicals, and Quebec with 132.

The century’s grandest field for journalistic opportunity has been
the United States. Here journalism has developed with the greatest
rapidity, exemplified its manifold features to the fullest extent,
most successfully proved its influence as an educative and civilizing
agency. Starting with the great and essential encouragement of freedom,
it has found unremitting and energetic propulsion in the unprecedented
growth of population, in the marvelous activities requiring
intercommunication of thought, in an intelligence which constantly
recruited armies of omnivorous readers, and in facilities for the
preparation and dissemination of the literature at command.

The beginning of newspaper enterprise in the United States was in
Boston, in 1690, when the “Publick Occurrences” appeared under the
auspices of Benjamin Harris. It was designed to be a monthly, and was
printed on three sides of a folded sheet, each side being only eleven
inches long by seven wide. It was suppressed after its first issue by
the colonial government of Massachusetts, thus restricting the avenues
of news to the foreign journals or local coffee-houses. But the demand
for home news was not thus to be crushed. There sprang up a medium of
communication by news-letters, such as then existed in England; and in
1704 the postmaster of Boston undertook to keep certain functionaries
informed of the course of events by a periodical news-letter in printed
form. This he called “The News-Letter,” a title which, with some, is
treated as that of a newspaper. It was to appear weekly, and would be
sent to subscribers for such reasonable sum as might be agreed upon.
After a lapse of fifteen years, without competition, it had attained a
subscription list of only three hundred copies. A subsequent postmaster
started an opposition sheet in 1719, called “The Boston Gazette.”
Its appearance caused him to lose his office, but the rival papers
continued to exist, “The News-Letter” up to the evacuation of Boston by
the British troops in 1776, and the “Gazette” up to 1754.

“The Boston Gazette” appeared on December 21, 1719. One day after,
December 22, 1719, Andrew Bradford started “The American Weekly
Mercury” at Philadelphia. On August 17, 1721, James Franklin started
“The New England Courant,” on which Benjamin Franklin learned the trade
of printer. After an existence of seven years its publication ceased.
On October 23, 1725, William Bradford started “The New York Gazette.”
“The New England Weekly Journal” succeeded “The Boston Gazette” and
“Courant” in 1727. “The Maryland Gazette,” the first paper published
in that colony, appeared in 1727. In 1728 Samuel Keimer started “The
Universal Instructor in all the Arts and Sciences and Pennsylvania
Gazette,” at Philadelphia. The following year Benjamin Franklin bought
Keimer’s plant, and shortened the name to “The Pennsylvania Gazette.”
The first paper in the colony of South Carolina, called “The South
Carolina Gazette,” was published on January 8, 1731. On November
5, 1733, “The New York Weekly Journal” appeared as a rival to the
“Gazette.” In 1736 the first newspaper appeared in Virginia. It was
published at Williamsburg, and was called “The Virginia Gazette.” In
1739 a German newspaper appeared at Germantown, Pa., and another, in
1743, at Philadelphia. All these pioneer papers, with the exception of
a few, notably “The Pennsylvania Gazette” under Franklin, and “The New
York Weekly Journal” under Zenger, were merely news purveyors, or, if
any opinions were expressed, they were in accord with the authorities
of the day.

After 1745 the press of the colonies became more independent and
progressive, in obedience to a demand for literature bearing upon the
questions relating to the coming revolution. New journals of the weekly
class sprang up with considerable rapidity and, for the most part, in
opposition to England’s methods of colonial government. Among these
were “The Boston Independent Advocate,” started under the auspices
of Samuel Adams, in 1748; “The New Hampshire Gazette,” in 1756; “The
Boston Gazette and Country Gentleman,” in 1755; the “Newport (R. I.)
Mercury,” in 1758; “The Connecticut Courant,” in 1764.

[Illustration: HORACE GREELEY.

Founder of “New York Tribune.”]

By 1775, the commencement of the struggle for independence, the
colonial press numbered thirty publications, all weekly. Of these,
seven were published in Massachusetts, one in New Hampshire, two in
Rhode Island, three in Connecticut, eight in Pennsylvania, and three in
New York. In the first year of the war eight new weeklies were added
to the list, four of them being in Philadelphia. On December 3, 1777,
the first newspaper, “The Gazette,” appeared in New Jersey, and in
1781, the first in Vermont, “The Gazette or Green Mountain Post Boy.”
Such was the fatality overhanging the colonial press that, of the
sixty-three newspapers which had come into existence prior to 1783,
only forty-three survived at that date.

From 1789, the date on which the Constitution went into operation,
till the close of the eighteenth century and early beginning of the
nineteenth, several newspapers were founded, most of which were
ardently political, and, though employing writers of ability, were
bitterly vituperative. The most powerful of this class were “The
Aurora” of Philadelphia, Jefferson’s leading organ; “The Evening Post”
of New York, the organ of the Federalists; and “The American Citizen”
of New York, an organ of the Clintonian democracy. The close of the
eighteenth century witnessed also the advent of the press in the
Mississippi Valley. “The Centinel of the Northwestern Territory” was
started at Cincinnati, November 9, 1793; and “The Scioto Gazette,” at
Chillicothe, in 1796.

[Illustration: JOHN W. FORNEY.

Founder of “Philadelphia Press.”]

The press of the early part of the nineteenth century grew rapidly in
number, circulation, and influence. While it was largely partisan,
the field of discussion gradually broadened, and the news departments
became more vivacious and comprehensive. Many of the newspapers
founded during the first decades of the century exist at its close,
having enjoyed their long careers of influence with honor, and become
properties of incalculable value. During this period the transition
from the weekly to the daily newspaper gradually went on in the
large cities. The first American daily paper, “The American Daily
Advertiser,” was published at Philadelphia in 1784. With it came
the first use of reporters, or regularly employed news-gatherers,
an innovation as important to the public as the advent of the daily
itself. Special, or class, newspapers also began to get a firm foothold
during this period. “The Niles’s Weekly Register” appeared in Baltimore
in 1811. The first religious newspaper attempted in the United States
appeared at Chillicothe, O., 1814. The first of the agricultural press
was “The American Farmer,” which appeared at Baltimore, April 2, 1818,
to be followed by “The Ploughman,” at Albany, N. Y., in 1821, and by
“The New England Farmer,” in 1822. Several strictly commercial and
financial papers found an origin in this period, the most successful of
which was “The New Orleans Prices Current,” established in 1822.

During this period the newspaper, whether daily or weekly, was
distributed only to the regular subscriber,—the price of a single
copy on the street being prohibitory. The slow-going mail facilities
of the time prevented the large circulations that are credited to
modern journalism. Prior to 1833 no leading newspaper could throw
sufficient enterprise into its business to raise its circulation above
5000 copies. This kept the price of advertising low, and consequently
limited a source of profit which has since grown to enormous
proportions.

The period ended with the advent of the penny press, in New York, in
1833. The initial experiment in this line was made by H. D. Shepard
with his “Morning Post,” and it proved a failure in the short period
of three weeks. The next was “The Daily Sun,” September 23, 1833,
claiming to be “written, edited, set up, and worked off” by Benjamin
Franklin Day. It remained a penny paper for a long time and attained
a large circulation. It was reorganized in 1867, when Charles A. Dana
became its editor. Though the price was put up to two cents, it became
under his control one of the most potential news and political factors
of the century, and attained a circulation of over 100,000 copies
daily. In May, 1835, James Gordon Bennett followed in the tracks of Day
with “The New York Herald.” Its sprightly news columns and fantastic
advertisements commended it to popular favor, and proved a source of
great profit. It has since greatly varied its prices; but by dint
of stupendous, if peculiar, enterprise, it has grown into enormous
circulation, and become a property worth millions. In 1841, Horace
Greeley started “The New York Tribune,” at first as a penny paper,
though on an elevated plane. It soon grew into popular favor, and with
its weekly and semi-weekly editions for country circulation became one
of the most widely circulated and influential journals in the country.
“The New York Times” also began as a penny paper in 1851, under the
control of Henry J. Raymond.

[Illustration: JOSEPH MEDILL.

“Chicago Tribune.”]

While the era of a distinctive and popular penny press was short-lived,
it witnessed one of the most notable advances of the century in
journalism. It stimulated newspaper enterprise throughout the entire
country, and journals multiplied enormously. The era practically ended
with the outbreak of the Civil War in 1861, which event caused a rise
in the price of paper, a demand for expensive correspondence, telegraph
news and battle scenes, and a consequent necessity for enlarged and
quadrupled sheets. Many of the penny papers went up to a five-cent
price under the stimulus of war excitement, the improved system of
collecting news, and the added expense of publication. This era of
phenomenal newspaper expansion extended even to the end of the century.
It has witnessed the wonderful evolution of the newspaper in all its
modern phases,—the advent of the Sunday newspaper; the growth of the
daily sheet to mammoth proportions; the incorporation of the Associated
Press, with its thousands of agents in every part of the country
gathering and sending the minutest events of the day; correspondence
from every quarter of the globe, and covering every field of activity;
a highly improved and more independent editorship; a greatly enlarged,
more active, and more conscientious reportorial staff; the coming of
the interviewer, at first an impertinent pest, but now recognized as
a valuable journalistic adjunct in reflecting opinions and sentiments
not otherwise obtainable; the employment of the thousand and one new
appliances for printing, such as stereotyping, electrotyping, improved
types, typesetting machines, rapid presses, folding machines, etc.

By 1883 a reaction came on in the prices of leading journals, and they
were forced to reduce them by reason of the strong competition offered
by the numerous and powerful two-cent journals which had come into
being and had proven to be valuable properties. Indeed, this reaction
did not leave the two-cent journals untouched, for it brought many of
that class to a one-cent basis, with the claim that a consequently
increased circulation would enhance the profits from advertising.
This claim is a debatable one, and it may be safely said that most of
the newspapers established near the end of the century have adopted a
two-cent basis as a golden mean between the one-cent and three-cent
journals.

[Illustration: RECORD BUILDING, PHILADELPHIA.]

Proportionally speaking, the growth of the press in the United States
has been as even as it has been rapid. No leading city is without
press establishments and prominent journals, some of them conducted
on the largest scales of expenditure,—the West vying with the East,
and the South with the North, in liberality and enterprise. The
newspaper office of the early part of the century was generally dingy
and cramped. The abode of many, especially in the larger cities, has
become a handsome pile, conspicuous in architectural effects, capacious
and cleanly,—fitting hive for the myriad of workers that toil at
midday and midnight in pursuit of the “art preservative.” The annual
expenditure of a single newspaper operated on a large scale has been
thus computed: Editorial and literary matter, $220,000; local news,
$290,000; illustrations, $180,000; correspondence, $125,000; telegraph,
$65,000; cable, $27,000; mechanical, $410,500; paper, $617,000;
business office, $219,000; a total of $2,153,500.

Nearly every town in the United States of 15,000 population has come
by the end of the century to have its daily newspaper, and few of even
1000 population, especially if a county-seat, are without their weekly
newspapers. It has become possible to conduct a rural weekly of fair
proportions and with quite readable matter upon a very economic basis,
by means of a central office in some large city. This office prints
and supplies to the rural offices, of which it may have hundreds on
its list, the two outside pages of a weekly, leaving to the local
office only the duty of supplying and printing on the inside pages its
domestic news.

In the number of its newspapers and periodicals the United States
easily leads the world. Only approximate figures for the close of the
century are at hand; but these, for the United States, gravitate around
a total of 20,000 newspapers and periodicals, while those for other
countries which report are as follows: Great Britain, 4229; France,
4100; Germany, 5500; Austria-Hungary, 3500; Italy, 1400; Spain, 1200;
Russia, 800; Switzerland, 450; Belgium, 300; Holland, 300; Canada, 862.
In the report of 1894 for United States newspapers and periodicals,
the following subdivision appears: Dailies, 1853; tri-weeklies, 29;
semi-weeklies, 223; weeklies, 14,077; bi-weeklies, 62; semi-monthlies,
290; monthlies, 2501; bi-monthlies, 70; quarterlies, 197. The States
in which over one thousand newspapers and periodicals are printed
are, New York, with 2001; Illinois, with 1520; Pennsylvania, with
1408; Ohio, with 1108. The States next in order, and with a number of
newspapers and periodicals between 500 and 1000, are, Iowa, with 978;
Missouri, with 907; Indiana, with 753; Kansas, with 732; Michigan, with
727; Massachusetts, with 664; Texas, with 656; Nebraska, with 639;
California, with 637; Wisconsin, with 551; Minnesota, with 549.

The century’s newspaper literature in the United States has been
further characterized by the introduction of the comic feature. The
comic newspaper came into being about the middle of the century, but
did not strike a practical minded people with favor. It was not until
the century was well rounded out that the cartoonist’s and joker’s art
came into sufficient demand to make a comic newspaper a commercial
success. Even now their number is limited to a very few that can boast
of permanent success.

The daily newspapers of the latter part of the century have not been
dissuaded by earlier attempts to make illustrations a conspicuous
feature. On the contrary, newspaper illustration has grown to the
proportions of a special art, and all of the larger and better equipped
dailies have organized departments into which are gathered photographs
and engravings ready for reproduction as events demand. So the
correspondent and reporter have added to knighthood of the pen that of
the camera, and the scenic view has become an essential part of serious
correspondence and sprightly reporting.

An immense, imposing, and highly useful current of literature flows
through the magazines, which have, by their number, beauty, and
adaptation, come to be a distinguishing feature of the nineteenth
century. This class of literature is usually called “Periodical,” and
it embraces the magazines and reviews devoted to general literature and
science, the class magazines devoted to particular branches of science,
art, or industry, and the publications of schools and societies. Most
periodicals published in the English language are monthlies. The same
is true of those published on the continent of Europe, save that there
the old-fashioned quarterly style is still much affected.

Periodical literature found a beginning in France as early as 1665,
in what is still the organ of the French Academy. The first English
periodical was published in 1680, and was hardly more than a catalogue
of books. The growth of the periodical or magazine proved to be very
slow. Up to 1800, not more than eighty had found mentionable existence
as scientific and technical periodicals, and only three as strictly
literary periodicals. The advent of “The Edinburgh Review,” in 1802,
gave great impetus to periodical literature in Great Britain, and the
period from 1840 to 1850 was one of special development, but to be
surpassed by that of 1860 to 1870, when the shilling magazine came into
vogue. This class of literature also developed very rapidly in France
during the century, Paris having 1381 periodicals of all kinds by
1890. There was an equally rapid development in Germany, Austria, and
throughout the continent.

The English magazine found several imitators in the United States
during the latter part of the eighteenth century, most of which had
brief existences. Such was the fatality overhanging this class of
enterprise, that until 1810 but twenty-seven periodicals could be
counted in the United States. While the next forty years were marked
by several magazine successes, such as the “Knickerbocker,” “Graham’s
Magazine,” and “Putnam’s Monthly,” they were, nevertheless, strewn
with long lines of melancholy wreckage. Indeed, it was not until
the middle of the century that the demand for magazine literature
became sufficiently intense to make investment in it profitable and
permanent. Since then the development has been almost phenomenal,
keeping even pace with that of the newspaper. At the end of the century
the number of monthlies published in the United States approximates
2800; and there are over 300 fortnightlies, 56 bi-monthlies, and 192
quarterlies. These cover the vast domains of general literature,
religion, science, art, and industry, and in many respects vie with
the newspaper in popularity and influence. Many of them have developed
into magnificent properties, whose value would appear incomprehensible
to our grandfathers. They employ excellent talent when special topics
are treated, and rise to occasions of war or other excitement through
graphically written and highly illustrated articles. Indeed, one of
their most impressive features is the high degree to which they have
carried the art of illustration. Toward the close of the century,
periodical literature has been greatly expanded and popularized by
the introduction of the cheap magazine. The older and more dignified
periodicals had not thought of permanent and profitable existence
at a price less than twenty-five to fifty cents a copy; but those
of the younger and ten-cent class, by dint of what seems to be a
newly discovered enterprise, have found cheapness no barrier to
commercial success. Within a decade they have duplicated patrons of
magazine literature by the million, and proven quite as clearly as the
newspapers have done that we are a nation of readers.

THE RECORDS OF THE PAST

BY MORRIS JASTROW, JR., PH.D.,

_Professor of Semitic Languages, University of Pennsylvania_.

The present century has so many distinguishing features that it is
a hazardous undertaking to summarize its achievements. All branches
of science—Philology, History, Mathematics, Medicine, Theology,
and Philosophy—have felt the stimulating influence of a new spirit
that made its appearance after the French Revolution. New methods of
investigation have not only led to profound modification of views
in all departments of science, but have brought about considerable
additions to the sum of human knowledge. In the domain of natural
science, the discovery of new principles and of hitherto unknown forces
has widened the horizon of humanity and created new mental disciplines;
but while perhaps less conspicuous, because not so directly connected
with the actual concerns and needs of the present, the fertility
of historical research during this century is not less remarkable.
The larger area now embraced under the caption “history of mankind”
furnishes the best proof for the success that has signalized the labors
of scholars—philologists, historians, and explorers—devoted to the
study of the past. Ancient history no longer begins with the Greeks
or the Hebrews. Its _certain_ limits have been removed to as remote a
date as 3000 B. C., while the anthropologist, supplementing the work
of the historian, has furnished a picture in detail of the life led
by man in various quarters of the globe during that indefinite period
which preceded the rise of culture in the true sense of the word. This
extension of knowledge in the domain of human history is primarily
due to the spade of the explorer, though it required the patience
and ingenuity of the philologist and archæologist to interpret the
material furnished in abundance by the soil that happily preserved
the records of lost empires. Documents in stone, clay, and papyrus
have been brought forth from their long resting-places to testify to
the antiquity and splendor of human culture. By the side of written
records, monuments of early civilization have been dug up, palaces,
forts, and temples filled with works of art and skill, to confirm by
their testimony the story preserved by those who belonged to the age of
which they wrote.

[Illustration: THE “BLACK OBELISK” OF SHALMANESER II., KING OF ASSYRIA.
B. C. 860–824.

(British Museum.)]

RESEARCHES IN MESOPOTAMIA.—The archæological researches conducted
during this century have definitely established the fact that the
earliest civilizations flourished in the Valley of the Euphrates and
in the district of the Nile. Until the beginning of this century,
Egypt, Babylonia, and Assyria were little more than names. The spirit
of skepticism which accompanies the keen desire for investigation
led scholars to question the tales found in classical writers of the
great achievements of the Babylonians and Egyptians. At the beginning
of this century scarcely a vestige remained of the cities of ancient
Mesopotamia. The site of Nineveh was unknown, and that of Babylon was
in dispute. A profound sensation was created when, in 1842, P. E.
Botta, the French Consul at Mosul, discovered the remains of a palace
beneath a mound at Khorsabad, some miles to the north of Mosul on
the east bank of the Tigris. Botta’s discovery marked the beginning
of an activity and exploration in Mesopotamia which continues to the
present day. At first the excavations were confined to the mounds in
the north, in which the palaces of the great Assyrian kings, Sargon,
Esarhaddon, Sennacharib and Asurbanibal (or Sardanapalus as he was
called by Greek writers) were unearthed, as well as the great sacred
edifices that formed one of the glories of ancient Assyria. The
buildings exhumed abound in long series of sculptured slabs, on which
are depicted incidents in the campaigns of the kings and in their
private life. Historical records on stone and clay furnished the needed
details in illustration of the scenes, and lastly, literary remains
in profusion were found, which revealed the intellectual life and
religious aspirations of the masses and of the secular and religious
leaders. To England and France belongs the glory of these early
explorations. Through Botta and Sir Austen Henry Layard, the ancient
cities of Nineveh, Calah, and Ashur, were rediscovered. But as the
field of activity extended to the mounds in the south, in the Valley
of the Euphrates, other countries, notably Germany and the United
States, joined in the work. The excavation of the remains of the city
of Babylon were first conducted by Sir Henry Rawlinson in 1854, and
much work was afterward done by Hormuzd Rassam; but the most notable
achievements of recent years are the excavations conducted by DeSarzec,
under the auspices of the French Government, at Telloh, from 1881 to
1895, and those of the University of Pennsylvania at Nippur, begun in
1888, and which are still going on.

Through these excavations the history of Babylonia has been carried
back to the fourth millenium B. C., and while there are still some
important gaps to be filled out, the course of events in Babylonia
and Assyria from this remote period down to the year 587 B. C., when
Cyrus the Mede established a new empire on the ruins of Babylonia and
Assyria, is tolerably clear. Hand in hand with the excavations has gone
the decipherment of the inscriptions found in such abundance beneath
the mounds. On clay, stone, and metals, rulers inscribed records of
their reigns; and added to pictorial illustrations accounts of their
achievements in war as well as in the internal improvements of their
empires. Clay, so readily furnished by the soil, became the ordinary
writing material both in Babylonia and in Assyria, and in the course
of time an extensive library, embracing hymns and prayers, omens and
portents, epics, myths, legends, and creation stories, arose. In every
important centre there gathered around the temples bodies of priests
devoted to the preservation and the extension of this literature.
Assyrian culture being but an offshoot of the civilization in the
south, Assyria reaped the benefit of the literary work accomplished
by the scribes of Babylonia, and the most extensive collection of the
literary remains of Babylonia has come to us from a library collected
through the exertions of Asurbanibal, and discovered in 1849 by Layard
in the ruins of that king’s palace at Nineveh.

[Illustration: THE “MOABITE STONE.” ABOUT B. C. 850.

(_Paris, Museum of the Louvre._)

Monument dedicated to the god Kemôsh by Mesha, king of Moab (2 Kings
3:4 ff.), to record his victory over the Israelites in the days of
Ahab, and the restoration of cities and other works which he undertook
by command of his god. The stone, which measures 3 ft. 10 in. × 2
ft. × 14⅓ in., and contains 34 lines of inscription in the so-called
Phenician character, was found at Dibân (the Biblical Dibon, Num.
21:30; 32:34, etc.), in the land of Moab, by the German, Rev. F.
Klein, in 1868. Unfortunately, soon afterward it was broken in pieces
by the Arabs, but about two thirds of the fragments were recovered by
the Frenchman, Clermont-Ganneau, and it is possible to give a nearly
complete text of the inscription from the paper impression which was
taken before the stone was broken.]

The basis for the decipherment of the cuneiform inscriptions, as they
are called from the wedge-shaped characters, was laid by George F.
Grotefend early in this century, whose system was further worked out
with great ingenuity by Edward Hincks, Jules Oppert, and Sir Henry
Rawlinson. These pioneers have been succeeded by a large coterie of
scholars in all parts of the world, who are still busy studying the
large amount of material now forthcoming for the elucidation of the
past. Not merely have we learned much of the public and official
events and religious ideas and customs during the period covered by
the Babylonian and Assyrian Empires, but through thousands of little
clay tablets that formed the legal and commercial archives deposited
for safe keeping in the temples, an insight into the life of the people
has been obtained, of their occupation, of their business enterprise
and commercial methods, and of many phases of social life, such as
the position of women and slaves, of the manner in which marriages
were contracted and wills drawn up. Perhaps the most characteristic
feature of the remarkable civilization that arose in the Valley of
the Euphrates is the domination of the priesthood over all except the
purely political interests of the people. Thus the priests, as scribes,
as judges, as astronomers, as physicians, brought that civilization to
its high degree of excellence, while under their guidance, likewise,
the religion of the country developed from a crude nature worship to
an approach to a monotheistic conception of the universe. The heir
of the Babylono-Assyrian empire was Persia, which, from the days of
Cyrus till the advent of Alexander, swayed the fortunes of the ancient
world. In all that pertains to art and architecture, Persia remained
largely dependent upon Babylonia. Extensive excavations conducted at
Susa by Dieulafoy, about ten years ago, and quite recently continued
by M. de Morgan, have proved most successful in revealing the general
nature and interior decoration of the great royal palace at that place.
In brilliant coloring of the brick tiles which, as in Babylonia,
formed the common building material, the Persians passed beyond the
Babylonians and Assyrians. One of the most interesting rooms in the
Louvre at Paris is that devoted to the exhibition of the colored wall
decorations from the palace at Susa, representing such various designs
as a procession of archers and a series of lions. The columns still
standing at Persepolis have long been famous; and it is here likewise
that the first cuneiform inscriptions were found which, couched in
Persian, Median, and Assyrian, formed the point of departure for the
decipherment of cuneiform scripts.

EGYPTIAN RESEARCHES.—The civilization of Egypt rivals in age and
grandeur that of Babylonia and Assyria. Here, witnesses to the past
that survived in the shape of obelisks and pyramids gave scholars in
this century a good start in the work of unraveling the fascinating
narrative of Egyptian history. Notwithstanding this, our present
knowledge of the history is due largely to the remarkable series of
excavations which have been conducted in Upper and Lower Egypt since
the early decades of this century, and which continue with unabated
activity at the present time. The stimulus to Egyptian research was
given by Napoleon in 1798, who, when setting out upon his Egyptian
expedition, added to his staff a band of scholars entrusted with
the task of studying and preparing for publication the remains
of antiquity. The result was a monumental work that forms the
foundation of modern Egyptological studies. Another direct outcome
of the expedition was the discovery of the famous Rosetta stone, in
1799, which, containing a hieroglyphic inscription accompanied by a
Greek translation, served as the basis for a trustworthy system of
decipherment of the ancient language of the Nile. The Frenchman, Jean
François Champollion, and the Englishman, Dr. Thomas Young, share
the honor of having found the key that unlocked the mystery of the
hieroglyphic script. As in the case of Babylonian archæology, so here,
excavations and decipherment went hand in hand. A few years after the
advent of Botta at Mosul, Mariette inaugurated in Egypt a series of
brilliant excavations under the auspices of the French government.
About the same time the German government sent Richard Lepsius on an
expedition to Egypt, which resulted in the establishment of a large
Egyptian Museum at Berlin. In 1883 England entered the field through
the formation of the Egyptian Exploration Fund, and since that time a
large number of cities in Lower Egypt, in the Fayum district, and in
Upper Egypt have been unearthed. Year after year W. Flinders Petrie,
Edouard Naville, F. L. Griffith, and others have gone to Egypt and
returned richly laden with material that has found its way to the
Museum at Ghizeh, to the British Museum, to Boston, to New York, and
to the Museum of the University of Pennsylvania. The activity of the
French was continued after the death of Mariette, through Gaston
Maspero, E. Grebaut, J. DeMorgan and E. Amelineau, so that the mass of
material at present available for Egyptologists is exceedingly large.

[Illustration: RUINS OF PHILÆ, OR PHARAOH’S BED, ON AN ISLAND IN THE
NILE.]

The cities of Memphis and Thebes have naturally come in for a large
share of these excavations. Through the texts discovered within the
pyramids at Thebes and the surrounding district, the history of the
early dynasties was for the first time revealed. At Balas and Nagadah,
a short distance to the north of Memphis, the excavations have brought
us face to face with the indigenous population of the Nile that
maintained its primitive customs long after those who founded the real
Egyptian Empire had established themselves in the country. In the
district of the Fayum, notably around Arsinoe, at Hawara, Illahun, and
Gurob, traces of early foreign influence—Phœnician and Greek—were
discovered, while in Lower Egypt the towns of Naukratis and Tanis
represent extensive Greek settlements made in Egypt as early, at least,
as the seventh century B. C. Through the magnificent illustrations in
the tombs of Beni-Hassan, which have recently been carefully copied by
English artists, almost all phases of ancient Egyptian life have been
revealed. Though dating from the eleventh and twelfth dynasties,
the picture that they afford applies to earlier and later periods as
well. Thus, through the work done in all parts of the ancient empire,
the links uniting the earliest period to the sway of the Ptolomies and
the invasion of the Romans have been determined. Wonderful chapters,
replete with interest, have been added to the history of mankind, and
though much remains to be done, we are much nearer to a solution than
ever before of that most important problem as to the origin of the
mysterious Egyptian culture. We know for a certainty that when the
Egyptians came to the region of the Nile, they found a fertile district
populated by a people, or by groups of people, that had already made
some progress on the road to civilization, though not yet knowing
the use of metals. The Asiatic origin of the Egyptians is regarded
as clearly established by so eminent an archæologist as M. DeMorgan,
though it is likely that his views will be somewhat modified by further
research. The infusion of Greek ideas, we now know, begins at a much
earlier age than was formerly supposed, so that it becomes less of a
surprise to find, even before the advent of Alexander, considerable
portions of Egypt absorbed by foreign settlers.

A noteworthy feature of archæological work in Egypt during the past
decade has been the discovery of a vast amount of papyri containing
long lost portions of Greek literature. The famous work of Aristotle
on the Constitution of Athens and the poems of Bacchylides may be
mentioned as the most notable among these discoveries, and the sources
from whence these treasures have come seem still far from being
exhausted.

GREEK RUINS.—The mention of Greek literature leads one naturally
to speak of the work done in this century in that land which stands
so much nearer to us and to modern culture in general than either
Babylonia or Egypt. While, thanks to the activity and industry of Greek
and Roman historians, the records of the inspiring history of the Greek
states during their most glorious epoch are well preserved, the earlier
periods were enveloped in doubt and obscurity, while of the remains
of Greece, of her beautiful temples and her famous works of art,
comparatively few vestiges remained above the soil.

The most notable of these were the Parthenon and the Erechtheum, with
their works of art, that stood on the Acropolis, and it is precisely
here that some of the most remarkable archæological discoveries of the
century were made. The Parthenon dates from that glorious period in
the history of Athens which follows in the wake of disasters in the
fifth century, when the Persians entered the city and laid waste its
beauties. The earlier Athens, which reached its zenith in the days
of Pisistratus, has been brought to light through the excavations
conducted by the Greeks themselves. In 1882 a systematic excavation of
the Acropolis, under the auspices of the Greek Archæological Society,
was begun. The foundations of the ancient Temple of Athena that stood
close to the modern Parthenon were discovered, and numerous works
of art, statues, fragments, pediments, bases and vases, dating from
the earlier period, by means of which we are enabled to trace the
development of Athenian sculpture from the rough beginnings to the
perfection that it reached in the days of Phidias. The style of these
earlier works differs totally from that which we had hitherto been
accustomed to regard as the type of Athenian art, and yet even the
rudest of the earlier statues possess already some of that charm which
is so strongly felt in the works of the later period. Most remarkable,
perhaps, among the remains of the earlier Athenians are a large series
of figures that appear to have been set up in rows within the Temple
of Athena. It is through these figures, dating from various periods,
that we are best able to trace the evolution of Greek art. They are
unquestionably votive offerings, the gift of faithful followers
of Athena, and, while intended probably as representations of the
goddess herself, but little care was taken to give the goddess those
accompaniments in dress and ornament which are never absent in the best
specimens of the later period. As a result of these excavations on the
Acropolis, aided by the investigations of numerous scholars, among
whom Ernst Curtius and William Doerpfeld merit special mention, the
entire plan of the little sacred city that stood on the Acropolis can
now be traced in detail. The construction of the beautiful Propylæa by
Mnesicles, of which remains are still to be seen, has been determined,
and various temples to Athena, worshiped under the different guises
that she assumed, have been discovered. The place where the great
bronze statue of Athena, one of the master works of Phidias, stood,
has been fixed, and through the inscriptions found on the Acropolis,
numerous problems of Greek history have been solved. Every one knows
the story of the Elgin marbles that once formed the decoration of the
friezes of the Parthenon, and which in the early part of this century
were brought to London by Lord Elgin. That act, though frequently
denounced as a piece of vandalism, has probably done more to arouse
an interest in Greek archæology throughout Europe than anything else.
Even the indignation which Lord Elgin’s act provoked has served a
good purpose, not only in leading Greece to take better care of her
great treasures, but in inducing scholars of England, France, Germany,
and the United States to establish, in Athens, architectural schools
where young archæologists may be trained, and where expeditions can be
organized for the systematic investigation of the numerous cities of
ancient Greece and the surrounding islands. The most important work
done through these schools is the excavation of Olympia by the Germans,
and of Delos and of Delphi by the French, while only some degrees
less noticeable is the work done by a zealous Greek, M. Carpanos, at
Dodona, by the Greek Society at Eleusis, Epidaurus, and Tanagra, and by
the American School at Eretria and at Argos. At Olympia the discovery
of the great Temple to Zeus, the grand theatre in which the famous
games took place, the numerous shrines erected in honor of various
deities that belong to the court of Zeus, and of hundreds of votive
inscriptions commemorating the victors in the games, have enabled
scholars to restore for us the ancient glories of the place, and to
trace the history of the sacred city through its period of glory to
its decline and fall. The master work of antiquity, the golden statue
of Zeus made by Phidias, is, alas! forever lost, but it was at Olympia
that the Germans found the wonderful statue of Hermes by Praxiteles,
a find that in itself was worth the million marks spent by the German
government as a tribute to ancient Greece. At Delos and Delphi, the
careful work done by the French has added to our material for tracing
the course of Greek religion. Next to Olympia there is, perhaps, no
place in ancient Greece which had such a strange hold upon the people
as the seat of the great oracle at the foot of Mount Parnassus. The
work at Delphi is still progressing, but enough has been found to
justify the great reputation of this religious centre in ancient times.
We can now traverse once again the sacred way leading past numerous
buildings to the great shrine of Apollo, and to the cave from which the
Pythian priestess obtained her inspiration. Fewer works of art have
been discovered here than in Olympia, though perhaps the soil still
harbors treasures which the coming years may reveal.

The worship of Demeter and the nature of the Eleusinian mysteries are
much clearer since the successful excavations that were conducted at
Eleusis. Tanagra is of interest because of the clay figurines, the
manufacture of which was one of the specialties of ancient Bœotia.
Those figures, prepared partly from religious motives, partly as a
tribute to the dead, are valuable as illustrations of popular customs.
Great credit is due to the American school for the thorough manner in
which excavations have been conducted by it, and while the results
are not as striking as in some other places, so fundamental a problem
as the arrangement of the Greek theatre, which has been engaging the
attention of archæologists for the past decade, has been brought nearer
to its solution through excavations at Eretria. At Argos a head of Hera
was discovered, which is now famous as one of the best specimens of the
Polycletan school.

No sketch of Greek archæology, however brief, would be complete without
mention of a man who exhibited singular devotion and rare enthusiasm
for the study of the past. Heinrich Schliemann, by dint of individual
effort, laid bare the remains of pre-Grecian civilization at Mycenæ and
Tiryns, and, prompted by a theory which for a long time provoked naught
but ridicule, devoted many years and a large fortune to excavations
at Hissarlik, on the coast of Asia Minor, which, he believed, was the
scene of the Trojan War. At the latter place no less than nine cities,
erected one above the ruins of the other, have been found, but the
theory of Schliemann which identified the second layer with ancient
Troy, afterward known to the Greeks as Ilium, has been shown to be
false. It is the sixth layer that represents the ruins of Homer’s Troy.
At the same time, it must be remembered that the Homeric poems, while
based upon historic events, are not history, and the attempt to test
their supposed historical accuracy by the results of excavations is
now regarded by Greek students as futile and unscientific. But this
view in no way diminishes the credit due to Schliemann, who not only
did more to stir up popular interest in ancient Greece than any other
man living, but has illuminated the early chapters of Greek history
which were almost unknown to the scholars of this century. It now
appears that Phœnician traders, settling on the coast of Asia Minor
and in districts adjacent to the islands of the Ægean sea and harbors,
which furnished a refuge for their ships, gave the first impulse to
Greek art, and, although they were outdistanced by their apt pupils,
the traces of Phœnician influence remain in Greek architecture, and
more particularly in Greek cults, down to the latest times. Apart from
the direct bearings of the excavations conducted in various parts of
Greece upon the development of Greek art, the most important results of
the work consist in the vast increase of material for Greek history,
which is now being rewritten on the basis of the many thousands of
inscriptions that have been found in the great centres of ancient
Greece. As the work of excavation continues, each year brings its
quota of new facts, and it is safe to predict that the recovery of
ancient Greece will be noted in future ages as one of the most notable
achievements of the nineteenth century.

[Illustration: THE SO-CALLED SARCOPHAGUS OF ALEXANDER THE GREAT IN
MARBLE FROM MOUNT PENTELIKON. ABOUT B. C. 320.

(Imperial Ottoman Museum, Constantinople.)]

PHŒNICIAN RUINS.—With Egypt, Babylonia, and Greece we are still far
from having exhausted the field covered by archæology in this century.
At Cyprus much has been done by Löhr, Cesnola, and Ohnefalsch-Richter.
The cities of Cyprus are interesting as forming a meeting-ground for
such various civilizations as Phœnician, Egyptian, Proto-Grecian, and
to a limited extent Babylono-Assyrian. The result is a curious mixture
of art and of equally strange syncretism in religious rites. It is
one of the disappointments of scholars that we as yet know so little
of the Phœnicians who played such an important role in history. The
traces of this people of wanderers and merchants have been found in
tombs and votive inscriptions throughout the lands bordering on the
Mediterranean, in Northern Africa, in Southern Spain, in Sicily, Malta,
Asia Minor, Cyprus, Crete, Italy, and even Southern France; but in
Phœnicia itself but few inscriptions have been unearthed, and only
scanty remains of the important cities of Sidon and Tyre, which once
flourished on the coast of the Mediterranean. The fate of these cities,
subjected in the course of centuries to so many different powers, is
a sad one. Almost everything that belonged to a high antiquity has
disappeared, and such scanty excavations as have been undertaken, the
most notable of which is that of Um-el-Awamid by the late Ernest Renan,
in 1861, have been of little value. Tombs have been discovered, but
only few of them belong to the Phœnician period in the proper sense.
The Sarcophagus of Eshmunazar, king of Sidon, with a long Phœnician
inscription, is however a most notable monument and of great historical
importance. But the most remarkable find within the limits of ancient
Phœnicia was made a few years ago by Hamdi Bey under the auspices
of the Turkish government. In the necropolis at Sidon a series of
sarcophagi were unearthed which, belonging to the Greek period, are
valuable as furnishing a specimen of the art of Greece transplanted in
foreign soil.

[Illustration: FRONT VIEW.

REAR VIEW.

CUNEIFORM LETTER FROM LACHISH, PALESTINE. ABOUT B. C. 1400.

(Imperial Ottoman Museum, Constantinople.)]

RESEARCHES IN PALESTINE.—Ancient Palestine, likewise, so full of
sacred recollections for millions, has been chary of yielding up the
treasures which there is every reason to believe still lie somewhere
beneath the soil. In 1870, a stone was found in the land of Moab
which commemorated the victory of King Mesha over Israel, about 800
B. C., and forms one of the most valuable monuments for tracing the
history of the Phœnician alphabet, of which the one we use is a direct
successor. At Jerusalem a single inscription, belonging probably to
the age of Hezekiah, was found by accident at the pool of Siloam.
This paucity of archæological returns is not due to any lack of
interest in recovering the monuments of ancient Palestine. In Germany
and England, societies for the exploration of Palestine have been in
existence for the past twenty years, and much important work has been
done by them in making careful surveys of the country, in identifying
ancient sites, and in adding material to our knowledge of the geography
of the country. The combined opposition of fanatical Turks, Arabs,
Christians, and Jews has prevented, until recently, the undertaking of
excavations in the important centres of the country, such as Jerusalem,
Samaria, Bethlehem, Hebron, and the like. A few years ago the mound
Tel-el-Hesy, covering the site of the ancient city of Lachish, was
thoroughly explored by F. J. Bliss, and no less than ten layers of
cities identified by him; but the results, except for some pottery and
a most important discovery of a cuneiform tablet which belongs to the
El-Amarna series and dates from the fifteenth century B. C., have been
rather disappointing. Recently Mr. Bliss has succeeded in obtaining
permission to undertake excavations at Jerusalem. He has begun his work
by tracing carefully the walls of the ancient city, but until this work
is pushed to the extent of actually digging down some forty feet below
the level of the present Jerusalem, it is not likely that significant
discoveries will be made. There are good reasons for hoping that the
time is not far distant when systematic work, such as has been done in
Egypt, Babylonia, and Greece, will also be undertaken in Palestine.
When that time does come, we may expect that many of the problems
besetting students of the Old and New Testaments will find their
solution.

[Illustration: ARCH OF TITUS, ROME.]

HITTITE REMAINS.—Archæology does not only solve problems, but
frequently raises new ones. Such a new problem is that of the Hittites.
During the past fifteen years, a large series of monuments, many of
them sculptured on rocks, have been found in various parts of Asia
Minor, from the district of Lake Van almost to the Mediterranean
coast, and notably at Hamath, on the Orontes. They all betray the
same art, and are accompanied by inscriptions in characters to which
the name Hittite has been given. It is to be borne in mind that this
term Hittite is to a large extent a conventional one, covering a
series of peoples that may have belonged to different races. We hear
of these Hittites in the Asiatic campaigns of Egyptian kings from the
seventeenth century B. C. down to 1400 B. C. Establishing an empire
on the Orontes, they gave the Assyrians a great deal of trouble, and
it was not until the end of the eighth century that they were finally
conquered. Though we know a good deal of the history of these Hittites
from the records of Egyptians, Babylonians, and Assyrians, their origin
remains wrapped in obscurity. The Hittite characters have not yet been
deciphered, although various attempts of interpreters have been made.
The last of these is that of Professor Peter Jensen, of the University
of Marburg, who believes that the Hittite language is a prototype of
the modern Armenian. Although a number of prominent scholars have
acknowledged their acceptance of the Jensen system, it cannot be said
as yet to have been definitely established, nor is it likely that a
satisfactory key will be found until a large bilingual inscription
containing a record in Hittite characters with a translation,
perhaps, in Assyrian or Aramaic, shall have been found. Such a find
may be expected at any moment. Meanwhile, it may be said that from
an ethnological point of view, it seems more plausible to regard the
Hittites as a part of the Turanian stock rather than belonging to the
Aryan or Semitic races. The exploration of India, China, and Japan
can scarcely be said to have more than begun. The notable series
of inscriptions that recall the period of Indian history connected
with Acoka may be regarded as a specimen of what we may expect when
once those distant lands are as thoroughly explored as the countries
situated around the Mediterranean sea.

[Illustration: HITTITE INSCRIPTION FROM JERABIS.]

ROMAN RUINS.—Coming to the last and greatest of the empires of
antiquity, Rome, a word should be said about the activity that has
characterized the excavations at Herculaneum and Pompeii, and recently
in the city of Rome, which are carried on so successfully by Rudolfo
Lanciani. While our knowledge of Roman history has always been much
more complete than that of Greece, still many questions of detail
have only recently been settled through these excavations. An insight
has been afforded into the public and private life of the Romans
which supplements that which was to be gained from the study of the
classical writers. Europe and America have also been seized with the
archæological fever. In Germany, Austria, France, Sweden, Denmark,
Holland, Switzerland, North America, and South America, the knowledge
of the past has been extended through exploration and excavation. So
large is the field of archæology at present, that it is impossible for
one person to make himself familiar with more than a small section;
but, on the other hand, so close is the sympathy between the various
branches of mankind scattered throughout the world that there is
no work carried on in one division of archæology which has not its
bearings upon many others. What Goethe said of human life may be said
of archæology: “Wo ihr’s packt, da ist’s interessant.”

PROGRESS IN DAIRY FARMING

BY MAJOR HENRY E. ALVORD, C.E., LL.D.,

_Chief of Dairy Division, U. S. Department of Agriculture_.

Nearly all industries have their branches or specialties. Farming is
no exception, and one of the most interesting, highly developed, and
remunerative of its branches is dairying. To be successful, dairying
requires good judgment, knowledge of the relations of modern science to
agricultural production, constant study, system, and close attention
to details. Hence it is regarded as among the highest forms of
farming. The occupation is itself so stimulating and the rewards are
so substantial, when brains and brawn are applied to it in judicious
combination, that dairying districts are commonly conspicuous as the
most enterprising, prosperous, and contented of the rural communities
of their section of country.

In all lines of farming at least one “money crop” seems to be the aim,
although this term may include animals and animal products. A great
disadvantage in certain kinds of farming is that the returns come
at long intervals, perhaps but once a year, while the expenses are
continuous for twelve months. Dairying, as conducted by modern methods,
distributes the farm income through the year; the cash returns are
monthly, or oftener, the pernicious credit system disappears, money
circulates, and at all seasons a healthy business activity prevails in
the whole community.

It is a noteworthy fact, that during periods of agricultural depression
experienced in the United States during the nineteenth century, the
products of the dairy have maintained relative values above all other
farm products, and dairy districts seem to have passed through these
periods with less distress than most others.

The greater part of this country, geographically, being well adapted
to dairying, this branch of agriculture has always been prominent
in America, and its extension has kept pace with the opening and
settlement of new territory. For many years a belief existed that
successful dairying in the United States must be restricted to narrow
geographical limits, constituting a “dairy belt” lying between the
fortieth and forty-fifth degrees of latitude, and extending from the
Atlantic Ocean to the Missouri River; and the true dairying districts
were felt to be in separated sections occupying not more than one third
of the area of this belt. These ideas have been exploded. It has been
shown that good butter and cheese can, by proper management, be made
in almost all parts of North America. Generally speaking, good butter
can be profitably produced wherever good beef can. Decided advantages
unquestionably exist, in the climate, soil, water, and herbage of
certain sections; but these influences are largely under control, and
what is lacking in natural conditions can be supplied by tact and
skill. So that, while dairying is intensified and constitutes the
leading agricultural industry over wide areas, including whole States,
where the natural advantages are greatest, the industry is found well
established in spots in almost all parts of the country, and is
developing in unexpected places, and under what might be considered as
very unfavorable conditions.

Dairying existed in colonial times in America, and butter and cheese
are mentioned among the early exports from the settlements along the
Atlantic coast. But this production was only incident to general
farming. Dairying, as a specialty in the United States, did not appear
to any extent until well along in the nineteenth century. The history
of this industry in this country is therefore identical with its
progress in that century. This progress has been truly remarkable. The
wide territorial extension, the immense investment in lands, buildings,
animals, and equipment, the great improvement in dairy cattle, the
acquisition and diffusion of knowledge as to economy of production, the
revolution in methods and systems of manufacture, the general advance
in quality of products, the wonderful increase in quantity, and the
industrial and commercial importance of the industry, have kept pace
with the general material progress of the nation and constitute one of
its leading features.

During the early part of the century, the keeping of cows on American
farms was incident to the general work, the care of milk and the
making of butter and cheese were in the hands of the women of the
household, the methods and utensils were crude, the average quality
of the products was inferior, and the supply of our domestic markets
was unorganized and irregular. The milch cows in use belonged to the
mixed and indescribable herd of “native” cattle, with really good dairy
animals appearing singly, almost by accident, or, at the best, in a
family developed by some uncommonly discriminating yet unscientific
breeder. The cows calved almost universally in the spring, and were
generally allowed to go dry in the autumn or early winter. Winter
dairying was practically unknown. As a rule, excepting the pasture
season, cattle were insufficiently, and therefore unprofitably, fed
and poorly housed. In the Eastern and Northern States, the milk was
usually set in small shallow earthen vessels or tin pans, for the
cream to rise. Little attention was paid to cooling the air in which
it stood in summer, or to moderating it in winter, so long as freezing
was prevented. The pans of milk oftener stood in pantries and cellars
than in milk rooms specially constructed or prepared. In Pennsylvania
and the States farther south, where spring-houses were in vogue,
milk received better care, and setting it in earthen crocks or pots,
standing in cool, flowing water, was a usual and excellent practice.
Churning the entire milk was very common. Excepting the comparatively
few instances where families were supplied with butter weekly, and
occasionally a cheese, direct from the producers, the farm practice was
to “pack” the butter in firkins, half-firkins, tubs, and jars, and let
the cheese accumulate on the farms, taking these products to market
only once or twice a year. Not only were there as many different lots
and kinds of butter and cheese as there were producing farms, but the
product of a single farm varied in character and quality, according
to season and other circumstances. Every package had to be examined,
graded, and sold upon its merits. Prices were low.

[Illustration: A TYPICAL DAIRY FARM.]

These conditions continued, without material change, up to the
middle of the century. Some improvement was noticeable in cattle and
appliances, and in some sections dairy farming became a specialty. With
the growth of towns and cities, the business of milk supply increased
and better methods prevailed. Butter-making for home use and local
trade, in a small way, was common wherever cows were kept, and in some
places there was a surplus sufficient to be sent to the large markets.
Vermont and New York became known as butter producing States. “Franklin
County butter,” from counties of this name in New York, Vermont, and
Massachusetts, was known throughout New England, and the fame of
“Orange County” and “Goshen” butter, from New York, was still more
extensive. New York, Ohio, and Northern Pennsylvania produced large
quantities of cheese; and the total supply was so much in excess of
domestic demand, that cheese exports from the United States, mainly to
Great Britain, became established, and ranged from three to seventeen
million pounds a year.

The twenty-five years following 1850 was a period of remarkable
activity and progress in the dairy interests of the country. At first,
the agricultural exhibitions or “cattle shows,” and the enterprise
of importers, turned attention towards the improvement of farm
animals, and breeds of cattle specially noted for dairy qualities were
introduced and began to win the favor of dairymen. Then the early
efforts at coöperative dairying were recognized as successful, and were
copied until the cheese factory became an established institution. Once
fairly started, in the heart of the great cheese-making district of New
York, the factory system spread with much rapidity. The “war period”
lent additional impetus to the forward movement. The foreign demand
for cheese grew fast, and the price, which was ten cents per pound and
less in 1860, rose to fifteen cents in 1863, and to twenty cents and
over in 1865. There were two cheese factories in Oneida County in 1854,
and twenty-five in 1862. The system spread to Herkimer and adjoining
counties, and in 1863 there were 100 factories in New York, besides
some in Ohio and other States. The number increased to 300 in the whole
country in 1865, to 600 in two years more, and to over 1000 in 1869.
From that time the coöperative or factory system practically superseded
the manufacture of cheese on farms. Establishments for the making of
butter in quantity, from the milk or cream collected from numerous
farms, soon followed the cheese factories. Such are properly butter
factories, but the name of “creamery” has come into general use for an
establishment of this kind, and seems unlikely to change. Placing the
real beginning of cheese factories as a system of dairying in 1861 or
1862, the first creamery was started in 1861, in Orange County, New
York. In Illinois, the first cheese factory was built in 1863, and the
first creamery in 1867; in Iowa, the respective dates were 1866 and
1871.

The effect of these industrial establishments, comparatively new in
kind, is to transfer the making of butter and cheese from the farm to
the factory. Originating in this country, although now extensively
adopted in others, the general plan may be called the American system
of associated dairying. The early cheese-factories and creameries were
purely coöperative concerns, and it is in this form that the system
has usually extended into new territory, whether for the production
of butter or cheese. The cow owners and producers of milk coöperate
and share, upon any agreed basis, in organizing, building (perhaps),
equipping, and managing the factory and disposing of its products.
Another plan is for the plant to be owned by a joint-stock company,
composed largely, if not wholly, of farmers, and milk or cream is
received from any satisfactory producer; the factory may be allowed a
certain rate of interest on the investment, or may charge a fixed price
per pound for making butter or cheese, and then divide the remaining
proceeds _pro rata_ according to the raw material supplied by its
“patrons.” The proprietary plan is also common, being managed much like
any other factory, the proprietor or company buying the milk or cream
from the producers, at prices mutually agreed upon from time to time.
And all these plans have their variations and modifications in practice.

[Illustration: MODERN CREAMERY AND CHEESE FACTORY, WITH ICE-HOUSE, ETC.]

The third quarter of a century was also a period of unprecedented
progress in the application of mechanics to the dairy. The factories
and creameries required new equipment, adapted to manufacture upon an
enlarged scale, and equal attention was paid to the improvement of
appliances for farm dairies. The system for setting milk for creaming
in deep cans in cold water—preferably ice-water—was introduced
from Sweden, although the same principles had been in practice for
generations in the spring-houses of the South. Numerous creaming
appliances, or creamers, were invented, based upon this system. Shallow
pans were changed in size and shape, and then almost disappeared.
Butter workers of various models took the place of bowl and ladle and
the use of the bare hand. Churns appeared, of all shapes, sizes, and
kinds, the general movement being towards the abolition of dashers
and the substitution of agitation of cream for violent beating. About
this time the writer made a search of the United States Patent Office
records, which revealed the fact that forty or fifty new or improved
churns were claimed annually, and after rejecting about one fourth, the
patents actually issued provided a new churn every fifteen days for
more than seventy years. This illustrates the activity of invention in
this line. It was admitted by all that at this period the United States
was far in advance of any other country in the variety and excellence
of its mechanical aids to dairying.

The same period witnessed the organization of dairymen in voluntary
associations for mutual benefit in several States, the formation of
clubs and societies of breeders of pure-bred cattle, and the appearance
of the first American dairy literature of consequence in book form.
The American Dairymen’s Association was organized in 1803. Its field
of activity was east of Indiana, and accordingly the Northwestern
Dairymen’s Association was formed in 1867. Both of these continued in
existence, held periodical meetings, and published their proceedings
for twelve or fifteen years. Then the formation of State dairy
associations in Vermont (1870), Pennsylvania (1871), New York (1877),
Wisconsin (1872), Illinois (1874), Iowa (1870), and other States took
the place of the pioneer societies which covered wider territory.

The Short-horn breed led in the introduction of improved cattle to
the United States, and for a long time the representatives of this
race, imported from England, embraced fine dairy animals. Short-horn
grades formed the foundation, and a very good one, upon which many
dairy herds were built up during the second and third quarters of the
century, and much of this blood is still found in prosperous dairying
districts. This was the period of greatest activity in importing
improved cattle from abroad. But Short-horns have been so generally
bred for beef qualities that the demand for them is almost exclusively
on that line, and they are no longer classed as dairy cattle. Ayrshires
from Scotland, Holstein-Friesians from North Holland, and Jerseys
and Guernseys from the Channel Islands, are the breeds recognized as
of dairy excellence, and upon which the industry mainly depends for
improvement of its milch cows. The first two named are noted for giving
large quantities of milk of medium quality; the other two breeds, both
often miscalled “Alderney,” give milk of exceeding richness, and are
the favorites with butter makers. There are also the Brown Swiss and
Simmenthal cattle from Switzerland, the Normandy breed from France,
and Red Polled cattle from the south of England, which have dairy
merit, but belong rather to what is called the “general purpose” class.
Associations of persons interested in maintaining the purity of all the
different breeds named have been formed since 1850, and they all record
pedigrees and publish registers or herd-books. Pure-bred herds of some
of these different breeds are owned in nearly all parts of the country,
and half-breeds or higher grades are found wherever cows are kept for
dairy purposes. The quality and production of the average dairy cow in
America are thus being steadily advanced.

[Illustration: A TYPICAL DAIRY COW—AYRSHIRE.]

The development of dairying in the United States during the closing
decades of the nineteenth century has been uninterrupted, and
marked by events of the greatest consequence in the entire history.
The importance of two inventions during this period cannot be
overestimated. The first is the application of centrifugal force to the
separation of cream from milk. This is based upon the specific gravity
of the milk serum or skim milk, and of whatever impure matter may have
entered the milk, such gravity being greater than that of the fatty
portion or cream. The dairy centrifuge, or cream separator, enables the
creaming or “skimming” to be done immediately after milking, preferably
while the milk is still warm. The cream can be at once churned, while
sweet; but a better practice is to cure or “ripen” it for churning:
this can be done at a comparatively high temperature, dispensing with
the necessity of so much ice or cold water. The skim milk is available
for use while still warm, quite sweet, and in its best condition for
feeding to young animals. This mechanical method is more efficient,
securing more perfect cream separation than the old gravity system, and
the dairy labor is very largely reduced. The handling and caring for
the milk may be thus wholly removed from the duties of the household.
A usual plan is to have a “skimming station,” to which the milk is
hauled at least daily from the producing farms in the vicinity, and
where one or more separators are operated by power. Separators are
also made of sizes and patterns suited to farm use, where they may
be operated by hand or by light power,—electricity, steam, water, a
horse, a bull, a sheep, or a dog. Besides its economy and its effect
upon labor, this machine almost eliminates the factor of climate in a
large part of dairy management, and altogether has worked a revolution
in the industry. The centrifugal separator is still a marvel to those
who see it working for the first time: the whole milk, warm, flows
into the centre of a strong steel bowl, held in an iron frame; the
bowl revolves at a rate of 1500 to 25,000 times per minute, and from
two projecting tubes cream and skim milk flow in continuous streams to
separate receptacles. The machines can be regulated to produce cream
of any desired thickness or quality. These separators, of different
sizes, are capable of thus skimming or separating, or more properly,
creaming, from 15 to 500 gallons of milk per hour. A machine of
standard factory size has a speed of 6000 to 7000 revolutions a minute,
and a capacity for separating 250 gallons of milk an hour. The world is
indebted to Europe for this invention, at least as a dairy appliance.
Yet investigations were in progress contemporaneously in this country
along the same line, and many of the material improvements in the cream
separator and several entirely new patterns have since been invented
here. The first separators were put into practical use in this country
and Great Britain in the year 1879. The century closes with 35,000 to
40,000 of these machines in operation in the United States.

The second great dairy invention of the period is the fat-test for
milk,—being a quick and easy substitute for chemical analysis. This is
one of the public benefactions of the Agricultural Experiment Stations
which, under State and national endowment, have been established during
the last part of the century, so that there is now at least one in
every State. A number of these have done much creditable work in dairy
investigation, and from them have come several clever methods for
testing the fat content of milk. The method which has been generally
approved and is now almost universally adopted in this and other lands
is named for its originator, Dr. S. M. Babcock, the able chemist and
dairy investigator, first of the New York Station at Geneva and since
of the Wisconsin Station at Madison. This tester combines the principle
of centrifugal force with simple chemical action. The machine, on the
Babcock plan, has been made in a great variety of patterns, simple
and inexpensive for home use, more elaborate and substantial for
factories. By them from two to forty samples of milk may be tested at
once in a few moments; and by slight modifications in the appliances,
the fat may be determined in samples of milk, cream, skim-milk, or
butter-milk. This fat test of milk has wide application, and is second
only to the separator in advancing the economies of dairying. The
percentage of fat being accepted as the measure of value for milk for
nearly all purposes, the Babcock test may be the basis for city milk
inspection, for fixing the price of milk delivered to city dealers, to
cheese factories and creameries, and for commercial settlements between
patrons in coöperative dairying of any kind. By this test, also, the
dairyman may prove the quality of milk from his different cows, and
(with quantity of milk-yield recorded) may fix their respective value
as dairy animals. With perfect apparatus in careful hands, the accuracy
of the test is unquestioned, and it is of the highest scientific value.
It should be noted that although clearly patentable, and offering an
independence through a very small royalty, this priceless invention and
boon to dairying was freely given to the public by Dr. Babcock.

[Illustration: CENTRIFUGAL CREAM SEPARATOR IN OPERATION.]

The advent of the twentieth century finds the dairy industry of the
United States established upon a plane far above the simple and
crude domestic art of three or four generations ago. The milch cow
itself, upon which the whole business rests, is more of a machine
than a natural product. The animal has been so bred and developed to
a special purpose, that instead of the former short milking period,
almost limited to the pasture season, it yields a comparatively even
flow of milk during ten or eleven months in every twelve; and if
desired, the herd produces as much in winter as in summer. It is not
unusual for cows to give ten or twelve times their own weight of milk
during a year. And the quality has been so improved that the milk of
many a good dairy cow will produce as much butter in a week as could
be made from three or four average cows of the olden time. Instead
of a few homely and inconvenient implements for use in the laborious
duties of the dairy, generally devolving upon the women of the farm,
perfected appliances skillfully devised to accomplish their object and
lighten labor are provided all along the way. The factory system of
coöperative or concentrated manufacture has so far taken the place of
home dairying, that in entire States the cheese vat or press is as rare
as the hand-loom, and in many counties it is as hard to find a farm
churn as a spinning-wheel. Long rows of shining tin pans are no longer
seen adorning rural dooryards, as one drives along country roads; but
in their place may be found the bright faces of “the women-folks,” who
rejoice over the revolution of modern dairying.

[Illustration: MILK TESTER (OPEN).]

Here is an example of this radical change in the system of making
butter: Northern Vermont has always been a region of large butter
production. St. Albans, in Franklin County, is the natural business
centre. During the middle of the century the country-made butter came
to this town to market every Tuesday from miles around. The average
weekly supply was 30 to 40 tons. This was very varied in quality,
was sampled and classified with much labor and expense, placed in
three grades—prime, fair, and poor—and forwarded to the Boston
market, two hundred miles distant. During twenty-five years ending
in 1875, 65,000,000 lbs., valued at $20,000,000, passed through this
little town. All of this was dairy butter made upon a thousand or two
different farms, in as many churns. In 1881, the first creamery was
built in this county. Now, the Franklin County Creamery Company,
located at St. Albans, has fifty-odd skimming stations distributed
through this and adjoining counties. To them is carried the milk from
30,000 cows or more, and the separated cream is sent by rail to the
central factory, where from ten to twelve tons of butter are made every
day. A single churning room for the whole county! All of this butter
is of standard quality, and sold on its reputation upon orders from
distant points received in advance of its manufacture. The price is
relatively higher than the average for the product of the same farms
fifty years ago.

[Illustration: BUTTER-MAKING ON THE FARM—THE OLD WAY.]

In one respect dairy labor is the same as a hundred years ago. Cows
still have to be milked by hand. Although numerous attempts have been
made, and patent after patent issued, no mechanical contrivance has yet
been a practical success as a substitute for the human hand in milking.
Therefore, twice a day, every day in the year, the dairy cows must be
milked. This is one of the main items of labor in the dairy, as well
as a most delicate and important duty. Allowing ten cows per hour to a
milker,—which is pretty lively work,—it requires the continuous labor
of an army of 300,000 men, working ten or twelve hours a day throughout
the year, to milk the cows of the United States.

The industry is becoming thoroughly organized. Besides local clubs,
societies, and unions, there are dairy associations in thirty States,
most of them incorporated and receiving financial aid under State laws.
In some States, the butter makers and cheese makers are separately
organized. Sixteen States provide by law for officials known as Dairy
Commissioners or Dairy and Food Commissions. These officers have a
national association, and there are also two national organizations
of dairymen. At various large markets and centres of activity in the
commerce of the dairy, there are special boards of trade. The United
States Department of Agriculture has a Dairy Division, intended to
watch over and promote the dairy interests of the country at large.
Dairy schools are maintained in several States, offering special
courses of practical and scientific instruction in all branches of
the business. These schools and the agricultural experiment stations,
with which most of them are closely connected, are doing much original
research and adding to the store of useful information as to the
applications of modern science to the improvement of dairy methods
and results. Weekly and monthly journals, in the interest of dairy
production and trade, are published in various parts of the country.
And during the last decade or two a number of noteworthy books on
different aspects of dairying have been published, so that the student
of this subject may fill a good-sized case with substantial volumes,
technical and practical in character.

The business of producing milk for town and city supply, with the
accompanying agencies for transportation and distribution, has grown
to immense proportions. In many places the milk trade is regulated and
supervised by excellent municipal ordinances, which have done much to
prevent adulteration and improve the average quality of the supply.
Full as much is being done by private enterprise, through large milk
companies, well organized and equipped, and establishments which make
a specialty of serving milk and cream of fixed quality and exceptional
purity. This branch of dairying is advancing very fast, and upon
the substantial basis of care, cleanliness, and improved sanitary
conditions.

Cheese-making has been transferred bodily from the realm of domestic
arts to that of manufactures. Farm-made cheeses are hard to find
anywhere, are used only locally, and make no impression upon the
markets. In the middle of the century about 100,000,000 pounds of
cheese were made yearly in the United States, all of it on farms. At
the close of the century the annual production of the country is about
300,000,000 pounds, and 96 or 97 per cent of this is made in factories.
Of these establishments there are some 3000, varying greatly in
capacity. New York and Wisconsin each have over a thousand; the former
State makes nearly twice as much cheese as the latter, and the two
together produce three fourths of the entire output of this country.
The other cheese-making States, in the order of quantity produced, are
Ohio, Illinois, Michigan, and Pennsylvania; but all are comparatively
unimportant. More than nine tenths of all made is of the familiar
standard variety copied after the English Cheddar, but new kinds and
imitations of foreign varieties are increasing. The cheese made in
the country, with the small importations added, gives an allowance of
less than four pounds a year to every person; but as thirty to fifty
million pounds are still annually exported, the per capita consumption
of cheese in the United States does not exceed three and a half pounds.
This is a very low rate, much less than in most European countries.

[Illustration: BUTTER-MAKING—THE NEW WAY.]

Great as has been the growth of the factory system of butter-making,
and fast as creameries are multiplying, especially in the newer and
growing agricultural States, such as Minnesota, Nebraska, Kansas,
and South Dakota, there is still much more butter made on farms in
the United States than in creameries. Creamery butter controls all
the large markets, the dairy product making comparatively little
impression on the trade. But home consumption and the supply of small
customers and local markets make an immense aggregate, being fully two
thirds of all. Estimating the annual butter product of the country at
1,400,000,000 pounds, not much over 400,000,000 of this is made in
the 8000 or 9000 creameries now in operation. Iowa is the greatest
butter producing State, and the one in which the greatest proportion
is made on the factory plan. This State has 850 creameries, only three
counties being without them; about two fifths are coöperative. In
these creameries about 90,000,000 pounds of butter are made annually
from 750,000 cows. It is estimated that in the same State 50,000,000
pounds of butter in addition are made in farm dairies. The total butter
product of the State is therefore one tenth of all made in the Union.
Iowa sends over 80,000,000 pounds of butter every year to other States.
New York is next in importance as a butter-making State, and then
come Pennsylvania, Illinois, Wisconsin, Ohio, Minnesota, and Kansas.
Yet all these combined make but little more than half of the annual
butter crop of the United States, and in no one of them, except Iowa,
is half of the butter produced made in creameries. The average quality
of butter in America has materially improved since the introduction
of the creamery system and the use of modern appliances. No butter
is imported, and the quantity exported is as yet insignificant.
Consequently the home consumption must be at the yearly rate of twenty
pounds the person, or about one hundred lbs. annually to the family of
average size. If approximately correct, this shows Americans to be the
greatest butter-eating people of the world.

And the people of this country also consume millions of pounds every
year of butter substitutes and imitations, known as oleomargarine,
butterine, etc. Most of this is believed to be butter by those who use
it, and the State Dairy Commissioners mentioned are largely occupied in
the execution of laws intended to protect consumers from these butter
frauds.

The cows in the United States were not counted until 1840, but they
have been enumerated for every decennial census since. It has required
from 23 to 27 cows to every 100 of the inhabitants to keep the country
supplied with milk, butter, and cheese, and provide for the export of
dairy products. The export trade has fluctuated much, but has never
exceeded the product of half a million cows. With the closing years of
the century, it is estimated that there is one milch cow in the United
States to every four persons. This makes the total number of cows about
17,500,000. They are quite unevenly distributed over the country, being
largely concentrated in the great dairy States. Thus Iowa leads with a
million and a half cows, followed by New York with almost as many, and
then Illinois and Pennsylvania with about a million each. The States
having over half a million each are Wisconsin, Ohio, Kansas, Missouri,
Minnesota, Nebraska, and Indiana. Texas is credited with 700,000, but
very few of them are dairy animals. In the Middle and Eastern States
the milk product goes very largely to the supply of the numerous
cities and large towns. In the Central West and Northwest butter is
the principal dairy product. It is estimated that the dairy animals of
the United States include nearly half a million which are pure bred,
and that this blood has been so generally diffused that more than one
fourth of the cattle are grades.

[Illustration: THE DAIRY MAID.]

The following table gives approximately an exhibit of the quantity and
value of the dairy products of the United States in the year 1900:—

This gives the grand total of the dairy products of the country a value
of $448,600,000. If to this be added the skim milk, buttermilk, and
whey, at their proper feeding value, and the calves dropped yearly,
the annual aggregate value of the produce of the dairy cows exceeds
$500,000,000. This may be accepted as a conservative estimate.

In a classification of the various annual farm products of the country
by values, meats and closely related products stand first in order,
the corn crop second, dairy products and the hay crop alternate in the
third and fourth places, and wheat occupies the fifth. Hay and corn are
so largely and directly tributary to the dairy as raw materials for its
support, that it is fair to place the products of the dairy as second
only to meat products in the general list. The cotton crop of the
country is considered one of great importance, but during recent years
it rarely equals the butter crop in value. The dairy aggregate exceeds
all the mining products of the United States other than coal, oil,
and gas. There never has been a year when the entire gold and silver
product of the world was enough to buy the annual dairy products of
this country at the present time. These comparisons show the commercial
importance which the dairying of America has assumed. It is a branch
of farming of such magnitude as to command attention and justify all
reasonable provisions to guard its interests.

THE CENTURY’S MORAL PROGRESS

BY SARA Y. STEVENSON, Sc. D.,

_Secretary Department of Archæology, University of Pennsylvania_.

In dealing with a subject so indefinite in its limits as the progress
of morals in the nineteenth century, it may be well to establish by a
brief survey of previous facts some solid basis upon which to rest the
discussion.

The notion of Duty or of moral obligation—i. e., of well-doing viewed
in the abstract and outside of expediency—does not appear to have been
brought forward by the Greek philosophers, to whom is mainly due the
origin of our own conceptions with regard to morality.

Even Plato, who dealt with nearly all duties, while insisting
especially upon the negative duty of committing no injustice or evil,
even against one’s foes, nowhere systematically treats of Duty. Indeed,
the Greek equivalent for the word did not exist in his time, and the
notion was conveyed by a periphrase.

That morals have a bearing upon the welfare and character not only of
the individual and of the family, but of the whole body politic, was
however early recognized. Theognis, for instance, who lived in the
sixth century B. C., stigmatized in the most energetic terms the evil
influence exercised upon the destiny of nations by the immorality of
the upper classes.

In the earlier schemes of civilization, where worship played a dominant
political rôle, morals were regarded as under the protection of the
sacred law. Worship and law were closely united in the government, and
morals were included in these and governed by motives of expediency.

Man’s obligation to the Deity was then mainly confined to material
offerings and propitiatory rites, whilst the law dealt with conduct
in so far as order must be enforced, authority respected, and certain
mutual rights recognized, if the welfare of the nation was to be
maintained.

That the moral standards of these early societies were high cannot
be doubted. Those which prevailed in ancient Egypt, as preserved to
us in the maxims of sages, as well as in certain chapters of the
sacred books, prove that the rule of conduct which was to insure to
the subjects of the Pharaohs respect and popularity in this world and
happiness in the world to come was in no way inferior to our own.
The men who taught their contemporaries “Do not save thy life at the
cost of another” had little to learn from the high-bred Parisians who
recently escaped unhurt from the burning walls of the French Charity
Bazaar.

For the Greek thinkers, however, who first systematically dealt with
the subject, Ethics was a branch of Politics, i. e., the Science of
Government. Aristotle, like Socrates and Plato, took for the starting
point of his argument the sovereign good, or the idea of absolute
well-being. All that man undertakes has an aim which, under analysis,
is found to be the greatest advantage to him who is acting. Accordingly
all knowledge tends to this end; and as all its elements are more or
less connected, there must be one, the final end of which is essential;
this is the political science which aims at the highest well-being not
only of each man, but of man collectively, i. e., of society.

The nature of this highest “well-being,” which is generally termed
“happiness,” gave rise among Greek philosophers to discussions which
have been revived by modern thinkers.

It may therefore be stated that in ancient thought, at least until
the time of the Stoics, morals and virtue were studied, whether
in connection with religion or with politics, under the light of
expediency rather than under that of abstract right, and that “they
were discussed as functions more than as moral obligations.”

The fullness of significance which at present is conveyed in the
word “Duty” is mainly due to the gradual and complex development of
religious, legal, and philosophical modes of thought, in which certain
human acts are regarded as enjoined and others as forbidden by a
higher power, and in which conscience enters as an important and ever
increasing factor. A sense of duty is the legitimate product of human
nature under cultivation. But although we should look in vain among the
ancients for the abstract notions which the words “Conscience, Duty,
and Right” evoke in the modern mind, we find in groping our way up the
stream of time that germs of these concepts had long lain concealed
in the precepts of ancient moralists. The fact of virtue existed long
before it was made the subject of theoretical systems, and if with the
development of the reasoning faculty our moral code has been elaborated
and our ethical terminology enriched, broadly speaking, the rules of
conduct laid down by civilized men in the remote past and those which
govern us to-day are, in kind, virtually the same. Thou shalt not
kill; Thou shalt not steal; Thou shalt not covet thy neighbor’s wife;
Thou shalt not bear false witness, are coeval with the beginnings of
communities. It is in the scope and degree of their application—not in
their nature—that mainly lies the difference existing in this respect
between the past and the present.

In the highest stage of our moral development the unselfishness
which seeks gratification in the welfare of others and in duty
accomplished, at the cost of self, may in final analysis be reduced to
a refined egoism. The motive held up to man by most moralists is still
expediency. The reward, whether it is promised on this earth or in the
world to come, is still a reward, and to the “greatest advantage of him
who is acting.”

Moreover, moral standards to-day, as in the past, have a strong bearing
upon political government, and it is in studying the development of
democratic ideas that we may best follow the evolution of modern ethics
as characteristic of our epoch; for to this development is due a higher
sense of justice, the recognition of the rights of men and of the
unimportance of the ego as compared with the race, all of which form
distinctive features of the modern creed for which the words “altruism”
and “humanitarianism” have been coined. It may also be said, to the
honor of the present century, that there exists a growing tendency to
accept abstract truth and right outside of expediency as standards
of conduct, and to apply these regardless of sex, class, or persons
according to the inflexible logic of a trained reason.

Two thousand years ago Christianity established itself upon the wreck
of ancient civilizations, preserving that which in them was immortal.
Grafted upon the Roman world, the gospel of democracy which it preached
could be accepted as the official religion of the Empire only at the
cost of its own purity. How could God and Mammon rule together? How
could a Constantine rise to an understanding of the Teacher who said:
“Ye know that they which are accounted to rule over the Gentiles
exercise lordship over them, and their great ones exercise authority
over them.... But so shall it not be among you; but whosoever will be
great among you shall be your minister; and whosoever of you will be
the chiefest shall be servant of all.” (St. Mark x. 42–44.) Christ had
established religion among his followers as distinct from worship. The
people soon relapsed into worship, whilst for the clergy theology took
the place of religion.

With the alliance formed between Church and State in the Christian
community, much of the Sermon on the Mount was necessarily forgotten;
many of the parables in which the Teacher embodied his doctrine of
justice, of tolerance, of love and humility, were to lose their living
force. Under the banner of faith, conduct sank to the second rank. The
dry subtleties of scholasticism helped to crush morality beneath the
words and formulæ of a learned dialectic. Although for centuries the
spirit of Christ continued to protect the weak and the lowly, although
from the very body of the Church, then ever ready in its arrogance to
cast its anathemas upon every effort of man to assert his freedom,
sprang reformers who endeavored to restore to the gospel some of its
early significance, the Church strayed ever farther from its founder.
Was this because, as Michelet said, the reformers themselves needed
reforming? Once more man found himself crushed under the law which
Christ had declared was made for him, until, at last, in the forcible
words of Mr. Darmesteter, of all the Teacher’s lessons Christian
Rome seemed to remember only one, “Return unto Cæsar that which is
Cæsar’s.” However fiercely monarchy might struggle against the temporal
encroachments of the Church, it joined with it to repress the people.
“Authority rested upon a mystery. Its right came from above. Power
was divine. Obedience to it was a sacred duty and inquiry became a
blasphemy.”

Then from the great schools and universities the developing intellect
of Europe awakened to a sense of its rights. Suddenly there came
inquiries into the reality of this spiritual power over human souls
and over the human understanding which Rome claimed to be derived from
Heaven. In its revolt against dogma, from Abélard and Arnold di Brescia
to Huss and Wickliff, from Luther and Pascal to Voltaire and Rousseau,
the human thought struggled for freedom under the banner of learning
and of reason, and fought for the rights of the people against the
privileged few. “I will not speak of tolerance,” cried Mirabeau, in
his plea for the emancipation of the Jews in the National Convention
(1791); “the freedom of conscience is a right so sacred that even the
name of tolerance involves a species of tyranny.”

At the close of the last century, freedom at last planted its standard
in Europe above the ruins of despotism. In the fiery torrent which
swept away the ancient traditions of the Church, as well as those of
the State, it seemed for a time as though religion as well as the
church, right as well as might, must disappear from the surface of the
earth, and that, in the smoke of battles and the revelry of reason,
truth and morals must perish and anarchy prevail. But a moral rule is
indispensable to society, and “Religion is after all but the highest
expression of human science and of human conscience.” Its germ,
innate in man, grows with his understanding in its constant strain to
establish a relation between himself and the universe.

To the moral chaos that for a brief space followed the overthrow of
the old order of things succeeded, in the beginning of this century,
a period of readjustment, and now, in the words of a poet whose own
mental processes are a type of those of his time, “Of a hopeless epoch
is born a fearless age.”

After the absolute negations of the early years of the nineteenth
century, after the violent controversies not only of arrogant science
and of prejudiced faith, but of scientific and theological schools
_inter se_ which fill the serious literature of the last generations,
a reconciliation between faith and science is taking place, a
certain unity of thought is being reached with regard to conduct and
to the rights of men. And the century, at its close, shows us the
Protestant churchman less tenacious of his dogma, the Romanist less
certain of the infallibility of Rome, the scholar less convinced of
the infallibility of his science, the agnostic less boastful of his
skepticism, the monarchist awakened from his dreams of a divine right
of kings and of a preordained subjection of men, the socialist sobered
of his revolutionary frenzy and repudiating the extremes of anarchy
and nihilism born of his earlier teachings, all marching shoulder to
shoulder under the banner of a broad tolerance toward a common goal,
in a united effort to lift the masses from the depths of poverty,
ignorance, vice, and often crime, to which centuries of repression
seemed to consign them, and seeking in friendly coöperation to bring
about a better social order.

For in our time has taken place a great broadening of the moral
standpoint from which the old rules of conduct are in future to be
applied. Toward the end of the last century the equality and fraternity
of men was proclaimed to the European world and received a baptism of
blood. This official declaration of the rights of men professed to
be universal; but, like other dispensations that had preceded it, in
its application it fell short of the democratic ideal. All men were
declared equal, yet with striking inconsistency those who proclaimed
the new creed held others in bondage, and race disqualification
survived.

The honor of leading in the greatest moral reform which the world has
seen is due to the French Revolutionary leaders. On February 2, 1794,
the Convention decreed the abolition of slavery throughout the French
colonies, and all slaves were admitted to the rights of citizenship.
It was only in 1833 that slavery was abolished in the British colonies
by Act of Parliament, and that coolie labor was substituted. In 1861
Emperor Alexander II., following the policy inaugurated by his father,
Nicholas I., freed the serfs in Russia. It is a curious fact that the
United States, which for many reasons might have been expected to lead
in the movement, only followed in 1863. The terrible struggle of the
public conscience against expediency and class interest, which then
took place upon this continent, must form one of the most important
lessons which this century will offer to posterity.

Right prevailed, and with this triumph of justice the human conscience,
throwing aside casuistry and evasion for a time, faced its problems
honestly and asserted its own sovereignty.

The consequences of the mighty struggle did not stop here. Once the
principles of abstract justice established, not only against might
but against tradition and expediency; once the rights not only of men
(as in 1776 and in 1789), but of all men, recognized in a broader
application of the principles of a true democracy, there came a
tendency to extend its application to mankind at large; and women,
who according to their station in life had hitherto been dealt with
theoretically as either useful or ornamental possessions, began to find
their place as members of the community. The rights of slaves as men
had been officially proclaimed. The rights of women as citizens began
to be discussed.

[Illustration: CZAR ALEXANDER II. OF RUSSIA.]

In the widespread shifting of levels which has taken place in the last
hundred years, affecting directly and indirectly the moral progress
of all classes of society, certain important elements have entered
which cannot be overlooked in the present discussion, and which in
future ages must stand as preëminently characteristic of the nineteenth
century and the Anglo-Saxon ascendency.

The reign of machinery in the industrial world, the advent of steam,
of electricity, of compressed air, as motors, have done away with
the human machine. Whether in peace or in war the skilled workman
has crowded him out. Labor-saving inventions have done away with the
necessity for a multiplicity of hands. The need to-day is for trained
heads. From evaporated fruit and canned meats to heat, light, and
inter-communication, science is brought to bear upon every detail
of existence. As an immediate consequence of the part necessarily
played by learning in our industrial and commercial life under modern
conditions, public education has become the mainspring of national
prosperity. Freedom and public education have made our laboring classes
the self-respecting, thinking people they are. The human automaton upon
which formerly played the greed, the vice, the craft of others now
holds a comparatively small place in the modern community, outside of
Latin Europe. The “vile multitude,” as M. Thiers still stigmatized it
(before he turned republican), no longer exists. The world has moved,
and so have men.

“If the shuttle would weave of itself,” said Aristotle in his apology
for slavery, “there would be no need of slaves.” The miracle, which
seemed impossible to the founder of science, has been accomplished with
the predicted result. The shuttle weaves of itself and slavery has
disappeared.

Even in Oriental lands, under Anglo-Saxon supremacy the carrying out
of great public works is stimulating a demand for education among
the people, and the sum total of ignorance and poverty is gradually
decreasing and making way for better conditions; for only a trained
hand guided by a trained intellect can use the modern tools. This
applies to agriculture as well as to industries.

In the rising tide of intellectual and material progress, woman has
been carried along to a great extent unconsciously. It is a matter
of grave doubt whether the early “suffragists” did more than be the
first to recognize and herald the logical drift of contemporary events.
It is through higher education that woman has quietly forged her way
to the place she occupies in the modern community, and that she is
claiming her share of the common heritage of freedom and independence.
The prophecy embodied in Bulwer’s “Coming Race” is being realized.
From year to year her sphere is broadening. She is fast becoming
self-supporting. In education she already holds a leading place. Her
influence as a moving force is becoming patent. It is officially
recognized to a varying degree in certain parts of the civilized
world,—England, New Zealand, Russia, and twenty-two of the United
States, where she stands before the law not only in her relation to man
as his mother, wife, or sister, but in a direct relation to society, as
a reasoning being and as a citizen.

[Illustration: SIR EDWARD BULWER.]

The increased self-respect born in woman’s mind of a consciousness of
equal training and culture, the growing number of women whose ambitions
have been stimulated to higher achievement, and the consequent
increasing influence wielded by them in the community, suggest the
thought that in time their legal status will be generally established,
as it already is now in several localities.

Much leveling has taken place since the abolition of the “ancient
régime,” not only in the relations of the various classes composing
society, but in the relation of men and women. The process is still
steadily going on. And it is not unreasonable to believe that, with the
gradual elevation of the ideals of one half of the population,—that
half which is in control of the early training of children of both
sexes,—a common standard of character and morality may in time be
acknowledged which will admit of but one rule by which the actions
of mankind, without distinction of persons, class, or sex, may be
measured. The fact that all distinction in favor of the privileged
class has already been removed in the eyes of modern public opinion
holds out such a hope. The casuistry which still discriminates between
evil-doers can but retard moral progress, and the more earnestly modern
parents urge upon their sons the same observance of the laws of hygiene
and propriety, of truth and self respect, as they exact from their
daughters, the nearer to true civilization will society reach.

The world is yet far from this goal. No legislative act has as yet
saved society from the ravages of vice, sensuality, and greed, and
to-day every degree of savagery and immorality still exists in
so-called civilized countries. Education, taking the word in its
broadest sense, can alone, by its refining influence, force the
savage to give way before reasoning man. And it is by the constantly
increasing proportion of educated, self-respecting men and women
that the coarser instincts of the human race are being controlled and
brought to yield to reason. By holding up the same standards of conduct
to humanity, the important place occupied by casuistry and expediency,
in the discussion of the ethical problems set before the moralist, may
be reduced, and a logical facing of the serious issues to be met may
follow. Such a result must tend to strengthen the marriage tie and the
family relation, upon which rests the whole moral structure of society.

At present, modern casuistry, if it no longer seeks to justify
falsehood and crime committed on behalf of Church or State, still
exonerates, in the world of affairs, the high railroad official or
the industrial magnate of an infraction of the higher code by which
his own personal integrity is judged, provided that infraction is
committed in the interest of his constituents. Many a man of high
standing, whose personal honor is beyond suspicion and whose conscience
would not allow him to take an unfair advantage of another, does not
hesitate to transgress when dealing with rival corporate bodies or
with public interests. Hence the corruption which prevails in public
life to a degree dangerous to the commonwealth, and which is in direct
contradiction with the professed standards of the age. Must we then
think that living up to the highest moral standard is incompatible with
business success, and agree with M. Jules Lemaître that “the attaining
to moral perfection is really possible only in the solitude of literary
or artistic pursuits, in the humility of manual labor, or in the
dignity of such disinterested functions as those of priest or soldier”?

However this may be, new conditions have created new problems which the
public conscience alone can solve—as it has already solved that of
slavery and of race—with unflinching logic.

The human mind, if less concerned than it was in the days of Molina
with polemics on the nature of the human will,—a question, by the
way, which Rome after eleven years and thirty-three Councils dared not
then settle,—or with theological controversies regarding the value of
indulgences, is not yet at peace with itself. Indeed, for being less
immaterial, the issues now before it for adjustment are, owing to their
bearing upon practical life, all the more vital to the moral health of
the body politic.

To the respective rights and duties of labor and capital our best
thinkers must turn their attention before an equitable solution can be
reached. That such a solution must be reached cannot be doubted, for
the interests at stake are fundamental.

Whilst individualism in thought and in conduct asserts itself at every
turn, never were the principles of organization so actively carried
out among all classes of society. To the strain caused by the forming
of trades unions and of united labor leagues for the protection of the
wage-earner is now succeeding the danger produced by the concentration
of capital in the hands of powerful corporations and the creation of
mighty trusts, the undue extension of which in this country seems to
threaten the prosperity of the nation and to add to its political
corruption. As against these monopolies, public ownership and operation
of common utilities is being successfully tried, notably in England and
the British Colonies, and the honest municipalization of all community
service, carried on as the post-office is carried on among us, results
in positive benefit to the people, that is, in good wages and reduced
taxes. To discuss these important problems would encroach upon the
domain of political economy and social science; but there is no doubt
that the public morality is closely dependent upon their solution.

Whether so-called civilized nations, whilst regarding murder as a
capital offense and punishing dueling when indulged in by individuals,
will long continue to train their best men at enormous expense, in
order that in cold blood they may scientifically destroy the greatest
possible number of other trained and equally good men; whether peaceful
communities of practical tradesmen will some day cease to emulate
barbarians in their rejoicings over the slaughter of so-called enemies
whom they are individually prepared to befriend and whose prowess they
are ready to extol, are glaring contradictions offered by the problem
of war which must be left to future generations to reconcile. The
leading part which the Anglo-Saxon race has taken in urging arbitration
as a proper means of settling international differences places it in
the foremost rank of civilization; whilst the Peace Conference proposed
by one of Europe’s most powerful potentates, the Czar of Russia, must
bring a ray of hope to the hearts of those who labor for the advent of
universal peace.

Such are the great moral issues of the present day; and in these many
minor ones are included. Everywhere and at all periods of history
the theory of ethics has widely differed from practical conduct. The
race conflict which is taking place in France as the result of the
Dreyfus trial, more than a century after the emancipation of the Jews
before the law was proclaimed, is a late illustration of this fact.
To this, the corruption and failure of justice which recent exposures
have revealed in the highest circles of republican France add peculiar
significance. As already stated, the broad outlines established in
precept remain unchanged, and it is in their logical application that
lie all present growth and future hope.

To trace, even in sketchy outline, the debit and credit account of
modern ideas upon the various subjects involved in the above mentioned
issues would be a serious undertaking. A chapter must be devoted
to each nation, for the moral progress of each differs as does its
besetting sin. Moreover, every shade of opinion must be weighed and
considered. Inherited traditional views are, in each modern mind,
hopelessly interwoven with the new articles of a code of morals which
public opinion is even now evolving from contemporary conditions. “Each
of us,” says Edmond Schérer, “belongs to two civilizations, that which
is coming and that which is going; and as we are accustomed to the
first, we are poorly placed to judge or enjoy the latter.”

There never was an epoch when the struggle for existence was fiercer
and when earthly possessions were more keenly prized. But despite the
many survivals which still point to a semi-barbaric inheritance of
selfishness descended through millenniums, a decided moral gain may, on
the whole, be placed to the credit of our era. With the decrease of the
sum total of ignorance, not only among the lower but among the upper
classes, the sum total of well-doing and well-being has immeasurably
increased.

The sympathy for suffering is more widespread than it has ever been.
No middle-aged person can fail to note the rapid change which has
taken place in the public mind with regard to the general treatment
not only of children, but of animals. The present mode of dealing with
school children according to their individual capacity, the trust in
their honor which governs their relation to the teacher, the absence
of any corporal punishment, form a recent departure in education well
calculated to produce the best moral results.

The improvement of modern methods in relief work as well as in the
treatment of vice—now viewed more in the light of a pathological
condition than in that of a sin—must make this a memorable epoch
in the ethical history of humanity. No branch of civilization has
undergone greater change in modern times both in theory and practice
than public and private charity. To-day the humanitarian endeavors
to lift up the fallen and the needy, and almsgiving on the part
of the well-to-do is fast becoming relegated to the category of a
self-indulgence which is not to be encouraged. The distinction between
the old methods and the new is given in the formula that “henceforth
the chief test of charity will be the effect upon the recipient.”
Any relief calculated to undermine self-reliance and independence is
discouraged by those who have in view the prevention of our moral ills
rather than their relief.

[Illustration: CAPTAIN ALFRED DREYFUS.]

Indeed, the new school preaches scientific charity as against emotional
charity. What it may have lost in impulse it has more than made up in
effectiveness. The attempt to teach the needy to help themselves, the
work of college settlements and of the organized efforts in the poorest
and most neglected districts of large cities, with a view to fostering
by personal contact and example habits of thrift and self-respect where
those virtues are most lacking, are among the truest if more homely
glories of the closing century.

Verily, never was a more thoughtful effort made everywhere to mitigate
the cruel distinctions of race and sex, of wealth and poverty, and
to “harmonize the social antagonisms” of modern life. Never was so
much consideration given to the betterment of humanity, nor was the
aggregate of earnestness so great.

In our more robust intellectual world the tree is judged by its fruit,
and acts tell, not creed. The principle that well-doing, unless it
is disinterested, forfeits its claim to the highest respect of men,
is growing in strength, whilst the feeling is gaining ground among
the thoughtful that in the development of personality may be found a
sufficient motive for the exercise of virtue, and that character, not
reward, _being_ not _having_, are the highest aims.

If we resume the moral progress of the nineteenth century, allowing
for its inconsistencies, carefully weighing its negative and positive
results, and taking as a balance what is original in its contribution
to the ethical development of the human race, we will find that this
contribution mainly lies in the direction of tolerance and of altruism.
This altruism is distinct from the charity of St. Vincent, which
sacrificed self in a loving attempt to relieve individual distress.
Such pure sacrifice, admirable as it is, is not only narrow in its
scope, but because of its austerity must fail to survive in the
struggle for existence. Modern altruism aims at removing the main cause
of individual distress, and spends itself in educational efforts, in
which the well-doer finds happiness in the consciousness of usefulness.
It is also unlike the socialism of Condorcet, which reached down in an
endeavor to make all institutions subservient to the interests of the
poorer and most numerous classes, for it aims at lifting these to the
highest possible plane. The mountain summits are not to be lowered, but
the valleys are being filled. To raise the people, to build up, not to
tear down, is the avowed end of all modern moral effort, and must ever
stamp the humanitarian struggles of the present age as distinct from
those of the eighteenth and preceding centuries.

With this we may claim an increase in individual freedom, and a
perceptible tendency to a logical and ever broadening conception, not
only of the rights, but of the duties of citizenship; to a more honest
recognition of the place assigned by expediency to evil in the social
and business intercourse of a practical life; to a growing scorn of
casuistry, and to a stronger faith in the reality of right and of
abstract truth as they are revealed in every thinking man’s heart, and
the uniformity of which is reflected in the public conscience.

PROGRESS OF SANITARY SCIENCE

BY CHARLES McINTIRE, A.M., M.D.,

_Lecturer on Sanitary Science, Lafayette College, Easton, Pa._

Since blessings brighten as they take their flight, it may be difficult
to realize how much of our present happiness and comfort depend upon
the constantly abiding benefactions brought about by the progress of
Sanitary Science in the present cycle. The proper care of the body
and the prevention of disease, rather than its cure, have occupied
the minds of men from the dawn of history. Moses is the author of a
well-digested code of hygiene, and erudite scholars can find hints of
the proper conservation of health in the Egyptian papyri. Hippocrates
wrote about the prevention as well as the cure of disease; indeed,
all along the course of time the master minds of medicine attempted
the solution of many of the problems of Sanitary Science as eagerly
as they sought for the _elixir vitæ_ or for the universal solvent.
Notwithstanding all this, one can truthfully say that sanitation could
not be fairly termed Sanitary Science until its rules of procedure
began to be formulated with more or less exactness upon careful
experiment and accurately recorded observation. Sanitary science,
as such, could not begin to be until pathology (a knowledge of the
morbid processes of disease) and etiology (a study of the causation
of disease) had builded upon a scientific foundation. Before this all
deductions were from experience, and had no other reason than the
seeming helpfulness of the procedure; after this, as fast as the facts
were demonstrated, deductions were made that determined a procedure
which would of a certainty accomplish the purpose. In the olden times,
during an epidemic of a contagious disease, tar barrels were burned in
the streets,—and not without some benefit. At the present, the room,
with its contents, can be disinfected with a certainty of destroying
every atom of contagion.

This difference must be kept in mind when comparing the old with the
new, and the true reason of the great advance be recognized as due to
the spirit of scientific investigation, which began in the latter part
of the last century with the employment of instruments of precision
in research, and which has developed so wonderfully up to the present
that the experimental psychologist measures the minute portion of time
it takes to form a thought. At the same time, it must be kept in mind
that the sciences which furnish sanitary science much of its material
are progressing and, because progressing, changing; that the conditions
desired to be removed are prevailing, and the necessity of overcoming
them urgent. Not in every case has the sanitarian fully demonstrated
and laid down scientifically accurate data on which to base his method
of procedure. Hence it happens that even now sanitary empiricism must
needs be mingled with sanitary science, and the mingling is sometimes
as much of a motley as the dress of the court fool of the Middle Ages.

Since sanitary science had its origin during the present century,
it will be helpful to assign a definite period for its birth. Not
that any one would have the temerity to dogmatically assert that the
science came into being at a fixed date, but rather to fix a period
of time when the conditions working through the ages were so shaped
that, perforce, the problems of sanitation would thereafter be treated
more in a scientific and less in an empirical method than before. This
time is associated with the beginning of the reign of Queen Victoria
of England, since the first Act of Parliament for the registration of
births, marriages, and deaths was passed in 1837, and the beginning
made of accurately gathering information which is to the sanitarian
what the pulse is to the physician. With his fingers on this tell-tale
of the flow of the heart-blood of the nation, he is enabled to
determine whether disease is above or below the normal, the character
of the disease that abounds, and its whereabouts. Knowing where to find
any disease in excess, he can study the conditions and surroundings,
comparing them with other places, whether afflicted in like manner or,
more favored, free from the disease. By means of these vital statistics
he can compare year with year, and tell with a degree of exactness
heretofore impossible whether any disease is increasing or decreasing;
he can lay his returns by the side of the figures of the meteorologist
and learn if the weather has any influence on the death-rate; he can
follow the results of his efforts to improve the condition of the
people and vindicate his expenditure of the public money by pointing
to the reduced mortality rate. It may seem to be a gruesome task for
every physician in the land to send to the proper official a notice
of each death and of each patient suffering from a disease apt to be
communicated to some one else; and almost ghoulish for the officer
to sit at his desk, day after day, and catalogue and tabulate these
returns. But it is only a modern version of the old riddle of Samson,
out of the bitter came forth the sweet; for without this, much of the
progress of sanitary science would be well-nigh impossible.

The act adopted in Great Britain has been modified and improved upon
since then, and in the United States many of our cities and some of our
States have been engaged in a similar effort. As yet we have no central
bureau or collecting office for the nation; nor is this necessary, if
each State would do its duty, or, at least, the general government in
that event need only tabulate the returns of each of the States. The
effort is now making, under the auspices of the American Public Health
Association, to secure a uniform method of registration in all offices
collecting vital statistics, by which the same name will be given to
the same disease and the same facts recorded in each return made.
This will cause a little confusion at first in those offices where
statistics have been tabulated for a number of years, but the advantage
will be so great as to fully repay any inconvenience at the first. If
we desire to obtain the full benefits from the advance of sanitary
science, we must see to it that in every State there is an efficient
bureau of vital statistics, whether under the supervision of the State
Board of Health or some other department of the State. The absence
of such a bureau reflects upon the intelligence of the people or the
integrity of the law-making power.

Are there tangible results to warrant so sweeping an assertion? is a
fair question, since at the time of the preparation of the census of
1890 New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, Rhode Island, Connecticut,
New York, New Jersey, and Delaware were the only States collecting
vital statistics, and since then but Maine and Michigan have been
added. Before quoting figures, it must be premised that even now the
returns only approximate accuracy; they were much more inaccurate at
the first, and before the general registration was undertaken most
of the statements are merely estimates, after the fashion of the
geographer who gives the number of inhabitants in China, where a census
never has been taken. It may happen that the benefits are not as great
as the figures seem to show, but after making all allowance there is
great improvement.

[Illustration: LIVES SAVED BY PUBLIC-HEALTH WORK.

_Comparison of death-rates in Michigan from scarlet fever and
small-pox before and since the State Board of Health was
established, and from typhoid fever before and since its
restriction was undertaken by the State Board. (Compiled from the
State Department’s “Vital Statistics” of Michigan.)_
]

The “Encyclopædia Britannica” asserts that two centuries ago the
mortality of London was 80 per 1000, while now it is but a little over
20. In 1841, out of every 100,000 people in England, 30,000 would have
died before reaching the age of 10, and one half would have died before
they were 40 years old; in the decennium 1881–90, before 30,000 would
have died out of each 100,000 some would have lived to be 17, and some
would have lived to be 55 before one half of the number had departed
into the unknown and the hereafter.

The figures of the statistician must be quoted again and again in the
progress of the article, as no more tangible evidence can be given of
the benefits resulting from improved methods of sanitation. Very early
a coincidence was observed between the uncleanly and the death-rate.
Neighborhoods where little or no care was taken to remove the refuse,
where there were foul drains and a deficient water supply, were found
to be the abodes of special forms of disease,—so much so, that these
diseases soon received the name of “filth diseases.” Acting upon the
suggestion, the gospel of cleanliness was preached and its practice
enforced. There was a “redding up” in its eventuality as thorough as
the cleansing of Santiago de Cuba in recent days. It did not take
long to discover that decaying organic matter in some way was the
offending body, and that this contaminated the water supply. Wells were
condemned and public water supplies installed; means were sought to
enable the cleansing to be constantly carried on, and sewers for house
drainage followed or accompanied the water supply. In proportion as
this has been thoroughly done has the death-rate from certain diseases
diminished. During the last century the European armies were decimated
by fever (typhus or relapsing) to such a degree that the work of the
fell destroyer at Santiago was trifling in comparison. On into the
present century, the great scourge of Great Britain was these same two
fevers; so much so, that “the fever” meant the dread jail or typhus
fever. It was imported into this country, and epidemics of “ship fever”
were of frequent occurrence. Thus, as late as 1846, it was estimated
that in Dublin alone there were 40,000 cases of fever, with a total
in Ireland of 1,000,000 cases. There were 10,000 deaths in Liverpool,
a city especially prone to the disease; while in Edinburgh one person
out of every nine of the population was attacked, and one out of every
eight of the sick died. Turning from this account to the medical
returns of the war for the Union, there were reported only 1723 cases,
with 572 deaths, to the office of the Surgeon General, and even these
a very competent authority after careful investigation decided not to
be instances of true typhus. Or turn to civil practice: the disease
is found so seldom with us that it is not necessary to assign to it
a column along with the other diseases in publishing the mortality
returns by our health authorities. The deaths from fever in London
during October, November, and December, 1898, were but 296. London has
an estimated population of 4,504,766, and the “fever” in the report
included typhoid, simple and ill-defined forms of fever, as well as
typhus. This makes a death-rate of but 0.26 per 1000.

Had sanitary science no other trophy, its votaries could still boast
of the great benefits to humanity brought about by their labors. This
is but one of many; thus, scurvy, the great bane of the navy, is now a
disease that few physicians have the misfortune to see, or patients to
endure. Then that disease somewhat akin to typhus, and until within the
memory of the fathers confounded with it, hence called typhoid fever,
is likewise fast disappearing, more rapidly in cities than in rural
communities however. The suppression of typhoid proceeds with equal
step with the introduction of a public water supply in our towns, the
adoption of the proper means to furnish this water unpolluted, and the
proper removal of domestic waste through sewers, whose contents are
so treated as to work no harm after they escape. Notwithstanding these
great triumphs, if boasting is permissible, the sanitarian’s boast is
rather that his science, which had its beginning, as we have seen, at
the time when there was a great awakening of the national conscience
in British politics for “the larger sympathy of man with man,” has
broadened with the years of its growth; has endeavored to care for
one’s brother so that his blood would not cry up from the ground; so
that, after forty or fifty years had passed, a distinguished sanitarian
could write with literal accuracy: “Whatever can cause, or help to
cause, discomfort, pain, sickness, death, vice, or crime—and whatever
has a tendency to avert or destroy, or diminish such cases—are matters
of interest to the sanitarian; and the powers of science and the
arts, great as they are, are taxed to the uttermost to afford even an
approximate solution of the problems with which he is concerned.”[1]
And the crowning glory of the science to-day is the care it bestows
upon the weak, the ignorant, and the helpless; the efforts it makes to
ameliorate every undesirable condition of society.

[1] Dr. J. S. Billings in _Ziemssen’s Encyclopædia_.

[Illustration: MAP SHOWING “REGISTRATION STATES” NOW AVAILABLE FOR THE
MORTALITY STATISTICS OF THE TWELFTH U. S. CENSUS (1900).

NOTE.—States having immediate registration of deaths and requiring
burial permits are _black_. The only additions to the list since the
Census of 1890 are Maine (1891) and Michigan (1897).]

It would be misleading to infer that all of these benefits have been
brought about solely through the collection of vital statistics,
although much of it would have been difficult without the knowledge
furnished by these statistics. Workers in almost every branch of
pure science have contributed to the progress,—the physicist, the
meteorologist, the chemist, and by no means the least, the biologist.
Indeed, with the more recent investigations, the culture tube of the
biologist has almost revolutionized medicine and all that pertains to
it.

Sanitary science seeks to accomplish two ends; it purposes to _prevent_
disease and to _promote_ public health. If it seeks to prevent disease,
after the fashion of the oft-quoted cook-book, it must first secure the
disease, or what is essentially the same thing, know what causes it.
If the cause be known, and we can conquer the cause, we can prevent
the disease. Thus a disease known as _trichinæ spiralis_, from the
name of the parasite invading the body and causing sickness and death,
is caused by eating pork infected by the trichinæ. We can certainly
prevent trichinæ in persons by forbidding pork; but we also know
that the trichinæ do not occur in all pork, and that their presence
can be detected by the microscope. If, then, a sample from every
slaughtered pig is submitted to the microscopist, the infected pork
can be discovered. This is done in our large packing establishments,
especially for that pork which is to be exported. Again, a thorough
cooking will kill the trichinæ, even if present. Only the grossest
carelessness, consequently, can account for a case of trichinæ, and,
indeed, it is a very rarely occurring disease. This illustrates the
importance of a knowledge of the cause of the disease, to enable one
to devise a method for preventing it. In the study of disease causes,
the biologist has been very successful during the past few years, and
a number of our communicable diseases are demonstrated to be caused by
the growth and development of bacteria. From this demonstration in the
case of some, a general hypothesis has been formulated, which is useful
as a working hypothesis, but by no means safe to call a theory as yet.
This hypothesis is that all of our communicable diseases are caused by
living organisms originating in one person and conveyed to another,
where they begin to grow, to reproduce their kind and to perform their
life functions. Hence all communicating diseases are infectious. Some
of these infectious diseases, like measles or smallpox, are capable
of direct communication from one person to another, rendering them
contagious; others, like typhoid fever and cholera, are not contagious
in this sense of the word. This is a very excellent distinction to make
in the use of these much abused words.

The biologist has rendered sanitary science great service not only
in discovering the causes of certain diseases, but also by aiding
to determine the nature of the disease in any outbreak. It makes a
vast difference if a given case is one of true diphtheria or not,
or of Asiatic cholera or not, and often the symptoms alone are not
conclusive. Here the biologist comes to our aid, as is seen so often
in cases of supposed diphtheria. A portion of the throat secretion is
sent him under such precautions that no bacteria from the outside can
possibly contaminate. With this secretion he stabs or inoculates a
jelly composition which he has placed in a test-tube, stuffs a wad of
absorbent cotton in the mouth of his tube and puts it in a warm chamber
or incubator. If there are any microbes present, they will begin to
grow, and the expert biologist can tell the bacteria from its manner of
growth as readily as the gardener can distinguish between his radishes
and lettuce when they sprout in the spring, and in this way is able
to report the nature of the germs. If he is in doubt, he carries his
cultivation further and employs other tests to prove his observation.

[Illustration: LABORATORY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA.]

The biologist has also rendered great aid to sanitary science in
discovering many other species of bacteria that are helpful to man. Our
polluted waters could not be purified, our air could not be cleared
from foul odors, nor the proper decomposition of organic matters go
on, without the aid of bacteria. These little vegetable growths, while
working much harm upon humanity, contribute far more to their comfort,
well-being, and happiness than they do to their ill. Possibly no
better illustrations can be given of the value of bacteriology to
sanitary science, and the great progress it has brought about, than
to contrast a cholera outbreak of a few years ago with one occurring
more recently; or to point to the efficacy of purifying water by the
assistance of bacteria. Another disease, pulmonary consumption, may
also be noticed, but the triumph here is not so marked as yet.

The first outbreak of cholera in the United States occurred in 1832.
In one special hospital in New York city, 2030 patients were received
in the nine weeks from July 1 to September 1, and of these 850 died.
An eye-witness, who was personally known to the writer, one not given
to exaggeration, said that the state of dread and alarm had been
increasing until, when the disease first made its appearance in New
York, fully one half of the population had left the city, many of
the physicians fleeing with the rest. There was no efficient health
department, and no organized system for the protection of the public
health. This gentleman was a city missionary, and, in the performance
of his duties, visited many of the houses. He mentioned visiting one
of these on a morning when the fifteenth body had been carried out.
It was the time of the rumble of the dead cart and the indiscriminate
burial in public trenches. Contrast the horrors of this scene with the
last attempt of cholera to invade the United States, in 1893, when,
notwithstanding its presence at the quarantine station in New York
harbor, and the actual presence of a few well-authenticated cases in
the city itself, _not one of these cases proved a focus for the spread
of the disease_.

The opinion that water in some way acts as a conveyer of disease can
be generalized after a very little observation. To explain how it does
this is a problem that was attempted to be solved by the chemist. He
added vastly to our knowledge, but it was not until the biologist
showed the presence of the disease-producing bacteria in water that
a full explanation was possible. But the biologist has done more: it
has been found, and notably in the very complete series of experiments
carried on by the Massachusetts Board of Health, that even an effluent
of a sewer, if filtered through a bed of sand, is purified to such
an extent that the filtrate is a perfectly safe water to drink. The
dangerous organic matter disappears, and ninety-eight per cent of the
bacteria is removed. And it is pleasing to note, when one has so much
to say of the dangers of bacteria, that the purification is entirely
brought about by the action of bacteria working for the good of man.
A sand filter bed does not purify water properly until it has been
in operation for a few days, when the top of the bed is covered with
a slime in which the bacteria act upon the organic matter in the
water and purify it. The fact of the purification was known before
the manner in which it was done was understood; and in those cities
where the authorities have acted upon this knowledge and have purified
their water supply, the influence upon the death-rate of typhoid fever
is almost as marked as those already quoted for typhus fever, while
the scourge of cholera has been almost entirely removed from their
borders, as many an instance during the late outbreak in Europe could
illustrate. It does not contribute to our self-esteem to know that most
of the water supplies so filtered are to be found abroad. There is not
enough of “practical politics” in filter beds to charm the traditional
alderman of our cities.

It is now clearly proven that a species of bacteria is uniformly
present in pulmonary consumption. This bacillus is to be found in
the material coughed up by those who are ill with that disease. It
has considerable tenacity of life; the expectorated material can be
dried, pulverized into dust, and carried about on the wind; should the
bacteria so dried and carried find a proper soil, they can grow and
reproduce the disease. Fortunately, a combination of circumstances
is required for the contraction of this disease, or it would be far
more prevalent than it is. Notwithstanding, it already claims more
victims than any other single disease. What has sanitary science done
for its repression? It is attempting, in a tentative way, to obtain
a registration of those who are consumptives, in order to teach
them to avoid being possible sources of infection; to disinfect the
discharges carrying the bacteria, and at times the rooms occupied by
the consumptives. In Rome, for example, the services of the public
disinfectors are asked for as eagerly for the room occupied by a
consumptive as for one that had been used by a person suffering from
diphtheria. In New York city, where the department of health has been
exercising an oversight and care over the consumptives, there has been
a constantly diminishing death-rate from all tubercular diseases from
1886, when the rate was 4.42, to 1897, when it was 2.85, with the
single exception of 1894, which was lower than 1895. It is too soon to
predict the result, but the proper care of consumptives promises much
to check the ravages of the disease.

[Illustration: SAND FILTER BED.]

One of the charms connected with the great results indicated is the
simplicity of the methods employed to bring them about. While complex
schemes and elaborate machinery may be necessary whenever the amount
of service to be rendered requires organization and division of labor
to properly accomplish the desired results, the principles are such
that they can be executed in the smallest hamlet, and with the very
crudest paraphernalia. The two great weapons of the sanitarian in
fighting disease are isolation and disinfection. Dr. Henry M. Baker,
the efficient secretary of the State Board of Health of Michigan,
has for years collected and tabulated the results of the observing
and non-observing of these precautions in his State. He has a happy
faculty for graphically presenting the results. One of his diagrams is
presented here and needs no explanation. In very few of these outbreaks
could there have been any municipal disinfecting plant or isolating
hospital.

Isolation and disinfection—but the old quarantine and fumigation under
new names! Who of us has not sympathized with the traveler of the
earlier days in the Levant, when he was condemned to days and weeks of
detention in the barren lazaretto? And even at so comparatively recent
a date as the pilgrimage recorded by Mark Twain in his “Innocents
Abroad,” he states that the Italians found it more to their convenience
to fumigate travelers than to wash themselves. How very different is a
modern quarantine station, such as may be found near any of our more
important ports on the Atlantic coast. If the health officer of the
port finds a contagious disease upon board, he immediately removes the
sick to the hospital, and keeps the well under supervision long enough
to see if the disease has been communicated to any. He may keep them on
shipboard; but more likely, if the ship must be disinfected, he removes
them to the detention station, safely separated from the hospital. The
steerage has been crowded, and there is need of disinfection of their
persons and clothing. Under proper supervision, each is required to
take a bath, for which abundant facilities are furnished; and while
this is doing their clothing has been placed in the steam disinfecting
apparatus, a partial vacuum secured, superheated steam introduced,
the clothing thoroughly disinfected, a partial vacuum again produced,
whereby the contents are rapidly dried, and they are ready to be put
on again by the time the bath is completed. The luggage is treated
in the same way, while the cargo is probably treated to a sulphur
fumigation,—the sulphur being burned in furnaces and the fumes carried
to all parts of the cargo through lines of hose. In the course of a
very few days, at least, all but the sick can proceed on their journey
without any risk of conveying the disease.

Everything that has thus far been chronicled regarding the progress
of sanitary science has related to the diminution of the death-rate
and the prevention of disease. After all, is this worthy the telling?
When one learns “how the other half lives,” or, with more restricted
knowledge, realizes to a degree the intensity of the remark of a young
Hebrew, replying to a command of a police officer to clean up, as
related in “The Workers” by Professor Wykoff: “You tell us we’ve got
to keep clean,” he answered in broken English, lifting his voice to a
shout above the clatter of machines; “what time have we to keep clean,
when it’s all we can do to get bread? Don’t talk to us about disease;
it’s _bread_ we’re after, _bread_!”

Is it worthy of boasting that sanitary science is only increasing
the hardships and adding to the number of mouths to be fed, without
opening up new ways to earn one’s bread? Even if it be so decided, and
all the claims of progress thus far made be declared wanting, there
still remains much worthy of praise. Sanitary science strives not only
to prevent disease, but also to promote health, and its progress is
fully as marked in its efforts at promotion as in those of prevention,
although we do not possess the cold figures of even imperfect vital
statistics to demonstrate the proposition.

It must be kept in mind that sanitary science is wider than sanitation
in its technical sense. One would not care to assert that philanthropic
effort and sweet charity are resultants of the development of sanitary
science,—very few care to assert an evident untruth. But the influence
of this study has been widespread and beneficial. The whole round of
social science is also permeated with the truths demonstrated by the
sanitarian, and is likewise deeply indebted to its teachings. Our field
broadens greatly as we view it, just as one who has been traveling
through a vale of surpassing grandeur, because of the mountain barriers
on either side, finds himself confronted by a park whose beauty is
enhanced by its variety as well as its extent, bounded, it is true, by
the same mountains, but merely a hazy definition of the distant horizon.

In the construction of dwellings, for example, the small, low ceiled
rooms, whose earthen or stone floors were covered with rushes seldom
removed, the absorbers of whatever might fall upon the floor; the
unpaved, unswept, and unsewered street; the domestic water supply but a
well into which filters the water from the adjoining cesspool,—these
and many similar destroyers of health and comfort can no longer be
found among nations classed as enlightened in our school geographies.
Even the improvements of half a century ago—the tenements improvised
out of the deserted mansions of the well-to-do, with the additions
built on the rear of the lot to increase the density of the
population and the rent of the owner (as well as the death-rate),
are disappearing, and in their places we find dwellings capable of
furnishing air and light to all of the residents.

[Illustration: A QUARANTINE STATION.]

Then, in the matter of streets, how much more attention is now given to
small parks! When about the middle of the century interest in public
parks was revived, the efforts of the various cities were directed to
the securing of large tracts of ground and beautifying them in every
way. They were open to every one, it is true, but too often too far
removed to be of use to the submerging tenth. Now, while not adorning
these with one garland less, the effort is making to break up the
congestion of the crowded districts by breathing spaces, to the comfort
and vigor of those who must make the surrounding houses their homes.
The streets, too, no longer paved with the unsightly cobble-stones,
are made noiseless with the asphalt paving and, what is more to the
purpose, can be easily cleansed by flushing. When practical business,
and not practical politics, prevails in the municipality, there is no
opportunity for the household refuse to accumulate, although no longer
rushes are available to receive it, for it is regularly and promptly
removed.

The exigencies of trade compelled our government to establish its
bureau for the inspection of meat. The necessity of an inspection of
foodstuffs for export demonstrates the possibility of adulteration for
the home market. While, possibly, the ingenuity of the sophisticator
has more than kept pace with the keenness of the inspector, the health
of the people has been maintained, their comfort promoted, and their
resources husbanded by the inspections carried on by the various city
and state boards of health.

The welfare of the people at home, in their dwellings and at their
tables, does not limit the efforts of the sanitarian. He takes
cognizance of the daily toil, the ceaseless grind, to win one’s daily
bread. He recognizes that some callings are dangerous or annoying to
the people, and devises methods to overcome this, or failing in this,
insists that such occupations must be carried on remote from the
dwelling-place of man. Others, he finds, bring danger to those who are
employed. This may not be an inherent danger, but one acquired by our
crowding of operatives, or in other ways not securing to them proper
comfort; and factory inspectors are at work to reduce these dangers to
a minimum, and to prevent child labor as well—giving to youth, as far
as cessation from overmuch toil can give, an opportunity to develop
into physical manhood or womanhood. The sanitarian insists upon proper
ventilation in mines, and tries to devise the means to remove the
danger from those trades that ordinarily are inherently dangerous.

The sanitarian seeks to aid in the amenities and relaxations of life
as well. The playgrounds for children, the athletic grounds by the
riverside at Boston, recreation piers in New York, are examples of
this. And all of these are comparatively recent efforts, adding to the
catalogue of achievements during the century. It was the arch-enemy
who, in the poem of antiquity, said: “All that a man hath will he give
for his life.” But he made the remark after much observation, and to
Jehovah, unto whom even he would not dare to lie; and the rolling years
since the Hebrew epic was first written have only added testimony
to the truth of the assertion. In these later days, when the rule
and plummet are everywhere applied, where the scientist delves and
classifies to seek the cosmos in the apparent chaos, there was evolved
out of self-seeking for life a higher and better quest,—a search
for those things which make for the health of all. This search has
widened, until many a broad savannah has been trodden, many a mountain
scaled and wilderness explored. With its ever extending view, new
responsibilities and greater cares have been thrust upon those who are
endeavoring to rule in this domain. A community, a nation, is but a
unit. Let one part suffer, and all are in pain; let one but decay, and
rot is imminent everywhere. There can be no true social progress, no
real stability of government, no national prosperity worthy the name,
unless the environment of each individual permits the enjoyment of
personal health, if he individually observes but the ordinary care of
self. And whatever else of progress for sanitary science may be granted
or denied as belonging to our century, the crowning claim of all, which
cannot be taken from her, is that, along with the ideas embodied in
commonweal and commonwealth, she has added the other of equal dignity
and worth—Public Health.

THE CENTURY’S ARMIES AND ARMS

BY LIEUTENANT-COLONEL ARTHUR L. WAGNER,

_Assistant Adjutant General, U. S. Army_.

A true appreciation of the progress made in the arts and sciences
in the nineteenth century can be obtained only by contrasting the
conditions found at present with those existing a hundred years ago.
The difference between the sperm candle and the electric light; between
the stage-coach and the rapid-flying express train; between the flail
and the threshing machine; between the hand-loom and the machinery of
the modern woollen mill; between the cruel medical operations of five
score years ago and the skillful surgery, with the use of anæsthetics,
of the present day; or between the mail-carrier with letters in his
saddle-bags and the electric telegraph flashing news instantaneously
from continent to continent; marks the difference between the beginning
of the nineteenth and the opening of the twentieth centuries.

But there is scarcely an agency that has been employed during this
wonderful century for the improvement of the condition of man that has
not been enlisted for his destruction. Steam, electricity, chemical
knowledge, engineering skill, and mechanical invention have all been
employed in the science of war, and everything pertaining to the
organization, arms, equipment, supply, training, and even the size of
armies, has been so revolutionized that there is scarcely anything in
common between the forces that fought at Marengo and those employed in
recent wars, except the characteristic of being armed and organized
bodies of soldiers under military leadership.

The nineteenth century was born in the midst of war. All Europe was
an armed camp, and the contest between the principles of the French
Revolution and the old feudal system had taken the form of actual
strife upon the field of battle. A great alteration was taking place in
the methods of war; the old pedantic strategy of the Austrian school
had already received a rude shock at the hands of the brilliant young
Bonaparte, and the old tactical methods bequeathed by Frederick the
Great were, also, soon to be shattered by the genius of the newer and
greater warrior. To appreciate the changes that were already being made
in military methods, a brief glance at the organization of the armed
forces in the latter part of the eighteenth century is necessary. The
Prussian army, as organized by the great Frederick, was regarded as the
finest of the time. In it the most exact and machine-like methods were
observed, the most careful accuracy in marching was required, drill was
carried to mechanical perfection, volley firing was conducted with the
greatest precision, and no skirmishers were employed. In comparison
with later methods, the whole system may be characterized as exact,
methodical, and slow. Armies were supplied entirely from magazines, by
means of long and cumbrous trains, and the art of moving rapidly and
subsisting on the country was still to be discovered.

[Illustration: OLD STYLE SHRAPNEL.]

The French army produced by the Revolution, and led by such men as
Dugommier, Hoche, Moreau, and Bonaparte, was trained to operate
in column, to deploy quickly into line, and generally to act with
celerity; while the impoverished treasury of the republic compelled its
armies to live entirely upon the country in which they were operating,
as the only alternative to starvation. This entailed serious hardships
to the soldiers, and great distress to the population of the country
in which they were acting, but it marked distinctly the beginning of a
new system of supply, which contributed greatly to the rapid movement
of armies. The French army, at the beginning of the century, contained
no regiments, but was organized into demi-brigades, each of which
consisted of four battalions, each comprising ten companies, two of
which were trained to act as skirmishers. These demi-brigades, with
one or more batteries of artillery, constituted a division, to which a
small force of cavalry was generally added. In 1805 Napoleon, then the
supreme ruler of France, made important changes in the organization of
the army. The demi-brigade was replaced by the two battalion regiments,
each regiment now consisting of eight companies. Two regiments formed a
brigade, and two brigades and a regiment of light infantry constituted
a division. On the light regiment devolved the duties of skirmishers;
namely, to harass and develop the enemy before the main attack. The
divisions were grouped into larger organizations known as _corps
d’armée_, or army corps, each of which consisted of all arms of the
service, and was, in fact, a force capable of operating independently
as a small army.[2] A corps of reserve cavalry was also formed. In
numbers the cavalry was equal to one fourth, and the artillery one
eighth of the strength of the infantry. The infantry was armed with a
smooth-bore, muzzle-loading, flint-lock musket, which required some
thirty-two distinct motions in loading, and which had an effective
range of only two hundred yards, though by giving it a high elevation
it could do some damage at twice that distance. This weapon bore about
the same relation to the magazine rifle of the present day that the
old-fashioned sickle bears to the modern mowing-machine. The artillery
consisted of muzzle-loading, smooth-bore guns, which had less than
one fourth the range of the modern infantry rifle. Cavalry, being
able to form with comparative impunity within close proximity of the
opposing infantry, could sweep down upon it in a headlong charge; and
the use of the sabre on the field of battle, now so rare, was then an
almost invariable feature of every conflict. Under Napoleon the armies
continued to “live on the country,” but magazines of supplies were
carefully prepared to supplement the exhausted resources of the theatre
of war.

[2] Brigades and divisions had long existed, but the army corps
was a creation of Napoleon.

In besieging a fortified place, the first parallel or line of batteries
of the besiegers was habitually established at about six hundred yards
from the enemy’s works, a distance then at long artillery range, but
which would now be under an annihilating fire from infantry rifles. The
cannon used solid shot almost exclusively, though early in the present
century a projectile, invented by Lieutenant Shrapnel, of the British
army, and which now universally bears his name, was introduced. This
consisted of a thin cast-iron shell filled with round musket balls, the
interstices between which were filled by pouring in melted sulphur or
resin, to solidify the mass and prevent it from cracking the shell when
the piece was fired. A hole was bored through the mass of sulphur and
bullets to receive the bursting charge, which was just sufficient to
rupture the shell and release the bullets, which then moved with the
velocity that the projectile had at the moment of bursting. Shrapnel
has at all times been a destructive missile, though in its early form
it was insignificant in comparison with the “man-killing projectile”
which now bears the same designation.

[Illustration: CONGREVE ROCKET.]

In the year 1806, the Congreve rocket was added to the weapons of war.
It consisted of a case of wrought iron, filled with a composition of
nitre, charcoal, and sulphur, in such proportions as to burn more
slowly than gunpowder. The head of the rocket consisted of a solid
shot, a shell, or a shrapnel. At the base was fastened a stick, which
secured steadiness for the projectile in its flight. The range of the
rocket was scarcely more than five hundred yards, though a subsequent
improvement, which dispensed with the guide-stick and substituted three
tangential vents, increased the range very considerably. Congreve
rockets were used with effect in Europe in 1814, and against our raw
militia at Bladensburg in the same year. They seem, however, to have
depended more upon the moral effect of their hissing rush than upon any
really destructive properties, and were effective mainly against raw
troops and cavalry. The rocket is now an obsolete weapon, having made
its last appearance in war in the Austrian army in 1866.

[Illustration: U. S. RIFLE MUSKET, 1855.]

The infantry of all the armies of Continental Europe, when deployed
for battle, was formed in three ranks. On the eve of the battle of
Leipsic, Napoleon, finding himself greatly outnumbered by the allies,
ordered his infantry to deploy in two ranks, in order that his front
might approximate in length to that of the enemy. This formation had,
however, been adopted by the British some years before, and had been
used with great success against the assaulting French columns, in many
of Wellington’s battles in Spain, where the steadfast Anglo-Saxon
soldiery was able to maintain the “thin red line,” and throw the
fire of every musket against the denser formation of its foes. It
was not until the British troops encountered, upon our own soil, an
Anglo-Saxon opponent as steadfast as themselves, and better skilled
in marksmanship, that they were unable to achieve a victory over
their enemies. True, our raw militia was everywhere beaten when it
encountered the disciplined soldiers of Great Britain, but our regular
troops at Chippewa and Lundy’s Lane gallantly defeated the choice
veterans of Wellington’s campaigns; and, at New Orleans, an army
composed mainly of hardy backwoodsmen, trained in Indian lighting, and
expert in the use of the rifle, hurled back, with frightful carnage,
experienced British soldiers who had habitually triumphed over the best
veterans of the French empire.

The battle of New Orleans marked the introduction of the rifle as a
formidable arm for infantry. It was by no means a new weapon, for it
had been invented in Germany in 1498; but it had not been used to any
extent in military service, mainly because of the slowness of loading.
The capabilities of the rifle in the hands of an army of expert
marksmen were, however, made so manifest by Jackson’s great victory
that the attention of military men was turned towards the weapon which
had enabled a crude army to overwhelm the choicest troops of Europe.

[Illustration: MINIÉ BALL.]

Yet it was not until 1850 that a practically efficient military rifle
appeared. This was the invention of Captain Minié, of the French army,
and was the well-known “Minié rifle,” long familiar to troops on both
continents. The weapon was a muzzle-loader, and its projectile, the
“Minié ball,” was of a conoidal shape, as shown in the accompanying
figure. The ball being slightly smaller in diameter than the bore of
the piece, the loading was easily accomplished, and the shock of the
explosion against the cavity at the base of the bullet forced the lead
into the grooves of the bore and caused the shot to take up a rotary
motion on its axis—in other words, “to take the rifling.”

Rifles, mostly constructed on principles similar to those on which
Minié’s weapon was based, were soon in use in the armies of all great
nations. The rifle musket, “model of 1855,” adopted by the United
States, is shown in the accompanying figure.

In 1817 percussion caps were invented in the United States, but some
time elapsed before they were introduced into military use; and though
the “percussion rifle” was known in 1841, the victorious troops which
went with Scott in the brilliant campaign from Vera Cruz to the City
of Mexico, six years later, were armed with the flint-lock musket. In
1833, Colonel Colt invented the first practical revolving pistol. This
weapon, especially in its present perfected form, is so well known as
to need no description. The first pattern of Colt’s revolver used paper
cartridges and percussion caps.

In the long period of peace which Europe enjoyed after the battle
of Waterloo, but little change was made in the organization of the
armies of the great powers; and in the Crimean war (1855–56) the
composition of the English, French, and Russian armies did not differ
materially from the constitution of the forces of the same nations
in the Napoleonic wars. Marked changes had, however, been made in the
nature of the weapons; most of the English and a part of the French
infantry being armed with the rifle, though the Russian infantry,
with the exception of a few selected regiments, were still armed with
the smooth-bore musket. Though the extreme range of the rifle at this
time did not exceed eight hundred yards, and was inaccurate at half
that distance, it was, nevertheless, a formidable weapon in comparison
with the infantry musket of Napoleonic times. Rifled siege guns were
employed by the British at Sebastopol, but they were not a success,
and were soon withdrawn from the batteries. A striking indication of
the increased range of artillery was furnished at Sebastopol, when the
besiegers established their first parallel at a distance of 1300 yards
from the Russian works.

[Illustration: ARMSTRONG FIELD GUN.]

In the Italian war of 1859 rifled cannon appeared for the first time
upon the field of battle. They were employed by the French, and to
their use was largely due the victories of the French and Sardinians
over the Austrians. For many years the attention of artillerists had
been devoted to the production of serviceable rifled artillery, and as
early as 1846 an iron breech-loading rifled cannon had been invented
in France by Major Cavalli. This gun fired a shell not dissimilar in
shape to the projectile employed in the Minié rifled musket. In 1854,
experiments with a Cavalli gun gave very satisfactory results, both in
range and accuracy; but the breech mechanism seemed dangerously weak,
and the rifled guns, adopted by the French and used with such effect in
Italy, were muzzle-loaders.

In 1854 a breech-loading rifled field-piece was invented by Sir William
George Armstrong. It was made of wrought-iron bars coiled into spiral
tubes, and welded by forging. The breech was closed with a screw which
could be quickly withdrawn for loading and sponging the gun. The
projectile was made of cast-iron, thinly coated with lead, and was
(with its coating) slightly larger in diameter than the bore. The lead
coating was crushed into the grooves by the force of the powder, the
necessary rotation being thus given to the projectile. This gun gave
excellent results in range and in rapidity and accuracy of fire, but
it was not until some years after its invention that it was adopted in
the British service. Other breech-loading cannon soon appeared; but
in the United States army the 3-inch Rodman muzzle-loading rifled gun
was preferred to any breech-loader then devised, and was used with
great effect throughout the War of Secession. This gun was made by
wrapping boiler plate around an iron bar, so as to form a cylindrical
mass, the whole being brought to a welding heat in a furnace and then
passed through rollers to unite it solidly. The piece was then bored
and turned to the proper shape and dimensions. The projectiles for
rifled guns were generally coated with soft metal, or furnished with
an expanding base or cup of similar metal or _papier maché_; though in
some systems they were furnished with studs or buttons which fitted
into the grooves of the bore. In the case of the Whitworth gun, the
projectile was made nearly of the exact size and form of the bore, so
as to fit accurately into the grooves.

[Illustration: RODMAN GUN.]

Breech-loading cannon were not, however, quickly adopted, owing,
perhaps, to conservatism on the part of artillerists, and partly
because the guns first produced did not seem to give appreciably
better results in range, accuracy, or even in rapidity of fire than
the muzzle-loaders. Not only were breech-loading cannon adopted with
seeming reluctance, but rifled cannon generally were looked upon with
disfavor by many artillerists of the old school. Hohenlohe tells of an
old Prussian general of artillery who was so prejudiced against the
rifled innovation that he requested, on his death-bed, that the salute
over his grave should be fired with nothing but smooth-bore guns. It
must be confessed, however, that the 12-pound smooth-bore Napoleon gun
long held its own against the new rifled field-pieces, as many a bloody
battle in our Civil War well attested.

[Illustration: GENERAL WINFIELD SCOTT.]

In the manufacture of heavy guns the United States for some time
led the world. In 1860, General Rodman, of the Ordnance Department,
produced the first 15-inch gun ever made. This gun was made of
cast-iron, and was cast on a hollow core, cooled by a stream of water
passing through it, by which means the metal nearest the bore was
made the hardest and most dense, and the tendency towards bursting
was thus reduced to a minimum. General Rodman was also the inventor
of the hollow cake powder, which consisted of cakes perforated with
numerous small holes for the passage of the flame, thus enabling the
powder to be progressively consumed, and causing the amount of gas at
the last moments of the discharge to be greater than at the instant
of ignition. A large-grain powder, known as “mammoth powder,” was
afterwards devised by him to produce the same results. It will be seen
later that this invention has rendered possible the powerful ordnance
of the present day; and it is perhaps not too much to say, that Rodman
is really thus the father of the modern high-power guns.

At the beginning of the War of Secession the heaviest gun in the
United States was the 15-inch Rodman, the projectile of which weighed
320 lbs., the charge of powder weighing 35 lbs. Next to this was the
10-inch Columbiad, which fired a 100-lb. shell with a charge of 18
lbs. of powder. The effective range of these guns was a little less
than three miles. The heaviest mortar was of 13-inch caliber, fired a
200-lb. shell, with a charge of 20 lbs. of powder, and had a range of
4325 yards. This mortar was, like all others then in use, manipulated
by means of handspikes, and not only was much less powerful, but was
much more clumsy than the admirable mortar of the present day.

[Illustration: OLD SMOOTH-BORE MORTAR.]

The Crimean and Italian wars had foreshadowed the passing away of the
old military conditions and the dawning of a new era of warfare. But
it was in the gigantic struggle which rocked our own country for four
years that the developments of modern warfare really commenced. At the
beginning of this great conflict the ranges of 1000 to 1200 yards for
field guns, and of 1500 to 2000 yards for heavy guns, were as great
as could be secured with any degree of accuracy. The infantry rifle
with which the Union and Confederate armies were armed had an extreme
range of but 1000 yards, and a really effective range of only half that
distance. The rifle was a muzzle-loader, which required nine distinct
motions in loading besides those necessary in priming the piece with
the percussion cap then used. The tactics employed at first in all arms
of the service did not differ materially from the methods employed
in the Napoleonic wars; and a line of American infantry deployed
for battle in two ranks, shoulder to shoulder, scarcely differed in
anything but the color of its uniforms from the “thin red line” of
Wellington’s warriors. All this was to be changed; but it was not only
in the matter of arms and tactics that a revolution was to be effected,
for new forces hitherto untried were to be employed in the art of war.

The War of Secession was not only one of the most gigantic conflicts
ever waged on earth, but was one which will always be of interest to
the military student because of its remarkable developments in the
science of warfare, and one which will ever be a source of pride to
Americans because of the grim earnestness and stubborn valor displayed
by the contending armies. From first to last, more than two millions
of men were enrolled by the United States, and in the final campaign
1,100,000 men were actually bearing arms in the service of the
Union. The infantry was organized in companies of one hundred men,
ten companies forming a regiment. At first, three or four regiments
constituted a brigade, though it was afterwards formed of a greater
number when the regiments became depleted by the losses of battle.
Three brigades generally composed a division, which also habitually
included two batteries of artillery and a small detachment of cavalry
for duty as orderlies and messengers. Three or more divisions
constituted an army corps. The cavalry was formed into brigades and
divisions, which in the later years of the war were combined to form,
in each of the large armies, a corps of cavalry. It was in command of
such corps of mounted troops that Sheridan, J. E. B. Stuart, Merritt,
and Wilson achieved their great fame. The batteries first distributed
to divisions, or even brigades, were afterwards assigned to the army
corps, and all guns not thus employed were grouped into a corps of
reserve artillery.

It is a curious fact that the two factors most important in warfare
were found to be two inventions designed primarily for the interests
of peace, namely, the railroad and the electric telegraph. Steam and
electricity had both been used in the Crimean and Italian wars; but
it was in the War of Secession that they received their first great
and systematic application. The effect of the use of railroads in
war not only enables armies to be more rapidly concentrated than was
formerly the case, but renders it possible to supply them to an extent
and with a certainty that would otherwise be out of the question. The
difference between the supply of an army by wagon and by rail was
clearly shown in the siege of Paris, in 1870–71, where six trains a
day fed the whole besieging army, while it is estimated that nearly
ten thousand wagons would have been required for the same purpose.
Moreover, the force of troops necessarily detached to protect a line
of railroad communications is not nearly so great as the force that
would be necessary to guard the innumerable wagon or pack trains that
would otherwise be required. In the opinion of the best military
authorities, railroads, had they been in existence, would have enabled
Napoleon to conquer Russia, and with it the world; while, without the
aid of railroads, the successful invasion of the South by the armies of
the Union would have been an impossibility. It is only while it keeps
moving that an army can “live on the country.” It is like a swarm of
locusts, consuming everything within reach; and if it be compelled
to halt, whether for battle or from other cause, it must be supplied
from bases in the rear, or it will speedily disintegrate from hunger
alone. This fact was fully appreciated by General Sherman, when he left
Atlanta in his famous “march to the sea;” for though he expected to,
and did, live upon the country, he nevertheless took the precaution to
carry with him a wagon train containing twenty days’ rations for his
entire army.

In the War of Secession the electric telegraph first appeared on
the field of battle. The telegraph train became a prominent feature
of all our armies; and the day’s march was hardly ended before the
electric wire, rapidly established by an expert corps, connected the
headquarters of the army with those of each army corps, division,
and brigade. But it was not in its employment on the actual field of
battle that the telegraph found its most valuable military use. It
enabled generals, separated by hundreds of miles, to be in constant
communication with each other, and rendered it possible for Grant to
control from his headquarters hut at City Point the movements of the
armies of Sherman, Thomas, and Sheridan in combined operations, which
enabled each to perform, in harmony with the others, its part in the
mighty plan.

[Illustration: SPENCER CARBINE.]

It followed as naturally as day follows night that a shrewd
and intelligent people, engaged in a desperate struggle for
self-preservation, would avail themselves of all means provided by
military science for carrying out the contest in which they were
engaged. Iron-clad vessels had been devised in both England and
France, but they were merely frigates designed on the old lines and
partly covered with a sheathing of armor. With characteristic energy
and ingenuity the Americans, ignoring old traditions and seeking
the shortest road to the fulfillment of a manifest want, produced
simultaneously the Merrimac and the Monitor, the former resembling
“a gabled house submerged to the eaves,” and the latter looking like
“a Yankee cheese-box upon a raft.” These novel vessels met in their
memorable combat at Hampton Roads, and the booming of their guns
sounded the death knell of the old wooden navies.

As with war vessels, so with firearms. New conditions were met with
inventive genius and mechanical skill. Though the great mass of our
troops continued throughout the conflict to use the muzzle-loading
rifle, breech-loaders were in the hands of many thousands of our
soldiers before the close of the great contest. In 1864 the cavalry
of Sheridan and Wilson and many regiments of infantry were armed with
breech-loading carbines, which gave them a great advantage over their
opponents. The effect of the breech-loaders upon the Confederates was
unpleasantly surprising to them, and the Southern soldiers are said to
have remarked with dismal humor that “the Yankees loaded all night and
fired all day.”

The principal breech-loading arms in use in the Union armies were the
Sharps and the Spencer. In the Sharps carbine the barrel was closed
by a sliding breech-piece which moved at right angles with the axis
of the piece, the breech being opened and closed by pulling down and
raising up the trigger-guard. The Spencer carbine was a magazine
rifle, and was greatly superior to the Sharps. The magazine of the
rifle lay in the butt of the stock, and was capable of holding seven
cartridges. As the cartridge was fired and ejected another was pushed
forward into the breech by a spiral spring in the butt of the piece.
The Spencer carbine used metallic cartridges. The introduction of these
cartridges was one of the most remarkable advances in the art of war
made during the present century. The cartridge in use in 1864–65 is
shown in the accompanying figure; it consisted of a thin copper case
firmly attached to the bullet containing the powder, and having at
its base a small metallic anvil, in a cavity of which was placed the
fulminate, which was exploded by means of a firing pin, driven in by
a blow of the hammer. The advantages of the metallic cartridge can
scarcely be overestimated; it rendered obsolete the percussion cap, and
being water-proof it did away with the ever-present bugbear of damp
ammunition. The old injunction, “Put your trust in God and keep your
powder dry,” has consequently lost much of its force; for while it is
to be hoped that the soldier will continue to place his reliance upon
Providence, the latter part of the advice can now be safely ignored.

[Illustration: METALLIC CARTRIDGE OF 1864–65.]

Among the many advantages possessed by the breech-loader over the
muzzle-loader, the principal ones are greater rapidity of fire, ease
of loading in any position, diminished danger of accidents in loading,
and the impossibility of putting more than one charge in the piece at
the same time. This last advantage is by no means slight. Among 27,000
muzzle-loading muskets picked up on the battlefield of Gettysburg, at
least 24,000 were loaded. Of these about half contained two charges,
one fourth held from three to ten charges, and one musket contained
twenty-three cartridges.

The failure of the Americans to produce during the great war a
practical breech-loading field-gun is doubtless due to the fact
that the field artillery in use at that time answered fully all the
requirements then existing. Owing to the nature of the country in which
the armies were operating, the range of the 3-inch rifled gun was fully
as great as could have been desired; and on the broken and wooded
ground which generally formed our field of battle, the smooth-bore
Napoleon gun, firing shrapnel and canister, seemed to have reached
almost the acme of destructiveness. Moreover, the muzzle-loading
cannon, both rifled and smooth-bore, were served with such celerity
as to make it a matter of doubt for some years after whether the
introduction of breech-loading field-guns would materially increase
the rapidity of fire. It was not until infantry fire had greatly
increased in range and rapidity that a further improvement in field
artillery became necessary. In siege artillery, heavy rifled guns of
the Rodman and the Parrott type appeared. The Parrott gun was of cast
iron, strengthened by shrinking a coiled band of wrought iron over the
portion of the piece surrounding the charge. The famous “Swamp Angel,”
used in the siege of Charleston, was a Parrott gun. The sea-coast
artillery consisted mainly of smooth-bores of large calibre, which
were able to contend successfully with any armor then afloat. It is a
curious fact that the war, so to speak, between guns and armor has been
incessantly waged since the introduction of the latter, every advance
of armor towards the degree of invulnerability being met with the
production of a gun capable of piercing it. The sea-coast artillery of
the United States in the Civil War met fully every demand to which it
was subjected.

The War of Secession produced the first practical machine-gun,—the
Gatling,—though such guns were not used to any extent. The machine-gun
has, in fact, passed through a long period of gestation, and it is
only in recent years that it can be said to have attained its full
birth. Our great war was also noted for the introduction of torpedoes.
These peculiar weapons had, it is true, been devised may years before;
and Robert Fulton had, in the early part of the century, devoted his
inventive genius to the production of a submarine torpedo, which,
however, was never practically tested in war. It was not until the
contest of 1861–65 that torpedoes were of any practical use. The high
explosives of the present day being then unknown, these torpedoes
depended for their destructive force upon gunpowder alone. Yet crude
and insignificant though they were in comparison with the mighty
engines of destruction now known by the same name, they accomplished
great results in more than one instance. The destruction of the
Housatonic off Charleston, the sinking of the Tecumseh in Mobile Bay,
and Cushing’s daring destruction of the Albemarle, gave notice to the
world that a new and terrible engine of warfare had made its appearance.

But it was not merely by the production of new weapons that the
great American war was characterized. It marked the turning-point
in tactics as well. The first efforts of our great armies of raw
volunteers were as crude as the warfare of untrained troops always is,
and it was fortunate that we were opposed to a foe as unpracticed as
ourselves; but as the troops gained experience in war, acquired the
necessary military instruction,—in brief, learned their trade and
became regulars in all but name,—they displayed not only a steadfast
prowess, but a military skill that placed the veteran American soldier
at the head of the warriors of the world. The art of constructing
hasty intrenchments on the field of battle grew out of the quickness
of the American soldier to appreciate the necessity of providing
defensive means to neutralize, in some degree, the greatly increased
destructive effect of improved arms. In this respect he was thirteen
years in advance of the European soldier, for hasty intrenchments did
not appear in Europe until the Turco-Russian War. True, intrenchment on
the field of battle was as old as war itself; but the American armies
were the first that developed a system of quickly covering the entire
front of an army with earthworks hastily thrown up in the presence of
the enemy, and often actually under fire. Skirmishers were no longer
used merely to feel and develop the enemy; but in many of our battles,
notably in Sherman’s campaign in Georgia, the engagement was begun, and
fought to the end, by strong skirmish lines successively reinforced
from the main body, which they gradually absorbed in the course of the
action. Here, too, the American soldier was fully six years in advance
of the European warrior; for it was not until the Germans had been
warned by the terrific losses incurred in their earlier battles with
the French, in 1870, that they evolved from their own experience a
system of tactics, the essential principles of which had already been
demonstrated on the Western Continent.

The increased range of artillery again received a practical
illustration; for at the siege of Fort Pulaski the Union batteries
first opened fire at ranges varying from 1650 to 3400 yards from the
Confederate fort. At the siege of Charleston shells were thrown into
the city from a battery nearly five miles distant.

In 1866, the brief but bloody war between Austria and Prussia suddenly
raised the latter nation from a comparatively subordinate position
to the front rank of military powers. The greatness of Prussia was
born in the sackcloth and ashes of national humiliation. Forbidden by
Napoleon, after her crushing defeat in 1806–7, to maintain an army of
more than 40,000 men, her great war minister, Scharnhorst, conceived
the plan of discharging the soldiers from military service as soon as
they had received the requisite instruction, and filling their places
with recruits. In this way, though the standing army never exceeded
the stipulated number, many thousands of Prussians received military
training; and when Prussia declared war against Napoleon, after his
disastrous Russian campaign, the discharged men were called back into
the ranks, and there arose as if by magic a formidable Prussian army
of trained soldiers. The principle of universal military service, thus
called into existence in Prussia in time of war, had been continued
through fifty years of peace, and enabled Prussia, with a population
scarcely more than half as numerous as that of Austria, to place
upon the decisive field of Königgrätz a larger army than that of her
opponent.

The Prussian system, which has since been copied by all the great
military nations of Europe, is, in its essential features, as follows:
Every able-bodied man in the kingdom, upon reaching the age of
twenty years, is available for military service; and each year there
are chosen by lot sufficient recruits to maintain the army at its
authorized strength. The great body of the male population is thus
brought into military service. There are a few exceptions, such as the
only sons of indigent parents, and a small number of men who are in
excess of the force required. Any man who escapes the draft for three
successive years, and all able-bodied men exempted for any cause from
service in the regular army, are incorporated in the reserve. The term
of service in the regular army is two years for the infantry and three
for the artillery and cavalry. After being discharged from the regular
army the soldier passes into the reserve, where he serves for four
years. While in the reserve, he is called out for two field exercises
of eight weeks’ duration each, and the rest of his time is available
for his civil vocation. At the end of four years in the reserve he
passes into the Landwehr, in which he is required to participate in
only two field exercises of two weeks’ duration each. After five years
in the Landwehr proper, he passes into the second levy of the Landwehr,
where he is free from all military duty in time of peace, though still
liable to be called to arms in case of war. From the second levy of
the Landwehr he passes, at the age of thirty-nine years, into the
Landsturm, where he remains until he reaches his forty-fifth year,
when he is finally discharged from military duty. The soldier in the
Landsturm is practically free from all military duty, for that body is
never called out except in case of dire national emergency. By this
system Prussia became not only a military power but “a nation in arms,”
in the blaze of whose might the military glory of Austria and of France
successively melted away in humiliating defeat.

The careful military preparation of Prussia in time of peace was by
no means limited to measures for providing an army strong in numbers.
Every year her troops were assembled in large bodies for practice
in the manœuvres of the battlefield. This mimicry of war, at first
lightly regarded by the military leaders of the other European nations,
produced such wonderful effects in promoting the efficiency of the army
that it has since been copied in all the armies of Europe, and is now
regarded as the most important of all instruction for war.

Though breech-loading rifles were, as we have seen, used in the War of
Secession, the Prussian army was the first that ever took the field
completely armed with such weapons. The Prussian rifle was not new,
for it had been invented by a Thuringian gunsmith, named Dreyse, about
the time that the Minié rifle appeared. Dreyse’s arm was known as the
“zundnadelgewehr,” or needle-gun, and its effect in the Austro-Prussian
war was so decisive and startling as to cause muzzle-loading rifles
everywhere to be relegated to the limbo of obsolete weapons. Yet
the needle-gun was but a sorry weapon in comparison to those now in
use, and was distinctly inferior to the Spencer carbine. Its breech
mechanism was clumsy, it used a paper cartridge, it was not accurate
beyond a range of three hundred yards, and its effective range was
scarcely more than twice that distance. The German infantry fought in
three ranks, and its tactics was not equal to that employed by the
American infantry in the War of Secession. The Prussian field artillery
was the most formidable that had yet appeared, and consisted mainly
of steel breech-loading rifled guns, which were classed as 6-pounders
and 4-pounders, though the larger piece fired a shell weighing fifteen
pounds, and the smaller projectile used a shell weighing nine pounds.
In the Austrian army the infantry was armed with a muzzle-loading
rifle, and the artillery consisted entirely of muzzle-loading rifled
guns.

The exalted military prestige gained by Prussia rendered it certain
that she must soon enter the lists in a contest with France, whose
commanding position in Europe was so seriously menaced by the rise
of the new power. Foreseeing the inevitable conflict, Napoleon III.
endeavored to prepare for a serious struggle. The French infantry
was armed with the Chassepôt rifle, which had an effective range
nearly double that of the needle-gun. A machine gun, known as the
_mitrailleuse_, was also introduced into the French army. Much was
expected of these new arms; but so superior was the organization,
readiness, generalship, and tactical skill of the Prussians that the
war was a practically unbroken series of victories for Prussia and the
allied German States. Profiting by their experience in the course of
the conflict, the Prussians formed their infantry for attack in three
lines; the first consisting of skirmishers, the second of supports,
either deployed or in small columns, and the third of a reserve,
generally held in column until it came under such fire as to render
deployment necessary. The skirmishers were constantly reinforced from
the supports, and finally from the reserve as the attack progressed,
the whole force being united in a heavy line, and opening the hottest
possible fire when close enough to the enemy for the final charge.
In its essential principles this attack formation is in use at the
present day in the armies of all civilized nations. The Prussian
artillery was handled with terrible effect both in battle and siege. A
new demonstration of the increased power of artillery was given in the
siege of Paris, in which shells were thrown from the heights of Clamart
to the Panthéon, a distance of five miles.

The next European war was the contest between Russia and Turkey, in
1877. In this conflict the American system of hasty intrenchments was
used with success by the Turks, who were also armed with an American
rifle, the Peabody, which enabled them to inflict serious losses upon
the Russians at a range of a mile and a quarter. Owing to the Turkish
intrenchments and the inferiority of their own arms, the Russians won
their victories over much smaller armies only with a gruesome loss of
life. A further impetus was given to the development of the infantry
rifle, and the German tactical experience was confirmed by the Russian
General Skobeleff in the declaration that infantry can successfully
assault only in a succession of skirmish lines.

The war in Turkey was the last great European conflict. Subsequent
campaigns of the Russians in Central Asia, of the English in Egypt, the
Soudan, and India, of the Japanese in China, of the Turks in Greece,
and the Americans in Cuba, have emphasized the lessons already taught,
and demonstrated the increased power of new weapons.

Having taken a retrospective view of the military forces and weapons
employed in the wars of the nineteenth century, let us now turn
to a consideration of the armies and arms of the present day. The
adoption of the system of universal military service has increased
the size of the standing armies of the nations of Europe far beyond
the proportionate increase of their respective populations. In round
numbers, the strength of the armies of the great powers is as follows:
Russia, 869,000; Germany, 585,000; France, 618,000; Austria, 306,000;
Italy, 231,000; Great Britain, 222,000.[3] Not only are the standing
armies greater than in the early days of the century, but, owing to
the improved methods of transportation and supply, the forces now
brought upon the field of battle are vastly larger than in the days of
Napoleon. The French army at Marengo was less than 30,000 strong. At
Austerlitz it was only 70,000, which was its strength also at Waterloo.
In only two battles, Wagram and Leipsic, was Napoleon able to place
150,000 men on the field; and in the latter battle the armies of all
Europe opposed to him numbered only 280,000. In more recent times
Prussia alone placed upon the field of Königgrätz 223,000 men with
which to oppose the Austrian army of 206,000; and at Gravelotte the
great French army of 180,000 men was outnumbered by the German host
of 270,000. It is probable that in the next great European war more
than a million men will be found contending on a single battlefield.
A detailed description of the armies of all the great powers would
prove wearisome to the reader, for their points of resemblance are many
and their general characteristics are the same. The German army may
be taken as the most perfect specimen of a highly organized military
force, and a description of its organization would answer with slight
modification for the other armies of Continental Europe.

[3] These numbers give the _peace_ strength of the armies. In
time of war they can easily be quadrupled.

The infantry of the German army is organized in companies of 250 men
each. Four companies constitute a battalion, and three battalions
compose a regiment. The brigade consists of two regiments, and the
division is composed of two brigades of infantry, four batteries of
artillery, and a regiment of cavalry. The army corps consists of two
divisions, a body of corps artillery composed of twelve batteries,
a battalion of engineers, and a supply train. In round numbers, the
fighting strength of the army corps consists of 30,000 men and 120
guns. The cavalry is organized in squadrons of 150 sabres each, five
squadrons forming a regiment, only four of which are employed in
the field, the fifth remaining at the regimental depot. The cavalry
brigade consists of three regiments; and the cavalry division, which is
composed of two brigades, aggregates 3600 sabres. Thus a small part of
the cavalry force is attached to the infantry divisions, while the bulk
of it is organized into divisions composed of mounted troops alone, two
batteries of horse artillery being attached to each cavalry division.
The entire military force is divided into “armies,” each consisting of
from three to six army corps and two or more cavalry divisions. The
cavalry has about one sixth and the artillery about one seventh of the
numerical strength of the infantry. The German cavalry is armed with
sabre, carbine, and lance. The officers carry the sabre and revolver.

In the army of the United States the organization differs in many
respects from that of the German army. The infantry companies each
consist of 106 men, including officers. Twelve companies form a
regiment, and three regiments constitute a brigade. A division is
composed of three brigades, and the army corps is made up of three
divisions. The number of batteries assigned to the divisions varies,
as also the amount of corps artillery. In the army operating in Cuba,
the artillery was all in a separate organization, and was distributed
to the divisions only on the eve of battle. Experience and theory
alike suggest four batteries for each division and eight batteries for
the corps artillery. No cavalry is assigned to the divisions, but a
regiment is supposed to be assigned to each army corps. The main force
of the cavalry is grouped together into cavalry divisions. The cavalry
is organized into troops of 100 sabres, four troops forming a squadron,
and three squadrons constituting a regiment. Three regiments form a
brigade, and three brigades a division. The American cavalry brigade is
thus of the same size as a Prussian cavalry division. The cavalry is
armed with the sabre, carbine, and revolver. The lance is unknown in
the American army.

Having viewed the composition of modern armies, let us now see how they
are armed. A consideration of the powder now in use is a necessary
preface to a description of the weapons employed in the warfare of the
present day. The old fine-grained black powder familiar to every boy
who has ever handled a shotgun has passed completely out of military
use. The powders now employed usually have guncotton or nitroglycerine
and guncotton for a base. They are practically smokeless, the product
of their combustion is almost entirely gaseous, they leave no solid
residuum, and are of the quality known as “slow-burning,” giving a
constantly increasing pressure on the projectile from the moment of
ignition to the time when it leaves the muzzle of the piece. These
powders are manufactured in thin sheets or small tubes or cords, which,
for small arms, are broken up into grains. They vary in color from
light yellow to black.

[Illustration: PRISMATIC POWDER.]

Before the adoption of smokeless powder, the cake powder invented by
General Rodman had been highly developed and improved in the form of
“cocoa powder.” This was made in hexagonal prisms, each perforated
longitudinally, so as to have a hollow core. These grains were
carefully arranged in the cartridges so as to have this core continuous
from one grain to another, in order that upon ignition the combustion
would begin in the interior and produce a constantly increasing volume
of gas as the exterior surface of the grain was reached. Though the
time of combustion was too rapid to be appreciated by the ordinary
senses, it was, nevertheless, quite different from the practically
instantaneous combustion of the old small-grain powder, and was
susceptible of accurate measurement. Much difficulty was experienced in
overcoming the detonating tendencies of the smokeless powders, but at
last the requisite slow-burning properties were obtained. The smokeless
powder for large guns is made in cartridges composed of bundles of
strips or cords, or in the same prismatic form as the cocoa powder, and
the process of combustion is the same.

[Illustration: MORTAR ON REVOLVING HOIST.]

The form of the gun is dependent entirely upon the nature of the powder
used. As the pressure of the gas constantly increases with the burning
of the powder, the maximum force will be reached at the moment the
combustion is complete. The length of the bore should, therefore, be
just sufficient to enable the powder to be entirely consumed at the
exact instant the projectile leaves the muzzle of the piece. A shorter
bore would cause much of the powder to be thrown out unconsumed, while
a much greater length would retard the projectile by subjecting it
to the friction of the bore after the maximum force of the powder
had been reached. This accounts for the greatly increased length of
the modern cannon. A change in the method of gun construction has
accordingly become necessary. Guns are no longer made of cast iron, but
are “built up” of steel. The explosion of the powder is, of course,
exerted in every direction, against the bore and sides of the piece as
well as against the base of the projectile. This produces two strains;
a longitudinal strain which is exerted in the direction of the axis
of the piece, and a transverse strain which tends to burst the gun.
It is necessary, therefore, to have the piece so strong, especially
at the points of first explosion, as to counteract these strains,
and thus cause the entire force to be exerted upon the projectile in
the direction of the “least resistance.” This strength, or “initial
tension,” is obtained by shrinking cylinders of steel over the
original cylinder of the piece, each outer cylinder or jacket being a
few thousandths of an inch smaller in its interior diameter than the
outer diameter of the cylinder which it incloses, and being expanded
by heating to a sufficient degree to enable it to be slipped over the
latter. Upon cooling, the jacket exerts a constant and powerful force
of compression, which counteracts the outward pressure of the force of
explosion. The longitudinal strain is less dangerous than the other,
and is usually counteracted by an interlocking of some of the cylinders
or hoops, to which the strain is transmitted from the breech-plug. The
art of building up guns has been of slow growth, the first efforts in
this direction having been made by Sir W. G. Armstrong nearly half a
century ago. The weight of the projectile of the present 16-inch gun in
the United States service is 2370 pounds; the charge of powder weighs
1060 pounds, and the extreme range is more than 14 miles. The cost of
each shot is $450, and when we consider that this does not include the
wear and tear of the gun, it is evident that money has become more than
ever before “the sinews of war.”

Not less remarkable than the improvement in cannon is the improvement
in mortars. These mortars are very unlike the clumsy weapons of that
name manipulated by hand-spikes, which were known in our great war.
They are now mounted on a platform which turns on rollers. They are
elevated or depressed by a mechanical appliance, are loaded at the
breech, are accurately rifled, and can drop their projectiles on the
decks of hostile vessels at a range of six miles. They are placed in
groups of four, each in a separate pit, some batteries containing as
many as four groups, or sixteen mortars. In all important sea-coast
batteries both guns and mortars are so arranged as to be fired by
electricity, either singly or in volleys.

A dynamite gun has been devised by Captain Zalinsky for the purpose,
as the name implies, of throwing a projectile containing dynamite.
Attempts to fire dynamite projectiles by means of powder have thus far
failed. In the Zalinsky gun the propelling power is compressed air. The
projectile contains from fifty to sixty pounds of gelatine dynamite,
the explosion of which is terrific. Excellent results have been
obtained with Zalinsky’s gun up to a range of 2000 yards, but as this
is insignificant in comparison with the enormous range of high-power
cannon using powder as a charge, the dynamite gun is still a weapon of
limited usefulness. Although the dynamite gun has not as yet fulfilled
the desired requirements as to range, promising experiments have been
made in firing shells charged with high explosives from mortars using
charges of powder, and it is probably a question of only a short time
before means will be found for successfully firing dynamite in a
similar manner.

The great improvements in field artillery make the cannon of the early
battlefields of the century seem, in comparison, almost like harmless
toys. The modern field gun is made of steel, is rifled, loads at the
breech, and has great rapidity and accuracy of fire. The extreme range
of the 3.2-inch field gun in the United States service is about four
miles. This, in fact, is beyond the ordinary range of human vision,
and it is but rarely that the ground for so great a distance is free
from features that obstruct the view. For these reasons the fire
of field guns can seldom be utilized beyond a range of two miles.
The projectile of the 3.2-inch field gun weighs 13½ pounds, and the
charge of powder 3½ pounds. The 3.6-inch gun is a still more powerful
weapon, the weight of the projectile and charge being 20 and 4½
pounds respectively. Shells are used against inanimate objects, such
as earthworks or buildings; but the great artillery projectile for
the battlefield is shrapnel. It is now very different from the crude
projectile known by the same name in the early years of the century.
The bullets are assembled in circular layers and held in position by
“separators,” which are short cast-iron cylinders with hemispherical
cavities into which the bullets fit. The bottom separator fits by
means of lugs into recesses at the base of the shrapnel, and prevents
independent rotation of the charge of bullets. The top separator is
smooth on its upper side, and is kept firmly in place by the head
of the projectile, which screws against it. The separators prevent
movement or deformation of the bullets under shock of discharge, and
being weakened by radial cuts, increase the effect by furnishing
additional fragments of effective weight. The shrapnel for the 3.2-inch
gun contains 162 bullets one half inch in diameter and weighing 41 to
the pound. The total number of bullets and individual pieces in the
shrapnel is 201.

[Illustration: MODERN SHRAPNEL.]

The heavy sea-coast guns are now mounted either in armored turrets,
_en barbette_, or on disappearing gun-carriages. The first system is
very costly and is not generally used in the United States. The second
system, in which the guns are fired over a parapet and are constantly
exposed, is used only in rare cases. The third has been perfected in
the United States in the Buffington-Crozier and the Gordon disappearing
gun-carriages. These carriages enable the gun to be loaded in safety
under cover of the carriage pit, and then to be raised by means of
counterweights or compressed air to a position from which it can fire
over the parapet. With trained cannoneers, the gun can be raised and
fired in twenty seconds, and this brief period of exposure, especially
when smokeless powder is used, renders it almost impossible for the
enemy to locate the gun with any degree of accuracy. The shock of the
recoil, taken up by pneumatic or hydraulic cylinders, brings the piece
back, quickly but gently, to the loading position, whence it is again
raised for firing.

The siege artillery of the United States army consists of the 5-inch
gun, the 7-inch howitzer, and the 7-inch mortar. They all use shell,
and their effective range is from three to four miles.

When the enemy is sheltered behind entrenchments it is difficult to
reach him with shrapnel fired from field guns. Field mortars have
accordingly been devised for this purpose and have given excellent
results. The United States 3.6-inch field mortar is rifled, and carries
a shrapnel weighing twenty pounds. The weight of the field mortar is
only 500 pounds, and it can be easily carried in a cart drawn by a
single mule.

[Illustration: KRAG-JORGENSEN RIFLE.]

But great as the improvements have been in artillery, they are less
important than the changes effected in the infantry rifle; for upon
the quality of the infantry depends, more than upon anything else, the
efficiency of an army. There are many kinds of rifles now in use in the
different armies of the world, but in their essential principles they
are very similar. All use smokeless powder, and all are provided with
a magazine which admits of firing a number of shots without reloading.
The Springfield rifle formerly in use in the United States army has
been replaced by the Krag-Jorgensen, which has a magazine holding live
cartridges, and is provided with a cut-off which enables the piece to
be used as a single-shooter. When an emergency demands rapid fire,
the opening of the cut-off enables the cartridges in the magazine to
be fired in rapid succession. The range of the Krag-Jorgensen is 4066
yards, being practically equal to that of the Mauser, which, in the
hands of the Spaniards, inflicted casualties upon our men when they
were more than two miles from the hostile position. The difference in
the penetrating power of the Krag-Jorgensen and the Springfield is
shown in the accompanying illustration, taken from the report of the
chief of ordnance for 1893. The Springfield lead bullet was fired with
69 grains of black powder, and penetrated 3.3 inches of poorly seasoned
oak, the bullet being badly deformed. With a bullet covered with a
German silver jacket the penetration was 5.3 inches, the bullet being
again deformed. The Krag-Jorgensen used a bullet consisting of a lead
core and a cupronickeled jacket, which was fired with 37 grains of
smokeless powder. The bullet penetrated well-seasoned oak to a distance
of 24.2 inches and was taken out in perfect condition. The new rifle,
at short ranges, has an almost explosive effect and produces a shocking
wound; but at ordinary ranges the wounds inflicted by it may be almost
characterized as merciful, for the bullet makes a clean puncture, and
unless a vital organ is struck the wound heals easily and quickly. The
old expression of “forty rounds,” so familiar to veterans of the Civil
War, is now obsolete; for no soldier now thinks of going into action
with less than 150 cartridges on his person. Not only is the firing
more rapid than was formerly the case, but the lighter weight of the
cartridge enables a greater number to be carried.

[Illustration: SPRINGFIELD, CAL. 45 (LEAD BULLET).

SPRINGFIELD, CAL. 45 (GERMAN SILVER JACKET).

KRAG-JORGENSEN, CAL. 30 (NICKEL STEEL BULLET).]

From the rifle to the Gatling gun is only a step, for the latter is
essentially a collection of rifle barrels fired by machinery. It
consists of a number—generally ten—of rifle barrels grouped around,
and parallel to, a central shaft, each barrel being provided with a
lock. By turning a crank at the breech, the barrels and locks are made
to revolve together around the shaft, the locks having also a forward
and backward motion, the first of which inserts the cartridge into
the barrel and closes the breech at the time of the discharge, while
the latter extracts the cartridge after firing. Upon the gun, near
the breech, is a hopper which receives the cartridges from the feed
case. The cartridge falls from the hopper into the breech-block of
the uppermost barrel, and in the course of the first half-revolution
of the barrel it is inserted, the hammer is drawn back, and at the
lowest point of the revolution the breech is closed and the cartridge
is fired. As the barrel comes up in the second half-revolution the
cartridge shell is extracted, and when the barrel reaches the top it
receives another cartridge. The Gatling gun can be fired at the rate of
1000 to 1500 shots a minute. It generally uses the same cartridge as
the infantry rifle; but some patterns of the gun fire a projectile an
inch in diameter, and approximate closely in their effect to a field
gun. The gun is mounted either on a carriage similar to that of a
field-piece or on a tripod. Gatling guns were very successfully used by
the British in the Zulu War and in the Soudan, and by our own troops in
the battles around Santiago.

[Illustration: GATLING GUN.]

The Gardner is a lighter machine gun than the Gatling. It consists of
two parallel rifle barrels, and is operated by means of mechanism at
the breech, which, as in the case of the Gatling, is worked with a
crank. It can fire 500 shots a minute without danger of overheating,
as the breeches are enclosed in a metallic water-jacket. Its extreme
portability makes it a most valuable weapon, though its firing capacity
is not equal to that of the Gatling.

[Illustration: NORDENFELT RAPID FIRE GUN.]

There are several other types of machine guns, but the most ingenious,
and perhaps the most effective, is the Maxim automatic gun. This has
a single barrel, about two thirds of which, from the muzzle towards
the breech, is surrounded by a water-jacket into which water is
automatically injected at each discharge, thus rendering overheating
impossible. The mechanism for operating the gun is at the breech,
covering the remaining third of the barrel. All that is necessary is to
draw back the trigger to fire the first shot; the recoil of the piece
again cocks it, and the gun is then automatically fired, the process
being kept up until the cartridges in the feed-belt are all expended.
The cartridges are fed to the piece by means of belts holding 333
rounds, two or more of the belts being joined together if desired. The
Maxim gun can easily fire ten shots a second, and if every man at the
piece were killed the moment the first shot was fired the gun would
keep on until it fired at least 332 more shots.

The Gatling, Gardner, Maxim, and similar guns are known as machine
guns. Of the same general family, so to speak, are rapid-fire guns,
which are, however, distinguished from machine guns by having a larger
calibre, loading by hand, having only one barrel, and being provided
with artificial means of checking recoil and returning the piece to
the firing position. They use metallic ammunition, and have a breech
mechanism which cocks the firing pin and extracts the empty case by the
same motion which opens the breech for reloading.

Rapid-firing guns were first designed as a means of naval defense
against torpedo boats. They deliver a rapid and easily aimed fire,
and use projectiles of sufficient power to penetrate the plates of
the boats. In the naval service the gun is mounted on a spring return
carriage fixed to the vessel, so that the piece, when discharged, is
brought back to the firing position without any derangement of aim. On
land a rigid carriage is used. This carriage has a spade at the end
of the trail, which is forced into the ground by the recoil and holds
the gun and carriage in place. The principal rapid-fire guns are the
Hotchkiss, Driggs-Schroeder, Nordenfelt, Krupp, Canet, and Armstrong,
which fire from five to ten shots a minute, and use either shell or
shrapnel. Experiments are now being made in different armies with a
view to adopting rapid-fire guns for field artillery.

The principle of rapid fire, or “quick fire,” has been successfully
applied to guns having a caliber as great as six inches. The metallic
cartridge used in rapid-fire guns is, in appearance, simply a “big
brother” of the cartridge used in the infantry rifle.

Closely allied with guns, both in coast defense and in naval warfare,
are torpedoes. The crude weapons of this type, used in the War of
Secession, have been developed into formidable engines of war, before
whose destructive power the strongest vessels are helpless. For their
classification and description _see_ “The Century’s Naval Progress,”
pages 84, 85.

The destructive power of torpedoes is so well known as to give them
a great moral weight as a means of defense. The fact that the German
harbors on the Baltic were known to be protected by torpedoes saved
them from an attack by the French navy in 1870–71, and Cervera’s fleet
in the harbor of Santiago, in 1898, was safe from our squadron so long
as the mouth of the channel was closed with Spanish torpedoes.

Though necessarily brief, the foregoing sketch will show that in the
course of the nineteenth century armies have increased enormously in
size, and in the power of rapid movement and certainty of supply.
Infantry has increased in relative numbers and in importance. Extended
order fighting, in which the individuality of the soldier comes into
play, has taken the place of the old rigid shoulder-to-shoulder line
of battle. The private soldier’s vocation has risen, in many branches
of the military service, from a trade to a profession, and now, more
than ever before, is extensive training and a high order of intellect
necessary for the command of armies. Wars have become shorter, sharper,
more decisive and more terrible; and increased emphasis has been placed
upon the warning, “In time of peace prepare for war.”

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN AGRICULTURE

BY WALDO F. BROWN,

_Agricultural Editor “Cincinnati Gazette.”_

I. VICISSITUDES OF EARLY FARMING.

If the thought enters the mind of the reader that a youth (?) of
sixty-seven is not competent to write upon agricultural improvement for
the entire century, the answer is that such improvement can scarcely be
said to have begun until near the middle of the century; that the early
forties saw the writer at work on a farm; that he has ever since lived
on a farm; and that he, therefore, writes from personal experience of
the improvements which have transformed agriculture from a simple art
to a profound science.

To realize the progress agriculture has made, we must understand its
condition in the first half of the century, and the causes which
prevented improvement at that time. The soil was rich with the
accumulations of centuries, and the farmer was at no expense to either
maintain or restore fertility, for with but indifferent cultivation
large crops could be raised. When a field became impoverished, with axe
and torch a new field was soon cleared from the forest. The implements
in use were of the crudest and mostly manufactured by the nearest
blacksmith, and it cost but a few dollars to equip a farm; still they
were sufficient for the wants of the farmer of that date. So it will be
seen that the difficulty was not in the farm nor with the farmer; for
he could grow not only all that was necessary for family use, but more
than enough to supply the demand for such market as he had. Perhaps
the greatest difficulty in the way of agricultural progress was the
want of transportation facilities; for a market was of little use to
a farmer if he was separated from it by a hundred miles or more of
roads which, through almost the entire winter, were so deep with mud
that modern farmers would think them utterly impassable, with streams
unbridged and hills ungraded. The first step toward relieving the
farmer of this trouble was John Quincy Adams’ message to Congress in
1827, when he recommended the construction of the National Road, the
eastern terminus of which was to be in Maryland and the western at St.
Louis, Mo. This road was constructed within a few years. It was the
first outlet for the crops of the great West, and over it, across the
Alleghany Mountains, a procession of covered wagons passed during the
entire year, carrying the products of the farms to the Eastern markets
and bringing back manufactured goods. One other avenue was opened for
the interchange of products between these two sections, the Erie Canal
being completed in 1825, and enlarged and improved many years later.

During the thirties, just preceding the era of railroads, there was
almost a craze on the subject of canal building, and scores of miles
of canals were begun which were never completed, as with the beginning
of the fourth decade of the century the railroad idea had taken
possession of the minds of the people. In some cases the tow-path of
the canal formed the roadbed for the railroad which superseded it, and
probably more lines of canal were abandoned than were completed. The
era of railroads—that wonderful factor which was to revolutionize
farming—dates from about 1830. The first locomotive in the United
States was imported from England and placed upon the rails in 1829, and
in 1830 the first American locomotive was built. It was, however, very
near the middle of the century before the system of railroads had been
completed so as to materially improve the condition of agriculture; and
although the fact may sound strange to some, the first railroad train
ran into Chicago in 1852. During these years of depressed agriculture,
however, the population of the country was rapidly increasing.

While the railroad system of the country was developing, turnpikes were
being built radiating from the principal markets and railroad stations.
With the beginning of the second half of the century the farmers
awoke to the fact that the United States was a large and populous
nation, requiring an immense amount of supplies, and that improvements
for transportation had been furnished so that the markets were
easily accessible. Before passing, however, from the discouragements
and difficulties of agriculture in the early days, some practical
illustrations of the difficulties met with seem necessary to give a
clear understanding of the condition. What would the farmer of to-day
think were he obliged to start with a load of wheat in midwinter over
roads which crossed unbridged streams and wound over clay hills, not
a rod of which was macadamized and all of which were poorly graded,
spending ten days with a four-horse team to make a round trip of one
hundred miles with thirty-five bushels of wheat, and sell it in the
market for 35 cents a bushel? Yet such was the fact which the writer
had from the lips of a farmer who had been through this experience. Two
thoughts may occur to the reader—first, that thirty-five bushels was a
light load for a four-horse team, and, second, that hotel bills would
more than absorb the money received from such a load of wheat. But both
of these are explained by saying that one cause of the lightness of the
load was that the farmer must carry feed for his team for the entire
trip, and another, the uncertainty of the condition of the roads; for
though he might start with the roads frozen solid and possibly worn
smooth by the teams which had preceded him, he was liable on the trip
to meet with a sudden thaw which reduced the roadbed to mortar, so that
the wheels would sink almost to the axle, and in many cases the load
would be found too heavy for his team. It was no uncommon sight to see
a score of places to the mile where the fences had been torn down and
rails carried into the middle of the road to be used in prying the
wagons out of the mud when hopelessly mired. The reason the hotel bills
did not consume the proceeds of the load was that there were none; for
the farmer carried his camp kettle, bedding, and provisions with him,
and slept in the wagon during his entire trip. The same farmer referred
to, in telling his story, said that all the money spent on the ten
days’ trip was three “fips” (18¾ cents), and that, presumably, was for
three “nips” of whiskey.

An interesting personal experience in the winter of 1846–47 was in
driving hogs from Anderson, Ind., to Cincinnati, Ohio, a distance of
about 150 miles. The drove was started with the mercury at zero, and
the first difficulty met was in getting them across White River, as
there was no bridge and the stream must be forded. The hogs absolutely
refused to enter the icy water, but the pioneer of that day was equal
to any emergency. The drove was soon huddled on the bank, rails were
carried from an adjoining field, and a close pen was built around them;
then two plucky frontiersmen, with thick leggings reaching from ankle
to hips, towed them by the ears to frozen shoal water in the centre of
the river, and pushed them across the ice, when they were obliged to go
ashore on the other side. Two days later a sudden and unexpected thaw
set in, when for one hundred weary miles the drivers urged the hogs
through mud which reached from fence to fence, and which was so fluid
that not a trace was left behind, as it flowed in to fill not only the
track of the hogs but the footsteps of the drivers. When after days
of urging the hogs began to lose strength and fall by the way, they
settled down into the ooze, from which the men must lift them into
wagons which accompanied the drove or were hired from farmers along
the road. When Cincinnati was reached it seemed that the worst trouble
of the journey was over; but not so, for the climax of disaster with
this drove was reached at the slaughter-house, when for two weeks the
weather was so warm that no slaughtering could be done, and the price
of pork declined day by day, until the entire drove was finally sold
at one and three quarters cents per pound dressed weight—and during
the entire time, both on the road and in the pens, the hogs had been
losing rapidly in weight every day. This was the lowest price recalled
for hogs; but it was very common to have a glut in the market of
some staple which reduced the price so low that it scarcely paid for
transportation, and in some cases made it actually unsalable.

[Illustration: SOIL PULVERIZER.]

A neighbor relates that when he was a boy, needing some money, his
father made him the offer that he might have all the corn that he would
shell, take to mill, and market the meal in Cincinnati, forty miles
distant. He went to work with a will, prepared a two-horse load, and
reached Cincinnati with it safely, only to find the market glutted so
that he could not get an offer on it. A part of it was finally sold at
10 cents per bushel, and the remainder was taken home.

During the closing years of the fifth decade the prices of stock
were at the lowest, good dairy cows bringing from $7 to $9 per
head; yearling calves from $1 to $2; the very best horses, $40, and
stock hogs selling for $1 or $2 each. At the same time many of the
necessities of life were sold at exorbitant prices, and an examination
of an old account book shows the following figures: Salt, $4 per
barrel; nails, 6 to 8 cents per pound; calico, 12½ cents per yard;
drilling, 25 cents per yard; clocks, $40 each (the value of the best
horses!).

Some other facts must be taken into consideration to understand why
the farmers did not attempt improved methods. One was the condition
of the currency. The United States Bank, which it would seem should
have afforded security and stability to the currency, had been wrecked
by the action of Andrew Jackson in vetoing its rechartering and
withdrawing the United States funds (at that date about $43,000,000)
from it; and private banks had been established over the entire
west and south, a system of what was then known as “wild cat” banks
supplying the people with currency. The man who was trading needed to
carry in his pocket at all times a “bank detector,” to which he might
refer to ascertain how many cents on the dollar the issue of each bank
was worth.

Looking back at the condition of affairs as described, remembering how
few the markets, how easily glutted, how unstable the currency, and all
the uncertainties connected with the disposal of the farmer’s products,
what was there to stimulate him to improve his methods or increase his
products? If, as was occasionally the case, the farmer determined to
improve his stock, he must import from England or buy at high prices
from an importer, and there being no express companies to deliver his
stock, he must either go in person or trust to private individuals to
drive them over the mountains or, if small stock, to bring them in
wagons the entire distance.

He could not afford to carry on a wide correspondence, for each
individual letter cost twenty-five cents postage, if the distance
was over three hundred miles. It was not until 1845 that postage was
reduced to ten cents, and ten years later it was reduced to three cents
for letters of half an ounce.

If any one is inclined to throw the blame upon the farmers for not
having done their part to improve agriculture and bring prosperity,
he should consider the conditions under which they had lived for a
generation; the uncertain markets; the low prices of products; that
they must construct roads and bridges, build schoolhouses and churches,
clear the farms, nearly all of which were covered with heavy timber;
and the fact that all this work was done with the crudest implements.
It will be seen that the farmers had been accomplishing wonders and
were worthy of the highest praise rather than blame.

With the beginning of the last half of the century, the farmers
suddenly awoke to the fact that the conditions had become wonderfully
favorable. Towns and cities were growing up on every hand, offering
new markets. Railroads and other means of transportation were opening
to them. Inventive genius had taken up the improvement of implements
of agriculture, and, best of all, prices had advanced greatly for all
the leading products. The improvements of methods in farming, which
have not been less than those in manufacturing and other callings,
date from this time, and will be described under the following heads:
Improvements in implements; in stock; in drainage and tillage; in
the maintaining and increasing of fertility; in care and feeding of
stock; in and around the farmer’s home; and education, which includes
agricultural literature, farmer’s organizations, and schools.

II. IMPROVEMENTS IN FARM IMPLEMENTS AND MACHINERY.

[Illustration: THE COLUMBIA HARVESTER AND BINDER.]

In writing on the improvements in agriculture one can scarcely fail
to be impressed with the fact that whenever the human race comes to
the point that it must have help and make a demand upon nature, she
always honors the draft; and as the steps are portrayed by which
the agricultural products of this continent have been increased a
hundred fold, while the power of the individual worker has increased
wonderfully, and the labor has been lightened by machinery, we can see
that these inventions and improvements came just as fast as they were
needed, and no faster. God has given to the human mind such power, and
to the hands such skill, that whatever is necessary is soon provided
when the want is made known. Perhaps there is no better way in which
this can be traced than in the appliances by which the farmer feeds the
world. It is an interesting study to note the successive steps in the
improvement of implements for the work of the farm. In the beginning
of the century the sickle and flail were all that were needed to cut
and thresh the grain; and it was by a series of steps that the steam
thresher and the combined mower and binder were evolved. The sickle was
all that was needed until population increased and markets were made
accessible; then the cradle was invented. With the former, an expert
could cut an acre a day, and with the latter four or more acres; but
all the work was done by human muscle. The man using a sickle must
work with bended back all day. The cradle enabled him to work erect,
and lightened the labor; but when the “Reaper sickle” was invented
the labor was transferred to brute muscle. The first machines were
clumsy and heavy to draw, requiring as much, or more, power to cut the
grain as to cut and bind it with the light running modern binder. Now,
the man who sweltered with bended back ten or twelve hours to cut an
acre of grain with the sickle “drives his team afield,” and by simply
guiding it cuts and binds ten or fifteen acres a day, and carries the
bundles to the shock row.

[Illustration: IMPROVED THRESHER WITH BLOWER AND SELF-FEEDER.]

The improvement in threshing machinery has been as marked as in that
for harvesting the grain. In the first part of the century all the
work was done with the flail, and on farms where a large amount of
grain was grown it kept a man busy a good part of the winter to thresh
it. The first improvement was in threshing the grain by tramping it
out with horses, and with two men and four horses, under the most
favorable conditions, from fifty to one hundred bushels could be
threshed in a day. But by both these methods there was the disadvantage
that in all damp weather the work must be stopped, as the grain would
become so tough that it could not be threshed. Another disadvantage
of these methods was that it took a long time to prepare the crop for
market, and in case of a sudden rise in price the farmer could not
take advantage of it as he now can when his grain is all threshed in a
single day and held in the granary for sale. In the thirties, the first
threshing machines were put in use, and were but little improvement
over the method of tramping with horses. The machines were of small
capacity, and simply threshed the grain, but did not separate it from
the straw and chaff, both of which operations had to be done by hand;
and if the straw was to be saved, either in the barn or in a stack, it
had to be all handled with rakes and forks. The first threshing machine
that the writer ever saw was one that was called “The Traveller.” This
was followed by machines run by stationary horse-power. These were
called “chaff pilers,” from the fact that they threshed the wheat but
did not separate it from the straw or chaff. The first horse-powers
were inclined planes, or endless chain powers, as they were called,
and were run by the weight of the horses, the floor revolving under
their weight as they attempted to go up the grade. These were soon
superseded by lever powers, made at first for two or four horses, but
afterward increased in size and power until ten or twelve horses were
used; and about this time the machinery for separating the grain and
chaff was added to the machine. It almost seemed to the farmers at this
time that perfection had been reached when two or three hundred bushels
could be threshed in a day and also cleaned; but the feeding of this
large number of horses was a heavy tax upon the farmers, particularly
when a rainy day would intervene before the job was finished, and they
were obliged to keep the horses two or three days. The invention and
introduction of the mounted steam-engine not only saved the farmer
from this expense, but also increased the power and doubled the daily
capacity of the machine. For a short time the farmers were satisfied
with this; but the engine was heavy, and often the farmers’ teams
were light, and as it was the rule that each man must draw the engine
from his farm to where the next job was to be done, and often the
distance was great and the roads bad, it was not long until he tired
of this. Then came the traction engine, which not only transported
itself but also drew the thresher and separator. About this time
another difficulty arose; for now that the machine had been improved
and the power increased so that under favorable conditions a thousand
bushels could be threshed in a day, the handling of the straw became a
serious problem, for it was impossible to build it in a stack suitable
for keeping as fast as the machine would deliver it. The first step
to lighten and expedite this labor was in adding a straw carrier, a
kind of revolving platform, which was attached to the separator and
would lift the straw some twelve or fifteen feet. For a year or two
the farmers were satisfied with this help, but soon found that it was
inadequate for the work. Then the stacker was invented, a separate
machine which was backed under the straw carrier to receive the straw,
and which had, mounted on wheels, an elevator which would carry the
straw to a height of twenty-five or thirty feet; and not only could it
do this, but it was the work of a moment, with a crank at its base,
to raise it, and it could be run at any angle. When the machine first
started, the straw carrier was placed horizontally, and as the stack
grew in height, it was raised until in the finishing out of the stack
it stood at an angle of forty-five degrees or more. The straw carrier
could not only be raised, but by an ingenious arrangement of small
wheels, it could be moved from side to side by a light pressure with
one hand, or by a man on the stack pushing it with his fork. With
this admirable machine for handling the straw, it seemed as though
perfection had been reached, and that there was now practically nothing
more to be desired. But it was not long until the farmer found that
with the delivery of six tons of straw per hour it was heavy work for
six men to build the stack, and that it was the most disagreeable work
about the machine because of the dust. About 1890, some inventive
genius produced the “blower” to take the place of the stacker. This
is a long jointed tube, some sixteen or eighteen inches in diameter,
mounted at the rear of the cylinder through which the straw is forced
by compressed air which is furnished by the machine. It can be raised
or lowered, turned to the right or to the left, so as to deliver
the straw at any desired point on the stack. It is managed by a man
standing on top of the separator near the rear end, does away entirely
with any hands on the stack, and thus reduces the force about six
men. Some other improvements which have been added are the putting of
knives in the cylinder to cut the bands, thus saving one or two hands,
for often it was necessary to have a man on each side for cutting the
bands when the wheat was dry and the work was done with the greatest
rapidity. Then a revolving platform, called a self-feeder, was added in
front of the cylinder, on which platform the bundles could be thrown
from a wagon standing on each side, and be carried automatically and
dumped into the cylinder, doing away with the man who formerly fed the
bundles to the machine. To some machines an automatic weigher has been
attached, which does away with a man for measuring and keeping tally
of the wheat. Compare for a moment this modern machinery which, with
a force of twelve or fourteen men, will thresh and clean for market
from 1200 to 1600 bushels of wheat per day, with the man with the flail
laboriously pounding out ten bushels, and you will get a vivid idea
of the progress in agricultural machinery. One somewhat curious fact
must be taken into account in this, which is, that with some of these
most wonderful machines the cost of labor is about the same it formerly
was. But the advantage is that the work can be done in a few hours, and
the farmer’s crop be ready for market to take advantage of increased
prices, while by the old plan the work would reach almost through the
winter.

[Illustration: AUTOMATIC MOUNTED STACKER WITH FOLDING ATTACHMENT.]

In the cutting and handling of hay there has been as great improvement
as in any portion of the farm. A first-class mowing machine, new from
the shop, can now be bought for $40 or less, and with it the farmer can
drive to the field after supper, in the cool of the day, and in an hour
cut more grass, and do it better, than a man could with a scythe by
working hard all day.

[Illustration: DISK HARROW.]

Instead of shaking out the swaths slowly with a fork, with a single
horse hitched to a hay tedder about two acres an hour can be shaken up
and left in such shape that both sun and wind have perfect access to it
and cause it to cure rapidly.

Instead of raking the hay laboriously by hand, a steel sulky rake does
the work easily and quickly, doing more in an hour than was possible in
a day with the hand rake. On farms where the acreage of hay is large, a
self-loader attached to the rear of the wagon gathers the hay from the
windrow and delivers it on the wagon. At the barn, instead of the slow
and wearisome hand pitching, the hay fork and hay carrier deliver it in
the top of the highest barns.

[Illustration: ACME HARROW.]

The invention of the hay baler enables the farmer now to condense his
crop, so that one third of the room for storage formerly required for
hay will answer; and it also enables him to ship it to market by rail,
where formerly it was necessary that it should be taken in wagons.

While the plough has not been improved to the extent that many of
our farm implements have been, it is vastly superior to those used by
the pioneers, and modifies somewhat the adage of “Poor Richard,” who
wrote:—

“He who by the plough would thrive,
Himself must either hold or drive;”

for the modern ploughman must not only hold and drive, but drive
three horses at that, and turn as many acres in a day. Another adage
attributed to “Poor Richard” was—

“Plough deep while sluggards sleep,
And you shall have corn to sell and keep.”

But the modern farmer has learned that the depth to which he ploughs
must be governed by the nature of his soil, and that deep ploughing on
heavy clay lands, or lands with a crude subsoil, is often the cause of
short crops and permanent injury to the soil.

It is doubtful if in any line of farm implements there has been more
improvement than in that of harrows; and yet this improvement dates
back but about a quarter of a century, as previous to that time the
old “A” harrow or drag, which was hard on the team and did indifferent
work, was the only one found on most farms. More recently the cutting
and slicing harrows have been largely introduced, and many other forms
of improved harrows have been put on the market. For the preparation of
hard land for a seed bed, especially for small grain, the disk harrow
cannot be excelled.

But for garden use, or for pulverizing sod land which has not been too
much compacted, the slicing Acme harrow is the most perfect implement
in use, it being of light draft, easily transferred from field to
field, and capable of making the finest and best seed-bed.

The cultivators in use have been greatly improved. It is necessary to
describe but two of them. The two-horse cultivator with fenders, which
enables the farmer to cultivate both sides of the row at once, driving
two horses in the field instead of one, as by the old method, has more
than doubled the capacity of the individual; as by its use he is able
not only to cultivate both sides of the row at once, but to dispense
entirely with the man who, under the old rule, was obliged to follow
the cultivator and uncover the corn. This “fender” is exceedingly
simple, and the only wonder is that it took the farmer so long to
find out its value. Costing but a few cents, it has saved the farmers
millions of dollars, as previous to its adoption it was necessary to
have one man follow each one-horse plow to uncover the corn. There
are two forms of this “fender,” the simplest being a light piece of
galvanized sheet iron attached to the cultivator or plow so as to come
just between it and the row of corn; the other is in the form of a
rolling cutter, and attached in the same way. With either of these the
farmer goes into the field as soon as the young plants can be seen in
the row, drives his team astride the row, and stirs every inch of the
soil, putting a little fresh earth around each hill of corn or potatoes
without covering a single plant. As a single State grows some millions
of acres of corn, it can be seen that the saving from this little
invention to the farmers amounts to millions of dollars in a single
year.

The old idea of deep cultivation of most crops has been proven to be
wrong, and modern implements are made to cultivate the surface to a
depth of two or three inches rather than to tear up the roots of the
plants; and one of the most perfect of all implements for this purpose
is the “Planet Junior one-horse cultivator.”

Perhaps no other class of machines has relieved the farmer more than
the ones for planting the grain; and with a modern two-horse corn
planter two rows can be planted at a time in checkered rows, so that
it can be cultivated both ways and with more precision, both as to
alignment and as to the number of plants in a hill, than by the old
hand method of planting. The small grain is sown by a two-horse drill
arranged for not only the grain, but at the same time to deposit
commercial fertilizer along the rows of grain, and with a grass seed
sower attached. In the garden a hand drill is used. It is easily
adjustable to any sized seed, from that of the turnip up to beans and
peas, and the seed is perfectly distributed in straight rows, while the
garden hand cultivator does away largely with the use of the hoe.

[Illustration: DOUBLE CORN CULTIVATOR.]

One other modern implement, which promises to be very useful, is “the
weeder,” and its value rests on two facts which it required the farmer
many years to discover. The first is that the thorough pulverizing of
the surface, even to the depth of an inch, breaks the capillaries and
checks the evaporation of moisture; but to do this it is necessary that
the work be done just as soon after a rain as the land will crumble,
and since often if a drying wind blows the land gets dry in a few
hours, a machine is needed that will enable the farmer to thus stir a
large surface in a short time; and this the weeder does, as it is made
to cover the width of three rows at once, and more than two acres an
hour can be stirred with a single machine. The other fact which makes
this implement of great value is that all weeds are easily exterminated
when in embryo, and this stirring of the soil kills every one that is
starting.

One other machine which has been greatly improved is the clover huller.
Previous to its invention, most of the clover seed was sown in the
chaff, and when clean seed was required it took several days’ work with
four horses to tramp out three or four bushels, and then much of the
seed was left in the chaff.

The modern huller is equipped with the blower and self-feeder, and with
it from twenty to fifty bushels can be hulled and cleaned in a day, the
amount depending on how well filled the heads are with seed.

It is quite recently that machinery has been invented that relieves the
farmer of the hard work of planting potatoes by hand, and at the same
time does the work better than the old way, as the machine drops the
seed at a uniform distance apart and covers it perfectly. A man with
this machine will do the work of eight or ten men dropping by hand.
Several potato diggers, operated by horse power, have also come into
recent use. They greatly lighten and accelerate the work, and the cost
of growing potatoes has been reduced several cents a bushel by these
inventions.

III. IMPROVEMENT OF STOCK.

Perhaps it would be well in beginning to write on this subject to ask,
what is “pedigreed stock”? Many people have the idea that pedigreeing
is an arbitrary rule adopted by stock growers to mystify the buyer and
secure larger prices for their stock. The fact is that it is intended
as a protection to the purchaser, and is, or should be, a guarantee
that the stock has been bred along certain lines for a sufficient
period to establish the desirable qualities which it is wished to
perpetuate. A rigid censorship is exercised over the record books, and
it makes every one recording stock, in a certain sense, a detective to
see that the records are truthful and represent the animals just as
they are.

It is doubtful if along any line of farm operations there has been
greater improvement than in the breeding and care of stock; yet there
were greater difficulties to overcome in doing this than in improving
the implements. These difficulties may be classed as follows: First,
the one already alluded to in the opening chapter, to wit, the expense
of importing and the consequent high price of thoroughbred animals; and
when we recall that this was at a time when the farmers were hewing
out their homes from the forest, and could not obtain large prices
for their products, it will be seen that few farmers could afford to
improve their stock. Second, as to cattle and hogs, it was almost
impossible to breed pure stock; for all animals were allowed to run
at large, and the woods were full of “tramp males,” which would break
through the fences and invade the fields where the improved stock was
kept. Third, those engaged in breeding stock found that there was a
limit which when reached brought barrenness to high-bred animals, and
in many other cases reduced the vitality so as to invite disease.
That this evil was a real and serious one is shown from the fact that
large numbers of high-priced animals failed to produce young among
cattle, and that many herds of pedigreed swine were carried off by
epidemic diseases. Fourth, and perhaps the most serious hindrance
to improvement, was the indifference of farmers and the want of
appreciation of good stock, and of course the farmer who did not want
it would not coöperate in producing it.

The difference between the improvement of implements and stock
consisted largely in the fact that trained mechanics were responsible
for the former, and they would perfect the implements until the farmers
could not afford to do without them; while the slipshod farmer would
be satisfied with his common stock, and would fail to accept the help
of the men who were trying to improve it. Another thing which farmers
learned slowly was that good stock requires good care, which not only
means shelter and liberal feeding, but also that the food be adapted to
the wants of the animal. More fine animals were ruined by over-feeding
with corn—a heating and fattening diet—than by insufficient food and
exposure to cold and storm. It took many years to teach the farmer what
a balanced ration was, and why it was necessary.

[Illustration: MODERN CLOVER HULLER.

Showing Uncle Tom’s Stacker and Self-Feeder.]

It would be interesting to take up each separate breed of cattle and
trace its source, giving credit to the men who improved and developed
it, and the date of each importation; but the limitations of this
article forbid anything more than brief mention of the more prominent
breeds, and many which possess great merit cannot be even mentioned.
The improved cattle of the United States may be grouped under three
heads—beef, dairy, and general purpose. Of the first the Short-horn
holds, perhaps, the highest place, or certainly did for a long series
of years. These for many years were bred under the name of “Durham,”
but about a generation ago the name began to undergo a change to
Short-horn.

These animals, while especially adapted to the block, are fairly good
milkers, and some strains of them are superior dairy cows. They have
the quality of early maturity and produce a larger per cent of fine
cuts of meat than most, if not any, other breeds. These cattle were
first imported into America in 1797, and many other importations were
made during the first half of the present century.

Another breed which closely resembles the Short-horn is the Hereford.
These cattle are usually of a uniform color—a pale red—with white
face, breast, and flanks, and drooping horns. They were first
introduced by Henry Clay in 1817. Another importation was made in 1840,
but it was not until 1860 and subsequently that they were imported
largely and a “herd book” established for them. Since that time they
have multiplied largely.

[Illustration: HEREFORD COW. “LADY LAUREL.”]

The last of the three distinctly beef breeds is a hornless race
originating in Scotland, and known by the name of Aberdeen Angus,
Galloway, or Polled cattle. These cattle have the distinctive quality
of hardiness, and as they have very thick, close hair they are able
to subsist on the range without shelter better than perhaps any other
breed. The males have a remarkable prepotency, and the cross-bred
animals very rarely show horns. Like the Herefords, they are poor
milkers; for while their milk is rich, the quantity is small, and they
usually go dry for several months of the year. They were first imported
into this country about 1850, and in 1883 nine hundred were imported
and distributed among the cattle breeders of the plains. Polled cattle
are becoming more popular every year, and many farmers now dehorn the
cattle of other breeds; and the time is not far distant when horned
cattle will be the exception and not the rule.

The Channel Island group—the Jerseys, Alderneys, and
Guernseys—embraces unquestionably the best butter animals of the
world; and if we are to judge by their wide distribution and great
popularity, the Jerseys lead the list. They were first introduced into
the United States in 1820, and in 1850 large importations were made;
but it was during the decade from 1870 to 1880 that greatest interest
in the breed was awakened and large and frequent importations were
made. There has been a strong and bitter opposition to these cattle by
many farmers on account of their small size, but they have won their
way until they are more universally distributed, and are to be found
on more farms than any other breed. Remarkable yields of butter from
the individual have been recorded, many of them running from 12 to 18
pounds per week under high feeding and extra care.

While the Ayrshire possesses great merit, so few of them have been
imported into this country that it seems scarcely worth while to more
than mention them.

[Illustration: GROUP OF ABERDEEN-ANGUS CATTLE.]

Under the head of general-purpose animals come the Holsteins, Devon,
and Red Polls. All of these breeds possess fine qualities. The
Holsteins were probably not introduced into this country until the last
half of the century, and the “Holstein Herd-Book,” published in 1882,
shows that about 5000 registered animals were in this country at that
date. While fair beef cattle, the Holsteins are deep milkers, and show
a record of the largest quantity of milk of any breed in America,—some
cows giving over 12,000 pounds of milk in a year. The milk, however,
is not as rich in butter fat as that of the Jersey, but probably they
are the best breed of dairy cows for the cheese factory in the United
States.

The Devons are beautiful red cattle. They do not rank as large
milkers, but produce a superior quality of milk, and are unexcelled
in this respect by any breed but the Jersey. One peculiarity about the
breed is the comparative smallness of the cow; for while the steer will
weigh from 1400 to 1600 pounds, the cows will average only from 800 to
1000 pounds each.

[Illustration: JERSEY COW. IDA OF ST. LAMBERT.]

The importation of Red Polls from England is comparatively recent, and
they come nearer filling the idea of a general purpose animal than
any other breed in America. The first importation was made in 1873,
and consisted of only four animals. Two years later four more were
imported, and in 1882 twenty-five. Other importations soon followed.
They are of a uniformly cherry-red color, with occasionally the tip of
the tail white or a little white about the udder. Ninety per cent of
the grades are hornless. They are of large size, mature bulls weighing
from 1800 to 2200 pounds, and occasionally one will exceed 2500 pounds.
Cows weigh from 1100 to 1600 pounds, and will average 1200. That they
mature early the following weights, copied from the report of the
Smithfield Club, of England, will show:—

Steer, twenty-two and one half months old, weighed 1390 lbs.
Heifer, twenty-one and three quarters months old, weighed 1258 lbs.
Steer, twenty-three and one half months old, weighed 1500 lbs.
Steer, twenty-two months old, weighed 1336 lbs.

At the same show a mature cow was exhibited that weighed 1903 pounds.
As dairy cattle they show good records, giving an average of 5500
pounds of milk per year, and some have exceeded 500 pounds of butter in
a year, milking over 300 days.

While the United States can show as good horses as any other country
in the world, they are not as generally distributed among the farmers
as are animals of other breeds of stock. This perhaps can be accounted
for, first, from the fact that a horse must be mature, and not less
than six years old, before it can be put on the market; and that the
low price of the service—fee of grades and scrub stallions—is too
great a temptation to the farmer who is in debt and short of money.
Still, our standard has been advancing, and there is a sure but slow
bettering of the working stock of the country.

[Illustration: POLAND-CHINA HOG.]

In the draft class we have the Norman, Percheron, Clydesdale, and
Belgian, and possibly some others, while the Cleveland Bay comes as
near the general-purpose horse as any other breed. The importations
that have given us the magnificent horses which are being used in this
country have been made chiefly from France, England, Belgium, and
Germany. The blood of the English thoroughbred and of the Arab has also
contributed to the development of the qualities desired.

In no other class of stock produced in this country has the improvement
been more marked than in the swine, and while there are probably half
a score of breeds in the country, a look through the markets shows
that probably 90 per cent of them are of the three following breeds:
Poland-China (formerly called Magie), Berkshire, and Duroc or Jersey
Red; although it is quite possible that the Chester White might take
the third place. With the exception of the Berkshire, these may be
called distinctively American breeds, and even the Berkshire has been
so modified and improved as to almost lay claim to American origin. A
few other breeds are kept pure in this country, particularly the Essex,
Yorkshire, and Victorias; but they are bred to but a limited extent
and then for a special purpose. One thing that makes it easy and rapid
to improve swine is the fact that they mature so early, and that a new
cross may be made every year if desired. The writer, living in that
part of Miami Valley, in Ohio, where the Poland-China swine originated,
has seen, in a quarter of a century, these hogs change in form and
color and general characteristics, and these fixed so thoroughly that
they could be depended on to reproduce them. As this breed existed in
the fifties, they were coarse in form, mongrel in color, and slow in
maturing, requiring from eighteen months to two years to be made ready
for market. But to-day they are early maturing, can be put on the
market at six months of age, weighing from 200 to 250 pounds, and are
of uniform shape and color. They are still the leading breed throughout
the great corn belt of the United States, and the herd-books have
registered breeding stock to the number of many thousand.

The Berkshire hog was first introduced into this country in 1823, and
a second importation was made in 1832, but there was no systematic
breeding and care to preserve their purity, and grades were sold
for pure-bred until the breed fell into disrepute; but in 1865 new
importations were made of the finest animals to be found in England,
and the merits of the breed became universally known. Though called a
small breed, they are but little below the Poland-China in weight, and
grades from Berkshire males on large rangey sows will give the finest
possible hogs for the block; but these grades must not be used for
breeding, or the stock will deteriorate.

The American Chester White hog originated in Chester County,
Pennsylvania; but it is believed that there was an importation of
white hogs from England in 1818. The breed, until within less than a
quarter of a century, was coarse, large of bone, and slow of maturity,
and sometimes would attain enormous weight, nearly 1000 pounds; but in
the last quarter of a century they have been improved until they are a
close rival of the best breeds we have.

The Duroc-Jersey Red seems to be a distinctly American breed, having a
history dating back to 1824, but it is less than a half century since
they came into prominence, and the improvement made in them in that
time has put them near the front rank. One thing which caused their
rapid increase was the belief that they were proof against swine-plague
and hog-cholera, and they were boomed on that idea. But this did not
prove true, and our intelligent farmers have learned that it is not in
the breed but in the food and care that immunity from disease will be
found. These hogs are of a beautiful red color, and of good form. The
mothers are prolific and good nursers, and they mature early, making
the choicest of pig pork at an early age.

No other class of animals has been subject to so much foreign
competition or has figured to such an extent as a political factor
as the sheep, and this, for more than a generation past, has kept
the sheep industry fluctuating between a depression which destroyed
all profit and a boom which placed fictitious values on them, and
both extremes have worked harm to the industry. Yet through all these
changes, those who have recognized the intrinsic value of the sheep
and stuck to the work of improvement, have not only found the business
profitable but have prevented the deterioration of the animals which
threatened.

While swine are of no value until killed, the sheep gives two coupons
in a year, one in the fleece and the other in the increase, and the
breeder always has two distinct objects before him,—the production
of wool and mutton. The breeds of sheep are almost as dissimilar
as are horses from cattle, and some are suited for hot arid lands,
while others are adapted to the rich lowlands with their abundant
and succulent herbage. The most ancient of all breeds is the Merino;
and those who have studied this question trace its descent back in
direct line, probably, to the flocks of the patriarchs. For ages they
have been the clothers of mankind, first with the skin and later
with the fleece, and still they maintain a high, if not first, place
among different breeds. They have been wonderfully improved, but the
improvement has been along the line of increasing the value of the
fleece rather than the carcass, and it has been changed from an animal
that would produce two or three pounds of wool, and one which had bare
belly and legs, to one which produces a fleece from the hoofs to very
near the nose. It is within bounds to say the weight of the fleece has
been doubled.

With the long-wool breeds the improvement has been designed to develop
the carcass and mutton qualities rather than the wool, and of these the
two typical breeds are the Shropshire and Cotswold. Probably the best
mutton lambs that are produced in this country are from the Shropshire
rams and Merino ewes. The representative Cotswold is of majestic port
and large size. The wool is curly, long, and lustrous; not dry and
harsh to the touch, and has but a slight amount of yolk; at maturity it
ought to be eight inches long. The fleece averages six or seven pounds.

IV. IMPROVEMENT IN FARMING METHODS.

[Illustration: MERINO SHEEP.]

The improvement of methods on the farm has been discussed to some
extent in speaking of implements and stock, as their use involves
better methods; but there are other points worthy of notice. One
of the most important of these is drainage. The first attempts to
remove surface water from farm-land were by the construction of open
ditches; but as these had to follow the natural water-courses which
often zigzagged through the fields, they were objectionable, not only
because of making bad shaped lands to plow and cultivate, but also
because they caused a waste of land, and usually had to be bridged to
be crossed with the wagons. Other objections to them were that they
produced crops of weeds to give trouble in the fields, and there was
a constant tendency to fill up, which soon impaired their usefulness;
or, if kept cleaned out, it had to be done at heavy expense. The first
attempt at underdrains, or “blind ditches,” as they were called, was by
making an underground water-way with stone or timber; but both these
materials were found objectionable, because such drains were easily
damaged by the action of craw-fish and rarely continued to do good work
for more than a few years. It was after the middle of the century that
drain tiles made of burnt clay were introduced, resembling good hard
brick in material; but the first drains laid were usually with tiles
of too small caliber, two-inch being largely used, which were not only
easily choked but failed to carry the water off rapidly enough in a
wet time. Large sections of many of our States were originally swampy
and so nearly level as to make it necessary to construct open ditches,
almost like canals, as an outlet for the water flowing into them from
the drains. These could not, of course, be constructed by individuals,
as no man had a right to go on his neighbor’s land to open a ditch for
this purpose; so, in many cases, this was made a matter of legislation,
and the large open ditches were built by taxation equitably levied on
the lands. By this means the farmers were enabled to thoroughly drain
large areas of country which otherwise would have been nearly worthless
for agricultural purposes. In some instances the earth taken from these
large ditches was graded up several feet high at the side, and on the
top of this levee a turnpike road was constructed, thus giving a double
benefit from a single operation. The first draining of farms was in the
wet spots where, usually, a single line of tiles, laid for a moderate
distance, would bring the parts of the field under cultivation that
otherwise would be waste; but gradually the farmers learned that there
were other valuable effects from drainage, and that most heavy clay
lands would be benefited by it sufficiently to justify the expense.
The following incidental advantages have been learned: first, drainage
deepens the soil; second, it prevents the killing out of grass and
grains during a wet season; third, it makes the land warmer; fourth,
it improves the texture of the soil and makes it possible to work and
plant it earlier in the spring; fifth, it prevents washing and waste
of manure; sixth, it often prevents failure of crops in excessively
wet seasons, and enables them to endure drought better in dry seasons.
Although drainage is expensive it is a permanent improvement, and in
many cases the increase of the wheat crop in a single year has defrayed
the expense of tilling the land.

Another improvement, which seems to be the opposite of this, is the
irrigation of arid lands in those parts of the country where the
annual rainfall is small and every summer brings a drought. In these
cases, water stored in large natural or artificial reservoirs, or that
furnished by snow melting on the mountains, is utilized to carry the
crops through the dry season and to enable the farmer to grow large
crops where nothing could be produced without this aid.

[Illustration: DOUBLE CORN PLANTER.]

Perhaps in no other line have the methods changed for the better more
than in the care of domestic animals, and this includes both shelter
and feeding. In the first half of the century, cattle and hogs were
usually exposed to the severe weather of the winter with no other
shelter than that afforded by a straw-stack, and this often was found
leveled to the ground by the first of March, leaving them entirely
without shelter at that changeable season of the year. They were
allowed at all seasons to roam over the farm and gather their own
living, and were turned into the cornfields as soon as the ears were
removed, where they lived well as long as the stalk pasture lasted,
after which they depended on straw for food until spring; and it was
common to have the cattle so poor, as spring approached, that many
died of actual starvation, while others became so feeble that they
would have to be lifted to help them on their feet. Then the stables
for horses were constructed apparently with the idea that ventilation
was the chief thing, and the horses stood and shivered in their stalls
from the drafts that blew through the sides of the barn and up through
the floors of their stalls. Gradually these things have changed, until
the larger part of farm stock is warmly sheltered, and well fed with a
variety of food. Succulent food is now largely furnished from ensilage
preserved in silos, from beets and other roots grown and stored for
winter use, and, more recently, from sorghum, which has been found to
retain its succulence and sweetness during the entire winter. Farmers
have learned what is meant by a balanced ration, which is a combination
of foods that will give the proper proportion of heat and fat producers
with those which make bone and muscle, and that it means both health
and economy to substitute to a certain extent bran and oil meal for
corn, and clover hay for hay made from the grasses, and straw.

[Illustration: HAND GARDEN PLOW.]

Another great improvement has been along the line of fencing; and, in
this respect, the most economical step of all has been in reducing the
amount of division fence on the farm, keeping only a portion of it
divided into fields for pasture, and leaving half or more of the best
parts to be cultivated in a single inclosure on which stock is never
turned. In most States, laws have been passed obliging each farmer
to fence in his own stock, and no one is compelled to fence out his
neighbor’s. The substitution of wire for wood as a fencing material has
reduced the cost of fence construction about one half, and the waste of
land occupied by fences is reduced in about the same proportion.

V. IMPROVEMENT IN AND AROUND THE HOME.

The change in this direction in a single generation has been most
marked, and is one of the surest signs of prosperity. The log cabin has
given place to a substantial and, in many cases, an elegant home. The
irregular and ill-shaped yards, fenced with rails, which surrounded
both house and barn, and in which hogs and cattle were kept, with
no shelter but a rail pen with straw roof, have disappeared, and
rectangular lots enclosed with neat fences and good barns and piggeries
have taken their place. The wood-pile has retired from the front yard,
and is now sheltered in a woodshed adjoining the kitchen; and a neat
lawn with flowers and shrubbery is no longer the exception, but the
rule. A good garden, in which the newer and improved vegetables have
taken the place of the old sorts, and a berry patch, well cared for,
afford the luxuries which they alone can give for a period of many
weeks each season. The water is no longer carried from a remote spring,
but good wells and cisterns are placed conveniently, many of them so
that the pump is in the kitchen or under a porch attached to the house.
The cellar is usually floored with cement, and the stairs leading to
it are of easy grade; while good walks of plank or cement make it a
pleasure to pass from the house to the surrounding outbuildings.

Another line in which very great improvement is shown is in maintaining
the fertility of the soil. The old method was to exhaust the fertility
of a field and then clear a new one; and it is doubtful if one farmer
in a hundred could have answered the question, “Why does land become
sterile after long cultivation?” for they had no conception of what
the chemical elements of the soil were which are necessary to its
fertility. There are two theories of fertilizing and fertility: one,
that the soil is a mine to be worked out, and which will inevitably
become unproductive in the process; the other, that it is a laboratory
in which, under the intelligent management of man, forces can be set at
work which will maintain and develop a perpetual fertility. Malthus,
more than a century ago, announced that the time would come before long
when the people of the earth would starve because they had outgrown
the fertility of the soil and its productive capacity; but after long
cultivation, we find it possible to produce on less than half the
cultivatable land enough not only to feed our own nation, but the
world at large, and there is no questioning the accurateness of the
laboratory theory as opposed to the mine theory.

The first improvement along this line was in the better saving and
utilizing of animal manures; but when it was found that these were
insufficient, science came to the help of the farmer. The chemist
analyzed both crop and soils, ascertaining what was needed, and then
the world was searched for the materials necessary. The elements which
formed our plants were found to be fifteen in number, but of these
it was found that it was necessary to furnish only three,—nitrogen,
phosphoric acid, and potash. Nitrogen was known to exist in
inexhaustible quantities in the atmosphere, forming seventy-six per
cent of its composition; but the question was long unsolved: “Can
growing plants appropriate atmospheric nitrogen?” Finally, it was
discovered that plants of the Leguminosæ family—of which clover
is the best type and of greatest value for this purpose to the
farmer—could appropriate nitrogen from the atmosphere; and after
careful research, with the aid of the microscope, it was discovered
that this appropriation came about through the agency of bacteria
in the roots. This fact connected with the clover plant is one of
immense importance to the farmer, because nitrogen is not only the most
expensive element of fertility to purchase, but is likely to be lost
both through evaporation and leaching. So it can be seen that clover is
one of the most valuable plants which can be grown on the farm, for
the reason that the crop can be utilized as food for stock, while still
great benefit inures to the soil, as the fertility is largely stored in
the roots, which cannot be used for any other purpose, and as by the
action of these roots the mechanical condition of the soil is greatly
improved. Further, the dense shade the plant affords induces chemical
action in the soil, which makes plant food available that would
otherwise remain inert. One of the most wonderful things connected with
fertility is that God has so locked it up in the earth that no greedy
generation can exhaust it, and that the greatest source of fertility is
the atmosphere, whose secrets are just being discovered.

An English scientist has recently announced that by the aid of
electricity, furnished by cheap water-power, nitrates can be
manufactured directly from the atmosphere so as to reduce their cost
to less than one fourth what it has heretofore been. Again, the
intelligent use of clover will enable the farmer to produce his own
nitrogen and reduce the cost of chemical fertilizers to one half what
it usually is when containing nitrogen. This brings us to the question
of commercial fertilizers. With the single exception of guano, they are
a product of the last third of the century. The first step toward the
use of commercial fertilizers was by analyzing our barnyard manures.
When the chemist discovered that a ton or more which the farmer drew
out laboriously with two horses to the field contained but twenty
or thirty pounds of actual plant food,—the remainder being water,
sand, and other dead matter,—the next step was to combine the three
elements essential to a perfect fertilizer in such proportions that a
single sack would hold enough manure for an acre of ground; and in tens
of thousands of cases, the application of this amount of fertilizer
has increased the wheat crop from five to fifteen bushels per acre,
doubling the grass crop which followed, which in turn, and through
the influence of the fertilizer, formed a sward which, by its decay,
fertilized a third crop when it was turned under in the rotation.

The element in fertilizers of next importance to nitrogen is phosphoric
acid, and the first source from which this was obtained was the bones
of animals. But the supply from animals slaughtered was entirely
insufficient; and so the great plains of the West were gleaned, and
tens of thousands of tons of buffalo bones were gathered and shipped
East to fertilize our farms. But soon this source began to wane; then
two other sources, practically inexhaustible, of this indispensable
element were discovered,—the phosphate rocks of the South and the
iron slag from furnaces, each of which is found to contain a large per
cent of phosphoric acid; and when the rock is dissolved by acids and
the slag ground to an impalpable powder by machinery, the fertilizing
elements in both are found to be as available and valuable as that from
bones. The supply of potash was obtained at first from wood ashes,
which the clearing of the farms and the universal use of wood as fuel
made abundant. But later, when these sources were no longer sufficient,
potash salts were found in large quantities where they could be mined
from the earth, so that now there seems to be in sight an inexhaustible
supply of the elements needed for plant food. Like almost every reform,
the use of commercial fertilizers was opposed bitterly by many farmers,
and statements were made by them that their effects on the soil were
like those of whiskey or other stimulants on the body, and that the
ultimate result of their use would be that the soil would become
barren. Many refused, to use them at all; others, after a single trial
made without intelligence, denounced them as humbugs. But as they
saw on the farms of their neighbors the wonderful results from their
use, they have been gradually led to adopt them, until now, with most
farmers, the question no longer is, “Can I afford to use commercial
fertilizers?” but rather, “Can I afford to do without them?”

VI. IMPROVEMENT IN AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION.

To one who has followed the writer to this point, it must be apparent
that the farmer of to-day has made progress in the knowledge of
his calling to at least as great an extent as he has improved in
his methods, and that the terms “farm drudge” and “clodhopper” are
misapplied and should be obsolete. There is no other industrial calling
in which one touches nature and science at so many points, or which
gives such good opportunities to develop the perfect man,—“the sound
mind in the sound body,”—as that of the farmer. Admitting that not
all farmers understand this and live up to their privileges, does not
alter the fact that the farm offers a great opportunity to develop and
broaden the mind; that the last quarter of the century has brought into
active operation forces which have touched and influenced a large per
cent of the tillers of the soil; and that the leaven of education is
working mightily. The intelligent, studious farmer becomes a practical
botanist as he studies the growth and habits of plants. As he is
dependent more than any other man upon the weather and must change
his plans frequently to correspond with climatic changes, he becomes
a meteorologist. Myriads of insects, which include both enemies and
friends, make him a student of entomology; and the wonderful alchemy
of the soil by which offensive and poisonous matters are transmuted
into golden grain, luscious fruits, vegetables, and flowers, calls for
a knowledge of chemistry. The use of modern machinery develops his
mechanical powers; and the man on the farm develops in more directions
and has an opportunity to acquire a broader education than any other
man who earns his living by his own labor. To sustain this statement,
it is only necessary to enumerate the educational opportunities and
privileges now open to the farmer and which are, to a great extent,
utilized by him. First, what the government is doing for him. No
other calling is represented in the cabinet of the President, and
time and experience have demonstrated the wisdom of a Secretary of
Agriculture. Not only are we distinctively an agricultural people,
but the prosperity of the nation depends on the intelligence and
prosperity of the farmer more than on all other classes combined. Not
only must the food supply of our people be furnished, but the foreign
demand must be met; and this gives to the farmers money to spend, so
that the industries which contribute to their wants shall share in the
general prosperity. While there are many honorable and useful callings,
agriculture seems to be the only one which touches and affects all
others. The financial importance of agriculture is shown by the fact
that, after the wants of the nation were supplied, in the year 1897 we
exported in round numbers $690,000,000 worth of agricultural products,
or nearly 67 per cent of the entire exports; and notwithstanding an
enormous increase of imports of wool and sugar, in anticipation of
increased duties, the balance of trade on agricultural products for
the year was $289,000,000, and the export of agricultural products for
the current fiscal year would show still larger figures.

Considering the specific educational influences which are elevating
the farmer and his calling, we enumerate the following: Agricultural
literature, farmers’ organizations,—including farmers’ clubs, farmers’
institutes, and the Grange,—agricultural experiment stations, and
agricultural colleges, all of which have contributed their share to the
intelligence and prosperity of the farmer, and all are products of the
last half of the century. To give an intelligent idea of the help which
these influences have brought to the farmer, it is necessary to treat
them to some extent in detail. First, agricultural literature. All that
is necessary to an understanding of the progress in this direction is
to get one of the very few so-called agricultural papers of fifty years
ago and compare it with those of to-day. Not only have they multiplied
a hundredfold, but while the former largely contained stilted
articles written by theorists, to-day every page is full of practical
instruction written by farmers, and often by specialists who have spent
years in improving some line of farming or stock breeding. Most of
our agricultural papers have a staff of paid contributors, nearly all
of whom have made a success in some branch of farming; and so anxious
are the publishers of these papers to give their readers all the help
possible, that they search out the men who are prospering on the
farm and engage their services as instructors for their readers. The
journals devoted to agriculture are numbered by hundreds, some of them
devoted to a single line,—such as sheep, poultry, or gardening,—and
others with well classified departments which give instruction on all
points. In addition to this, nearly all of the weeklies have a page of
agriculture, usually conducted by a farmer or some one with practical
knowledge of farm work. There are no secrets in agriculture, and every
farmer is ready to impart to all any valuable information he acquires.
Farmers appreciate the value of these helps and make large use of them,
and the circulation of these papers is enormous.

[Illustration: SUCCESS ANTI-CLOG WEEDER.]

By Farmers’ Clubs we mean those organizations of farmers, governed by
constitutions and by-laws, who meet at stated times for the discussion
of topics connected with the improvement of their calling. There are
no statistics available from which can be gathered the extent of
this movement, but Ohio reports fifty clubs and has formed a state
organization. In Michigan, where the clubs are organized on a different
basis, 30,000 members are reported; they have also formed a state
organization, which was attended by 200 delegates at the last meeting.
Indiana is but little, if any, behind these two States, and the club
idea is rapidly spreading through the Northern States. There are two
forms of these clubs, one of which limits the membership to twelve
families, and the meetings are all held at the homes of the members,
one each month. The advantages of this plan are several. First,
with the club thus limited, the horses can be stabled and cared for
during inclement weather of winter. Second, the wives need prepare
but one meal in the year for the club; while with the large club it
is necessary that each should contribute to a basket dinner for every
meeting, which often causes as much trouble as to prepare the meal for
the entire club once a year. Third, the attendance is sure to be more
regular in the small club, and one condition of membership is that
every member shall be present at each meeting unless providentially
detained. Fourth, with a club of this size every member can take part
in the discussion, and there will be less danger of a few “talkers”
monopolizing the time. Fifth, the social features in the small club
are very much better than in the large. Most of the clubs in Ohio and
Indiana are organized on this basis, while in Michigan it is probable
that most of the clubs have an unlimited membership. The objection is
sometimes urged that the small club seems selfish, but as any twelve or
even six families are at liberty to organize a club this objection is
not valid.

As many farmers who would like to organize may not be able to find a
form of constitution and by-laws, it seems proper to give one here.

_Preamble._

Recognizing the fact that farmers need an opportunity to
compare methods and to cultivate their social qualities, and
considering that “As iron sharpeneth iron, so a man sharpeneth
the countenance of his friend,” in order that we may be mutually
helpful to each other in matters relating to husbandry, home
comfort, and economy, we do form ourselves into an association
known as the —— Farmers’ Club [fill the blank with the name
you wish to use for your club], and adopt for our government the
following:—

_Constitution._

_Article 1._ The officers shall be President, Vice-President,
Secretary, Treasurer, and Librarian, who shall be elected
annually in November, and assume their duties in January of the
following year.

_Article 2._ The duties of these officers shall be such as
pertain to the offices in other organizations and are indicated
by the name of the office.

_Article 3._ The active members of this club shall be engaged in
agricultural pursuits, but honorary members may be elected by
unanimous vote. Honorary members are not obliged to attend all
the meetings, but will be welcomed to any.

_Article 4._ Application for membership must be submitted at the
meeting previous to their being balloted for, and members will
be admitted on receiving a two-thirds vote by ballot; but the
membership shall be limited to twelve families.

_Article 5._ Amendments may be made at any regular meeting by a
two-thirds vote of the active members.

_By-laws._

1. The club shall meet at the residence of one of the members on
the third Thursday of each month, at ten o’clock, invitations to
which shall be limited to the hostess of the day.

2. The club shall be called to order by the president, after an
hour spent in social intercourse, and the order of exercises
shall be as follows:—

_a._ Reading and approving minutes of last meeting.

_b._ Monthly record of current events.

_c._ Selections, recitations, essays.

_d._ Adjournment for dinner and social intercourse until two
o’clock.

_e._ Discussion; so conducted as to avoid all questions of
politics and theology.

_f._ Question drawer.

_g._ Miscellaneous business.

In order that the work of the club may be systematic and the
time fully occupied, a programme covering the entire year is
prepared and printed so as to be ready for distribution at the
December meeting of each year. That the reader may understand the
working of this plan, a few topics will be given, taken from the
programme of the club of which the writer is a member:—

January.

The club will meet at the home of Mr. ........

Thursday, the 19th.

Selection ....................... Mrs. ........

Paper ........................... Mr. .........

_Topic_: A review of the previous year.

Each member will give in writing a statement of profits and
losses for the year under the following heads:—

1. General crops grown and acreage and yield thereof.
2. What special crops have been raised.
3. Stock raised or handled.
4. What experiments have been made on the farm.
5. What losses of stock, or crops, and the cause thereof.

June.

The club will meet at the home of Mr. ........

Thursday, the 15th.

Selection ...................... Mrs. ........

Paper: “Hindrances to sheep raising and how to avoid them.”
Mr. .........

_Topic_: The Farmer’s Barn.

1. Relative size to farm.
2. Location and ground plan.
3. Arrangement of stabling, feeding, and water conveniences.
4. Plan for saving manure.

Either a gentleman or a lady is appointed to open each topic, after
which the subject is opened for question or discussion by any member
of the club. During one month of the summer, usually July or August, a
picnic takes the place of the regular meeting, at which a basket dinner
is served.

Farmers’ institutes are, in the best sense of the word, a farmers’
school, and while it is less than twenty years since their first
organization, nearly all of the States, at least in the North, are
conducting them to a greater or less extent. As Ohio claims the honor
of inaugurating this movement, and the writer is more familiar with the
plan of organization and the work of institutes in that State than any
other, some facts concerning them will be given. The first attempt to
teach the farmers by lecture courses was made late in the seventies at
the Ohio State Agricultural College, when a course of eighty lectures
on subjects connected with farm interests were given, all of them by
professors of the college. This first course occupied five weeks; and
as it was found that but a limited number of farmers could be induced
to leave their homes and care of their stock in the winter, and that
the attendance was only about forty, the next two years the course was
shortened in hopes that a larger attendance might result, but such was
not the case. Then some one suggested, “If the farmers will not come
to the lectures, why not take the lectures to the farmers?” and the
outcome of this suggestion has been a wonderful success; the State
holding three hundred institutes in the winter of 1897 and 1898, under
a law providing a fund for that purpose, and over a hundred independent
institutes in addition, by which is meant institutes in which the local
organization pays its own expenses and chooses its own lecturers and
subjects.

The work in most of our States is thoroughly organized, a fund provided
to meet the expenses of the work, placed in some States under the
charge of the Secretary of Agriculture, and in others in charge of a
superintendent of institutes. The farmers have met this effort for
their improvement with great enthusiasm, and the attendance is usually
limited by the size of the hall provided. All partisan and sectarian
questions are rigorously excluded from the discussions. A bulletin is
issued in the fall, which gives the names of a large corps of lecturers
and a list of subjects, and these are sent to the officers of the local
organizations, from which they can select such topics as they wish
discussed. Half of the time of each session is allotted to the state
lecturers, while local talent is expected to fill the other half. The
greatest possible freedom is allowed in asking questions and discussing
the work of the speakers, and no other educational influence which has
come to the farmer has equaled that offered by these meetings. At the
close of each year the best papers and discussions are printed in a
bulletin for free distribution among the farmers, and are given out
at the meeting the ensuing year, or are mailed from the office of the
Secretary of the State Board of Agriculture on application.

The Grange was organized at Washington, D. C., in 1807, but existed
only on paper until January, 1873, when the first meeting of the
National Grange convened at Georgetown, D. C., with delegates from ten
States. It was started as a secret society, with a ritual and degrees,
and seemed to catch the popular fancy among the farmers. At the meeting
of the National Grange in 1874, thirty-two States were represented.

Probably no other organization has made so rapid a growth as this.
A large element, however, of the membership was attracted to it by
the rallying cry of “Down with the middleman!” and had little or no
conception of its educational possibilities. Little country stores
with very small capital, and managed by men with no business training,
sprang up at every cross-road, which, contrary to the expectation of
their founders, did not save money, but resulted in some valuable
business education for which a good tuition fee was paid. The reaction
which set in made it seem for a time as though the entire order would
disintegrate; but fortunately there were wise leaders who had caught
the true idea, that the organization must be kept on an educational
basis to save it from extinction, and through their efforts it has
become a power for good in most localities, and has been of great
service to the farmers. County, state, and national societies have been
organized, and no other large bodies of farmers can so quickly and
thoroughly coöperate in measures pertaining to the interests of the
farmer as those belonging to this order.

[Illustration: ASPINWALL POTATO PLANTER.]

Another educational force of immense value to the farmers is found in
the experiment stations, which are established in every State of the
Union. This work was started by an act of Congress, approved March 2,
1887, and known as the “Hatch Act.” By this act the sum of $15,000 per
annum was appropriated for each State in the Union, to be specially
provided by Congress in the appropriations from year to year. In
addition to this sum, most of the States have made large appropriations
for the purchase of suitable grounds and the erection of buildings, and
to cover the expense of printing the reports and pamphlets which are
sent out free to the farmers who apply for them.

To go a little farther, the questions requiring investigation by the
agricultural experiment stations may be divided into three principal
groups, according as they are related to the soil, to the growth of
crops and vegetation, or to domestic animals and their products.

I. The soil is studied—

(1) In its varieties, as found in different parts of the farm and of
the State.

(2) In its physical properties, as affected by tillage, drainage,
irrigation, etc.

(3) In its chemical properties, as related to the maintenance of
fertility by the use of fertilizers and otherwise.

II. In vegetation and crop production some of the objects of study
are:—

(1) Varieties, including the selection and dissemination of new sorts;
the elimination of synonyms; the comparison of strains of varieties;
the production of improved varieties, etc., etc.

(2) Vegetable pathology, including studies of rusts, smuts, blights,
rots, mildews, etc.

(3) Control of injurious insects.

(4) Forestry, embracing the culture of forest trees for wind-breaks,
for timber, for nuts and incidental products.

III. In the study of animals some of the problems are:—

(1) Breeds and their comparative values for different purposes.

(2) Foods and feeding, for growth, for meat, for milk and wool.

(3) The diseases of animals, especially those of contagious, epizootic,
or parasitic nature.

The stations have done most valuable work along these different
lines, and have contributed in a large measure to the introduction of
improved varieties of cereals, forage crops, and fruits. In the case of
wheat especially, there can be no doubt that the work of the stations
has been a factor of great importance in producing large yields, by
stimulating the farmers to a more careful comparison of varieties and
of methods of culture.

A plan of purchasing and testing most of the so-called new varieties
of fruits and grains has been followed by some of the stations, thus
enabling the farmers and fruit growers to judge whether such varieties
are likely to be superior to sorts already cultivated. It has been
part of the work of the stations to expose fraudulent sales of fruit,
stock, and fertilizers. Much other work has been and is being done,
but the instances given show the value of the investigations made. As
has already been stated under another heading, the officers of the
experiment stations take an active part in the work of the institutes,
and by the frequent issuing of bulletins and their annual reports
convey valuable information to the farmer in every department of
his work. In many States they have established reading courses for
the study of Nature, which are conducted similarly to those in the
Chautauqua courses.

In the same connection the work of the Bureau of Animal Industry
should be noticed. Possibly no other organization of the government is
doing so much to save farmers from loss through disease of stock and
educating them to the same extent as this. The organization is made up
of men of the highest scientific training, whose lives are devoted to
the study of diseases of domestic animals and whose work extends to
the testing of remedies, the inspection of meats, the study of foreign
markets, and everything that pertains to the interest of the stock
growers. No disease can break out in the herds of live stock in any
part of the country without this bureau being at once notified of it,
and trained officials are sent to study all the circumstances connected
with it and to prevent, if possible, such disease from becoming
epidemic. Some years ago, when contagious pleuro-pneumonia had secured
a foothold in this country, the Bureau of Animal Industry set to work
to stamp it out. The Old World was paralyzed by the enormity of the
undertaking. Veterinarians in England and Continental Europe laughed at
us and considered us fit subjects for lunatic asylums. “Hadn’t _they_
always had it? It cost them millions of dollars annually in cattle, yet
they had been unable to stamp it out, and most assuredly we could not
do what European veterinarians could not.” They forgot that we were
Yankees. It cost us many good hard dollars that were represented by
large figures; but we stamped it out, and it has now been years since
“Uncle Sam” officially declared the country free from it.

Another work which this bureau undertook was the regulation of vessels
in which cattle were exported, and they reduced the losses so as to
save from two to three million dollars annually in the insurance
of export cattle. The greatest possible care is taken to disinfect
vessels in which cattle have been shipped, and strict regulations are
established regulating the size of stalls, ventilation, the number of
cattle to be carried on any single vessel, and every point which has a
bearing on the health and comfort of the animals.

It was not until after the Civil War that such a thing as an
agricultural college was known in this country, but through the action
of Congress very liberal appropriations were made, which in most
States were supplemented by the action of the State Legislatures,
and an agricultural college was started in every State of the Union.
In the beginning there was much criticism, and without doubt many
mistakes were made by those to whom the work was assigned; but now
that a generation has passed, the farmers have come to understand
better the objects of these schools, and scientific men have been
trained to do the work; and these men have gone out into other
departments, such as those already described, and have made possible
the splendid achievements which have already been hinted at in what
has been written. The teachers and officials of these colleges have
been exceedingly friendly to everything that could help the farmers,
and are in close touch with them; aiding in the work of local, state,
and national organizations, and, in most States, carrying on the work
of the experiment stations through their professors and graduates; and
in many of them courses of lectures by practical farmers have been
established. Without question they are becoming more and more helpful
as the years go by, and their power for good is constantly increasing.

A SUMMING UP.

What has agriculture gained, or rather along what lines, in the
century’s progress? A brief summary would seem a fitting close of this
chapter:—

(1) The marvelous advance in methods and means of transportation, and
the consequent opening of the markets of the world.

(2) The knowledge of the chemical constituents of the soil and its
management in the line of maintaining fertility.

(3) The appliances to lighten labor and shorten processes in the
production and harvesting of crops.

(4) Increased knowledge of plants, as to their growth and cultivation,
their feeding qualities, and the combination of these qualities in
feeding our domestic animals, by which we are able to reduce the
cost of production through the early maturity of the animals and the
maintaining of vigorous health.

(5) Increased knowledge of the value and power of organization and of
agricultural literature in helping to a practical education for the
duties of the farm.

(6) In an increase of home comforts and a higher ideal of living,
and an appreciation of the fact that the work of the farm should be
subservient to the life on the farm, as “The life is more than meat,
and the body than raiment.”

(7) In no other country on the globe are there so many tillers of the
soil who own their homes, and, as a consequence, there is no country
where there is so much of patriotism. When Matthew Arnold visited
the United States, nothing that he saw delighted him more than the
beautiful farms, with their comfortable dwellings and outbuildings and
the evidences of high cultivation and fertility. But one thing puzzled
him, and that was the absence of tenant houses, and he asked, “Where
do the men live who cultivate these farms?” When told that in most
cases the farmers were their own tenants, he could scarcely express his
astonishment.

Prince Kropotkin, of Russia, who has traveled in this country and paid
particular attention to the condition of agriculture, says in his
summing up: “American agriculture offers an imposing sight; not in the
wheat fields of the far West, which will soon become a thing of the
past, but by the development of rational agriculture and of the forces
which promote it. Read the description of an agricultural exhibition in
a small town in Iowa, with 70,000 farmers camping with their families
in tents during the fair week, studying, learning, buying and selling,
and enjoying life. You see a national fête, and you feel that you deal
with a nation in which agriculture is held in respect. Or read the
publications of the scores of experiment stations, whose reports are
published by thousands and scattered broadcast over the country, and
are read by the farmers and discussed at countless farmers’ meetings,
and you will feel that American agriculture is a real force, imbued
with life, which no longer fears mammoth farms, and needs not, like a
child, cry for protection.”

The future of agriculture in this country seems safe, and no class of
men can look the future in the face with more of confidence than those
who till the soil.

PROGRESS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING

BY WALTER LORING WEBB, C.E.,

_Assistant Prof. of Civil Engineering, University of Pennsylvania_.

I. AN INTRODUCTORY VIEW.

If we broadly define civil engineering as the art of construction, then
the birth of the art is as old as the emergence of man from savagery.
The savage who hollows out a log of wood in order to construct a canoe
has taken the first step in the art of shipbuilding; and when he has
constructed a hut, however rude, to take the place, as an abode, of
the cave hollowed out by nature, he has moved one step nearer to those
triumphs of building construction which satisfy man’s necessities,
comforts, and æsthetic desires. From this standpoint civil engineering
is as old as the oldest of the arts and sciences. Not only is civil
engineering an ancient art, but when the archæologist points to some
of the masterpieces of building construction which have been literally
hidden from view by the débris of centuries, and describes the old
roads which the disintegrating forces of nature, working for centuries,
have not been able to destroy, it is natural to assume that in many
features the civil engineering of the present day is but a copy of
ancient work, or, at least, that there has been comparatively little
real progress. It may be claimed that bridges are very old, that
canals, lighthouses, and roads antedate the Christian era, and that
even the ancient Egyptians knew that the earth is round, and had made
a rough computation of its diameter. But it will be shown that even
in these cases there has been an enormous advance, not only in the
character and magnitude of the work done, but also in another feature
of civil engineering which is frequently overlooked, namely, the
_economy_ of labor and material. Civil engineering has been defined as
the art of doing well with one dollar what any bungler can do somehow
with two dollars. This definition, although very loose and one-sided,
nevertheless contains a very important truth. If by improved methods a
canal or a bridge can be constructed for one half to one third of what
it would have cost by older methods, then the world has advanced, in
that it may have two or three canals or bridges at the same cost of
labor as would have been previously required for the construction of
one. When we add to this a vast improvement in quality, an improvement
that would have been previously impossible at any cost, the world’s
advance is hardly measurable by any standard. It is a well-known fact
that many engineering works, justly considered masterpieces at the
time of their construction, could now be replaced by a much better
structure for a comparatively small part of their original cost. This
statement not only applies to very old constructions, but even to some
of the great engineering works of the latter half of this century. Some
of these reconstructions have actually occurred, as is illustrated in
the Victoria tubular bridge at Montreal, or the Roebling suspension
bridge at Niagara Falls,—described later. In fact, the progress in
civil engineering during the nineteenth century is chiefly made up of
the enormous advances which have been made during the latter half of
the century. It should not be argued that these recent constructions
are cheaper, because “everything is cheaper now.” The general scale
of wages has advanced, and the total cost of construction is cheaper,
only because improved methods of work have reduced the labor required
to produce finished building material from the raw product and to erect
that material into a structure. Therefore in considering in detail
the construction of the great masterpieces of this century, we should
not lose sight of the enormous advance in general methods of work,
which has rendered it possible to have all of these structures which
so minister to the prosperity of the world, at such a reduced cost in
labor.

A complete discussion of the century’s progress in civil engineering
would require a treatise on all modern practice as well as a
description of nearly all of the great engineering masterpieces in
existence, but the limitations of this article utterly preclude the
possibility of even a short discussion of all the branches of the
science, to say nothing of a detailed description of all of the
examples. The following discussion will therefore be confined to those
branches in which the advance has been most notable, even to the
unscientific reader, the progress being illustrated by brief statements
regarding the most typical constructions.

II. BRIDGES.

Not only is there evidence that bridges of the simplest forms have
been used from prehistoric times, but the engineering world has been
frequently surprised at the discovery, in semi-barbarous lands where
there was evidently no scientific knowledge of bridge construction,
of a bridge which, in its mechanical analysis, is a rude example of
some one of the more complicated types now in use. But these bridges
are always small, and are constructed with an utter disregard of that
economy of construction which is one of the great triumphs of modern
bridge engineering, being uselessly strong in some parts, considering
their weakness in others. At the beginning of this century there was
not a wrought-iron or steel bridge in existence. Disregarding stone
arches for the present, all other bridges were made of wood—with the
exception of a few bridges of cast iron, which were constructed during
the latter part of the eighteenth century. But cast-iron is unsuitable
for pieces requiring tensile strength; it is also difficult to cast
very large pieces with any assurance of uniformity. The best existing
examples of cast-iron bridges are, therefore, those of the arch type;
but these are very heavy in proportion to their real strength, and
would now be much more costly than, as well as inferior to, steel
bridges of equal strength. Therefore the great advance in bridge
work during this century consists in the development of steel bridge
construction, and a brief description will be given of a few bridges
which represent the chief types.

[Illustration: BROOKLYN SUSPENSION BRIDGE.]

BROOKLYN BRIDGE.—The suspension bridge between New York and Brooklyn
is the largest bridge of its kind in existence, and, until the
construction of the “Forth” bridge, was the longest clear span ever
built. Every one is so familiar with this stupendous structure that
only a few statements will be made, which may give a better idea of
the unprecedented problem which confronted the great engineer, John
A. Roebling. When looking at the exceedingly graceful design of the
towers, one is apt to forget that a large part of the structure
of each tower is hidden from view. The bottom of the foundation of
the pier, on the New York side, is 78 feet below mean high tide, and
spreads over an area 172 feet long and 102 feet wide. The pressure
exerted by the caisson on its base is about 114,000 tons, or 6½ tons
per square foot. This great area, 354 feet below the parapet of the
towers, is a surface consisting partly of bed-rock and partly of a
material so compact that it was found, to be almost impossible to drive
an iron bar into it. Down below the mud, below all danger of scour,
far below the depth where the dreaded _teredo navalis_ can destroy the
timber in the caissons, these piers rest on an immovable foundation,
and are an imperishable monument of man’s skill. The floor of the
bridge is supported by four cables, each containing 6300 wires. Each
wire is supposed to be subjected to a stress of about 570 pounds, and
to have an ultimate strength of 3400 pounds. To say that each cable
is pulled by a force of 3,591,000 pounds conveys but little real
impression to the mind—as little as to say that it would require a
pull of over 21,000,000 pounds to break it. And there are four such
cables! The main span, including the weight of the cables, weighs about
5000 tons. Some interesting facts concerning the caissons under the
piers of this bridge will be given under the heading of “Caissons.”

[Illustration: THE NIAGARA RAILWAY ARCH.]

NIAGARA RAILWAY ARCH.—The railway suspension bridge, constructed by
Mr. John A. Roebling across the Niagara gorge in 1853–55, was justly
considered a monument to the skill of a great engineer, a monument of
the world’s progress; and yet so rapid has been the advance in the art
of bridge engineering, that this great structure is already a thing
of the past, and has now been replaced by another bridge which better
fulfills the increased requirements. It was not that Roebling’s bridge
was an engineering failure, but that the large increase in the weight
and length of trains now requires a much stronger bridge. There were
several formidable conditions confronting the engineer who designed the
steel arch which has now replaced the suspension bridge. For one thing,
a heavy railroad traffic was using the old bridge. The interruption
of railroad traffic for even a few day’s is a serious matter. Extend
the time to several months, and the consequences are too serious for
toleration. And thus it became necessary to so plan and construct the
arch that both structures would occupy the same site, not interfere
with each other, and not interfere with the running of trains. It is
an amazing, almost inconceivable, triumph of constructive skill that
this was accomplished so that “_not a single train was delayed_, and
traffic on the highway floor was suspended only for about two hours
each day, while the upper floor system was being put in.” The second
rigid requirement was the necessity for constructing the arch without
any “false works” underneath. Of course it was not practicable to
suspend the various members of the arch during construction, from the
old bridge, as it was not designed for such a load. Nor would it have
been possible to plant false works in the deep and swift current of
the Niagara River. And so it became necessary to make each half of
the bridge self-supporting, as it hung out over the raging torrent a
distance of about 275 feet from the abutments, until the two projecting
arms could be joined in the centre. The illustration does not show the
independence of the arch from the old bridge. If the old bridge had
not been there (as was virtually the case, so far as support given by
it is concerned), the independence of those arms reaching out over
the river would have been more apparent. Add to all these rigorous
conditions the marvelous fact that the erection of this great arch was
begun on September 17, 1896, and that the bridge was tested on July 29,
1897 (only 315 days afterward), and we have here one of the greatest
triumphs of engineering which could be imagined.

PECOS RIVER VIADUCT.—The original location of the Galveston,
Harrisburg, and San Antonio Railway included a section of about 25
miles which was very difficult to operate, on account of its very heavy
grades and sharp curvature. After some years of study and surveying,
a line was found which would save 11.2 miles in distance, 378 feet
of rise and fall, and 1933 degrees of curvature, besides being free
from land slides which threatened the old line at many points. But the
great economic advantages in the expenses of operating could only be
obtained at the cost of an almost unprecedented structure,—a viaduct
2180 feet long, which should cross the Pecos River at an elevation of
320 feet 10½ inches above the water surface. There are two bridges in
Europe which span very deep gorges by _arches_, which are higher above
the water than this viaduct, but in such cases the depth of gorge is of
no engineering importance. There is also a viaduct, for a narrow-gauge
railway in Bolivia, 800 feet long and with a height of 336 feet from
the rails to the water. But the Pecos viaduct is built to carry
standard-gauge railway traffic over a valley nearly half a mile wide,
and at such a height that a train moving over it appears diminutive.
The stone towers in the illustration appear small, but they are
constructed to a height of over 50 feet above the ordinary level of the
water, to allow for possible floods. The longest “bents” have a height
of 241 feet 0¾ inches. No “false works” were used in erecting the
bridge. The “traveler,” shown in the illustration, had an arm 124 feet
6 inches long. After completing the construction on one side of the
river (including one half of the “suspended” span immediately over the
river), the traveler was taken apart, loaded on cars and transported by
rail a distance of nearly 40 miles, in order to reach the other side
of the valley. Then the construction was carried on as before, until
the two halves of the suspended span met in the centre. The work of
erection began November 3, 1891, and on February 20, 1892 (only 108
days later), the two halves of the suspended span were connected. A
portion even of this time was lost by inclement weather and unavoidable
delays. This light “spider-web” method of construction for crossing
very high valleys was originated by American engineers, the first
notable instance of it being the construction of the “Kinzua” viaduct,
on the N. Y. L. E. & W. R. R., which has a length of 2050 feet and a
height of 302 feet above the water—figures which are only slightly
less than the above.

[Illustration: THE FIRTH OF FORTH BRIDGE. GENERAL VIEW.]

FORTH BRIDGE.—The next type of bridge to be considered has for its
example the largest bridge in the world—the “cantilever” crossing the
Firth of Forth, in Scotland. The economic design of bridges of this
type, on the basis of the mechanical principles involved, is not only
an achievement of this century, but of the latter part of the century.
Nevertheless, we may find illustrations of the fundamental principle
in the stone lintels in an Egyptian temple; in a rough wooden bridge
erected by Indians in Canada, near the line of the Canadian Pacific
Railroad; and in a bridge erected over two hundred years ago in
Thibet, and discovered in 1783 by Lieutenant Davis, of the English
embassy to the court of the Teshoo Lama. The principle of these bridges
is very graphically shown by a photograph made at the time of the
construction of the Forth bridge.

[Illustration: PECOS RIVER VIADUCT.]

This bridge joins two sections of Scotland which had been previously
separated by an arm of the sea, which could only be crossed by a
tedious ferry. Even this ferry was frequently tied up by fog or by
the strong gales which so often blow up the channel. The prevalence
of heavy wind pressure demanded that special attention should be
given to this feature, and the most elaborate tests ever made of the
effect of wind on a bridge structure formed a part of the preliminary
work. The estuary, for a distance of nearly fifty miles, is never
less than two miles wide, except at this one place, where it is but
little more than one mile wide, with the added advantage of having the
island of Inchgarvie nearly in the centre of the channel. The channel
on both sides is about two hundred feet deep, which would forbid the
location of a pier at any place except on this island, which, being
composed of basaltic trap rock, furnished a sufficient foundation at
a comparatively slight depth below the surface. To secure the maximum
rigidity consistent with economy in weight, the “vertical columns”
of the towers were spaced 120 feet apart at the base, but only 33
feet apart at the top. The towers are 330 feet high. As shown in
the illustration, the cross-sectional dimensions of the cantilevers
diminish rapidly both in width and height, so that although the weight
of the steel per running foot at the towers is 23 tons, it becomes
only a little over two tons per foot at the centre. The structure is
exceptionally rigid.

The picture of any gigantic structure, especially when well
proportioned, utterly fails to give an adequate idea of the size of its
component parts. It is difficult to realize from the illustration that
the four tubular “vertical columns” on each main pier are twelve feet
each in diameter at the base—large enough for “a coach and four” to
drive into, if they were laid horizontally. Over 50,000 tons of steel
were used in the main spans. The total cost of the whole structure was
over £3,200,000 ($16,000,000).

STONE ARCHES.—The nineteenth century has but little to claim as
to the development of stone arches. The mechanical theory of their
stresses is perhaps better understood now than ever, and the largest
masonry arch in existence (the Cabin John arch, having a span of 220
feet, carrying the Washington aqueduct over a creek) is a piece of
American work of this century. But it should not be forgotten that
more than five hundred years ago there was constructed at Trezzo,
Italy, a granite arch of 251 feet span. This arch was unfortunately
destroyed in 1427. One of the most remarkable arches in existence was
designed and built by an “uneducated” stone-mason at Pont-y-Prydd,
Wales, in 1750. A rigorous analysis of its strains—of which the
designer probably knew nothing—shows that the “line of resistance”
passes almost exactly through the centre of the arch ring. The most
highly educated engineer of the present day could do no better. On
the other hand, the development of the theory has been shown by the
successful construction of an exceedingly bold design for a bridge on
the Bourbonnais Railway, in France. The span is 124 feet, and the rise
only 6.92 feet. The design was considered so very bold that a model of
the arch was first constructed and tested before the design was finally
adopted. The extension of the use of stone arches, especially those
of very large size, is doubtless prevented by their excessive initial
cost over the cost of a steel structure of equal span and strength.
Since a stone arch is generally considered more beautiful than a steel
bridge, the æsthetical element often demands the construction of stone
arches in public parks in situations where a metal structure would be
more economical. The great reduction in the cost of steel during the
past few years, due to improved processes of manufacture, generally
renders the cost of a steel bridge, even with a proper allowance for
maintenance, repairs, and renewals, cheaper than a stone arch, unless
the span is short.

III. CAISSONS.

The use of compressed air to keep back the water that would naturally
flow through the soil into a deep excavation is a comparatively recent
idea. In 1839 M. Triger, a French engineer, conceived the idea of
sinking an iron cylinder through twenty metres of quicksand in the
valley of the Loire River, in order to reach a valuable coal deposit
which was known to be located beneath the river. A chamber with doors,
such as is now called an air-lock, was constructed at the top of the
cylinder. To pass into the cylinder the lower door, opening downward,
was closed, and when the air in the chamber was at atmospheric
pressure, the upper door, also opening downward, was opened. Upon
entering the chamber the upper door was shut, and air was pumped in
until the pressure equaled the pressure in the cylinder underneath,
which was also the pressure necessary to keep back the water from
the excavation. The lower door could then be opened and the working
chamber entered. To pass out, the reverse process in inverse order was
necessary. This was the first pneumatic caisson ever sunk, although
such plans had been proposed and even patented in England several years
before. The idea was essentially the present plan, but the process has
been improved and enlarged. The required pressure is substantially that
due to the weight of a column of water as high as the depth of the base
of the caisson below the water surface. In the case of the St. Louis
bridge, the bottom of the caisson was sunk to 109 feet 8½ inches below
the water surface, which required an air pressure of about 47 pounds
per square inch in the working chamber. Such a pressure is dangerous to
those working in it. The men literally “live fast.” Great exertion is
easily made, but is followed by corresponding exhaustion after leaving
the caisson. Those having heart disease, or who have been debilitated
by previous excesses, are liable to be seriously affected—generally
by a form of paralysis which has been specifically named by physicians
the “caisson disease.” At the St. Louis bridge, when working at the
greatest depths, the men were only worked four hours per day, in
two-hour shifts. Facilities were likewise provided to have them bathe,
rest, and take hot coffee on coming out of the working chamber. Healthy
men, who observed these and similar precautions, were not permanently
affected by the work.

[Illustration: FORMAL OPENING OF SUEZ CANAL.

Procession of Ships in Canal, November 16, 1869.]

The caissons of the New York and Brooklyn suspension bridge are the
largest ever constructed, and a bald account of some of the experiences
encountered is fairly dramatic. Under such air pressures the flame
of a candle will return when blown out, and so the danger of fire
inside the wooden caissons became very serious. One evening a fire
was discovered in one of the caissons, caused presumably by a workman
holding a candle temporarily against the wooden roof while searching
for his dinner pail. When discovered it was apparent that the fire
had burned out a cavity in the solid timber roof, and the supply of
compressed air was fast turning those timbers into a mass of living
coal. Two pipes capable of throwing one and one half inch streams had
been provided for this express contingency, and the two streams were
turned on as quickly as possible. All night the fight went on. At 4
A. M., when the water was pouring out of the orifice of the cavity as
fast as it was sent in by the hose, it seemed as if the cavity must
have been thoroughly flooded and the fire out. To make sure of the
absolute extinction of the fire, borings were made, which showed that
the fire had worked its way along individual timbers, especially those
which were “fat” with resin, and that the fourth roof course was still
a mass of burning timber. It was then decided that the caisson must be
flooded, which was done by pumping in 1,350,000 gallons of water. After
flooding the caisson for two and one half days, it was pumped out and
the work examined. It required the services of eighteen carpenters,
working day and night for two months, to repair the damage caused by
that fire.

When the Brooklyn caisson was twenty-five feet below the water
level, the boulders encountered became so large that blasting became
necessary. But blasting inside of a caisson was hitherto an untried
experiment. It was feared that the men would be injured; that their
ear-drums would break by a sudden explosion in that confined space
under heavy air pressure; that a “blow out” might occur, i. e., that
the compressed air might suddenly escape past the edges, and that an
inflow of water would then drown the men. At first a pistol was fired,
gradually using heavier charges; then a small blast was set off.
Encouraged by their freedom from resulting complications, the blasts
were gradually increased, until they finally used as heavy blasts as
was desired, the men simply stepping into an adjoining chamber to avoid
flying fragments; and an increase in the rate of progress was at once
apparent, the caisson being lowered from twelve to eighteen inches,
rather than only six inches, per week.

The caissons of the bridge across the Firth of Forth, Scotland, are
examples of the great development of the caisson idea. The pneumatic
caisson of Triger, in 1839, had but one air lock, through which must
pass men, excavated material, and constructive material for linings,
etc. This plan meant slow and expensive work. The caissons of the
Brooklyn bridge were a vast improvement over this plan, both on the
score of economy and safety. In the Forth bridge the caissons were
made almost wholly of iron, thus avoiding the danger of the fire which
so nearly wrecked the caisson of the Brooklyn bridge. The careless or
premature opening of the doors of air locks, which once nearly caused a
serious accident on the Brooklyn caisson, was rendered impossible by a
very elaborate system of interlocking. The efficiency of the apparatus
for removing excavated material from the compressed air chamber was
also greatly increased. Electric lights were used instead of gas or
candles.

“FREEZING PROCESS.”—This process is mentioned here on account of the
analogy of its object to that of pneumatic caissons—sinking a shaft
through excessively soft wet soil. The process is very recent, it
having been invented by Dr. F. H. Poetsch, of Prussia, in 1883. It has
been used only in a very few cases up to the present time, but where
it has been used it has accomplished results which were practically
unattainable by ordinary methods. A very brief description of one
instance of its use will explain the general idea. For many years
engineers had been baffled in their attempts to sink a shaft through
107 feet of quicksand at the Centrum mine, near Berlin, Germany. Dr.
Poetsch sunk sixteen pipes in a circle around the proposed location
of the shaft, and in thirty-three days had succeeded in producing a
frozen circular wall six feet thick, within which the excavation was
readily made and the shaft suitably lined. The freezing is accomplished
by circulating a freezing liquid (chloride of calcium) through the
tubes. After the shaft is completed the pipes can be thawed loose from
the wall of ice by simply circulating a hot liquid instead of a cold
one. The pipes can then be redrawn uninjured, and used over again—a
consideration of no small advantage. The process is not cheap. It would
seldom, if ever, be used where the more common methods are practicable;
but for passing through very soft and wet soils it is frequently the
only possible method.

[Illustration: MANCHESTER SHIP CANAL.]

IV. CANALS.

History records the construction of a ship canal across the Suez
Isthmus as early as 600 B. C.; that it continued in use for about 1400
years and was then abandoned. It was very small; all traces of it are
now utterly lost. The authentic records of it are very meagre, and
they serve only to show the great antiquity of the canal idea. The
nineteenth-century progress on this line, therefore, consists in the
enormously greater magnitude of the works accomplished in the solution
of the great subsidiary problems involved, and in the improvement in
methods of work which has rendered these great structures possible. The
limitations of this article utterly forbid even a brief description of
all the great canals which have been constructed during this century,
and it must therefore be confined to a few statements regarding the
more important and typical constructions. It might be thought that
no discussion of nineteenth-century canals would be complete without
a mention of the Nicaragua and Panama canal projects. But these
stupendous works, which will eclipse anything of the kind which the
world has ever seen, are not yet accomplished facts. The twentieth
century will be well under way before a trip “around the Horn” will
become unnecessary. The successful completion of one of these canals
will, very probably, so reduce the demand for the other that its
construction will be indefinitely postponed. These canals will not be
further considered.

SUEZ CANAL.—This great work permits a reduction of about 3750 miles in
the length of a voyage from Western Europe to India. Compared with some
of the other great canals of the world, its construction was easy. The
total length between termini is about 101 statute miles, of which about
nine miles required no excavation; sixteen miles more required only
a slight excavation to make the channel of sufficient depth through
existing dry depressions, called “lakes;” and the remaining seventy-six
miles of excavation were cut chiefly through a soft alluvial soil. At
only one point did the excavation reach fifty or sixty feet in depth,
and here also was found the only instance of rock excavation. Even
this rock (gypsum) was so soft that part of it was excavated by the
steam shovels. About 80,000,000 cubic yards of material were removed.
If this material had been loaded on to cars carrying twenty-five cubic
yards per car, made up into trains of twenty cars per train, and
the trains were strung along at the rate of five per mile, it would
have required 32,000 miles of such trains to transport the material
that was excavated. Work was actually begun in 1800. The Viceroy of
Egypt originally agreed to furnish the laborers required, and at
one time about 30,000 laborers were thus employed. On a change of
administration in Egypt, the new Viceroy refused to furnish the native
labor, and it then became necessary to import labor from Europe, and to
supplement this insufficient and high-priced supply of labor by very
large dredging machines, or steam shovels, of which about sixty were
employed. The task of supplying water for the vast army of workmen
was an engineering feat of no mean character and cost, as the entire
route lies through an arid desert. A system of waterworks, having its
source at Cairo, on the Nile, and distributing the water throughout
the length of the canal, was therefore constructed. In the latter part
of 1869, the waters of the Red and Mediterranean seas were joined,
large arid depressions had been transformed into great lakes, and
ocean-going vessels were sailing through what had been a desert. The
canal is 26 feet deep, 72 feet wide at the bottom, the sides sloping
variably, according to the nature of the material, the resulting width
at the top varying from 190 to 328 feet. Although not deep enough for
the very largest vessels afloat, it will accommodate the great bulk
of ocean travel, including war vessels. The total cost of this work,
including the breakwaters, lighthouses, etc., at each terminus, was,
approximately, £20,000,000, or $100,000,000.

[Illustration: COMPLETE ROCK CUT. CHICAGO DRAINAGE CANAL.

(Depth 35 feet.)]

Unlike most canals, the Suez canal has no locks. The original plan
of the Panama canal did not include locks, but the revised plan
provided for them, in order to save excessive cutting. The Nicaragua
canal scheme necessarily includes locks. The water for the Suez
canal comes directly from the seas which are connected. A canal with
locks necessarily requires an ample water supply from some river or
fresh-water lake. If the Suez canal had been constructed at a higher
level than the Mediterranean and Red seas, had been supplied with water
from the Nile, and had, therefore, been constructed with suitable
locks at each end (as was actually recommended by some engineers), the
cost of construction, as well as the perpetual expense of maintenance,
would have been greatly in excess of its actual cost. And so the fact
that it was possible to construct the canal without locks, and without
providing for a supply of water, was a great advantage that facilitated
the promotion of the enterprise.

MANCHESTER CANAL.—This canal, having a total length of only
thirty-five and one half miles, has transformed the city of Manchester,
England, from an inland city to a seaport. Actual excavation was begun
in November, 1887, and just six years afterwards the whole canal was
filled with water. It has a depth of 26 feet, and a width at the
bottom of from 120 to 170 feet, thus giving a greater capacity than
the Suez canal or the proposed Panama canal. Some of the greatest
difficulties involved arose from the necessity of providing for the
existing canals and railroads with which that busy portion of England
is so crowded. Perhaps the most interesting feat of engineering was
the drawbridge carrying the Duke of Bridgewater’s canal at Barton.
This small canal, having originally a depth of only four and one half
feet, here crosses the River Irwell. It was justly considered a great
feat of engineering when James Brindley constructed the canal, during
the eighteenth century, so that it crossed the river on a viaduct. A
waterway crossing a waterway on a viaduct was then a new idea. But
this old canal was constructed considerably above the desired level of
the Manchester canal, and yet, of course, not so high that a masted
ship might pass under it. Therefore a draw became necessary. To add to
the complication, the water supply of the small canal being somewhat
limited, it was considered very undesirable to lose a troughful of
water (roughly, 200,000 gallons) each time the draw was opened. To
allow this water to flow into a tank and then pump it back would
consume too much time, to say nothing of the expense. Therefore the
bridge must swing with the trough full of water. That required gates
at each end of the draw, as well as at the ends of the canal on each
abutment. These gates were comparatively simple; but the difficult
problem was to ensure a water-tight joint between the ends of the draw
trough and the corresponding ends of the canal. Temperature changes, as
well as many other considerations, would preclude the possibility of
making even a fairly tight joint by swinging the draw to a close fit
with the abutments. The desired result was accomplished by placing at
each end of the draw a very short U-shaped structure, having the same
cross section as the cross section of the trough, and having beveled
ends fitting corresponding bevels on the ends of the trough. These
beveled ends are faced with rubber. To open the draw the gates are
closed, the water between the gates at each end (a comparatively small
amount) is drained off and wasted, the U-shaped wedges are raised,
and the draw is then free to turn. The wedges are operated by hydraulic
rams.

[Illustration: AN “ATLAS” POWDER BLAST UNDER A TRAVELING CABLEWAY.
CHICAGO DRAINAGE CANAL.]

CHICAGO DRAINAGE CANAL.—It will probably be a surprise to many people
to learn that this “drainage” canal has a greater cross section
throughout the “earth-work” sections than any ship canal in existence,
and is only exceeded through the rock sections by the Manchester canal.
The city of Chicago obtains its water supply from Lake Michigan. The
“intake” pipe was at first located comparatively near the shore. As the
population of the city grew and the volume of its sewage increased,
it was observed that the water supply was becoming contaminated. The
Chicago River, into which the sewage was emptied, became so foul that
the odor was intolerable. The very evident fact of this odor probably
had more to do with the promotion and accomplishment of the means of
relief adopted than the far less evident but very dangerous pollution
of the water supply. An extension of the intake pipe to a point several
miles from shore by means of a tunnel (which was in itself a notable
feat of engineering) only deferred the time when the water supply would
again be fatally contaminated if the sewage continued to flow into
the lake. It was accordingly determined to dispose of the sewage by
discharging it into an artificial channel where it might become diluted
with water from Lake Michigan, and thence pass from the watershed of
the Great Lakes to the watershed of the Mississippi. The level of Lake
Michigan is so high that there was no trouble about obtaining the
requisite grade, and the divide between the watersheds is so low that
the depth of the required cutting at the summit was not forbidding. But
why have such a large canal? It was required that the sewage should
be diluted, so as not to become offensive to the inhabitants of the
region through which the canal must pass. The law under which the work
was authorized required that the flow should be 600,000 cubic feet per
minute, and that the minimum width at the bottom of the channel must be
160 feet. According to the well-known laws of hydraulics, it was seen
that a deep canal would have a greater capacity per unit of excavation
than a very wide shallow canal. This is especially true through the
sections of deepest cut, since excavation _above_ the water line adds
nothing whatever to the capacity for flow. The sections adopted called
for a depth of water of 22 feet. The side walls in rock are practically
vertical, the width of channel being 160 feet at the bottom and 162
feet at the top. In earthwork the cross section is larger than in rock,
thus reducing the velocity of flow and danger of scouring the banks.
The width of channel at the bottom is 202 feet, the width at the water
surface being 290 feet, and the side slopes 2 horizontal to 1 vertical.

A very expensive feature of this great work was the necessity for
constructing a diversion channel for the Desplaines River throughout
that portion of the river valley occupied by the canal. Lack of space
forbids a further discussion of this feature. The canal drains into the
Desplaines River at a point where the slope of the river is so great
that there will never be danger that a strong west wind or an unusual
lowering of the level of Lake Michigan can possibly cause the current
to flow eastward.

Work on the canal was commenced only after many years of discussion,
planning, legislation, litigation, and bitter opposition by the varied
interests which considered themselves more or less injured. But the
work was actually commenced in July, 1892. The estimated excavation
was approximately 40,000,000 cubic yards—about one half that of the
Suez canal; but the length is only 29 miles, compared with 101 miles
for the Suez canal. The total cost was estimated at something over
$27,000,000. On August 22, 1900, the Congressional River and Harbor
Committee approved the work as far as completed.

V. GEODESY.

It may be that many, who have read of the incredulity of all Europe
when the voyages of navigators during the fifteenth and sixteenth
centuries first demonstrated the sphericity of the earth, will be
surprised to learn that this knowledge had been acquired almost
two thousand years before, and had since then been _forgotten_.
To Eratosthenes, a Grecian, belongs the honor of first making a
measurement (about the year 230 B. C.) of the size of the earth, which,
while very rude and inaccurate, used the same fundamental principle
as is now employed by geodesists. But the appliances of those ancient
Grecians and of the Arabians, who later carried on the work, were
exceedingly crude. Even during the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries,
when the French, English, and Dutch were working very hard on the
problem, and were gradually obtaining results which came closer and
closer to those now known to be correct, the appliances for measuring
angles were so rough and inaccurate that it was only possible to assert
that the earth is spherical, with a diameter of about 7900 miles. The
seventeenth century was nearly past when Picard first used spider lines
to determine the “line of collimation,” or the true line of sight, in a
telescope. This marked a new era in methods of work, but the eighteenth
century was about half gone when it was first authoritatively
proven that the earth is not a sphere, but is more truly an “oblate
spheroid,”—such a figure as would be obtained by flattening a sphere
at the poles. Some idea of the accuracy of the work done, even at this
stage, may be obtained by considering that the computed flattening is
so slight that if we had a perfect reproduction of the earth, reduced
to a diameter of 12 inches, the flattening would be less than 1/25 of
an inch—almost imperceptible even to a trained eye. The very highest
mountain would be considerably less than 1/100 of an inch in height on
such a sphere.

The present marvelous state of the science is due to the great
improvements which have been made in the construction and use of
angle-measuring instruments and of “base bars;” also to the development
of the mathematical theory and processes involved, notably that of
the “method of least squares.” As an illustration of the accuracy
attainable in the construction of theodolites, the writer recently
made an elaborate test of the error of the centering of one of these
angle-measuring instruments. Of course no _direct_ measurement is
possible. The result is based on a long series of observations, which,
when combined according to certain mathematical principles, will give
the desired result. The error was thus computed to be _forty-two
millionths_ of an inch. To realize what is meant when an angle is
measured with a “probable error” of a few hundredths of a second of
arc, it should be remembered that one second of arc on a circle 10
inches in diameter is less than 1/40000 of an inch. The accuracy which
has been attained in the measurement of base lines is not easily
realized by a layman. An engineer realizes the practical impossibility
of measuring a line twice and obtaining _precisely_ the same result
to the finest unit of measurement. The initiated are therefore able
to appreciate the achievement of measuring a base line having a
length of over nine miles, with a “probable error” of less than one
five-millionth of its length. The words “probable error,” as used
above, have a scientifically exact meaning, but they may be taken by
the uninitiated as representing a measure of the precision obtained.

At about the close of the last century the great mathematician,
Laplace, had declared that the results of the surveys which had then
been made were inconsistent with the theory that the form of the earth
is exactly that of an oblate spheroid. That form would require that
the equator and all parallels of latitude shall be true circles, and
that all meridian sections shall be equal ellipses. Laplace showed that
the discrepancies between the actual results obtained and the results
which the theory would call for are too great to be considered as mere
inaccuracies in the work done. With the extension, during this century,
of the great geodetic surveys, carried on by the various governments
of the world, more and more evidence has developed that the meridian
sections of the earth are not equal, which is equivalent to saying that
the equator is not a perfect circle. This has led to the next stage,
which has been to prove that the form of the earth may be more closely
represented by an “ellipsoid” than by a spheroid, that is, that _every_
section of the earth is an ellipse. Several calculations have been made
to determine the length and location of the principal axes of such a
figure. But these calculations are considered unsatisfactory, because
evidence has developed that the true form of the earth cannot be
represented even by an ellipsoid. This figure is symmetrical above and
below the equator. There are reasons for believing that the southern
hemisphere of the earth is slightly larger than the northern, and that
the form of the earth is more nearly that of an “ovaloid,”—a figure of
which the ordinary hen’s egg is an exaggerated example.

All the above forms, the sphere, spheroid, ellipsoid, and ovaloid
are geometrical forms which represent with more and more exactness
the true form of the earth, but even this increasing exactness will
not account for the discrepancies and irregularities which have been
found at various places, and which cannot be explained on the ground
of inaccurate work. Geodesists have been forced to the conclusion that
the true form of the earth is not a regular geometrical form, but is
a “geoid,” that is, like the earth and like nothing else, unless we
admit the exaggerated comparison that it is “like a potato.” It should
be understood that the words “form of the earth” do not refer to the
actual surface of mountain, valley, or ocean bottom, but to the actual
ocean surface, and to the surface which the free ocean would assume if
it could penetrate into the heart of the continents. The astounding
accuracy of the work done may be appreciated when we consider that the
differences between the “geoid” and the more accurate mathematical
forms are distances which should be measured in feet rather than in
miles. For many purposes, it is sufficiently exact to consider the
earth as a sphere. For some very precise work it is necessary to
consider it as a spheroid. The more exact forms have little or no
utilitarian value, and the vast amount of work that has been spent
on these researches has been due to man’s thirst for knowledge as
such,—due to the same enthusiasm which advances the sciences in fields
which only broaden man’s knowledge of the world in which we live.

VI. RAILROADS.

The achievements of engineering skill on the line of bridges, canals,
tunnels, etc., have been great, but their effect is insignificant
compared with the social revolution that was created by the invention
and development of railroads. The railroads of this country represent
a value of about $12,000,000,000—one sixth of the national wealth.
Their pay-rolls include about 850,000 employees—1/28 of the working
population. They support, directly or indirectly, about 5,000,000
people. They collect an annual revenue of about $1,200,000,000, which
is greater than the value of the combined products of gold, silver,
iron, coal, and other minerals, wheat, rye, oats, barley, potatoes,
and tobacco, produced by the entire nation. Such a stupendous social
institution requires special discussion, and it will be found treated
separately under the heading of “Evolution of the Railway.”

VII. TUNNELS.

Tunnels are of exceedingly ancient origin, if by tunnels we include
all artificial underground excavations. From prehistoric times natural
caves have been used as burial places, and, following this practice,
tunnels and artificial rock chambers have been cut out by kings and
rulers in Thebes, Nubia, and India during periods so ancient that we
call the study of their history archæology. Nor were the ancient
tunnels confined to tombs. The Babylonians constructed tunnels through
material so soft that a lining of brick masonry had to be used to
sustain the work. The Romans constructed a tunnel over three and one
half miles long to drain the waters of Lake Fucino. About 30,000
laborers were occupied on this work for eleven years. The nineteenth
century can hardly boast of works that represent a greater amount
of labor (measured in mere days of work) than some of these ancient
monuments of constructive skill, but the masterpieces of this century
are works which have been greatly aided and even rendered possible by
three modern inventions,—compressed-air drilling machines, modern
explosives, and the compressed-air process used in subaqueous work.
The advance in methods of tunnel surveying is as great and nearly
as important. Progress in excavating tunnels is necessarily slow,
because the working face is so small that only a few men can work
there at a time, and the rate of advance depends upon them. As an
illustration: although the Mont Cenis tunnel belongs to the latter
half of this century, the first blast being made in 1857, yet for
the first four years hand drilling was employed, when the average
progress was about nine inches per day. Then machine drilling with
compressed air was adopted, when the rate of advance was multiplied
five times. The invention of compressed-air drills simultaneously
solved two difficulties: (1) The compressed air furnishes an extremely
convenient and safe form of power, which enables holes to be drilled
much more rapidly than it is possible to drill them by hand. (2) The
compressed air, after doing its work, is exhausted into the tunnel,
and thus furnishes a continuous supply of fresh air. The necessity
for ventilation has often required the construction and operation of
expensive ventilating plants. Add to these improvements the lighting of
the tunnel, even during construction, by electric lights which consume
no oxygen, and the comparison between ancient and modern methods
becomes especially marked. Before the invention of explosives, hard
rock was sometimes broken by building wood fires next to the rock,
and then, when the rock had become very hot, cooling it suddenly with
water. The sudden contraction would split the rock. Ventilation was
attempted by waving fans at the tunnel entrances. With torches and
fires to consume the precious oxygen, and no effective ventilation, it
is a wonder how those earlier tunnels were constructed. The compressed
air methods for subaqueous work will be referred to under a special
case. The essential principles have already been described under
caissons.

[Illustration: AMERICAN PORTAL, ST. CLAIR TUNNEL. NORTH OF DETROIT,
MICH.]

TUNNEL SURVEYING.—The tunnel surveying developed during this century
is one of the marvels of surveying work. If a tunnel is to be several
miles in length, not only is the excavation commenced at each end, but
one or more intermediate shafts are frequently sunk to the level of the
tunnel, and excavation is extended in each direction from the shafts.
It is extremely important that these sections of the tunnel should
“meet” exactly. If they should fail to do so by any appreciable amount,
the necessary modifications are frequently costly and therefore justify
the most elaborate precautions in the surveying work, especially since
the surveying costs much less than the consequences of such a blunder.
The Hoosac tunnel is over 25,000 feet long. The heading from the east
end met the heading from the central shaft at a point 11,274 feet from
the east end and 1563 feet from the shaft. The error in alignment was
five sixteenths of an inch, that of levels “a few hundredths,” error
of distance “trifling.” The corrected alignment was then carried on
toward the heading from the west end, which it met at a point 10,138
feet (nearly two miles) from the west end and 2056 feet from the shaft.
Here the error of alignment was 9/16 of an inch and that of levels
about 1-5/8 inches. The surveying work of the spiral tunnels on the
St. Gothard Railway (to be described later) is another example of
marvelously accurate work under peculiarly unfavorable circumstances.

ST. GOTHARD TUNNEL.—To appreciate the magnitude of the problem
involved, of which this great tunnel is the crowning feature, some idea
should be obtained of the Alpine topography lying between Silenen, in
Switzerland, and Bodio, in Italy, less than forty miles apart. The
idea of connecting Switzerland and Italy by a railroad passing over or
through the Alps, by utilizing the St. Gothard Pass as far as possible,
dates back to 1850, or even earlier. An enterprise of such magnitude
could be consummated only after years of discussion, planning,
surveying, negotiations, and even international agreements. In 1871 a
treaty was finally ratified between Germany, Italy, and Switzerland, by
which the construction and financiering was duly authorized. On August
7, 1872, the contract for the construction was signed, with a proviso
that the work must be completed within eight years. On April 30, 1880,
the advance headings met, and soon thereafter the mails were regularly
carried through, although the tunnel was not actually completed in the
specified time.

The route adopted was bold enough to stagger the financier, if not the
engineer. Starting from Silenen, Switzerland, it required a climb of
nearly 2000 feet to reach Göschenen, the adopted northern portal of
the tunnel. This would require an _average_ grade of 200 feet per mile
in the ten miles of distance, or an actual grade of 370 feet per mile
in the upper part of the line, if the river valley were followed. The
line was therefore “developed,” that is, the distance was purposely
increased by adopting an indirect line, in order that the grade
might be less. It was found possible to run the line from Silenen to
Pfaffensprung, a distance of about six miles, on the comparatively low
grade of 137 feet per mile. At this point the line suddenly plunges
into the mountain, and curves around in a circle, which is, roughly,
2000 feet in diameter, while it continues an upward grade of 121½ feet
per mile. After traversing 4845 feet of such tunnel, the line again
emerges into the open air, having turned nearly three fourths of a
circle in the solid rock. About 2000 feet farther on the line actually
crosses itself, the upper line there being 167½ feet higher than the
lower line, which is at that point within the tunnel. By this device,
which is called a spiral, the line is run at a practicable grade, and
an elevation of 167½ feet is surmounted by introducing 6986 feet of
“development.” Near the entrance of the Leggistein tunnel, the line is
less than 500 feet away (horizontally) from a lower part of the line,
which is about 350 feet lower in elevation. Space forbids a further
description of this climb of 2000 feet to Göschenen, where the line
plunges into the bowels of the earth, and does not again emerge until
it has traversed _nine and one quarter miles_, and has reached the
southern slope of the Alps. Even here the portal is 3755 feet above
sea level, and the valley down to Bodio is steeper in places than
the valley of the Reuss. Four spirals are used in descending about
2650 feet in an air line distance of less than 19 miles. In one place
even the upper line, where it crosses the lower line, is in solid
rock. Imagine standing in the gloom of a tunnel and considering that
vertically beneath your feet—more than 100 feet further down in the
bowels of the earth—there is another tunnel belonging to the same line
of road. The great majority of tunnels are straight. A few have curves
at one or both ends, but nowhere else in the world can be found such
examples of spiral tunnels carved out of the living rock.

[Illustration: INTERIOR OF ST. CLAIR TUNNEL, NORTH OF DETROIT, MICH.]

ST. CLAIR TUNNEL.—A glance at a map of lower Canada and Michigan
will show that all the rail traffic of lower Canada, and even that
from Montreal and Quebec, that passes as far west as Chicago, must
either cross the Detroit River at Detroit or the St. Clair River, at
or near Port Huron. Plans for bridging the river have been frequently
made, but the Canadian government has steadily refused permission.
The traffic along the river in 1896 amounted to over 35,000,000 tons,
or more than was shipped at the ports of either New York, London, or
Liverpool, and greatly in excess of that which passed through the
Suez canal. Such traffic must not be impeded even by a drawbridge;
and therefore a tunnel was the only alternative. The problem was in
many respects unique. Borings showed that the tunnel must pass through
clay and occasional pockets of quicksand, and therefore it would be
necessary to employ a pneumatic method. Brunel had used a “shield” on
the Thames tunnel half a century before; but all of the earlier tunnels
constructed by this method were much smaller, and the difficulty and
danger increase very rapidly as the size increases.

In 1886 the “St. Clair Tunnel Company,” virtually a creature of
the Grand Trunk Railway Company, was organized, and in 1888 work
was begun. After a false start, made by sinking shafts which were
afterwards abandoned, open cuttings were commenced at each end, which
were extended to points 6000 feet apart, between which the tunnel was
excavated and lined. The circular lining, having an outside diameter of
21 feet, is of cast iron, made in segments which are bolted together,
having strips of wood three sixteenths of an inch thick placed in the
joints. Liquid asphalt was freely used as a preservative and to make
tight joints. The tunnel was excavated for nearly 2000 feet on each
side as an ordinary open tunnel until the excavation was actually
under the river; then a diaphragm with air locks was built on each
side, and that part of the tunnel lying under the river—2290 feet in
length—was constructed under air pressure. Several curious facts were
developed during the construction. The material excavated outside of
the shields was thrown inside, loaded on to cars, and hauled by mules
to the diaphragm. It was found that horses could not work in compressed
air. Mules could do so, but even they were sometimes affected by “the
bends,” a disease akin to paralysis, which frequently occurred among
the men. The shields were forced forward by twenty-four hydraulic rams,
each having a capacity of 125 tons, or 3000 tons for each shield.
Usually a force of 1200 to 1500 tons was sufficient. Much gas was
encountered, which, on account of its explosiveness, prevented the
employment of blasting to break up the boulders which were frequently
found. The advantages of electric lighting in compressed air work were
exemplified in this tunnel. In August, 1890, about one year after
the shields were placed on each side of the river, they met near the
centre. The progress of each shield averaged nearly ten feet per day.
Considering the frequency with which the cost of great engineering work
exceeds the original estimate, it is remarkable to note that in this
case the actual cost ($2,700,000) was less than the original estimate,
which was about $3,000,000.

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN THE ANIMAL WORLD

BY D. E. SALMON, M.D.,

_Chief of Bureau of Animal Industry, U. S. Agricultural Department_.

I. OF ANIMAL DISEASES.

The wars of Napoleon, which in the early years of the nineteenth
century so seriously affected the governments and institutions of
Europe, had an equally marked influence upon the development of the
animal industry in the countries that were brought within the sphere
of the military operations. This chapter of the history of that period
appears to have been neglected by writers who have industriously delved
into details of subjects of far less interest and importance. Enough
has been chronicled by various historians, however, to show that in
many cases those engaged in successful operations for improving the
breeds of domesticated animals were forced to abandon the work to which
they had devoted their lives, and for which long study and experience
had specially fitted them, and to become units in the vast armies which
were organized only to melt away in the bloody and disastrous campaigns
of that epoch. But it was not the men alone that were taken. The best
horses were seized for the use of the officers and the cavalry, for
the artillery and the transportation trains. The sheep and swine were
slaughtered for the subsistence of the armies, and the cattle were
driven off for the same purpose. Neither the choicest flocks and herds
nor the most magnificent individuals produced by the breeder’s art
escaped. The fruits of many years of patient effort in selection and in
guiding the forces of heredity were blotted out; the animals left were
few and inferior. To crown all these disasters, the most deadly forms
of contagion were gathered from their hiding places with the animals
that were seized, the plagues which these caused were propagated among
the vast aggregation of beasts that were required for the service
of the armies, and, finally, they were disseminated throughout all
sections to which these armies penetrated.

The agriculturists of Great Britain, thanks to the isolation due to
the considerable expanse of water which separates their territory from
the mainland, escaped not only the invasions of armed and destructive
hosts, but also the pestilences which accompanied them. While,
therefore, the farmers of the continent were struggling to save a few
of their remaining animals from the ravages of glanders, rinderpest,
foot-and-mouth disease, pleuro-pneumonia, and other plagues, those of
the British Isles were perfecting the work of their ancestors without
molestation. These circumstances, lost sight of by many, explain to
a certain extent the apparently marvelous success of the British
husbandmen in developing so many breeds of horses, cattle, sheep,
and swine to the wonderful perfection which we see at the end of the
nineteenth century. The favorable climate, together with the abundant
and nutritious herbage, have undoubtedly been factors in the production
of the British breeds, but the power and opportunity to select the best
animals and retain these for breeding purposes must also have had great
influence.

The effect of contagious diseases in retarding the development of
animal life may be appreciated from the estimate, carefully made,
that in the closing years of the eighteenth century the cattle plague
(rinderpest) alone destroyed in Europe two hundred million head of
cattle, valued at seven billions of dollars. During the first half
of the nineteenth century, cattle plague, pleuro-pneumonia, and
foot-and-mouth disease were particularly disastrous to the animal
industry of the Continent of Europe, and unquestionably, also,
throughout Asia, which appears to have been the original habitat of
these plagues. During the last third of this century the development
of veterinary science, together with the enactment of sanitary
legislation and the enforcement of intelligent measures of repression,
have practically eradicated the cattle plague from the countries
of Europe, and we have only to note, as important, its invasion of
Great Britain in 1865, which led to the adoption of the present most
excellent sanitary organization, and the extensive outbreak on the
continent following the Franco-Prussian war. During the last six years
this plague has swept over large sections of the African continent,
destroying nearly every bovine animal in the regions first invaded, and
had it not been for the fortunate and timely discovery of a successful
method of preventive inoculation, the cattle industry would have been
absolutely annihilated.

Pleuro-pneumonia, almost equally destructive with cattle plague and
much more persistent, was widely disseminated over the continent of
Europe during the seventeenth century, and reached England about
1840. Many years were lost in futile contentions over the subject of
contagion, and it was not until the last twenty years that vigorous
measures for its extermination were enforced. In the meantime the
contagion had been carried to Australia and South Africa, where it
has since remained domiciled, a constant source of loss to the cattle
growers. The losses from this disease in Europe are now comparatively
unimportant, but in the countries of Asia and Africa, and in Australia,
it is still a great incubus. Foot-and-mouth disease, less fatal in
its effects than the other maladies mentioned, appears to be more
difficult to control, and, in the closing years of the century, we find
it prevailing extensively over the principal countries of Continental
Europe.

The diseases which have most seriously affected the development of
other species of animals are the glanders of horses, the variola of
sheep (sheep-pox), and the three diseases of swine known in Europe as
erysipelas, swine pest, and swine plague. These have been extremely
prevalent and fatal in many parts of Europe. Glanders, swine pest, and
swine plague have been brought to the American continent, and have been
even more destructive here than in their ancient habitat.

The diseases which at present are regarded as most serious attracted
but little attention at the beginning of the century, or were unknown.
Tuberculosis has now become the great scourge of dairy cows and other
highly bred cattle, ruining many of the best herds and threatening the
health of the consumers of milk, if not also of beef. Texas fever, a
disease of cattle first studied in the United States, but now known to
be widely disseminated over the South American, African, and Australian
continents, has during late years retarded operations for improving
and increasing the stock of cattle, and has seriously restricted the
marketing of animals from the infected districts.

[Illustration: THOROUGHBRED.]

This brief summary relative to contagious diseases and their effects
is all the attention that can be given in this article to conditions
which through all historic times have been important, and, in many
cases, have been supreme in their influence upon the tendencies
and development of the animal population. As the twentieth century
approaches, however, the influence of the animal plagues is on the
wane, and with a few more years of active scientific investigations
they will all be so thoroughly controlled that the disastrous
visitations of the past can never be repeated, and they will not even
be a hindrance or menace to the stock grower.

II. INCREASE IN NUMBERS.

As might be expected, there has been an increase in the numbers of the
domesticated animals held in the various countries of the world, but
this increase has been far from uniform, and cannot be measured either
by the growth of the population or the degree of prosperity. Evidently
the density of population, the development of manufactures, and the
fertility of the soil have had much influence.

In the United Kingdom there were 1,500,000 horses in 1800, and but
2,000,000 in 1898. During this time the cattle had increased from
5,000,000 to 11,000,000; the sheep from 25,000,000 to 31,000,000; and
the swine from 3,000,000 to 3,700,000. Thus, while the cattle doubled
in numbers during the century, the horses increased but one third, the
sheep one fourth, and the swine one fourth. As in the same period the
population of the country was augmented from 16,200,000 to 40,000,000,
or two and one half times, it is not difficult to see why England has
become the world’s greatest market for animals and animal products.

It is important to note the increase in animals in a few of the
principal countries of Europe. In France there were 1,800,000 horses
at the beginning of the century, and there were 3,418,000 in 1896. The
cattle increased from 6,000,000 to 13,334,000; the swine from 4,500,000
to 6,400,000; the goats from 800,000 to 1,500,000; while the sheep
decreased from 30,000,000 to 21,200,000. That is, in round numbers, the
horses, cattle, and goats doubled, the swine increased nearly 50 per
cent, but the sheep were diminished one fourth. The population advanced
from 27,350,000 to 38,500,000, or about 40 per cent.

In Germany, from 1828 to 1892, the horses increased from 2,500,000 to
3,836,000; the cattle from 9,770,000 to 17,500,000; the goats from
700,000 to 3,000,000; the swine from 4,500,000 to 12,174,000; and the
sheep decreased from 17,300,000 to 13,600,000. The population increased
during the same time from 29,700,000 to 49,500,000.

In European Russia, from 1828 to 1888, the horses were increased from
12,000,000 to 20,000,000; the cattle from 19,000,000 to 23,840,000; the
sheep from 36,000,000 to 47,500,000; while the swine decreased from
15,800,000 to 9,200,000. The population during this period increased
from 45,000,000 to 90,000,000.

These are the countries in which there is most interest on account of
their influence upon the markets of the world. In regard to Europe
as a whole, owing to the lack of statistics, we can only estimate
approximately as to the condition at the beginning of the century. From
such data as are available it appears that there were about 20,600,000
horses, 61,800,000 cattle, 157,500,000 sheep, and 36,600,000 swine.
The population of Europe at that time is placed at 175,000,000. In
the year 1900 there will be in Europe not far from 44,250,000 horses,
108,000,000 cattle, 180,575,000 sheep, and 56,800,000 swine. The
population will reach about 380,000,000.

From these figures it would appear that, taking all of Europe, the
human population has increased more rapidly than have any of these
species of domesticated animals. In other words, the population is 2.17
times what it was at the beginning of the century, while there are but
2.14 times as many horses, 1.75 times as many cattle, 1.55 times as
many swine, and 1.14 times as many sheep.

[Illustration: WATERING THE COWS.]

This growing deficiency in the stock of animals, coupled with an
increasing consumption of meat per capita, has led to the importation
of great numbers of animals and large quantities of meats and other
animal products. The resulting trade has stimulated the production of
animals in other parts of the world, particularly in the United States
of America, Australia, and Argentina, in all of which there has been a
marvelous development.

There are no reliable statistics as to the number of animals in the
United States at the beginning of the century. Some have estimated that
there were only 300,000 horses, 600,000 cattle, and 600,000 sheep; but
the writer is of the opinion that there were from 500,000 to 1,000,000
horses, at least 3,000,000 head of cattle, and from 2,000,000 to
3,000,000 sheep. In 1840, with a population of 17,063,000, there were
4,300,000 horses, 14,900,000 cattle, 19,300,000 sheep, and 26,300,000
swine; while in 1899 the number is placed at 15,800,000 horses and
mules, 44,000,000 cattle, 39,000,000 sheep, and 38,600,000 swine.

In 1888 the horses of Canada numbered 1,100,000, the cattle 3,790,000,
the sheep 2,600,000, and the swine 1,205,000. In the same year Mexico
was credited with 2,000,000 horses, 3,000,000 cattle, 2,000,000 sheep,
and 5,000,000 goats. Taking the whole of North America, and making
allowances for the increase since 1888 in Canada and Mexico, it may
be fairly assumed that at the close of the century there will be about
19,000,000 horses and mules, 55,000,000 cattle, 50,000,000 sheep, and
40,000,000 swine.

In South America, Argentina far outstrips all other countries in animal
production. The horses, which in 1864 numbered 3,875,000, had increased
by 1895 to 4,447,000; the cattle increased in the same period from
10,215,000 to 21,702,000; the sheep, from 23,110,000 to 74,380,000. The
population in 1895 was only 3,964,000. In Uruguay there were, in 1895,
402,348 horses, 5,248,000 cattle, and 14,333,000 sheep. In Paraguay
there were, in 1896, 246,000 horses and 2,100,000 cattle. The last
returns from Chili (1882?) give 450,000 horses, 1,530,000 cattle, and
2,500,000 sheep. As to the condition in Brazil, we have no reliable
statistics.

The animal industries of Australasia have shown the most wonderful
development during the century. In 1800, there were but 200 horses,
1040 cattle, and 6100 sheep. In 1810, there were 1130 horses, 12,440
cattle, 25,900 sheep, and 9540 swine. In 1896, there were 1,923,554
horses, 12,701,600 cattle, 110,524,000 sheep, and 1,000,000 swine.

In Asia there are large numbers of animals, but it is impossible to
give statistics, except for British India, where, in 1895, there were
1,152,000 horses, 49,000,000 cattle, and 17,200,000 sheep.

Mr. Simonds endeavored to ascertain the number of each class of live
stock in the world in 1890, and his conclusions may be accepted as
approximately correct. He placed the total number of horses in all
countries at 63,469,000, the asses and mules at 10,318,000, the cattle
at 309,807,000, the sheep at 588,935,000, the swine at 102,526,000, and
the goats at 59,971,000.

III. IMPROVEMENT OF BREEDS OF ANIMALS.

The increased number of animals now held in various parts of the
world does not give an adequate idea of the enlarged production of
animal food products, as compared with one hundred years ago. During
the last century there has been constant improvement in the various
breeds of animals, with a view to perfect their form and shorten
the time required for their growth. The breeder has learned how to
stimulate development, and has fixed the quality of early maturity,
through hereditary influence, until it is now transmitted with the same
regularity as are other characteristics.

Cattle are no longer fed until they are three or four years old before
being sent to the butcher, and it has been found that they can be
made to yield an equal quantity of beef of better quality at eighteen
months to two years. It is the flesh of such young animals which has
been much discussed under the title of “baby beef.” Not only is this
beef commended on account of its tenderness, its high nutritive value,
and the more even distribution of fat through the muscular tissue, but
because this shortening of the feeding period enables the farmer to
produce a greatly increased quantity of human food from the same number
of acres. That is, by reducing the age at which bullocks are marketed
from three and one half years, as was formerly the rule, to twenty
months, it is possible for the same farm to produce one third more
animals in a given series of years.

It may be admitted that not all of the stock of beef-producing animals,
nor even the greater part of it, has acquired this extreme degree
of early maturity, but most of it has developed somewhat in this
direction. The large-boned, gaunt, and long-horned cattle of Texas have
nearly disappeared, and even in Mexico they are being rapidly replaced
by others of better quality. The most important fact is that breeds
exist which can be depended upon for the speedy transformation of the
entire stock of cattle when the necessity arises.

A similar hastening of maturing has been accomplished with the
mutton breeds of sheep, with numerous varieties of swine, and to a
considerable extent with poultry.

[Illustration: A TEMPERANCE SOCIETY. (HERRING.)]

The development of the dairy breeds of cattle has also been remarkable.
It can be best appreciated by contrasting the half wild cows of our
Western plains, which yield but two or three quarts of milk a day at
their best, and none for half of the year, with the highly specialized
types which produce twenty to thirty quarts daily when in full flow,
and with which the milk secretion continues from year to year without
interruption.

The yield of butter has been increased equally with that of milk,
and among the dairy breeds there are some which are specially valued
because of their aptitude for butter production. While the unimproved
cow yields but one fourth to one half pound of butter a day, good
specimens of the best breeds produce from one and one half to three
pounds, and in numerous instances still greater quantities.

In the production of wool there has also been a wonderful advance. The
fibre has been increased in length, the fleece has been distributed
more uniformly over the surface of the body, and the quality of
the fibre has been modified to conform to the requirements for
manufacturing the infinite varieties of fabrics demanded by modern
civilization. The fleece of to-day is probably three times as heavy as
that of a century ago.

The improvement in the Merino type has been truly wonderful. Not only
have the beautiful long and silky wools of the Rambouillet and Saxony
breeds been developed by persistent selection, but the body of the
Merino, formerly small and almost useless for its flesh, has been
brought to a standard closely approaching that of the best mutton
breeds.

It is unfortunate that the changes of fashion have, during the latter
part of the century, made the production of the extra fine wools less
profitable than the coarse varieties, and that, as a consequence, many
flocks which had been bred to the very highest degree of perfection in
this direction have gone to the shambles, and their peculiar points of
excellence have been lost.

[Illustration: ART CRITICS. (GEBLER.)]

With poultry, a vast number of varieties and strains have been
developed, among which the most fastidious taste may readily find
its ideal. Some of these have been perfected from the standpoint of
utility, while with others the guiding principle has been purely
æsthetic. Thus there are breeds which are characterized by their size,
rapid growth, and excellence of flesh; others which have been developed
simply as egg-producing machines and which have even lost the maternal
instinct for incubation; and still others in which the beauty, the
complication, and the perfection of the feathering constitute the
principal claims to attention.

The standard weights of the heavy varieties, such as Brahmas and
Cochins, is now 11 lbs. to 12 lbs. for cocks, and 8½ lbs. to 9½ lbs.
for hens. In the United States, there has been developed a distinct
American class of medium weight fowls, of which the Plymouth Rocks
and Wyandottes are the most popular varieties. The cocks of these
varieties weigh from 8½ lbs. to 9½ lbs., and the hens 6½ lbs. to 7½
lbs. They are valued both for their flesh and for egg production. The
rapid multiplication of varieties by modern breeders is illustrated
by the Wyandottes, which came into existence during the last third of
the century, and of which there are now five distinct varieties: the
Silver, Golden, White, Buff, and Black.

[Illustration: FRENCH COACH-HORSE “GLADIATOR.”]

The breeder’s art has been most successfully brought to bear in
stimulating the function of egg production. Not many years ago, an
average yield of 125 to 150 eggs annually from the hens of even a small
flock was considered all that it was possible to obtain, but at present
there are varieties which may be relied upon to produce more than 200
eggs annually. In some instances, it is alleged that an average of
nearly 300 eggs a year has been reached in small flocks which have been
given special care.

It should not be forgotten that there has also been great improvement
in the various breeds of horses. The heavy draught horses have been
bred into a more compact form, with better legs and feet and less
sluggish disposition. The most noticeable advance has, however,
been in the lighter grades of horses, and this has largely been
accomplished by infusing the blood of the English thoroughbred. The
French, by systematically breeding the heavy mares of the country
to thoroughbred stallions with careful selection of the offspring,
produced an extremely valuable breed of carriage-horses, known there as
the _demi-sang_, and which have been imported into the United States
as French coach-horses. These animals, beautiful in form and action,
have been brought to a high degree of perfection, and the breed is so
well established that its good qualities are reliably transmitted from
generation to generation.

There are also German coach-horses and similar breeds in several other
countries, which have been established by following the same general
plan as that adopted by the French. These breeds are peculiarly the
product of the nineteenth century, and are in their most valuable
condition as the century closes.

The American trotting horse has without doubt been one of the most
remarkable triumphs of the breeder’s art which the century has seen.
Originating in considerable obscurity, but undoubtedly owing much of
its excellence to the thoroughbred, the trotter was born with the
century, and has continually increased its speed until the very end.
It now gives promise of continuing its evolution through at least a
considerable part of the twentieth century. In the decade from 1800
to 1810, the best recorded speed at this gait was 2:59; from 1810 to
1820, the time was lowered to 2:48½; from 1830 to 1840, it reached
2:31½; from 1840 to 1850, the limit was 2:28; from 1850 to 1860, 2:19¼;
from 1860 to 1870, 2:17¼; from 1870 to 1880, 2:12¾; from 1880 to 1890,
2:08¾; and from 1890 to 1898, 2:03¾.

This extraordinary and constantly progressing increase in speed during
the century has excited the interest and admiration of the world. It
is, however, quite generally admitted that too much attention has been
given to speed and not enough to disposition, size, conformation, and
soundness, to bring the animals to their highest value for other than
racing purposes.

Owing to the relatively small extent of agricultural territory and the
great development of manufactures, Great Britain has become the best
market in the world for animals and animal products. The purchases
of cattle, sheep, beef, and mutton have been particularly large.
Considering, first, the importations of cattle, it is found that during
the five years from 1861 to 1865 inclusive, the average number was
174,177; from 1866 to 1870, the average was 194,947; from 1871 to 1875,
215,990; from 1876 to 1880, 272,745; from 1881 to 1885, 387,282; from
1886 to 1890, 438,098; from 1891 to 1895, 448,139; and for the two
years 1896 and 1897, 590,437.

This unparalleled growth in the consumption of foreign cattle has
had a marked influence in encouraging the development of the cattle
industry of some other parts of the world, particularly in the United
States, Canada, and Argentina. The export trade of the United States
has developed even more rapidly than the import trade of Great Britain.
In 1871 this traffic was in its infancy, and but 20,530 head of cattle
were exported, valued at $400,000. By 1879 the number had increased
to 136,720, valued at $8,300,000. Then came the British restrictions
prohibiting American cattle from leaving the docks where landed, and
requiring their slaughter on these docks within ten days from their
arrival. These regulations were a rude shock to the American cattle
grower, and led to measures here for the control and eradication of
the cattle diseases which were cited by the English authorities as the
cause of their unfavorable action.

Although the pleuro-pneumonia, about which most apprehension was
expressed, has long since been extirpated, and an elaborate inspection
service has been organized to prevent any affected animals from leaving
our shores, the restrictions have been continued. Fortunately, the
trade was only temporarily embarrassed, and has continued its growth
notwithstanding this obstruction. In 1889 these exports first exceeded
200,000, and the following year reached 394,836. Since that time the
number has fluctuated between 287,000 and 392,000, until 1898, when it
reached the enormous aggregate of 439,255, valued at $37,800,000. Not
quite all of these cattle have gone to Great Britain, but that has been
the destination of by far the greater part.

[Illustration: PACING HORSE “STAR POINTER.” TIME, 1 M. 59¼ S.]

The exports of sheep have varied widely, according to the fluctuations
of the markets at home and abroad. From 1870 to 1873 the number varied
from 39,000 to 66,000; from 1874 to 1889, it varied from 110,000 to
337,000. In 1890 the exports were but 67,500; in 1891, 60,900; in 1892,
46,900; and in 1893, 37,200. Beginning with 1894, the exports of sheep
again increased, reaching in that year 132,000; in 1895 they were
405,000; and in 1896, 491,000. In 1897 there was a decrease to 244,000,
and in 1898 a further decrease to 200,000, valued at $1,213,000.

The export trade in horses and mules was inconsiderable, varying from
2000 to 8000 a year until 1895, when 14,000 horses and 4800 mules
were shipped to foreign ports. This trade increased in 1896 to 25,126
horses and 6534 mules, together valued at about $4,000,000. In 1897 a
further increase was made to 39,532 horses and 7753 mules, the value
being $5,400,000. And, finally, in 1898 there were exported the largest
number ever sent from this country, amounting to 51,150 horses and
6996 mules, valued at $6,691,000.

Swine are not exported in very large numbers, as they do not stand
shipping well. The largest number sent abroad was 158,581, in 1874, the
value of which was $1,625,837. In 1897 and 1898 there were only 16,800
exported each year. Very few of these cross the ocean.

This resumé of the development of the international traffic in live
animals and the status of the animal industry would not be complete
without some reference to the markets for animal products. The quantity
of foreign meat consumed in Great Britain is most remarkable. The
imports of fresh beef, which from 1861 to 1865 averaged but 15,772
cwts., had increased in the years 1891 to 1895 to an average of
2,020,668 cwts., and in 1897 exceeded 3,000,000 cwts. The proportion
of this supplied by the United States is indicated by the returns for
1896, giving a total of 2,659,700 cwts. of imported beef, of which this
country furnished 2,074,644 cwts.

Great Britain also imported 3,193,276 cwts. of fresh mutton in 1897,
more than nine tenths of it being frozen carcasses from Argentina and
Australasia. Of fresh and salted pork, the United States supplied
4,183,800 cwts. out of a total of 6,563,688 cwts. The principal other
animal products imported by that country are, 1,750,000 cwts. of lard,
276,458 cwts. of rabbits, and 1,683,810,000 eggs.

The continent of Europe consumes considerable quantities of lard
and salted pork, which are largely furnished by the United States,
notwithstanding the unfavorable attitude of the governments towards
such traffic and the existence of many annoying and injurious
regulations. Fresh meats from America have been practically excluded.

The British markets for dairy products and wool have also had
considerable influence upon the prosperity of the animal industries in
various parts of the world. The rapidly increasing demand for dairy
products is worthy of attention. In 1877 there were imported into the
United Kingdom 1,637,403 cwts. of butter and margarine. In 1897 the
imports had been raised to 3,217,801 cwts. of butter and 936,543 cwts.
of margarine, or a total of 4,154,344 cwts., being two and one half
times the quantity imported in 1877.

The quantity of cheese imported in 1877 was 1,653,920 cwts., and had
increased to 2,603,608 cwts. in 1897.

The country supplying the largest quantity of butter in 1896 was
Denmark, with France second, Sweden third, Holland fourth, and
Australasia fifth. Nearly all of the margarine came from Holland. The
largest quantity of cheese came from Canada, the United States being
second, with less than half the quantity furnished by her neighbor to
the north, and Holland third.

The quantity of wool imported by the United Kingdom, France, Germany,
Austria, Belgium, United States, and other consuming countries,
increased from 200,000 tons, in the decade 1821–1830, to 3,300,000 tons
in 1871–1880. This wool came principally from Australia, River Plate,
South Africa, Russia, and Spain.

The excess of imports of wool into the United Kingdom over the exports
were, in 1892, 312,217,111 lbs., and in 1896, 383,845,450 lbs. Of the
total quantity imported by the United Kingdom in 1896, the United
States supplied but 4,500,000 lbs., while Australasia furnished
477,600,000 lbs.; Cape of Good Hope, 70,000,000 lbs.; British East
Indies, 43,000,000 lbs.; Natal, 21,000,000 lbs.; France, 20,000,000
lbs.; Turkey, 16,500,000 lbs.; and Belgium, 11,400,000 lbs.

The tendency of the last decade of the nineteenth century has been to
displace horses and adopt mechanical motors. The great increase of
steam railroads, cable cars, electric cars, bicycles, and automobile
vehicles has so reduced the demand for these animals that their value
has decreased over fifty per cent. While there is still a good market
for horses suitable for carriage use, for drays, for army service,
and for agricultural purposes, buyers are becoming more critical and
the future is uncertain. As it is five or six years after a breeding
establishment is started before any of the horses produced can be
placed upon the market, the effect of this uncertainty is to discourage
would-be horse breeders and influence them toward other enterprises.

[Illustration: AUTOMOBILE OR HORSELESS CARRIAGE.]

The end of the century also finds the sheep industry in a depressed
condition on account of over-production. The vast quantities of wool
grown in Australasia and South Africa have clogged the markets to such
an extent that Australian wool in the London market has dropped from
15d. per pound in 1877 to 8¼d. in 1897, and South African wool from
15¾d. to 7½d. during the same period. Other wools have fallen in about
the same proportion. Although sheep are raised for the production of
mutton as well as wool, and the tendency in the United States has been
towards the breeding of mutton sheep, the value of these animals has
been reduced about one half.

There have been periods of depression with the cattle and swine
industries, but prices have been well sustained. The European markets
are yearly requiring larger supplies, and the stock of beef-producing
cattle in the United States, in proportion to the population, is
rapidly diminishing. The decreased number is in a slight degree
counterbalanced by earlier maturity; but when due allowance is made for
this, it is plain that the United States has not the surplus of beef
which it boasted a few years ago. At the same time, our meat trade in
the markets of the world is threatened with more serious competition
from South America, Australasia, and even Russia.

The century closes in a period of wonderful achievements in the
extension of transportation facilities and in the education of the
masses in all parts of the world. The producer in South America,
Africa, and Australasia keeps abreast with the most enlightened
stock-growers of Europe and America in his knowledge of the best
breeds, the most economical methods of feeding, and the most desirable
handling of his products. There is no animal product so perishable but
that it can now be sent from the antipodes to London in good condition.
All of this has brought surprising changes in the traffic between
different countries and in the modification of industries to meet new
conditions. The producers of the most distant parts of the world are
aggressively entering our nearest markets. Competition is becoming more
intense, and commercial rivalry is assuming more the appearance of
warfare than heretofore. The nations of the world are actively engaged
in assisting their people in this struggle. They diffuse information
as to the best and most economical methods of production, they seek
out new markets, they subsidize transportation lines, they assist in
the introduction of new kinds of goods, they sustain their subjects in
the most aggressive practices, they exclude the products of competing
countries by tariffs and hostile sentiment, by discriminations,
by unpacking, delaying, or damaging goods, under the pretext of
inspection, and by burdensome charges and regulations. Some countries
have gone so far as to absolutely prohibit competing products for
comprehensive but indefinite sanitary reasons.

The outcome of this commercial warfare cannot be foreseen. The
struggle has been, and is, fiercest over the international traffic
in animals and animal products. The greatest forces of the world
are to-day contending as to what the future shall be. The United
States has only recently begun to realize that it also must take
part in this commercial struggle, if it would retain markets for its
products and secure prosperity for its people. Its trade has been
unjustly prohibited and discriminated against, its merchants have been
unfairly treated and insulted, and its protests have been treated
with ill-disguised contempt. Notwithstanding all these efforts at
repression, American trade has gone on increasing at an amazing rate,
the forbearance of the government having been far overbalanced by the
energy of the people. Having grown to be one of the greatest powers
of the world, with magnificent resources yet undeveloped, the United
States will no doubt maintain its position and continue to supply
the markets of the world with the best animals, the best meats, and
probably with the best dairy products.

LEADING WARS OF THE CENTURY

BY MAJOR GENERAL JOSEPH WHEELER, U. S. ARMY.

I. WARS OF THE UNITED STATES.

The progress of the nineteenth century, in everything that pertains
to civilization, arts, and sciences, has been greater than the total
progress in any decade of centuries in the history of the world, and
this is equally true in regard to the art and science of WAR; for the
expenditure of blood and treasure in the prosecution of the wars and
the fighting of the battles of this century far exceeds that of any
other like period.

The first year of the nineteenth century dawned upon the United States
at peace with the world. In September, 1800, Napoleon, finding that
he could not coerce the young nation into “an entangling alliance,”
and fearing lest the United States should join England in opposing
him, found it his best policy to conclude a peace. The brilliant
achievements of the newly organized navy, under Commodore Truxton, not
only illuminated these early pages of our history, but established a
prestige never yet forfeited; for the history of this branch of our
service is unparalleled from the first effort, during the Revolution,
of Esek Hopkins, to that of George Dewey at Manila, and Sampson and
Schley at Santiago.

WAR WITH BARBARY STATES.—In 1803 the United States determined to end
the piracy of the Barbary States, and an expedition under Commodore
Preble was sent to the Mediterranean. The Philadelphia, while pursuing
a pirate, was grounded off the coast of Tripoli, and captured by the
Tripolitans, who made slaves of the crew and prisoners of the officers.
In February, 1804, Captain Decatur, with seventy-six men from his ship,
the Intrepid, boarded the Philadelphia, killed or drove off the Moors,
fired the vessel, and returned without the loss of a man, although
fiercely attacked by the shore batteries. In July, Commodore Preble,
with his squadron, laid siege to Tripoli, but his bombardment was
ineffective. General Eaton, consul to Tunis, induced Hamet, the brother
of Yusef, who had usurped the sovereignty of Tripoli, to furnish him a
troop of Arab cavalry and a company of Greeks. With these, and a band
of Tripolitan rebels and a force of American sailors, he crossed the
Barcan Desert, stormed and captured Derne, an eastern seaport of Yusef.
The latter was glad to make peace, and a treaty was signed June 4, 1805.

INDIAN WARS.—From 1809 to 1811 fighting with the Indians in the South
and Northwest was constant. General Harrison and the celebrated Indian
chief Tecumseh were the principal actors.

WAR OF 1812.—The contest between England and France for the dominion
of the seas was the cause of the war of 1812. England declared the
German and French coast to be in a state of blockade. Napoleon, in
1806, made the same declaration regarding British ports. In 1807,
England prohibited trade with the coast of France. American commerce
was injured and almost destroyed by the combined action of the two
powers. Four years were consumed in negotiations, with constant
aggressions on the part of England, and on June 19, 1812, Congress
declared war. The great error of the campaign was the attempted
invasion of Canada. Had the war been made entirely upon the seas, an
early peace might have ensued.

The war began on the Lakes, and, repulsed in the effort to make a stand
on the Canada shore, and falling back, Hull surrendered Detroit, August
5. Again, at Queenstown, October 13, the Americans were defeated with
the loss of a thousand men. Altogether the first year of the war was a
disastrous one on land.

[Illustration: COMMODORE STEPHEN DECATUR.]

At sea, the navy, consisting of not more than a half-dozen frigates,
with its magnificently disciplined officers, had been eminently
successful. On August 13, the Essex, Captain Porter, captured the
British sloop Alert; on August 19, Captain Hull, commanding the
Constitution, destroyed the Guerriere off the Gulf of St. Lawrence;
October 18, the Wasp, Captain Jones, captured the Frolic, but later in
the day both the Frolic and the Wasp fell into the hands of the British
ship Poictiers. October 25, Captain Decatur, with the frigate United
States, captured the Macedonian off the Azores; on December 29, after a
desperate fight in the South Atlantic, Captain Bainbridge, commanding
the Constitution, defeated the British ship Java.

The campaign of 1813 opened on the Canadian frontier with the several
divisions in command of Generals Harrison, Dearborn, and Hampton. On
June 8, General Winchester, with eight hundred Kentuckians, drove the
British and Indians, under Proctor, from Frenchtown, on the River
Raisin, but returning with a force of fifteen hundred, they obliged
Winchester to surrender, which he only consented to do under Proctor’s
promise to protect the Americans from the Indians; which promise
Proctor treacherously disregarded, and marched away, leaving the sick
and wounded Kentuckians to be massacred. Henceforth the Kentucky war
cry was, “Remember the River Raisin,” and many were the British and
Indians who had cause to dread that slogan. May 5, General Harrison,
reinforced by General Green Clay and his Kentucky troops, repulsed the
British and their dusky allies under Tecumseh. July 21, they returned
four thousand strong, but were again repulsed.

[Illustration: COMMODORE PERRY AT BATTLE OF LAKE ERIE.]

The Americans, by wonderful exertion and hard work, built and equipped,
at Erie, a squadron of nine ships with fifty-five guns, the command
of which was given to Commodore Perry. September 10, Perry won his
grand victory on Lake Erie, over the English squadron of six ships and
sixty-three guns. This was the turning point of the war, and Perry’s
name goes down to posterity with the immortal names that never die.
On October 5, General Harrison, conveyed by Perry’s ships, landed his
forces in Canada and completely destroyed Proctor’s army, Tecumseh
being among the slain. So ended the war in the Northwest.

In the meantime, General Dearborn was fighting with varying success
in Upper Canada. Jackson, in the South, was avenging the Fort Mimms
massacre, finally crushing the Creeks early in the next year. The
British, under the odious Admiral Cochrane, plundered and ravaged and
burned everything in reach, from Lewistown to the Carolina coast,
seizing the negroes and selling them in the West Indies. During this
year the American navy continued to be successful, meeting few losses,
though the fighting was even more desperate.

July 5, 1814, the Americans defeated the British at Chippewa; and
on the 25th was fought the battle of Lundy’s Lane, where Generals
Brown and Scott were wounded. In this desperate battle, eight hundred
men were lost on either side; and though the battle was undecisive,
it had the effect of a victory for the Americans. August 14, five
thousand troops, under General Ross, were landed on the Patuxent, and,
defeating General Winder, who made a stand with a handful of men near
Bladensburg, proceeded to the city of Washington. After burning the
capitol and White House, and other buildings, they hastily withdrew.
The attempt to take Baltimore proved abortive, and on September 14
the British reëmbarked. It was at this time that Key wrote the “Star
Spangled Banner.” August 15, the enemy were repulsed at Fort Erie
with the loss of one thousand men, and a month later were finally
driven back. The whole British squadron on Lake Champlain surrendered
to Commodore MacDonough after a terrific fight for several hours, on
September 17, and on the same day the British army of twelve thousand
was forced to retreat from Plattsburg by General Macomb’s force of
forty-five hundred.

In Florida the Spaniards had allowed, if not encouraged, the English to
use their territory to fit out expeditions against the United States.
Jackson, with two thousand men, took possession of Pensacola on the 7th
of November, driving out the British.

December the 28th the British opened fire on New Orleans; again, on
January 1, 1815; and on January 8 Packenham, with twelve thousand men,
made his supreme effort. Jackson’s force was now about six thousand.
The British were driven to their ships after losing two thousand killed
and wounded, their general being among the slain. The American loss was
seven killed and six wounded. The war was kept up on the ocean until
March, the last capture being that of the British brig Penguin by the
American sloop-of-war Hornet, in the South Atlantic.

The treaty of Ghent had been signed on the 24th of September, 1814,
and the news of the glorious victory at New Orleans reached Washington
simultaneously with that of the signing of the treaty. The war had
been so distasteful to the people of New England that Massachusetts
and Connecticut had passed laws directly antagonistic to those of
the United States, and hostilities between the Federal and State
governments were feared, which, perhaps, were only averted by the
ending of the war. The issues leading to the war of 1812 were left
unsettled by the treaty, but England never again attempted to interfere
with American shipping.

SECOND WAR WITH BARBARY STATES.—Immediately on the close of the
war of 1812, the Algerians, supposing that the American navy was
badly crippled, began again their depredations on American commerce.
Commodore Decatur was sent to the Mediterranean with a squadron, and
once more gave them an American drubbing. June 17, 1815, he destroyed
two Algerine vessels; June 28, in front of the city of Algiers, he
demanded the release of all American prisoners, indemnification for all
property destroyed, and a relinquishment of all claims for tribute from
the United States. The Dey quickly assented to the terms, and signed a
treaty of peace. Tunis, Tripoli, and Morocco were likewise brought to
terms, the United States thus taking the lead of all the other powers
in its determination to break up the piracy of the Barbary States.

MEXICAN WAR.—The Republic of Texas became, by its own request and by
Act of Congress, one of the United States July 4, 1845. Mexico prepared
for war; the United States took measures to protect the new State.
March 8, 1846, General Zachary Taylor marched with fifteen hundred men
to a point on the Rio Grande opposite Matamoras, where he erected Fort
Brown.

[Illustration: SCHOOLSHIP SARATOGA.]

To the secretary of war, William L. Marcy, and to General Winfield
Scott was due the plan of campaign, the battles of which, like
instantaneous flashes of victory from the beginning of the war until
its close, illumine the pages of American history. Then, as now,
Congress was slow to respond to the needs of the military branch of the
government.

April 24, 1846, hostilities began. General Taylor advanced into Mexico
and, May 8, won the brilliant victory of Palo Alto, and again, the next
day, the battle of Resaca de la Palma. Taylor’s force was less than
one third the number of the enemy, whose loss was one thousand. These
two battles crushed the flower of Santa Anna’s army. Taylor returned
to the relief of Fort Brown, where the brave garrison had sustained a
cannonade for 168 hours. September 24, Monterey and its garrison of
nine thousand men were taken by General Taylor with six thousand.

February 23, 1847, Taylor gained the glorious victory of Buena Vista,
in which the Mexican loss was 2000, the American, 714. At times the
Mexicans were within a few yards of Bragg’s guns. “A little more
grape, Captain Bragg,” was Taylor’s celebrated order, the execution
of which decided the day. The American loss was severe in officers.
Taylor’s force, depleted by more than two thirds, which had been
sent to reinforce General Scott, was barely forty-five hundred; the
Mexican troops numbered twenty thousand. Captain Fremont, assisted
by Commodores Sloat and Stockton, had subjugated California; General
Kearney and Colonel Doniphan, Northern Mexico. Doniphan defeated the
Mexicans at Bracito, December 25, 1846, and at Sacramento, February
8, 1847, and took possession of Chihuahua, a city of forty thousand
inhabitants, and marched to join General Wool at Saltillo, March 22.

Early in January, 1847, General Scott reached the mouth of the Rio
Grande, where he awaited the eight thousand troops sent by General
Taylor. This raised his force to twelve thousand. These were landed at
Sacrificios. The Americans debarked just below Vera Cruz between sunset
and ten o’clock on the night of March 8 without a single accident.
With wonderful skill the investiture of Vera Cruz and the castle of
St. John de Ulloa was completed. On March 22 the Governor of Vera Cruz
was summoned to surrender. Day and night the mortar batteries played
upon the city, the fleet ably assisting; and on the 29th the stars and
stripes floated above the walls of city and fortress. The Americans
lost but two officers and a few soldiers. April 18, the magnificent
victory at Cerro Gordo, where three thousand Mexicans were captured,
was won; April 19, Jalapa was taken; April 22, Pecote, the strongest of
Mexican forts, was captured; and May 15, Puebla surrendered to General
Worth. Ten thousand prisoners, seven hundred cannon, ten thousand
stands of arms, and thirty thousand shot and shells were captured
within two months. When the army entered Puebla it numbered but
forty-five hundred.

Reinforcements reaching him, Scott set out from Puebla to the valley of
Mexico on August 7. August 20, the heights of Contreras were assailed
and taken, and the battle of Churubusco—with nine thousand Americans
against thirty thousand Mexicans—was fought and won. September 8,
Molino del Rey was taken; September 13, the heights of Chapultepec.
The Mexicans fled from the capital, and the victorious American army
marched in and took possession of the city, September 14, 1847. Here
Scott and his noble warriors rested until the treaty was concluded at
Guadalupe Hidalgo, February 2, 1848, and peace was proclaimed, July 4,
by President Polk. Guadalupe Hidalgo, New Mexico, and California were
ceded to the United States, $15,000,000 paid to Mexico, and the debts
due from Mexico to American citizens were assumed by the United States.

THE CIVIL WAR.—It is not here the place to rehearse or to discuss
the causes which led to America’s Civil War, a war perhaps the most
stupendous recorded in history. Looking backward, after the bloody
foot-prints have been well nigh obliterated by the growth of a
generation, we can see that the trend of human progress, the political
problems confronting the federated States, in the solution of which
were evolved elements of discord, the inherited antagonism between
the Puritans of the North and the Cavaliers of the South, all
combined to make the conflict inevitable. For more than a decade of
years grievances had been growing and rumblings were heard, like the
imprisoned fires beneath the surface of the earth, until the election
of Abraham Lincoln as President, pledged to a policy believed to be
inimical to the South, caused the outburst of the volcano, whose fierce
fires and molten lava for four years spread desolation over the land.

[Illustration: ROBERT E. LEE AT CHAPULTEPEC.]

Time and milder judgment have very nearly smoothed away the wrinkles
of discord, and the close of the century finds the nation a reunited
people, whose new compact is written in the life-blood of her sons on
the battlefields of the recent war with Spain.

December 20, 1860, South Carolina; January 9, 1861, Mississippi;
January 10, Florida; January 11, Alabama; January 18, Georgia; January
23, Louisiana, and February 1, Texas, one by one asserted their
supposed right to withdraw from the federal compact, and enacted
ordinances of secession in their several state conventions. Each State,
as it took action, claimed and possessed itself of all government
property, forts, guns, ammunition, within its borders, and armed its
militia for garrison duty. A convention of delegates from the seceded
States, held February 4, 1861, at Montgomery, Alabama, organized a new
federation, to be known as the Confederate States of America, chose
Jefferson Davis President and Alexander Stephens Vice-President, and
set the whole machinery of a provisional government in working order.
July 20, Richmond became the capital of the Southern Confederacy.
Virginia seceded April 17; Arkansas, May 6; North Carolina, May 20, and
Tennessee, June 8. Kentucky declared neutrality.

Lincoln, upon assuming the executive chair, March 4, 1861, found the
treasury depleted, the army of only sixteen thousand men scattered in
the West, and many of its best officers already with the Confederacy.
The navy had been sadly neglected by Congress, partly because this
branch of the service had been steadily antagonized by the West, so
that at the beginning of the war, both as to vessels and armament, it
was by no means in a condition for active service. As in the army, some
of its most valuable officers had espoused the cause of their native
States, and the South Atlantic and Gulf ports, being in possession
of the new federation, left the United States vessels no place of
refuge. With unlimited means at command, the Union navy increased the
number of its vessels to 588—75 of them ironclads—with 4443 guns
and 30,000 men, before the end of 1862. Torpedoes and steel rams were
first used during this war, and monitors, just invented, were used
by the United States. With a nucleus of 10 vessels, around which to
build its navy, the Confederacy had, by November, raised the number to
34. Until the blockade became effective, “cotton was king;” for, in
October, 1861, the Nashville, running out with a heavy consignment,
brought back into Charleston in exchange a cargo worth $3,000,000.
Vessel after vessel was bought from English shipbuilders, among them
the celebrated Alabama, which, in the fourteen months of her service,
captured sixty-nine prizes, and destroyed ten million dollars’ worth of
merchandise. The armored ram Stonewall was bought in France.

April 12, 1861, Fort Sumter, in Charleston harbor, was forced to
surrender to the Confederates, and the first shot at the old flag
ushered in the long, bitter struggle.

Troops were called for by Lincoln. Lieutenant-General Scott, the
veteran hero of Mexico, was in command of the army. In three months,
three hundred thousand men were in the field. One hundred thousand had
swarmed to the Confederate ranks. General McClellan was sent to the
front and, after the resignation of Scott in the latter part of the
year, was made commander of the army.

July 21, the battle of Bull Run was fought. The Union troops were
disastrously routed and retreated in confusion to Washington. The army
did little more during this year.

[Illustration: CASTLE WILLIAM. MILITARY PRISON, GOVERNOR’S ISLAND, NEW
YORK HARBOR.]

April 21, after setting fire to and destroying the Navy Yard and ships,
Norfolk was evacuated by the Union forces. The frigate Merrimac, which
had been sunk, was raised by the Confederates, plated with iron,
renamed “Virginia,” and became the scourge of the shipping off the
Virginia coast.

The navy, as is usual, and because of its very organization, got in its
effective work much earlier than did the army, and the seizure of the
forts and ports on the coast of the seceded States began at once. Fort
Hatteras was taken August 29; Port Royal, in South Carolina, November
7. November 7 a naval officer, by overhauling an English mail steamer
and taking off Messrs. Mason and Slidell, who had been appointed
commissioners of the Confederate States to France and England, very
nearly caused a complication with the latter power. Mr. Seward’s
diplomacy settled the incident amicably, and the commissioners were
allowed to proceed upon their mission, which, however, proved futile.
By the close of the year, Maryland, Kentucky, and Missouri, at first
doubtful, were securely in the Union, though many of their citizens
were in the Southern army.

1862.—February 6, General Grant, commanding the army of the Tennessee,
with the assistance of Commodore Foote and his gunboats, captured Fort
Henry, on the Tennessee River, and, on the 16th, Fort Donelson on the
Cumberland. The Federal forces had reached the number of four hundred
and fifty thousand, of which McClellan had two hundred thousand.

May 23, at Front Royal, and May 25, at Winchester, “Stonewall” Jackson
defeated the Union troops and forced them across the Potomac. Banks,
Fremont, and McDowell, concentrating their forces, bore down on
Jackson, who slipped through their lines, and, on June 9, defeated
Shields at Fort Republic.

The cry of the Northern press was, “On to Richmond,” and McClellan
endeavored to obey the command. He had arrived not far from the city,
between the York and James rivers, when he was defeated in the bloody
battle of Seven Pines, May 31 and June 1. The Confederate General
Johnston was wounded, and General Lee was assigned to the command of
the army of Northern Virginia, which he retained until the end.

The Seven Days’ battles, from June 25 to July 1, were fought at fearful
cost to the Confederates; nevertheless, “it was a glorious victory,”
and the siege of Richmond was raised. Lee advanced toward Washington,
met the armies of Banks and Pope, and defeated them in the second
battle of Bull Run, August 29 and 30, and at Chantilly, September 1
and 2, forcing Pope’s army to retreat to Washington. The clamor in the
South had been, “On to Washington.” Lee crossed the Potomac at Harper’s
Ferry and took twelve thousand prisoners. McClellan, who had been
recalled, met the Confederates at Sharpsburg (Antietam), September 17,
and fought a battle with undecisive results. Each side lost about ten
thousand men, and Lee returned.

The Union army under Burnside, who had superseded McClellan, met a
fearful repulse at Fredericksburg, December 13, with a loss of fourteen
thousand. The Confederate loss was five thousand.

December 31, January 1 and 2, was fought the terrible battle of
Murfreesboro, Tennessee, where Bragg’s force was 35,000, and his loss
in killed, wounded, and missing, 10,466. Rosecrans’s force was 43,400,
and his loss 12,595.

March 8, the Virginia attacked the Union fleet at Fortress Monroe and
destroyed the Cumberland and the Congress. The next day, the Monitor
attacked the Virginia, and, after five hours’ fighting, succeeded
in disabling her so that she returned to Norfolk. The Virginia was
destroyed by the Confederates before evacuating Norfolk, May 10.

Admiral Farragut, with a fleet of 45 vessels, entered the Mississippi
and bombarded the forts of St. Philip and Jackson. Despising the fear
of mines and torpedoes, he continued on his course, defeating the
Confederate fleet, and, together with General Butler, entered New
Orleans April 25. During this year the navy, with the assistance of
land forces, had retaken all important ports on the Virginia, North
Carolina, and Georgia coasts, seriously interfering with the blockade
running, upon which the Confederacy depended for its foreign supplies.
The year 1862 closed with no advantage having been gained on either
side.

[Illustration: GENERALS ROBERT E. LEE AND STONEWALL JACKSON.]

1863.—On January 1, Lincoln issued the threatened Emancipation
Proclamation. This destroyed the last hope of the Confederacy for
recognition by England. No event of importance occurred before the
middle of spring, when Hooker, who had relieved Burnside, made
another advance upon Richmond, and was routed by Lee and Jackson at
Chancellorsville, May 2, and on the 5th was forced across the Rapidan
with a loss of seventeen thousand. The Confederate loss was less than
five thousand. In Jackson’s death the Confederacy received a blow, the
consequences of which may never be estimated.

Lee’s army again crossed the Potomac for an invasion of the North.
The Union forces, under Meade, marched in an almost parallel line
with Lee’s through Maryland into Pennsylvania. They met and fought
at Gettysburg, July 1, 2, and 3, one of the decisive battles of the
world’s history. Lee was forced to again retire beyond the river. The
Union could well afford the loss of twenty-three thousand men, but
Lee’s loss of twenty thousand of the choice troops of his army was
irreparable.

In the meantime, Grant had been sent to open the Mississippi, and after
a six weeks’ siege, on July 4, Vicksburg, with nearly thirty thousand
prisoners and vast quantities of stores, fell into his hands. These two
almost simultaneous victories greatly encouraged the North, and formed
the turning point in the history of the war. July 9, Banks’s victory
at Port Hudson accomplished the desired possession of the Mississippi
River.

Bragg, who had been sorely pressed by Rosecrans, made a stand at
Chickamauga, defeating the Union General Rosecrans, September 19 and
20, and forcing him to retreat to Chattanooga, where he was besieged by
Bragg. Grant, with Sherman, coming to his aid, the battles of Lookout
Mountain and Missionary Ridge were fought, November 23 and 25, and
Bragg was driven back into Georgia.

The Federal navy was gradually taking possession of the whole coast,
and Charleston was tightly blockaded. In March the Confederate ship
Nashville was sunk in the entrance of the Savannah River.

During this year both governments were forced to resort to
conscription. Lincoln ordered a draft, and, in July, a three days’ riot
in consequence prevailed in New York, during which two million dollars’
worth of property was destroyed.

1864.—In March, Grant was put in command of the whole Union army, the
grade of lieutenant-general having been revived in his behalf. He left
Sherman in command, repaired to Washington, and, May 3, started on the
third campaign against Richmond, with a force of one hundred and forty
thousand. Sherman, with one hundred thousand, was to march to Atlanta.
The whole strength of the Union army at this time was about seven
hundred thousand. Grant had spent some weeks in formulating his plans
of campaigns, from the main features of which he never deviated. The
Union had at last found the man, and at the same time had acquired the
wisdom to leave the conduct of the war to his judgment; proving, also,
that “there is no war on record that has not given its man to the world
or shaped the destiny of some other.”

Crossing the Rapidan, Grant encountered the Confederates, and the
fighting, on the 5th, 6th, and 7th, of the battles of the Wilderness,
was terrific, but the result undecisive. At Spottsylvania he fought
from the 8th to the 18th with fearful loss. June 1, he was repulsed at
Cold Harbor, and again on the 3d, and fighting, more or less desultory,
continued in that vicinity until the 12th. Since the opening of the
campaign, the Union army had lost sixty thousand men; the Confederate
thirty thousand. Grant moved on Petersburg and began the siege which
lasted from June until the next April. The western part of Virginia had
seceded from the eastern portion, and, June 20, was admitted into the
United States.

[Illustration: GENERAL ULYSSES S. GRANT.]

To divert Grant, and, if possible, to raise the siege of Petersburg,
in July, Lee sent General Early to threaten Washington and Baltimore,
which he accomplished without, however, affecting Grant’s position.
Returning laden with spoils, Early turned, and driving back the
Federal troops invaded Pennsylvania, burning Chambersburg, and came
back again bringing vast quantities of supplies. Sheridan was sent to
dispose of Early and to ravage the valley. At Winchester, he met and
defeated Early in a very severe fight on October 20, almost destroying
the force under that general’s command. Sherman set out for Chattanooga
on May 7, marching towards Atlanta. At Dalton he met General Johnston’s
army of fifty thousand men. Johnston’s masterly retreat from Dalton to
Atlanta is unrivaled in military history. He made a stand from May 25
to June 4 at Dallas, but, being outflanked, was obliged to fall back.
The next stand was made at Great Kenesaw, on June 22, when he repulsed
the Federals. On the 27th, Sherman made a powerful assault, but was
again repulsed with a loss of four thousand, Johnston’s loss being
four hundred; but, again outflanked. Johnston was forced across the
Chattahoochie, and July 10 found the Confederate army entrenched in
Atlanta.

Johnston’s retreating tactics caused the people to clamor for a
“fighting leader,” and Davis, in transferring the command from
Johnston at such a crucial time, committed a grave error. Johnston was
superseded by General Hood, whose chief ambition was to fight, which,
in this case, was a great mistake in judgment. On the 20th, 22d, and
28th of July, Hood assaulted the lines of the besiegers, only to be
repulsed again and again. In these fights more men were lost than
during Johnston’s long, skillful retreat. An injudicious movement
by Hood separated his command, obliging him to evacuate Atlanta, of
which Sherman, on September 2, took possession. In its advance on
Atlanta, the Union army had lost thirty thousand men. Hood saved his
army and made his way towards Nashville, hoping to divert Sherman from
Georgia. At Franklin, November 30, he met General Schofield, and drove
him back to Nashville, from whence General Thomas made a sortie, and
fell upon Hood’s troops, December 15, completely routing them. In the
two fights, Hood lost in killed, wounded, and captured over eleven
thousand. With the remnant he escaped into Alabama, and these finally
reached Johnston, participated in his last fight with Sherman, and were
surrendered at Raleigh with the troops of their old commander.

November 14, Sherman burned Atlanta, cut all telegraph lines and began
his “March to the Sea,” ravaging, devastating, and utterly destroying
everything in his reach. He was opposed by the Confederate cavalry,
which successfully defended the cities of Macon and Augusta, upon which
the Confederacy mainly depended for the manufacture of munitions of
war. Sherman entered Savannah on December 22, the advance having cost
him only 567 men killed and wounded.

[Illustration: SHERMAN’S MARCH TO THE SEA.]

On June 19, the celebrated sea fight between the Kearsarge and the
Alabama took place off Cherbourg, France. The Alabama was sunk after
a five hours’ fight. Admiral Semmes was rescued by the Deerhound,
belonging to an English gentleman, and thus saved from capture. August
5, Commodore Farragut, overcoming the Confederate ram Tennessee and the
gunboats, sailed into Mobile Bay, commanding his fleet from the maintop
of his flagship.

1865.—The opening of the campaign of 1865 found Grant’s army still
before Petersburg. On April 2, he ordered an attack along his whole
line, which had been so lengthened that the lines of Lee’s depleted
army were very thin. The Confederates were driven back with heavy loss.
Lee telegraphed to Davis: “My lines are broken in three places; we can
hold Petersburg no longer. Richmond must be evacuated this evening.”
That night Admiral Semmes, in obedience to orders, destroyed the
Confederate fleet in the James River. Richmond was in the possession of
the Union forces the next day, and on April 4 Lincoln held a reception
in Davis’s vacated mansion. Lee attempted to break through Grant’s
lines at Appomattox, but closely pursued by Sheridan, and finding
further retreat impossible, he surrendered with about twenty-six
thousand men on the 9th of April.

Grant’s magnanimous terms were worthy of his fame. The troops were
paroled on condition of promise not to take up arms until exchanged.
The officers were permitted to keep baggage and side arms, and all were
to retain their horses, as, Grant said, “they would be needed in the
crops.”

[Illustration: LEE’S SURRENDER AT APPOMATTOX.]

Turning northward from Savannah, Sherman continued his march and
reached Fayetteville, North Carolina. Wilmington had been captured
early in the year by a land and naval force. Johnston had been
reinforced by the garrison which had been forced to evacuate Charleston
and the remnant of Hood’s army, and had several severe fights, with no
decisive results, with Sherman, who entered Raleigh; and here, on April
26, Johnston’s army surrendered on the same terms given by Grant.

December 31 and January 1 Fort Fisher was captured, and on January 12
Wilmington was entered by the Federals; February 18, Charleston was
captured.

The regular battles during the Civil War numbered 892. Lincoln called
in all for 2,690,000 men. There were actually in service 1,490,000.
There were 400,000 disabled; 304,369 perished; 220,000 were captured,
and 26,000 died in captivity. The expenses of the war were $3,500,000
per day. The national debt was $2,700,000,000.

This great American War was fought on both sides with a courage
and fortitude never before experienced in the annals of warfare.
As compared with the statements of forces and losses in battles of
European armies, the casualties in the battles of the Civil War were
three and four times as great. And this proves that in the American War
each side met “foe-men worthy of their steel.” These overwhelmingly
fearful casualties are not to be explained otherwise. And each
section respects the other more than before the war—a war in which
the conquered felt not, nor said, _peccavi_, and in which surrender
to greater numbers and heavier artillery involved no sacrifice of
belief in the truth and justice of their cause. Was there ever an
armed strife that brought forth greater generals or more knightly
valor, undiminished courage and unflinching fortitude on the part
of combatants? Together must the names of Grant and Lee go down to
posterity as great types of the American soldier,—the one, noble and
generous in victory; the other, though a hero uncrowned by success, a
warrior still more heroic in defeat.

THE SPANISH-AMERICAN WAR.—The proximate causes of the war with
Spain are tersely set forth in the Joint Resolution declaring
the independence of Cuba and demanding the withdrawal of Spanish
sovereignty therefrom, which says:—

“_Whereas_, The abhorrent conditions which have existed for more than
three years in the island of Cuba, so near our own borders, have
shocked the moral sense of the people of the United States, have been
a disgrace to Christian civilization, culminating as they have in the
destruction of a United States’ battleship, with 266 of its officers
and crew, while on a friendly visit in the harbor of Havana, and cannot
longer be endured, as has been set forth by the President of the United
States in his message to Congress of April 11, 1898, upon which the
action of Congress was invited; therefore,

“_Resolved_, by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled:

“_First_, That the people of the island of Cuba are, and of right ought
to be, free and independent.

“_Second_, That it is the duty of the United States to demand, and the
Government of the United States does hereby demand, that the Government
of Spain at once relinquish its authority and government in the island
of Cuba, and withdraw its land and naval forces from Cuba and Cuban
waters.

“_Third_, That the President of the United States be, and he hereby is,
directed and empowered to use the entire land and naval forces of the
United States, and to call into the actual service of the United States
the militia of the several States to such extent as may be necessary to
carry these resolutions into effect.

“_Fourth_, That the United States hereby disclaims any disposition
or intention to exercise sovereignty, jurisdiction, or control over
said Island, except for the pacification thereof, and asserts its
determination when that is completed to leave the government and
control of the Island to its people.”

This resolution was signed by the President at 11.24 o’clock A. M.,
April 20, 1898.

[Illustration: MORRO CASTLE, SANTIAGO, CUBA.]

It was on February 15, 1898, that the catastrophe referred to—the
blowing up of the Maine—occurred. On April 25, the formal declaration
of war was made.

Spain had three fleets,—Admiral Cervera’s flying squadron, the Asiatic
fleet under Admiral Montejo, and Admiral Camara’s fleet of heavy
armored vessels.

The American navy is always ready for emergencies, and even with the
grudging appropriations made by Congress, the “new navy,” while not
possessing vessels of such large size as those of some other nations,
was much more formidable than was generally supposed. Congress,
apprehending the outcome, had given the President $50,000,000 to
put the country on a war footing. In reply to the call for 125,000
volunteers, five times that number offered themselves.

It had been more than fifty years since the United States had
encountered a foreign foe, and since the close of the Civil War, for a
third of a century, peace had reigned.

[Illustration: ADMIRAL GEORGE DEWEY.]

April 25, by cable to Hong Kong, Commodore Dewey was ordered to find
and destroy the Spanish Asiatic fleet, which he proceeded to do on May
1st, without the loss of a single man. Entering Manila Bay, scorning
torpedoes and mines, his wonderful battle at Cavite is the admiration
of the world.

Schley, with his flying squadron, watched in Hampton Roads for an
attack by the enemy on the Atlantic coast. Havana was blockaded by
Sampson’s squadron April 22, and his searchlights seen from the Cuban
capital were as the handwriting on the sky, foredooming Spanish rule.
His tactics were to take no risk with his vessels while awaiting the
appearance of the Spanish ships, so he failed to return the greeting of
the shore batteries.

[Illustration: MAIN DECK OF CRUISER CHICAGO.]

The first casualties of the war were in Cardenas harbor May 11, when
upon the Winslow, while chasing a decoy gunboat too far under the fire
of the land batteries, Ensign Bagley and four sailors were the first
men of the navy to lay down their lives.

It was known that Cervera had sailed from Cadiz toward the West
Indies. Sampson made a tour of Porto Rico to hunt the Spaniard, who
mysteriously eluded the sight of the Americans. San Juan was bombarded
on May 12. On May 30 Schley, who in the meantime had arrived off
Santiago, dispatched: “I have seen the enemy’s ships with my own eyes.”
Cervera had then been in the harbor ten days. On the 31st, Schley
commenced a bombardment, and the forts at the mouth of Santiago harbor
and the vessels within replied for an hour. June 1 Sampson came, and
all hope of escape for Cervera was cut off. On that night Lieutenant
Hobson executed his bold, heroic plan of sinking the Merrimac in the
channel of the harbor, which was accomplished without the loss of one
of his seven co-heroes, although subjected to a deadly fire from forts
and vessels.

[Illustration: DEWEY’S GUNS AT MANILA.]

The first troops landed on Cuban soil were the marines, 650 in number,
under Lieutenant-Colonel Huntington. This battalion had been on board
the Panther since May 22, and the men were eager to land. After Sampson
had shelled the shore and adjacent hills and woods, on the afternoon of
June 10 the landing was made and the American flag raised for the first
time on Spanish territory in the west. No Spaniards were seen until
after the tents had been erected and the evening shadows were falling.
Then for five nights and days there was no sleep for these men, than
whom there were no greater heroes in this short, sharp war. With few
exceptions they received their “baptism of fire,” and nobly did they
acquit themselves.

I am told that when almost utterly exhausted the first platoon reached
the summit of Cusco hill, so exactly in unison was their fire that the
Spanish, believing that machine guns were opening upon them, turned
and ran, never again making a stand. The first to consecrate the soil
with his life’s blood was Dr. John Blair Gibbs, who left a $10,000
practice in New York to go as surgeon of the battalion, and who had
greatly endeared himself to both officers and men. Sergeant Goode, one
of the finest subalterns in the corps, and four men were killed. The
good condition and health of this battalion during the whole campaign
were due to the fine organization of the commissariat and the strict
discipline maintained in this corps.

General Shafter arrived off Santiago, June 20, with a force of 773
officers and 14,564 men. General Garcia, the Cuban commander, with four
thousand insurgents, was at Assuadero, eighteen miles west. There he,
Shafter, and Sampson held a consultation. On the 22d, the disembarkment
of troops was begun. On the morning of the 23d, General Lawton with
his division advanced to Juragua. Major-General Wheeler, after landing
964 of his force, pursuant to General Shafter’s orders, moved rapidly
to the front, and, passing through Lawton’s lines, pushed on to Las
Guasimas, attacking and defeating General Linares on the morning of
June 24.

The entire American force was pressed forward under General Wheeler,
General Shafter being detained on the ships to attend to the landing
of the armament and supplies. On the 29th, the commanding general left
his ships and pitched his camp on the Santiago road, and on the next
day orders were given for an attack along the whole line. In carrying
out these orders, General Lawton with about six thousand men attacked
El Caney, a small town about five miles north of Santiago. The garrison
consisted of 520 men, the defenses being one block-house and a shore
fortification. It was not until four o’clock that General Lawton’s
success was complete. His loss was 437 killed and wounded, and but 30
of the enemy succeeded in escaping and reaching the Spanish lines.
While Lawton was moving on El Caney, the cavalry division, unmounted,
and Kent’s infantry division were ordered to move forward. Crossing
San Juan River at a point about five hundred yards from the enemy’s
fortifications on San Juan ridge, the left of the cavalry rested on
the main Santiago road and the infantry formed to the left of the
cavalry. These troops were subjected to a very heavy fire in advancing
from El Pozo, in crossing the river and in forming on the other side;
they, however, most bravely charged the enemy in their strong position
on Kettle Hill and San Juan ridge, and drove them precipitately from
their strong fortifications; the American loss being 154 killed and
997 wounded. This placed the Americans in a position commanding the
fortifications around the city of Santiago.

[Illustration: GENERAL JOSEPH WHEELER.

(Copyright by Aimé Dupont, 1899.)]

The Spanish fleet, consisting of five armored cruisers of 7,000 tons
and 2 torpedo-boat destroyers, attempted to escape from Santiago at
9.30 o’clock on Sunday morning, July 3, just nine weeks after the
destruction of Montejo’s fleet. Schley and Sampson destroyed the
vessels and made prisoners of 70 officers and 1600 men; 350 were killed
and 160 wounded.

[Illustration: THE TRUCE BEFORE SANTIAGO.]

Fighting more or less severe occurred until the 10th, when negotiations
for surrender were inaugurated, resulting in the capitulation of
Santiago, July 16, the Spanish fortifications, twenty-four thousand
prisoners, and a large amount of arms and ammunition. At noon on
Sunday, July 17, 1898, the American flag was hoisted over the
headquarters at Santiago.

General Miles started on the invasion of Porto Rico, July 25, and
reached Guanica at daylight next morning. He landed with three thousand
five hundred men, marched toward Yauco, five miles distant, which he
entered after a skirmish, and was received enthusiastically by the
citizens, as he also was at Ponce, where he was joined by General
Wilson, who had come with the war ships, and who was made governor. The
army continued on to San Juan along the military road, meeting very
little opposition.

July 26, the French ambassador, M. Jules Cambon, acting for Spain, made
overtures for peace. The protocol was signed on April 21, by M. Cambon
and Secretary of State Day. A cessation of hostilities was proclaimed.
At the very moment of the signing of the protocol, the last naval
battle took place at Manzanilla, Cuba, and an artillery engagement at
Aybonito in Porto Rico.

[Illustration: AGUINALDO, THE TAGAL LEADER.]

The one-hundred-days Spanish-American war was concluded by the treaty
of Paris.

It will be only in the retrospect that we may tell the results of
this conflict. As the future unfolds them to our view, it may be that
it will have been more momentous in its consequences than we can now
determine. One thing it has proved, that is, that this nation is really
_reunited_; for, from all sections and from all grades of life, men
flocked together to fight and conquer under the old Stars and Stripes.

II. FOREIGN WARS.

NAPOLEONIC WARS.—The long contest between France and Austria began
when the Girondist ministry of France declared war, April 20, 1792. By
the execution of Louis XVI., January 21, 1793, the Revolution threw
down the gauntlet to all ancient Europe. England, whose sympathies
had hitherto been more or less with France, began to take measures to
bring about more cordial relations with the other powers of Europe.
Spain, Portugal, Austria, Prussia, and Russia, for the time seemed to
forget their several grievances as they found themselves confronted
with a totally new move on the chessboard of European autonomy. The
year 1794 saw the French Revolution progressing triumphantly, and all
Europe, except England and Austria, appeared acquiescent in apathetic
indifference. In 1795 the royalists made a supreme effort to recover
power, but were crushed by the “Man of Destiny,” and the Directory,
consisting of five members, of whom Carnot was one, came into power.
Dominated by the martial genius of Carnot, “the organizer of victory,”
the Directory won the confidence of the army. Scherer, the commander,
lacked the qualifications to undertake a successful campaign against
Austria, and Bonaparte, succeeding him, soon infused his own spirit
into the army and bound it to himself with a devotion that never failed.

Early in the year 1800, Napoleon, having been made first consul, took
up his abode in the old palace of the kings of France, the Tuileries.
The history of Napoleon for the ensuing fifteen years is the history
of Europe. It is, therefore, best to begin with the close of the
eighteenth century, in order to appreciate the situation at the dawn of
the nineteenth.

Austria and England, with several small German principalities, were
still in arms against France. The plans and movements of the armies
under Napoleon showed him to be verily a master in military skill.
Opening this campaign, he left Massena with about eight thousand
soldiers to hold the territory from Nice to Genoa, so as to keep the
Austrian army in Italy busy. He sent the Rhine army, under Moreau, to
threaten Bavaria and to secure the most important position between the
Rhine and the Danube. Moreau drove the Austrians to Ulm, and disposed
his left flank to support Napoleon. Meantime, he himself was recruiting
another army for operations on the Po. Baron de Melas, commanding the
Austrian troops in Northern Italy, besieged Massena in Genoa, which,
after severe suffering, surrendered, leaving De Melas free to join the
army of the Po. Napoleon was between de Melas and Austria. General Ott,
with eighteen thousand men, attempted to reach Placentia, but Lannes,
with twelve thousand, defeated him at Montebello, forcing him back to
Allesandria. Napoleon hastened across the Po to Stradella to intercept
De Melas and prevent his breaking through the French lines to Placentia.

[Illustration: NAPOLEON, 1814. (MEISSONIER.)]

The night of June 13, 1800, the French army was scattered, watching
along the Po and the Tessino for the Austrians, while their army, forty
thousand strong, with ten thousand more not far distant, was ready at
daybreak of the 14th to cut its way through the armies of France, and
reach Placentia. The French force was but eighteen thousand, but Victor
with his division held his position firmly, and the great leader,
Kellerman, was in command of the cavalry. Backward and forward surged
the battle with varying fortune, and at noon victory seemed perched
upon the banners of Austria. De Melas was so certain that the battle
was won that he galloped back to Allesandria and sent dispatches to
that effect to the governments of Europe. General de Zach was left
in command to conduct the pursuit and to drive the French across the
Scrivia. Napoleon, dismayed, hoping against hope that Desaix, whom he
had sent towards Novi the day before to look out in that quarter for
De Melas, might hear the thunders of the battle and return, saw him
in the distance, hurrying with his troops, who, though worn and tired,
were eager for the fight, and Napoleon saw already the tide of battle
turned.

Desaix had found no trace of the Austrians, but he had heard the sound
of battle at day dawn, and he knew that De Melas was there, and that
there he was needed, and not at Novi. He roused his division, and
hastened back to Napoleon. A short conference with his chief, to whose
questioning he answered, “The battle is lost, but it is only three
o’clock, there is yet time to win another,” and the battle of Marengo,
glorious in its consequences to Napoleon, stupendous in its carnage,
was won; but Desaix, the brave paladin, lay dead upon the field. De
Melas returned from Allesandria to meet the victorious army he had
left—flying in disorder—thoroughly routed. On December 2, Moreau and
Ney won the field of Hohenlinden, and the “peace of Luneville” was
concluded, February 9, 1801.

The result of this campaign was the cession of Austria’s strongholds in
the Tyrol and Bavaria to France, as also a number of important holdings
in Italy. France secured the left bank of the Rhine, the Belgian
provinces and Tuscany, and the king of Naples closed his harbors to
England. In March, 1802, by the “treaty of Amiens,” peace was concluded
with England.

The coalition of Denmark, Sweden, Russia, and Prussia, with France
against England, in 1800, fomented by Napoleon, broke down in 1801,
after Nelson’s battle of Copenhagen.

England had secured the supremacy of the sea and dominion over India,
rescued Portugal, Naples, and the States of the Church from France, and
restored the Sublime Porte to Turkey. Finding Napoleon again militating
against her interests, and resenting his encroachments, England
declared war against France in the spring of 1803. Russia espoused the
cause of England, Prussia held off, and Austria was friendly, though
not in fighting trim. The third coalition comprised England, Russia,
and Austria.

Powerless to hurt England on the seas, Napoleon, who had the year
previous been proclaimed emperor, attacked Austria, invaded her
territory, captured her army at Ulm, proceeded to Vienna, and occupied
a great part of the valley of the Danube. On December 2, 1805, the
“Battle of the Three Emperors” (the battle of Austerlitz) was fought.
The “Peace of Pressburg,” concluded December 26, left Austria shorn of
her ancient prestige, her title of German Empire, and of a great part
of her possessions. The “Sun of Austerlitz” melted the third coalition.
In the meantime the battle of Trafalgar, won by the immortal Nelson,
crushed the naval power of both France and Spain.

In September, 1806, Prussia declared war against France, and, to the
amazement of Europe, alone undertook to engage armies flushed from
their recent victories and still in Germany. October 14, Napoleon
utterly defeated the Prussians at Jena and Auerstadt, and entered
Berlin a conquerer, the king having fled to Königsberg. Russia came
to the aid of Prussia, but arrived too late to accomplish anything
except to check the advance of the French, whose armies wintered on the
Vistula. The next summer, however, the Russians met their final defeat
in this campaign at Friedland, and Königsberg was taken. The “Treaty of
Tilsit” ended the operations of this fourth coalition July 7, 1807.

The fifth coalition against Napoleon comprised England, Austria, Spain,
and Portugal. The decisive battle of this campaign was at Wagram, July
5 and 6, 1809, and terrible as were the consequences of his defeat
to Austria, so crippled was Napoleon that he willingly granted the
armistice of Znaim and concluded the “Peace of Vienna.” When the fifth
coalition ended, Napoleon had acquired the Illyrian provinces and part
of the Tyrol for France, and eventually the Emperor’s daughter, Maria
Louisa, for his wife.

[Illustration: ADMIRAL HORATIO NELSON.]

In 1812 came war with Russia, and that most disastrous campaign which
cost France more than three hundred thousand soldiers and Napoleon
his empire. Russia, England, Prussia, and Sweden formed the coalition
now, and Turkey had made peace with Russia. Napoleon crossed the
Niemen in June, halted at Wilna to put his new conscripts in better
order, addressed words of sympathy to Poland, and took measures to
keep Austria conciliated. The Russians retreated before him. He met
and fought and defeated them at Smolensk, August 17; they retreated in
good order, burning and destroying all in their reach. The terrible
battle of Borodino was fought September 7; the defeated Russians again
retreated in good order, pursuing the same tactics. Napoleon reached
Moscow September 15, but the heroic measure of Russia in destroying
that city was equal in its results to several victories. October 15,
the French troops commenced their fearful retreat. The Russian armies
grew bold, they harassed the French troops, weak from hunger and cold,
and from Moscow to Wilna their progress was one continual guerilla
warfare. From Wilna, their flight to France, December 5, was even more
disastrous. Of the grand army that set out in the spring not one fourth
ever returned.

Affairs in Spain had fared badly for France. Wellington defeated the
French army in Spain, and finally expelled it. France, though sometimes
shaken in her devotion by the conscription that was draining her
children’s blood, still had faith in Napoleon, and in 1813, having
raised another grand army, he undertook to subjugate Prussia. His
first victory was on the plain of Lutzen. The Prussians and Russians
retreated in good order through Dresden. Napoleon pursued and drove
them from Bauken, on May 20 and 21, and established his headquarters at
Dresden. Austria now joined the allies. In their attack upon Dresden,
August 26 and 27, they were defeated, but Russian troops and the King
of Bavaria coming up made Napoleon’s position untenable. The allies
were awaiting him at Leipsic. The battle raged for three days, and
Napoleon withdrew on October 19, utterly defeated.

January 23, 1814, Napoleon, having raised another army, left Paris to
assume command. The allies—England, Austria, Prussia, and Russia—were
more determined than ever to crush him. Many battles were fought, and
the fortunes of war varied. Blucher defeated him at La Pothiers on the
1st of February. Napoleon was the victor at Montenau; unsuccessful at
Soissons, March 3; victorious at Cravonne, March 7; and defeated by
Blucher at Laon, March 9. With more than half his army lost, Napoleon
worried the allies in their rear; but Blucher marched on Paris. The
prestige of Napoleon and France in Europe was at an end.

The Empress and the regency retired to Blois. On March 31 Paris
surrendered, and the Emperor of Russia and the King of Prussia entered
the city. A provisional government, with Talleyrand at its head,
deposed Napoleon on April 2, and on April 6 he abdicated. May 30, the
First Peace of Paris was concluded between France and the allies.
France was to have her boundaries as they were in 1792, and also her
foreign possessions, except Tobago, St. Lucia, and Mauritius, which,
with Malta, were ceded to England. The Bourbons, in the person of Louis
XVIII., were restored; but the French people were not content, so that
when Napoleon appeared at Cannes on March 1, 1815, he was greeted with
joy, even by the troops sent out to oppose him. This astonishing news
was communicated to the Congress of the Allies assembled at Vienna. The
allied armies at once gathered on the borders of France, Wellington
landed in Flanders, and Blucher’s Prussians joined him. Wellington,
finding Napoleon in front of him, fell back to Waterloo, lest the
approach of the Prussians should be cut off. Napoleon hurled his force
on Blucher at Fluores, and victoriously drove him from the field on the
15th. Ney, who had been sent to confront Wellington, fought at Quatre
Bras, and the following day joined Napoleon. On the 18th of June, 1815,
Napoleon made his supreme and final effort to recuperate his lost
fortunes and to reestablish his empire.

The story of the battle of Waterloo, than which none ever fought was
more decisive in its consequences, has been told and retold. The battle
was at first undecided, victory seeming to incline to Napoleon, though
the English and Germans with unflinching heroism still held the field
until the afternoon, when Blucher, with his Prussians, at last arrived.
Napoleon perceived that the supreme moment was at hand, and that his
only hope was to crush Wellington before Blucher’s advancing columns
could be thrown into line of battle. He sent forward his magnificent
Imperial Guard. They charged with chivalric splendor, fought with
heroic desperation, were repulsed,—and the star of Napoleon set to
rise no more.

Finding his cause irretrievably lost, leaving the remnant of his
army in command of Marshal Soult, Napoleon fled and, failing to find
a passage to America, surrendered. This battle, magnificent in its
results, ensured to England a long peace, and raised her to the first
rank, for military prowess, among the nations of the world.

Napoleon’s skill at Waterloo was up to the highest standard of his most
glorious work; but he was overwhelmed by preponderance in numbers. His
entire force with which he conducted this campaign was barely 104,000,
while the combined armies of Wellington and Blucher numbered 220,000.

[Illustration: NAPOLEON’S RETREAT FROM WATERLOO.]

The Congress of Vienna restored the _ancien régime_, replacing
dethroned monarchs upon their hereditary domains, but the parceling
out of the smaller territories showed the Powers to be quite as
arbitrary as Napoleon himself. The semi-decade of passive submission
to the “policies of princes” was broken in 1820 by general revolts in
Europe. Spanish-American colonies, indignant at French interference in
Spanish matters, began their struggles for independence.

GREEK WAR FOR INDEPENDENCE.—Since the capture of Constantinople by the
Turks, in 1453, Greece had been subject to Turkey. Out of the defeats
of several rebellions against the greed, tyranny, and brutality of the
Moslem,—particularly from the revolutions of 1770 and 1790,—grew the
secret society of the Hetæria, cementing the union of the Greeks for
the struggle beginning in 1821. It is claimed that ten thousand Greeks
were slaughtered within a few days, and thirty thousand in less than
three months.

Mahmoud, having failed in 1825 to crush the rebellion, called Mehemet
Ali, the Pasha of Egypt, to his aid. Mehemet sent Ibrahim, his son,
with his army and navy, trained in the tactics of European warfare,
into the Peloponnesus. Victory and devastation marked his course. Never
was grander courage nor loftier bravery displayed than by the Greeks.
The siege of Missolonghi lasted from April 27, 1825, until April 22,
1826. Athens was captured, June 2, 1827. The fleets of England, France,
and Russia were cruising on the coasts to prevent attacks by the Turks
on the islands. Approaching the bay of Navarino, they were attacked
by the Turks and Egyptians, whose combined fleets were thereupon
annihilated on October 20, 1827. The Sultan was forced by the powers to
consent to the establishment of the kingdom of Greece, and his delay
to do so was punished by Czar Nicholas, who declared war, crossed the
Balkans, and at Adrianople in 1829 compelled the Sultan to recognize
her independence, grant Christian governors to Servia, Moldavia, and
Wallachia, and to yield Bessarabia to Russia.

MINOR EUROPEAN WARS.—The French Revolution of 1830, placing Louis
Philippe on the throne of France, brought about Belgium’s independence.

The Polish insurrection of 1831–32 lost Poland her last vestige of
liberty, enchaining her irretrievably under the tyranny of Russia.

From 1840 to 1852 England was engaged in quelling periodic wars in her
Indian possessions. In 1841, her army, numbering seventeen thousand
men, perished in their retreat from Afghanistan. So with France in
Algiers and Morocco. And revolts in Spain were more or less successful.

In 1842, England’s war with China, caused by seizure of opium, resulted
in the cession by China of Hong Kong, the freedom of five other ports,
and $21,000,000 indemnity.

In 1848, the revolutionary spirit broke out fiercely, and the people
made strong leaps for liberty and constitutional government. In
France, it overthrew Louis Philippe, establishing a republic, with
Louis Napoleon President. In all Europe its echo resounded. Riots in
Vienna forced Metternich to flee to England; Ferdinand, to take refuge
in the Tyrol and to abdicate in favor of his son, Francis Joseph.
Frederick William was compelled by the conditions in Berlin to promise
a constitution. The Frankfort Assembly, in 1849, offered Frederick
William the title and prerogative of Emperor of Germany, and though,
because of his respect for the Hapsburgs, he declined the honor, he
still took advantage of the sentiment that prompted the offer to so
strengthen the dynasty that later it might be held.

Hungary rose against Austria in 1848, and almost won independence.
Kossuth proclaimed Hungary a republic, and Nicholas immediately sent
aid to Austria. The Russian army, 130,000 strong, joined the Austrians.
The Hungarians retreated to Temesvar, where they were defeated with
great slaughter, and Georgy surrendered, August 9, 1849. The name of
Haynau, the Austrian commander, is held in execration for his awful
cruelty to the conquered.

In the meantime Italy rose. Lombardy drove out the Austrians. Charles
Albert, king of Sardinia, had declared war on Austria and crossed the
Mincio, April 8, 1848. Radetsky, commanding the Austrians, lost Gorto
and yielded Peschiera in May, but in June he forced the Papal troops,
who were assisting Charles Albert, to surrender, and completely routed
the Italians at Custozza, July 25, and entered Milan. Charles Albert
was again defeated by Radetsky at Novari, March 23, 1849, and Venice
was captured August 23. Charles Albert resigned his crown to his son,
Victor Emmanuel, and died shortly after.

Pope Pius IX. was forced to flee from Rome. Mazzini established the
Roman republic in November. Austria, by the close of the summer of
1849, had regained control of her disputed possessions. Louis Napoleon,
taking part against Italy, occupied Rome with his troops, July 2, 1849,
and drove out Mazzini and Garibaldi.

THE CRIMEAN WAR.—In 1853, Louis Napoleon wanted war. He fomented
trouble between the Porte and Nicholas, which ended by a declaration
of war by Russia. The Czar claimed and demanded the protectorate of
Christians in Turkey. Austria, France, and England opposed the demand.
Nicholas had intimated to the British minister at St. Petersburg that
England and Russia should share the partition of Turkey,—showing that
he was ready to carry out the will and aims of Peter the Great and
Catherine. The Russian army was thrown across the Pruth into Moldavia,
and was at first worsted by the Turks. In deference to the wishes of
Austria and Prussia, Nicholas withdrew his army from the Danubian
provinces, and so secured their neutrality. He dislodged the Turkish
fleet at Sinope, November 4, 1853.

England and France allied with Turkey and declared war against Russia,
March 28, 1854. The allied fleets and troops proceeded to the Black
Sea. Sebastopol was the great arsenal of Russia. Twenty-seven thousand
English, thirty thousand French, and seven thousand Turks were landed
in the Bay of Eupatoria, thirty miles above Sebastopol, September 14,
1854, towards which, five days later, the southerly march began. The
allies waded the river Alma under terrific fire from the large Russian
army, and won a brilliant victory. The attack was remarkable in that it
won victory over superior numbers in seemingly impregnable positions,
and in spite of official blunders. Mentschikoff, the Russian general,
withdrew the crews from the ships in the harbor and put them, eighteen
thousand strong, in command of the batteries. With his own army he
marched out of Sebastopol, leaving twenty-five thousand defenders
to the city. Admiral Korniloff and his able assistant, Colonel Von
Todleben, undertook to strengthen the defenses and to inspire the
troops. On October 17, the siege guns of the allies were in position.
The English stormed the suburbs of the city, the Malakoff and the
Redan; the French stormed the city. Both were unsuccessful. Russian
troops poured into Sebastopol, and invited battle outside of the
fortifications. At the harbor of Balaklava, Turkish troops recoiled
from the Russian advance, and Sir Colin Campbell, with the Highland
Brigade, saved the shipping and stores by timely check to the Russians.
The battle of Balaklava, October 25, gave the town to the British after
stubborn fighting, more than two thirds of the Light Brigade having
been sacrificed to Lord Lucan’s misconstruction of orders.

At Inkerman, on November 5, sixty thousand Russians, in fog and rain,
surprised the British Household Guards, and for six hours vainly strove
to crush them. General Bosquet, with the genius of the soldier, guessed
the point of severest attack, and sent reinforcements to the Guards.
The Russians were finally driven back. Little good resulted from these
two stubborn battles. Winter put an end to active operations. Rain,
hurricanes, insufficient shelter, lack of supplies, and extreme cold
produced fearful misery among the soldiers. Russia suffered as severely
as did the allies, besides having had her fleet on the Black Sea
destroyed and her army beaten.

In April, 1855, the bombardment began again. In May the allies
captured Kertch and Yenikale, thus cutting off Russian supplies
from the Caucasian provinces. In June, Marshal Pelissier succeeded
Canrobert and successfully stormed Manelon; and, after the abortive
attacks, June 18, of the French on the Malakoff and the English on the
Redan, General Simpson succeeded Lord Raglan. August 16, the Russians
crossed Tchernaya, but were repulsed by the French. On September 8
the French carried the Malakoff; the British failed to carry the
Redan. The Russians set fire to the city and ships and retired to
the northern part of the harbor, where they held strongly intrenched
positions opposite the allied armies and beyond the reach of the allied
fleets. Russia was driven from the Black Sea, had lost her prestige
in the Baltic Sea, Bomarsund, on the Aland islands, and the arsenal
of Sweaborg, in the Gulf of Finland. She had saved Cronstadt, and,
at terrible sacrifice, had captured Kars from the English General
Williams with his army of Turks. Her vast territory was comparatively
intact. The nations were not satisfied. The Peace of Paris increased
the prestige of Louis Napoleon; it postponed the Eastern Question by
putting the Christian subjects under the nominal protection of the
Powers, but virtually under that of the Sultan. The treaty of peace was
signed March 30, 1856.

WARS IN THE EAST.—In 1857, the Indian Mutiny was caused by the
introduction of Enfield rifles. Delhi was taken after desperate
fighting, September 20. Cawnpore and Lucknow were the theatre of
horrible scenes. The rebellion was finally crushed in 1859.

In the meantime war with Persia was begun and ended by the recapture
of Herat, in Afghanistan. In December, 1857, England and France made
war on China and captured Canton. They secured many concessions by the
Treaty of Tien Tsin, and $2,000,000 indemnity.

WAR BETWEEN AUSTRIA, FRANCE, AND SARDINIA.—In 1859, Louis Napoleon
made a secret alliance with Italy. General disarmament was proposed.
Sardinia agreed to it; Austria stood aloof. On April 25, 1859, Austria
ordered the disarmament of Piedmont. On the 27th, King Victor
Emmanuel proclaimed war. On the 30th, French troops were in Turin. On
May 13, Louis Napoleon himself disembarked at Genoa, where he was met
by Victor Emmanuel. The Austrian forces crossed the Ticino, _en route_
for Milan, but hesitated, because of the French advance. The opening
battles at Montebello and Balestro, May 20, 30, and 31, were favorable
to the allies.

[Illustration: CAPTURE OF THE MALAKOFF.]

At Magenta, June 4, the Austrians met with terrible defeat. The forces
of the allies numbered 55,000, and their loss was 4000; the Austrian
army of 75,000 lost 10,000 killed and wounded and 7000 prisoners.
The conquerors entered Milan on June 8. Francis Joseph fell back to
the line of the Mincio, and at Solferino the decisive battle of the
campaign was fought on June 24. Napoleon commanded the allied armies,
which numbered about 150,000; they fought for sixteen hours against the
Austrian force of 170,000, gaining a fearful victory. This battle cost
Austria 20,000 men; the French lost in killed and wounded 12,000 and
the Sardinians 5000 men.

The allies crossed the Mincio and laid siege to Peschiera, but
while all Europe expected another fight, an armistice of five weeks
was agreed to, and Napoleon, unknown to his ally, met Francis at
Villafranca and made a peace, upon which was based the Treaty of
Zurich, signed November 10. Austria gave Lombardy to Napoleon for the
king of Sardinia, as also the fortresses of Mantua and Peschiera. Italy
was to become a confederation, with the Pope as president, of which
Austria was to be a member, because of her holdings in Venetia. Tuscany
and Modena were to be restored to their princes. Garibaldi’s brilliant
conquest of Sicily and Naples, in 1860, and Sardinia’s growing power,
startled Europe, but the nations dared not interfere. The general
parliament of Italy met in 1861, at Turin, and made Victor Emmanuel
king of Italy. Rome, under the Pope, and Venetia, under Austria, were
as yet dismembered from “Young Italy.”

WAR WITH DENMARK.—Christian IX. succeeded to the throne of Denmark
November 15, 1863. He endeavored to incorporate Schleswig with Denmark;
the German population repudiated him and appealed to the Confederacy.
The Diet sent troops into Holstein. Bismarck induced Austria to join
Prussia in setting aside the London treaty of 1853, and the allied
troops forced the Danes back to the intrenchments of Duppel. The
capture of Duppel by the Prussians, April 18, proved the efficiency of
needle guns and rifled cannon. June 22, the allies crossed the channel
to the Island of Alsen and, on the 28th, captured the Danish stronghold
Dennewerke, hitherto considered impregnable. The Treaty of Vienna,
October 30, 1864, closed the war. Prussia and Austria together were to
control the duchies.

THE SEVEN WEEKS’ WAR.—The arrangement between Prussia and Austria
respecting the Danish duchies caused the “Seven Weeks’ War” of 1866.
Bismarck induced Victor Emmanuel to form an alliance against Austria,
March 27. The Prussians, on June 7, without a blow forced the Austrians
to retire from Holstein, ignoring the protest of the Federal Diet.
Austria was not prepared for war. Her army, together with that of
Saxony, amounted to two hundred and seventy-one thousand. With Prussia,
fully equipped and on a war footing with three armies, besides the
reserves, the grand total estimated at three hundred thousand, the
result was a foregone conclusion. Prussia declared war, June 15, 1866,
against Hanover, Hesse, and Saxony, and next day threw her armies
into the hostile states. On the 17th Francis Joseph published his
war manifesto. Italy declared war, on the 20th, against Austria and
Bavaria. In fourteen days Prussia’s immense army was mobilized. In five
days the northern states to the Main were disarmed, and the Saxon army
was forced to retreat toward Bohemia.

[Illustration: BATTLE OF MAGENTA.]

General Benedek was commander of the Austrians. Upon news of Prussian
victories, he advised Francis Joseph to make terms of peace with
William. Prussia fought for German unification; Austria to protect
her pride. It was supposed the Austrians would first enter Saxony and
dispute the Prussian advance, but Bismarck had determined the war
should be brief, for Prussia was now master of the situation. On June
23, the Prussian army marched from three points towards Josephstadt,
where Benedek was preparing to fight. On the 27th the Austrians were
driven back at Soor, next day at Skalitz, and on the 29th at Gitschen.
Archduke Leopold, on the 28th, and Count Clam Gallas, at Gitschen,
both attacked the enemy in disobedience of orders, and thus forced
Benedek to fall back from his strongest position towards Königgratz.
The Austrians were also defeated, on the 28th, at Königinhof and
Schweinschadel, and their loss by this time numbered over thirty-five
thousand. Benedek asked permission to retreat into Moravia and await
reinforcements, but news of the Austrian victory over the Italians
at Custozza reached Vienna, and immediately battle was enjoined upon
Benedek. Benedek placed five hundred guns in position, spanning a
league between the Elbe and Bistritz.

On July 2, the king of Prussia assumed command of the Prussian hosts
and ordered attack for the next day. The Crown Prince, several miles
away with his army, received orders at four o’clock in the morning
of the 3d to advance his Silesian army from Königinhof. At eight
o’clock, Prince Frederick Charles, with a hundred thousand, attacked
the Austrian centre lying against Sadowa. General Herwarth, with four
hundred thousand men, attacked the Austrian right. The whole Austrian
army was hurled against these two commands for five hours. Prince
Frederick Charles forced passage through the Bistritz and took Sadowa,
but could not take the heights. At one o’clock retreat was being
considered, but the Crown Prince coming up with his troops the heights
were taken at four o’clock. The fighting on both sides in this battle
was determined and heroic. The Prussian loss was over ten thousand,
and the Austrians lost twenty-seven thousand killed and wounded,
nineteen thousand prisoners, with 174 cannon and 11 colors. At Lissa,
on July 20, the Austrian navy destroyed the Italian fleet. July 22, an
armistice of four weeks was granted. The Peace of Prague was concluded
August 23. Her defeat cost Austria Venetia and the quadrilateral,
namely, the fortresses of Peschiera, Mantua, Verona, and Legnano,
deprived her of any part in Germany or German affairs, and Holstein and
Schleswig, and obliged her to pay 40,000,000 thalers, one half of which
she was to retain in lieu of the duchies.

Austria emerged from the “Seven Weeks’ War” with her ideas somewhat
liberalized, and though her territory was diminished her progress and
prosperity increased. The dual-Austro-Hungarian empire was formed
by Francis Joseph, he ruling at Vienna as Emperor of Austria and
at Buda Pesth as king of Hungary. This war also ended the Germanic
confederation of 1815, and the North German Confederation under Prussia
arose.

At the peace of Vienna, October 3, Austria recognized the kingdom
of Italy, and with the acquisition of Venetia and the quadrilateral
fortresses the “Seven Weeks’ War” had greatly helped on the cause of
“United Italy.”

In April, 1864, Louis Napoleon sent an army of twenty-five thousand
to sustain the Austrian Archduke Maximilian on the throne of Mexico.
At that time the United States was occupied with the Civil War. This
ended, Napoleon was summarily required to withdraw his forces from the
American continent, which he did. Maximilian was thus left to his fate,
and, after being condemned by court martial, was shot at Querétaro,
June 19, 1867.

THE FRANCO-PRUSSIAN WAR.—Prince Leopold, of Hohenzollern, was offered
the throne of Spain after Isabella had fled from Madrid. Leopold
declined, but Napoleon demanded that the Emperor William should
guarantee never to permit Leopold to accept. William refused to accede
to the demand, and Napoleon, urged by the war party, declared war
July 19, 1870. On the same day the Confederation placed its forces
in the hands of William, as did the South Germans. This spontaneous
uprising of all Germany was unlooked for. Napoleon’s army numbered
three hundred and ten thousand men. In ten days William had nearly
half a million soldiers ready to march against the enemy. August 2,
the first fight took place at Saarbrücken, a little town over the
German frontier. Napoleon and the young Prince Imperial were present,
and the force of Uhlans was driven back. August 4, the Crown Prince of
Prussia drove the right wing of MacMahon’s army back at Weissenburg,
and on the 6th, again was MacMahon defeated at Wörth. The Germans,
having separated MacMahon’s army, advanced into Alsace. In the meantime
General Steinmetz carried Spicheren by storm, and the whole German army
went forward. Together with the Crown Prince, Steinmetz, on the 14th
of August, defeated Marshal Bazaine, at Courcelles, who retreated to
Metz, and then endeavored to push on with his hundred thousand men to
Chalons. Von Moltke hurried on the Crown Prince to intercept Bazaine,
and at Mars la Tour was fought the fiercest battle, so far, of the war.
On either side the losses amounted to seventeen thousand. Gravelotte
was fought, on August 18, between the armies of Steinmetz and the
Crown Prince, King William commanding in person. The battle lasted all
day between two hundred thousand Germans and one hundred and eighty
thousand French. The Germans lost twenty thousand men, and succeeded
in forcing Bazaine into Metz. Although, in one sort, an undecisive
battle, Gravelotte perhaps settled the fate of the Empire. MacMahon’s
plan was, with his one hundred and twenty-five thousand men reorganized
at Chalons, to prevent the German advance on Paris. He was overruled
and sent to the relief of Bazaine. Defeated in several small fights,
MacMahon was obliged to fall back on Sedan. The heights and ridges
above Sedan once occupied by hostile troops, surrender or annihilation
was the outcome. MacMahon was wounded, then Ducrot, and the command
fell to Wimpffen. Sedan was forced to surrender, September 1, and
Napoleon himself gave his sword to King William. Paris was maddened.
The Empress escaped to England. Napoleon was taken to the castle of
Wilhelmshöhe.

A month had hardly passed since the outbreak of the war, and one of the
two great French armies with the Emperor had been captured; the other
was besieged in Metz. Gambetta and other prominent men in Paris set
up the government of the national defense. A republic was proclaimed.
The defense of Paris was zealously undertaken. Large supplies of
provisions were gathered. Fortifications were strengthened. The siege
began September 19, 1870, and ended January 28, 1871. The direst famine
attended it. Gambetta left Paris in a balloon, and at Tours succeeded
in forming the army of the Loire and the army of the North. Both were
defeated. Strasbourg was captured, and Metz surrendered with a hundred
and seventy-three thousand men, among them three marshals of France.
The entire German loss in this war was 129,700 men.

January 17, 1871, Thiers was elected President of the Third Republic.
Knowing the impossibility of further resistance, with half a million
German soldiers, flushed and inspired by constant success, on the
soil of France, and Paris in their anaconda coils, he counseled that
peace be asked. Thiers, Favre, and Picard negotiated with William and
Bismarck. An armistice of twenty days was permitted, that the National
Convention then at Bordeaux might ratify terms. In the meantime the
house of Hohenzollern reached the summit of its gratified ambition,
when, on March 18, William was crowned at Versailles, Emperor of
Germany. The cession of Alsace and Lorraine, and $1,000,000,000
indemnity, was the price of peace.

No patriot name in all history deserves more reverence than that of
Louis Adolphe Thiers. Upon him devolved the task of making peace with
the German foe, of quelling the civil war, and of so managing the
finances of France, that her people within two years were enabled, to
the astonishment of the world, to pay the enormous indemnity extorted
by the Germans, and, by September, 1873, the last franc was paid and
the last German sentinel removed from the soil of France.

The civil war between the Republic and the Commune settled the
question once for all, that _Paris_, accountable for all the errors
and vicissitudes of the country, is not _France_, and there is every
reason to hope that out of the unequaled horrors of those awful days
of carnage the republican government of France arose to remain in
perpetuity.

Garibaldi, taking advantage of the fall of Louis Napoleon, and caring
not for the king’s promises, took possession with his troops of the
city of Rome, September 20, 1870, and on July 2 of the next year Victor
Emmanuel erected his throne in the Quirinal.

TURCO-RUSSIAN WAR.—In 1875, the Bosnians, Turkish subjects, revolted.
They maintained their struggle, and the enraged Turks sent Mohammedan
troops among the defenseless Bulgarians, destroying unnumbered
thousands of men, women, and children. Czar Alexander declared war
April 1, 1877. His army crossed the Balkans and occupied Shipka Pass.
Osman Pasha developed unexpected military genius and skill. For five
months he checked the onward march of the Russians and won world-wide
admiration by his defense of Plevna. By the first of December Plevna
was invested completely by the Russians. Driven back whenever
attempting to make a sortie, starvation compelled Osman to surrender
with forty-four thousand troops. Adrianople was occupied. The Treaty of
San Stefano was wrested in sight of Constantinople. It greatly reduced
Turkish power in Europe, and constituted Russia heir to Turkey in
Europe. Bulgaria was to be protected by fifty thousand Russian troops
for two years and to have a Christian governor.

Three months later, England formed a secret treaty with Turkey,
securing Cyprus and agreeing to protect Turkey in Asia. Austria,
too, was dissatisfied, and the treaty of Berlin was made in 1878, to
rectify the balances of the nations. Russia was by this treaty damaged
in prestige and, shorn of triumphs, was given only Asiatic provinces.
Turkey was stripped of all real power in Europe.

[Illustration: LOUIS ADOLPHE THIERS.]

CHINO-JAPANESE WAR.—In Japan’s declaration of war against China,
August 1, 1894, she set forth succinctly the provocation forcing her
to this action. She said that Korea had been brought into the notice
of the nations of the world by her efforts; that China constantly had
interfered with Korea’s government, insistently posing as her suzerain;
that when an insurrection in Korea broke out China sent troops into
Korea, and that when Japan, under the treaty of 1885, also sent troops
to assist Korea to quell the rebels, asking China’s coöperation in the
effort, China refused her rightful demand; that China’s course tended
to keep up the trouble indefinitely, so that the only course left for
Japan was to declare war.

As with Germany a score of years previously, when the time came
Japan was ready, not only with munitions of war, but with better
topographical knowledge of the enemy’s country than they themselves
possessed. The Emperor, whose dynasty antedates the Christian era,
gave his people a constitution, and stretching his hand towards
Korea he helped her in the same direction. He had Japan’s army and
her navy drilled by expert European officers. Arsenals and extensive
manufactories for the implements of war were started, with European
superintendents. The latest and best of ships were both bought at
foreign marts and made at home. Her students were to be found in the
universities of the world. Her agents were sent to study in their
capitals the economy of every government and the machinery of their
executive departments. To find the best and assimilate it seemed the
principle of her progression, so that both in military skill and the
knowledge of diplomacy she acquired the ability to hold her place among
the nations of the civilized world. A war alone was needed to prove
that this was a fact.

Japan’s navy consisted of four armored cruisers and eight vessels of
3000 tons each. This was a much lighter fleet than that of China, but
swifter. China’s navy had been trained by an able English naval chief,
Captain Lang. Her outfit of ships was, perhaps, superior to that of
Japan, consisting of five armored vessels, nine protected cruisers,
and torpedo boats besides. The principal battle of this Chino-Japanese
war was fought on September 15 at Ping Yang, an old capital of Korea,
situated at the meeting of several roads. The Japanese landed troops at
Gensan, on the northeast, and at Hwang-jo, on the northwest, coast of
Korea. These formed the right and left wings of the army whose centre,
under General Nodju, advanced from Seoul, about one hundred miles to
the south, of which the Japanese were already in possession. Only one
wing of the army met opposition in its march, a small battle having
been fought. The forces, so far as we can learn, were between twenty
and thirty thousand of Chinese and between thirty and forty thousand
of Japanese. Japan’s twenty-four years of scientific preparation,
her study of the art of war, the practicability of her strategic
movements,—admired by the soldiers of the world,—left China, with her
old semi-barbarian methods, no chance for victory.

The battle was a bloody one; the defeated Chinese fled until they were
on the other side of the Yalu River, in Manchooria. Seven hundred (some
accounts say fourteen thousand) Chinese were captured, two thousand
killed and wounded. The army continued fighting and conquering until
practically the province of Manchooria was in Japan’s possession, as
well as the peninsula of Liaotung, terminating with Port Arthur.

The battle of Yalu, or Hai Yun Tao, afforded the first practical test
of modern vessels, guns, and projectiles in Asiatic waters. Ping Yang
has been called China’s Sedan, and Yalu, Japan’s Trafalgar. Japan had
nine cruisers and two converted cruisers wherewith to fight twelve
Chinese warships and four torpedo boats. It is said that Japan used
melanite shells. The fleet of Chinese warships, convoying transports
with ten thousand troops, entered the Yalu River. The next day,
September 17, the Japanese fleet, under Admiral Ito, went out to meet
them. A European officer on a Chinese vessel says: “Passing along the
Chinese line, the Japanese poured as heavy a fire as they could bring
to bear upon each ship in succession, and, while they had sea-room,
circled round their opponents. The Japanese state that no Japanese
war-ship was lost and only three seriously injured.” A Chinese officer
says: “As soon as the Chinese on the port side had brought their guns
to bear and had obtained range accurately, the Japanese would work
around and attack the starboard side.” Four ships were destroyed and
two badly injured. One of the Chinese ships was said to have been
hit two hundred times. The Chinese ironclads that escaped were later
sunk off Wei Hai Wei. Port Arthur, captured October 21, was filled to
overflowing with ammunition, grain, and other supplies.

China made three informal overtures for peace. Finally, Li Hung
Chang went from Tientsin to Shimonoseki, to make terms, on the 19th
of March, 1895. By the treaty there made, May 17, China recognized
the independence and autonomy of Korea, ceded certain territory in
Manchooria, all the islands in the eastern part of the bay of Liaotung
and the northern part of the Yellow Sea, Formosa, and all islands
belonging to it, and the Pescadores group. Two hundred million Kuping
taels were exacted as indemnity, to be paid in eight installments, one
every six months. The inhabitants were to sell out and leave, or in two
years to be Japanese subjects. Russia, Germany, and France recommended
that Japan should not permanently possess the peninsula of Feng Tan,
and Japan agreed to their suggestions.

[Illustration: CAVALRY CHARGE AT GRAVELOTTE. (A. DE NEUVILLE.)]

[Illustration: BATTLE OF YALU RIVER.]

Formosa, as a strategetical post, is of the greatest value. Korea and
Japan now control absolutely the Japan Sea. It was only after four
months of fighting that Japan completely conquered the Formosans and
had all her new possessions under her control.

China paid Japan an additional $30,000,000 for the release of Port
Arthur and Liaotung peninsula. China was well pleased. But in April,
1897, Russia herself had obtained possession of Port Arthur and Talien
Wan, and in December the Germans received Kaio Chao, the finest naval
station of the province of Shantung. France subsequently obtained
Kwang-Chau, the best port of Wangsi; and England, though not joining
these powers in the demand in favor of China in 1895, obtained Wei Hai
Wei in 1897.

GRECO-TURKISH WAR.—In 1895, the fearful atrocities committed by the
“unspeakable” Turk began to assume appalling proportions. During three
years one hundred thousand Cretans were murdered. February 8, 1897,
the Cretans proclaimed union with Greece. The Greeks, unable longer to
endure the sufferings of their kindred, determined to help them.

Prince George left for Crete with a torpedo flotilla February 10;
Colonel Vassos, aide-de-camp to the king, followed with fifteen hundred
men and two batteries on the 13th. Prince Nicholas led a regiment of
artillery to the Thessalian frontiers. The powers sent a collective
note of protest to Greece, but it was not heeded. Colonel Vassos landed
in Crete on the 14th. Sailors from the fleet of the powers occupied
the coast towns of Crete. Pasha Berovitch resigned and returned to
Constantinople. Greek reserves rallied promptly. Volunteers offered.
Colonel Vassos established headquarters in the mountainous interior at
Sphakia.

March 18, the powers blockaded Crete. On the 27th, Crown Prince
Constantine proceeded to the Turkish frontier. On April 5, the powers
declared no gain should accrue to the combatant who approached
Thessalian borders. April 8, three thousand Greeks crossed near Krania,
began fighting, and were driven back. On April 17 Turkey declared
war. On the 18th, a battle of twenty-four hours, in Milouna Pass,
crowned Turkish arms with victory. Another hard fought battle, at
Reveni, discomfited the Greeks. Greeks passed the Arta River and Greek
ironclads bombarded Prevessa. On the 19th, the Turks were in Thessaly
and the Greeks in retreat to Larissa. After terrific battles Tornavo
and Larissa, on the 25th, fell into the hands of the Turks. Colonel
Smolenski fought desperately at Valestino, but had to yield; and Volo
also fell to the Turks. The Turks occupied Pharsaos on May 6. Greece
asked the powers for peace, May 8; Cretan autonomy was agreed to, and
Turkey permitted armistice on the 15th. The war closed. Turkey was
forced to yield all Thessalian territory, and Crete was relieved of
Turkish oppression. Greece was forced to withdraw all support from
Crete and pay $20,000,000 indemnity.

The remarkable feature of this war was the intensely hard fighting from
start to close, and the disposition of the powers to assist Turkey by
interfering with the Grecian navy. Frequently the Austrians helped the
Turks by placing their guns in position. It was only when the Sultan
conquered Thessaly and threatened to keep it that the powers interposed.

The crime committed by the powers against civilization and Christianity
by their action seems incredible, even though the peace of Europe was
thereby secured.

ENGLAND’S WARS IN THE SOUDAN.—The Khedive of Egypt had obtained great
loans from Europe. England and France took financial control of the
country. Arabi Pasha inaugurated a rebellion and fortified Alexandria.
Many Europeans were murdered, and England bombarded the city, taking
possession July 12, 1882. General Wolseley, at Tel el Kebir, September
13, fought and defeated Arabi, who fled leaving two thousand dead.
France withdrew from the financial arrangement. The English remained
to put the Egyptians in condition for self-government. England has
remained ever since.

Mohammed Ahmed arose in the Soudan, proclaiming himself El Mahdi,
the Mussulman Messiah. The barbarian hordes flocked to his banner.
He defeated the Egyptians in four engagements, October, 1883. The
Anglo-Egyptian force of ten thousand men, under General Hicks, was
destroyed, only two escaping. General Gordon was sent to the relief of
the Egyptian army. He reached Khartoum, February 18, 1884. The Mahdists
besieged the city. Gordon sent for reinforcements. England was so slow
in sending them that they arrived two days too late. Khartoum was
captured through treachery, and Gordon, the most beloved of English
soldiers for his saintly and heroic character, was put to death on
January 27, 1885.

General Sir Horatio Herbert Kitchener was made Sirdar in 1890. He
started from Cairo with one thousand British and fifteen thousand
Egyptians, black and fellah troops, building a road across the desert
as he advanced, and engineering his gunboats up the Nile. The distance
from his base, at Cairo, to his first storehouse, at Wady Halfa, is
eight hundred miles. April 8, 1898, was fought the battle of Atbara, a
fort at the point where the Atbara River enters the Nile. Here Mahmud,
the commander of the barbarians, was captured and his army of twelve
thousand infantry destroyed. Osman Digna got away with the greater part
of the cavalry, numbering four thousand.

The force was about a month reaching Wady Hamed, and, September 1,
was in sight of Omdurman. The Sirdar’s line was drawn up in crescent
form, with Omdurman and Khartoum for its centre. In this position was
fought the first battle of Egeda, in which twenty-two thousand of the
Dervishes fell. The Khalifa and Osman Digna fled with a scant handful
of followers, and are now said to be bandits in the Kordofan. The
number of the annihilated army of the Mahdists will never be known.
The British loss of whites was less than two hundred, and the native
loss less than three hundred. The fire of the barbarians was generally
too high to effect great injury. September 2 will be a marked day in
England’s calendar. The Sirdar marched into Khartoum, the Union Jack
was raised, and beneath its floating crosses his chaplains performed
Gordon’s funeral ceremonies on the spot where he was slain nearly
fourteen years before.

THE BOER WAR.—By the treaty of 1881 Great Britain claimed suzerainty
over the South African (Transvaal) Republic and Orange Free State.
These Republics claimed that by the treaty of 1884 Great Britain gave
up her claim of suzerainty. Here arose an issue which was aggravated
by the discovery of diamonds at Kimberley and of gold at Johannesburg,
followed by the Jameson raid, which, shorn of its disguise, was notice
to the Boers that Great Britain desired and designed to occupy and
absorb their two Republics. The diplomatic war went on for years
between President Kruger, of the Transvaal, and Mr. Chamberlain, Great
Britain’s Colonial Secretary. It culminated in an ultimatum on the
part of Kruger, on October 9, 1899, which Chamberlain rejected. Both
sides had been preparing for this, and on October 11, the outbreak
of the war, Great Britain had already an army of 25,000 men in South
Africa, while the Boers had mobilized an equal, if not superior, army
of effectives. The Boers immediately invaded Natal and Cape Colony,
shutting up General White and his army in Ladysmith, and Colonel
Powell and his forces in Mafeking. Kimberley was also besieged. The
initial battles were numerous, fierce, and generally favorable to the
Boers. Great Britain’s eyes were speedily opened to the gravity of
the situation. She hurried large reinforcements to the scene till her
armies far outnumbered those of the Boers. Yet her best generals, as
Buller at Tugela River, and Methuen, at Magersfontein, continued to
meet with disastrous defeats. Lord Roberts, in connection with General
Kitchener, was sent, January 10, 1900, to supersede the blundering
generals, and to organize a new campaign. It was seen that direct
battle against the Boers was bound to end in defeat. So Roberts was
provided with an overwhelming army, estimated at 225,000, and he
at once entered upon a war of strategy. His northward advance was
general along his lines, thus keeping the Boers divided. He flanked
them out of their strongholds. By February he had invaded the Orange
Free State, and raised the siege of Kimberley. On February 27 he
captured General Cronje and his force of 4000 men, and on March 13 took
possession of Bloemfontein, the Free State capital, whence he issued
a proclamation annexing the republic under the name of Orange River
Colony. On February 28 the siege of Ladysmith was raised, and shortly
after that of Mafeking. The Boers continued to fight doggedly, all
the while inflicting heavy losses on their enemy, but resistance was
futile against such overwhelming odds. They were gradually forced from
one position to another in the direction of Pretoria, the Transvaal
capital. On March 5 Presidents Kruger and Steyn joined in peace
proposals, which were rejected. On March 12 they made an appeal to the
nations for mediation. All refused to mediate. On March 27 the Boers
lost their ablest general in the person of General Joubert, who died
at Pretoria. By May 12 Kroonstad, the second Free State capital, had
fallen into Lord Roberts’ hands. The Vaal River was then crossed and
the Transvaal invaded. On May 31 the British army entered the important
town of Johannesburg, and hastened toward Pretoria, which was captured
on June 5, 1900. President Kruger and General Botha had left a few days
before, the former in the direction of the Portuguese port of Lorenzo
Marques, the latter with the remnant of the Boer army to the mountains
beyond Pretoria. On September 3 Lord Roberts declared the Transvaal
annexed to Great Britain under the name of the Vaal River Colony.
Generals Botha and De Wet continued a guerrilla warfare far past
the end of the century. President Kruger accepted the protection of
Holland, and sailed thither on October 20, 1900. Lord Roberts arrived
in England in December, 1900, to receive his honors. At the turn of the
century the South African problem was a most wearying one for Great
Britain.

THE BOXER UPRISING.—The defeat of China by Japan in 1894, the ambition
of European powers to occupy her ports and enlarge their “spheres of
influence,” the ominous threats to partition her territory, soured the
Manchu dynasty and the people of northern China against foreigners.
The Empress Dowager deposed the young Emperor, seized the reins of
government, and catered to that reactionary and hostile spirit which
culminated in the “Boxer” uprising. These mobs began the destruction
of missions, the murder and expulsion of missionaries, and concerted
attack against everything that savored of foreign direction and
influence. The Chinese regular soldiers were either helpless before
them or in sympathy with them. By May, 1900, all the powers represented
at Peking stood aghast at the startling fact that their respective
legations were beleaguered in Peking, and liable to be murdered.
Warships were instantly ordered to Taku. By June 1, 1900, twenty-three
vessels had reported,—nine Russian, three British, three German,
three French, two American, two Japanese, one Italian. A force of 2000
soldiers was landed from these, and immediately started for Peking,
under command of the British Rear-Admiral Seymour, for the rescue of
the legations. This force was defeated by the “Boxers,” and compelled
to retreat to Tien-Tsin with heavy loss. An attempt to torpedo the Taku
harbor was resented by the warships. They bombarded and blew up the
Taku forts. In this action the American warships did not participate.
The “Boxers” swarmed in Tien-Tsin, and an allied force of 4000 men was
sent thither to capture it. In their first attack, on July 9, they were
repulsed with heavy loss. Being reinforced up to 7000 men, their second
attack, on July 13, was successful. The city was taken, and made the
base of further operations against Peking, 80 miles up the Pei-ho. The
allies were further reinforced, and started for Peking with an army of
16,000 men. They met the Chinese army of 30,000 men at Pei-Tsang, and
after a severe battle on August 5, drove them from their fortifications
with great loss. The Chinese rallied at Yang-Tsun, but were again
defeated by the allies on August 6. They offered no further serious
resistance to the allies, who moved swiftly on Pekin, invested it,
and, on August 14, breached its walls and entered it in triumph. The
legations were relieved after an imprisonment of nearly three months.
Two ministers, one of Japan, the other of Germany, had been murdered.
The others had escaped death only by concentrating and defending
themselves in the English compound. The allied forces occupied the city
for a time, and then those of Russia and the United States withdrew,
leaving a strong legation guard. The Chinese government appointed
Li-Hung-Chang and Prince Ching ministers to meet ministers of the
powers to arrange terms of settlement. After months of conference a
protocol was signed in January, 1901, which was supposed to contain the
germs of future settlement. But there was that in the Chinese situation
which was bound to tax the diplomacy of the world during many years of
the twentieth century.

A REVIEW OF MARTIAL RESULTS.—The history of the world shows that
successful war adds to the glory and prestige of the victorious nation,
and this is particularly exemplified by the wars of the nineteenth
century. France, so long victorious, dazzled the world. At Waterloo,
her glory was clouded. Napier, in his closing words of the history
of these events of the twenty years of war and turmoil, showed how
thoroughly the English people appreciated that their greatness
and power were due to the glory achieved by the arms of Britain’s
chivalrous sons.

While England was covering herself with glory, her offspring, the
United States, was teaching her, in the war of 1812, that being now of
age his pockets were not again to be turned inside out, a lesson which
thereafter she heeded.

Greece, throbbing with the impulse of freedom, achieved her
independence, displaying all the heroism of her Hellenic ancestry.

The Mexican war added greatly to the glory of American arms and
resulted in the acquisition of a vast territory, whose inhabitants
quickly assimilated themselves to the requirements of American
citizenship.

The Revolution of ’48 but served to consolidate the power of Prussia,
laying the foundation for the Imperial crown to rest upon the head of
her king, while fitting France for her future solid republican career.

The Crimean war, except that it checked the policy of Russia, produced
few results in comparison with the vast amount of blood and treasure so
lavishly spent.

The victories of Magenta and Solferino illumined again the eagles of
France. The “Seven Weeks’ War,” while still further consolidating
Germany under Prussia, was not without its blessings for Austria, and
advanced “Young Italy” greatly toward the goal of her ambition.

In America, the appeal to arms was made to decide the questions mooted
since the nation’s birth. One effect of this war was to show the
wonderful prowess and soldierly qualities of the American citizen.

The Franco-Prussian war lifted the dignity of Hohenzollern to its
height, ended forever the Empire of France in a crushing fall, and
taught the lesson of scientific preparation for war, than which no
science is more worthy of intense study and application in all its
branches.

The Chino-Japanese war was a triumph of a growing civilization over
semi-barbarism, and foreshadows the prominent rôle that Japan may be
called upon to play in the twentieth century. The enlargement of her
territory was a fitting reward for her unselfish championing of her
weaker sister, Korea.

The Greco-Cretan-Turkish war shed no glory on the Turkish nor on the
so-called Christian nations, and will stand on history’s page as a
crowning shame to European civilization.

The opening of Africa by General Kitchener and his great achievements
read like old-time stories, and the twentieth century may see great
results in Africa from this wonderful campaign.

The war of the United States with Spain, fought because it was
impossible longer to allow the atrocities of her rule on this
hemisphere at our very doors, has brought conditions not dreamed of,
and which, under the providence of God, may lead to greater results in
the development of Christian civilization than we now may comprehend.

The Boer war had little instigation on the part of Great Britain,
except greed. Its management reflected no credit on her military
genius, weakened her in the eyes of nations, and entailed a loss of
life and money from which she will not recover in generations.

The Chinese disturbance did not rise to the dignity of war, but opened
problems of startling intricacy and moment for all the powers.

THE CENTURY’S FAIRS AND EXPOSITIONS

BY GEORGE J. HAGAR,

_Editor of Appendix to Encyclopædia Britannica_.

Dr. Alfred Russell Wallace, in a recent work, argues that the
nineteenth century is altogether unique in that it inaugurated a new
era. To grasp its marvelous achievements, he tells us, it should be
compared with a long historical period, rather than with another
century, however happily selected. The progress it environs is set
down as almost wholly material and intellectual, and the palm for
completeness is given to the material. Debatable as his conclusion
may be, there can be no dispute either as to the qualitative or
quantitative progress in the material advancement of mankind in the
century now closing. In the present retrospect the broader view becomes
apparent,—that the material and the intellectual have been allied
forces that have constantly pushed forward side by side, one devising
in the solitude that genius needs for expansion, the other showing to
the world the realizations of thought that in practical application
benefit all.

The evolution of the international exposition of to-day is a
conspicuous result of this material and intellectual wedlock. It
seems a long time between the fair that was held to allow people not
closely settled to purchase the ordinary commodities of life, food,
clothing, and household belongings, and the great expositions to which
the nations of the world bring the surpassing embodiments of native
thought. Measured by years, the time is really beyond computation;
but measured by results, mere time is annihilated, and the progress
that the evolution illustrates is found to have kept a steady pace
with man’s physical necessities and intellectual growth. The moment
Necessity has shown that mankind needed something to make life
brighter, happier, or more comfortable to pass through, Intellect has
undertaken the task of creating it and has fashioned out the Material.

In the great expositions of to-day are seen the effects of the
marvelous influence which sprang from the fair as a market, instituted
so long ago that no call for the records is answerable. Of this
kind, only a very few remain. Then came the fair designed to promote
the useful arts and manufactures; the fair to advance agriculture
and allied industries; and the fair to show special articles, to
commemorate historical events, and to aid interests of large public
concern. Under an ever-increasing expansion, stimulated by popular
favor, the fair, with the commercial feature abandoned or having it
only as a restricted branch, became the exhibition to show a larger
development of the arts, sciences, and mechanical trades; to celebrate
great public occurrences on a grander scale than earlier fairs had
done; to promote special industries, local or national; to aid
education by permanent displays of natural or manufactured products;
and to promote the commercial intercourse of the world. From the first
of this class of exhibitions came the international undertakings, first
known as world’s fairs, and afterward as international exhibitions and
expositions. In some one of these classes may be found every kind of a
display of products, irrespective of its purpose or individual name.

The development of the modern exhibition from the early fair has
been confined to no one country nor people. Everywhere the purpose
and process have been the same. A few years changed the old-time
mart, where people went to buy what they knew they would find, to the
convenient place where tradesmen placed on view the things they knew
people would need and buy, as well as articles offered at a venture
that people who really didn’t need them might be tempted to purchase
because of novelty or other quality. Thus, the bargain counter and
the department store are several hundred years older than the thrifty
housewife of to-day reckons.

Trade competition, then as now, led to a broadening of plans, rival
efforts, and special attractions. People began to attend fairs to see
what was new, as well as to buy; and soon, lest they should tire of
sightseeing, it became necessary to provide means for entertaining
them. Punch and Judy came on the scene with perennial popularity.
Jugglery astounded the young and fascinated their elders. Dancing
and wrestling rings proved sportive magnets of annually increasing
strength. The fair now began to change from a strictly commercial
undertaking to an occasion for holiday hilarity, and soon trade and
amusement were struggling for the mastery. In many places, hilarity
led to excesses, and excesses to crime. Public opinion demanded the
forceful intervention of the law, and one by one the most demoralizing
fairs were suppressed, the notorious Donnybrook closing its long career
of debauchery and lighting in 1855.

The display of merchandise and the gathering of customers at the
most noted fairs in time became really enormous, and for many years
the great fairs of the day were held on open and extensive plains.
Then, too, the fair assumed an importance that led first the local
authorities, and after them higher dignitaries, to seek to turn it
to their individual advantage. For a time no fair could be held in
Great Britain without a special grant from the crown, and it was a
widely observed custom for royal or ecclesiastical authorities to give
permission to a town or village that had suffered some misfortune to
hold a fair as a means of reestablishing itself. The famous fair of St.
Giles’s Hill, near Manchester, England, was instituted as a revenue to
the bishop by William the Conqueror. That it was a valuable monopoly is
shown by the facts that its jurisdiction extended seven miles around
the city, and that all merchants who sold wares within that circuit,
unless at the fair, forfeited them to the bishop.

A curious evidence of early international interest in the fair, as well
as of its importance and influence, is found in the records of 1314,
when King Philip of France sent a formal complaint to King Edward II.
of England, to the effect that the merchants of England had ceased
frequenting the fairs in his dominions with their wood and other
goods, to the great loss of his subjects. Philip entreated Edward to
persuade, and, if necessary, to compel, English people to frequent the
fairs of France as formerly, promising them all possible security and
encouragement.

As a purely commercial institution, the fair had its best day
when people were widely separated. The increase of population,
the development of new life and activity by growing communities,
the opening of means of travel between distant points, and the
establishment of stores and markets, were all fatal to the commercial
fair. To-day, in all Europe, only three really great annual fairs of
this character remain,—those of Nijni-Novgorod, in Russia; Beaucaire,
in France; and Leipsic, in Germany. The same conditions that brought
the popular usefulness of the commercial fair to an end were the forces
from which the fair as an exponent of industrial achievement has been
developed, and the material progress of the nineteenth century is to be
traced.

[Illustration: MUNICH EXPOSITION, 1854.]

For the modern fair in all of its forms the world is indebted to the
Society of Arts, of London, an organization whose fame in America
was so great that Benjamin Franklin, in soliciting corresponding
membership, declared that he would esteem it a great honor to be
admitted and also to be permitted to contribute twenty guineas to be
expended in premiums. What this Society in its early days did for Great
Britain it did also for civilization. It organized the first exhibition
of specimens of improvements in the useful arts and manufactures in
1760; stimulated native ingenuity by judicious awards of prizes and
premiums for exhibits of exceptional merit; and extended its powerful
influence to foster art, science, mechanical and agricultural industry,
and the fishery trade and colonial commerce of the country.

Of the many influences of this Society that came to the United States,
it may be questioned if any had a more lasting benefit for both people
and country than that which gave birth to the mechanics’ institutes.
There are people still living who are able to recall how the large
cities in the Eastern and Middle States vied with each other in the
establishment of two great and kindred institutions—the mechanics’
institute and the apprentices’ library. Philadelphia led the cities
in the matter of time, her Franklin Institute being founded in 1824.
Four years afterward the American Institute was chartered in New
York City. After these came the Massachusetts Charitable Mechanics’
Association in Boston, the Maryland Institute in Baltimore, and
numerous others,—those mentioned being the principal ones that still
maintain annual or other exhibitions. At first, the exhibitions of
these institutes, like the first one ever held under the patronage
of a national government,—that in Paris in 1798,—were composed of
various articles loaned by their owners. Soon, however, the popularity
of the institutes and the awarding of prizes and diplomas brought to
the exhibitions specimens of the handicraft of members and friends, and
the rising lights in the arts and manufactures became eager to secure
the recognition of their genius that such awards established. Thus, the
influence of the principal surviving institutes has spread far beyond
local limits.

Purely national exhibitions have never found much popular favor in
the United States. When as a whole people we decide to hold one
for a purpose of general interest, we prefer to set a large table
and invite the universe to help us celebrate. In France, the first
national exhibition was a loan exhibition. Its effect, however, was
so immediate that the government repeated it the same year, organized
more elaborate ones in 1801 and 1802, and decided to hold them
triennially thereafter—a course that has since been interrupted by
political exigencies. These exhibitions were projected to illustrate
the progress of France only. In the United States there have been no
State exhibitions, excepting agricultural fairs, for which outside
coöperation has not been invited.

The life of the American agricultural fair is almost measurable by the
full century. This, too, had its origin in England. The father of the
American system of combined agricultural fairs and cattle shows was
Elkanah Watson, a native of Plymouth, Mass., who spent the greater part
of his life in promoting large public measures besides agriculture
and education. In 1807 he removed from Albany, N. Y., to Pittsfield,
Mass., where he engaged in general and experimental agriculture and
cattle-raising. His efforts to improve local farming conditions and
to raise a superior breed of cattle attracted widespread interest,
and this suggested to him that an annual exhibition of cattle and of
farm products, resulting from a more painstaking system of cultivation
than was commonly followed, would prove of material advantage to the
farmer, the breeder, and the general public. Accordingly, he induced
his farming friends in the country to contribute specimens of improved
breeds of cattle and of superior products of the soil; and the first
exhibition or fair was held in 1810. This, with modest prizes for the
best exhibits, proved a complete success.

[Illustration: NEW ORLEANS EXPOSITION. 1884.

(Illumination of Horticultural Building on Christmas Night.)]

Encouraged by the results of his initial efforts, he went to Boston to
solicit pecuniary aid for a second and much larger exhibition. Although
he was at that time widely known for his public-spirited philanthropy,
and also as the founder of the influential Berkshire Agricultural
Society, his appeals for aid brought him little save derision. To
show how small concern was felt by business and public men toward the
farming industry, a sentence in a letter from ex-President John Adams
to Mr. Watson is sufficient:—

“You will get no aid from Boston; commerce, literature, theology,
medicine, the university, and universal politics are against you.”

The ex-President was correct in his judgment. Mr. Watson did not
receive a single favorable response to his appeals; yet he lost
not a particle of faith in the wisdom of his undertaking. With the
coöperation only of the farmers in his county, Mr. Watson succeeded
in arranging annual exhibitions until 1816, when he returned to
Albany. The same year he organized the first agricultural society in
the State of New York, and began establishing fairs and cattle shows
in the near-by counties. In 1819 he secured the passage of an Act by
the Legislature appropriating $10,000 annually for six years for the
promotion of agriculture and domestic manufactures, conditional on a
like amount being raised by the agricultural societies in the different
counties. A State Society was incorporated in 1832, to which county
societies were directed to report, while it, in turn, had to render a
combined report to the Legislature annually.

Since then an agricultural department has become an indispensable
part of the government of the various States and Territories, even of
those that are popularly believed to be only metallic producers. The
character of the state and county agricultural fair has been undergoing
a radical change for many years, especially in sections thickly settled
or near large cities, and the chief attractions have passed from the
exhibition of sleek domestic animals and choice fruits of the soil to
horse-racing and bicycle contests. Innovations foreign to the spirit
and intention of the fair have already wrought its ruin in many places
and are threatening it generally.

Of American fairs in the original commercial sense, those held during
the Civil War, to aid the work of the United States Sanitary Commission
on the battlefield and in the camp and hospital, will always be
historically conspicuous. During those memorable four years it is
doubtful if there was a single city, town, or village in the Northern
States that did not put forth a special effort to provide necessities
and conveniences for the soldiers and sailors that were not supplied by
the government, and the fair was the most popular form of raising the
needful money.

Exhibitions of special articles, possessing the features of state,
national, and international combinations, and independent of any
locality, event, or period of time, are growing in frequency. Many of
these have a predominating technical interest,—as the international
exhibitions of fisheries and fishery methods, of life-saving methods
and apparatus, of forestry products and systems of forest preservation,
and of railway appliances; while others combine the technical and
popular features, as the exhibitions of electrical apparatus, of
improved food preparations, of bicycles, of automobile vehicles, and of
wood-working and labor-saving machinery.

Special exhibitions in the United States that possess a large popular
interest include the annual showing of the art associations and leagues
in the principal cities, and the annual horse, dog, and sportsmen’s
shows in New York city. Among them also are to be noted the permanent
expositions in Philadelphia and Chicago—both reminders of the greatest
international expositions that had been held up to their day. The
Philadelphia exposition is held in Memorial Hall, the building erected
in Fairmount Park by the State of Pennsylvania at a cost of $1,500,000,
and used for the Art Gallery of the Centennial Exposition in 1876. It
now contains an art and industrial collection similar to the famous
South Kensington Museum in London. The Chicago exposition is in the
former Art Palace of the World’s Columbian Exposition in 1893, and,
having been endowed by Marshall Field with $1,000,000, is now known
as the Field Columbian Museum. Its most conspicuous feature is a
collection showing the development of the railway, and the next, its
forestry exhibits. In the line of permanent expositions, Philadelphia
is to be credited with two commercial museums of far-reaching influence
that will be considered further on.

[Illustration: EIFFEL TOWER. PARIS EXPOSITION, 1888.]

The first exhibition of the industries of all nations was that held
in Hyde Park, London, in 1851. It was an outgrowth of the annual
exhibitions of the Society of Arts, before mentioned, and was at first
designed to be only a national enterprise, but on a more extended scale
than the former exhibitions of the Society. The late Prince Albert,
husband of Queen Victoria, however, conceived the idea of throwing this
particular exhibition open to the industry of the world. His suggestion
at once met the favor of the Council of the Society, as well as of
the leading manufacturers of England and the general public. A royal
warrant was procured appointing a commission to “manage an exhibition
of the works of industry of all nations,” and of this body Prince
Albert became president.

On February 21, 1850, the commissioners felt justified in making a
public announcement that the building would cover an area of from
sixteen to twenty acres; that it would be ready for the reception of
goods by January 1, 1851; and that the exhibition would be opened to
the public on May 1, following. The plans for a building submitted
by Sir Joseph Paxton were accepted after a large number had been
considered. They called for a vast structure of iron and glass,
somewhat similar to the great conservatory he had erected for the Duke
of Devonshire at Chatsworth. A contract was signed with Messrs. Fox and
Henderson for the construction of the building, under which they were
to receive £79,800, and the materials of the building were to remain
their property. On February 3, the completed structure was formally
delivered to the commissioners. It had an extreme length of 1851 feet
and an extreme breadth of 408 feet, with an additional projection on
the north side, 936 feet long by 48 feet wide.

While the erection of the building was in progress, Dr. Lyon Playfair
was chosen to decide and classify the wide range of articles that was
sought to be brought together under the general title of “Objects of
Industrial and Productive Art.” He arranged these under four great
sections: Raw Materials, Machinery, Manufactures, and Fine Arts, and
they in turn were divided and subdivided into a vast number of classes
and smaller divisions. The collecting of national exhibits was placed
in the hands of district committees in all the principal towns and
manufacturing localities, and in response to invitations extended
to all the British colonies and the various foreign governments,
nearly every country in Europe, almost every State in the North
American Union, the South American republics, India, Egypt, Persia,
and the far-off islands of the seas, sent objects that swelled the
total estimated value of exhibits—excluding the renowned Koh-i-noor
diamond—to £1,781,929.

The exhibition was opened by Queen Victoria on the appointed day, and
was continued till October 11. The total number of exhibitors was
about 15,000. During the 114 days the exhibition was open a total of
6,063,986 persons visited it, a daily average of 42,111. The largest
number in a single day was on Tuesday of the closing week, 109,915.
An attempt to ascertain the number of foreign visitors developed the
unexpected result that not much more than 40,000 foreigners visited
London beyond the annual average of 15,000. The financial result of the
exhibition was really remarkable. The total receipts from all sources
amounted to £506,000, and the total expenditures to about £330,000,
leaving a surplus of £176,000, which was subsequently increased to
£186,436.

The distinctions of all kinds that were awarded, Council and prize
medals and “honourable mentions,” aggregated 5084. It is here
interesting to note, as showing the truly international character
of the first world’s exhibition, that foreign guests occupied
two-fifths of the exhibition space and received three-fifths of the
honors. British exhibitors of machinery, manufactures in metal, and
manufactures in glass and porcelain, took more prizes than all the
foreigners combined. Foreigners led in the number of prizes for textile
fabrics, fine arts, and miscellaneous manufactures; and in the section
of raw materials for food and manufactures the foreign exhibitors
gained nearly four times as many prizes as the British.

This exhibition developed a number of features that should be borne in
mind when considering those that came after it. It was an experiment
in an untried field; it was comprised in a single building; and it was
self-supporting. In all respects it was a marvelous achievement. It
made the late Prince Consort the “father,” and the Society of Arts the
pioneer promoters, of the international exposition.

[Illustration: COURT OF HONOR FROM PERISTYLE.

(World’s Columbian Exposition, Chicago, 1893.)]

The beneficial influence of the first world’s exhibition began to be
felt immediately. An exhibition of the arts and manufactures of Ireland
was held in Cork in the following year, and the Royal Dublin Society,
which had been holding similar exhibitions triennially, got up a much
larger one than usual, through the generous pecuniary aid of William
Dargan, in 1853. The Dublin exhibition, unlike that of Cork, was
international in scope.

American visitors to the London exhibition brought home with them a
pretty large inspiration for a similar effort, and before the close of
1851 a number of citizens of New York had associated themselves for
that purpose. In January, 1852, the corporation of the city of New York
granted a lease for five years of Reservoir Square, on the conditions
that a building of iron, glass, and wood should be erected thereon,
and that the entrance fee to the proposed exhibition should not exceed
fifty cents. In March, the Legislature incorporated the Association
for the Exhibition of the Industries of all Nations, with a capital of
$200,000 that might be increased to $300,000. Subsequently, the Federal
Government constituted the building a bonded warehouse and exempted
foreign exhibits from the payment of duties.

This exhibition was therefore a private enterprise, having no other
official recognition than that mentioned. It was also an unfortunate
affair from beginning to end. The location was then three or four
miles from the heart of the city; the area was entirely inadequate for
the purpose; the day of opening had to be postponed, because of the
incomplete condition of the building; and financially the enterprise
was a huge failure.

The exhibition was opened July 14, 1853, with much ceremony, although
still scarcely half ready for exhibits or visitors, and was continued
for 119 days. There were about 4800 exhibitors, somewhat more than
one-half being foreign. The total cost of the exhibition was nearly
$1,000,000, and the receipts were $340,000. Although a financial
failure, and a disappointment in many ways, this first international
exhibition in the United States was productive of much good.

The success of the London exhibition also aroused the French to depart
from the exclusively national character of their former exhibitions and
to inaugurate one open to the world. This was done under the direct
auspices of the Imperial Government, which undertook to combine certain
features of both the London and the New York enterprises; hence,
the first international exhibition held in Paris was practically a
private scheme supported by official guarantees. A further departure
was here made in the matter of building, and, instead of the single
great structure, there were the Palais de l’Industrie, the Palais des
Beaux Arts, the Panorama, and three smaller buildings for agricultural
implements, carriages, and a variety of less costly articles. Another
innovation was here introduced, a partial return to the methods of the
commercial fair, in the setting apart of exhibiting spaces on the open
ground.

The main building, the Palais de l’Industrie, was erected by a
joint-stock company on the Champs Elysées, and provided a floor space
of 1,770,000 square feet. It was built of glass, stone, and brick, and
was 800 feet long by 350 feet wide. The various buildings cost about
$5,000,000, and the Palais de l’Industrie was erected for a permanent
structure.

This exhibition was opened on May 15, 1855, and closed on November 15,
following. It was visited by 4,533,464 persons. Besides France and her
colonies, fifty-three foreign states and twenty-two colonies belonging
to them sent exhibits. In all there were 20,839 exhibitors, those of
France and her colonies predominating by only about 500. The exhibits
were classified on the London plan, there being in each case thirty
classes altogether. Excluding the main building, which the Imperial
Government acquired, the exhibition cost about $2,250,000.

Between the first and second London exhibitions there were many
industrial and art displays in the United Kingdom and colonies and on
the Continent, among which should be noted those of New Brunswick and
Madras in 1853, Munich in 1854, and Edinburgh and Manchester in 1857.

The second London exhibition was undertaken by a commission headed, as
the first, by the Prince Consort, under a guarantee fund of $2,250,000.
While it was in course of preparation the Prince Consort died, and
for a while a heavy pall hung over the scheme. The commission here
introduced the French idea of separate buildings. The site was at South
Kensington, and the main structure was built of brick, glass, and
iron, was nearly rectangular in shape, and covered an area of about
seven acres. With the annexes the total area under roof was about
twenty-three acres.

[Illustration: WOMAN’S BUILDING.

(World’s Columbian Exposition, 1893.)]

This exhibition was opened by the Duke of Cambridge on May 1, 1862,
and remained open for 177 days. It was visited by 6,211,103 persons, a
daily average of 36,329, its receipts were wholly absorbed by expenses,
and a slight deficit was left. Foreign exhibitors numbered 17,861, and
received more than 9000 prizes.

In 1863 the French Government announced that an exhibition would
be held in Paris in 1867, that was intended to be more completely
universal in character and more comprehensive in plan than any that had
ever been held. The Champ de Mars, the great parade-ground on which the
Ecole Militaire faced, containing about 111 acres, was placed at the
disposal of the commissioners by the Government. In the centre of this
space was erected the principal building, an oval structure mainly of
iron, 1607 feet long and 1246 feet wide, that cost $2,357,000.

In planning this building the convenience of exhibitors and visitors in
ready access to the exhibits of any desired country or class was given
the preference over architectural effect. Here, again, was a diffusion
of exhibits in detached buildings, and a noteworthy novelty was the
reservation of ground on the park surrounding the main building for the
erection by foreign exhibitors of special buildings for the display of
articles that could not be accommodated in the main structure. This
feature became the most popular one of the entire exhibition, for it
gave a most graphic illustration of the architecture, manners, customs,
and countless peculiarities of the peoples of the world.

The exhibition was opened by the Emperor on April 1, 1867, and was
closed on October 31, following. The number of visitors was upward
of 15,000,000, a daily average of nearly 70,000, and of exhibitors,
51,819. In all, 12,944 medals and grand prizes of honorable mention
were awarded. From beginning to end the expenses were $4,596,764,
and the receipts aggregated $2,822,000. The national and municipal
governments contributed $1,200,000 each, which added to the receipts of
the exhibition proper created a surplus over expenditure of $626,000.

London’s third exhibition, from May 1 till September 30, 1871, was
projected as the first of an annual series that should separately
promote a distinct branch of industrial effort. Thirty-three foreign
countries were represented; there were approximately 4000 art and 7000
industrial exhibitors; and the visitors numbered 1,142,000. The second
in the series, in 1872, was confined to printing, paper, music, musical
instruments, jewelry, cotton goods, and fine arts; and the third, in
1873, was devoted to the general subject of cookery.

Great as was the universal exposition of Paris in 1867, that at Vienna
in 1873 far surpassed it in extent and grandeur, although its pecuniary
success was severely affected by an epidemic of cholera, a financial
crisis, and local extortions. As each of the preceding international
exhibitions had developed a distinctive feature, so this of Vienna
introduced the custom of holding world’s congresses for the discussion
of great problems of universal application.

The exhibition was opened on May 1 and closed on November 3, following.
Turnstiles recorded the entrance of 7,254,687 visitors. There were
about 70,000 exhibitors, whose display, in extent and costliness,
exceeded that of Paris in 1867. The gross receipts were about
$2,000,000, and expenditures about $9,850,000, making a deficiency of
some $7,850,000, which the Government liquidated. The United States
was represented by 643 exhibitors, more than half of whom were awarded
prizes.

This brings the record up to the Centennial Exposition, at
Philadelphia, in 1876, and covers the third quarter of the century.
The actual work of making the Centennial Exhibition began on March 3,
1871, when Congress passed an Act creating the United States Centennial
Commission. This authorized the President to appoint a commissioner and
an alternate from each State and Territory, on the nomination of the
respective governors. The appointments were promptly made, and from the
whole body of commissioners the following were chosen for the principal
executive officers: President, Joseph R. Hawley, of Connecticut;
Vice-Presidents, Alfred T. Goshorn, of Ohio, Orestes Cleveland, of
New Jersey, John D. Creigh, of California, Robert Lowry, of Iowa, and
Robert Mallory, of Kentucky; Director-General, Alfred T. Goshorn;
Secretary, John L. Campbell, of Indiana; Assistant Secretary, Dorsey
Gardner; Counselor and Solicitor, John L. Shoemaker.

Details of organization and management were vested in an Executive
Committee. On June 1, 1872, Congress passed an Act creating the
Centennial Board of Finance, with large powers. This Board estimated
that the cost of the exhibition would be $10,000,000, and apportioned
shares of capital stock for this amount among the several States
and Territories, on the basis of population. Subsequently, a Board
of Revenue was appointed and vested with authority to collect
subscriptions and other funds.

Despite the financial panic of the summer of 1873, preparations
progressed so favorably that on July 3 President Grant issued a
proclamation reciting that the one-hundredth anniversary of the
independence of the United States would be celebrated by holding an
international exhibition of arts, manufactures, and the products of the
soil and mine, in Philadelphia, in 1876, opening April 19 and closing
October 19, and inviting the nations of the world to take part in both
the celebration and the exhibition. In response to a formal invitation
issued by the Secretary of State, thirty-two foreign governments sent
favorable replies for themselves and their colonies.

[Illustration: AGRICULTURAL BUILDING.

(Atlanta Exposition, 1895.)]

The city of Philadelphia placed at the disposal of the commissioners
a tract in Fairmount Park, aggregating 236 acres, for the principal
buildings, and also made proportionately large allotments for the
exhibition of livestock and agricultural implements.

Five principal buildings were erected. The Main Exhibition Building was
in the form of a parallelogram, 1880 feet long and 464 feet wide, with
projections at the centre of the longest sides 416 feet long, and at
the centre of the short ones 216 feet long. The building was erected
on piers of masonry, wrought-iron columns supporting wrought-iron
roof trusses forming the superstructure, the sides of which for some
distance above the ground were finished between the columns with
paneled brick work. This building covered 21.47 acres, had a floor
space of 936,008 square feet, and cost $1,600,000.

The Art Gallery and Memorial Hall, designed to be a permanent
structure, was erected on an eminence in the Lansdowne Plateau. It is
built of granite, glass, and iron, in the modern Renaissance style of
architecture, on a terrace several feet above the level of the Plateau,
and cost $1,500,000. The dimensions are: length, 365 feet; width, 210
feet; height, 59 feet. From the centre of the structure rises a dome of
iron and glass, 150 feet in height, surmounted by a figure of Columbia
with outstretched hands. This building was erected by the State of
Pennsylvania, and is now used as a permanent art and industrial museum.

Machinery Hall was 1402 feet long and 360 feet wide, with an annex
on the south side 210 by 208 feet, and the main building and annex
had together a floor space of 558,440 square feet, or nearly thirteen
acres. The total cost was $792,000. Horticultural Hall, near the Art
Gallery, was built by the city of Philadelphia for permanent uses. It
exhibits the Moorish architecture of the twelfth century, is 383 feet
long by 193 feet wide, and is 72 feet high to the top of the lantern.
Its cost was $251,937. The Agricultural Building was erected of wood
and glass, the ground plan showing a parallelogram 630 feet long by 465
feet wide, and a nave 826 feet long and 100 feet wide crossed by three
transepts, and cost about $356,000.

[Illustration: MACHINERY HALL.

(Atlanta Exposition, 1895.)]

Other noteworthy edifices were the United States Government Building,
504 feet long by 300 feet wide, prepared to exhibit the various
functions of the public service; the Women’s Pavilion, covering an
area of an acre, and with its exhibits of woman’s handiwork from the
fifteen leading nations of the world constituting the first display of
the kind ever attempted on a large scale; twenty-six buildings erected
by State and Territorial governments; and many others put up by foreign
governments or exhibitors. Before the exhibition closed there were more
than two hundred buildings on the ground.

An interesting feature of this exhibition was the observance of State
Days, when the governors of the States, with their official staffs
and a large following of citizens, made ceremonial visits and held
receptions in the several State buildings. There were also numerous
other special days, when hosts of people united in a common interest,
religious, fraternal, social, military, aquatic, or educational, added
thousands to the ordinary attendance.

During the exhibition 9,910,966 persons entered the grounds, of whom
7,250,620 paid the full rate of fifty cents, 753,634 paid twenty-five
cents each, and 1,906,692 had free entry. The exhibition represented
an outlay of all kinds and by all interests of about $20,000,000. The
United States Government aided it with a loan of $1,500,000, which was
repaid; the State of Pennsylvania appropriated $1,000,000, and the city
of Philadelphia gave $1,500,000. From every point of view it was an
unqualified success.

Two years after the Centennial Exposition another one was held in
Paris, which not only exceeded all previous ones in that city in size
and magnificence, but made an unprecedented display of works of art and
literature. On this occasion about one hundred acres were set apart for
the various buildings, the exhibitors numbered some eighty thousand,
the gross receipts were upward of $2,500,000, and 16,032,725 visitors
were registered.

The third world’s exhibition in the United States was held in New
Orleans during the winter of 1884–85, and was planned to commemorate
the centennial of the first export of cotton from America. The
conception was an outgrowth of the exposition in Philadelphia, and
was first carried out on a limited scale in Atlanta in 1881, and on
a larger one in Louisville in 1883. Under the belief that the cotton
centennial should be celebrated in the chief city of the cotton belt,
the National Cotton Planters’ Association joined heartily in the
scheme suggested by Major E. A. Burke, of New Orleans, for a universal
exhibition in that city, in which the great industry of the Southern
States should play the most prominent part. Congress aided the movement
by an Act incorporating the World’s Industrial and Cotton Centennial
Exposition, and, further, made a loan of $1,000,000 and appropriated
$300,000 for a Federal Building. Railroad and other corporations
subscribed for $500,000 in stock, the State of Louisiana appropriated
$100,000, and the city of New Orleans contributed a similar sum for the
erection of a permanent Horticultural Hall.

[Illustration: WOMAN’S BUILDING.

(Nashville Exposition, 1897.)]

Formal invitations were sent out to all foreign governments by the
State Department at Washington, commissioners were appointed for the
several States and Territories, and the time of the exposition was
fixed for December 1, 1884, to May 31, 1885. The site selected was the
Upper City Park, an unimproved tract of 245 acres, and in its centre
was erected the Main Building, a structure built wholly of wood, 1378
feet long and 905 feet wide, and with a continuous roof principally
of glass. The entire building covered a space of thirty-three acres.
A Music Hall capable of seating 11,000 persons was constructed in
the centre of this building, and a Machinery Hall in the rear. An
extension at the southern end, 570 by 120 feet, was devoted to mills
and factories in operation, and at right angles with this extension was
a building given up to sawmills.

The Federal Building, planned for the exhibits of the United States
Government and of the States, was 885 feet long by 565 feet wide, and
in general style and construction conformed to the Main Building.
Horticultural Hall, built of iron and glass, is 600 feet long, 100 feet
wide in main structure, and has a central transept carrying out the
extreme width to 194 feet. The Art Building, of corrugated iron and
glass, stood nearly in front of the Main Building, and was 250 long by
100 feet wide, with a rotunda 50 feet square in the centre. Two other
noteworthy buildings were erected by the Mexican Government, one in the
style of a native hacienda, with an interior gallery for the display of
horticulture and bird-life; the other for native minerals. Excluding
those of Mexico, the various buildings covered an area of 2,673,588
square feet, or sixty-two acres, and all buildings covered about
seventy-six acres.

Among the special features of this exposition were the display of
woman’s work, under charge of Mrs. Julia Ward Howe; of the work of
the colored race, under charge of the late Blanche K. Bruce; of
the cultivation of cotton and manufacture of the fibre; and of the
cultivation, harvesting, and preparation for market of rice and sugar.

On May 5, 1889, another universal exposition was opened in Paris. This
was also a commemorative one, marking the centennial of the French
Revolution, and because of its political character only the United
States and Switzerland accorded it official recognition, although most
of the European governments encouraged individual participation. The
exposition, despite this feature, was a grand success because of its
unusual extent and comprehensiveness and its distinctive features. This
exposition cost $8,600,000, and had about 60,000 exhibitors and more
than 28,000,000 reported visitors, the greater number, of course, being
French.

The making of the World’s Columbian Exposition, to commemorate the
discovery of America by Columbus, began soon after the close of the
Centennial Exposition in Philadelphia. It was at first proposed to
create a permanent exposition, to be held in Washington in 1892, to
illustrate the progress of North, Central, and South America, and a
board of promotion was organized. By 1889, however, a strong popular
sentiment had been aroused for a more comprehensive display, and
citizens of Washington, New York, Chicago, and St. Louis vied with each
other in pressing on a special committee of the United States Senate
the advantages of their respective cities. A certificate to the effect
that subscriptions to the amount of $5,000,000 had been made in Chicago
decided the controversy in favor of that city.

On April 25, 1890, Congress passed an Act giving a legal status
to a World’s Columbian Exposition, to be held under the auspices
and supervision of the United States Government, the organizing
corporation to guarantee the subscription of $10,000,000 and the
payment of $500,000 before the national commissioners should officially
recognize the site offered by the corporation for the exposition. On
December 24, following, President Harrison announced the forthcoming
exposition, to be opened on May 1, 1893, and invited the nations of
the world to participate in it. Congress appropriated in various sums
a total of $3,238,250 in money and authorized the coining of 5,000,000
souvenir fifty-cent pieces in silver to be sold for the benefit of the
exposition.

The management was vested in a National Commission of two
representatives of each State and Territory and of the District of
Columbia, and eight from the country at large. The site was Jackson
Park, on the shore of Lake Michigan, to which was added the Midway
Plaisance tract of 80 acres, making an aggregate ground area of
633 acres. On the main ground more than 150 noteworthy buildings
were erected. The Midway Plaisance was devoted to amusements and
the illustration of the manners and customs of the world. Here, the
most conspicuous of a multitude of great and curious objects was the
gigantic revolving and passenger-carrying Ferris Wheel. All of the
exposition buildings proper were constructed of wood, iron, and glass,
in combination with a material known as “staff,” made by uniting
plaster and jute fibre in water, in the form of a paste. As all
exterior surfaces were painted white, the exposition grounds became
popularly known as the White City.

[Illustration: ART BUILDING. EXACT REPRODUCTION OF THE PARTHENON.

(Nashville Exposition, 1897.)]

The principal buildings, with their cost, were those of Manufactures
and Liberal Arts, the largest of all, 1687 by 787 feet, $1,500,000;
Machinery, $1,285,000; Fine Arts, $670,000; Agriculture, $618,000;
Administration, $435,000; Electricity, $401,000; United States
Government, $400,000; Live Stock, $385,000; Transportation, $370,000;
Horticulture, $300,000; Mines, $265,000; Fisheries, $224,000; Woman’s,
$138,000; Forestry, $100,000; and a brick imitation of a modern United
States battleship, with complete armament and equipment, $100,000.
Foreign governments appropriated a total of $6,571,520 for their
respective buildings and exhibits, France leading with $650,000, and
being followed by Japan, $630,000; Brazil, $600,000; Germany, $214,200;
and Austria, $149,100; and the States and Territories, a total of
$6,020,850. The entire cost of construction was $18,322,622.

According to the original Act of Congress, the buildings then completed
were dedicated on Columbus Day, October 21, 1892, with prayer, music,
and an oration by Chauncey M. Depew, and during that week a number
of State buildings were also dedicated. The exposition was formally
opened with exceedingly brilliant ceremonies on May 1, 1893, and was
closed with an entire lack of formality on October 30, following, in
consequence of the assassination of Carter Harrison, mayor of Chicago,
two days before. Up to November 12, the receipts from all sources
aggregated $33,290,065, and the expenditures, $31,117,353. The total
number of paid admissions, excluding those prior to the opening and
after the closing, was 21,477,218, and of all, 27,529,400; smallest
single-day number, 10,791; largest, on “Chicago Day,” 729,203. In all
there were 65,422 exhibitors, and medals were awarded to 23,757 of
them, the jury examining and reporting on more than 250,000 separate
exhibits.

Present space will only permit the briefest summarizing of this
greatest of all international expositions hitherto held,—matchless
in extent, in completeness of composition, in grandeur of setting.
A pleasing evidence of the influence the undertaking was expected
to yield is found in the remarkably large number of international
congresses that were held during its progress. This feature alone
called for 1245 separate sessions, at which there were 5974 speakers
and a special attendance of more than 700,000 persons, chiefly adults.
Almost every conceivable branch of human thought and effort had its
individual congress. Particularly noticeable among these formal
gatherings was the Parliament of Religions, in which Christian,
Protestant, Catholic, Jew, and Buddhist expounded their doctrinal
beliefs and narrated the story of their sectarian progress and hopes.

The Cotton States’ and International Exposition, opened in Atlanta
on September 18, 1895, had its origin in two purposes: the first, to
give the industrial conditions of the Southern States a more adequate
display than they had at Chicago, owing to the constitutional inability
of their Legislatures to appropriate public money for such a purpose;
the second, to promote larger trade relations between the South and the
Latin-American republics and with Europe. It was set on foot by private
enterprise, and received its largest official aid from the city council
of Atlanta, which appropriated $75,000.

Piedmont Park, a tract of 189 acres, two miles from the centre of the
city, and memorable because traversed by the rifle-pits over which
General Sherman threw shells into the city thirty-one years before, was
selected as the site. In a natural dip of the ground an artificial lake
was constructed, covering thirteen acres, and around it the principal
buildings were erected. Not only the Southern, but many of the Northern
and Western States aided the enterprise with special buildings and
exhibits.

Of the thirteen large buildings, that of the United States Government
occupied the most conspicuous site. The Administration Building was
a reproduction of portions of Blarney Castle, the Tower of London,
Warwick Castle, the Rheinstein in Germany, and St. Michael’s, on the
coast of Brittany. On a considerable elevation was the Auditorium, a
four-story building with a dome surmounted by a statue of Music. The
largest building was that devoted to Manufactures and Liberal Arts, and
the most original of all in design was the one set apart for Minerals
and Forestry, which was constructed entirely of wood from the different
Southern States in its natural condition, with the bark on. The Fine
Arts and the Woman’s Buildings were the showiest, and the Negro
Building was made attractive by specimens of the industry of negroes in
fourteen States. The exposition was closed December 31, and cost about
$2,000,000.

The international exposition at Nashville, open from May 1 to October
30, 1897, was a commemoration of the one-hundredth anniversary of
the admission of Tennessee into the Union, and had for its special
attraction a reproduction of a number of notable buildings of
antiquity. The original plan provided for an exposition in 1896, the
true centennial year, but the projectors encountered unusual opposition
in their efforts to procure the necessary funds, and it was not till
early in 1897 that the incorporators were able to begin the creation of
the Centennial City.

[Illustration: GRAND COURT, OMAHA EXHIBITION, 1898.

(Night view.)]

West Side Park, a former race-course in the suburbs of Nashville, with
many natural attractions in running water and forest growths, was
selected as the site, and Centennial City was made for the brief time
of the exposition a full-fledged municipality, with a mayor, board of
aldermen, and a combined police and fire department. The reproduction
of notable buildings showed on a reduced scale the Parthenon, the
Pyramid of Cheops, the Alamo of Texas, the Blue Grotto of Capri, a
glimpse of the Rialto of Venice, and, in the beautiful main entrance, a
type of early Egyptian architecture. A flagstaff 250 feet high, cotton
and tobacco fields, Venetian gondolas, Vanity Fair, a typical Chinese
farm, an abundance of statues of classical and mythological subjects,
waterfall and old-time wheel at work, Lake Katherine, Ellen Island,
the umbrella fountain, and a large field for athletic sports, were
among the pleasurable features. The State made a strong showing of its
industrial development and of its riches yet in reserve.

In all 190 acres of ground were occupied. The total receipts were
$1,087,227, and the expenditures balanced to a cent. A unique expense
feature was that, excluding the preliminary work, the women raised the
money and paid the entire running cost of the Woman’s Department. The
turnstiles registered 1,886,714 entrances.

This exposition was succeeded in 1898 by the Trans-Mississippi and
International Exposition at Omaha, an undertaking designed to show what
had been accomplished by the pioneers and their children in the great
Trans-Mississippi Valley, and especially in a State that forty-three
years before was an unorganized territory in the vast tract known
as the Louisiana Purchase. The site was a plateau just north of the
city, and in planning the display every consideration was given to
originality. Excepting that the grounds constituted a second White
City, from the use of “staff,” as at Chicago, every feature of design
and construction possessed striking elements of difference from all
similar efforts in the past.

The management was under the presidency of Gurdon W. Wattles, and the
exposition was formally opened by President McKinley, who, in the White
House at Washington, pressed an electric button that started the great
engine. The United States Government erected a building of the classic
style, following the Ionic order. It was surmounted by a colossal dome
supporting a copy of Bartholdi’s statue of “Liberty Enlightening the
World,” and had a floor space for exhibits of about 50,000 square feet.
The Government also recognized the importance of the event by issuing
a special set of commemorative postage stamps. Fine arts was exhibited
in a twin-domed building, a structure in two parts, with an elaborate
peristyle between them, and all under one great roof.

What afforded the masses the greatest delight were the ethnological
exhibits and the instructive and amusing scenes on the Midway Reserve.
These included an Indian village, with representatives from every
tribe between Alaska and Florida, a Chinese village, an Arabian
encampment, a Moorish town, a Swiss village, a Cairo street, the
entertaining Egyptian Pyramid, and the gigantic passenger-carrying
Sherman Umbrella—a mechanical marvel operated by electricity, and one
hundred feet higher than the Ferris Wheel of Chicago. There was also a
picturesque lagoon or canal, half a mile long and 150 feet wide at its
narrowest part, terminating in an artificial lake trefoil in shape and
400 feet across.

The exposition was opened on June 1 and was closed on October 31. In
that time it was visited by more than 2,600,000 people, the largest
single-day attendance being 98,785. The total receipts were not quite
$2,000,000, and the expenditures were about $1,500,000.

[Illustration: MAIN BUILDING, NATIONAL EXPORT EXPOSITION, PHILADELPHIA,
SEPT. 14 TO NOV. 30, 1899.]

This completes the record of the most notable expositions and the
incidental history of their development, from the commercial fair of
the previous century up to near the close of 1899.

There remains to note a form of permanent exhibition that has been
purposely reserved for this point. The Commercial Museum, of which
Philadelphia has the two most effective examples in existence, is a
purely commercial development, yet an educational text-book of unique
and extraordinary compass. Though the Philadelphia Commercial Museum
and the similar department of the Philadelphia Bourse were both
projected before the foreign trade of the United States had reached the
enormous volume that caused wonder and alarm alike all over the world,
both have had a powerful, direct, and immediate influence in bringing
about a greater appreciation abroad of American products.

The commercial museums stand between the American producer and the
foreign factor. They inform the former where special articles are
needed and the latter of reputable firms who can supply their needs. By
a large corps of traveling agents, an enormous correspondence, and a
direct coöperation with the State Department and its representatives,
these museums keep in the closest possible touch with the commercial
interests of the world. All this is independent of the exhibition
feature, a vast department in which the principal economic productions,
first of the United States and then correspondingly of the world, are
spread before the eye of the visitor. In this connection should also be
noted the fact that many of our commercial representatives abroad have
established at their headquarters collections of American products that
are particularly needed in their respective localities.

In all of the foregoing a single text has been kept in mind: What has
been the influence of the fair, the exhibition, the international
exposition? Ready answers have been suggested by the several items of
cost and attendance. Another answer may be divined in their frequency
and universality. And at the close of this survey of more than a
hundred years, probably the best answer of all is to be found in the
efforts in this line with which one century is closed and another
opened.

These include the Greater American Exposition at Omaha, July-November,
1899, a commercial success, and a revelation of trans-Mississippi
pioneering enterprise. This was supplemented by the Export Exposition
and World’s Commercial Congress, the first of the kind ever held under
the joint auspices of the Commercial Museum and the Franklin Institute
of Philadelphia, in that city, in September-November, 1899. Then
followed the Universal Exposition in Paris, in 1900. It was regarded as
especially elaborate and successful. It beautified the Champ de Mars
and Place des Invalides with handsome industrial palaces, brought into
permanent existence the two Palaces of Fine Arts and the Alexander III.
Bridge, lined the banks of the Seine with the “Street of Nations,” and
swarmed the Trocadero with the world’s colonization. Over 50,000,000
witnessed its panoramic scenes. Its expense was largely provided for
by prior sales of tickets on a bonded plan. The century turned with a
prospective of the Pan American Exposition at Buffalo and International
at Glasgow in 1901; the Ohio Centennial and International at Toledo in
1902; the International at Liege, Belgium, in 1903; and the Louisiana
Purchase Centennial at St. Louis in 1904.

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN COINAGE, CURRENCY, AND BANKING

BY HON. BRADFORD RHODES,

_Editor of “Banker’s Magazine.”_

I. BANKS AND BANKING RESOURCES.

The history of nation building contains no parallel to the progress and
development of the United States in the past one hundred years, and the
most accurate and striking indication of this remarkable growth may
be seen in the evolution of our currency and banking systems. As the
variations in temperature and the changes in atmospheric pressure are
measured by the thermometer and barometer, so are the fluctuations in a
country’s wealth gauged by the banks and other financial institutions.
Likewise the degree of civilization to which a country has attained is
reflected by the perfection of its monetary machinery. After having
tried nearly every unwise experiment condemned by the teachings of
history, the United States has finally reached a position where its
currency meets the two fundamental requirements of sound finance,
namely, (1) the standard of value is that in use among the great
commercial states of the world; (2) all of the currency is either
directly or indirectly convertible into the standard coin.

Despite some minor faults in our financial system which make the
maintenance of the parity of the several kinds of currency a cumbersome
and expensive operation, and prevent the banks from rendering that
full degree of assistance to commerce and industry which they would
afford under laws that did not unnecessarily restrict their rightful
functions, all our money responds to the two essential tests—safety
and convertibility; while the banks have been among the most powerful
factors in placing the United States in the front rank of the nations
of the earth.

Our finances may be likened to a triangle, of which the base—the gold
standard—has been in actual existence since 1879 (much longer than
that in law), and the other side—safety—also assured, wanting but
another addition—elasticity—to complete the symmetrical and perfect
figure. That this last requisite of a sound currency will be supplied
by the wisdom and ingenuity of our people, is not to be doubted.

There are two respects in which the financial policy of the United
States is unique in comparison with most other great commercial
countries; first, its gold reserve is unprotected by the devices in
use elsewhere, as it does not charge a premium on gold as the Bank of
France does when gold is wanted for export, nor can it protect the gold
reserve by raising the rate of discount as the great banks of Europe
may do; second, banking is practically free and anti-monopolistic.
Under these conditions we have reached a place that may well excite the
astonishment of the old-world countries. Our stock of metallic money,
as estimated by the Director of the Mint, in 1898, was $925,000,000 in
gold and $638,000,000 in silver. No other nation owned so much gold.
Only one—China—owned as much silver, but it had no gold, and the per
capita of silver in China is only $1.96 against $8.56 in the United
States. Our stock of gold is more than double that of Great Britain,
greater by a hundred millions than that of France, and also exceeds
that of Germany and Russia. Of our silver stock, $561,500,000 is a full
legal tender, and $76,700,000 a limited legal tender, the latter sum
representing the subsidiary coins.

In our banking power the situation is equally fortunate. Mulhall
defines banking power as the paid-up capital of banks, the deposits
exclusive of savings banks, and the amount of convertible paper money.
He shows the growth of this form of wealth to have been as follows,
from 1840 to 1894:—

MILLIONS POUNDS STERLING.

----+----------+--------+---------+----------+--------+-------
| Great | United | France. | Germany. | Other | Total.
| Britain. | States | | | States |
----+----------+--------+---------+----------+--------+-------
1840| 132 | 90 | 16 | 12 | 58 | 308
1894| 960 | 1,030 | 356 | 231 | 760 | 3,337
----+----------+--------+---------+----------+--------+-------

In the two great essentials of financial strength—the quantity of
metallic money and banking power—we have far outstripped every other
nation. This is an unfailing sign of our advance toward a position of
commercial and industrial supremacy. The sceptre of financial power has
crossed the Atlantic from Europe to the New World. We are gradually
acquiring command of the world’s markets, and in time we shall see
our banks—ever the handmaids of commerce—extending their operations
to the most distant quarters of the earth and carrying everywhere the
beneficent influences of modern civilization.

New York as a financial centre has been growing with astonishing
rapidity in recent years. From 1879 to 1899 the banks belonging to
the New York Clearing-House Association increased their deposits from
$254,700,000 to $910,500,000, and their specie—chiefly gold—from
$54,700,000 to $202,600,000, the latter item having about doubled in
the past two years, being $104,700,000 in 1897, and $202,600,000,
as above stated, in 1899. The aggregate of banking institutions in
the city—national banks, state banks, trust companies, and savings
banks, exclusive of private banking firms—had, about January 1, 1899,
capital, surplus, and profits amounting to $311,600,000; deposits of
$2,047,800,000; and total resources of nearly $2,500,000,000. One
bank—the National City—with over $144,000,000 of deposits, is the
largest in the United States; while the Bowery Savings Bank, with
121,000 depositors and $67,000,000 of deposits, is the largest of its
kind in the country.

The present status of the different classes of banks in the United
States is fairly shown by the following table compiled from the Annual
Report of the Comptroller of the Currency, for the year 1898:—

PRINCIPAL ITEMS OF RESOURCES AND LIABILITIES OF ALL CLASSES OF BANKS IN
THE UNITED STATES, JULY 14, 1898.

--------------------+--------------+-------------+------------+-
| National | State Banks.|Loan & Trust|
| Banks. | | Companies. |
--------------------+--------------+-------------+------------+-
Loans |$2,151,757,655| $813,749,803|$539,162,445|
United States bonds | 285,356,900| 4,185,304| 34,186,440|
Other bonds | 250,689,375| 127,500,484| 159,791,312|
Cash | 492,882,724| 133,877,133| 22,250,862|
Capital | 622,016,745| 233,587,353| 101,228,555|
Surplus and profits | 332,971,643| 109,554,519| 97,643,666|
Deposits | 2,076,226,576| 912,365,406| 662,138,397|
Total resources | 3,977,675,445|1,356,084,800| 942,462,179|
--------------------+--------------+-------------+------------+-

--------------------+--------------+-----------+--------------
| Savings | Private | Total.
| Banks. | Banks. |
--------------------+--------------+-----------+--------------
Loans |$1,070,775,293|$57,206,819|$4,632,632,015
United States bonds | 140,029,726| 927,473| 464,685,843
Other bonds | 834,670,491| 3,599,092| 1,376,250,754
Cash | 32,928,323| 5,857,132| 687,796,174
Capital | 18,536,130| 16,721,750| 992,090,533
Surplus and profits | 187,475,971| 5,092,341| 732,738,140
Deposits | 2,028,208,409| 62,085,084| 5,741,023,872
Total resources | 2,241,344,991| 91,436,387| 8,609,003,802
--------------------+--------------+-----------+--------------

There were 3582 national banks that reported, and 5903 other banks, a
total of 9485. The total banking funds, that is, capital, surplus and
profits, and individual deposits, of all banks reporting, amounted to
$7,416,355,568.

We cannot get a correct understanding of these figures without going
back to earlier dates and making comparisons. In 1798 there were
twenty-five state banks in the country, against 3965 reporting to the
Comptroller of the Currency in 1898, which is perhaps about 90 per cent
of the total of such institutions now existing.

A hundred years ago the capital of the state banks was less than twenty
millions, compared with $233,971,643 now reported. They had, all told,
but $14,000,000 of specie—half as much as is now held by one New York
city bank alone. Their circulation was only $9,000,000, compared with
more than $200,000,000 of national bank circulation now outstanding.

The national banks also show a remarkable growth. In 1869 there were
1620 banks in operation, reporting $420,800,000 capital, $547,900,000
individual deposits, $17,500,000 specie, and $1,517,700,000 total
resources. Thirty years later the number of banks had increased to
3590, while the capital was $608,300,000, the individual deposits
$2,232,100,000, and specie $371,843,400, while the total resources had
increased to $4,403,800,000.

The total wealth of the United States in 1895 was estimated at more
than $80,000,000,000,—far exceeding in the aggregate that of any other
country in the world. It is expected that the census of 1900 will show
our total wealth to be more than $100,000,000,000, or probably double
that of Great Britain, the next richest nation.

But while the nation is piling up wealth at an unexampled rate, it
cannot be said that this is a land “where wealth accumulates and
men decay.” Great in its material resources, the country was never
before stronger in those elements which constitute the chief reliance
of national power. A united citizenship, possessing an honesty that
adversity cannot sully and an intelligence that when once aroused
penetrates the most cunningly concealed economic sophistries, working
out the problems of the future under laws and conditions assuring to
the individual the largest opportunities, points to a development in
the twentieth century in no wise inferior to that of the hundred years
preceding.

II. COINAGE AND PRODUCTION OF PRECIOUS METALS.

The prevailing systems of coinage in this country and among all great
commercial nations are the result of development and growth. Gold and
silver have become the principal money metals by a process of natural
selection, which has chosen the instruments best suited to the purpose.
In recent years, and under the laws of development, nearly all the
great trading countries of the world have selected gold as the standard
of value. In the future, gold itself may give way to something better,
for it only relatively meets the essentials of a perfect standard.

Among Greeks, Romans, and Oriental peoples, cattle were generally used
as a standard of value. The modern rupee of India is the old Sanscrit
word _roupa_, a herd. Capital is but the estimate of Roman riches in
cattle. The Latin _pecus_, cattle, is the root of _pecunia_, riches,
and the origin of our word pecuniary. The Icelanders measured values
in dried fish; the Hudson Bay country in skins; the early Virginians
in tobacco; the Indians of the United States and Canada in wampum; the
Chinese, even in recent times, in squares of pressed tea; the Africans
in bars of salt and slaves.

These primitive devices gradually gave way, under the demands of
international trade, to the use of metals as standards of value. Tin,
copper, gold, silver, and iron all were used, and, at first, passed by
weight. Government coinage of money is thought to date from the seventh
century B. C., and is credited to the Lydians and to Pheidon of Argos,
the official stamp being a guarantee of the honesty, weight, and purity
of the coins.

Modern coinage dates from the reformation of the coinage of Rome under
Constantine, who introduced the gold _solidus_ of $3.02 in value,
and a silver coin of like weight but of relative value. After the
time of Julian, this silver piece, called _siliqua_, was given such
value as that twenty-four of them equaled a gold _solidus_. In the
Frankish Empire, under the Merovingian kings, the relative values of
the _solidus_ and _siliqua_ fluctuated greatly. In the eighth century,
on account of the scarcity of gold, there was a gradual transition
to the silver standard, and a silver unit, also called a _solidus_,
was substituted for the gold _solidus_, the former being divided into
twelve pence. This silver _solidus_ afterwards became the shilling of
England and Germany. At first 300 pence were coined out of a pound of
silver; but under Pepin the number was reduced to twenty-two _solidi_
of twelve pence each—264 pence—out of a pound of silver. Under
Charlemagne it was provided that only 240 pence, or twenty _solidi_ of
account, should be stamped out of a pound of silver, and this system
was introduced, with more or less success, in what is now France and
Germany. As to form, it has remained, up to the most recent period, the
basis not only of the countries of Charlemagne’s Empire but of England.

After the time of Henry VIII. came a period of coinage debasement
which culminated in 1551. A thorough coinage reform was effected under
Elizabeth in 1560. The first large coinages of gold in England were
made under James I. These continued until the death of William III.,
in 1701. Still, silver continued to be the standard metal, and in
1695 another attempt was made to reform the currency by a recoinage
of the silver pieces, most of which had been clipped or worn, into a
new full-weight silver coin. These, however, were soon exported, in
spite of a reduction of the current value of the guinea, in 1717. The
gold standard in England gained a nearly complete victory by act of
Parliament in 1774, which provided that silver coins not of full weight
(there were hardly any others) need not be accepted in payments of
more than twenty-five pounds, except by weight. This provision, after
several renewals, became permanent in 1798. In 1797 coinage of silver
was suspended, and the single gold standard practically introduced,
though its operation was somewhat interfered with by the existence
of a paper currency. In 1816 the present English monetary system was
introduced. It held fast to the gold standard, by the provision that
silver pieces should be used only as divisional coins, and with a
legal-tender power limited to forty shillings.

[Illustration: OLD UNITED STATES MINT, PHILADELPHIA.]

Properly speaking, there was no coinage in the United States during the
colonial period. Maryland had a mint at one time, and one or two of the
other States, but they practically amounted to nothing. In the early
colonial period the substitutes for coins were wampum and bullets,
as in Massachusetts; skins and furs, as in New York; tobacco, as in
Maryland and Virginia. The coins in use before the Revolution were,
to some extent, those of England, but more largely those of Spain,
circulated in South America and traveling up to the United States.
The unit of account was the Spanish milled dollar or piece-of-eight,
though, up to 1775, accounts were kept in pounds, shillings, and pence,
a pound consisting, then as now, of twenty shillings, and a shilling
of twelve pence “colonial” or “pound” currency. Four pounds of this
“colonial currency” were reckoned as equal to three pounds sterling.

This colonial composite system of current coins was regulated by
coinage tariffs. Such a tariff, issued in 1750, valued one ounce of
silver at six shillings and eightpence, the Spanish milled dollar at
six shillings, the guinea at twenty-eight shillings, and the English
crown at six shillings and eightpence. All foreign coins were valued
in proportion to the value of the Spanish piece-of-eight. Some of the
colonies stamped the shilling, which constituted a large part of the
money in circulation. It, however, varied greatly in value in the
different colonies. Thus, the Spanish dollar equaled five shillings
in Georgia; eight in North Carolina and New York; six in Virginia,
Connecticut, New Hampshire, Massachusetts, and Rhode Island; seven
and sixpence in Maryland, Delaware, Pennsylvania, and New Jersey;
thirty-two and sixpence in South Carolina. The Spanish dollar itself,
with which these comparisons were made, was frequently below legal
weight, and, therefore, varied in value. Where the pieces mentioned in
the tariff of 1776 were of full weight, the ratio there established was
the English ratio of one to 15.21, the ratio for bullion being nearly
the same.

After the tariff of 1776 had been in operation for six years, the
colonies began to feel keenly the difficulties caused by the variety of
coins constituting their metallic circulating medium, and the need of
a special American coinage was frequently expressed. In 1782, Robert
Morris, superintendent of finance, submitted to the Congress of the
Confederation a scheme for a national coinage and the establishment
of an American mint, which met with approval. Jefferson recommended
the decimal system, with the dollar as the unit. Neither of these
proposals was carried into effect till, in 1786, the Congress of the
Confederation chose as the monetary unit of the United States the
dollar of 375.64 grains of pure silver, which unit had its origin in
the Spanish piaster or milled dollar, then the basis of the metallic
circulation of the English colonies in America. This American dollar
was never coined, there not being at the time a mint in the United
States.

The Act of April 2, 1792, established the first monetary system of
the United States. The bases of the system were: The gold dollar,
containing 24.75 grains of pure gold, and stamped in pieces of $10,
$5, and $2.50, denominated respectively eagles, half-eagles, and
quarter-eagles; the silver dollar, containing 371.25 grains of pure
silver. A mint was established. The coinage was unlimited, and there
was no mint charge. The ratio of gold to silver in coinage was 1:15.
Both gold and silver were legal tender. The standard was double.[4]
The Act of 1792 undervalued gold, which was therefore exported. The
Act of June 28, 1834, was passed to remedy this by changing the
mint ratio between the metals to 1:16.002. The latter act fixed the
weight of the gold dollar at 25.8 grains, but lowered the fineness
from 0.916⅔ to 0.899225. The fine weight of the gold dollar was thus
reduced to 23.2 grains. The Act of 1834 undervalued silver as that
of 1792 had undervalued gold, and silver was attracted to Europe by
the more favorable ratio of 1:15½. The Act of January 18, 1837, was
passed to make the fineness of the gold and silver coins uniform. The
legal weight of the gold dollar was fixed at 25.8 grains, and its fine
weight at 23.22 grains. The fineness was therefore changed by this act
to 0.900 and the ratio to 1:15.988+. Silver continued to be exported.
The Act of February 21, 1853, reduced the weight of the silver coins
of a denomination less than $1, which the Acts of 1792, 1834, and 1837
had made exactly proportional to the weight of the silver dollar,
and provided that they should be legal tender to the amount of only
$5. Under the Acts of 1792, 1834, and 1837 they had been full legal
tender. By the Act of 1853 the legal weight of the half dollar was
reduced to 192 grains, and other fractions of the dollar in proportion.
The coinage of the fractional parts of the dollar was reserved to the
government.

[4] This was true so far as the law was concerned, but
not actually, as may be seen by reading the sentences
immediately following the above statement.

The Act of February 12, 1873, provided that the unit of value of the
United States should be the gold dollar of the standard weight of
25.8 grains, and that there should be coined besides the following
gold coins: A quarter-eagle, or two and-a-half dollar gold piece; a
three-dollar gold piece; a half-eagle, or five-dollar piece; an eagle,
or ten-dollar piece; and a double eagle, or twenty-dollar piece, all of
a standard weight proportional to that of the dollar piece. These coins
were made legal tender in all payments at their nominal value when not
below the standard weight and limit of tolerance provided in the act
for the single piece, and when reduced in weight they should be legal
tender at a valuation in proportion to their actual weight. The silver
coins provided for by the Act were a trade dollar, a half-dollar or
fifty-cent piece, a quarter-dollar, and a ten-cent piece, the weight
of the trade dollar to be 420 grains troy; the half-dollar, twelve and
a half grams; the quarter-dollar and dime, respectively, one half and
one fifth of the weight of the half-dollar. The silver coins were made
legal tender at their nominal value for any amount not exceeding $5 in
any one payment. Owners of silver bullion were allowed to deposit it
at any mint of the United States to be formed into bars or into trade
dollars, and no deposit of silver for other coinage was to be received.
Section 2 of the joint resolution of July 22, 1876, recited that the
trade dollar should not thereafter be legal tender, and that the
Secretary of the Treasury should be authorized to limit the coinage of
the same to an amount sufficient to meet the export demand for it.

The Act of March 3, 1887, retired the trade dollar and prohibited
its coinage. That of September 26, 1890, discontinued the coinage of
the one-dollar and three-dollar gold pieces. The Act of February 28,
1878, directed the coinage of silver dollars of the weight of 412½
grains troy, of standard silver, as provided in the Act of January 18,
1837, and that such coins, with all silver dollars theretofore coined,
should be legal tender at their nominal value for all debts and dues,
public and private, except where otherwise expressly stipulated in the
contract. The Secretary of the Treasury was authorized and directed
by the first section of the act to purchase from time to time silver
bullion at the market price thereof, not less than $2,000,000 worth
nor more than $4,000,000 worth per month, and to cause the same to be
coined monthly, as fast as purchased, into such dollars. A subsequent
act, that of July 14, 1890, enacted that the Secretary of the Treasury
should purchase silver bullion to the aggregate amount of 4,500,000
ounces, or so much thereof as might be offered, each month, at the
market price thereof, not exceeding $1.00 for 371.25 grains of pure
silver, and to issue in payment thereof Treasury notes of the United
States, such notes to be redeemable by the government, on demand,
in coin, and to be legal tender in payment of all debts, public and
private, except where otherwise expressly stipulated in the contract.
The act directed the Secretary of the Treasury to coin each month
2,000,000 ounces of the silver bullion purchased under the provisions
of the act into standard silver dollars until July 1, 1891, and
thereafter as much as might be necessary, to provide for the redemption
of the Treasury notes issued under the act. The purchasing clause of
the Act of July 14, 1890, was repealed by the Act of November 1, 1893.
The War Revenue Act of June 13, 1898, authorized and directed the
coinage of standard silver dollars to the amount of not less than one
and one half million dollars a month, from the bullion in the Treasury
purchased under the Act of July 14, 1890. The Act of June 9, 1879,
made the subsidiary silver coins of the United States legal tender to
the amount of $10. The minor coins are legal tender to the amount of
twenty-five cents.

The following official figures give, by periods of ten years, the
coinage of the United States from the establishment of the Mint to the
present time:—

-------------+-----------------+---------------+--------------+-
Years. | Gold. | Silver. | Minor. |
-------------+-----------------+---------------+--------------+-
1793–1799 | $696,530.00| $1,216,158.75| $50,111.42|
1800–1809 | 3,067,067.50| 3,154,687.75| 164,865.79|
1810–1819 | 2,348,915.00| 6,107,903.75| 162,534.07|
1820–1829 | 2,579,017.50| 14,787,327.65| 178,372.70|
1830–1839 | 17,745,422.50| 28,112,136.60| 334,810.21|
1840–1849 | 58,909,439.00| 22,223,733.00| 360,840.33|
1850–1859 | 352,915,059.00| 47,238,813.00| 1,135,580.03|
1860–1869 | 290,786,131.00| 13,637,607.90| 8,504,070.00|
1870–1879 | 370,718,883.50| 142,196,178.60| 2,231,009.50|
1880–1889 | 411,766,277.00| 305,869,081.20| 8,127,305.56|
1890 to June | 374,806,225.00| 136,248,501.65| 7,564,849.65|
30, 1897 | | | |
-------------+-----------------+---------------+--------------+-
|$1,886,338,958.00|$720,792,129.85|$28,814,558.26|
-------------+-----------------+---------------+--------------+-

-------------+-----------------
Years. | Total.
-------------+-----------------
1793–1799 | $1,962,800.17
1800–1809 | 6,386,621.04
1810–1819 | 8,619,561.82
1820–1829 | 17,544,717.85
1830–1839 | 46,192,369.31
1840–1849 | 81,494,012.33
1850–1859 | 401,289,443.03
1860–1869 | 312,927,808.90
1870–1879 | 515,146,071.60
1880–1889 | 725,762,663.76
1890 to June | 518,619,576.30
30, 1897 |
-------------+-----------------
|$2,635,945,646.01
-------------+-----------------

At this writing the report of the Director of the Mint has not been
published, but the coinage for the full year 1897 may be stated as
follows: gold, $76,028,484; silver, $18,486,697; and for the year 1898,
gold, $77,985,757; silver, $23,034,034. From January 1 to June 30,
1899, the coinage was: gold, $65,915,020; silver, $12,780,441.

It is sometimes thought that the silver dollars are not a full legal
tender, but this is not so. They are an unlimited legal tender for all
debts, public and private. The Treasury does not, in practice, redeem
silver dollars in gold, but successive Secretaries of the Treasury have
announced their readiness to do so, if necessary to keep the silver
dollars from depreciating,—that is, preserve their parity,—which the
law directs.

Silver certificates and gold certificates are not legal tender, but
entitle the holder to receive the kind and amount of coin named on
their face.

The value of gold bullion in a dollar of that metal is 99.991125
cents, or practically 100 cents. The value of the silver bullion in a
dollar of that metal is about 45 cents. It varies, however, with the
fluctuations in the market value of silver.

It will thus be seen that the bullion value of a silver dollar and
of a gold dollar differs greatly, but the equality of the purchasing
power of the two coins is due to the fact that the silver dollars are
receivable for public and private debts, that they are indirectly
exchangeable for gold, by depositing them in the banks, and that the
government is pledged to redeem them in gold, if necessary to preserve
their parity with gold.

[Illustration: NEW UNITED STATES MINT, PHILADELPHIA, PA.]

As early as 1826 the United States began to export domestic gold,
beginning with an export of $1,056,088 of gold coin and bullion,
and receiving an import of $678,740. Up to 1897 the grand total of
exports of gold coin and bullion amounted to $2,186,238,541, and the
total imports to $1,112,138,766, an excess of exports over imports of
$1,074,099,775. In 1898 the imports of gold coin and bullion into the
United States were $120,391,674, and the exports $15,406,391, making
the net imports $104,985,283.

From 1821 to 1897 the grand total of exports of silver coin and
bullion from the United States was $1,152,688,776, and the imports
$730,325,881, making an excess of exports over imports of $422,362,895.
In the fiscal year 1898, the silver imports were $30,927,781, and the
exports $55,105,239, making the excess of exports $24,177,458.

The total product of gold in the United States from 1792 up to 1896 was
$2,113,034,769, and of silver $1,444,970,000, making a grand total of
the precious metals of $3,558,004,769. The total value of the entire
world’s production of gold, between the years 1493 and 1896, was
$8,983,320,600, and of silver $10,556,700,800, making a grand total of
gold and silver of $19,540,021,400.

As a comparison of the money status of the United States at the
beginning and end of the century, the following figures are
interesting: In 1800 the population was 5,308,483; the estimated bank
notes outstanding, $10,500,000; the estimated specie in the country,
$17,500,000; the total money in the United States, $28,000,000;
the specie in the Treasury, $1,500,000; the money in circulation,
$26,500,000; the amount per capita, $4.99. In 1898 the population was
74,522,000; the total coin in the United States, including bullion in
the Treasury, $1,498,993,249; total paper money, $1,138,440,126; total
money of all kinds, $2,637,433,375; coin, bullion, and paper money
in the Treasury, $799,537,480; total circulation, $1,837,859,895;
circulation per capita, $24.66.

[Illustration: CARPENTERS’ HALL, PHILADELPHIA.

(First Site of First United States Bank.)]

Perhaps no law relating to the coins and currency of the United States
has been so widely discussed, or has borne more directly on the
attitude and influence of political parties than the Coinage Act of
1873. This act grew out of a proposition to revise our coinage laws,
made by John Jay Knox to the Secretary of the Treasury, in April, 1870.
Mr. Knox, in his rough draft of a bill, provided for a silver dollar
of 384 grains, to be a legal tender for sums not exceeding $5.00.
Thus, the standard silver dollar of 412½ grains was eliminated. It
did not appear in the bill as it passed the Senate, January 10, 1871,
nor in that reported to the House, March 9, 1871. The bill underwent
protracted and thorough discussion, and on May 27, 1872, was passed
in the House. As passed, it contained the original provision for
coining a silver dollar of the weight of 384 grains—twice the weight
of the silver half dollar. These dollars were to be a legal tender
for amounts not exceeding $5.00. The Senate amended this House bill,
by substituting a trade dollar of the weight of 420 grains for that
of 384 grains, at the same time preserving the legal-tender limit of
$5.00. In the amended form, it passed the Senate, January 17, 1873, and
the House, February 7, 1873, and became a law. It will be seen that
the standard silver dollar of 412½ grains was never in the bill, and
could not, therefore, have been secretly omitted, as was afterwards
charged. It was omitted from the first draft, and all through,
because none were being coined, and those that had been coined were
exported, the silver bullion in them being, at that time, worth more as
bullion than coin. By joint resolution of Congress, approved July 22,
1876, the trade dollars provided for in the act were deprived of their
legal-tender quality. It was supposed they would circulate in China,
but they proved useless even for that purpose.

III. EARLY BANKING IN THE UNITED STATES.

The first banks in the United States owed their origin to Robert
Morris and Alexander Hamilton. Morris, as early as 1763, conceived the
plan of a bank to assist in developing American trade, and in 1779,
Hamilton proposed the organization of “The Company of the Bank of the
United States.” These plans did not mature, but were followed, at the
suggestion of Thomas Paine, by an association of ninety-two subscribers
to a fund of 300,000 pounds Pennsylvania currency to support the
Revolutionary army. This association became known as the Pennsylvania
Bank. It commenced business July 17, 1780, and after a career of a
year and a half, during which time it greatly aided the government in
furnishing army supplies, its affairs were wound up.

On May 17, 1781, Hamilton presented the plan of a bank to Congress,
which was to be truly national, and “created avowedly to aid the
United States.” Its name was to be the Bank of North America, with a
subscription of $400,000 in gold and silver, and its notes, payable
on demand, to be receivable for duties and taxes in every State.
Congress approved the plan, and Morris, then Superintendent of Finance,
published it, with an address showing its advantages to the government
and people, then suffering from the ill effects of a depreciated
currency.

The Bank of North America was organized November 1, 1781, and began
business January 7, 1782. It creditably fulfilled its mission “to aid
the United States,” and, after the expiration of its charter, became
a State institution. In 1864 it entered the national banking system,
though retaining its old name. This bank was followed by the Bank of
New York, which began business June 9, 1784, and by the Massachusetts
Bank, which began business July 5, 1784.

FIRST UNITED STATES BANK.—This institution grew out of the
recommendations of Alexander Hamilton, and formed a part of his scheme
of strengthening the public credit and bringing about a closer union of
States. His plan was incorporated into a bill which passed the Senate
January 3, 1791, and the House, January 20, 1791. Washington signed it
February 25, 1791. The bill was hotly opposed as unconstitutional by
Secretary of State Thomas Jefferson, Attorney-General Edmund Randolph,
and in general by representatives from the Southern States.

The capital of the bank was fixed at $10,000,000, one fifth of which
was to be subscribed by the government. The remainder was subscribed by
individuals, and two hours after the opening of the books the capital
was oversubscribed to the amount of 4000 shares. The central bank was
located at Philadelphia, and afterwards branches were established in
New York, Boston, Baltimore, Washington, Norfolk, Charleston, Savannah,
and New Orleans. Business was first opened in Carpenters’ Hall,
Philadelphia, December 12, 1791. In July, 1797, the site was removed
to a new building on Third Street, below Chestnut, and it remained
there till the dissolution of the bank, with the exception of a brief
removal to Germantown in 1798, during the epidemic of yellow fever.
Though this bank proved a profitable enterprise for the government, it
failed to secure a renewal of its charter in 1811, chiefly because so
many of its shares had passed into foreign hands.

[Illustration: THE GIRARD BANK, PHILADELPHIA.

(Second Site of First United States Bank.)]

EARLY STATE BANKS.—From 1790 to 1811 the number of State banks
increased from four to eighty-eight; their circulation from $2,500,000
to $22,700,000; their capital from $2,500,000 to $42,610,000. In the
same time the metallic circulation of the country rose from $9,000,000
to $30,000,000. These banks failed to meet the monetary necessities
of the War of 1812, and in 1814 practically all of them south of New
England suspended specie payments. Their notes were poured out in
all denominations from six cents upward, and, with coin redemption
stopped, they depreciated rapidly. This led to great financial distress
in 1818–1820, and to excessive bank failures. The seriousness of the
general situation, and the declining credit of the government, led to
the establishment of the second Bank of the United States.

SECOND BANK OF THE UNITED STATES.—In October, 1814, Secretary Dallas
laid a report before Congress, in which he deprecated the uncertain
amount and value of the paper currency. “There exists,” he said, “at
this time no adequate circulating medium common to the citizens of
the United States. The moneyed transactions of private life are at a
stand, and the fiscal operations of the government labor with extreme
inconvenience.” He then recommended as the remedy the establishment of
a national banking institution. A bill, based upon Dallas’s plan for
such an institution, failed of passage in the House in 1814, and again
in 1815, though passed by the Senate. It was, however, finally passed
in an amended form, but was vetoed by President Madison.

On December 24, 1815, Mr. Dallas laid before Congress another plan for
a national bank. A bill was framed authorizing such an institution,
with a capital of $35,000,000, $7,000,000 of which were to be
subscribed by the government, the central bank to be at Philadelphia,
with power to establish branches, payments to be made in specie at
all times unless otherwise authorized by Congress. This bill passed
both Houses of Congress, and was signed by President Madison, April
10, 1816. When the subscription books of this bank were closed, it was
found that the subscriptions fell short of the authorized $35,000,000
by $3,000,000, which amount was taken by Stephen Girard.

The bank could not lend more than $500,000 to the government without
authority of Congress, was to be the fiscal agent of the Treasury, and
to receive deposits of public moneys. No notes of a less denomination
than $5.00 were to be issued, and the penalty for refusing to pay
notes or deposits in specie on demand was twelve per cent per annum
until paid. It began business January 7, 1817. Owing to the impending
financial crisis and bad management, the bank verged rapidly toward
insolvency, but was resuscitated under the vigorous management of a
new president, Langdon Cheves, who was elected March 6, 1819. He was
succeeded by Nicholas Biddle in 1823, who was destined to see the fall
of the great institution.

The national bank incurred the hostility of the State banks, which
called it a monster because it refused to allow the notes of the local
banks to accumulate as deposits in its branches without redemption.
Various States passed discriminating laws against it. Jackson, in his
message to Congress in 1829, attacked the constitutionality of the
law establishing it, and charged that it had “failed in the great
end of establishing a uniform and sound currency.” At this time the
Bank was an imposing institution with its capital of $35,000,000,
its public deposits of six to seven million, its private deposits of
a like amount, its circulation of $12,000,000, its annual discounts
of $40,000,000, its annual profits of over $3,000,000, its palatial
establishment in Philadelphia, its twenty-five branches throughout the
Union, its five hundred employees, its stock distributed through nearly
all parts of the world, and its notes current at par at home and abroad.

Jackson’s message was not received favorably by Congress. His aversion,
it was thought, was due rather to his belief that the Bank was his
enemy than to any dislike of a national bank. The growing hostility
between him and Henry Clay induced the latter to make the renewal of
the Bank’s charter a political issue. When the bill rechartering the
Bank was passed in July, 1832, Jackson vetoed it, charging, in the
main, that the Bank was a monopoly. This brought the question of the
further existence of the Bank fully into the arena of politics, in the
presidential election of 1832, with the “Hero of New Orleans” on one
side, and on the other “monster monopoly,” “Old Nick’s money,” and
“Clay’s rags.” Jackson won, and speedily decided to remove the public
deposits from the Bank. This decision precipitated a bitter war between
Jackson and Congress. But Jackson did not swerve from his purpose. By
1835 it became apparent that the Bank could not secure a renewal of its
charter from Congress. As a confession of its defeat, and just thirteen
days before the expiration of its federal charter, the Bank obtained
from the State of Pennsylvania, February 18, 1836, a charter for the
United States Bank of Pennsylvania, for a period of thirty years. Shorn
of its importance, in a restricted field, yet with enormous capital,
it fell into large bond and stock investments of questionable value.
Its troubles were aggravated by bad management. It suspended during the
panic of 1837 and the next year, and again for the last time in 1841.
Biddle resigned the presidency in 1840, and four years later died poor
and broken-hearted. Thus perished what is sometimes called the third
Bank of the United States, its predecessor, the second Bank of the
United States, having fallen a victim to political intrigue and loss of
prestige. The shareholders lost their entire investment of $28,000,000,
but the circulating notes were all paid, and also the deposits. The
government got back its investment of $7,000,000, and made $6,093,167
besides, from its connection with the Bank.

[Illustration: SECOND UNITED STATES BANK, PHILADELPHIA. NOW CUSTOM
HOUSE.]

STATE BANKS AND INDEPENDENT TREASURY.—After the removal of deposits
from the Bank of the United States, September 26, 1833, the public
revenues were deposited in selected State banks, sometimes called “pet
banks.” In 1836 eighty-eight State banks in twenty-four States held
public deposits to the amount of $49,377,986. As the State banks had
thrown their influence against the national bank, they were rewarded
by allowing them to use the public money intrusted to them as a basis
of extending their loans and for enormous issues of their own notes.
Banks were started for the sole purpose of issuing notes which they
could use in buying public lands. As a consequence the government lost
heavily through the depreciation of these notes and the failure of
the banks. On July 11, 1836, the Secretary of the Treasury issued a
circular forbidding the receipt of anything but specie in payment for
public lands. This caused a run on the banks and aided in hastening
the financial crisis of 1837. An act of Congress of June 23, 1836,
authorizing the calling in of $37,468,859 of the public funds deposited
in the State banks, for purposes of distribution, forced the suspension
of specie payments by all such banks, with very few exceptions.

The unsatisfactory trial of both federal and State banks as custodians
of the public funds led to the establishment of what became known as
the independent Treasury system, by which the government collects its
money and keeps it in the hands of the United States Treasurer or
sub-treasurers, making disbursements when required. An act putting this
system into effect became law July 4, 1840, but was repealed the next
year. It was repassed August 6, 1846, and remained in operation until
the passage of the National Currency Act in February, 1863, which gave
the Secretary of the Treasury the right to designate certain national
banks as depositories of public funds. There were in such banks, on
February 4, 1899, United States deposits amounting to $81,120,873,
secured by United States bonds belonging to the banks and deposited
in the Treasury, amounting to $89,100,240. Prior to the adoption of
the national banking system the country had a somewhat disastrous
experience with what has been known as “wild-cat” banks. Many of
them were organized for the sole purpose of issuing notes they never
intended to pay. While they were numerous and dangerous, it must be
remembered that in a number of States the leading banks carried on only
a legitimate business, and State banks as they exist to-day compare
favorably in their management with the national banks.

IV. HISTORY OF THE LEGAL-TENDER NOTE.

The first act authorizing the issue of legal-tender notes, known
popularly as greenbacks, was approved by President Lincoln, February
25, 1862. It provided for the issue of $150,000,000 in notes, in
denominations of not less than $5.00. Holders of these notes could
deposit them with the United States Treasurer or assistant treasurers
in any sum not less than $50.00, or any multiple thereof, and receive
United States bonds bearing six per cent interest. The first notes
were issued March 10, 1862. An act authorizing a second issue of
$150,000,000 was signed by the President, July 11, 1862. Of these
$35,000,000 were to be in denominations of less than $5.00. A third
issue of $150,000,000 was authorized March 3, 1863, but this act
deprived the legal-tender note of its convertibility into six per cent
bonds at the option of the holder.

The withdrawal of this privilege worked no particular hardship at the
time, for bond issues and various interest-bearing certificates were
plenty during the period of war. But after the war had closed and the
issues of new securities had ceased, the absence of this provision
began to prevent the absorption of the legal-tender notes.

The highest amount of legal-tender notes outstanding at any date was on
January 3, 1864, $449,338,902. Their depreciation was hastened by the
issue of the short-time interest-bearing securities in large amounts.
During 1862 the average gold premium was 113.3; during 1863, 145.2;
during 1864, 203.3. In July, 1864, this premium reached its highest
point, an average of 258.1.

In 1865 the country began to feel the necessity of a contraction of
the currency, with a view to as early a resumption of specie payments
as the business interests would permit, and the Congress expressed
the public sentiment by an almost unanimous resolution. On March 12,
1866, an act was approved calling for the retirement and cancellation
of not more than $10,000,000 of legal tenders within six months, and
thereafter not more than $4,000,000 during any one month. The effect
was to reduce the legal tenders outstanding on December 31, 1867, to
$356,000,000.

This reduction, together with the rapid payment of notes of other
classes, used as currency, led to so sudden a contraction of the
circulating medium, and such stringency in the money market, that
Congress, by act of February 4, 1868, prohibited the further reduction
of the legal-tender notes. The amount outstanding, October 1, 1872, was
$356,000,000, and on January 1, 1874, $382,979,815, the increase being
due to a construction on the part of secretaries of the Treasury to the
effect that they had power to reissue retired notes which were held as
a reserve. On June 20, 1874, Congress enacted that the United States
notes outstanding and to be used as part of the circulating medium
should not exceed $382,000,000, and that no part thereof should be held
or used as a reserve.

Another attempt was made in 1875 to reduce the aggregate of
legal-tender notes, preparatory to the resumption of specie payments.
The Resumption Act of January 14, 1875, authorized, among other things,
the retirement and cancellation of legal tenders till the amount
outstanding should be reduced to $300,000,000; $35,318,984 were retired
under this law, but further reduction was prohibited by act of May 31,
1878. The amount outstanding at that date was $346,681,016, and this
has continued to the present time, no new issues having been authorized.

On January 1, 1879, the resumption of specie payments took place as
provided in the act of January 14, 1875. At this latter date, the
only legal-tender coin recognized by law was the gold coin. But, in
February, 1878, the coinage of standard silver dollars was authorized,
and they were to be a legal tender for all debts, unless otherwise
expressly stipulated in the contract. This led to the claim on the part
of those who favored silver that the redemption of legal-tender notes,
provided for in coin in the act of 1875, could be effected by the use
of silver dollars. But the general, and doubtless sound, construction
of the law of 1875 has been that it was an express contract to redeem
the legal-tender notes in the coin then recognized as legal tender, and
in no other; and so the Treasury has redeemed legal tenders since 1879,
in gold, when the same is demanded.

In 1869 the United States Supreme Court, the bench not being
full, declared the acts authorizing legal-tender notes to be
unconstitutional. But subsequently, the bench having its full quota
of nine, the Court sustained the constitutionality of the acts, on
the ground, mainly, that they were a proper exercise of the war power
vested in the Congress. In 1883 the Court decided that the reissues of
these notes, made in time of peace, were constitutional.

At the time of the resumption of specie payments there were
$135,000,000 in gold and bullion on hand to provide for the redemption
of such notes as might be presented. By Act of July 12, 1882, it was
provided that when the redemption reserve of gold coin and bullion in
the Treasury fell below $100,000,000, the issue of gold certificates
should cease. This is held to indicate that Congress regarded
$100,000,000 as the limit below which the redemption reserve should not
be permitted to fall.

If this reserve had not been called upon to bear other burdens, there
would probably never have been any doubts as to its sufficiency. In
1878, however, began the coinage of silver dollars and the issue of
silver certificates. These notes were kept at par in gold by their
interchangeability in the operations of commerce for legal-tender
notes. They were thus an indirect charge on the gold reserve. From 1878
to 1890 they were increased at the rate of over $2,500,000 a month. In
that year (July 14, 1890) an act was passed providing for the issue of
Treasury notes in the purchase of silver bullion, which provided also
for the coinage of some of the bullion purchased into silver dollars.
These Treasury notes were redeemable both in gold and silver, and as
the government never availed itself of its option to redeem in silver
when gold was demanded for them, these notes as they were issued became
a further burden on the gold reserve provided for the legal-tender
notes.

By the beginning of the year 1893 the legal-tender notes, silver
certificates, and Treasury notes had reached an aggregate of nearly
$800,000,000, all depending on the Treasury reserve for gold redemption.

This reduction of the percentage of gold held to the amount of the
demand liabilities raised doubts as to the ability of the government
to maintain gold payments, and the legal tenders and Treasury notes
were presented for redemption. The depletion of gold was so great that
on one or two occasions there was danger that the reserve would be
exhausted, and resort was had to the sale of bonds to procure gold to
replenish the reserve.

The issue of further Treasury notes was stopped by the repeal of the
act of 1890 in November, 1893, and since this repeal confidence in the
ability of the Treasury to maintain gold redemptions has been gradually
restored.

Under the provisions of the Act of May, 1878, the legal-tender notes
when redeemed cannot be canceled. They must be paid out again, and
therefore when reissued, they may again be presented for redemption.
This constitutes the so-called endless chain by which the gold in the
Treasury is always liable to be drawn out.

V. THE NATIONAL BANKING SYSTEM.

The desirability of perfecting the banking and currency system of the
country was readily perceived on the breaking out of the Civil War in
1861. Secretary Chase in two annual reports, those of 1861 and 1862,
recommended a system of national banks, whose supervision should be
by national authority, and whose issues of notes should be based
on deposits of bonds of the government. After several unsuccessful
attempts, a bill, introduced by Mr. Sherman, passed both Senate and
House, and became a law February 25, 1863. This act embodied the
essential features of Mr. Chase’s reports. Under it the first charter
was issued to the First National Bank of Philadelphia.

The formation of national banks proceeded very slowly at first. In
order to hold out greater inducements for the State banks to enter the
national system, the act was amended on June 3, 1864. The first report
of the Comptroller of the Currency, November 28, 1863, showed that
only 134 national banks had been organized up to that date; but when
the act of June 3, 1864, went into operation, new banks were formed
more frequently. A more rapid increase took place after the passage
of the act of March 3, 1865, imposing a tax of 10 per cent on the
circulating notes of State banks. This increase was from 638 banks in
January, 1865, to 1513 in October of the same year; with an increase
in capital of from $135,618,874 to $393,187,206; and in circulation of
from $66,769,375 to $171,321,903. Prior to 1869 national banks were
required to make their reports on fixed dates, but after March 3, 1869,
they were required by law to make their reports to the Comptroller five
times a year on some past date fixed upon by the Comptroller.

NATIONAL BANK LAWS AND REGULATIONS.—The national banks are under the
supervision of the Comptroller of the Currency, who is appointed by the
President on the recommendation of the Secretary of the Treasury. His
salary is $5000 a year.

A national bank may be organized by any number of persons not less
than five, on permission of the Comptroller. The capital required is
not less than $50,000 in any case, and this minimum applies only to
towns the population of which does not exceed 6000; in cities having
a population exceeding 50,000, the minimum capital is $200,000. For
places having a population over 6000 and not exceeding 50,000, the
capital required is $100,000. One half of the capital must be paid in
before the bank is authorized to begin business, and the remainder in
installments of not less than 10 per cent on the entire amount of the
capital, as frequently as one installment at the end of each succeeding
month from the time it is authorized to begin business. Capital stock
is divided into shares of $100 each.

The banks are managed by a board of not less than five directors,
chosen by the stockholders. Executive officers of the bank—president,
vice-president, cashier, and assistant cashier—are chosen by the
directors.

Shareholders are individually liable for the debts, contracts, and
engagements of the bank to the extent of the amount of their stock
therein, at the par value, in addition to the amount invested in such
shares. This is what is known as the double liability of shareholders,
and is one of the features adding to the strength of the system.

National banks are designated by the Secretary of the Treasury to
act as depositaries or custodians of public money. Such deposits are
secured specially by a deposit of United States bonds with the Treasury.

All national banks before commencing business are required to transfer
and deliver to the Treasurer of the United States, as security for
their circulating notes, United States registered bonds to an amount
not less than one fourth the capital where the capital is $150,000 or
less, and to the amount of $50,000 where the capital is in excess of
$150,000. These bonds must be taken by the banks whether they issue
circulation or not.

Circulating notes are issued to national banks on a deposit of United
States bonds with the Treasurer. Notes are limited to 90 per cent of
the par value of the bonds, also to 90 per cent of the capital of the
bank. They are over-secured, and no holder of them has ever lost a
dollar by reason of the failure of a bank.

The notes are secured by the government bonds, there being a difference
of the 10 per cent between the par of the bonds and the notes issued,
and the bonds nearly always command a premium. They are further secured
by the first lien on the assets of the bank, including the double
liability of shareholders, by a 5 per cent redemption fund in the
Treasury, and also by the margin between the capital and the amount of
notes permitted.

National bank notes are redeemable at the counters of the issuing banks
and at the Treasury in “lawful money” of the United States. This term,
as commonly used, means legal-tender money, and in practice, perhaps,
gold coin or legal-tender notes.

Reserves of national banks are the amounts of money kept on hand to
pay their deposits and current checks and drafts. This reserve is to
be kept in lawful money,—gold and silver coin or certificates, and
United States currency certificates or legal-tender notes. There are
three central reserve cities, namely, New York, Chicago, and St. Louis.
National banks in these three cities must keep a reserve of 25 per
cent against their deposits, and this amount must be kept in their
own vaults. There are twenty-four other reserve cities which are also
required to keep a reserve of 25 per cent, but one half of that amount
may be due from other banks in New York and other central reserve
cities, approved as reserve agents by the Comptroller of the Currency.
Banks outside of these reserve cities must keep a reserve of 15 per
cent, three fifths of which may be due from approved reserve agents in
the reserve cities or central reserve cities.

In times of panic when there is a run on banks they may use this
reserve to pay their depositors, and it often happens that the reserve
falls below the amount required by law. Under such circumstances the
Comptroller may notify the banks to make good the deficiency; failing
to comply with this request within thirty days, they may be closed.

National banks are not permitted to make loans on real estate.
The regulations prescribed by the law for the management of these
institutions are very stringent, supplemented by a system of
examination and reports.

In 1896 the Comptroller of the Currency estimated that the government
had made a net profit of $157,439,248.98 out of the revenues derived
from the national banks. It was estimated in the same report that the
average percentage of dividends paid to creditors of insolvent national
banks was 75 per cent. There have been no losses on circulation. In
1878 the Comptroller estimated that the annual losses upon all the
currency issued by State and private banks amounted to 5 per cent
annually.

The national banks are not monopolistic. Any body of five reputable
citizens can form one by getting together $50,000 capital. The total
shares of the national banks are approximately 300,000.

Profits on national bank stock are not exorbitant. For a period of
twenty-nine years the net earnings on capital and surplus have been
only a little over 7 per cent.

[Illustration: THE BOURSE, PARIS.]

Since the establishment of the national banking system 5171 banks
have been organized, of which 1224 have gone into liquidation, 368
have become insolvent, and 3579 are in operation (February 4, 1899).

There is a marked falling off in the number of new national banks
organized in recent years. In 1890 there were 307 organized, but in
1898 there were only 50 organizations reported, and that was the
highest number reported since 1893. The capital of the national banks
is also decreasing, but the deposits show a large increase.

At present the State banks are gaining in numbers more rapidly than the
national banks.

[Illustration: BANK OF ENGLAND, LONDON.]

PROFIT ON NATIONAL BANK CIRCULATION.—Many suppose that national banks
make an undue profit on the privilege they have of issuing notes to
circulate as money, based on a deposit of bonds with the United States
treasurer. Official figures disprove this. The total national bank
notes outstanding, February 4, 1899, was $203,636,184.50. The law
permits these banks to issue notes to the extent of 90 per cent of
their capital. This capital, on February 4, 1899, was $608,301,245.
Therefore they might have had notes at issue on that date to the amount
of $545,871,120.50, instead of only $203,636,184.50. This is conclusive
evidence that there is no substantial profit in the issuing of such
notes.

In the figures furnished by the Comptroller of the Currency for 1898,
he shows that the profit which a national bank could make by taking out
circulation on a deposit of $100,000 of United States bonds, on October
31, 1898, was less than 1 per cent. On that date eight leading banks
had no circulating notes at all out. The meagre profits of national
banks explain why they do not supply an adequate paper currency. The
restrictions on them make it impossible to render any substantial
assistance to business in this respect. This is especially true in
times of panic. Possessing gigantic strength, they are compelled to see
the industries of the country attacked by doubt and distrust, and are
unable to go to their aid because of the restraints which forbid them
to exercise their legitimate functions.

VI. FOREIGN BANKING AND FINANCE.

Most foreign countries issue metallic money only, except those that are
on a paper basis. In general the paper currency is issued by banks,
many of which are more or less remotely associated with the government.
Some of these banks issue notes on the security of the government or
other stocks and bonds, while many emit notes based on no special form
of security, but upon the general assets of the bank.

As compared with the United States there are but few banks in the
principal foreign countries. England has less than one hundred;
Scotland less than a dozen; Canada but thirty-eight chartered banks. As
in other foreign countries, the Canadian banks have numerous branches
affiliated with the head office. National banks in the United States
are prohibited from having branches. The Bank of France, the Bank of
England, the Imperial Bank of Germany, the Austro-Hungarian Bank, the
Imperial Bank of Russia, are all more or less intimately associated
with their respective governments.

[Illustration: GERMAN BANK, BREMEN.]

The Bank of England was incorporated by royal charter, July 27, 1694,
its incorporators lending £1,200,000 to the government, in return
for which the Bank was permitted to issue notes to a like amount. It
had a practical monopoly up to 1826, and even now, it is believed,
no bank within a radius of 65 miles of London may issue notes. It
has suspended specie payments more than once. In 1844, the banking
and issue departments of the Bank were separated. One fifth of the
reserve may be silver, though in practice the reserve is kept in gold
coin and bullion. Its notes are based on gold, except £16,800,000,
which are secured by the government debt and other securities. It is
compelled to buy all gold offered at a fixed price, paying for it in
notes. So it must redeem all notes on demand in gold. When so redeemed
they are canceled and, after five years, burned. No notes of a less
denomination than five pounds are issued. The Bank checks gold exports
by raising the rate of discount. The building covers about four acres of
ground, and employs over eleven hundred persons. It is the keystone of
the entire system of British credit, and commands the assistance of the
Government when needed.

The Scotch banks issue notes on their own credit to the amount
outstanding at the time of the passage of the Bank Act in 1844. Their
rate of interest is said to be the same at all of their thousand
offices. A unique feature of the Scotch banking system is that of cash
credits, by means of which a person of good credit may get his checks
cashed without a deposit of actual money, the banks simply entering the
credits on their books.

The Bank of France has a monopoly of note issues, charges a premium on
gold for export, and may redeem its notes in either gold or silver. The
Imperial Bank of Germany and a few other German banks issue notes on
gold and other securities, and further amounts on their general credit.
Beyond a fixed sum, called the emergency circulation, a tax of five per
cent is levied. Other European banks are generally modeled on the same
leading principle—a central bank of issue, with numerous branches, and
associated with the Government directly or indirectly. The Imperial
Bank of Russia issues notes practically covered by gold and redeemable
in that coin. Japan tried a system of national banks combined with
Government paper money, but is now substituting a system of bank notes
issued by the Bank of Japan.

VII. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT DEBT SINCE 1857.

In 1857 the Government owed only $10,000,000 over and above the cash
held in the treasury. At the breaking out of the Civil War the debt had
increased to about $80,000,000. By August 31, 1865, it had increased
to $2,756,000,000, with an interest charge of $150,000,000. In
twenty-eight years, down to June 30, 1893, the Government extinguished
$1,917,500,000 of its debt, paid $2,364,000,000 for interest on its
debt, and $118,000,000 for premium on bonds redeemed, making a grand
total of $4,400,000,000, or an annual average payment of $157,000,000
for the entire period.

The rise and fall of the public debt from July 1, 1857, to July 1,
1898, appear more fully in the following table.

-----------------+---------------+------------------
Years. | Total debt. | Debt less cash in
| | the Treasury.
-----------------+---------------+------------------
1857, July 1 | $28,699,831 | $9,998,621
1860, ” 1 | 64,842,287 | 59,964,402
1861, ” 1 | 90,580,873 | 87,718,660
1862, ” 1 | 524,176,412 | 505,312,752
1863, ” 1 | 1,119,772,138 | 1,111,350,737
1864, ” 1 | 1,815,784,370 | 1,709,452,277
1865, August 31 | 2,844,649,626 | 2,756,431,571
1873, July 1 | 2,234,482,993 | 2,105,462,060
1879, ” 1 | 2,245,495,072 | 1,996,414,905
1889, ” 1 | 1,619,052,922 | 975,939,750
1893, ” 1 | 1,545,985,686 | 838,969,475
1895, December 1 | 1,708,871,670 | 948,477,612
1896, July 1 | 1,769,840,323 | 955,297,253
1897, ” 1 | 1,817,672,665 | 986,656,086
1898, ” 1 | 1,796,531,995 | 1,027,085,492
-----------------+---------------+------------------

In 1865 the annual interest charge on the public debt was $150,977,697.
In 1898 it was only $34,387,408.

From 1791 to 1898 the gross receipts of the Government were
$30,547,063,336.06 and the gross expenditures $29,768,597,237.24. The
net ordinary receipts, which do not include loans or proceeds from the
issue of Treasury notes, were $405,321,335.20 for the fiscal year ended
June 30, 1898, and the net ordinary expenditures, which do not include
payments on account of premiums or interest on the public debt, were
$405,783,526.57.

VIII. POSTAL SAVINGS BANKS.

Many believe that a system of postal savings banks could be generally
introduced into the United States. Such banks doubtless appeal to those
who have more confidence in the Government than in any association of
individuals. Their safety may be conceded, for when the Government
fails other institutions are likely to go the same way. But when
people deposit money in a postal savings bank, they make a loan to
the Government. This implies that the Government must be a perpetual
borrower, whereas, until recent years, the United States has been a
debt-paying nation, and in the course of affairs may soon be again.
Unless we are to have a large permanent debt, the deposits in postal
savings banks would have to be invested in general securities. Such
investments could not well be made by the post-office officials of the
country.

In Great Britain these banks have been in existence for about
thirty-eight years, and their number has grown to about 12,000, with
more than 6,000,000 depositors. The system prevails in a number
of other countries. The more concentrated and paternal system of
government prevalent in countries having these banks renders their
management a much less difficult problem than it would be in the
United States with our large areas, vast number of post-offices, and
general diversity of conditions. In Great Britain the deposits in
the postal savings banks are made at the money order post-offices in
a pass book held by the depositor. Withdrawals are made by filling
up blank forms, and these withdrawals may be made at any money order
post-office. Deposits are invested in the public debt, and the rate of
interest is about two and one half per cent. The postal savings banks
of Great Britain contain deposits approximating $527,000,000; those of
France, $152,000,000; those of Italy, $90,000,000; those of Belgium,
$67,000,000; those of Canada, $31,000,000.

IX. SAVINGS BANKS IN THE UNITED STATES.

There are no worthier financial institutions in the country to-day
than the savings banks. Most of these are organized on what is known
as the mutual plan. They have no capital, no stockholders, and all the
assets are held in trust for the benefit of the depositors. They are
managed by a board of trustees, who serve without pay. The investments
which the banks are permitted to make are generally restricted to
high-class securities insuring safety. The savings banks in New York
State, especially, are closely restricted in investing their funds, and
failures in recent years are almost unknown. A deposit in one of these
banks is hardly less safe than an investment in Government bonds. The
savings banks are the primary schools of economy and thrift, and I
believe that an extension of the mutual savings bank system throughout
the country, under proper legal safeguards, would be of the greatest
benefit to the people of the United States.

The deposits in banks of this kind are usually limited by law to
amounts not exceeding $3000 to one depositor, as they are not intended
to be used by the wealthier class of people. The following statistics
will be found interesting.

SAVINGS BANKS IN THE UNITED STATES, 1857–1897.

(Statement of condition for each period of ten years.)

---------------------+-----------+------------+------------+-
| 1857 | 1867 | 1877 |
---------------------+-----------+------------+------------+-
Number of banks | 231| 371| 675|
Number of depositors | 490,428| 1,188,202| 2,395,314|
Amount of deposits |$98,512,968|$337,009,452|$866,218,306|
Average to each | | | |
depositor | 200| 283| 361|
---------------------+-----------+------------+------------+-

---------------------+--------------+--------------
| 1887 | 1897
---------------------+--------------+--------------
Number of banks | 684| 980
Number of depositors | 3,418,013| 5,201,132
Amount of deposits |$1,235,247,371|$1,939,376,035
Average to each | |
depositor | 361| 372
---------------------+--------------+--------------

In addition to the mutual and stock savings banks in the United States,
a system of school savings banks, introduced into the schools of the
United States by J. H. Thiry, of Long Island City, N. Y., is worthy of
mention. Such banks have been very successful in inculcating habits of
thrift and economy among the children of the country.

X. THE CLEARING-HOUSE.

A clearing-house may be defined as an institution for saving time,
money, and labor. Its underlying principle is that of setting off one
claim against another.

A bank in a large city receives every day in its mail a great number
of checks or drafts drawn on banks in the same place. It does not
present these checks directly to the banks on which they are drawn
for payment, but sends them by messenger to the clearing-house. Let
us say, for illustration, that the First National Bank presents to
the clearing-house checks on other banks amounting to $100,000. At
the same time the other banks send to the clearing-house checks they
have received drawn on the First National Bank, aggregating $75,000. A
payment of $25,000 in money to the First National Bank will be all the
cash required to pay checks representing $175,000. The economy in the
use of money is still better illustrated by the following statement of
an actual transaction. On a day in the latter part of 1898 the Bank
of the State of New York took to the New York Clearing-House checks
on other banks amounting to $15,647,583.82, and other banks brought
checks against it amounting to $15,647,401.85. The sum of these items
was $31,294,985.67, and they were paid with $181.97 in money, which
represents the credit balance due to the Bank of the State of New York.
This instance shows what large transactions may be effected with small
sums of money by employing proper banking machinery. Banks multiply the
usefulness of money many fold.

The New York Clearing-House Association was organized September
13, 1853, and the first clearing made by the Association took
place on October 11, 1853. The banks belonging to the New York
Clearing-House Association reported on April 1, 1899, loans and
discounts, $779,951,100; deposits, $898,917,000; specie, $187,114,300;
circulation, $13,870,600.

[Illustration: NEW YORK CLEARING-HOUSE.]

CLEARING-HOUSE LOAN CERTIFICATES.—These are simply devices that the
banks have invented for use in times of panic. They are issued by a
committee of the Clearing-House Association on the deposit of approved
securities by the bank desiring them, and are used only to settle
balances between the banks. They are not money, but serve a useful
purpose in diminishing the demand for money; for when the banks agree
to accept these certificates among themselves, it makes that much money
available to be loaned or paid to depositors. In 1893, and in other
years of financial stringency, the issue of these certificates afforded
great relief to business interests and saved the country from some of
the most disastrous results consequent upon such panics.

These certificates are not to be confounded with clearing-house gold
certificates issued by the Association on deposits of gold coin. They
are used in making payments of balances between banks, and obviate the
necessity of frequently passing the actual coin from hand to hand.

On April 11, 1898, the clearings at the New York Clearing-House for
that day amounted to $352,882,567—the largest amount ever reported up
to that time. The balances to be paid in money were $17,345,452, or
only about five per cent. For the year 1898 the bank clearings at New
York were $41,971,781,684, and for the whole country, $68,750,000,000.

An investigation of the amount of credit paper used respectively in the
wholesale and retail trade was made by the Comptroller of the Currency
in 1896. In his report for that year the Comptroller says: “From the
face of the returns the conclusion to be drawn is that 67.4 per cent of
the retail trade of the country is transacted by means of credit paper
(checks), that 95.3 per cent of the wholesale trade is so carried on,
95.1 per cent of business other than mercantile, and 92.5 per cent of
all business.”

XI. PANICS AND THEIR CAUSES.

A panic is generally due to inflation and speculation, and these, of
course, have their origin in various sources not easily determined.
An unusual increase in the production of precious metals, bountiful
crops, a speculative craze taking possession of the public—such as
the tulip mania in Holland—all these and many other causes lead to
speculation. The fall in prices due to a stoppage in speculation brings
on the panic. Sometimes the catastrophe is produced by war or rumors
of war, often by the most trivial circumstances, and not infrequently
without any apparent cause. Before everybody had desired to buy; they
now became as eager to sell, and this rush to convert securities and
commodities into money precipitates a panic.

Crises may be divided into commercial and financial. The last one in
the United States, whatever may have been its ultimate developments,
was in its inception and culmination essentially a financial panic. The
Treasury and the banks were both regarded with more or less distrust.

Panics or crises more or less severe have occurred in the United
States in 1814, 1818, 1826, 1837–39, 1848, 1857, during the Civil War,
1861–65, 1873, 1882, 1884, 1890, 1893. Some of these should hardly
be called panics, as they were mere local disturbances. Different
causes have been given for each of these revulsions. Overtrading and
speculation were doubtless responsible for them. The panic of 1857
was coincident with large net imports of merchandise. On August 24,
1857, the onward wave of prosperity, which had been steadily rising
to a great height, received a check by the failure of the Ohio Life
Insurance and Trust Co., followed by numerous other failures. On
October 4 every bank in New York, except the Chemical, suspended specie
payments, and they did not resume until December 12.

The speculation in gold in 1869 culminated in what is known as the
Black Friday panic, September 24, 1869. Fiske and Gould were conducting
a speculation in gold, and sought to corner it. They forced the price
up to a high figure, but the Government suddenly appeared as a seller
of gold and broke the “corner.”

The year 1873 witnessed another revulsion of confidence and another
disruption of the commercial and financial affairs of the country.
Business had long been unduly expanded, and the collapse finally
came. The failure, on September 18, of the honored firm of Jay Cooke
& Co., which had not only been identified with the building of the
Northern Pacific R. R. but had been a strong supporter of the credit
of the Government when it was in the direst distress, was the first
bad news. House after house fell. The Stock Exchange closed its doors
on September 20, and did not reopen them until September 30. More
than fifty Stock Exchange firms suspended, and several of the leading
banking institutions of New York and other cities had to stop business.

During this panic the New York Clearing-House Association issued
clearing-house certificates to those of its members who needed
available funds, and during the trouble issued $24,915,000 of them. In
May, 1884, it issued $24,915,000; in the 1890 panic, $16,645,000; in
1893, $41,490,000.

Following the resumption of specie payments the times were good for
several years. The production of the precious metals was averaging
$75,000,000 or more per year. From 1879 to 1883 we imported about
$190,000,000 of gold. Railroad construction reached a higher point
than was ever recorded, either before or since, nearly 40,000 miles of
track having been laid in five years. All seemed well, when another
collapse came in May, 1884. This was preceded by the failure of
Grant & Ward, and it was followed by the failure of the Marine and
the Metropolitan Ranks. The disclosures of bad faith on the part of
men occupying positions of great trust, made the 1884 panic one of
distinct characteristics of its own. The previous activity in all
lines of enterprise may have made the revulsion timely, but individual
dishonesty greatly aggravated the situation.

The panic of 1890, in the United States, was but a reflection of the
great Baring failure in London in the fall of that year. This crash
was due to South American speculations, and was one of the greatest
failures of modern times. It is the opinion of many well-informed
financiers that this was one of the causes which operated to produce
the panic of 1893 in the United States. The course of the United
States in regard to the purchase of silver, doubts as to the tariff,
deficiency in revenues—all, perhaps, had their share in creating
distrust. But back of these were the conditions superinduced by an era
of inflation and speculation. The 1893 panic bore most heavily upon the
banks. There was a continued demand upon the Treasury for gold, and the
deposits in banks were withdrawn so rapidly that hundreds of failures
ensued. The period of depression continued for nearly three years, and
has been succeeded by an era of general prosperity, which it is hoped
may be long continued.

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN FRUIT CULTURE

BY H. E. VAN DEMAN,

_Late Prof. of Horticulture, Kansas State Agricultural College_.

From the earliest histories of civilization we learn that the
cultivation of fruits has been a delightful pastime and also a
substantial means of living. Their tempting colors, fragrant perfumes
and luscious flavors are unequaled in combined attractiveness and
satisfaction to the human senses by anything else among all the
products of nature. Their juices are at once appetizing, nutritious,
and wholesome. Millions of people have subsisted upon them largely,
from time out of mind.

It is, therefore, not a matter of wonder that our forefathers, when
they came to the shores of this New World, brought with them seeds,
cuttings, and plants of the best fruits they had at their old homes.
Thus it was that the apple, pear, peach, plum, cherry, grape, olive,
date, almond, European walnut and chestnut, and many other less
valuable fruits were first cultivated in North America.

THE BEGINNING.—Previous to the beginning of the nineteenth century
there had been considerable development in fruit culture in the
colonies. Small apple orchards were quite common in the settlements,
from New England to the Carolinas. The pear, peach, plum, grape, and
a few other fruits were cultivated in less degree. The Spanish had
introduced the peach and orange in Florida, and the French had planted
the grape and pear in their sparse settlements in the Mississippi
Valley and near the Great Lakes. There are to-day, and yet in a healthy
condition, near Detroit, Michigan, several immense pear-trees from
these first plantings, that are nearly three hundred years old. The
Catholic fathers planted the vine and the olive, and occasionally the
date palm, at their mission stations along the Rio Grande and on the
Pacific coast.

Thus we see that when the year 1800 ushered in the century now closing,
there were many feeble beginnings in the way of fruit culture scattered
over the Continent. The Indians, contrary to what we might have
supposed, helped materially in the distribution of some of the orchard
fruits. In 1799, when General Sullivan made his famous raid against
the tribes which composed the historic “Six nations,” he found bearing
apple orchards in Western New York. In Southern Canada and Michigan
the Indians occasionally planted the apple and pear. The tribes living
along the Gulf of Mexico had peach-trees in their little cultivated
patches, having obtained the seeds from the Spaniards; and to-day we
find the descendants of these Spanish or “Indian” peaches commonly
grown throughout all the Southern States, and to some extent all over
the peach-growing sections of America.

THE EXPERIMENTAL STAGE.—During the life of the generation which
existed for the first thirty or more years of the century the culture
of fruits was still principally in the experimental stage. Some of the
foreign species and varieties had not proved satisfactory, and they
were being critically tested or abandoned. New varieties were being
originated on our own soil. Our native fruits were being brought under
culture, too, and with the most satisfactory results in many cases.
It was learned that we had in them the foundation of almost unlimited
development. Their progeny has revolutionized some lines of fruit
culture. This is especially true in our vineyards and berry-fields.

There were men of noble and patriotic cast of mind, who devoted their
lives to the development of this lovely and wholly humane work. They
deserve to rank beside the heroes of our battlefields. Their victories
were those of peace, and were followed by an increase of the delightful
products of the orchard, vineyard, and garden.

Once that our forefathers were free from the bondage of European greed,
this art of peace kept pace with our civilization on other lines.
There is nothing in the whole list of our scientific attainments or
material industries that can show more substantial progress. Nor is
there a nation on earth that has so rich, varied, and adaptable soils,
together with climatic conditions so admirably and generally suited to
fruit culture; nor a people more alive to their opportunities in this
direction.

THE AGE OF PROGRESS.—During the generation of fruit growers who lived
from about 1830 until the time of the Civil War, the region lying
between the Alleghany Mountains and the Missouri River, and extending
from the Ottawa River in Canada to the mountains of Tennessee, which
is now the great apple bin of America, as well as its granary, was
being rapidly filled with energetic settlers. These pioneers carried
with them carefully selected seeds, cuttings, and trees of the best
varieties of fruits known in their Eastern and Southern homes. These
were planted in the rich, virgin soil of the new territory, which was
then known as “The West.” Under the happy influences of a congenial
climate and careful cultivation, they developed into fruitful orchards
and vineyards, yielding finer specimens, and, in some cases, larger
crops than had ever been known in the older parts of the country.
This gave a great impetus to the culture of fruits. The first large
commercial orchards of the apple, peach, and pear in the central United
States were then being planted in Michigan, Ohio, Indiana, and Kentucky.

The South had not yet awakened to a knowledge of her possibilities in
fruit culture. Under slave labor the land was almost solely given up to
cotton and tobacco. Florida had not then even dreamed of her wonderful
developments in orange culture. In Missouri, Kansas, Arkansas, Texas,
and the great Northwest, where now there are fruit plantations of
almost unparalleled extent, only the first trees and plants were being
set, and it was only thought _possible that some day_ fruits could be
produced in abundance there. The Rocky Mountain and Pacific States had
scarcely been heard of, even as Territories, and only an occasional
plantation of vines and trees around some mission station could be
found.

[Illustration: COCOANUT TREE, PALM BEACH, FLA.]

THE AGE OF TRIUMPH.—At the close of the Civil War, which had somewhat
distracted the attention of our people both North and South from the
progress of the peaceful arts, there was a great expansion of our
rural population. The love of travel had taken possession of many who
had been in the armies. They were no longer content with the narrow
boundaries and the poor lands of the old Eastern farms. They wanted new
fields for their energies. The building of the great railroad systems
across the continent solved the question of the settlement of the “Far
West,” and the mythical “American Desert” that was supposed to lie this
side of it. The prairies were covered with homesteaders’ shanties, sod
houses, and “dug-outs.” The forests of Michigan, Wisconsin, Minnesota,
Missouri, and Arkansas fell before the axe of the pioneer. The “Boys
in Blue” who had seen the natural advantages of the Southern States,
while there on the dread errand of war, began the rehabilitation of the
country they had helped to devastate. They took with them their Yankee
notions and Western vim, and planted many kinds of farm crops, trees,
vines, and berry bushes upon the old plantations where little else than
cotton and tobacco used to grow. Florida was veritably turned into a
garden of orange trees and truck patches. The chocolate hills and rich
black lands of Texas were planted to grapes, peaches, and berries. The
dry plains and mesas of the Rocky Mountain region, that were naturally
almost devoid of vegetation, were irrigated and made to produce the
most delightful fruits in abundance. The giant forests of Oregon and
Washington were invaded by the lumberman and the homeseeker, and in
their stead were planted trees which yielded the largest and best of
fruits. And California,—what shall we say of her wonderful valleys,
grassy foothills, and timbered mountain slopes? All of the fruits of
the temperate zones are growing there, and in some places the hardier
of the tropical kinds succeed. California is indeed a land of fruits.

Taking the whole of North America, except the frozen regions of the
British possessions, and Alaska, where few cultivated fruits can be
grown; and half-civilized Mexico, where progress is scarcely known;
the last thirty-five years have witnessed such advancements in fruit
culture as seem almost beyond belief. It has truly been an age of
triumph. Not only has the territory of its successful culture been
wonderfully extended, but the whole plan and science of fruit-growing
has been almost revolutionized. Old things have largely passed away.
New varieties, new methods of culture and new markets for the products
of the fruit farm have been found. Some of the old varieties have been
retained, but many new ones have been originated here; some by chance
and others by scientific breeding. Valuable kinds that had long been
lying in obscurity have been brought into public favor. Others have
been imported from foreign countries. Almost the entire world has been
ransacked in order to obtain fruits that might prove of value to us.

At the beginning of this period of unparalleled progress the
experiments of former years had shown the success or failure of the
different species and varieties already in cultivation in many parts
of the country; and now, at its close, after nearly forty years more
of experience, there is scarcely a section within the entire domain of
North American fruit culture where it is not quite well known what is
and what is not adapted to each locality.

The methods of culture are changed from the old ones, which were
largely those practiced in Europe, to such as have been evolved by
the peculiar necessities of our soil, climate, and varieties. This is
especially true of our vineyards; for, except on the Pacific slope,
where the foreign grapes succeed, our native vines require much less
severe pruning, and a much more roomy trellis upon which to grow than
those old kinds. The first vineyards were planted very thickly and
trained by the stake method, which is the French and German style. I
remember working in such vineyards just prior to 1870, and of seeing
the dwarfing and dwindling effect upon the vines. Nothing of the kind
is now seen this side the Rocky Mountains, because our American grapes
will not endure such treatment and continue to bear well.

Horse culture has in a great measure succeeded hand culture. Without
such a change it would be impossible to profitably cultivate the vast
stretches of orchards, vineyards, and berry-fields that are to-day
found in many parts of the country. The common plow and harrow were
about the only tools available thirty or forty years ago. They are
now supplemented, and in some cases superseded, by various kinds of
cultivators, weeders, and improved plows and harrows. They are made to
carry out the modern idea of frequent but shallow stirring of the soil.
This method of culture disturbs the roots but little and retains the
moisture in the soil, by keeping the surface finely pulverized, thus
forming a “dust mulch.” Some of these tools are so made as to enable
one man with one horse to easily cultivate twenty-five acres per day,
and with a two or three horse implement, to thoroughly pulverize the
surface over fifty or more acres in that time.

The tendency during the last half century has been towards heading
orchard trees lower. The old style was to have them with trunks so
tall that a horse could walk under the branches. Low heads have the
advantage of giving the winds less purchase upon the roots, the fruit
is more easily gathered, and the sun is less likely to scald the trunks.

The old idea of our forefathers was, that apples were chiefly to be
used for making cider, peaches for brandy, and grapes for wine. We have
become a nation of fruit-eaters, as compared with our predecessors
and the Europeans. The greatest impetus ever given to American fruit
culture came from the increased demand in our own country for fresh
fruit. It is a staple article of diet here, rather than a luxury, as
it is in most parts of Europe. Nearly all of our fresh fruits are
consumed in the homes of our people, or exported. A very little is
made into cider, brandy, or wine, and the larger part of the remainder
is dried or canned. The proportion of grapes made into wine east of
California is trifling, while there it is considerable. The enormous
production and consumption of berries of various kinds by the Americans
is unparalleled in the history of the world; and nearly all of this has
come through the development of our wild berries.

Instead of buying largely of foreign fruits and their products, except
such as are strictly tropical and cannot be grown within our borders
only in a limited way, we have nearly stopped their importation, and
have, in turn, become exporters. The rapid increase in our population
demands more and more fruit, and it is not to be wondered at that our
imports of oranges and lemons is increasing; but if it was not for
our home production of these fruits the present amount would be more
than doubled. Our raisins and dried prunes have almost driven out
the foreign products, and their quality is so good that there is a
growing demand for them in England and some other foreign countries.
The same is true of our canned and preserved fruits. Our apples bring
the highest price of any that reach the markets of Europe, and the
demand for them is increasing. Fresh pears and peaches have also been
sent to England in limited quantities from as far west as California
and Oregon. Our oranges also have an enviable reputation there because
of their beauty and delicious flavor. Our apples are sent to Mexico,
China, and Japan. The street venders of Bombay, India, cry their sale
with great gusto: “American apples! true American apples!” and sell
them at a price which would require more than a whole day’s wages of a
good workman to buy a single one.

The world is beginning to know the value and goodness of our fruits.
We are selling, inside their dainty skins, a portion of our sunshine
and water; for the golden, pink, and crimson tints are from the glowing
sun, and the water, which is the main part of all fruits, is fresh from
nature’s fountain.

GROWTH OF APPLE CULTURE.—From the first settlement of the country well
into the present century, the principal purpose for which apples were
cultivated in America was to make cider. This was a common beverage in
England and on the continent of Europe, whence our forefathers came.
Here they introduced the Old World custom of drinking hard cider “in
season and out of season.” In 1721, in one “town” near Boston, wherein
lived about forty families, there were made in one year three thousand
barrels of cider, and in another of two hundred families, near ten
thousand barrels. This is fifty barrels to the family, which seems
ample for a great many drinks per day for each person, with plenty left
to sell to the cider-loving citizens of Boston. Colonel John Taylor of
Virginia wrote, in 1813, nearly one hundred years later: “The apple
will furnish some food for hogs, a luxury for the family in winter, and
a healthy liquor for the farmer and his laborers all the year.”

But hard cider did not always satisfy. “Applejack,” which is the
strongest kind of brandy, suited the taste of many of the old-fashioned
folk much better. The Virginia gentleman, the Dutch burgher, whose
ample acres fronted upon the Hudson, the solemn Philadelphia Quaker
and the staid Puritan of New England, all loved their dram and took it
frequently.

Besides alcoholic liquors, vinegar was made in considerable quantities.
But as late as the middle of this century there was scarcely a good
family apple orchard to be found, such as we now have, with varieties
arranged to ripen from early to late. Nor were there many commercial
orchards of consequence. The famous orchard of Robert L. Pell, in
Ulster County, New York, was a remarkable exception. It consisted of
20,000 trees, all of the Yellow and Green Newtown apples. Fruit from
this orchard sold at wholesale in London, England, in 1845, at the
enormous price of $21.00 per barrel, but the next year the price had
fallen to $6.00 in New York city, ready for foreign shipment. This
orchard gradually fell into decay, and was not soon followed by others
of so large acreage. The Newtown apple proved unsuitable for general
culture, and is now grown only in two localities with much success.
In the mountain “coves,” or sheltered slopes and valleys, of the Blue
Ridge, in Virginia and North Carolina, where it is called “Albemarle
Pippin,” there are many orchards that produce as fine fruit as any from
the Pell orchard, and it now sells from $5.00 to $12.00 and more per
barrel in England. In the higher foothills of California and Oregon
this variety does equally well, and apples from there are being sold in
England during this closing period of the century at almost fabulous
prices.

In the old days, if an orchard furnished an abundance of apples for
cider, brandy, vinegar, apple butter, some for drying, and a few of
fair quality that would keep for winter use, it was all that was
expected.

[Illustration: PACKING APPLES FOR EXPORT, IN ORCHARD OF MR. PAY, ST.
CATHARINES, ONT.]

Most of the trees in those old orchards were inferior seedlings, and it
is no wonder that the people of those days did not use apples as we do.
A few of them were very good, and it is from such chance favorites that
we have preserved to us, by grafting, the Baldwin Winesap and hundreds
more that fill our orchards to-day. We have developed a new race of
American seedlings. Most of the old varieties that were so highly
esteemed across the ocean are now rarely mentioned. Our newer and
better kinds have largely supplanted them. As time advanced more choice
varieties were added, until we may now confidently boast of having
the best apples in existence. Whoever has eaten our delicious Grimes
Golden, Jonathan, and Northern Spy, need not look for better kinds,
because they cannot now be found. Indeed, the name “Seek-no-farther”
has been triumphantly applied to one variety. However, we are still
seeking and expecting to produce by skillful breeding, if not to find,
others which may be even better than those we now possess.

A history of the recognized and named varieties of apples of American
origin would be a book in itself. It should begin almost with the first
settlement of the country. At the beginning of this century the Early
Harvest, Baldwin, Swaar, Esopus Spitzenberg, Rhode Island Greening,
Yellow Bellflower, and a few others which are yet popular, were already
grafted into hundreds of orchards, some of them being as far west as
the Mississippi River. William Coxe, in his excellent book on fruits,
published in 1817, mentions 100 kinds. William Prince, of Long Island,
who kept the first nursery of note, had 116 varieties of apples in his
published list in 1825, of which about half were of American origin.
Now there are nearly 1000 kinds offered by the nurserymen of the
country, and the books on pomology contain nearly 5000 varieties, a
large part of them being American. Truly this is progress.

We have the best and by far the most extensive apple country in the
world. The largest apple orchards in the world are in America. The
biggest of all belongs to F. Wellhouse & Son, of Kansas, in which there
are 1600 acres. There are others in Missouri, Illinois, Iowa, Colorado,
and New Mexico that are nearly as large.

The variety principally grown in these orchards is the Ben Davis. It
is a thrifty, rugged grower, a most productive bearer, and a handsome
apple to sell. Its brilliant red stripes, large size, and ability to
keep, make up for its deficiency in flavor. It is, to-day, the business
apple of America. Baldwin is the business apple of the Eastern States.
Both these varieties are well known in every market of this country,
and wherever our apples are exported.

The first government record of exported apples was in 1821, when
“68,643 bushels,” or about 22,781 barrels of apples, were sent abroad.
In 1897 there were 2,371,143 barrels exported, which is the largest
quantity ever shipped to foreign countries in one year. During the same
year there were also exported nearly 31,000,000 pounds of dried apples,
94,000 gallons of vinegar, and 750,000 gallons of cider. Certainly this
is a good showing for the surplus products of American apple orchards.
The year 1898 gave a lighter yield, but 1899 will, perhaps, about equal
it.

THE PEAR.—Whoever has eaten a delicious little Seckel pear must know
that its equal in richness and spicy flavor is not to be found. This
little gem is one of the triumphs of American fruit culture. How far
beyond and above the old “choke” pear of our grandfathers’ days
is this one, and many more of the delicious pears that grow in our
orchards and gardens to-day!

Pear growing was only a side issue until lately. A few trees were
planted about our forefathers’ houses or in the edge of the apple
orchards; but these were often sprouts from some neighbor’s seedling
trees. As the appetite for good fruit increased, the false idea that
pears should be ground and pressed into cider, called perry, decreased,
until now no one thinks of wasting this delicious fruit by making it
into an intoxicating drink.

The Bartlett is our most popular pear of good quality. It originated
in Berkshire, England, about 1770, where it was called Williams. When
brought to America early in this century and planted at Dorchester,
Mass., the original name was lost, and it was renamed in honor of Enoch
Bartlett, who first propagated and distributed the trees and grafts.
The old tree, from which came the millions that have been and are now
a source of delight and profit to our people, is still in bearing
condition at Dorchester, and I have lately eaten as good Bartlett pears
from it as ever were grown. The variety flourishes better in America
than in its old home, and every year large shipments of the fruit are
sent to England and sold at a very high price.

Some fifty years ago there were brought from China seeds of a type of
a pear that was entirely new to this country, and was called by us the
“Sand” pear. The only apparent reason for giving it this name is, that
it is gritty, hard, and little better to eat than so much sand. But the
seeds made trees that grew with remarkable vigor and were much alike,
and so was their fruit.

From this stock came up a seedling some thirty years ago, in the garden
of Peter Kieffer, in Philadelphia, that has almost revolutionized
pear growing in America. It is supposed to be the result of a cross
between a Chinese Sand pear-tree and a Bartlett that stood near each
other, although this is mere supposition. The fruit is only of medium
quality, and some say it is very poor; but it is large, very beautiful
when fully mature, late in ripening, and endures rough handling with as
little harm as so many potatoes. It is very popular with the canners.
The greatest point in its favor is the freedom of the tree from blight,
its vigor and almost never-failing and abundant bearing. It is the
business pear of to-day, despite its inferior quality.

THE PEACH.—When the peach was first planted in America by the Spanish
and French, and later by other nationalities, there was little thought
of it ever becoming a great commercial fruit. The trees that sprang
from the seeds brought across the ocean grew so luxuriantly and bore so
abundantly that their progeny was soon scattered far and wide. Peach
trees were early found growing wild, like our native trees, wherever
seeds had been dropped by travelers or hunters. There was no attempt at
commercial peach orcharding until well into the present century, and
for the first half of this there were scarcely more than a few seedling
orchards planted for family use or for making brandy. In some sections
dried peaches were an article of trade before any commercial peach
orchards, in the true sense, had been planted; but they were always the
product of women’s work, and were prepared under the disadvantageous
conditions with which they are usually hampered. It is no wonder that
the grade was low, for the peaches were generally of poor quality,
and no other mode of drying was then known than on boards and wooden
trays, exposed in the open air to flies, moths, and dust. All that
was sent to market was first taken in at the stores where the country
people came to trade, and it was a mixed mess, indeed, that was thus
collected. What fresh peaches were sold brought a very low price,
rarely more than twenty-five cents per bushel.

Early in the century budded peach-trees were almost unknown in America.
A few were brought over from France and the fruit houses of England,
all of which did very well here. However, it was soon learned that
there were seedlings of American origin that were equal to the best of
the foreign kinds. Among the first of these were Heath, Early York,
Tillotson, and Oldmixon Cling and Free. A little later, two large
yellow freestones came up by accident on the premises of William
Crawford, of Middletown, N. J., one ripening early and the other late.
Early Crawford and Late Crawford are, after more than sixty years of
trial, still very popular upon the markets. Many other kinds, once
popular, have long since been discarded and forgotten.

Just before our Civil War the Hale peach was discovered and, being
earlier than any kind then known, it became very popular. About 1865,
the Amsden, Alexander, and some others came to notice. They were a
month earlier than the Hale. A peach, called Peen-to, was imported from
southern China about the same time, that ripened still a month earlier;
but as it belonged to a very different race from our other peaches, and
was exceedingly tender, it has been found suitable only to Florida and
other semitropical regions.

The most popular peach of the present day is the Elberta. It was
originated by Samuel H. Rumph, of Georgia, about twenty years ago.
Its large size, creamy, yellow color, and good flavor, added to its
productiveness, make it very acceptable to both grower and consumer.

The most extensive peach orchards in America are located in Georgia,
North Carolina, Southern Missouri, Western Colorado, and California. A
few are each more than a thousand acres in extent.

The advent of patent evaporating machines, about 1870, aided greatly in
the production of high grade dried fruits of all kinds, and the peach
shared in the progress. California and Oregon alone shipped in a single
recent year nearly 40,000,000 pounds of dried peaches. The peach is
canned more than any other fruit, as may be seen upon the shelves of
any grocery store, or in the fruit closets of the country housewives.
Whether eaten fresh from the trees, served up with cream and sugar (a
dainty dish unknown in Europe), evaporated or canned, the peach is one
of the blessings of our great country.

THE PLUM.—There are three general classes of plums grown in America
to-day, the European, American, and Japanese. European plums were
introduced here at an early day, but were grown very sparingly until
within the last thirty or forty years. The principal reason for this
is the presence of a deadly enemy to the plum, apricot, and some other
fruits, commonly known as the plum curculio. It is a _little_ enemy but
a _mighty_ one; for it deposits its eggs in the young fruit, and they
soon hatch into little grubs that work their way into the fruit and
cause it to die and drop off. West of the Continental divide there are
none of these insects. There the soil, climate, and all else seem to
conspire to enable the plum-grower to prosper. Great prune orchards are
planted in the fertile valleys from New Mexico and Colorado westward.
Some of them cover thousands of acres in a body, and the yield is
enormous. The rainless autumns of California permit the drying of the
fruit in the open air and in the most economical and perfect way. From
an infant industry twenty years ago it has now grown so great that,
in 1897, California alone produced nearly 98,000,000 pounds of dried
prunes. Oregon, Washington, Idaho, and some other western States are
almost equally well suited to this industry.

East of the Rocky Mountains plum-growing is not so easy. The curculio
damages all classes of plums to some extent, but the European kinds
seem to be much less able to endure its attacks than any other. This
led to the selection and cultivation of the best varieties of our
several native species. Their fruit is not so large or so richly
flavored as some of the foreign kinds, but much of it is very good, and
the brilliant red, purple, and yellow colors are greatly admired. The
Japanese plums are of quite recent introduction. The beginning was in
1870, when the Kelsey, which is the largest, the latest to ripen, and
about one of the least valuable varieties of this class was brought
to California. Later importations have brought us many very valuable
kinds. The trees bear well, the fruit is mostly large, handsome, of
good quality, and resists the stings of the curculio quite as well as
our native kinds.

One of the most interesting and promising steps in plum-growing is only
beginning to be made, in the crossing of the three classes named. The
most skillful and patient worker in this field is Luther Burbank, of
California, who has already produced, by artificially pollenizing the
flowers, some most excellent varieties. Some of these new varieties
are larger than any plums ever before seen, delicious in flavor, and
blood-red to the stone.

THE CHERRY.—Away back in the history of our country, cherry trees were
planted here and there, but only for family use. The list of varieties
was meagre. Most of them were sour, bitter, or small. Now we have
hundreds of named varieties and of all grades of color, from creamy
yellow to black, and both sweet and sour, early and late.

In Washington, Oregon, and California the cherry does better than in
any of the regions farther East. The first cherries of the season
to ripen are in the famous Vaca Valley of California, and sometimes
shipments from there reach New York as early as April 1. The largest
cherry trees in America are found in the foot-hill regions of
Pennsylvania and Virginia. Trees are sometimes seen there that have
trunks three feet in diameter, with a spread of branches of more than
fifty feet. Such trees sometimes yield more than fifty bushels of fruit
at a time.

THE APRICOT.—All over the Eastern and Central States the apricot is
almost an entire failure because of the ravages of the plum curculio.
After many years of trial its culture there has been almost abandoned,
except by those who are willing to follow the jarring of the trees to
catch the insects. Across the Continental divide, where this enemy does
not exist, the apricot flourishes as well or better than anywhere else
in the world. It is one of the profitable fruits from western Colorado
to the shores of the Pacific. California dried and sent to market
in one year over 30,000,000 pounds. There is also a great amount of
apricots canned there every year, a large part of which are shipped all
over the world.

THE QUINCE.—Although sour and unfit for eating from the hand, the
quince is one of our most delicious fruits when cooked. No store of
sweetmeats is complete without a generous supply of quince jelly. This
fruit delights in a moist soil and a cool but not severe climate.
However, it succeeds very well over the main part of North America.
Almost every home plot has a tree or two. In western New York
many commercial quince orchards have been planted within the last
twenty-five years, some of them being of forty acres in extent.

AMERICAN GRAPE CULTURE.—In no department of American pomology has
there been more remarkable advancement than in grape-growing. It was
the belief of those who first began to grow fruits here, that the
grapes of Canaan, Persia, Greece, and Rome, which were brought down
through the ages to the vineyards of modern Europe, would grow equally
well in America. One great reason for this belief was the abundance of
wild grapes of many kinds that were found from Nova Scotia to Texas.

One of the first things the pioneers of civilization did in New
England, at Roanoke Island, and at Jamestown, was to make wine of
the native grapes. The Spaniards in 1564 also made wine of the wild
grapes of Florida. After testing the wine and finding it inferior to
that produced in their old homes, they were more determined to grow
vineyards of the choicest grapes of Europe. The French established a
vineyard of this kind in Virginia, and another in southern Illinois;
and William Penn did the same near Philadelphia in 1683. The most
notable attempt that was made was by John James Dufour, a native of
Switzerland. He came to America in 1796, and at once set about doing
the wisest thing that he could have done, by first visiting and
critically examining the vineyards that had already been started. He
was not favorably impressed by what he saw, for the European vines
had done very poorly, because of some unknown disease or weakness
that seemed to cause them to make but feeble growth, or gradually
dwindle and die. The cause has since been found to have been the fungus
diseases and insect pests that are peculiar to the eastern half of
America. But Dufour thought the right varieties had not been tried,
except a few that he found near Philadelphia. From these he secured a
start, and in 1799 organized a stock company with $10,000 in capital,
to plant a vineyard, Henry Clay being one of the stockholders. A tract
of 633 acres was selected near Lexington, Ky., and there he began work
in the most enthusiastic manner. He induced two of his brothers to come
from Switzerland to join him, and they brought other varieties of their
best grapes. But after three years’ trial he gave it up as a hopeless
effort and turned his attention to the cultivation of our native grapes.

The beginning of successful grape culture in America may be said to
have been made by Dufour, in his next or second attempt, which was in
1802, at Vevay, Ind., on the banks of the Ohio, and with a variety of
the wild _Vitis labrusca_, or fox grape, found near the Schuylkill
River before the Revolutionary War. It was at first called the “Cape”
grape, from a mistaken notion that it had been brought from the Cape
of Good Hope. It was also known by several other names. Although this
grape was the first of a very long list of native varieties which
have made our country famous in grape culture, it has long since been
entirely abandoned for better kinds. But the vineyard at Vevay,
planted largely of this variety, was the first really successful one in
America.

[Illustration: SINGLE VINE OF “LADY DE COVERLY” GRAPE (SEEDLESS) GROWN
BY J. P. ONSTOTT, MARYVILLE, CAL.]

The next forward step was the introduction of the Isabella and Catawba,
both having originated in America, not long previous to 1820, although
of unknown parentage; but, perhaps, as the results of accidental
crossing between our native wild grapes and some of the foreign kinds.
The Isabella is supposed to have originated in South Carolina, and was
brought from there by Mrs. Isabella Gibbs and planted in her garden
in Brooklyn, N. Y., where it came to the notice of William R. Prince
in 1816, when in full bearing. He named it Isabella in her honor, and
introduced it to the general public.

The Catawba is supposed to have originated as a seedling near the
Catawba River, in North Carolina, but was not generally known until
Major John Adlum, of the District of Columbia, found it in bearing on
the premises of Mrs. Scholl, a tavern keeper of Clarksburgh, Md. He
was at once delighted with its good qualities, and planted it in his
experiment grounds at Georgetown in 1819, and introduced it to the
fruit-loving public soon after.

The next impetus to grape culture was caused by the introduction of
the Delaware and Concord. The exact origin of the Delaware is not
known, but it came to public notice about 1855, through the efforts of
Mr. A. Thomson and George W. Campbell, of Delaware, O. It was learned
afterwards that the same variety was growing in 1850, in the garden of
a Swiss immigrant, Paul H. Provost, at Frenchtown, N. J. It may be that
it originated at this place from a chance seed, and that cuttings were
thence carried to Ohio. It is evidently a cross between the foreign
species and one of our natives, and is to-day about the best of all the
grapes grown in the Eastern States.

The Concord is a pure native seedling, produced by Ephraim W. Bull, of
Concord, Mass., and first shown to the public at Boston in 1853. It
has proved itself to be the greatest blessing of all grapes that have
ever been grown in America. Its thriftiness and reliability under all
circumstances are unequaled. It is not only good in itself, but it has
been the parent of a race of seedlings which have filled our vineyards,
gardens, and markets with the most delicious grapes, and at a very
slight cost of labor or money. Whoever gathers or buys a basket of
blue-black Concord or Worden, purple Brighton or opal Niagara, should
render a silent thank-offering to the memory of Ephraim W. Bull, who
made their existence a possibility.

The first commercial vineyard of importance was planted by Nicholas
Longworth, on the hills overlooking the Ohio River, about ten miles
below Cincinnati, and it was largely of Catawba. Many others followed
his example, and from about 1830 to 1860 so great an interest was
shown that the hills bordering the Ohio for many miles were dotted
with vineyards. But mildew and black rot devastated them and almost
destroyed their usefulness. These diseases are now largely overcome by
spraying with a solution of sulphate of copper.

In northern Ohio, about Cleveland and Sandusky, and on the islands near
the southern shore of Lake Erie, the Catawba was planted with much
better success, owing, perhaps, to the climate not being so favorable
to grape diseases. The lake region of western New York is perhaps
more densely planted with grapes than any section east of California.
Thousands of carloads of grapes of high quality are shipped from
there every year. The Southern States have awakened somewhat to the
importance of grape culture. Some of the poorest sandy lands of North
Carolina and Florida have been planted to vines and found to produce,
when fertilized, excellent grapes. Texas is also a most productive
grape region. Their earliness causes them to find a ready market in the
North.

But in all of North America there is no section where the grape
flourishes with such wonderful success as in California and other
regions beyond the Rocky Mountains. There the tenderest and most
delicious of all the grapes of France, Italy, Persia, and Palestine
ripen their luscious clusters beneath the glowing skies. The grapes
of Eshcol, I imagine, did not surpass those now grown in California,
Arizona, New Mexico, and Idaho. All up and down their fertile valleys
and foot-hills may be seen great stretches of vineyard after vineyard.
The raisin industry alone is immense; and the product is of such high
quality and is produced at so low cost that the importation of European
raisins is becoming less each year, and may soon be practically at an
end. We have already begun exporting our raisins to England and other
parts of the world. Over 103,000,000 pounds, filling 5000 cars, were
shipped from California alone in one year. Single clusters of grapes
have frequently been grown in California that weighed from ten to
fifteen pounds, and four or five pound clusters are very common. Truly,
America is a land of grapes.

THE BERRIES.—America stands alone in the popular use of berries.
Except in the matter of gooseberries and currants, which are rather
plentiful in some parts of Europe, and a few strawberries and
raspberries there and in Japan, there are very few berries grown
outside of America.

The strawberry was found wild here in all sections. The fruit was
small but of most delicious flavor. A few of the varieties grown in
the mother country were brought over here, but they did not flourish.
About 1834 C. M. Hovey, of Cambridge, Mass., grew some seedlings of
the old Pine strawberry, which is an offshoot of the wild strawberry
of the west coast of South America, and his introduction of varieties
named Hovey and Boston Pine marked the first step in our modern
strawberry culture. Next came the Wilson, which originated about 1850
on the grounds of John Wilson, of Albany, N. Y. This variety really
popularized the growing of strawberries, because of its hardiness and
productiveness. Soon after this the Crescent was found at New Orleans,
La. Other kinds were soon originated from seed by experimenters, and
chance seedlings were found coming up in all fruit-growing regions.
It was not long until there were hundreds of named varieties of good
quality and that bore abundantly. Within the last decade or two there
have been hundreds more originated by the most skillful hybridizers
using our native species and the foreign ones also. Others just as
good were picked up wherever they chanced to grow from seed. Thus, we
now have the most wonderful assortment of varieties of the strawberry
in the world. They are early, medium, and late. The facilities
for shipping are so convenient that, now, it is possible to have
strawberries in the fancy markets almost every day of the year, from
some section of our great country. In the flush of the season they are
so cheap and abundant that the poor can enjoy them along with the rich.
From little garden patches fifty years ago, and very small ones too, we
have now come to grow them by the thousand acres.

The raspberry is another of our delicious berries. At first our
pioneers were satisfied with those they could gather from the wild
bushes. Following the same plan that was used with most other fruits,
the European raspberries were brought over the sea and planted in the
gardens of America. But they did poorly, and about 1850 our people
began to plant the native varieties. These grew and bore well. Now we
have hundreds of the very choicest named kinds, black, red, purple, and
yellow, early and late, and more being originated every year.

The history of the gooseberry is almost identical with that of the
raspberry. The foreign kinds, although bearing very much larger fruit
than our native kinds, were ruined by mildew. About 1845 Abel Houghton,
of Massachusetts, grew a seedling from the wild berry, which was named
Houghton, and from this came another seedling, the Downing, which was
originated at Newburgh, N. Y., some years later. These two varieties
are now among our very best kinds. Since the benefits of spraying with
fungicides have been known, the larger and milder flavored English
kinds are being grown with considerable success.

The blackberry is found native only in America. It has been one of the
most useful of all our wild fruits from the earliest settlement of the
country, and was used by the aborigines for centuries before. Until
about 1840 there was not enough thought given to blackberry culture
to make the least attempt in that direction, when Captain Lovett, of
Beverly, Mass., gave the name Dorchester to a chance variety, and
distributed it. Soon after 1850 the Lawton was taken from its wild
habitat on the banks of the Hudson River. This variety was the first
really good blackberry that was named and distributed. The Kitatinny
followed about ten years later, having been found wild in the mountains
of western New Jersey. At least two white varieties, and several having
pink berries, that were found growing wild, were named and sent out.
These novelties are yet cultivated by a few amateur horticulturists. It
may seem strange to say that we have white and red blackberries, but it
is a fact. At this date we have many kinds of later introduction, some
early and some late, and of most delicious flavor.

Perhaps all Americans know that cranberry sauce goes with Thanksgiving
turkey. No country in the world has so many cranberries as North
America. The bogs of Cape Cod are famous for this fruit, and the
Pilgrims of Plymouth colony knew of them, and served them on their
rustic tables. Now the wild marshes along the Atlantic are nearly all
under cultivation, and the product has been increased many fold. Fully
1,000,000 bushels are marketed when the crop is good. The same is being
done with the bogs in the vicinity of the Great Lakes. Cranberries grow
in untold quantities on the marshes of Alaska.

CITRUS FRUITS.—When the Spaniards invaded Florida in search of gold
they brought with them seeds of the citrus fruits from the regions
of the Mediterranean. There the orange, lemon, and lime were planted
in the genial climate of our Southern borders. The fruit was carried
hither and thither, and soon escaped the bounds of the cultivated
areas. The forests in places were filled with wild orange trees, the
most of which bore fruit of poor quality. When the tide of immigration
set southward after the Civil War, these wild groves were budded
to good varieties, and new land was cleared and planted with small
seedlings. These were budded to good varieties in due time. Orange
culture was soon a fixed industry in Florida. This increased rapidly up
to the time of the severe freeze of 1894–95, when there were shipped
over 5,000,000 boxes. Since then the results of the freezing of the
trees has greatly lessened the product, but it is steadily increasing
again.

The lemon has attracted much less interest than the orange, but I have
seen one lemon orchard in Florida of more than two hundred acres, and
there are many smaller ones.

The lime is but little called for, and is therefore grown more as a
novelty than for commercial purposes.

The pomelo, by some misnamed “grape-fruit,” is a very large, wholesome,
and delicious citrus fruit that is becoming quite popular where it
grows, and in the northern markets.

[Illustration: ORANGE ORCHARD OF LYMAN PHELPS, SANFORD, FLA.]

In California the orange was first planted by the mission fathers
centuries ago. The first real orchard is said to have been planted at
San Gabriel in 1804. Before the discovery of gold in that far-away
region very few orange orchards existed there, and they were of small
size. Up to 1872 very little more than this was done, when the founding
of the colony at Riverside, and the fortunate introduction of the Bahia
or Navel orange from Brazil by our government, at this juncture, was
the start of prosperous citrus culture on that coast. Now there are
annually about 5,000,000 boxes of oranges sent out of that State alone,
and the amount is steadily increasing. A large part of these are of the
justly famous Navel variety.

Lemon growing is also becoming a great industry there. Orchards of one
hundred acres are rather common, and some are fully five times larger.
Over 2,000,000 boxes of lemons were produced the past season.

THE OLIVE.—Among the historic fruits of Palestine and southern Europe
the olive holds a conspicuous place. Numerous but futile attempts were
made in early times to establish it in Virginia and along the Atlantic
coast, the climate there proving unsuitable. But in the warmer parts of
California the olive is perfectly at home. The first olive orchard of
consequence was planted by Ellwood Cooper, at Santa Barbara, in 1872,
and in 1876 he made oil from the fruit grown on the trees. Now there
are many extensive orchards in many parts of the State. It is estimated
that there are nearly 2,000,000 olive trees now growing in that State.
The oil and pickled fruit are steadily becoming popular in our fancy
markets in competition with the foreign product.

[Illustration: OLIVE ORCHARD, QUITO RANCH, NEAR SAN JOSE, CAL.]

THE FIG.—Very little is done in fig culture east of California,
although the trees are not tender along the Gulf coast, except in case
of extremely severe winters. In California it is a decided success,
commercially as well as for mere pleasure. The past year dried figs
to the amount of nearly 4,000,000 pounds were sent to market, and the
quantity has been constantly increasing for several years.

THE PINEAPPLE.—Those who have never seen pineapples growing are apt
to think they are produced on trees. This is far from the fact. They
grow on the tips of stalks about two feet high. The plants have large
narrow leaves that cluster at the ground, from the centre of which
these stalks spring. A few patches were planted on the islands near
the Florida coast in 1860, but it is only about fifteen years since
the first vigorous attempts were made to grow this delicious fruit in
the United States. Florida is the only region within our country where
the climate is sufficiently moist and warm for it to flourish. Along
the east coast, from Rock Ledge southward, and on the west coast below
Tampa, are the most favorable sections. Many acres are devoted to
its culture there. Frosts damage the plants sometimes, but they soon
recover. In central Florida, many acres are grown under sheds. These
are made of frame-work, which is covered with slats or boughs as a
protection from frost. Upwards of 3,000,000 fruits of marketable size
are now produced in Florida annually.

OTHER FRUITS.—The date is just beginning to be set in the arid regions
of Arizona and southern California, and with good prospects of success.
Already many trees are in bearing, and the fruit is of excellent
quality. The choicest varieties have been imported from Africa. The
guava is being grown in the warm parts of Florida and California. The
mango has been fruited in the warmest parts of Florida and California.

[Illustration: PINEAPPLE FIELD AT PALM BEACH, FLA.]

NUTS.—The sweet almond of southern Europe has long been tested in
America, but nowhere with success except in California, where there are
almond orchards of several hundred acres each. The Persian (wrongly
called English) walnut is a great success in the richer lands of
California, where orchards of majestic trees have been in full bearing
for many years. Of our native nuts the pecan is the best of all, and
it is about the only one that has so far proved worthy of cultivation.
It is found in a wild state in Illinois, Missouri, and Nebraska, and
southward to the Gulf of Mexico. The creek and river bottoms suit it
best, but it will do very well on almost any rich land. On some of
the hammock lands of Florida hundreds of acres are now planted to
the pecan. The largest pecan orchard is that of F. A. Swinden, of
Brownwood, Texas, which covers over five hundred acres, and is being
increased from year to year.

Our native chestnut is of better quality than the foreign kinds, but
the nuts are much smaller. The largest are from Japan, some of which
are two inches in diameter. Many of these choice kinds have been
imported, and others were originated from seeds, which are now being
planted in orchards. The best of the European chestnuts have also been
imported, and new kinds have been grown here from the nuts. Nearly all
of these varieties succeed in America, and many small orchards have
been planted. Some have grafted sprouts from our native chestnut stumps
and small trees with these improved kinds, and found them to grow and
bear abundantly.

The cocoanut is strictly tropical, and can only be grown in the very
warmest parts of Florida. It will not endure as low a temperature as
the pineapple without injury. As a commercial venture its culture will
probably never pay in America, but for ornamental purposes and as an
interesting novelty it is already a success from Lake Worth southward.
The waving plumes of this giant palm are a source of constant delight
to those who are privileged to see them. The huge clusters of nuts are
indeed an interesting sight.

Surely we have a great and fruitful country, from the cranberry bogs of
arctic Alaska to the waving cocoanut groves of Florida. This century
closes and the new one begins with wonderful advances in fruit culture
beyond those of a hundred years ago.

THE CENTURY’S COMMERCIAL PROGRESS

BY EMORY R. JOHNSON, A.M.,

_Asst. Prof. of Transportation and Commerce, University of
Pennsylvania_.

Commercial activity has three phases, trade, shipping, and
shipbuilding. In each of these three phases of commerce the nineteenth
century has witnessed a remarkable progress. The expansion of both
domestic and international trade has far exceeded the anticipations of
those who lived a hundred years ago; and the agencies of transportation
by water, the numerous auxiliaries of commerce and the shipbuilding
industries, have undergone a technical revolution so complete, and
with consequences so beneficent to our social and industrial life,
as to make the commercial progress of the past hundred years one of
the salient features of the history of the century. We shall better
appreciate the nature and scope of the commercial progress of the past
hundred years, if we glance for a moment at a picture of the commerce
of the world at the close of the eighteenth century.

I. MAIN FEATURES OF THE WORLD’S COMMERCE AT THE CLOSE OF THE EIGHTEENTH
CENTURY.

A hundred years ago, the volume of trade, both domestic and foreign,
was necessarily kept within proportions relatively small as compared
with present traffic, because of the slowness and high costs of inland
transportation. Domestic inland traffic is directly dependent upon
facilities for water and land transportation, and until the railroad
came into use, some seventy years ago, only those countries having
numerous navigable rivers or well-developed canal systems could extend
their commerce much beyond the cities and districts adjacent to tide
water. In all ages since the world became civilized enough to engage
in commerce, an overland traffic by caravan or wagon has been carried
on; but the amount of commodities could not be large, and the kinds of
goods transported were necessarily limited to articles of high value
per unit of bulk or weight. Such an inland traffic as this did not
establish the basis for a large coastwise or over-sea commerce.

At present, bulky commodities produced long distances from the
sea-ports comprise a large portion of international traffic, and supply
the coast cities with the raw materials from which they manufacture
the articles they contribute to swell the volume of foreign trade.
When the means were wanting for the inland transportation of these
bulky commodities, only a few countries, such as Phœnicia, the Italian
cities, Portugal, the Netherlands, the United Kingdom, and the British
colonies in America, could develop an important maritime commerce.
During the past fifty years, the improvements in transportation have
been such as to enable all industrial countries, inland as well as
maritime, to engage extensively in the world’s trade. Commerce has
become general; and countries like Switzerland and Saxony readily
market their wares the world over.

The volume of foreign trade, as late as a hundred years ago, was
really small, even in the case of the most important commercial
nations. The imports and exports of the United Kingdom in 1800 amounted
to about $360,000,000, which, for a population of approximately
18,000,000, would be about $20 per capita. At that time the trade of
the United Kingdom was about one tenth what it is now. At the present
time the foreign commerce of the United Kingdom amounts to nearly $100
for each inhabitant of the country.

The thirteen British colonies in America and the original commonwealths
of the United States were all maritime States with navigable rivers,
and their industries, lumbering, fisheries, production of food
products and tobacco, called for the exchange of large quantities
of commodities with the manufacturers of the home country, and with
the tropical islands of the West Indies. For their time, then, these
States were large traders. The statistical information which we
possess of their commerce is meagre, but we know that the total trade
of the colonies with the mother country in 1770 was about $13,000,000
a year, or something over four dollars per person. There was a trade
of considerable proportions with the West Indies, some with the
Mediterranean countries and Africa, and, after the colonies became
States, with the East Indies and the Orient; but in all probability the
foreign trade of the Americans did not reach ten dollars per capita
until after 1790. At the present time, in spite of the very rapid
growth of population in the United States that has continued throughout
the nineteenth century, our foreign trade is equal to twenty-five
dollars per person.

It is when the commerce of the eighteenth century is viewed from the
standpoint of the transportation agencies by which it was served—the
size, speed, and efficiency of the ships—that the contrast with
present conditions becomes most striking. Two hundred years ago, the
560 ships owned at London averaged 157 tons. A century ago, a vessel
of 300 tons was still considered a large ship, and as late as 1840
vessels of that size traded from the United States to India and China.
The Grand Turk, of 564 tons, built in 1791, was probably the largest
ship built in America up to that time. During the fourth decade of the
nineteenth century numerous vessels of over 1000 tons were constructed,
and in 1840 the Great Britain of 3000 tons was ordered. In her day
the Great Britain was more of a marvel than is the recently launched
Oceanic, of 28,500 tons displacement.

When we consider that these small vessels in use a century ago took
from a month to six weeks to cross the Atlantic,—their speed being
about one third that of the freight steamers of to-day,—we realize
the great difference in the efficiency of the merchant marine of the
present as compared with that by which commerce was served in 1800.
The efficiency of the ships, however, does not depend alone upon their
size and speed. The commercial auxiliaries which enable vessels to
enter and clear harbors without delay, and to load and unload cargoes
quickly,—lighthouses, beacons, buoys, spacious wharves and docks
equipped with mechanical appliances for handling freight,—make it
possible for vessels to spend a greater portion of the time at sea. A
merchant marine to-day has fully five times the efficiency that one
with an equal tonnage had a century ago. We shall better see how this
has been brought about, by briefly reviewing the technical revolution
which has taken place in ocean navigation during the past seventy
years.

II. THE CENTURY’S TECHNICAL REVOLUTION IN COMMERCE.

During the first four decades of this century the wooden sailing
vessel was the sole carrier of ocean traffic, and in the construction
and operation of such ships the Americans had special advantages and
manifested peculiar ingenuity. For forty years the American sailing
clipper, whose fine lines made it stanch and speedy, had been “the type
and model of excellence in ship-building;” but before the middle of the
century the supremacy of the wooden clipper-ship had been destroyed,
and the technical superiority of steam and iron had been demonstrated.

[Illustration: A CLIPPER SHIP.]

There are six distinct steps in the technical evolution of the ocean
liner of the present day,—six changes which mark the epochs in the
history of the substitution of steam and steel for sail and wood. The
first step in the evolution was taken when the steam engine and the
paddle-wheel took the place of wind and sails. Like most epoch-making
changes, this one was made slowly; indeed, it was preceded by thirty
years of hesitation and conservative experimentation. Robert Fulton,
taking advantage of ideas and plans which he had obtained in Europe,
produced his Clermont in 1807, and demonstrated the practicability
of the steamship for river traffic. Five years later, Henry Bell of
Scotland constructed the Comet, the first passenger steamboat built in
Europe, a vessel only forty feet long, ten and one half feet in width,
and of four horse-power. The Clermont was somewhat larger, having a
length of 130 feet, a beam of eighteen feet, and a hold six feet in
depth. She succeeded in making five miles an hour against stream.
These little vessels attracted great attention, and the problem of
constructing ships that could cross the ocean by steam power began to
be studied. In 1819, the Savannah was fitted with engines and crossed
the Atlantic, using both steam power and sails, but the vessel did not
prove a success, and her engines were taken out the following year.
Indeed, it was not until 1833 that a vessel steamed all the way across
the Atlantic; and this ship, the Royal William, a Canadian craft of
four or five hundred tons, was able to make the trip from Quebec to
Gravesend on the Thames only by stopping for coal at Picton, Nova
Scotia, and Cowes near Portsmouth, England.

[Illustration: ROBERT FULTON.]

The first steamships to cross the ocean without recoaling were the
Sirius and Great Western, which arrived in New York the same day, April
23, 1838, the former vessel having sailed from London and the latter
from Liverpool. This achievement on the part of these two wooden craft,
neither one capable of carrying more than seven hundred tons, created
a great impression. The New York “Courier and Enquirer” said, in its
issue of April 24, 1838:—

“What may be the ultimate fate of this excitement—whether or not the
expense of equipment and fuel will admit of the employment of these
vessels in the ordinary packet service—we cannot pretend to form an
opinion; but of the entire feasibility of the passage of the Atlantic
by steam, as far as regards safety, comfort, and dispatch, even in the
roughest and most boisterous weather, the most skeptical man must now
cease to doubt.”

The employment of steamships in the regular packet service was assured
in 1839, when Samuel Cunard founded the famous English line that still
bears his name, and ordered four steamers of moderate size that cost
between four and five hundred thousand dollars each. These, however,
were wooden vessels, and it was not until 1856 that the conservative
Cunards constructed any iron ships.

The construction of iron ships for ocean navigation marks the second
important phase of the technical evolution of the past century’s
commerce. It began on a small scale about 1830, and in 1837 an iron
vessel, The Rainbow, of six hundred tons was built; but the first
large iron steamer was ordered in 1840, and was the famous Great
Britain before referred to, constructed by Brunel, the engineer who
subsequently built the unfortunate naval monstrosity, the Great
Eastern. The completion of the Great Britain, in 1843, was an important
event in the progress of ocean navigation, not only because she was
five times the size of her largest iron predecessor, but also because
of the fact that Brunel decided, while building the vessel, to adopt
the screw for propelling the ship.

The substitution of the screw instead of paddle-wheels represents
a third phase of the technical evolution of ocean navigation. John
Ericsson, who subsequently built the famous Monitor, had demonstrated
the practicability of the screw as a propeller in 1836, and, three
years later, the Archimedes, of two hundred and thirty-seven tons, was
fitted with a screw. It was the success of the Archimedes that led
Brunel to adopt the screw on the Great Britain.

[Illustration: THE CLERMONT. FULTON’S FIRST STEAMBOAT.]

The superiority of the screw over paddle-wheels, and the greater merits
of iron ships compared with wooden vessels, have long been accepted;
but the adoption of iron as a material and of the screw for a propeller
came about slowly. Indeed, iron ship-building made little progress in
Great Britain before 1850, and in this country wood was adhered to till
much later. One reason why the English did not change to the screw
and iron more quickly was probably the great influence exerted by the
powerful Cunard line, whose conservatism caused it to hold to wooden
ships until 1856. The Great Eastern, finished as late as 1859, was an
iron ship, but was fitted with both screw and paddle-wheels. Of the
total tonnage built in the United Kingdom in 1853, about twenty-five
per cent was steam tonnage and a little more than twenty-five per cent
was of iron. At the present time three fourths of all British-built
vessels are steamers, and no wooden ships are built in the United
Kingdom.

America was slow in changing from wood to iron, because the cost of
iron was so high. We had wood in abundance, numerous yards for the
construction of wooden vessels, and were the builders of the best
type of wooden ships. In 1853, the year just referred to for Great
Britain, twenty-two per cent of the tonnage of the vessels built in
this country was in steamships, but only an inappreciable portion was
in iron vessels. The adherence of American ship-builders and owners
to wood is well illustrated by the action taken by the owners of the
famous but unfortunate American Collins line, established in 1847. The
company began, in 1850, to run four palatial steamers, built without
regard to cost, and supplied with luxurious appointments, some of which
are retained in vessels of the present day; but the company built the
ships of wood and propelled them with paddle-wheels. The great American
ship-building firm, William Cramp & Sons, founded in 1850, did not
begin constructing iron ships till 1870. Even in 1898, the tonnage of
wooden vessels constructed was one and a half times the steel and iron
tonnage. About twenty-six per cent of our merchant marine, foreign and
domestic, is now made up of iron and steel vessels.

The next important step in maritime progress, following the adoption
of iron and the screw, was taken about 1870, when the compound engine
came into general use. Though the compound engine had been used on
a small vessel in France as early as 1829, it was first extensively
adopted as the result of the rapid development in steam navigation
which took place in the seventies. In the compound engine the steam,
instead of being used in only one cylinder in passing from the boiler
to the condenser, exerts its force in two or three cylinders, and even
in four, in the quadruple expansion engines. This results in a great
economy in the amount of fuel used. In the earlier marine engines the
pressure of steam in the boilers was thirteen pounds to the square
inch, and the consumption of coal per horse-power per hour was five
and one half pounds; whereas, at the present time, a pressure of two
hundred pounds per square inch is maintained, and the fuel used has
been reduced to less than one and a half pounds per hour for each
indicated horse-power.

Ten years after the compound engine came into general use, the
cheapened cost of steel made it possible to adopt steel in the place
of iron in the construction of hulls. This may be regarded as marking
a fifth epoch-making step in the progress of commerce; because the
steel ship was stronger, lighter, and able to carry more cargo than
iron vessels of the same size. The substitution of steel for iron in
the British yards was made rapidly. In 1879, only ten and a quarter per
cent of the tonnage constructed on the Clyde was of steel; but in 1889
the per cent had risen to ninety-seven.

During the past twenty years there have been many improvements made
in the construction and appointments of ships; but the more important
changes have consisted in dividing vessels, by means of bulkheads,
into several water-tight compartments, and in substituting twin screws
for the single screw. The Inmans placed twin screws on the City of New
York in 1888, and since then their use has become general on the larger
ocean liners. The twin screws add somewhat, though not greatly, to the
speed of vessels; but they render ships much safer and less liable
to be disabled. An ocean steamer with twin screws and water-tight
compartments can suffer any one of the common accidents—such as
breaking of one of its shafts, losing one of its screws, having its
rudder damaged, or one of its engines give out, or having its side
punctured by collision—without being disabled. Although ocean travel
still has its dangers, the risks at the present time are far less than
they were a half or a quarter of a century ago.

[Illustration]

The technical progress of commerce during the nineteenth century is
well summarized by Mr. Henry Fry in his book on the History of North
Atlantic Steam Navigation, written in 1895. He says:—

“The Comet of 1812 has multiplied into twelve thousand steamships,
measuring over sixteen million tons.... Her twenty tons have been
multiplied into a ship of eighteen thousand; her forty feet to six
hundred and ninety-two feet; and her four horse-power to thirty
thousand in a single ship. Symington’s four-inch cylinder has grown
to one hundred and twenty inches; the pressure of steam in the boiler
has increased from thirteen pounds to two hundred pounds on the square
inch; the two hundred and forty-three knots, the maximum of the Great
Western in 1838, to five hundred and sixty; and the average speed
from 8.2 to 22.01 knots, while the consumption of coal has decreased
from about five and one half to one and one half pounds per indicated
horse-power per hour.”

The century’s naval technical progress is epitomized in the White
Star liner, the Oceanic. The length of this mammoth vessel is over an
eighth of a mile, being 705 feet, 6 inches. 13½ feet longer than the
Great Eastern was. When loaded, the Oceanic draws 32 feet, 6 inches of
water, and on that draft her displacement is 28,500 tons. The figures
for the Great Eastern were 25 feet, 6 inches, and 27,000 tons. The
capacity of her engines is 28,000 horse-power, or two and one third
times the capacity of those in the Great Eastern. The pressure in her
boilers is 192 pounds to the square inch, or ten or twelve times that
in the boilers of her famous predecessor. Though not built for speed,
the Oceanic can average 500 miles a day, or sixty per cent more than
the Great Eastern did. The Oceanic will accommodate 400 first-class
passengers, 300 second-class, 1000 third-class, and a ship’s company
of 394, making a total of 2104 persons. In this regard, however, her
figures are fortunately less than those of the Great Eastern, for that
vessel was designed to carry 4000 persons, besides crew. These figures
regarding passenger accommodations indicate in a forceful way the great
advancement that has been made in the comforts of ocean travel during
the past forty years.

III. IMPROVEMENTS IN COMMERCIAL AUXILIARIES.

The progress of commerce during the nineteenth century has been
promoted not only by the evolution of ships of great speed and
capacity, but also by the improvements made in numerous other
auxiliaries of commerce. Chief among these aids to commercial activity
have been the betterment of natural waterways and the construction of
ship-canals, the improvements of harbors, the laying of cables, and the
extension of international banking facilities.

The improvements of such rivers as the Rhine, Danube, Hudson, and
Mississippi, and of such natural waterways as the chain of Great Lakes
in the northern part of the United States, are conspicuous instances
of the manner in which the canalization of natural waterways has been
undertaken for the promotion of traffic. That part of the Rhine River
traffic which passes Emmerich and Mannheim amounted to 2,800,000 tons
a year from 1872 to 1875, but by 1895 it had increased to 10,300,000
tons. The traffic on the rivers of the Mississippi Valley, according
to census statistics, increased from 18,946,522 tons, in 1880, to
29,485,046 tons, in 1889; and since that year the increase must have
been considerable. The effect of the improvement of waterways upon
commerce is most strikingly shown in the case of our Great Lakes. In
the seventies, the demands of traffic were for channels and harbors
12 feet in depth. During the next decade it was necessary for the
United States to increase the depth to 16 feet; and in the nineties the
channels had to be made deep enough to accommodate vessels of 20 feet
draft. At the present time the traffic on the Lakes is probably over
70,000,000 tons annually. During the year 1898 the freight that passed
the locks at the Sault St. Marie equaled 21,000,000 tons, two and a
half times the tonnage passing the Suez Canal.

During the last third of the nineteenth century six important ocean
ship-canals have been opened; the Suez, opened in 1869; the Rotterdam
Canal, in 1872; the canal connecting Amsterdam directly with the
North Sea, 1877; the canal across the Isthmus of Corinth, 1893; the
Manchester Canal, 1894; and the Baltic or Kiel Canal, finished in
1895. The Panama Canal was begun in 1882, and the construction of the
Nicaragua Canal was commenced in 1889; but the date of the completion
of these most important works is still problematical.

In the improvement of its harbors every government has been active.
Thirty years ago a depth of 23 feet was considered ample, but after
1880 it became necessary to adopt 27 feet as the standard. During the
past five years the larger seaports have required harbors with 30 feet
of water in order to accommodate the largest ocean vessels, and the
limit has by no means been reached. The United States Government has
just recently, 1899, authorized the deepening of New York harbor to 35
feet. As noted before, the Oceanic can be loaded to a draft of 32½ feet.

[Illustration: THE OCEANIC, 1899. LARGEST SHIP AFLOAT.

(Tonnage, 17,000: length, 705 ft. 6 in.; breadth, 68 ft. 4 in.)]

The docks of the great seaports have been improved at a cost of many
millions of dollars. As an illustration of this Liverpool may be cited.
The city’s position gave it great commercial possibilities, but a
troublesome bar at the mouth of the Mersey, and a tide with a rise and
fall of thirty feet made the construction of its harbor and docks a
difficult matter. The problem was solved by the construction, under
public control, of a large number of commodious wet docks with gates
which are opened only a few hours a day, during high tide. These harbor
improvements have made possible Liverpool’s phenomenal expansion in
commerce during the past quarter of a century, an increase that has
given the city third place among the seaports of the world, with an
annual tonnage of vessels entered and cleared of 16,000,000 tons.

The achievements of Manchester during the past decade are even more
notable than those of Liverpool. Manchester is situated on a small
stream thirty-five miles from the ocean; but she has become a seaport
for the largest ocean vessels, and has docks and wharves equipped with
the most improved appliances. Her dock-sheds, for instance, are twin
structures, three stories in height, and the arrangements for handling
freight are such that goods are taken directly from the ships to any
one of the three stories of the sheds.

In the United States, the government and private corporations are
rapidly improving the harbor facilities of our ports. During the past
decade the Gulf ports have received especial attention, with the
result that a large part of our export trade is now moving through the
Gulf harbors. As an instance of what private corporations are doing,
mention may be made of the fact that a railway corporation has recently
completed a wharf in New Orleans that cost $2,000,000.

Besides these harbor improvements, the erection of more and better
lighthouses and signals has made the approach of vessels safer. The
United States Weather Bureau has also done much to lessen the dangers
of navigation by its weather forecasts and its warnings of approaching
storms. Although the Bureau was established only twenty-nine years
ago, and in a small way, its services have so increased and in such a
practical manner as to have come to be regarded as indispensable by the
commercial interests.

The first successful trans-Atlantic cable was laid in 1866; at the
present time there are 170,000 miles of submarine telegraphs in
use. The cables now used for commercial purposes number 320 and
include about 150,000 miles of lines, the other 20,000 miles being
short government lines connecting forts, batteries, signal-stations,
and lighthouses. The total cost of these cables has been about
$250,000,000. The influence of the cable upon commerce has been so
great as to revolutionize the methods of international trade that
prevailed a century ago; indeed, ocean telegraphy has made it no more
difficult to effect international sales and purchases than it is to
make domestic exchanges. With thirteen cables in successful operation
between the United States and Europe, we have had no difficulty
in building up an immense trade across the Atlantic; but, with no
trans-Pacific line, we are experiencing much difficulty in securing a
large place in the trade of the Orient. Of course the development of
our commerce with the East is conditioned by numerous other factors;
but no one doubts that the construction of the proposed Pacific cable
will be of assistance to our commercial progress in the Orient.

Among the other agencies that have promoted the progress of
commerce, mention should be made of the extension and improvement of
international credit systems and banking facilities. In this regard
the United Kingdom leads the nations of the world, London being the
clearing-house for a large part of the world’s trade. Germany,
France, and the Netherlands have also developed good facilities for
international banking; but the United States has not yet done so. Our
merchants are still obliged to settle most accounts through foreign
banks, but it is probable that our recent acquisition of foreign
possessions will cause us to establish some system of international
banks.

IV. EXPANSION OF INTERNATIONAL TRADE DURING THE CENTURY.

In the introductory paragraph of this paper it was stated that the
commercial progress of the past hundred years is one of the salient
features of the history of the century; and, in contrasting the
commerce of a hundred years ago with that of the present, a few figures
were cited that indicated in a general way the growth that the foreign
trade of Great Britain and the United States has enjoyed. The expansion
of international trade during the century merits fuller presentation
and analysis.

Accurate figures for the whole world’s trade are not obtainable for
the earlier years; and if it were possible to present comparative
statistics of the international trade of the world, as a whole, the
comparisons would not be so instructive as those which present the
progress of the commerce of those countries which rank highest among
trading nations. Accordingly it will be most profitable to confine
our statistics and analytical study to the commerce of Great Britain,
Germany, France, and the United States.

The progress which the commerce of the United Kingdom has made during
the century is shown by the following table, giving the imports,
exports, and total trade for the years 1800, 1839, 1897, and the annual
average for alternate quinquennial periods between 1855 and 1890.

TABLE SHOWING GROWTH OF COMMERCE OF THE UNITED KINGDOM.

--------+---------------+---------------+--------------
Years. | Imports. | Exports. | Total Trade.
--------+---------------+---------------+--------------
1800 | $148,876,000 | $210,240,000 | $359,116,000
1839 | 300,474,000 | 321,564,000 | 622,038,000
1856–60 | 890,723,000 | 604,854,000 | 1,495,577,000
1866–70 | 1,425,936,000 | 914,586,000 | 2,340,522,000
1876–80 | 1,862,775,000 | 980,818,000 | 2,843,593,000
1886–90 | 1,897,352,000 | 1,453,695,000 | 3,351,047,000
1897 | 2,194,932,524 | 1,431,598,345 | 3,626,530,869
--------+---------------+---------------+--------------

During the first four decades of the century, the growth of the
commerce of the United Kingdom, though considerable, was not
rapid,—the figures for 1839 showing an increase of 73 per cent over
those for 1800,—but during the fifth, sixth, and seventh decades the
progress was phenomenal. The value of the exports in 1873, as compared
with 1839, shows a gain of 379 per cent, and the total foreign trade
increased nearly 450 per cent; that is, it was five and a half times
as much in 1873 as it was thirty-four years previous. Since 1880, the
quantities of imports and exports have largely increased, but the fall
in prices has been such as to make the increase in the total value
comparatively small.

The commerce of the German States during the nineteenth century did
not grow very rapidly until after 1850. During the early part of the
century the great Continental wars rendered commerce nearly impossible.
Peace was restored in 1815, but the German States had neither political
nor commercial unity. Each State had a tariff which applied against all
other States. Gradually a Zollverein, or customs union, grew up, which,
by 1854, had come to include all the German States except Austria,
Holstein, Mecklenburg, Lauenburg, and the three Hanse towns, Hamburg,
Lübeck, and Bremen. In 1866, the North German Federation was organized,
and this paved the way for the formation of the German Empire in 1871.
The Zollverein made commercial progress possible, and political unity
gave it a great impulse.

The statistics of the German trade before the establishment of the
Zollverein are very meagre. A German authority, Otto Huebner, estimates
the value of the total import and export trade of the German States to
have been $309,019,200 in 1850, and $504,988,200 in 1855. The value
of the imports of Hamburg, the chief port of Germany, rose from an
annual average of $92,320,050 for the five-year period 1851–55, to
$157,660,472 during the half decade 1866–70. The growth of Germany’s
foreign commerce during the past twenty years has been phenomenal, and
her trade is now second only to that of Great Britain. In 1881, the
imports were valued at $704,904,000, and the exports at $707,978,000,
being slightly more than the imports; whereas, by 1890, the imports had
risen to $986,641,000, and the exports to $792,620,000, a sum nearly a
hundred million dollars less than the value of the imports. The foreign
trade of the country, particularly in imports, has continued its rapid
growth since 1890, the figures for 1897 being, imports $1,231,756,862,
and exports $977,447,198, a total trade of $2,209,204,060.

The foreign trade of France at the beginning of the nineteenth century
consisted of $80,500,000 worth of imports and $59,000,000 of exports,
a total of $139,500,000. The Continental wars, up to 1815, were even
more disastrous to French trade than they were to German; but with the
restoration of peace, commercial progress began, and between 1815 and
1831 the total trade increased from $119,200,000 worth to $168,152,000
worth. The growth by decades since 1830 has been as follows: In 1840,
the value of the total foreign trade was $278,383,200; in 1850,
$358,748,400; in 1860, $805,659,200; in 1871, $1,242,765,600; in 1880,
$1,640,712,300; and in 1890, $2,003,557,516. These figures show that
the rapid expansion of French commerce began about 1850. The highest
point was reached in 1891; but since then there has been a slight
falling off in the total trade, due to a decrease in imports. In 1891,
the value of the imports was $1,155,973,310; in 1897, $991,537,500. The
exports were valued at $920,839,130 in 1891; and at $926,998,300 in
1897. The total trade for these years was $2,076,812,440 for 1891, and
$1,918,535,800 for 1897.

During the first quarter of the century France had a strong balance of
trade in her favor: that is, she sold more commodities than she bought;
and between 1825 and 1840 the exports and imports about balanced each
other; but since that date, with the exception of the years 1871 to
1875, when the huge war indemnity was paid, the balance of trade had
been unfavorable, as would naturally be expected of a country such as
France, whose people are extensively engaged in manufacturing. France,
as well as the United Kingdom, Germany, Belgium, Switzerland, and
other European countries, imports raw materials and food in large
quantities.

The decline in the value of French trade, though due to falling prices
rather than to a decrease in the quantities of commodities, has given
the French people much concern. It is not probable, however, that this
decline is due to permanent causes. The population and industries
of France have not reached a stationary stage; they are going to
increase and cause a natural growth in the country’s foreign commerce.
The commercial progress of France, however, can hardly be so rapid
as that of Germany and the United States. These are the countries
whose commercial vitality is strongest, and of these two countries,
the United States possesses greater natural resources and larger
possibilities, industrial and commercial. The progress of the commerce
of the United States merits a somewhat closer survey than has been
given its three leading rivals in trade.

V. THE TRADE OF THE UNITED STATES DURING THE CENTURY.

The economic progress of the United States during the past hundred
years is most clearly indicated by the growth of its foreign and
domestic commerce. Being a new country, busied with occupying and
developing our large territory, our domestic commerce has been of
enormous proportions. With nearly two hundred thousand miles of
railroads, comprising four ninths of the total railway mileage of the
world, with our chain of the Great Lakes and our admirable system of
navigable rivers, it has been possible to exploit our natural resources
on a large scale, and to develop an inland traffic several times the
volume of our foreign commerce.

Our international trade, however, although smaller than our domestic
traffic, has been large throughout the country, has grown rapidly,
especially since the year 1850, the period of the Civil War excepted,
and is now increasing in such a manner as to give our foreign rivals
much concern. The progress of our foreign trade during this century is
shown by the following table containing the statistics of the value
of our merchandise imports, exports, and total foreign trade for each
decade, beginning with 1790.

TABLE SHOWING IMPORTS AND EXPORTS OF MERCHANDISE BY DECADES FROM 1790
TO 1898.

------+---------------+-------------+--------------
Year. | Exports. | Imports. | Total Trade.
------+---------------+-------------+--------------
1790 | $20,205,156 | $23,000,000 | $43,205,156
1800 | 70,971,780 | 91,252,768 | 162,224,548
1810 | 66,757,970 | 85,400,000 | 152,157,970
1820 | 69,691,669 | 74,450,000 | 144,141,669
1830 | 71,670,735 | 62,720,956 | 134,391,691
1840 | 123,668,932 | 98,258,706 | 221,927,638
1850 | 144,375,726 | 173,509,526 | 317,885,252
1860 | 333,576,057 | 353,616,119 | 687,192,176
1870 | 392,771,768 | 435,958,408 | 828,730,176
1880 | 835,638,658 | 667,954,746 | 1,503,593,404
1890 | 857,828,864 | 789,310,409 | 1,647,139,093
1898 | 1,210,291,913 | 616,049,654 | 1,826,341,567
------+---------------+-------------+--------------

During the first half of the century, the expansion of our foreign
trade was not especially rapid. The Continental wars, lasting from 1793
to 1815, and our own war with England, from 1812 to 1815, interfered
considerably with international trade. Probably our tariffs of 1816,
1824, and 1828 had the effect they were intended to accomplish, and
restricted somewhat the volume of our foreign commerce. The chief
reason, however, why our trade progress was much more rapid after
1850 was, that it was not until about that time that the means of
inland transportation became developed sufficiently to make possible
a large domestic traffic. When our central West was able to exchange
commodities on a large scale with the seaboard, then our foreign
commerce began to increase rapidly.

The growth of our imports was very rapid for the period of fifteen
years, 1879 to 1893, their value having risen from $445,777,775
to $866,400,922; but since then there has been a sharp decline to
$616,049,654. Our exports, however, have increased in a phenomenal
manner during the past decade. Prior to 1897, the highest point was
reached in 1892, when the value of the exports was $1,030,278,148. In
1897, the value was $1,050,993,556, and in 1898 (the official year
ending June 30), the value, as shown by the foregoing table, was
$1,210,291,913. In consequence of this great increase in our exports
the total foreign trade of the United States has not decreased in value
during recent years, although there has been a considerable fall in
prices and a large falling off in our importations. Our total trade,
during the fiscal year 1898, was much larger than it was in 1890, and
fell only $10,000,000 short of the value reached in the record-breaking
year of 1892. The calendar year 1898 shows a larger trade than has been
shown by any previous year, the value being $1,868,523,057.

The leading industry of the United States being agriculture, our
exports consist largely of various products of the farm. In 1898
the exported agricultural products were valued at $853,683,570, and
comprised 70.54 per cent of our total sales abroad. In spite of these
large figures, the preponderance of agricultural over other products
is being reduced with considerable rapidity by the growth in the
exportation of manufactures. Before 1876 our exports of manufactures
were less than $100,000,000 a year; whereas, in the calendar year 1898,
they were $370,924,994. In 1880, agricultural exports comprised 83.25
per cent of our exports, and manufactures 12.48 per cent; and in the
calendar year 1898, a year of exceptionally large foreign sales of food
products, agriculture furnished only 69.06 per cent,—less than seven
tenths of the exports, while manufacture supplied 24.96 per cent, or
one fourth of the total. The year 1898 is a notable one in the history
of American manufactures, for it was then, for the first time, that we
sold to foreigners more of our manufactures than we bought of theirs.

A table showing the total foreign trade of the United States from
1789 to 1898, the first eleven decades of our national existence,
has recently been prepared by the Bureau of Statistics in the United
States Treasury Department. It shows the total imports and exports of
merchandise and specie, and on which side of our trade account the
grand balance comes.

TABLE SHOWING TOTAL TRADE OF THE UNITED STATES 1789–1898.

Merchandise
Exports $30,952,202,985
Imports 29,979,961,487
----------------
Excess of Exports 972,241,498
================
Gold and Silver
Exports 3,400,623,581
Imports 1,940,150,320
----------------
Excess of Exports 1,460,473,261
================
Merchandise and Gold and Silver combined
Exports 34,352,826,566
Imports 31,920,111,807
----------------
Excess of Exports 2,432,714,759
================

The table shows that we have exported nearly thirty-one billion
dollars worth of commodities,—about a billion dollars more than we
have purchased. It also shows that we have sent out of the country
$1,460,473,261 more of the precious metals than we have received. Our
exports of merchandise and gold and silver combined exceed our total
imports by the large sum of $2,432,714,759. If the statistics of our
imports and exports for each year since 1789 be consulted, it will be
found that during the eighty-seven years preceding 1876 there were but
sixteen years when our exports of merchandise exceeded our imports. The
balance of trade was nearly always “unfavorable.” Since 1876, however,
the balance has nearly always been on the other side, there having been
only three years when our exports did not exceed our imports.

In return for something, we have given foreign countries nearly two and
a half billion dollars worth more of commodities and precious metals
than we have received in return. A part of this large sum, possibly
one fourth, has been paid to foreigners for freights on our imported
commodities, and we have also spent large sums in foreign travel. The
chief reason why we have exported more than we have imported is, that
we have been borrowing foreign capital to use in constructing railroads
and factories and in developing our farms and mines. Prior to 1876,
we received $1,084,339,912 more than we exported; we accumulated a
large foreign debt. Since 1876, we have continued to borrow abroad;
but we have been able to liquidate a part of our former debts, and
also to exchange large amounts of commodities and precious metals for
capital; for, since 1876, our exports have exceeded our imports by
$3,517,054,671. If our present large excess of exports over imports
continues, we shall soon become a creditor nation with large sums
invested abroad.

The history of our foreign trade is highly gratifying to our national
pride; our achievements have been signal, well-nigh continuous, and
have been more marked during the latter decades of the century than
at any previous time. The history of the American marine, however,
presents a somewhat different picture.

VI. THE AMERICAN MARINE IN FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC COMMERCE.

In colonial days maritime industries held an important place. The
location of the colonies adjacent to the ocean, their dependence upon
the mother country for manufactures and upon the West Indies for
tropical products, their need of foreign markets for their timber,
fish, tobacco, and food products, and their abundant supply of lumber
for shipbuilding, all tended to make them a seafaring people. This
fondness for the sea was especially intense in New England, where the
returns of agriculture were relatively meagre. The long Revolutionary
War destroyed many ships and interfered seriously with ocean commerce,
but the struggle gave the colonists what was of more value than
ships,—a spirit of venture and hardihood. Hundreds of ships and
thousands of seamen engaged in privateering, and when the war ended
the maritime instincts of the Americans were stronger than they had
been when the declaration of political and commercial independence was
declared in 1776.

The imbecility of the general government under the Articles of
Confederation and the restrictions placed upon interstate traffic
prevented any considerable maritime progress between the Peace of
Paris and the inauguration of a truly national government under the
Constitution. But a stable government, sound credit, and uniform
national laws for the regulation of commerce gave the maritime
instincts of the Americans a chance to assert themselves, and the
tonnage of our ships grew rapidly larger. Our tonnage registered for
the foreign trade was only 123,893 tons in 1789; by 1795 it had grown
to 549,471 tons; in 1800 it amounted to 667,107 tons; during the next
five years it increased to 744,224 tons, and by 1810 it had reached
981,019 tons. Such a growth as this in twenty years, from such small
beginnings, was truly remarkable.

The American ships soon crowded most foreign vessels out of our
commerce. In 1790 we carried only 40.5 per cent of our imports and
exports; but by 1795 we had secured 90 per cent; and, with the
exception of a short period during and immediately following the War of
1812, it was not till fifty-two years later that as much as one fourth
of our foreign trade was carried under foreign flags. Moreover, we not
only carried our own commerce, but we also entered largely into the
carrying trade of other countries. The great European war crippled the
commercial activities of European countries, and made it easier for our
ships to gain control of our own commerce and to secure employment as
carriers for foreign merchants. During the fifteen years from 1793, the
year of the outbreak of the European war, to 1808, when the blockade
of European ports and the capture of American ships and seamen led us
to attempt to prohibit our ships temporarily from engaging in foreign
trade, our merchant marine rose from a position of obscurity to a place
of great prominence on the high seas.

As long as ocean commerce was carried in wooden vessels, the maritime
interests of the United States continued to prosper. The War of
1812–15, the panic of 1819, and the competition of foreign vessels
after the restoration of peace in Europe, gave our marine a setback,
so that it was not until 1847 that our tonnage in the foreign trade
exceeded the figures for 1810; but during the period of fifteen years,
from 1846 to 1861, our tonnage increased 150 per cent. When the Civil
War, which proved so disastrous to the shipping interests of the United
States, broke out in 1861, our tonnage registered in the foreign trade
equaled 2,496,894 tons,—the highest point it has ever reached. The
American sailing clipper was for nearly half a century the mistress of
the seas. As J. R. Soley says: “It was in these ships that for nearly
half a century not only the largest freights of the world were carried,
but the finest and most profitable as well. Merchants having valuable
cargoes to export would wait for the sailing of a favorite clipper, and
merchants with goods to import would instruct their correspondents to
wait in like manner.” As late as 1850 the higher grades of commodities
were almost always shipped in the stanch and speedy American clipper
ship.

Since 1861 the American marine in the foreign trade has played a rôle
of decreasing importance. Three causes account for this. About the
middle of the century our commercial rivals began to substitute iron
ships for wooden; but we were not able to adopt the better material
in the construction of our ships because of the high cost of iron in
this country at that time. Great Britain could build the iron ships
much cheaper than we could, and she soon began to displace us in the
carrying trade of the other countries. And it was not long before she
began also to carry a large share of our own foreign commerce.

The second cause for our maritime decline was the Civil War. In 1861
our tonnage registered for the foreign trade was 2,500,000 tons; by
1866 it had fallen to 1,387,756 tons, a loss of over a million tons.
During the war period, nearly 800,000 tons of our shipping were sold
abroad; 110,000 tons were captured by Confederate cruisers; and other
casualties occurred. Of course there were no ships built for our
merchant marine during the stormy years of the war.

Why, it may be asked, did we not restore our ships after the war and
regain our former proud place on the high seas? For the simple, though
possibly unsatisfying, reason that we did not find it profitable to do
so. Capital is invested where the prospects for profit are best, and
the inducement to put money into American ships for the foreign trade
was not strong. It still cost more to build ships in our country than
it did in Europe, and the expenses of operating them when constructed
were greater. Moreover, our rivals had gotten possession of the lion’s
share of the world’s carrying trade, and would not release any portion
of their business without a keen struggle. At the same time the
American capitalist was offered many opportunities for the investment
of his property in domestic enterprises. During the quarter of a
century which followed the war, we devoted our energies and capital to
building our railroads, opening the West, exploiting our mineral and
forest resources, and building the mills and factories whose products
are now rapidly entering foreign markets in all parts of the world.
America’s economic activities were industrial rather than commercial.

The result of these general causes has been the decline of our shipping
in the foreign trade from two and a half million tons in 1861 to less
than three quarters of a million tons in 1898; but it seems that the
low-water mark has been reached and that the tide is turning. The man
who writes the history of our merchant marine on the high seas during
the first half of the twentieth century will, in all probability,
write a record of rapid progress. We have already made much headway
in substituting steel for wooden ships; and America’s foremost iron
manufacturer, Mr. Andrew Carnegie, says that steel ships can now be
built as cheaply on our Atlantic coast as they can be built on the
Clyde. Furthermore, the opportunities for investment in domestic
industries are becoming fewer and less alluring, and there are good
reasons for thinking American capitalists will be disposed from now on
to put their ventures in ships to sail foreign seas.

The attitude of American capitalists, however, will depend very largely
on the maritime policy adopted by the United States. That policy should
unquestionably be as liberal as the policy adopted by our rivals
in commerce. Whatever differences of opinion may rightly exist as
regards specific measures for the restoration of the American marine
to the high seas, all parties should agree as touching the justice and
necessity of treating our maritime interests as generously as Great
Britain deals with the owners of her mighty marine.

Our domestic marine, being free from foreign competition, has had a
prosperity as great as the adversity of our foreign marine. The present
tonnage of domestic shipping is nearly 4,000,000 tons, our growth
during the period since the Civil War having been nearly a million
tons. The traffic on our northern lakes now employs 3256 vessels, canal
boats, and barges, with a total tonnage of 1,437,500 tons; and two
thirds of this tonnage consists of steamships. In 1888 our lake tonnage
was only 874,102 tons; the growth during a decade having been nearly 80
per cent.

It is hardly necessary to remark that the increase or decrease in the
efficiency of a marine during the last few decades is not measured
by the growth or decline in the tonnage statistics. The modern
steamship, aided by the many commercial auxiliaries that facilitate
it in receiving and discharging its cargo, is a much more efficient
transportation agent than was its smaller predecessor propelled by
sails, and loaded and unloaded mainly by human labor. Our present
domestic marine of 4,000,000 tons is at least twice as effective as was
the domestic shipping of 3,000,000 by which we were served a generation
ago.

VII. AMERICAN SHIPBUILDING.

One great aid to the achievement of maritime greatness is a strong
shipbuilding industry, and every nation with commercial aspirations
endeavors to establish the business upon a sure foundation. For some
countries, as in the case of the United Kingdom, that is much easier
than for others; and that is one reason why Great Britain has so easily
succeeded in maintaining her place as mistress of the seas.

The business of building ships in the United States, to be used in
foreign trade, has passed through a golden age of triumphs, followed
by a period of decline and discouragement, and it is now entering
upon an epoch of revival. The golden age came in the days of wooden
vessels. It began in early colonial times and lasted until the middle
of this century, when the world began to buy iron ships of the United
Kingdom. The magnitude of our shipbuilding industry at the middle of
the nineteenth century is indicated by the fact that during the decade
beginning with 1850 the tonnage built in our yards equaled 3,988,372
tons, an annual average of nearly 400,000 tons. During the three years
1854–56 we constructed over a million and a half tons.

[Illustration: STEAMER CAMPANIA OF THE CUNARD LINE.]

The decline in American shipbuilding set in sharply after the Civil
War, and, in spite of the continued growth of our domestic marine, the
tonnage constructed by American builders steadily declined until 1886,
when only 95,453 tons were built. The causes of this decline have been
stated in what has been said regarding the substitution of iron and
steel vessels for wooden. The period of decline seems now to be safely
passed, for we are annually building over 200,000 tons on an average,
and every indication points to rapid progress in the near future.

What is more indicative of progress than the increase in the tonnage
constructed is the growth in the percentage of steamers and iron and
steel ships built, as compared with the wooden sailing ships turned
out. During the decade 1872–81, we built 800,000 tons of steamers and
224,000 tons of iron and steel ships; in the decade following, we
constructed 1,200,000 steam tons and 485,000 tons of iron and steel
vessels; and from 1891 to 1898 our yards turned out 730,432 tons of
steamships and 543,850 tons of iron and steel vessels. As these figures
indicate, the reconstruction of our merchant marine is progressing
with a fair degree of rapidity. At the present time one half our
tonnage consists of steamers; but our percentage of iron and steel is
still small as compared with other countries. Over seven tenths of our
tonnage consists of wooden ships, whereas our chief commercial rival
has practically no wooden vessels whatever. Only 7 per cent of the
French marine consists of wooden ships, and in the case of Germany less
than 5 per cent.

The outlook for iron and steel shipbuilding is so promising that a
rapid increase in iron and steel tonnage is certain to come. Largely
through the influence of the reconstruction of our navy, numerous large
plants for the construction of steel ships have been established at
Bath, Philadelphia, Wilmington, Baltimore, Newport News, San Francisco,
and other seaports. Cities on the Mississippi River, and especially
those on the Great Lakes, are engaged in building ships of iron and
steel. There are several steel plants in the Lake ports, and in them we
have built the larger part of our steel tonnage. Our iron ships have
been built chiefly in the seaboard yards. During the present year,
1899, the American yards are busy constructing vessels both for the
navy and for our merchant fleet, and new yards are being established.
Having begun selling crude and structural iron and steel and various
classes of machinery in Europe, even in Great Britain, we shall ere
long be selling iron and steel ships. The excellence of our navy has
brought us orders for war ships, and the skill and invention of our
shipbuilders will bring us foreign orders for merchantmen.

VIII. CAUSES ACCOUNTING FOR THE CENTURY’S COMMERCIAL PROGRESS.

The commercial progress of the nineteenth century, the salient phases
of which have been depicted in the foregoing pages, has been the result
of three sets of causes, economic, political, and social.

The economic causes of most importance are the improvements in
transportation, the reorganization of industry on a large scale, the
accumulation of capital, together with the growth of corporations and
credit institutions whereby the utility of capital has been enhanced,
and the discovery of large stores of gold.

[Illustration: CRAMP’S SHIPYARD ON THE DELAWARE.]

Transportation is the handmaid of trade. Whatever enables this handmaid
to do her work cheaper and quicker enlarges the scope and volume of the
world’s commerce. When one considers that it cost nearly four times as
much in 1875 to ship wheat from New York to Liverpool as it did twenty
years later, and fully three times as much from Chicago to Liverpool,
one can readily understand how transportation has removed hindrances to
commerce.

Cheap and rapid transportation has made an extensive commerce possible,
but it has been the organization of industry on a large scale that has
created the chief demand for commerce. Industry at the present time is,
to a large extent, so organized as best to promote the territorial and
international division of labor; and each large producer regards the
whole world as his market. The amount of commerce required increases
with the concentration and specialization of industry, and with every
widening of the producer’s market.

It has been the accumulation of capital and its increased availability
for purposes of production that have made possible the organization
of industry on its present basis, and enabled men to construct the
highly developed transportation system by means of which commerce
is accomplished. The material progress of the past century is
unprecedented. Industry has created wealth as with the touch of a magic
wand; and this rapidly growing wealth has been made available capital
through the instrumentality of the corporation which, by means of
stocks and bonds, has gathered into giant organizations the property of
hundreds and even thousands of individuals. The industrial corporations
have been greatly assisted in their work of concentrating and applying
capital, by the banks and other institutions that have enlarged
credit and made a given amount of property capable of performing a
much larger work. The expansion of industrial credits, furthermore,
has been greatly facilitated by the issue of government bonds in
large amounts during the century. These state obligations constitute
excellent business securities, of which banks, other corporations,
and individuals make extensive use. Such are some of the factors that
have promoted the accumulation of capital and increased the volume of
commerce.

Money is not capital, but an adequate supply of a sound and stable
medium of exchange is essential to industrial and commercial progress.
Twice in the history of the world the discovery of large supplies of
the precious metals has given a great impetus to industry and trade:
once, in the sixteenth century, when the Spanish galleys brought to
Europe rich treasure from the silver mines of America; and again, in
the middle of the nineteenth century, when the rich finds of gold
were made in Australia and California. The very rapid increase in the
commerce of the United States and of the world at large, which began
about 1850, was in no small degree the result of the rising prices
which followed the discoveries of gold. The closing decade of the
century is witnessing a similar occurrence. For many years prices
declined rapidly; the demands made upon the world’s gold supply were
rapidly increased at a time when the annual output was declining. From
1850 to 1870 the annual output of gold averaged over $130,000,000;
it then declined so rapidly that it amounted to only a little over
$100,000,000 a year, in 1885 and 1886. It was only $118,848,700 in
1890; but the present annual production is nearly $300,000,000, and
the fall in prices has been cheeked for a while at least. The very
rapid enlargement in commerce during the past two years must have been
facilitated by the recent increase in the annual production of gold.

A second general cause accounting for the world’s progress in commerce
is political—the commercial policy followed by the leading nations
of the world. Up to the nineteenth century, practically every country
strove to promote its trade, navigation interests, and its power as
a nation by means of the mercantile system,—a system of strict and
detailed regulation of foreign trade by means of tariffs and navigation
laws. Each country strove to determine the nature of its international
trade, and endeavored to carry on its commerce in its own ships. In
the case of one country, at least, the mercantile system was eminently
successful. Great Britain entered the great Napoleonic wars with a
powerful naval and merchant marine, and emerged from that struggle the
unquestioned mistress of the ocean. Her industries also, as well as
her ships, were stronger than those of other countries; and she soon
concluded that both her foreign trade and her shipping would profit by
doing away with the restrictions of the mercantile system, and adopting
the policy of entire commercial freedom. She made no mistake, for her
industries and commerce have wonderfully prospered.

The success of free trade and freedom of commerce in the United Kingdom
had much influence upon other countries, and, during the third quarter
of the nineteenth century, several countries began to move cautiously
in the direction that the United Kingdom had taken. They soon found,
however, that for them free trade and shipping meant British trade
and shipping, because of their inability to compete successfully with
their powerful rival; and, during the last quarter of the century,
the dominant commercial and maritime policy outside of the British
Isles has been one providing for the regulation of trade by tariffs,
and for the promotion of the mercantile marine by postal payments and
bounties. At the present time, the two most powerful commercial rivals
of the United Kingdom are the United States and Germany; and their
trade policy is one of regulation instead of freedom. It would seem,
therefore, judging by results, that both the United Kingdom and her
competitors have acted wisely, and that in both cases the means adopted
were such as conditions demanded.

The third cause of the world’s commercial progress during the past
century has been colonial expansion. Germany, France, and other
countries, influenced by the great success of the United Kingdom,
have established colonies in different parts of the world, and
assumed control over uncivilized peoples, until there are now 125
colonies, protectorates, and dependencies. These 125 regions comprise
two fifths of the land surface of the globe, and contain one third
of its population. These colonies and protectorates import annually
over $1,500,000,000 worth of commodities, and of this large sum more
than forty per cent is bought from mother countries. The last nation
to adopt the policy of colonial expansion is the United States, her
principal colony, the Philippine Islands, having been made a part of
her possessions because of our desire to secure a larger share of the
trade of the Orient.

IX. THE TWENTIETH CENTURY PROSPECT.

The world is entering upon the twentieth century with the nations of
the earth bound to each other by much closer relations than existed a
hundred years ago, and chief among the forces that draw the countries
of the world together is commerce. It is commerce, more than anything
else, that has brought about the existing organization of industry in
which each nation is dependent upon every other.

The nations of the world are mutually dependent, but their interests
are not identical. In the future, as they have done in the past,
nations will compete with each other, each striving to secure
for itself a maximum of economic advantage; and this competition
will continue to take the form of commercial rivalry. The great
international struggles of the present day are being carried on to
secure trade advantages; and at no time in the past have those contests
been more earnest than they now are. The conflicts of the twentieth
century will be commercial struggles, and they will be intense.

In the centuries when Phœnicia, Greece, Carthage, Rome, and Venice were
successively powerful, the Mediterranean was the theatre of commercial
activity and international rivalry. The navigators and explorers, whose
exploits closed the mediæval period and inaugurated the modern era,
carried the world’s commerce from the Mediterranean to the Atlantic and
transferred the centres of national greatness from the southern to the
western and northern nations of Europe. The great industrial countries
of the present are those of Europe and America adjacent to the North
Atlantic. These countries originate the larger part of the world’s
commerce; and the main streams of international trade are those which
connect these countries with each other and with those regions of the
earth less highly developed industrially.

The Isthmus of Suez, just north of the Tropic of Cancer, and the
Isthmus of Panama, a short distance south of that line, were the only
barriers which nature placed across an otherwise continuous water route
around the earth in the northern hemisphere. These barriers diverted
the lines which the world’s largest volume of traffic tends to follow
far to the south around Africa and South America, or did so until
1869, when Europe overcame the barrier of most consequence to her by
the construction of the Suez Canal. Since the opening of that waterway
Europe has enjoyed advantages for international trade superior to those
enjoyed by our country. Our regions most highly developed industrially
are tributary to the Atlantic and Gulf of Mexico. To the east of us
lies Europe, a region of great industrial advancement, demanding
little more than our surplus food products and raw materials; to the
south are the countries of the South Atlantic lying along the line of
the world’s secondary commercial routes; countries, moreover, whose
trade we can secure only in direct competition with Europe, which has
already forestalled us at many points. In pushing their trade westward
the industrial States of the United States—and they are found in
the eastern half of our country—find that the possibilities of a
traffic by land are restricted within narrow bounds by the heavy costs
of a long haul over the elevated Cordilleran Mountain ranges, while
shipments by water have to take the circuitous and expensive route
around South America. Until an isthmian canal is constructed the
United States will be handicapped in its competition with Europe for
the trade of all countries bordering the Pacific Ocean.

The United States looks forward to the coming century, confident of
sharing largely in the world’s commerce. With an enormous and rapidly
growing foreign trade, and with her industries sending their wares into
all quarters of the globe, the future of her trade is certain. Shall we
also become a great maritime nation? Shall we be as successful in the
age of steel steamships as we were in the days when our clipper-ships,
“those strong-winged gulls in timber, put swift girdles around the
earth?” Unquestionably, yes! The commercial advantages which our rivals
have possessed for half a century have nearly all disappeared. Our
maritime instincts are not dead; and when we again turn our attention
in earnest to the work of international navigation, we shall “win anew
the wide-reaching seas our sires loved and occupied so well.”

EDUCATION DURING THE CENTURY

BY FRANKLIN S. EDMONDS, A.M.,

_Asst. Prof. of Political Science, Central High School, Philadelphia_.

The nineteenth century has been characterized by a deep and abiding
interest in popular education. One hundred years ago there were many
close observers who strongly opposed all attempts to provide schools
for the masses, lest they should be educated above their station in
life. This feeling was particularly strong in conservative countries
like England. It led the Duke of Wellington to remark to one who was
explaining to him the work of Joseph Lancaster, “Take care what you are
about; for unless you base all this on religion, you are only making
so many clever devils.” So careful a critic as Alexis de Tocqueville,
after his visit to the United States in 1831, wrote to Jared Sparks:
“Are the effects of education uniformly good? Does not a man who
obtains an education above his social condition become an unquiet
citizen?” The first triumph of the nineteenth century was the conquest
of this fear; and there is to-day a general belief that it is the duty
of each community to provide a well-developed school system, that each
child may have an opportunity for making the best and highest use of
his powers and capabilities.

Perhaps no single element has contributed more to this change in the
popular attitude towards schools than the writings of the great group
of thinkers who, with lofty ideals and keen acumen, have devoted
themselves to the study and discussion of educational questions.
Germany has been foremost in its contributions to educational
literature. Foremost in time as in influence is John Henry Pestalozzi
(1746–1827). Although endowed with an “unrivaled incapacity for
government,” Pestalozzi has yet become an inspiration to modern
pedagogy, because of his love for teaching and the tender sympathy of
his nature. After various educational experiments, he opened, in 1805,
a school at Yverdun, on the Lake of Neufchatel, which soon won for him
a European reputation, and became a centre of interest to educators
from all Europe. The Emperor of Russia gave him a personal proof of his
favor, and Fichte, the great German philosopher, declared that he saw
in Pestalozzi and his labors the dawning of a new era for humanity. In
his writings and in his teaching Pestalozzi emphasized the importance
of the home in education; he asserted the truth that all instruction is
based on observation: “Neither books nor any product of human skill,
but life itself, yields the basis for all education;” and in a general
way he aimed to develop the child through his own personal activity,
rather than to furnish him with useful facts.

The most eminent of Pestalozzi’s disciples was Friedrich Froebel
(1782–1852), the founder of the kindergarten. After a varied career as
a forester, student at Jena, etc., Froebel went to Yverdun in 1808,
and for two years was a co-laborer with Pestalozzi. The impulse which
he here received never lost its force. It brought him to consider
the problems of elementary education, and finally led, in 1837,
to his establishment of the first kindergarten at Blankenburg in
Thuringia. His idea may be well expressed in his own words,—“I can
convert children’s activities, energies, amusements, occupations,
all that goes by the name of play, into instruments for my purpose,
and therefore transform play into work. This work will be education
in the true sense of the term.” His great theory was idealistic—he
believed in the unity of the universe, in the essential harmony of
the world. It was the duty of the teacher to fit the child for his
place in human society. This could be best done if the child was taken
at a very early age and prepared for life in an ordinary school. The
kindergarten, or child-garden, is thus a school where a child learns
social life, where his play is systematized and his activities are
directed. The average course of study takes hold of the child when
he is six years of age; the kindergarten usually fills in the two
preceding years. As an educational institution, the kindergarten has
met with little public support in Europe, although in Paris there are
a number of “maternal schools,” which correspond closely to Froebel’s
plan. In the United States, Miss Elizabeth Peabody became the first
apostle of the movement. The idea of caring for the children below the
regular school-age won instant favor, and in a number of large cities
kindergartens were opened under private auspices. As their success
became clearer and more positive, they were taken under the control of
the public. In 1896–97, the report of the United States Commissioner
of Education shows that there were 1077 kindergartens in the United
States connected with the public-school systems of cities having
more than 4000 population, with an enrollment of 81,916 pupils. The
International Kindergarten Union, formed for the purpose of “gathering
and disseminating knowledge of the kindergarten movement throughout the
world,” has aided greatly in stimulating an intelligent interest in
Froebel’s ideals in America.

None of the great German philosophers has been honored with a more
loyal cult than Johann Friedrich Herbart (1775–1841), who directed
general attention to the necessity of studying the principles
of education. In his writings and lectures while professor at
the University of Göttingen, Herbart started an inquiry into the
theoretical basis of instruction. He found the final aim of all
education to centre in the formation of moral character, while the
keystone of instruction is interest. “The final aim of instruction is
morality. But the nearer aim which instruction in particular must see
before itself in order to reach the final one, is many-sidedness of
interest.” Herbart’s influence in arousing and directing thought has
been most felt in Germany, but in America his name has been taken by
one of the most active educational associations, “The National Herbart
Society.”

[Illustration: PESTALOZZI.

(The Perry Pictures. Copyright, 1898, by E. A. Perry, Malden, Mass.)]

Next to Germany in its list of great educational thinkers must
come England. At the beginning of this century there were no
“public schools” in England, in the American sense of the term.
The great preparatory schools,—Eton, Rugby, Harrow, Winchester,
etc.,—although called “public” by the English, were in reality endowed
boarding-schools, where as a rule only the children of the rich could
be found. General education was cared for by the village schools under
the direction of the vicar of the parish, and usually presided over
by elderly dames with varied degrees of attainments. At the end of
the eighteenth century, the work of Andrew Bell and Joseph Lancaster
began to arouse some interest. Working independently, the one in India
and the other in London, both developed the same method of providing
general instruction at a minimum of cost, by using the more advanced
pupils to instruct the beginners. “By the aid of monitors,” said
Lancaster, “one master can teach a thousand boys.” In 1798, Lancaster
opened the first English school of this kind in Southwark, London,
placing this inscription over the door: “All that will may send their
children and have them educated freely, and those that do not wish to
have education for nothing may pay for it, if they please.” In 1808,
the Royal Lancasterian Society was organized, to agitate for more
schools; and although its name was changed, in 1814, to British and
Foreign School Society, its work has continued down to the present
time. In 1818, Lancaster came to America, and was at once placed in
general charge of the public schools of Philadelphia. He was made
principal of a model school for training teachers, which is believed
to have been the first attempt at a normal school in America. After
extensive agitation in New York, in Canada, where in 1829 he received
an appropriation from the legislature to enable him to start his
monitorial schools, and even in South America, Lancaster’s work was
done.

Probably the greatest teacher of the century in England was Thomas
Arnold, whose character will long live in literature through the loving
portraiture of his pupils. While contributing little of importance
to the science of pedagogy, he was yet able to work a revolution in
the general conception of teacher and pupil, and their relations to
each other. He insisted that his teachers must continue their studies
after they had secured positions, and so raised professional ideals.
“The pupil,” said he, “must drink from the running fountain, and not
from the stagnant pool.” His sympathy gave him rare power to mould the
character of boys. He trusted his boys and they became worthy of it.
“It is a shame to tell Arnold a lie! He always believes one,”—was the
common saying. As a consequence, there went out from Rugby School from
1827 to 1842, the years of Arnold’s headmastership, a group of clean,
healthy, whole-souled boys, well fitted to become leaders in English
life.

Many contributions have been made to the literature of pedagogy during
the century, but there is none that has attracted more attention or
stimulated more earnest discussion than Herbert Spencer’s “Education.”
In the first chapter of his book, Spencer asks the question which
aroused the educational world,—“What knowledge is of most worth?” It
at once directed inquiry into the very heart of educational theory. The
course of study, the order in which subjects should be considered, the
time to be given to each,—all these problems were vitally concerned
with the answer to this question. Mr. Spencer’s solution won instant
favor: “How to live,” said he, “that is the essential question for
us.... And this, being the great thing needful for us to learn, is,
by consequence, the great thing which education has to teach. To
prepare us for _complete_ living is the function which education has
to discharge.” This point of view led to the accenting of useful
and practical subjects. The human body should be studied,—this is
necessary to fulfill the first law of nature, self-preservation. The
natural sciences should be an essential part of education: this is
necessary for our acquaintance with the world in which we must live
and work. History and social science should be studied: that each one
may become fully in touch with the society in which he forms a unit.
Naturally, little time would be left for branches that were æsthetic or
cultural, and so Spencer would have the student give but his surplus
time to these. But the important thing was that he should know himself,
his world, and his society, so that he would be fitted to do his work
in the most complete way. His practical influence upon education
is best seen in the great increase of appreciation for the natural
sciences, which has led to the introduction of nature observation and
study, even in the most elementary schools.

[Illustration: FROEBEL, FOUNDER OF KINDERGARTENS.

(The Perry Pictures. Copyright, 1898, by E. A. Perry, Malden, Mass.)]

In America there have been important contributions to educational
theory during the century. There has been a perfect flood of
educational books, pamphlets, and periodicals, whose merit is so great
as to extort even reluctant admiration from foreign critics. While
there has been much unevenness in quality, yet Americans have no reason
to feel ashamed of their contribution to pedagogical literature. The
best work has been done in the discussion of specific questions, rather
than in an elaboration of general ideals. Administration, with its
manifold problems, has appealed strongly to the American genius; and
consequently the greatest names of the century are those of men who
have devoted themselves to some practical work, the ideals and details
of which they have thoroughly mastered, and so have left enduring
monuments of their lives’ work.

[Illustration: DR. THOMAS ARNOLD, OF RUGBY, ENGLAND.

(Courtesy of The School Journal, New York.)]

The great achievement of the century in the United States has been the
establishment of a system of free and public schools. Like most of the
nation’s intellectual impulses, this spirit seems to have come from New
England. There, the democratic ideals of the people led to an early
appreciation of the necessity for universal education. There can be
little doubt that it was from the Puritan settlements in Massachusetts
that the original impulse toward universal education came. Thus, in
1647, the Colonial Assembly required that each town containing one
hundred families should establish a grammar school to prepare youths
for the university. During colonial times more and more schools were
steadily established. But the movement, which was zealously supported
in New England and encouraged in the Middle States, especially by
the Friends, met with opposition in the South, where education was
considered a family duty, and not within the province of the State.
Whatever, therefore, was accomplished in an educational line prior to
the Revolution depended upon the spirit of the individual colonies;
consequently, there was the widest possible divergence in the policies
and methods of different localities.

[Illustration: AN OLD LOG SCHOOLHOUSE.]

But as soon as the Revolution had been accomplished, and independence
had become a fact, a renewed interest in general education was evident.
It is exceedingly interesting to watch the development of the point
of view that free schools were a necessity for the existence of the
republic, and hence must be established by the State. The early
fathers of the nation were not slow to recognize this. In the words of
Franklin, “A Bible and newspaper in every house, a good school in every
district—all studied and appreciated as they merit—are the principal
support of virtue, morality, and civil liberty.” “In proportion
as the structure of a government gives force to public opinion,”
said Washington, “it is necessary that public opinion should be
enlightened.” And Jefferson, with his broad philosophical appreciation
of democracy, started the battle against the ideas of Governor
Berkeley, of Virginia, when, in 1779, he introduced into the General
Assembly of Virginia a bill providing for the establishment of schools
“for the free training of all free children, male and female.”

The half century from 1790 to 1840 is the period of the battle for
free public schools. It was a hard fight, complicated in many States
by local questions and conditions that rendered success almost
hopeless. Some opposed from the old point of view that education was
an individual matter,—each should get for himself just so much as
was possible. Others raised the objection of cost,—if taxation was
proposed, was it right to take money from one group to educate the
children of another? Religious disputes hindered progress,—many of
the denominations had founded sectarian schools, and were unwilling to
see them replaced by public schools, where no creed would be taught.
Especially, in some States, as in Pennsylvania, where Swede, German,
Scotch, Irish, and English lived side by side, did the race problem
enter as a perplexing element. Should any language other than English
be taught? What respect should be given to the traditions and customs
of each race-group? Moreover, when the conservatism began to yield to
progress, it compromised with great reluctance. At first, provision was
made whereby the children of the poor should have their school fees
paid by the State. Then public schools were started exclusively for the
poor, which were branded with the stigma of “pauper schools.” But these
difficulties only served to increase the ardor of the public-school
advocates, and at length their success was complete.

Some episodes of the struggle deserve special mention. Horace Mann
(1796–1859) has been called the St. Paul of education in America.
In 1837, the State Board of Education was created in Massachusetts,
and Horace Mann was appointed its first secretary. For twelve years
he labored with unflagging energy to build up the public interest
in education. By speech and by pen, he awakened in his State an
appreciation of the value of the public school system that has never
since decayed. He established on an enduring basis the business side
of education in the State, by systematizing the school funds. The
personal sacrifice was enormous. He addressed public meetings all
over the country. When he found that no arrangements had been made at
Pittsfield to prepare the schoolhouse for his meeting, Horace Mann and
Governor Briggs themselves swept out the building and set it in order.
One of his first interests was the provision of good teachers. In
order to spur the Assembly to its duty, he begged from his friends the
sum of $10,000, which, with an equal sum appropriated from the state
treasury, was used in the establishment of the Massachusetts normal
schools at Lexington and Barre (1839). Outside of his administrative
work, his fame must rest upon his stanch advocacy of the principle of
“the obligation of a State, on the great principles of natural law and
natural equity, to maintain free schools for the universal education of
its people.”

In Pennsylvania, the hero of the battle for free schools was Thaddeus
Stevens. In 1834, a law was passed by the legislature establishing a
state system, and abolishing the distinction between rich and poor
which had been noticed in the old pauper schools. Two years later,
a determined effort was made by the combined forces of ignorance,
prejudice, and caste, to repeal the act of 1834. Nothing but the
stanchness of Governor Wolf and the power exerted by the eloquence of
the “Old Commoner” saved free schools for the Keystone State, and so
established the system which to-day receives more direct aid from the
state treasury than in any other State of the Union.

West of the Alleghanies, the interest in popular education has always
been deep and thorough. Settled in large measure by the steady sons of
New England, education found there a most fertile soil. Moreover, by
the wise foresight of Congress, provision was made for school funds
in a most satisfactory way. The Ordinance of 1787, which organized
the territory north of the Ohio River, contained a provision that
one section of land in each township should be devoted to public
education. If this grant, which was originally suggested by Jefferson,
had been carefully watched, it would have been sufficient to endow
the public schools of many Western States. The national government
gave to education in the first hundred years of its history nearly
eighty million acres of public lands, but these grants were not always
conserved with sufficient care. In 1896–97 the total revenue of the
school systems in the United States was $188,641,243, of which less
than five per cent was from state school funds or rent of school
lands, while over eighty-six per cent was derived from state and local
taxation.

Some little conception of the immensity of the common-school system in
the United States may be obtained from the following statistics, taken
from the Report of the Commissioner of Education for 1896–97.

COMMON-SCHOOL STATISTICS OF THE UNITED STATES (NOT INCLUDING PRIVATE
SCHOOLS, COLLEGES, OR UNIVERSITIES).

1870–71 1896–97
I.—General Statistics. Approximate

Total population 39,500,500 71,374,142
Number of persons 5 to 18 years of age 12,305,600 21,082,472
Number of different pupils enrolled
on the school registers 7,561,582 14,652,492
Per cent of total population enrolled 19.14 20.53
Average daily attendance 4,545,317 10,089,620
Average length of school term (days) 132.1 140.4
Male teachers 90,293 131,386
Female teachers 129,932 271,947
------------ ------------
Whole number of teachers 220,225 403,333
Per cent of male teachers 41.0 32.6
Average monthly wages of teachers:
Males (averaged from the
statistics of 43 States) $44.62
Females (averaged from the
statistics of 43 States) $38.38
Number of schoolhouses 132,119 246,828
Value of school property $143,818,703 $469,069,086

II.—Financial Statistics.

Receipts:
Income from permanent funds $7,846,648
From state taxes 35,062,533
From local taxes 127,960,761
From all other sources 17,771,301
------------
Total receipts 188,641,243
Expenditures:
For sites, buildings, furniture,
libraries, and apparatus $31,903,245
For salaries of teachers and
superintendents $42,580,853 119,303,542
For all other purposes 36,113,815
------------
Total expenditures $69,107,612 $187,320,602
Expenditure per capita of population. 1.75 2.62
Total expenditure per pupil 15.20 18.57

To these grand totals must be added the million and more in attendance
at private schools throughout the country, and the rapidly increasing
number (now 217,763) of those who receive higher instruction, in
universities and professional and normal schools. This makes for
the United States a grand total of 16,255,093 pupils and students
of all grades in public and private schools. The growth during the
last generation has been most marked. The statistical table gives an
opportunity for comparison with the year 1870–71,—the span of a
generation,—and it has been estimated that within this period the
average total amount of schooling has increased from 2.91 years to 4.28
years. In other words, the amount of education which each one felt able
to afford has increased almost one half. Such is the magnificent result
which has grown out of the isolated village schools of our New England
ancestors, fostered by the democratic desire for intelligence found all
over the country.

[Illustration: SCHOOLHOUSE, SLEEPY HOLLOW, N. Y.

(Courtesy of The School Journal, New York.)]

Equally great has been the change in the spirit of the school. In the
early days the schools were very crude. Population was scattered, and
since the children could not go as far to school as their elders did to
church, the number of schoolhouses was very great. They were usually
put up by the people of the neighborhood with little pretense at
adornment. The average schoolhouse was located either at a fork in the
roads or on an elevation, where it shared, with the church, the honor
of conspicuousness. We give a picture of Old Sleepy Hollow Schoolhouse,
made famous by Washington Irving’s elaborate description of Ichabod
Crane, its ruler in the colonial days. But a structure of this kind is
luxurious compared with the hardships of more sparsely settled regions.
From Wickersham’s “History of Education in Pennsylvania” the following
description is culled: “The pioneer schoolhouse was built of logs,
sixteen by twenty feet, seven feet to the ceiling, daubed with mud
inside and out, a mud and stick chimney in the north end, and in the
west a log was left out, and the opening covered with oiled paper to
admit light; holes were bored in the logs and pins driven in, on which
to nail a long board for a writing-table, and slabs with legs answered
for seats. The early schoolhouses were generally situated near the
roadside or cross-roads, being without playground, shade-trees, or
apparatus.”

Here the master kept his country school for a term of from six to
twelve weeks. In the winter time the pupils were almost frozen, and
there were other dangers which the hardy lad of those days had to
encounter. Nevertheless, rude, uncomfortable, and inadequate as they
were, it was here that our forefathers obtained their scanty schooling.
The three R’s, Readin’, Ritin’, and ‘Rithmetic, formed the basis of
the course of study. Methods were very simple. Much of the early
instruction was religious in its trend, and the child was expected to
use books which would teach moral lessons. Church books, containing
creeds and hymns and catechisms, might be used in the school for
study. Then there were the primers or books to teach the A B C. The
famous “New England Primer” was published in the latter part of the
seventeenth century. Later editions contained rhyming couplets upon
each letter of the alphabet, illustrated with such imagery as the art
would allow. A page from the “Child’s Guide,” published in London in
1762, is shown on page 527. Its verses were easily memorized, and
sometimes gave a basis for a spelling lesson. There were no graded
readers until this century.

Writing in some neighborhoods was taught only to boys, on the general
ground that it was an unnecessary accomplishment for the sex which
never engaged in business. Ink was home-made from bruised nutgalls
placed in a bottle with water and rusty nails. The writing was done
with a quill pen, and one of the foremost duties of the old-fashioned
pedagogue was to make and mend pens.

[Illustration: INTERIOR OF SCHOOLROOM, SLEEPY HOLLOW, N. Y.

(Courtesy of The School Journal, New York.)]

The master set the copies by writing a lesson which was to be imitated
by the pupils. There was no set style, but usually the teacher wrote
a bold, legible hand which in time was acquired with a fair degree of
success. Arithmetic was taught without text-books. Sums were given
out by the master and worked out on paper on the desk. Nothing but the
more rudimentary principles was taught, and the higher branches of
algebra and geometry were unknown in the public schools of this time.
Spelling was one of the favorite studies. It gave free scope for the
memory, and provided an opportunity for one of those public exhibitions
in which Americans have always delighted. “Spelling on the book,” says
Wickersham, “was taught by attempting to lead the pupil to give the
names of syllables and words by naming the letters of which they are
composed. The first lesson consisted of combinations of a word with
one or more consonants, arranged so that a kind of rhyme aided the
pronunciation, as _ab_, _eb_, _ib_, etc.” ... “Spelling off the book”
consisted in naming the letters of words pronounced for that purpose.
But the chief enjoyment of spelling came from the old-fashioned
contests, or “spelling-bees.” Sometimes it was to discover the best
speller of the district; again, one district might be pitted against
another. The spellers would be arranged in two rows. The first word
would be given to the first speller on one side, the next to his rival,
the third to his comrade, and so on. If one missed a word, he at once
took his seat; presently the contest would narrow down to a few, until
at last all would have missed save one, and he or she became the
champion speller.

The teachers of the time formed a group of varied attainments, and
oftentimes with little professional enthusiasm. Teaching has always
suffered from the fact that a great number of young men enter upon
its practice, who use it merely as a stepping-stone to some other and
more attractive pursuit. The number of those who have taught a few
terms, in order to save money for a college, law, or medical course
is legion; and this fact has laid the profession open to the reproach
that only the unambitious and the unalert follow it permanently. In
the early days of our country’s history, this stigma was intensified
by the number of “itinerant schoolmasters,” men who wandered from
place to place, teaching a term in one village and then moving to
the next,—“odd in dress, eccentric in manners, and oftentimes
intemperate.” Their work was simple in its nature; they were to
keep order and to teach the rudiments. Their methods in the latter
have already been referred to; for the former, they relied, almost
universally, upon the unsparing use of the rod.

The wisdom of the practice of flogging has only been questioned in
the latter part of this century. In the early days it was the one
recognized punishment, even for students whose maturity and attainments
would suggest an appeal to reason. With this mode of punishment was
associated a more or less ingenious series of devices, such as the
dunce-block, the fools’ cap, etc., all calculated to bring the offender
into ridicule, but utterly destructive of that good feeling between
teacher and pupil, upon which so much stress is laid to-day.

In the course of the century the old-fashioned school has either passed
away or else has been modified materially. To-day it is to be found in
only sparsely settled districts, while in the cities and in the more
cultured neighborhoods one finds carefully planned systems of education
that show the fruits of the study and direction of some of the keenest
minds that our country has produced. While it is impossible in the
space of a single chapter to refer to _all_ the changes, yet some of
the most important will be considered.

[Illustration:

In _Adam’s_ Fall,
We sinned all.

This _Book_ attend,
Thy Life to mend.

The _Cat_ doth play,
And after slay.

The _Dog_ doth bite
A Thief at Night.

An _Eagle’s_ flight
Is out of sight.

The Idle _Fool_,
Is whipt at School.

As runs the _Glass_,
Man’s Life doth pass.

My Book and _Heart_
Shall never part.

_Jesus_ did dye,
For thee and I.

_King Charles_ the Good,
No man of Blood.

The _Lyon_ bold,
The _Lamb_ doth hold.

The _Moon_ gives Light,
In time of Night.

_Nightingales_ sing,
In time of Spring.

The Royal _Oak_ our King did save,
From fatal stroke of Rebel Slave.

_Peter_ denies
His Lord, and cries.

_Queen Esther_ came in Royal State,
To save the Jews from dismal fate.

_Rachel_ doth mourn
For her first-born.

_Samuel_ anoints
Whom God appoints.

_Time_ cuts down all,
Both great and small.

_Uriah’s_ beauteous Wife,
Made David seek his Life.

_Whales_ in the Sea
God’s voice obey.

_Xerxes_ the Great did die,
And so must you and I.

_Youth’s_ forward slips
Death soonest nips.

_Zaccheus_, he
Did climb the Tree,
His Lord to see.

CHILD’S GUIDE.

(_Courtesy of J. Harold Wickersham._)]

Foremost in real importance come the changes in the course of study—in
the list of subjects which the well-educated young man may be expected
to have mastered. One hundred years ago the average child would have
gone to the village school for the three “R’s” with, maybe, a little
training in geography and parsing. If a college career was open to
him, he would then go to an academy, usually a private institution,
for his introduction to the classics, Latin and Greek, and to algebra.
While instruction was given in other branches, yet these formed the
backbone of the course. The average age of admission to college was
considerably less than it is at present. In the ordinary college there
was a required course of study, in which Latin, Greek, and higher
mathematics played the most conspicuous part. The scientific studies
were counted less educative, and were usually rather poorly taught.
Literature, history, and philosophy were sometimes included in the
college curriculum, and in many ways the course of study was modeled to
suit the preferences and abilities of the different teachers. Nowadays
this is all changed. In the United States a graded school system has
been created, that is, a complete course of study has been worked
out, whereby certain studies are specified as suited for each year of
the school life. This is not the same for all parts of the country,
for the American school system, unlike that in Germany and France, is
not national in its organization. The authority over the schools is
vested in the individual States, and as a consequence each State shows
peculiarities in course of study, in laws, and in methods that make
the whole seem chaotic. There is, however, more similarity than would
appear at first sight, and while what is asserted in general may not be
true of each particular locality, yet certain lines of development may
be clearly seen.

The schools of the country may be divided into three
groups,—elementary, secondary, and higher. The elementary schools
are built in some places upon the kindergarten; they are ordinarily
supposed to occupy the first eight or nine years of the child’s
school-life, and are classified as primary and grammar schools. During
that period the pupil studies a great variety of branches,—language
studies, reading, writing, spelling, and grammar; arithmetic,
geography, United States history, civil government, nature study,
physiology and hygiene, physical culture, vocal music, drawing and
manual training in boys’ schools, or sewing and cooking in girls’
schools. Several of these subjects have been introduced only within the
last few years. The tendency toward enriching the curriculum is quite
manifest to-day; it is based upon the fact that by far the larger part
of the pupils never enter the higher schools, since their education is
ended with the elementary schools, therefore it is thought desirable to
bring some of the higher subjects into the grammar school.

With the completion of this elementary course the pupil passes into the
secondary school. Earlier in the century this was ordinarily a private
academy, either conducted for profit or by a religious society. In
exceptional cases these schools were public; but as the benefits of
higher education were recognized more completely, the popularity of
these schools increased enormously. Public high schools were opened,
and success led to their rapid multiplication, until to-day they form
one of the most useful elements in our system, sending forth year by
year leaders of thought and moulders of opinion. Their course of study
has been the subject of much controversy. The old academy prepared
for the college; the new high school prepares for life; consequently
there ensued a breach between the high school and the college which
only now is being closed. The ordinary high-school course is four
years, and includes languages, Latin, French, German, and sometimes
Greek and Spanish; mathematics, algebra, geometry, trigonometry, and
sometimes analytical geometry and even astronomy; history, literature,
physical geography, physics, chemistry, biology, geology, drawing, and
occasionally political economy, ethics, and civics. It will be noticed
that subjects formerly taught only in the colleges have been brought
into the high-school curriculum. This again is due to the “enriching
process,” and is illustrative of the fact that for so many of its
students the high school is the crown of their education. The stress
laid upon nature study and the physical sciences, and the introduction
of modern languages, are among the most significant changes of the
century, as indicative of the desire to bring the schools in touch with
the conditions of practical life.

From the high school or academy, the student passes to the college or
university. Within the last decade an attempt has been made to give a
definite pedagogical content to each of these terms. A _college_ is an
institution where the liberal arts are studied for purposes of general
culture. A _university_, on the other hand, prepares a man for one
definite line of work, either professional or technical. Both confer
degrees upon those who have successfully completed their courses, but
those of the university (Ph. D., A. M., M. D., etc.) are of a higher
type than those of the college (A. B., Ph. B.). There were twenty-four
colleges in the United States in 1800. The six oldest were: Harvard,
established in 1687; William and Mary, 1693; Yale, 1701; Princeton,
1746; University of Pennsylvania, 1749; Columbia, 1754.

In 1896 there were 472 colleges and universities in the United States,
representing most of the States and Territories in the Union. Many of
these are entirely public, being supported by State appropriations;
some receive State aid; others were originally founded by private
endowment, but have become public in their management; some are
entirely private in both endowment and control. Most are non-sectarian,
but many require worship in accordance with the services of some
denomination. In general, all recognize their lofty function in society
and are anxious to discharge it properly. Originally aristocratic in
many ways,—prior to the Revolution some colleges classifying their
students in the catalogue according to the social rank of their
families,—they have become among the most popular institutions in the
educational world, largely because of the high worth of their graduates.

Universities, in the scientific sense of the term, did not exist prior
to 1800, except in the few medical and law schools and theological
seminaries. The American conception of the university has been very
largely moulded by the experience of Germany. The college does not
exist as a degree-conferring institution in Germany, but its place is
taken very largely by the _Gymnasium_. The German system comprises
three grades of schools: 1. _Volkschulen_ (primary schools), where
the elementary instruction is given. 2. _Gymnasia_ and _Real-Schulen_
(secondary schools), which provide a nine years’ course for the pupil,
usually covering the period from ten to nineteen years. The aim of
the first is to prepare for the university, while the _Real-Schulen_
fit their students for the ordinary business callings of life. 3.
Universities, in which the studies are arranged in four faculties;
theology, law, medicine, and philosophy. On account of the thoroughness
of the German teaching, many American students have gone to Germany for
their university course. A sincere effort has been made in America to
develop universities according to the German concept, with its detailed
study of particular topics based on a thorough general education. Johns
Hopkins University, Baltimore, opened in 1876, has done most along
these lines.

During the century a determined and successful effort has been made
to break down the old-fashioned college curriculum, with its absolute
and unvarying requirements from every student. Harvard University,
under the leadership of its brilliant executives, Thomas Hill and
especially Charles W. Eliot, has led the way by providing a series
of elective courses from which the student might select a sufficient
number to make up his roster. This has given scope to the exercise of
a freedom of choice that has been most wholesome in its effects upon
both the scholar and university. It has led to the neglect of the poor
courses and to the encouragement of the good ones; and it has promoted
individuality in the different students to a marked degree. The success
of the elective system, and the development of post-graduate courses in
the university, taken in connection with the very great interest in all
the phases of higher education, constitute the chief lines of advance
during the century.

It is evident, then, that the student of to-day has a tremendous
advantage over his fellow of one hundred years ago in the subjects
which he may study. The courses have been enriched, instruction has
been systematized, new subjects, more closely allied with popular
needs, have been developed. But a gain which transcends in importance
even these alterations in the curriculum, is that which has come
through the teacher.

We have seen that the teacher of our forefathers was a man of doubtful
attainments and uncertain character, and while there were golden
exceptions to any general criticism, yet it is beyond question that as
a class the teachership was not well esteemed. As a rule, there was no
stable salary,—the teachers “boarded around” at the homes of their
pupils or received payment in produce from the farmers. At the school
he was janitor as well as educator. Outside of New England, there was
little intelligent supervision of his efforts, and, on the whole,
very little effective home coöperation. Within the century, however,
there has been a marked increase in the esteem in which the teacher is
held, and in the popular appreciation of his work. Moreover, to-day,
the teacher better deserves esteem and respect. While the profession
still contains a vast floating element who look forward to a future
in other lines of work, yet on the whole its members possess a keen
interest in their work and a desire for professional improvement. A
most powerful means toward this end has been found in the various
teachers’ organizations. The Institute, with its annual assembly of all
teachers within a given district, who for two or three days discuss
school questions and listen to lectures upon educational topics, has
been introduced throughout the whole country with great success. The
teachers in the various States have organized State associations, and
there are innumerable voluntary organizations, whose meetings give
each teacher an opportunity for that free contact with others of his
own kind that is so helpful and so suggestive.

[Illustration: DR. CHARLES WILLIAM ELIOT, PRESIDENT OF HARVARD
UNIVERSITY.

(Courtesy of The School Journal, New York.)]

The oldest educational association in America, maybe in the world,
is the American Institute of Instruction, organized in 1830. During
its nearly seventy years of life it has been a vast inspiration to
thousands of teachers. It has drawn its support chiefly from the
New England States and recently from Canada, but its influence is
widespread. Annual meetings have been held regularly. Among its
leading spirits, it has numbered such men as W. E. Sheldon, Francis
Wayland, Henry Barnard, etc. Out of the success of the various State
associations, and perhaps suggested by the necessity for more general
action, grew the National Educational Association, founded in 1857,
with the objects “to elevate the character and advance the interest
of the profession of teaching and to promote the cause of popular
education in the United States.” Its first president was Zalmon
Richards, and his successors have been the foremost educators of the
country, including James P. Wickersham, Emerson E. White, William T.
Harris, Albert G. Lane, Nicholas Murray Butler, Charles R. Skinner,
etc. Its membership has grown from 80 in 1857 to 10,654 (1898), and
it has been estimated that some of its conventions have brought
twenty-five thousand people in their train. In spirit it is thoroughly
national, meeting in every section of the country in turn, so helping
to promote uniformity in school ideas. As the Association grew larger,
and its work became more complicated, its organization became involved.
To-day it consists of seventeen departments, each of which devotes
itself to one phase of education, usually reporting at the annual
meeting.

Since 1892 the National Educational Association (N. E. A., as it
is popularly called) has appointed three committees to investigate
special lines of work in separate departments of the school system.
The Committee of Ten, whose chairman, Charles W. Eliot, was the
distinguished President of Harvard University, submitted a most useful
report in 1893 on Secondary School Studies. In 1895 the Committee of
Fifteen, of which Superintendent Wm. H. Maxwell was chairman, then of
Brooklyn but since chosen to be the first Superintendent of Schools of
“Greater New York,” made a valuable report on elementary education,
including reports of sub-committees on the Training of Teachers,
Correlation of Studies, and the Organization of City School Systems.
In 1897 came the report of the Committee of Twelve on Rural Schools,
Superintendent Henry Sabin, of Iowa, as chairman. These documents
have been epoch-making; they have accumulated a mass of trustworthy
information; they have procured opinion upon a wide variety of topics,
and their influence upon the general systematization of the school
system has been enormous. Their additional value lies in the fact
that they have been prepared by teachers who thoroughly understood
the topics which were being considered, and they have furnished to
educators generally that consensus of professional opinion which has
been so badly needed in America.

In this work of gathering and disseminating information, a most potent
part has been played by the national government. The limitations of
the Constitution left education as a State interest, to be worked
out by each commonwealth as it should think best. There had always
been a general desire among teachers for some national organization,
and at last, after the Civil War, Congress established a department,
and then later made a Bureau of Education in the Department of the
Interior. In 1867 Hon. Henry Barnard was appointed the first United
States Commissioner of Education. A wiser choice could not have been
made. Dr. Barnard’s career in education covers a period from 1830, when
he was appointed Secretary of the Board of School Commissioners in
Connecticut, down to the present. Beyond question, his greatest work
has been the organization of the National Bureau of Education, which
to-day is a grand educational clearing-house, sending forth in its
excellent reports an account of ideas and work of each State to the
others. Its high efficiency has been due, in a large measure, to the
character of its commissioners: Henry Barnard, from 1867 to 1870; John
Eaton, 1870–1886; Nathaniel H. R. Dawson, 1886–1889; William T. Harris,
1889 to date. The present incumbent has had the satisfaction of the
knowledge that his position has been removed from the list of partisan
appointments. By his tactful prudence and genuine scholarship, Dr.
Harris has brought his office into touch with every good educational
work for a decade, and has made his name a synonym for genial wisdom
throughout the whole country.

The teacher has been aided in his work by his professional
associations. It is, moreover, true that to-day the teacher enters
upon his work better equipped for his duties. The normal-school system
has spread over the whole country, and every year thousands of young
men and women are sent forth with a preparation that fifty years ago
was not even dreamed of. Since the teacher better deserves respect,
he has commanded it the more readily. Gradually the barbarisms of
the schoolroom have disappeared. As the sympathy with education
increased, the necessity for excessive flogging passed away. To-day
there is a wide variety in opinion as to the efficiency of this mode of
discipline. In one State, New Jersey, corporal punishment in schools
is forbidden by law; but in most of the others it is permitted in
special cases, as a general part of the teacher’s power when _in loco
parentis_. The teacher is now paid a regular salary, but unfortunately
it is the lowest paid in any profession for which formal preparation
is required. In 1896–97 the average monthly wages of teachers was, for
males, $44.62, and for females, $38.38. In comparison with the standard
of life throughout the country, this is poor pay. Superintendent
N. C. Schaeffer, of Pennsylvania, in a recent annual report, states
that “one superintendent found that there were teachers in his county
teaching for four dollars less per year than it cost the county on
an average to keep one pauper.” This is an exceptional case, but it
illustrates the general truth.

[Illustration: WILLIAM T. HARRIS.

(The Perry Pictures, Copyright, 1898, by E. A. Perry, Malden, Mass.)]

One consequence of this low pay has been to accent a tendency which
is fast removing education from the list of those professions in
which men will engage. From 1870–71 to 1896–97 the percentage of male
teachers decreased from 41.0 to 32.6; especially is this true in the
older States. This is in striking contrast with one hundred years ago,
when, except in infant schools, teachers were almost universally of
the male sex. A variety of causes may be given for this change. The
preëminent fitness of women for guiding the child during certain ages
is acknowledged. Again, the decline of the rod and the introduction of
a happy sympathy between teacher and pupil have helped the tendency.

But of all the forces which have contributed to this change, none
has been more potent than the great increase of opportunities for
the higher education of women. At the beginning of the century the
United States was not behind European nations in its provision for the
education of young women. No one thought of making anything like the
same provision for both sexes. Women were refused admission to the
colleges, and were obliged to content themselves with an elementary
education or else meet the expense of private tutorage. Gradually, in
protest against this state of things, girls’ seminaries were opened
and girls’ high schools were established in the large cities. The idea
of a seminary, “which should be to young women what the college is to
young men,” was first given definite shape by Mary Lyon, who collected
funds for that purpose, and in 1837, two hundred years after Harvard,
Mount Holyoke Female Seminary was opened. Its success was complete; it
offered the regular English and classical course, and its graduates
entered generally into the teaching profession. Presently, colleges for
women were incorporated, of which to-day the best known are Vassar,
Wellesley, Smith, and Bryn Mawr. As the demand for the higher education
of women increased, presently it was queried, why may not the two sexes
be trained in the same institution? Is there any real necessity for a
duplication of plants with the consequent weakening of resources? The
West has advanced far beyond the East toward co-education. Oberlin
College, founded in 1833, opened its doors to both sexes from the
first, and most of the institutions that derive their spirit from the
West have followed the same plan. As a result, some of the city systems
are trying co-education in their high schools and elementary grades,
and thus far, while there are many opponents, the general verdict is
favorable.

[Illustration: IDEAL SCHOOLHOUSE AND GROUNDS. (Courtesy of Agricultural
Department, Cornell University.)]

But the women were not content with a general collegiate training or
a normal course that fitted only for teaching. Within recent years
they have entered into the other professions with a keen enthusiasm.
They are allowed, in a few institutions, to take theological courses
fitting for the ministry. The first woman physician was graduated in
1849 from the school at Geneva, N. Y.; since that time special medical
schools for women have been opened and some colleges have decided to
admit women on the same terms as the other sex. In most law schools,
women may be admitted, and in several States there are women practicing
at the bar. While the influence of tradition has been strong, yet there
is to-day no reason why an American woman should not receive as full an
education and as complete a training as her brother.

[Illustration: SUGGESTION FOR PLANTING A SCHOOLGROUND.

(Courtesy of Agricultural Department Cornell University.)]

In considering the changes in school-life, the improvement in buildings
and equipment must not be overlooked. With the appreciation of the
value of education, there has come an attention to the environment of
the pupil that manifests itself in the provision of text-books, in
the erection of larger and better ventilated buildings, and in the
adornment of school grounds. School architecture, especially where
populations are dense, has become an important science, involving
problems of light, heat, ventilation, etc., together with questions
of furniture, fire-proof construction and playgrounds. There was a
time when the most interest was aroused by the exterior, that the
school might be an adornment to its neighborhood. To-day the important
problems of arrangement receive the most attention, and deservedly
so. We give two suggestive pictures of modern schoolhouses. Professor
Liberty H. Bailey of Cornell University, in a pamphlet which has been
extensively circulated, has advocated a judicious arrangement of
shrubbery around a schoolhouse, as space permitted, with a view to the
elimination of all bare and cheerless features from the landscape. This
is especially adapted to country districts. As a comparison, the new
Central High School of Philadelphia is given as one of the best types
of a complete city schoolhouse. It has been erected at a total cost of
over one million dollars.

The furnishing of a school has undergone characteristic development.
The hard bench, upon which our forefathers sat, has in a large measure
disappeared, and in its place has come a variety of desks patterned
with chairs fitted to each curve of the back, etc. Blackboards came
into general use about the middle of the century. In certain studies,
maps, charts, models, etc., seem indispensable, and the modern
schoolroom contains all these. Moreover, as soon as science teaching
had won a place in the curriculum, the cry went up for laboratories,
that a higher grade of work might be done with the more advanced pupil.
It is rather a singular fact that in many places the public high
school led in this demand, rather than the more conservative college.
To-day no high school would count itself able to do its work without
one or more laboratories where each pupil might work for himself. In
the new high school of Philadelphia there are physical, chemical, and
biological laboratories, as well as a completely equipped astronomical
observatory.

Text-books were just coming into use at the close of the eighteenth
century. The “Child’s Guide” was being superseded by such works as Noah
Webster’s Spelling Book, Grammar, and Reader (1792). Within a few years
came Lindley Murray’s “English Grammar,” the work of a Quaker merchant
who wrote his famous text-book primarily for a young ladies’ school
in his immediate neighborhood. The instant success of these books
demonstrated what a need there was for such a class of literature.
The writing and publication of text-books has become one of the most
flourishing industries of the country. On account of hard usage, a
text-book does not last more than a few years, and this gives continual
opportunity for a new book more nearly up to date than its predecessor.

Within recent years, less stress has been laid on the text-book,
and its influence is being minimized. In the elementary schools the
teacher explains the lesson, and in the higher schools the professor
lectures upon his subject. Consequently, the text-book is relatively
less important. This does not mean that less reading is being done,
but it does mean that the reading covers a wider ground. Particularly
is this true where libraries have been established. The public library
system is a most valuable auxiliary to the school system, and is fast
becoming indispensable. This is one of the great advantages which city
pupils have over those whose home is in the country, and it will lead
in the end to district libraries. In some States, as in New York, a
successful effort has been made to inaugurate a system of traveling
libraries, whereby a case of fifty or one hundred volumes, relating to
a particular topic, will be lent for a time to any circle of readers.
Massachusetts has best developed a library system, since there are
but nine towns in the State that have not free libraries. The growth
of the universities has led to the accumulation of great collections
for special research and study. In 1800 there were but eleven college
libraries in America worth mentioning; to-day there are almost five
hundred, of which the largest, Harvard, contains a half million
volumes. Libraries are of use, not only for pupils, but also for adults
as well. They have aided materially in solving the great question of
adult education.

[Illustration: THE NEW HIGH SCHOOL, PHILADELPHIA.]

In the New England towns of the middle part of the century, the lyceum
lecture was exceedingly popular. University extension has recently
come to the front as the latest form of the lyceum system. The idea of
lectures to the people by university teachers came from England, where
it was suggested just after an extension of the suffrage had attached
a new value to the education of adults. Societies for the extension of
university teaching have been formed in Oxford, Cambridge, and London.
Their methods are on the whole identical,—university men are sent to
town or village centres to give a course of lectures upon some general
topic; after each lecture a voluntary class is held where questions may
be asked and answered; at the conclusion of the course an examination
based upon the course and collateral reading is given to those who care
to take it; and sometimes a certificate or testimonial may be given.
The method has been transplanted to America and generally adopted by
the universities, with greatest success, perhaps, in the Middle States,
where the American Society for the Extension of University Teaching has
organized the field. During the period 1890–99, 862 courses of lectures
were given under the auspices of the American Society to audiences
aggregating 952,068. Another movement of equal importance is that
done by the Chatauqua Literary and Scientific Circle, which prepares
lists of books for home reading, with a view to encouraging system
in one’s use of spare time. Perhaps the most interesting public work
for adults is being done in New York city, where a lecture department
has been organized by the Board of Education, by which free lectures
are given in schoolhouses to the people. In 1898, 1866 lectures were
given to 698,200 people, and the president of New York’s School Board
has declared that “these lectures have contributed more than any other
agency to the distribution of general intelligence among the masses.”
These forces have supplemented very well the work that is being done
by the public night schools, which are established in most large
cities, with a view to providing elementary, and sometimes technical,
instruction to those adults who care for it.

[Illustration: DR. WM. H. MAXWELL, SUPERINTENDENT “GREATER NEW YORK”
SCHOOLS.

(Courtesy of The School Journal, New York.)]

No educational question has aroused more interest in business circles
than the problem how to train best those who will devote themselves
to a commercial life. This has become a live question recently to the
American people. With improved processes in manufacture, the power of
production has grown far beyond the consumption of our own people.
Consequently America is competing with the great industrial nations
of Europe for a control of the markets of the world. As soon as this
competition became evident, the need for a better trained class of
commercial leaders was felt. The example of Germany has had a great
influence upon other countries. There is a general conviction that
the leading position among commercial nations which Germany has won
for itself is due in large measure to the technical education given
to German artisans and the commercial education provided for business
men. For illustration, the German government has recently established
in Berlin a school where young men, preparing for business careers in
Asia, can learn Chinese, Japanese, Arabic, and Turkish. German youths
have been supplanting English young men, to an appreciable degree, in
the great commercial houses of London. As a consequence, there has been
a strong demand in America for the establishment of commercial high
schools,—public institutions in which German, French, and Spanish will
be taught, together with economics, industrial history, commercial
geography, public finance, social science, etc. These institutions
differ entirely from the business colleges, of which there were 342
in the United States in 1897, in that they are broader in scope and
content. The latter qualify a man to be a good clerk by teaching him
stenography, typewriting, bookkeeping, etc., but the former aim to give
him a broad, liberal education, enabling him to have an intelligent
comprehension of all matters which interest him in active business.
This movement is too recent to have borne much fruit, but in many
of the larger cities of America, as New York, Philadelphia, Boston,
Brooklyn, and Cleveland, commercial courses have been established in
connection with the regular high-school course; and in some of the
larger universities, as Pennsylvania, Chicago, Columbia, schools in
economics and politics have been created,—all with a view to equipping
a young man for an active business career. In view of the present
interest in this movement, more may be expected in the near future.

[Illustration: BOOKER T. WASHINGTON.]

The close of the Civil War brought the American people to a problem,
vast in its importance and intricate in its solution. The negro race
had had no opportunity for education under the institution of slavery.
But with their freedom came the necessity for creating a system of
schools which could be of special help to this new body of citizens.
The South has preferred generally that separate schools should be
provided for the two races. In the ante-bellum days, the wealthier
families usually sent their sons and daughters away from home to obtain
their education under better auspices than their own neighborhood could
afford. So when the war concluded, and there was but little sign of
public schools, a new system must be created, and at once. The first
work toward educating the negro was done by the national government,
through the schools opened by the Freedman’s Aid Society. The different
religious bodies throughout the country took a hand in the good work,
by establishing special missionary boards for work in the South.
Private benevolence lent substantial assistance. George Peabody, the
philanthropist, and John F. Slater, both founded trusts which they
richly endowed to aid in the establishment of schools in the Southern
section. But the greatest work was done through the awakening of the
people to the value of education, leading to liberal appropriations and
to a firm public support.

Within recent years, negro education has assumed a new and interesting
phase. Booker T. Washington, principal of the Tuskegee Normal and
Industrial Institute, Alabama, is the leading educator of the
Afro-Americans, and he has won his high place by the success which
has attended his efforts at industrial education. His school at
Tuskegee was started in 1881, and to-day contains over one thousand
students. While fully appreciating the value of an academic education,
Mr. Washington has felt that the first necessity for his people was
the knowledge that would earn a livelihood. As a consequence, the
industrial side of education has been accented; twenty-six different
trades or industries are in operation at Tuskegee, and one is taught
to each student of the Institute. As a consequence, its graduates have
gone forth into active life, well equipped to become bread-winners and
to fill a useful place in society.

The care of those who, from birth or by accident, do not possess
all the powers of a normal person, has aroused much interest during
the century. The deaf-mutes, the blind, and the mentally deficient,
have each had institutions created, where they are taught as much of
the knowledge of the world as is possible. The instruction of the
deaf and dumb proceeds along two lines. The manual or sign method of
conversation, based on gestures, was founded by Abbé de l’Epée in
1760; while about the same time Samuel Heinicke, a German, introduced
the oral method, by which the eye of the mute is trained to perform
the part of the ear, by learning the meaning of spoken words through
observation of the changes in the position of the vocal organs. Special
institutions for these classes abound in Europe and America, with
the difference that, in the former, they are generally private or
maintained by charity; whereas in the latter they are maintained by the
State. Rev. T. H. Gallaudet and his son, Dr. Edward M. Gallaudet, have
been the leaders in the instruction of deaf-mutes in the United States,
and have achieved a high degree of success.

The teaching of the blind is of equal value to education. Two methods
are generally followed; an alphabet of raised letters is employed in
some cases, or, and more generally in the United States, a system of
raised dots or points, which do not resemble the letter in form, but
are a kind of shorthand to the reader. In both methods, the sense of
touch takes the place of sight. In some cases, notably Laura Bridgman
and Helen Keller, the success has been so complete as to excite
universal wonder. Perhaps no institutions alleviate more human misery
than do the schools for the blind, by bringing world-ideas within the
limited horizon of this afflicted class.

Much also has been done for the training of idiots or those who are
mentally deficient. In 1848, the Massachusetts School for Idiots and
Feeble-Minded was opened, and other States followed with equally
generous provision. Within recent years, special schools have been
opened in connection with the school systems of large cities, so
that children who need individual care and watchfulness may receive
more attention than they could secure in the graded class-room. All
these tendencies are exceedingly hopeful, as indicative of society’s
recognition of her duty to those who cannot satisfactorily care for
themselves. Humanitarianism in education has been a powerful and
constant force during the whole of this century.

[Illustration: DR. E. BENJ. ANDREWS, SUPERINTENDENT OF SCHOOLS,
CHICAGO, ILL.]

It must not be forgotten that other agencies beside those established
by States have been contributing to education. The Sunday-school
movement is one of the great efforts of the century, to help in
training children by a voluntary organization. In 1781, Robert Raikes
employed some teachers for the poor children of Gloucester, in order
that their Sundays might be spent quietly and with profit. Presently,
as the number of Sunday-schools increased, men and women proffered
their services gratuitously. The teaching followed two general lines,
secular (reading, writing, etc.) and religious. The former was of
help, especially to children who were employed during the week. From
England, the movement came to the West. The American Sunday-school
Union was organized in 1824, and has ever since continued to stimulate
the establishment of more schools of this kind. In 1896, there were
132,697 Sunday-schools in the United States and 9097 in Canada, with
a total membership of 12,288,153 and 721,435 respectively, while it
has been computed that in the world the number of Sunday-schools was
246,658, with an enrollment of 24,919,313.

In European states, they have been solving the same problems as
in America. The importance of education once admitted, the next
problem is to secure the funds and develop the system.[5] Because of
administrative centralization, this has been far easier in Europe than
in America. The Minister of Education in France or Germany orders,
and his directions are carried out; the United States Commissioner
advises, and while his recommendations influence public opinion, yet
the latter method is by far the slower. As a consequence, the European
schools are more systematized and better organized than our own. Their
course of study differs widely in details from our own, and generally
shows more influence on the part of the pedagogical expert. Technical
and professional education has been developed to an exceedingly high
degree. England has had a peculiar problem to face, in determining
the relation between the church schools and the secular schools, and
has only solved it by maintaining both. Most European countries have
adopted the principle of compulsory education for children within
a certain age limit, and the same principle has been accepted in
thirty-two States in America. In general, it may be said that in the
changes in course of study, in equipment, in the teachership, etc.,
Europe and America have been working along parallel lines. As a rule,
these changes have come more quickly in America, where traditions were
as yet unformed; nevertheless, the progress in Europe has been constant
and very great.

[5] The comparative interest in education is well illustrated
by the following extract from an address by Dr. Charles R.
Skinner, recently delivered before the N. E. A.

“The United States, to-day the youngest of all, is the only
great nation of the world which expends more for education
than for war. France spends annually $4 per capita on her
army and 70 cents per capita on education; England, $3.72
for her army and 62 cents for education; Prussia, $2.04
for her army and 50 cents for education; Italy, $1.52 for
her army and 36 cents for education; Austria, $1.36 for
her army and 62 cents for education; Russia, $2.04 for
her army and 3 cents for education; the United States, 39
cents for her army and $1.35 for education. England 6 to 1
for war! Russia, 17 to 1 for war! the United States 4 to
1 for education! The United States spends more per capita
annually for education than England, France, and Russia
combined.”

Canada has a well-established and well-regulated system, in which
the principle of free and public education is recognized. The eight
provinces contain twenty-four colleges, and the schools have over one
million pupils. Education is more or less compulsory in all of the
provinces, but the law is not very strictly enforced. In Ontario,
Quebec, and the Northwest Territories there are separate schools for
Roman Catholics; in the other provinces the schools are non-sectarian.
There is a high professional spirit among the teachers, so that the
schools may be expected to keep fully abreast of the times.

The nineteenth century has been a century of continuous advance in
education. Its spirit has been healthy, its achievements are notable,
its work has been great. It would be futile, however, to assert that
all is yet accomplished. The problems in elementary education are so
many and so important that there have been times when solution seemed
impossible. Nevertheless, the system is now established and is assured
of public support, and with an education within the reach of every
child, the security of free institutions is forever guaranteed.

“THE ART PRESERVATIVE”

BY THOMAS J. LINDSEY,

_Editorial Staff Philadelphia “Evening Bulletin.”_

I. THE PRINTING PRESS.

When Benjamin Franklin edited the “Gazette,” in Philadelphia, a century
and a half ago, he set up the type, worked off the paper on a wooden
hand-press of primitive construction, made wooden types for use in his
office, and engraved the cuts with which to illustrate the articles.
In those days printing was an art which figured among the mysteries of
science, and was practiced by men of high social standing and advanced
education. The sixty years which passed between Franklin’s purchase
of the “Gazette” and his death saw the discovery of many scientific
wonders, but the art of printing moved so slowly as to leave it at
the close of the eighteenth century practically in the condition in
which Franklin found it when he began his career as proprietor of his
Philadelphia printing establishment.

And this condition of affairs applied to England as well as to the
United States.

With all the rare ability possessed by the printer philosopher, he was
able to do but little for the advancement of the profession which was
instrumental in making for him an international reputation.

In all that pertains to the printing business there is nothing with
which the name of Franklin is connected as inventor; yet he is referred
to invariably as in the highest degree representative of the “art
preservative of all arts.”

[Illustration: EARLY PRINTING PRESS AS USED BY BENJAMIN FRANKLIN.]

Were the distinguished scientist, statesman, diplomat, printer, and
philosopher to come forth from his grave in the cemetery of Christ
Church, at Fifth and Arch Streets, Philadelphia, and go into one of
the great printing houses of the country, how astounding to him would
be the revelation! No more the wooden types or the unsymmetrical metal
pieces; no more the wooden hand-press, the wood engravings, the ink
balls, and the process of printing a few hundred sheets an hour. The
terrific rapidity with which the newspapers are turned out to-day,
printed, cut, pasted, and folded; the fineness of the work done on
books and magazines; the wonder of one press putting on different
colors at the same time; the setting of type by machines seemingly
possessed of human intelligence; the rapidity and the simplicity of
making stereotype plates; the dexterity of forming ordinary metal
types into all kinds of forms; the millions of books,—secular and
religious,—papers, and general literary productions turned out daily,
would so puzzle the gigantic brain and cloud the understanding of the
philosopher as to cause him to exclaim: “Take me back, O spirit of
death, and let me forever rest from this seething, surging, whirling
sphere of inventive progression.”

When the genius of invention was turned toward the printing art, it is
worthy of note that the press which attracted the greatest attention
was the production of a Philadelphian who once had been an associate of
Benjamin Franklin. It was known as the Columbian press, the invention
of George Clymer, and was regarded as of sufficient consequence to meet
the approval of the printing fraternity of Great Britain as well as of
this country.

In the National Museum in Washington, D. C., is the hand press which
Benjamin Franklin used to print his Philadelphia paper, the “Gazette.”
It had been built for him in London, where he had used it about five
years prior to its being brought to Philadelphia.

What a curious-looking affair it is! Yet it was little less in the way
of primitiveness compared with that used prior to 1817, when Clymer’s
Columbian came into use. When these productions are contrasted with the
magnificent contrivances of to-day, from which can be thrown sixteen
hundred papers per minute,—papers of ten, twelve, and fourteen pages,
printed on both sides, pasted and folded,—the comparison is like
putting the steamboat of Fulton by the side of the monster ships which
cross the Atlantic ocean from New York to Southampton in less than five
days.

The Columbian press was looked upon, when presented to the printers, as
an advance worthy of note in the art. It is easy to imagine how much
prominence was given Clymer’s invention when it was placed beside the
old common press. To-day, this supposed-to-be great piece of mechanism
would not even be dignified by a place in the most un-modern backwoods
printing establishment. And yet from this were printed the literary
productions of Great Britain, as well as of the United States, in the
early part of the nineteenth century.

The Columbian mechanical advancement consisted of the use of rollers
for inking the type,—very much like the process now employed in inking
the type when a rough proof is desired,—thus dispensing with the
balls, which were managed by boys; the use of screws under the bed of
the press to hold in position the form, into which had been securely
adjusted the type; and the application of a long bar to obtain pressure
sufficient to make the impression on the paper. The picture of this
press shows the flat carriage upon which was placed the type, the
platen or pressing surface, the bar which forced the platen upon the
type, the spring which carried the platen back to position when the
impression had been taken, and the track upon which the carriage was
moved forward and backward,—primitive enough, and sufficiently simple
in construction to show the limited capacity of the inventive genius of
our great-grandfathers.

It was about 1829 when the Columbian gave way to the Washington press,
and this was used for some time for fine book-work. The feature of it
was an automatic inking roller attachment.

While the Washington press had the capacity for producing fine work, it
was deficient in the speed required for meeting the demand then growing
for books and newspapers. Then the printers turned to a cylinder press
which had appeared in the last decade of the eighteenth century. The
London “Times” had taken hold of it, and brought it to such a condition
that its speed was raised to something like a thousand impressions an
hour. König, a native of Saxony, in 1815, produced a press for printing
both sides of the sheet. It resembled two single presses placed with
their cylinders toward each other, the sheet being carried by tapes
from the first to the second cylinder. Its capacity was 750 sheets,
both sides, an hour.

[Illustration: THE COLUMBIAN PRESS.]

Cambridge University about this time was furnished with a press in
which the types were placed on the four sides of a prism, the paper
being applied by another prism. It proved unsuccessful. In this
press, however, were first introduced the inking rollers formed of
a combination of glue and molasses. Rollers are made of these two
materials to this day.

Cowper, an Englishman, in 1815, introduced curved stereotyped plates
and fixed them to a cylinder. Two place cylinders and two impression
cylinders were soon afterward worked together on one press by Cowper,
printing both sides of the sheet at the rate of one thousand copies an
hour.

This seems to have been the period when inventive skill began to
assert itself in the printing press. The educational advancement of
the people in this country and in Europe, with the lack of facility
for furnishing information of the campaigns of Napoleon Bonaparte, the
desire for facts regarding the events transpiring in England, France,
and Germany, the meagreness of the details which had been furnished
of the conflict between Great Britain and the United States in 1812,
convinced the publishers of newspapers in this country and abroad that
the laws of supply and demand were not equally balanced. The outcome
of this was a press constructed to print both sides of the sheet from
type, and was soon followed by the introduction of four impression
cylinders. These were applied to the reciprocating bed to carry the
type for one side of the sheet, the sheets being fed from four feeding
boards, the impression cylinders alternately rising and falling, so
that two sheets were printed during the passage one way, the other two
on the return passage. A pair of inking rollers between the impression
cylinders obtained ink from the reciprocating board.

[Illustration: WASHINGTON HAND PRESS.]

The capacity of this press was five thousand an hour, and this was
regarded as a feat worthy of public mention, record of it being made in
the newspapers of that period in a way which shows the general interest
in the work.

The first power-press used in the United States was made by Daniel
Treadwell, of Boston, in 1822. Two of them were used by the Bible and
Tract societies.

The London “Times” had succeeded in applying steam to the movement of
the printing press as early as 1814—a cylinder press being brought
into requisition, to the use of which they had the exclusive right.

Following the Treadwell press, about 1825, came the improvements of
Samuel and Isaac Adams, and the general use of the press which is still
worked in the book offices of this country and Great Britain. It was on
one of these Adams presses, in 1863, that was printed the book written
by Dr. Elisha Kent Kane, describing his second expedition in search of
Sir John Franklin, the Arctic explorer.

[Illustration: OLD WOODEN FRAME ADAMS BED AND PLATEN BOOK PRESS.]

It was found that the Adams press could be used for newspaper as well
as exceedingly fine book-work, its construction admitting of the
use of plates or type, and its speed such as nearly came up to the
requirements of that period. In this press a feed board holds the
paper, which is fed by hand to a second board or tympan, having points
to make holes in the sheet to regulate the second side. The type rests
upon a bed which is raised by straightening a toggle-joint against the
upper plates.

The fountain for the ink is carried at one end of the press. The inking
rollers pass twice over the form. The paper is caught by grippers,
carried in a frame called a frisket over the form (or type), receives
the impression, and is carried by tapes to a fly frame in the rear
which delivers it to the sheet board.

With the two-, three-, and four-cylinder presses, the Adams press,
steam power and various improvements in the make of inks and rollers,
the first half of the nineteenth century was looked upon as having
made for the printing press extraordinarily rapid advancement. Great
Britain held first place in the production of newspapers and books, the
United States was a slow second, then came France, Germany, Russia,
Italy, Spain, and Austria, in the order given. The greatest evidence of
this march of improvement was the enormous increase in the production
of the Bible, and the bringing of the cost to a figure which then was
looked upon as placing it within the reach of all classes. Scientific
and literary works were being put out in great numbers, newspapers
were being started in every town in this country and England, and the
editions put out in such European centres of advancement as Paris,
Madrid, Berlin, Brussels, London, Liverpool, Dublin, Glasgow, St.
Petersburg, Vienna, and Rome reached proportions then supposed to
be enormous. The London “Times” at that period had a circulation of
about 30,000,—and this was the leader in journalism. In the United
States the leading newspapers did not issue daily editions greater
than 20,000, while a circulation of 10,000 daily was regarded as being
entirely satisfactory to the business ideas of the average publisher.

The opening of the last half of the nineteenth century may be spoken
of as a quiescent period. It was the calm in the affairs of the United
States which preceded the occurring of stormy events which put to
the full test the strength of the young republic, the attitude of
the nations of the old world toward us, and the power of the people
successfully to maintain a government “of the people, for the people,
and by the people.”

Millard Fillmore became the President of the United States in July
of 1850, succeeding Zachary Taylor, who died. The Congress had taken
a stand on the disturbing question of slavery by the passage of the
fugitive slave law, and had made the first step toward freedom for
the negroes by the abolition of the slave trade in the District of
Columbia. It was in this year that New Mexico and Utah were admitted
as Territories, the entire population of the United States being only
23,191,876; ten years later the population reached 31,443,321. The
people were beginning to realize how important was the printing press
in placing them in communication with the statesmen of the country.
They were looking to Webster, Calhoun, Clay, Meredith, Everett,
Scott, Crittenden, Collamer, Marcy,—then in the fullness of mental
vigor,—and they were demanding information of their acts in the
cabinet, their speeches in Congress, their views on state rights and
slavery.

It was at this time that the Hoe American Printing-press Company
startled the world by producing the ten-cylinder press, the speed of
which was limited only by the ability of the feeders to supply the
sheets. The first one of them to be used in the United States was that
upon which the Philadelphia “Public Ledger” was printed. It at once
came into general use in Europe and America. Its speed was 20,000
copies an hour.

In this press—still in use in many cities—the form of type is placed
on the surface of a horizontal revolving cylinder of about four and a
half feet in diameter. The form occupies a segment of only about one
fourth of the surface of the cylinder, and the remainder is used as
an ink-distributing surface. Around this main cylinder, and parallel
with it, are smaller impression-cylinders. The large cylinder being
put in motion, the form of types is carried successively to all
the impression-cylinders, at each of which a sheet is introduced,
and receives the impression of the type as the form passes. One
person supplies the sheets of paper to each cylinder. After being
printed they are carried out by tapes and laid upon heaps by means of
self-acting flyers. The ink is contained in a fountain placed beneath
the main cylinder, and is conveyed by means of distributing rollers
to the distributing surface on the main cylinder. The surface being
lower, or less in diameter than the form of types, passes by the
impression-cylinder without touching. For each impression there are two
inking rollers, which receive their supply of ink from the distributing
surface of the main cylinder; they rise and ink the form as it passes
under them, after which they again fall to the distributing surface.
Each page of the paper is locked up on a detached segment of the larger
cylinder, which constitutes its bed and chases, termed the “turtle.”
The column-rules run parallel with the shaft of the cylinder, and
consequently are straight, while head, advertising, and dash rules
are in the form of segments of a circle. The column-rules are in
the form of a wedge, with the thin part directed toward the axis of
the cylinder, so as to bind the type securely. These wedge-shaped
column-rules are held down to the bed by tongues projecting at
intervals along their length, which slide in rebated grooves cut
crosswise in the face of the bed. The spaces in the grooves between the
rules are accurately fitted with sliding blocks of metal, even with the
surface of the bed, the ends of which blocks are cut away underneath to
receive a projection on the sides of the tongues of the column-rules.
The form of type is locked up in the bed by means of screws at the foot
and sides, by which the type is held as securely as in the ordinary
manner upon a flat bed.

[Illustration: DOUBLE CYLINDER PRESS.]

This press was regarded as the highest degree of perfection, until
William A. Bullock, of Philadelphia, put out his web perfecting press.
This completely revolutionized the printing business so far as the
newspapers were concerned. It came into use in 1861,—just before the
breaking out of the war of the rebellion in the United States,—in time
to meet the enormous demands made upon the printing press at home and
abroad. It had been in operation but a short time when the newspaper
owners of Great Britain took hold of it, and for several years no
other press was used by the newspapers of large circulation.

How slow and toy-like it seems in comparison with the monsters of the
present day! And yet this machine met the demands of a period when it
was supposed the circulation of the daily press had reached an altitude
never to be surpassed. A newspaper like the New York “Herald,” which
had attained a daily circulation of about 75,000, was looked upon as
achieving the highest degree of success. In this last year of the
nineteenth century the “Journal” and “World” of New York send out at
least a million copies of their papers 365 days in the year.

William A. Bullock worked at his web printing press for six years
before he had it in shape to pronounce it applicable to the
requirements. It was not long after it was in successful operation
that one of his limbs caught in the machinery of one of his presses,
and death was the result. As the presses first were made, and indeed
for many years thereafter, the paper was cut in the press before being
printed, and it was a difficult matter properly to control these single
sheets until they were delivered, while the presses were without any
folding attachment. But these old style Bullock presses did succeed in
turning out 6000 eight-page papers an hour, printed on both sides.

In 1873 a great improvement was made in the Bullock presses, which
allowed of the papers being printed on the endless roll before the
paper was cut.

With the aid of other improvements subsequently made these presses
attained to a capacity of 16,000 eight-page papers an hour. But an
unexpected limit was found in the impossibility of delivering beyond
a certain rate from the fly. Then R. Hoe & Co. (about 1877) invented
a contrivance which obviated the difficulty. It consisted of an
accumulating cylinder, on which six or eight sheets were laid one above
the other and then delivered from the fly at one motion. This increased
the capacity of their perfecting press to 18,000 an hour. A folding
attachment was then added; next a pasting and cutting attachment.
Thus, in 1879 they were able to turn out a press which produced 30,000
perfect eight-page papers an hour—printed, cut, pasted, and folded.

The next great achievement was put in operation in a New York
pressroom in 1885. That was the double supplement press, which in
reality combines two presses in one. It was the first press to insert
supplement sheets automatically, and it was the first press to print
from two rolls of paper, one roll being placed at right angles to the
main roll. As the name of the press implies, from the secondary roll
the supplements are printed at the same time that the main part of the
paper is being printed from the other roll. And by means of what to the
ordinary man seems a miraculous contrivance, but which to the initiated
in the mysteries of mechanics is no doubt very simple, the supplement
is automatically inset and pasted into the main paper before reaching
the fly, and dropped out folded ready for the newsdealer.

From this press has been evolved the superb printing machine which, in
recent years, has astonished the world. On it can be printed eight-,
ten-, or twelve-page papers at a running speed of 24,000 an hour, or
400 a minute, and whether eight, ten, or twelve pages are printed they
all come out with the supplements inset and the paper pasted and
folded. From this press was developed the next triumph, the quadruple
press. Marvelous machines these quadruple presses are, and it seemed
impossible that any press could be built for many years to come that
would beat them.

The printing business stood amazed, awe-stricken at the sight of so
many papers being turned out each hour. And before the amazement had
subsided there came forth the machine which is destined to go down in
history as one of the great achievements in mechanics of the nineteenth
century,—the sextuple press, manufactured by Hoe & Co., which has
brought forth as many wonderful improvements as any mechanical concern
in the world.

Although it is impossible to explain in language comprehensible to the
man who is not an engineer how this monarch among printing presses does
its work at a rate of speed which is well-nigh incredible and outstrips
the flight of imagination itself, yet it is possible to convey an idea
of what the extent of the work is.

[Illustration: FIRST PERFECTING PRESS.]

This machine will print, fold, paste, and deliver 90,000 of a four-page
paper or six-page newspaper in one hour. It will require some figuring
to convey an adequate idea of how fast that is, for, as a matter of
fact, it is faster than a man can think, and that is why I say that the
speed of the machine outstrips the flight of imagination.

Ninety thousand copies an hour is equivalent to fifteen hundred copies
a minute, and fifteen hundred copies a minute means twenty-five copies
per second!

Now take out your watch, and while the second hand is passing from one
second to another try to grasp the idea that in all that brief interval
of time twenty-five six-page newspapers have been printed. You can’t do
it. It is faster than you can think.

And yet in that second those twenty-five papers are not only printed,
but the inside sheets are automatically pasted in, and the twenty-five
papers are all cut and folded ready for delivery to the newsdealers.
Is there anything more marvelous than that recorded in the “Arabian
Nights”? Who said that there are no miracles in this nineteenth
century? Why, if old Gutenberg,—peace to his soul,—or Faust, or
Caxton, or even our own Benjamin Franklin had seen anything of the
sort, they would have sworn that it was either a miracle or the work
of the supernatural, with the chances in favor of the latter.

Each page of the average newspaper has six columns, and in each column
there is on an average 1800 words. Six multiplied by six and the
product of that by twenty-five, and that again by 1800, you will find
makes 1,620,000, which is just about the number of words that this
press prints in a second when it is turning out six-page papers at the
rate of twenty-five a second. That is something that will stagger any
man’s imagination if he tries to realize what it is.

This press will print, cut, paste, fold, count, and deliver 72,000
copies of an eight-page newspaper in one hour, which is equivalent to
1200 a minute and 20 a second.

It will print, cut, paste, count, and deliver complete 48,000 copies of
a ten- or twelve-page newspaper in one hour, which is equivalent to 800
a minute and a fraction over 13 a second.

It will print, cut, paste, fold, count, and deliver complete 36,000
copies of a sixteen-page newspaper an hour, which is at the rate of 600
a minute, or 10 a second.

It will print, cut, paste, fold, count, and deliver complete 24,000
copies of a fourteen-, twenty-, or twenty-four-page newspaper an hour,
which is at the rate of 400 a minute, or very nearly seven a second.

This is lightning work with a vengeance, and yet it is possible that
there may be some who read this who will live to call it slow. That
will probably be when they have found out all about how to put a
harness on electricity. No one can predict when inventive genius will
reach its limits in the printing press. Before this press was built,
the fastest presses in the world were Hoe’s quadruple presses, which
will turn out 48,000 four-, six-, or eight-page papers an hour, 24,000
ten-, twelve-, fourteen-, or sixteen-page papers an hour, and 12,000
twenty- or twenty-four page papers an hour, all cut, pasted, and folded.

The sextuple press has a well-nigh insatiable appetite for white paper.
To satisfy it it is fed from three rolls at the same time, one roll
being attached at either end of the press, and the third suspended near
the centre. It is the only press which has ever been able to accomplish
that feat. Each roll is sixty-three inches wide. When doing its best
this press will consume 25-7/8 miles of 63-inch wide white paper in
one hour, and eject it at the two deliveries, each copy containing an
epitome of the news of the world for the preceding twenty-four hours,
and each copy cut, pasted, and folded ready for delivery. It is a sight
worth seeing to see it done, and in its way it is just as impressive as
Niagara.

A man turns a lever, shafts and cylinders begin to revolve, the
whirring noise sets into a steady roar, you see three streams of white
paper pouring into the machine from the three huge rolls, and you pass
around to the other side and—it is literally snowing newspapers at
each end of the two delivery outlets. So fast does one paper follow
the other that you catch only a momentary glitter from the deft steel
fingers which seize the papers and cast them out.

The machine weighs about fifty-eight tons. It is massive and strong,
with the strength of a thousand giants. And yet, though its arms are of
steel and its motions are all as rapid as lightning, its touch is as
tender as that of a woman when she caresses her babe. How else does the
machine avoid tearing the paper? Paper tears very readily, as you often
ascertain accidentally when turning over the pages. Truly wonderful it
is, and mysterious to anybody but an expert, how this huge machine can
make newspapers at the rate of twenty-five a second without rending the
paper all to shreds.

It has six plate cylinders, each cylinder carrying eight stereotype
plates, and six impression-cylinders. These cylinders, when the press
is working at full speed, make two hundred revolutions a minute.
The period of contact between the paper and the plate cylinders is
therefore inconceivably brief, and how in that fractional space of time
a perfect impression is made even to the reproduction of the finest,
is one of those things which, to the man who is not “up” in mechanics,
must forever remain a mystery.

[Illustration: FOUR ROLLER TWO-REVOLUTION PRESS.]

A double folder forms part of the machine. A single folder would not
be equal to the task imposed on it. As it is, this double folder has
to exercise such celerity to keep up with the streams of printed paper
which descend upon it that its operations are too quick for the eye to
follow.

The press has two delivery outlets. At each the papers are
automatically counted in piles of fifty. No matter how rapidly the
papers come out, there is never a mistake in the count. It is as sure
as fate. By an ingenious contrivance—if I should try to describe it
more definitely most people would be none the wiser—each fiftieth
paper is shoved out an inch beyond the others which have been dropped
on to the receiving tapes, thus serving as a sort of tally mark.

Truly it is a marvelous machine—this sextuple press. Nowhere you will
find a more perfect adaptation of means to ends, nowhere in any branch
of industry a piece of mechanism which offers a finer example of what
human skill and ingenuity is capable of. And it is free from that
reproach which is sometimes brought against the greatest triumphs of
inventive genius in other departments of human activity,—that they
make mere automatons out of human beings.

There was recently manufactured by the Hoe Company for a New York paper
an addition to this wonderful piece of machinery designated an octuple
press. Running at full speed it will print, paste, cut, fold, and count
96,000 eight-page papers an hour. It is nearly 14 feet high, and 25
feet long. Ten men are required to operate it. The cylinders revolve
200 times in every 60 seconds.

This monster is divided into two working parts. The printing is done
on the half of the machine to the right. The paper passes over the
cylinders there, where it is printed from the stereotype plates, and
then runs through the other half of the machine on the left, where it
is cut, inserted, pasted, delivered, and counted from four outlets
folding in half-page size.

This press shows four distinct double printing machines, each fed by
its own roll of paper. The paper from each roll passes against two sets
of stereotype plate cylinders—one for each side of the printed sheet.
The machine is so perfectly adjusted that by simply turning a screw and
moving a gear a few inches each of the four sets of cylinders can be
thrown out of operation; that is to say one quarter, one half, three
quarters, or the whole press can be operated at will.

The folder is harmonized for each adjustment of the printing cylinder.
The folding of the papers has been brought to the highest state of
perfection. The sheets are folded, cut, and delivered by a rotary
motion at a speed that could never have been attained with the
reciprocating arms, such as were used prior to the Hoe inventions.

When a sixteen-page paper is being printed it comes in four-ply
thickness, and then doubles and shoots eight thicknesses under the
knife.

When a twenty-four-page paper is being printed it passes over the
longitudinal folder in six-ply thickness and passes under the knife in
twelve thicknesses. All this is attained without the use of guiding
tapes. In fact, the speed could not be attained with them.

As the papers are folded and delivered from the four outlets, with a
speed too great for the eye to follow, the machine itself counts them
in total and in bundles, as is done on the sextuple press. This monster
octuple machine has a perfected system of ink distribution with which
no other presses are equipped. Under the system results are obtained
by decreasing the size and increasing the number of ink-rollers around
each cylinder of plates.

The arrangement of the type cylinders is such as to make the press
one that can be handled with great ease and rapidity. Along the right
hand of the machine, between the two rows of cylinders, is an open
passageway. It is large enough for men to pass through either from the
ground or from the gallery near the latitudinal centre of the press.

From this open passageway the pressmen are able to watch every movement
of the machine’s interior working, and from it they are able to make
quick changes on the plate cylinders. The change in position of only
two ink-rollers is necessary to change a plate on any cylinder. This is
a matter of great importance to a paper which prints many editions, for
it is necessary to change plates so often and to economize every minute
of time in order to catch the fast mails which carry the paper to all
quarters of the earth.

On the octuple presses each roll of paper is guarded against breakage.
There is a device in the shape of a short endless belt of rubber which
passes over two pulleys and rests on top of the roll of paper. The
paper is then pulled from the roll as gently as the thread is pulled
from the spool of a sewing machine. The belt pushes the roll along
at a speed equal to and sometimes a little greater than that of the
stereotype cylinders. Hence, all tension is removed from the paper.

From the stereotyper’s department, where they have been made in a
few minutes, come the plates of curved, bright metal. Passed to the
pressmen, they are locked on the cylinders as fast as they can be
handled. The rolls of paper have been placed in their proper positions.

This accomplished, the men step back from the machine, the brakeman
pulls the lever, and the giant press begins its work. Slowly its
cylinders revolve at first, but as headway is gained the rumble that
accompanied the start increases into a shrill shriek as the limit of
speed is reached.

[Illustration: LITHOGRAPHIC PRESS.]

The paper rushes from its continuous rolls, is printed, folded, cut,
and thrown out from the four outlets at a speed that would be over
twice greater than that of any express train if it were confined to one
roll. Every paper is just like every other one, perfect in every detail.

When this has gone on for an hour, two hours, or however long it may
take to run off the editions, the monster press can be stopped in an
instant. With the simple touching of a lever all its movement will
cease before the cylinders can revolve five times, and they had been
revolving two hundred times a minute before.

The two wonders just described are confined to newspaper work. This
same American firm has produced presses upon which are printed the fine
specimens of magazines where the work takes a striking resemblance to
lithograph printing. They have a speed of 8000 an hour. From them come
booklets of 16, 20, or 24 pages. From the presses of 4000 an hour come
books of 32, 40, and 48 pages. In construction they are complicated and
grand.

Then come the presses upon which are printed different colors.
These are made in England and the United States, and are used with
satisfactory results on prominent publications in both countries. A
recent issue of the “British and Colonial Printer” directs attention
to this advance in mechanism through the medium of the Hoe art rotary
form feeder. It says:—

“This machine carries the mind back naturally to pre-rotary days, when
the Hoe multi-feeder held the field as the newspaper machine, to the
days of the heavy, and as we consider in these advanced days, clumsy
turtle. When the creative genius of Colonel Hoe evolved the rotary
press, the multi-feeder was almost at once relegated to the lumber
room of obsolete mechanics. It is hardly conceivable that it entered
the mind of any practical man at this time that the principle of
multi-fed flat sheet printing would ever be adapted to the production
of high art illustrated literature, at a speed equal, or nearly so,
to the former Hoe news machine. It has, at all events in our country,
long been a settled opinion that such work could only be successfully
accomplished upon a flat-bed machine, that the mere curvature of a
plate must destroy the beauty of a fine process block for example, and
that any attempt to travel at a greater speed than 1200 to 1500 an hour
must be at the sacrifice of depth and sufficiency of rolling. Whether
this is really so readers will now be able to form their own opinion
from the pages of the ‘Strand Magazine.’ Those pages abound in very
varied methods of engraving, woodcut and process, line and nature, and
reproductions alike from photos and from wash and crayon drawings.
Every page has undergone the process of electrotyping, cast straight
and curved subsequently, and therefore the conditions of printing at
the high speed of 4000 (or to be strictly accurate, four sheets of 16
pages each put through at the rate of 950 each, or 3800 per hour) are
as severe as could be desired.

“The British printer has yet to acquire a full mastery of its
capabilities, and the engineer has equally before him in some degree a
period of development. Some of the portraiture, human and animal, is
equal to anything seen. The make-ready (upon hard packing) exhibits
the highest quality, and the distribution of color perfection.
The plate-cylinder is made as large as the desired speed renders
practicable, in order that the curvature of the plates may be reduced
to a minimum. The provision for securing adequate distribution and
in-rolling is upon a liberal scale, but not one whit more so than
is requisite, extent of surface and speed of running considered.
There are 16 inkers and 38 distributors, with 16 iron distribution
cylinders. The sheets are fed in two at either side of the machine,
those from the right hand feeders being delivered upon the table at
the extreme left, the other upon the inner delivery board. The plates
are rigidly secured by special clutches. To facilitate the imposition
of the plates, or any attention required by the cylinder, the short
rear portion of the machine back of the cylinder is detachable and
can be run out upon an extended base, and then closed up and put into
gear again. This renders it perfectly accessible at the most essential
point. The sheets are of course printed on one side only. We have not
yet attained to the perfecting stage in art work in combination with
high speed; the introduction of the Hoe art rotary press, however,
marks a distinct epoch in this class of printing in Great Britain.
Color printing-presses are in use in the newspaper and magazine offices
in this country, and from them are produced the artistic as well as the
lurid styles of art.”

What the possibilities of the printing press are, looking at the degree
of excellence at present attained, it is difficult to predict. It
would seem as if the height of perfection now had been reached. The
probability is that the printer at the end of the first quarter of the
twentieth century may look with something akin to contempt upon the
machines which now are regarded with so much pride.

Such a thing is possible in this age of invention.

[Illustration: NUMBERING CARD PRESS.]

II. THE SETTING OF TYPE.

In the beginning of the nineteenth century, when the little metal
pieces of type were picked up one at a time and placed in the composing
“stick” by hand, there was attached to the work an importance which
elevated it almost to the ranks of the trained professions. In England,
as late as 1817, compositors arrogated to themselves the dignity of
carrying swords. At the close of the nineteenth century, the art is
seen to be passing into the sphere of mechanics,—the methods in vogue
making it entirely a mechanical operation. Before many years of the
twentieth century have passed, there will have been attained a degree
of advancement which will dispense with the hand of man in guiding
the movements of the machine. The inventive skill which brought the
printing press to such a high point of excellence and speed has been
turned toward the work of type-composing, and the forward march is
likely to be as rapid.

Outside of the actual learned professions, no occupation has
contributed so many prominent figures to the history and progress of
this country as the composing-room. They have filled important places
in journalism, politics, Congress, state legislatures, the army and
navy, and the world of literature.

Horace Greeley, the founder of the New York “Tribune,”—writer,
statesman, and man of affairs,—is one of the notable figures of the
present century, who laid the foundation of his career at a case of
type.

Schuyler Colfax, who became Vice-President of the United States in
1869, passed the early years of his life setting type.

And, strange to say, these two men, when the presidential chair seemed
a possible realization of their ambition, were opposed by men of their
craft simply because they had seemed to run so far above the “stick”
and “rule.”

Simon Cameron, of Pennsylvania, once Secretary of War, United States
senator, representative of the United States abroad, and for many years
political master of his great State, was proud to say that he had begun
his career as a type-setter in a country printing-office. It is worth
while noticing that this printer-politician’s life covered nearly
a century of existence. His life spanned every president from John
Adams in 1799 to Benjamin Harrison in 1889, while his active political
control of Pennsylvania covered a period of sixty-five years,—a record
made by only one man within the history of the United States.

Every state in the Union has contributed to history its quota of
printer-statesmen, printer-authors, and printer-journalists. How many
of such there have been in this nineteenth century would be beyond
ordinary research to ascertain. But printers—compositors—can refer
with just pride to the fact that in all the advanced walks of life are
to be found men who have been members of the guild.

The setting of type by hand prevailed universally until as late
as 1880. That may be put down as the period when there came into
anything like general use the machines for type composition, although
experiments in that direction had been going on for sixty years.

As early as 1820, printers realized that machinery eventually must
be brought into play for composing type. But how to do it was the
scientific as well as mechanical problem. It was argued that the
machine must be so constructed as to pick up the type, uniformly
distribute the space between the words, and “justify” the lines, that
is, make them the exact width.

“It is beyond the range of possibility,” suggested the printer.
“Mechanism never can be applied to art. The great Benjamin Franklin
would have discovered the way to make such a thing possible, if it were
possible—which is impossible.”

And the scientific electric discovery made by Benjamin Franklin in the
eighteenth century is, at the close of the nineteenth, the motive-power
used for driving the machines for type composition,—the seemingly
impossible has reached the stage of possibility.

[Illustration: OCTUPLE STEREOTYPE PERFECTING PRESS AND FOLDER.

(Capacity, 96,000 impressions per hour.)]

Dr. William Church, of Connecticut, produced a machine looking to
machine type-composition in 1820. It did not come into use, although
he spent large sums of money on it, and devoted a vast amount of
energy toward having it taken up both in this country and in England.
At the Paris Exhibition in 1835 there were exhibited several machines
of this sort, one of which—the patent of Christian Sörensen, of
Copenhagen—was used upon a daily paper issued during the exhibition.
In 1871, at the International Exhibition in London, there was shown
a machine possessing peculiar features. It used a perforated ribbon,
through the medium of which types were worked into position. The
machine was cumbersome, complicated, and expensive, and could not be
brought into anything like general usage. In 1875 M. Delcambre, of
Paris, after twenty years’ work produced a machine in New York. It
had the same objections as the others. While this machine could do as
much as the labor of three men by hand, it required a man to operate,
another man to place the set type in lines, steam to keep it in motion,
and a big cost to construct.

[Illustration: LINOTYPE (TYPE-SETTING) MACHINE (FRONT VIEW).]

Up to this period, all the experiments had shown the want of something
which would obviate the presence of a man to make the lines of the
proper length and with equal spacing between the words. All the
machines which were anything near available picked up and placed in
position separate types. At the Centennial Exhibition of 1876, in
Philadelphia, there were shown machines which used brass dies and cast
a line of type. These seemed to possess the element for successful
use, and the outcome was the production of the machine which is now in
use in all the big newspaper offices in this country—the “Mergenthaler
Linotype.” Practically it has driven all the other machines out of use,
but how long it will hold sway is a question. Already men of genius are
experimenting with two objects in view,—increase of speed, decrease of
cost,—and it is fair to presume that before the twentieth century has
gone very far into history these two objects will have been attained.

The linotype, as here shown, has the appearance of a heavy and
cumbersome piece of machinery. It actually is so only when there are
several of them placed in line—then they give to a composing-room
the appearance of a machine shop. This machine, instead of producing
single type of the ordinary character, casts type-metal bars or slugs,
each complete in one piece, and having on the upper edge, properly
justified, the type characters to print a line.

These slugs present the appearance of composed lines of type, and serve
the same purpose, and for this reason are called “linotypes.” The
linotypes are produced and assembled automatically in a galley, side
by side, in proper order, so that they constitute a “form,” answering
the same purposes and used in the same manner as the ordinary “forms”
consisting of single types.

After being used, the linotypes instead of being, like type forms,
distributed, are thrown into a metal pot of the machine to be recast
into new forms.

The machine contains, as its fundamental elements, several hundred
brass matrices. Each matrix consists of a flat plate having in one
edge a female letter, or matrix proper, and in the upper end a series
of teeth, which are used for distributing to their proper places in
the magazine matrices containing different letters. There are in
the machine a number of matrices of each letter, and also matrices
representing special characters, and spaces or quads of definite
thickness for use in tabular and other work of a complicated nature.

The machine is so organized that on manipulating the finger-keys it
will select matrices in the order in which their characters are to
appear in print, and assemble them side by side with wedge-shaped
spaces at suitable points in the line.

This composed line forms a line matrix, or in other words a line of
female type, adapted to produce a line of raised printing type on a
slug, which may be forced into or against the matrix characters. After
the matrix line is composed it is automatically transferred to the face
of the mold, into which molten metal is delivered to produce the slug
or linotype, after which the matrices are distributed or returned to
the magazine to be again composed in new relations for succeeding lines.

These operations are performed by mechanism, as shown in the outline
here presented.

_A_ is an inclined fixed magazine, containing channels in which the
assorted matrices are stored, and through which they slide, entering
at the top and escaping at the foot, one at a time. Each channel is
provided at the lower end with an escapement device, _B_, connected
by a rod, _C_, with a finger character of the matrices in the
corresponding channel. There is a key for each character, and also
keys for quads stored in the magazine. The keys are actuated by the
operator in the order in which their letters are to appear in print.
As a key is depressed, it operates the corresponding escapement, _B_,
which allows a matrix to fall out of the magazine through one of the
channels, _E_, to the inclined traveling belt, _F_, which serves to
carry the matrices down in succession into the assembler stick, _G_,
in which they are stored side by side. A box, _H_, contains a number
of elongated spaces, _I_, and a discharging device connecting with
a finger-key bar, _J_, by which the spaces are permitted to fall
into the line of matrices at the proper points during composition.
It will be perceived that the operation of the various keys results
in the selection of the matrices and spaces, and their collection in
assembler, _G_, until it contains all the characters to be represented
by one line of print. After the matrix line is thus composed it is
transferred, as indicated by the dotted lines, to the front of a mold
or slot extending through a mold wheel, _K_, from front to rear. This
mold is of the exact size and shape of the slug required. The matrix
line is pressed tightly against, and closed in front of, the mold for
the time being, and the characters, or matrices proper, face the mold
cell or space. While the line is in place in front of the mold, the
wedge spaces are pushed up through the line, and in this manner exact
and instantaneous “justification” is secured. Behind the mold there is
a melting pot, _M_, heated by a flame from a gas burner, and containing
a quantity of molten metal. The pot has a perforated mouth arranged to
fit against and close the rear side of the mold, and contains a jump
plunger, mechanically actuated.

[Illustration: OUTLINE OF TYPE-SETTING MACHINE.]

After the matrix line is in place, the plunger falls and forces metal
through the pot mouth into the mold, against and into the characters of
the matrix line. The metal instantly solidifies in the mold, forming
the slug or linotype, having on its edge raised type characters formed
by the matrices. The mold wheel next makes a partial revolution,
turning the mold from the original horizontal to a vertical position
in front of the ejector, which then advances from the rear through the
mold, pushing the slug out of the latter into the receiving galley, at
the front.

A vibrating arm advances the slugs laterally in the galley, and thus
assembles them side by side in column or page-form ready for use. In
order to insure absolute accuracy in the height and thickness of the
slugs, knives are arranged to act upon them during their course to the
galley.

After the matrices in the line have served their purpose in front of
the mold, they are returned to the magazine to be again discharged and
used in the following manner. The line is lifted from the mold and
shifted laterally until the teeth at the top engage the teeth of bar,
_R_. This bar then rises as shown by dotted lines, lifting the matrices
to the distributor at the top of the machine, but leaving the spaces,
_I_, behind to be shifted laterally to the magazine or holder, _H_,
from which they were discharged. Each matrix has distributor teeth
in its top, arranged in a special order or number, according to the
character it contains. In other words, a matrix containing any given
character differs in the number or relation of its teeth from a matrix
containing any other character. This difference is relied upon to
secure proper distribution. A distributor-bar, _T_, in a single piece,
is fixed horizontally over the upper end of the magazine, and is formed
with longitudinal ribs or teeth, adapted to engage the teeth of the
matrices and hold the latter in suspension as they are carried along
the bar over the mouths or entrances of the channels.

The teeth of the bar are cut away to vary their number or arrangement
at different points in its length, so that there is a special
arrangement over the mouth of each channel. The matrices are pushed
upon the bar at the end, and made to slide slowly along it while
suspended therefrom. Each matrix remains in engagement, and travels
over the mouth of the channels, until it arrives at the required point,
where, for the first time, its teeth bear such relation to those of the
bar that it is permitted to disengage and fall into its channel.

The travel of the matrices is secured by longitudinal screws, which
lie below the bar in position to engage the edges of the matrices. The
matrices pursue a circulatory course through the machine, starting
from the bottom of the magazine and passing thence to the line being
composed, thence to the mold, and finally back to the top of the
magazine. This circulation permits the operations of composing one
line, casting a second, and distributing a third, to be carried on
concurrently, and enables the machine to run at a speed exceeding that
at which any operator can finger the keys.

One half horse power is generally used in driving a machine. About
five square feet is the space occupied by the machine; it weighs 1925
pounds, and consumes about fifteen feet of illuminating gas each hour
to heat the metal pot. Each machine will do complete work equal to that
of five men by hand. The simplicity of the machine bears a striking
resemblance to the typewriter, and this is operated successfully by
young girls. When the matter set by the machine is placed together, the
page presents a surface equal to an entire new set of type, or, as the
printers say, “We take on an entire new dress every day.”

That is a production of the nineteenth century. How commonplace it will
appear when the achievements of the twentieth century are placed on
record.

III. EVENTS AS THEY OCCUR.

When the nineteenth century opened, great events were occurring in
the world. Napoleon Bonaparte was the central figure in the eye of
Europe. He had, but a few years previously (1797), gone through the
most brilliant campaign known. He had crossed the Alps, defeated the
Austrians at Montenotte and Millesimo, defeated the Sardinians at Ceva
and Mondovi, and conquered Lombardy,—all in a few weeks. The year
following he had conquered Egypt, and in 1800 had become the first
consul and the ruler of France, to be declared Emperor four years later.

Then followed, in rapid succession, the events which caused the world
to look upon Napoleon as the probable coming ruler of the universe. It
was in 1805 that he began the war of aggrandizement. He crossed the
Rhine, compelling the Austrian army to surrender at Ulm; he entered
Vienna and routed the Russian and Austrian armies at Austerlitz.
This was followed by his move to make himself master of Southern and
Central Europe. He established his brother Joseph as King of Naples;
his brother Louis as King of Holland; his stepson Eugene as Viceroy of
Italy; and his brother-in-law, Joachim Murat, as Grand Duke of Berg.
The following year he defeated the Prussians and entered Berlin.

It was not until his abdication at Fontainebleau, in 1814, that Europe
and America breathed freely. His final overthrow at Waterloo in 1815
removed him from the stage as an active participant in the world’s
history of the nineteenth century.

In the United States, the close of the eighteenth century was marked by
the death of Washington, while 1800, 1801, 1802 saw us make a treaty
of peace with France, remove the national capital from Philadelphia to
Washington, D. C., declare war against Tripoli, purchase Louisiana from
France, and enter upon the disputes with Great Britain which culminated
in a declaration of war with the mother country, in June of 1812.

While these events at home and abroad were making history, long periods
of time elapsed between their occurrence and their being given to the
people. There was no telegraphic communication which flashed messages
around the globe. It was a wait until the mails brought the news. Two
months, probably, elapsed after the battle of Waterloo ere this country
was furnished with the story which meant so much to the peace of Europe.

What a change in this respect was wrought between the downfall of
Napoleon Bonaparte in 1815 and the downfall of his nephew, Louis
Napoleon, in 1870! On the fateful second of September, 1870, when the
Emperor of France, Napoleon III., surrendered to the Emperor William
of Prussia, on the field of Sedan, the news was flashed to America in
less than two hours. On that hot, sultry day eager crowds surrounded
the bulletin boards of the newspapers, on which were displayed the
facts connected with the overthrow of the Napoleonic dynasty. The
difference in time made it possible for us here to know all that had
been done by the two emperors and by Bismarck an hour ahead of their
actual happening. For days before that the crowds had surged around
the newspaper offices, for days afterward they did the same, and facts
were given with a rapidity which showed how wonderful had been the
scientific stride between 1815 and 1870.

Had any one in 1815 predicted the possibility of such scenes, he
would have been put down as a fit subject for a writ of _de lunatico
inquirendo_. Such, too, would have been the comment on the one who then
would have suggested the likelihood of a newspaper in this country
reaching a circulation of a million copies daily,—and yet such has
become an accomplished fact.

At the close of the first quarter of the nineteenth century there had
been no practical advance in the rapid transmission of news. This
was the period when the press lacked the facility to rapidly furnish
the people with the events which were occurring in all directions.
Newspapers still depended upon the mails. Home events were many weeks
reaching sections remote from their happening. In this respect there
had been some little improvement at the close of the first half of
the century. That was the time when the electrical current was being
brought into operation in the transmission of signals from which
messages were being recorded, and these were being utilized for the
sending of information at short distances. Scientific men were even
talking of the possibility of connecting distant points on the coast,
and whispering their hope for an Atlantic cable. In 1858 that wonderful
event came to pass. The old world and the new were connected by cable
from Valencia Bay, in Ireland, to Newfoundland, in North America,
and messages of greeting passed between Queen Victoria and President
Buchanan. The break which followed soon after the opening of this cable
stimulated men of genius and men of capital to further efforts, and the
governments of the United States and Great Britain came forward with
generous aid. The laying of the Atlantic cable by the Great Eastern
in 1864, and its successful operation in 1866, opened the doors for
the possibilities of the press of to-day, and the realization of such
scenes as were witnessed in this country on September 2, 1870.

Between that memorable year, 1866, and this, 1899, how wonderful has
been the advance in the transmission of information from all quarters
of the globe. From the Transvaal Republic, in South Africa; from the
desert home of the Dervish in the Soudan; from the domain of Turkey’s
Sultan, in Armenia; from the Holy Land; from the Oriental empires
of China and Japan; from the snow-clad land of the Czar in Siberia;
from the Bosphorus to the English Channel; from Valencia across the
Atlantic; from Victoria Land in North America to Patagonia in South
America; from Maine to Mexico; from the Atlantic to the Pacific; there
are each day transmitted all occurrences of interest transpiring,—and
these encompass peace and war, joy and sorrow, science and art,
education and trade,—events which arouse the passions and quicken the
pulse of humanity.

This is done through the medium of an organization known as the
Associated Press. This wonderful combination has nearly forty thousand
miles of wire from the different telegraph companies, for which there
is paid a fixed price per mile. This, however, does not include its
cable service, the charges for which are according to the number of
words transmitted. The service of this organization costs a million and
a half a year, divided among several hundred of the great newspapers
of the United States. During the recent conflict between Spain and the
United States its expenditure for war news alone was nearly $500,000.
This can readily be understood when the reader is informed that the
cable rate from Manila was $2.37 a word. Thus, a dispatch filling less
than a quarter of a column of the average daily paper cost $1000. The
rate from Porto Rico, at the outbreak of hostilities, was $1.90 a word,
and it often happened that a single dispatch covering the movements
of a body of troops in that island, with possibly a pen picture of a
skirmish with the Spaniards, would cost $2000 in gold. The Santiago
toll was $1.10 a word; and whole pages of newspapers were printed at
that rate.

What a gigantic institution it has become for the rapid dissemination
of news events!

In that war between Spain and the United States, General Toral, the
Spanish commander, surrendered Santiago on July 14, at 2.15 o’clock
in the afternoon. At 2.25 o’clock the message announcing the fact was
received in Philadelphia. On the 12th of August following, at 4.23
o’clock in the afternoon, the Peace Protocol was signed in Washington
by the French Ambassador Cambon and Secretary of State Day, and at
4.27 o’clock—four minutes later—the information was in the New York
office of the Associated Press. Hundreds of such instances of this
rapid transmission of news could be recorded in this last year of the
nineteenth century,—facts never even dreamed of when Benjamin Franklin
chained the electric current in the closing years of the eighteenth
century.

The journey of a piece of news from the far East to the far West is
something worth noting. The trip covers thousands of miles out of a
direct route. As for instance, when Admiral Dewey annihilated the
Spanish fleet in the Bay of Manila, on May 1, 1898, the fact was cabled
to Hong Kong, China. There an operator transmitted it northward to
Helampo in Russia, right on the border line of Manchooria, from which
place it was sent across Russia to Tomsk, thence to St. Petersburg.
From the Russian capital it zigzagged to Berne, in Switzerland;
thence to Paris; thence across the channel to Penzance, and finally
to Valencia, to be put on the cable for America. In two hours from
the time the operator in Hong Kong started his dispatch, it was being
hurried across the American continent—north, west, east, south—for
distribution in the newspaper offices.

When a party of Mohammedans attacked a Christian mission in Calcutta,
a telegraph operator dispatched the news to Bombay, whence it was
transmitted to Aden. The next point reached was Suez, from which it was
sent to Malta. It was next sent to Lisbon. From there it was given to
Paris. From Malta it was also cabled to Penzance, thence to Valencia,
and finally to the United States.

When that Manila piece of news from Admiral Dewey reached the Pacific
coast in the United States, the date of its being started was yet
several hours behind the time of its arrival. The attack on the Spanish
fleet was made on Sunday, May 1, Manila time. The fact was not sent out
by Dewey until the following morning, May 2 (still Manila time). It was
started on its westward course that morning (May 2) at ten o’clock. By
the route taken to Valencia with the relays, two hours were consumed.
This brought it to London about three o’clock on that morning of May 2,
owing to the difference in time. Traveling westward across the Atlantic
ocean in advance of the sun, it reached New York about ten o’clock in
the night of May 1. But little time was lost in retransmission to the
Pacific coast, which point it reached about six o’clock on that Sunday
evening of May 1—fourteen hours previous, by the day of the month, to
its being started from Manila.

In this work of sending out news not a moment is lost that can be
avoided. The aid of the typewriter enables the operator to keep pace
with the sending operator, and his pace has been increased in the past
few years by the introduction of a code system. Here is a specimen of
the code system as used by the operator in sending out a news item:—

“Madrid, March 17—T Qn Regent h sined t Treaty of Peace btn Spn &
t Uni Stas. T treaty wb frwded to t French Ambsdr, Jules Cambon, at
Washn, fo exg w t one sined by Pr McKinley. No decree q sj wb pud d
‘Official Gazette.’

“Ofl rlns btn t 2 govts wi nw b promtly rnud. Ix rmrd 5 Mir to t Uni
Stas wb Snor. Don J. Brunetti, Duke d’Arcos, fmr Spnh Mir to Mex, wos
wif is an Amn.”

When this seemingly incomprehensible conglomeration of letters leaves
the hand of the receiving operator it reads as follows:—

“Madrid, March 17—The Queen Regent has signed the Treaty of Peace
between Spain and the United States. The treaty will be forwarded to
the French Ambassador, Jules Cambon, at Washington, for exchange with
the one signed by President McKinley. No decree on the subject will be
published in the ‘Official Gazette.’

“Official relations between the two governments will now be promptly
renewed. It is rumored that the Minister to the United States will be
Señor Don J. Brunetti, Duke d’Arcos, former Spanish Minister to Mexico,
whose wife is an American.”

The London “Times” recently has been experimenting with a scheme
whereby reporters in the Houses of Parliament operate the typesetting
machines in the London office by the wire from their quarters in
Parliament.

It is only a question of time when this practice comes into use in the
reporting of all legislative proceedings.

In some of the New York newspaper offices, the receiving operator sits
at a typesetting machine and puts into type the messages which come
over the wires.

How rapidly we have advanced in this direction in the last half of the
nineteenth century is thus shown. What will be done by our successors
in the first half of the twentieth century, no man can at this time
satisfactorily predict.

IV. TYPE-MAKING, STEREOTYPING, PICTURE-MAKING.

The manufacture of the small metal pieces called type has undergone
little change in this nineteenth century. That which has been done
has been in the way of producing artistic designs, so arranged that
combinations can be formed pleasing to the eye, and an aid to rapid
workmanship. The machinery in use has lost its crudity, the production
has been increased, and the finish become more perfect. The setting of
type by machinery has been a serious blow to this industry, and the
time will come when it will be devoted entirely to the making of job or
fancy types.

Benjamin Franklin attempted to make metal type in this country, but he
did not succeed. It was not until 1796 that type-making was commenced
here.

As in many other departures in the printing business, the city of
Philadelphia took the lead. Binney and Ronaldson, of Edinburgh,
Scotland, established the first foundry in this country, operating
it in Philadelphia. After a severe struggle and with some aid from
the State, a business was established by the two Scotchmen, which
afterwards became known as the Johnson Foundry, under MacKellar, Smiths
& Jordan, which is still in existence. They were followed by David
Bruce, also a Scotchman, and by 1813 foundries had been established in
New York and other large cities.

Since that time improvements have been introduced, but nothing has
come forth which deserves to be ranked with the printing-press or the
typesetting machine.

The type founder will tell you how much better are the machines used
in 1899 than those which produced type in 1850. But he cannot point
out any device connected with it which the mechanical world can
designate as marvelous, or the people at large regard as a wonderful
invention. Type once was rubbed into smoothness by boys. Now it is
done automatically on the machine. By the hand process about four
hundred types an hour were cast; by the present mechanism a speed of
six thousand an hour has been acquired. Until about 1875, this output
hardly met the demand; now it will do so. Before many years it will be
far in excess of the requirements.

* * * * *

Stereotyping is the art of making plates cast in one piece of type
metal from the surface of one or more pages of type. In the beginning
of the nineteenth century, stereotyping was used to an exceedingly
limited extent. The printers were prejudiced against it for reasons
purely selfish. It was not until 1813 that it was introduced into the
United States, and only a few years previously Lord Stanhope introduced
it into the English printing business. “The Larger Catechism of the
Westminster Assembly” professes on its title-page to have been the
first work stereotyped in America. It bears the date of June, 1813. Now
the process is in general use—plaster, clay, and papier mâché being
used.

The process of stereotyping originally was to preserve the pages, so
that an entire edition of a work could be finished without requiring
large numbers of type, and to have it ready for future editions. For
newspaper work it came into vogue to save the rapid wearing out of the
type by the impressions made.

From the practical introduction of stereotyping in this country,
in 1813, by Robert Bruce, until about 1850, the slow, tedious, and
troublesome process of making the plates by plaster of Paris was in
vogue. That was done by the plaster being poured over the face of the
type. Molten lead was then run into the cast, after which the plate
was finished. The time thus occupied caused the work to be confined to
books, magazines, and weekly issues of small journals. When the plate
was taken from the cast it was rough, imperfect, and unfit for use.
Men, whose specialty was finishing, were employed to make the plate so
as to meet the requirements of the printing press.

It was just at the opening of the last half of the nineteenth century
that papier mâché began to be used in this country. A few years before
that time it had been brought into use in London and Paris. Its
introduction into the United States found the printing trade ready
and willing to accept it, and but a few years passed before it came
into general use by the newspapers. It is a peculiar combination. The
paper matrix is formed by paste of starch, flour, alum, and water.
This is spread over a thick paper, on which are placed layers of fine
tissue paper. When ready for use, it is placed on the face of the type
and a deep impression secured by being passed through a press. Then
it goes into a steam chest to be dried, from there it is passed into
the casting machine, the molten metal poured in, and a few minutes
thereafter the plate is ready for the press. Up to a few years ago, the
impression on papier mâché was secured by being beaten with brushes
prepared for that use. The method had two disadvantages,—consumption
of time and destruction of type. The press now used obviates these
defects. The old way took about twenty minutes to produce a plate. Now
it is done in from five to seven minutes. The machinery here introduced
has been of benefit to the trade, but none of it ranks among the great
inventions of the century.

The making of electrotype plates had its origin early in the century,
when it was found that stereotype plates had a limit as to durability.
Electroplating suggested to Josiah Adams, in 1839, the idea of a
copper surface for the stereotype plate. It took ten years to bring
it into practical use. His first successful work in this line was on
the engravings and borders for a Bible issued in New York. It was
found to be particularly adapted to engravings, producing a surface
of sufficient smoothness to allow the pressman to make a print of
exquisite fineness. The improvements introduced tended only toward
the saving of time and the excellence of finish. Practically the
same process is used now that was employed half a century ago. An
impression of the type is made on wax, the electric current is secured
by a deposit of fine graphite, the mold is placed in a bath containing
a solution of sulphate of copper and is made part of the electric
circuit, in which also is introduced a zinc element in a sulphuric acid
solution. The current deposits a film of copper on the graphite surface
of the mold. When it has assumed a sufficient thickness, it is taken
from the bath, the wax is removed, and the copper shell trimmed. It is
then backed with an alloy of type metal. The finishing process brings
the plate to the proper thickness, after which it is blocked to the
height required for printing. That is the process. To it in the last
ten years there has been applied the use of steam machinery. In the old
days the making of electrotypes required from ten to fifteen hours.
They now are produced in from two to three hours.

* * * * *

The close of the nineteenth century witnesses the disappearance
entirely from the printing establishment of the once generally
used wood engraving. The rise and fall of this once splendid art
is practically encompassed in the period of time covered by the
nineteenth century. Thomas Bewick, an Englishman, gave wood engraving
an artistic impetus by the production of illustrations for his
“Histories of British Quadrupeds,” which appeared about 1790. Up to
that period the work was crude. The books and magazines of the first
decade of the century were illustrated in a way then regarded as highly
artistic. The application of the Bewick method brought forth work which
ranked in the line of high art. Of the development of this work volumes
could be written. To simplify the situation it is only necessary to
recall how these pictures were made. Squares of boxwood were used,
on the face of which was spread a preparation of water-color Chinese
white. On this surface the artist drew his picture, and then the
engraver’s art was brought into requisition—the engraving being done
alongside the pencil lines.

And here it was that the artistic instinct of the handler of the
“graver” appeared,—the delicacy of touch being shown in the shading
and in the finish of the lines. By this method there have been produced
rare works of art, as can be seen by an examination of the books
printed in the first half of the century.

The time taken in the making of the engravings, however, prevented
the possibility of their being used by the newspapers and magazines
as generally as was desired. This want was in a measure met by the
introduction of machine “grooving.” The cuts, however, could not be
used to print from directly in consequence of the warping of the
boxwood, and it was necessary in every instance to make stereotype or
electrotype plates. Then, too, came the realization of the fact that
the reproduction of portraits needed something which would preserve
features and expression. In those days some of the pictures produced
were ludicrous in the extreme, and it became a standing joke in the
newspapers that the best way to cast ridicule upon a public man was
to print his picture. In the work of reproducing scenes the skill
of the artist and the engraver frequently brought forth results
which were marvels of excellence. For a number of years the wood
engraving business flourished in this particular line, despite the
dissatisfaction existing in regard to portrait work. In the production
of illustrations for fine books, printed on good paper with flat
presses and properly “under-” or “overlaid,” there was attained a
degree of perfection in lines and shading which raised the pictures
almost to the rank of steel and copperplate engravings. Many of those
engaged in the work of drawing and cutting were possessed of a skill
which would have won for them distinction in other artistic lines.

This, practically, was the condition of the profession when the end of
the first half of the nineteenth century had been reached. Even then,
however, the question of a substitute was under severe consideration
in scientific as well as artistic circles. Experiments were made
with copper, acids, and zinc, but satisfactory results could not be
obtained. It was not until 1860 that a successful substitute was
produced. Gillot, a Frenchman, brought forth a system of etching. By
this means a photograph from an artist’s drawing was placed above a
plate of gelatine, chemically sensitized. The parts of the gelatine
exposed to the light became hard, and the remainder was brushed away
with warm water. From this an electrotype could be made directly. That
process has given way to the present system of photographing on zinc,
and the use of acid baths for etching. Other improvements—principally
the use of the screen—have resulted in the production of half-tones
which are highly satisfactory in newspaper work. By this means there
can be produced such reproductions as give the features of persons so
that recognition is as easy as in the case of photographs. With the
aid of different sizes of screens, backgrounds are secured which add
materially to the artistic excellence of the pictures. So well done is
the work in this direction that the plates can be used on the curved
cylinders of the huge octuple presses, and enormous editions are
printed from them. The peculiarity of this process is that the original
can be reduced or enlarged so as to suit any width of column or page
without affecting one way or the other the fineness of the work. Pen
and ink drawings made by artists are photographed and backgrounded
with the utmost accuracy as to design and detail. It has been found,
however, that scenes in half-tones do not give as much satisfaction as
do portraits, and it is believed to be only a question of time when
there is a return to line engravings so far as the newspapers are
concerned.

When one compares the photographic reproductions which appear in the
magazines and newspapers of to-day with those of even ten years ago,
there is seen an advancement which tells a wonderful story of the
rapid march of artistic taste. The outline picture—excellent of its
kind—has the appearance of crudity almost grotesque when placed beside
the life-like half-tone reproduction of photographic art.

Wood engraving has been relegated to the days of the hand-press, the
mail news-carrier and the plaster of Paris process of stereotyping.
Inventive genius not only has advanced for the printing press and its
adjuncts; it has also laid a heavy hand on art, causing it to pause and
consider how soon the pencil and the brush will be superseded entirely
by the rhythmic motion of the machine.

THE CENTURY’S PROGRESS IN MINES AND MINING

BY GEO. A. PACKARD,

_Metallurgist and Mining Engineer_.

When we consider how largely the discovery and exploration of America
was due to the search for mines, that the precious metals might be
found to replenish the depleted treasuries of European monarchs; and
when we note that, as a result of this search, the world’s annual
production of gold and silver had increased in the three hundred years
following the discovery from $5,508,000, in 1500, to $48,995,000 at the
beginning of the nineteenth century, we view with surprise the little
progress made during this period in the art of mining.

At the beginning of the present century, we find in use the same
general methods that were followed in the time of Columbus. The very
first operation—the search for veins—was oftentimes conducted
after the manner of the Middle Ages; for in Pryce’s “Mineralogia
Cornubiensis,” which seems to have been one of the leading works on
mining of the last century, there occurs, among other methods, a
lengthy treatise on “How to Discover Mines by the Sole Virtue of the
Hazel-tree.” Powder, although it had been invented for centuries, had
been so little employed in mining that it was considered merely as a
last resort. In a description of mining methods, another work says:
“The soft vein is generally dug with the spade and turned out into
wooden trays; but the hard veins are knocked out with a gad and a
hammer. If the ore is so hard as to be incapable of breaking it in this
manner, they usually soften it with fire. But a still more expeditious
method is the working with gunpowder. _A small quantity of powder does
great things this way._”

In 1800 the coal miner was working by the naked light of the tallow
dip. Cast-iron rails had been introduced but a few years, and rails of
wrought iron, which could be bent to follow the curves of the drifts,
were unheard of. The cars were pushed along the levels by boys. Water
power, where it could be obtained and applied by means of the overshot
wheel, was in general use for pumping, hoisting, and ventilating. But
from many a mine the ore was raised by women, who pulled the bucket
up “by walking away with the end of the rope” which passed from them
over a sheave and thence down the shaft. In places the ore was still
carried up the steep inclines to the surface on the backs of women and
girls. Ventilation, when not secured by natural means, was obtained by
bellows operated by men or mechanically. A mine which had been worked
to a depth of one thousand feet was extraordinary. Though steam power,
applied in the form of what was known as the atmospheric engine, a
device utilizing for suction the vacuum formed by the condensation of
steam in a chamber, had been used for years in draining mines, the
steam engine, as invented by Watt, had been introduced for hoisting
in only a few places. The power was applied to turn a long crank arm,
which rotated the drum.

At the beginning of the century the mines of Cornwall, which were the
greatest producers in Great Britain, were turning out about 5,000,000
pounds of tin and 10,000,000 pounds of copper a year, while the whole
United Kingdom was furnishing only 170,000 tons of iron. South America
was the greatest producer of gold and silver, wonderfully rich mines
of the latter having been found in Peru and Chile. Humboldt places the
production of the whole South American continent for the year 1800 at
691,625 pounds of silver and 9900 pounds of gold.

The United States at that time had practically no mining within its
borders. Some small mines of iron, lead, and copper, which had been
opened to supply the demands created by the Revolution, were producing
spasmodically; but even as late as 1821, William Keating, in an address
before the American Philosophical Society, said, “Upon the whole we
think we may be warranted in saying that there are as yet no mines in
activity in the United States. Coal, in most places, is taken from the
surface, or dug from the foot of a hill. The lead mines of Missouri are
rich and abundant, but the mining is a mere pilfering of the richest
spots.”

In 1801 the Cornish pumping system was introduced. A long rod,
extending from the surface to the bottom of the shaft, operates
simultaneously a series of pumps placed, one above the other, at
intervals of about two hundred and fifty feet. The lowest one lifts the
water from the pump and delivers it into a tank from which the next one
draws its supply, and this in turn forces it up to a higher tank. With
this improved means of drainage mines began to be sunk deeper, a depth
of three thousand feet having been reached with this method of pumping.
The manufacture of iron pumps, which had begun to replace wooden ones
toward the end of the eighteenth century, decreased the amount of
repairs necessary on the pumps, and aided in making possible better
arrangement of underground work.

It was at about this time, the beginning of the present century, that
the method of opening ground by shafts, levels, and raises, which we
refer to as “blocking out ore,” began to be more generally adopted,
displacing the former mode of following down the ore by a series of
irregular, isolated excavations. With it came overhead stoping, in
which, after the shaft has been sunk, the level driven and timbered,
and a raise made, the miner begins breaking down the ore from over his
head, allowing it to run down into chutes. From these it is drawn out
into cars pushed along the tracks in the level. The waste is allowed
to accumulate on top of the stulls, or timbers, forming the top of the
level above referred to, and serves as a platform upon which the miner
stands in breaking down more ore.

The invention of the safety lamp, in 1815, is probably the most
important event of the early part of the century. Previous to this the
miners fired the gas in the “rooms” with their candles, which were
raised toward the roof with the aid of a long pole, the miners lying
flat on the floor of the level to escape the blaze, and sometimes
putting on wet jackets to avoid being scorched. As first invented by
Davy, the safety lamp consisted merely of a cylinder of wire gauze
surrounding the flame, much as the flame is surrounded by a glass globe
in the modern lantern, except that the diameter of the cylinder did not
exceed two inches. This was based upon the theory that the gas set on
fire by the light would burn inside the gauze without heating it hot
enough to ignite the gas outside. The principle was correct, and the
lamp worked satisfactorily when carefully used under proper conditions.
It was soon found, however, that in a strong air current, or if swung
at a more rapid speed than six feet per second in an explosive mixture,
the surrounding gas would be ignited. As a man walking naturally
on the surface moves at a rate of between five and six feet per
second, it will be easily seen that even were the speed considerably
diminished underground,—and any one who has tried to follow a mine
foreman through mine workings knows the speed slackening is slight,—a
very slight swing of the arm would bring the rate of movement of the
lantern up to the danger point. Another and a very unexpected factor
in causing explosions with the new lamp also developed; and that
was the great carelessness of the men who used it. Armed with this
device, and deluded by the quietly burning flame, the miner would seat
himself upon a pile of coal, draw forth his pipe and fill it, and
deliberately open the gauze to light it. As a consequence, for a time
after the introduction of the safety-lamp, the number of accidents
from explosions increased. This latter difficulty, the recklessness of
the miners, was presently overcome by having the lamps locked, and by
depriving the men of all matches before admitting them to the mine.
An improved lamp, introduced by Clanny, wherein the lower part of the
cylinder was replaced by glass, partially protected the flame from
strong air currents, and also gave a better light. Later, Müseler added
an interior sheet iron chimney, which divides the air current so that
the hot air does not strike directly against the gauze, and the lamp as
thus improved is very largely used, especially in Europe.

[Illustration: SINKING, DRIFTING, AND STOPING WITH THE
INGERSOLL-SERGEANT DRILLS.]

In 1831 the safety fuse was invented, a train of powder having been
used before this for firing the charges. The same year a patent was
granted to Moses Shaw of New York for an electrical device to fire
several charges at once. It was at about this time, too, that the
man-engine was invented in Germany. Some miner, noticing the slow and
steady up and down motion of the long rods which operated the pumps
in the Cornish system, had conceived the idea of nailing steps on to
them at intervals, and riding up and down. As mines grew deeper and
the time and labor required for the men to get down to their work
increased, a special engine, utilizing an improvement of this device,
was employed for raising and lowering men. This “man-engine” consisted
of two parallel beams, moving slowly up and down the shaft with a
reciprocating motion, the length of the stroke being about twelve feet.
Upon these beams small platforms were nailed at distances equal to the
length of the stroke. The miner wishing to descend stepped upon the
top platform of one beam as it started on its down stroke. At the end
of this stroke he found himself twelve feet down the shaft, on a level
with the second platform of the other beam, which had in the mean time
been coming up, and he stepped across on to this, which now began its
down stroke. Thus by constantly stepping from one rod to the other at
the completion of each down stroke, he was conveyed to the bottom. By
reversing the process he was raised to the surface.

[Illustration: INGERSOLL-SERGEANT DUPLEX STEAM-ACTUATED AIR COMPRESSOR.]

In general, mining progress was slow up to the middle of the century.
The production of the baser metals, here and abroad, increased
gradually with the demands of the mechanic arts, but it was not until
the middle of the century that this factor, joined with the improved
methods of transportation, and of metallurgy, gave to mining that
impetus which, though through alternate recurring waves of prosperity
and stagnation, carried it forward until the annual expenditure for
technical skill, machinery, and supplies used in the industry is
estimated to-day at one thousand million dollars.

The first mining excitement in the United States occurred in 1829,
following the discovery of gold in the South; but these fields soon
declined in importance without resulting in any improvements to mining
methods and machinery.

The next mining fever resulted from the inauguration of work upon the
copper properties at Keweenaw Point, Mich., in 1845. This caused the
first mining-stock speculation in this country, and it is interesting
to note that the century closes with a repetition of this same fever,
founded upon almost the same ground. Yet the conditions have changed
wonderfully. Upon the then barren peninsula, whitened with the tents
of speculators and geologists, has grown up a multitude of towns,
filled with thousands of people whose labors are performed at a depth
of nearly a mile under ground. Thousands more transport the ore to the
mills, separate the copper from the rock, and cut timber for the mines;
while yet other thousands prepare food and clothing and shelter for
all these. During 1898, the copper mines about Lake Superior produced
nearly 160,000,000 pounds of copper, and paid in dividends $6,490,000.

[Illustration: THE SERGEANT ROCK DRILL.]

This district is the only one in the United States where the man-engine
has been used; but as the shafts were sunk deeper and deeper, it was
found that even this method was not sufficiently rapid, and the men are
now lowered into the mines by cages or skips. A “cage” is simply the
miners’ name for the ordinary elevator when used underground, and has
developed from the bucket in use at the beginning of the century. A
“skip” is a car especially designed for use on an incline. The roadway
upon which the skip runs is so planned, at the top of the shaft, that
the rear wheels run upon a track raised above the one over which the
front wheels pass, so that the rear end is elevated and the skip is
dumped automatically. At the De Beers diamond mines in South Africa
are two of these skips which hold nearly five tons of rock each. At
the bottom of the shaft are chutes containing the rock, and when the
skip is in position a man pulls a lever, allowing the ore to run into
it. Another pull closes the chute, a button is touched which rings a
bell in the engine-room, and the skip starts up the shaft. At the top
it dumps itself and returns to be filled again. In the mean time the
other skip has been filled and is going up while the first is coming
down. With these two skips, making ninety-two trips an hour, over four
thousand tons of rock have been hoisted in less than twelve hours, from
a depth of 1250 feet.

To handle these enormous quantities tremendous hoisting engines are
used. At the Calumet and Hecla mines is a pair of quadruple expansion
engines which will lift cages, carrying six tons of ore, a mile in a
minute and a half. The “Modoc” hoist, built for the Anaconda Mining
Company of Butte, Montana, is the largest hoist in the world. It is
a double compound beam engine, and is designed to be used in sinking
to a depth of 6000 feet. This machine weighs four hundred tons, and
has seven separate subordinate engines for use in operating it. Think
of it! An engine so ponderous that smaller engines are necessary to
apply the clutches that set the reels in motion; other engines set
the brakes, and another reverses the action, if need be. All these
are controlled by levers operated from the engineer’s platform, the
“runner” having one foot and seven hand levers to handle. Besides these
there are two indicator discs, directly in front, requiring constant
attention, for these show the exact position of the cage in the shaft.
Yet such wonderful skill have the runners in the control of these
veritable flying machines that they instantly interpret the complicated
signals, and drop the cage with such exactness that the car of ore
is run from the track in the level to the track on the cage, almost
without a jar.

[Illustration: INGERSOLL-SERGEANT STEAM-DRIVEN AIR COMPRESSOR.]

Nor is the hoist the only large machine necessary in the equipment of
the modern mining plant, for in sinking to great depths vast quantities
of water have to be removed. The Chapin Mining Company, at Iron
Mountain, Mich., have one of the largest pumping engines in the world.
This engine is located on the surface, driving the pumps after the
Cornish style, though it would be difficult to see much of the pump of
1801 in this magnificent machine. With a ten-foot stroke it conveys the
power to the pumps through a walking beam weighing a hundred tons. In
an hour it will raise nearly 200,000 gallons of water from a depth of a
quarter of a mile.

[Illustration: DRIVING A RAILWAY TUNNEL WITH THE INGERSOLL “ECLIPSE”
ROCK DRILL.]

Imagine the miner of 1800 “softening by fire” sufficient ore to supply
a modern hoist. For the mines which now turn out 2000 tons a day can by
no means be counted on one’s fingers, and 2000 tons means more than a
foot deep over a whole city block. Before the middle of the century the
use of powder and drill had largely increased, and in 1845 an attempt
was made to aid the man behind the drill with a machine which swung a
hammer by steam power. In 1805 a machine was invented using compressed
air in a cylinder, and this was gradually improved until it became a
success in 1861, in the Mont Cenis tunnel. As finally employed, the
power drill is practically a small engine, the drill being attached to
the piston rod and moved rapidly back and forth by compressed air or
steam. The machine has three functions: to strike the blow, turn the
drill, and advance it, as the hole is driven deeper and deeper.

[Illustration: INGERSOLL-SERGEANT STRAIGHT LINE AIR COMPRESSOR.]

Soon after the machine drill became a success dynamite was invented,
and these two have been the greatest factors in bringing about that
rapid development and production which is the most pronounced attribute
of modern mining. Dynamite alone has doubled the amount of ore which
can be extracted from a face in a given time. Le Neve Foster, in his
work on mining, gives the rate of advance in driving a tunnel by fire
setting at two fathoms per month. Compare with this the Niagara Falls
tunnel, driven with power drills and high explosives, 342 feet in four
weeks.

It is probably to the power drill more than to anything else that we
are indebted for the development of the air compressor; the exhaust
from a steam drill and the heat emitted from the pipes being very
disagreeable under ground. As early as 1800 a Welsh engineer had
attempted to run a blast by means of a water power a mile and a half
distant, but it was not until 1865 that machines were operated to
any extent by compressed air. The great difficulty had been the loss
of efficiency, owing to the clearance spaces and the heating of the
air. In driving the Mont Cenis tunnel but 16 per cent of the power
developed was available, and up to 1880 the efficiency was extremely
low; but to-day as high as 80 per cent is obtained. The air compressor
is simply a force pump with ingenious devices to overcome the loss of
energy. For ordinary use the air is compressed to a pressure of from
60 to 80 pounds per square inch. This is done in a single cylinder for
low pressures, but for high pressures two cylinders are used. From the
compressor the air is conducted to a reservoir, from which it is piped
to the machine which it is to run.

[Illustration: INGERSOLL-SERGEANT DUPLEX STEAM-DRIVEN AIR COMPRESSOR.]

One of the advantages of air-driven machines under ground is that the
exhaust furnishes fresh air to the miners and cools the atmosphere. The
result has been that in metal mines, where there are no noxious gases
escaping from the ground, the exhaust from the air-drills, together
with the natural air currents, has supplied sufficient ventilation.
In the coal mines, however, it has been necessary to employ other
means. After it was found that, even with the safety-lamp, gas would
be exploded if a large amount of it had accumulated, more attention
was paid to ventilation. Levels and shafts were divided to produce
a natural current; the size of the drifts was carefully figured in
order to regulate it; doors were put in to compel it to follow the
faces; devices were adopted to split it, a part going to one room, the
remainder to a second; and boxes were built to carry one current across
another. Early in the century hand fans run by a wheel and pinion had
been employed for forcing the air down the shaft, but it was soon found
that the circulation produced in this way was inferior to the result
of eduction. Large furnaces were then constructed at the bottom of the
upcast shafts, in order to cause a strong upward current. Again, huge
air pumps, run by machinery, were tried for exhausting the air. By 1850
exhaust fans were coming into use, and these, occasionally replaced
by blowers, also used for exhausting, are now generally employed. The
Guibal, which has been the most prominent of the fans, has been made as
large as forty-six feet in diameter. The Capell, which is an improved
form of the Guibal, has six curved veins, or blades, and is made from
eight feet to fifteen feet in diameter. It is driven quite rapidly,
making from one hundred and eighty to three hundred revolutions,
and having a capacity of from one hundred thousand to three hundred
thousand cubic feet of air, per minute. The result of this thorough
ventilation is that the gas is removed from the mine almost as rapidly
as it enters, and often the safety-lamp is no longer needed by the
common miner. Nevertheless, it has by no means become useless, since
as an indicator of the presence of gas it is invaluable. The action of
the different lamps in the presence of gas varies, but in general the
size of the flame increases in direct proportion to the increase in the
amount of gas mixed with the air. Each morning, before the men go to
work, the fire boss takes his safety-lamp and makes the round of the
mine. When he goes into a room he watches the flame, and if it burns up
to the point which indicates that it would not be safe to enter with a
naked light, he makes a mark on the wall which serves as a danger line
beyond which the men do not go.

Another machine, which, like the fan, has been developed by the demands
of the coal mines, is the coal-cutting machine. Probably the lot of
no man was as hard as that of the coal-digger at the beginning of
the century. After he had performed the dangerous task of exploding
the accumulated gases, he was often forced to work all day lying in
the most constrained attitude. Applied in this manner, his power was
largely wasted, and much useless dust and small coal was produced. The
first effort at relief was a machine which imitated the miner, striking
a blow with a pick worked by a lever, and making as high as seventy
blows a minute. These have been generally replaced by quite another
type of machine, one which depends on the action of either a rotary
bar, a rotary wheel, or a chain cutter. These machines are operated by
either air or electricity. The Jeffrey rotary bar cutter will undercut
a block of coal thirty-nine inches by fifty-four inches in six minutes.
The chain-cutter is an endless chain carrying cutting knives and
traveling horizontally. It is claimed that these machines will effect a
saving of about ten cents a ton in the cost of mining.

When in 1848 the finding of gold in California was reported, followed
in 1851 by the discovery of the Australian fields, large numbers of men
were attracted to the placer mines, who later, as the placers became
exhausted, turned their attention to vein mining. Nor did hydraulic
mining itself fail to progress. When the placers were first discovered,
the miner, standing in the shallow stream, washed the gravel, a panful
at a time, and secured from fifteen to twenty-five dollars a day. As
the placers became poorer he built sluices, and, shoveling in his
gravel, turned the stream in to wash off the light rock, while the
heavy gold was caught in the interstices between the blocks with which
he had paved the bottom. If the ground became clayey, he brought part
of the water through a hose and used it to break up the lumps in his
sluice box. Then as he gradually removed the gravel and the banks about
him became higher, he turned his hose toward the bank and brought
more water from a higher level, until, to quote Bowie, “a forty-inch
wrought-iron pipe has been substituted for canvas hose and a stovepipe,
and an inch stream replaced by a river of water discharged through a
nine-inch nozzle under a four-hundred-foot pressure.” By this means, at
North Bloomfield, Cal., nearly a million yards of gravel, containing
but two and nine tenths cents per cubic yard, was moved in a single
season, and at a profit.

[Illustration: ELECTRIC COAL-MINING MACHINE.]

As the banks became poorer, the miners turned their attention to the
river beds. In New Zealand, in the early days, they worked the banks as
far down into the river as they could reach with a spoon dredge. Then a
dredge was made resembling a ladder of buckets, continually revolving,
and operated by wheels driven by the current. When the river got low
the current became too weak, and a steam engine was substituted. Then a
revolving screen was put on to separate the large rocks from the fine
sand, and gradually the modern dipper dredge has been evolved, with
its pumps, screen, distributors, and tables and sluices, handling 2000
yards of gravel a day at a cost of three cents a yard.

In 1859 the Comstock lode in Nevada was discovered, and it is to this
district that we owe the “square set” method of timbering, so largely
in vogue in wide veins to-day. Some of the “bonanzas,” that is, pockets
of rich ore, were of enormous size. For example, one found in the
“Gould and Curry” was 400 feet long, 80 feet wide, and 400 feet deep.
As the walls were not sufficiently solid to stand unsupported, and a
single stick of timber was too short to reach across, splicing was
tried. It was soon found that this weakened the timber too much, and
the method of square “setting” was invented. This consists in framing
timbers together in rectangular sets, having a square base of four
pieces, usually six feet long, placed horizontally as sills. Into these
are framed posts, surmounted by a cap of four additional timbers which
become the base for the next set. The timbers are usually twelve inches
square, and cost on the Comstock about $10 a set. From 1870 to 1891
there is said to have been used up on the Comstock 200,000 acres of
forest, valued at $45,000,000.

The amount of timber which is consumed under ground in a single year
must be enormous. Mr. C. W. Goodale estimates that in Butte alone, in
1895, 37,500,000 feet, equal to 3750 carloads, were used in the mines.
As the timber decays in from five to fifteen years, and has to be
replaced, efforts are constantly directed toward decreasing the large
expense which is thus continually recurring. In shafts and levels for
permanent use iron is an economical substitute. Wherever possible, new
methods of mining are being introduced. Thus in the Lake Superior iron
regions, the mine development is planned along lines almost unheard of
ten years ago. In the first place the gravel which overlies the ore is
stripped off, even if it is fifty feet thick. This is done with steam
shovels, which load the gravel upon cars. These are then pulled away by
one locomotive while a second places new “empties” in position to be
filled. One shovel will load from 150 to 175 cars a day; that is, will
take from 3500 to 4500 tons of dirt from the sides of the pit and put
it upon the cars. This method obviates the use of timber for holding up
the surface.

After the overlying gravel is removed, should the conditions be
favorable, the ore is taken out with a shovel. If this cannot be done,
some method depending on rock-filling is adopted. At the Auburn mine,
after stripping and driving the levels, raises are made to the surface
at intervals of about fifty feet, the ore broken down around them,
starting at the surface, and dropped down through them. This leaves
openings in the shape of inverted cones, having their bases at the
surface. Additional raises are then made halfway between the others,
and the remaining material extracted.

[Illustration: GOLD DREDGING ON SWAN RIVER, COLORADO.]

At the Fayal mine they take out rooms twenty-four feet wide by three
hundred feet long, with a twenty-four-foot pillar between them. These
rooms are carried up from the first level to the surface, and filled
with gravel which is run in from above. Then the pillars are mined by
“slicing and caving;” that is, by running drifts along the sides of
the pillar and caving the ore down from the roof. After removing this
ore another drift is run, the roof caved, and another slice taken off.
It is claimed the saving in timber by using this method amounts to ten
cents on each ton of ore mined.

All of these, and many other inventions, have constantly tended to
decrease mining costs. Yet the industry is carried on to-day in so
many out-of-the-way places, and under such varying conditions, that
the cost per ton of the ore mined vacillates between wide extremes. As
an example of what can be accomplished, working on a large scale, and
where supplies are easily and quickly obtained, the Atlantic mine, in
Michigan, may be mentioned. This mine produced, in 1898, 370,000 tons
of ore, at a cost of sixty-six cents per ton.

With all these wonderful advances in mine mechanics, engineering,
ventilation, and lighting, have come the foundation and development
of mining schools, the rise of technical societies, and a general
governmental recognition of the importance of the industry. It is
not so very far back in the preceding century that we find among the
statutes of England the following: “Stealing ore out of mines is no
larceny, except only those of black lead, the stealing ore out of
which is felony without benefit of clergy.” It would be interesting to
know the name of the gentleman who owned the black-lead mine, for, in
modern parlance, he certainly “had a pull.” By 1833 mining legislation
had so far progressed in England that laws were enacted regulating
the employment of children under ground. In this country, in 1830, a
state geological survey was inaugurated by Massachusetts, and this
institution has since been copied by many States. The majority of the
States where mining is carried on have passed laws tending to increase
the safety of men working under ground.

Abroad, carefully prepared codes describe the method of lease or sale
of mining rights, and define the rights of owners of ground. In this
country the first legislation of this character was in 1807, when the
government mineral bearing lands were withdrawn from sale and ordered
leased. In 1834 the miners refused to pay the royalty, owing to the
large number of illegal entries, and in 1847 the lands were opened to
sale. It was not until 1866, after fifteen years of self-government
among the miners of the West, that Congress earnestly undertook to
regulate the acquisition of mining titles on the public domain. Leagues
beyond the towns, miles from the nearest roads, hurrying from the
scene of one excitement to another, pushed by the crowd of constantly
arriving adventurers, with surveyors unobtainable and courts not
accessible, almost without time to measure, and in a region absolutely
unlocatable, it had been impossible for the miner of the West to
secure a legal title to his land as contemplated by the act of 1847.
Accordingly, there had grown up the custom which gave to the discoverer
of a lode the right to a certain length of it, and it was this right
which was recognized by Congress, and became the basis of the law of
1866.

So far our story has been of progress, but what shall we say of the
action of Congress, which, in 1872, abrogated this law and substituted
for it the prolific breeder of litigation called the law of the apex?
To quote Dr. Raymond: “The leading characteristic differs from all
previous mining laws of this or any other country. The old right of
discovery, which was the basis of the miner’s title down to 1872, has
dwindled under the present law to a nominal importance. It is true that
the discovery of the lode within the claim is made a prerequisite to
location. But the right to follow the lode in depth beyond the side
lines of the claim depends no longer upon having discovered it, but
on having included its top, or apex, in the surface survey.” Should
the miner be so fortunate as to have a vein which outcrops plainly on
the surface, he may stake out the ground without difficulty, so that
the vein crosses the end lines. But if his vein does not appear on the
surface, and he fails to guess its direction correctly, and finds, on
developing, that it does not cross the end lines of his claim, he is
suddenly cut off from all extra-lateral rights. Or should he, in laying
out his lines along the rough, precipitous mountain-side, fail to make
his end lines parallel, he again finds his rights limited. Nor has
this law been made clearer by court decisions, but rather it has been
complicated.

[Illustration: THE POWER PLANT AT JEROME PARK, N. Y.

(Ingersoll-Sergeant Duplex Corliss Condensing Air Compressor.)]

Certainly this is a peculiar condition of affairs. The century which
has witnessed an advance from the hazel rod to the diamond drill,
from the spade to the steam shovel, from fire softening to dynamite
shattering; a century during which a clumsy car pushed over cast-iron
rails by a boy has grown to a cable train, and a two-hundred-pound
bucket raised by women has developed into a six-ton self-dumping skip
hoisted by electricity; a century productive of new devices which
tunnel mountains, cross ravines, or sink through quicksands with equal
ease; a century which has seen the touch of a button and the turn of a
wheel bring power from thirty miles away to light and drain the mine,
as well as operate the drills and hoist; such a century closes with a
law in force in the greatest mining country in the world which makes
litigation one of the expected stages of mine development.

At the beginning of the century the mining engineer advised where to
sink, the manner of working, and the method of dealing with the water:
to-day he must not only be a mining, civil, and hydraulic expert, but a
mechanical and electrical engineer, a chemist, and a lawyer.

The time was when he who leveled forests, built himself a home, and
brought the land under cultivation, was regarded as the true pioneer
of civilization. In later times the miner fairly divides this honor.
Pursuing a hazardous occupation, he has invaded most out-of-the-way and
desolate places, creating untold wealth, founding towns and States,
and inviting vast and substantial populations. By his industry and
enterprise he has not only revealed the seventy-seven non-metallic
underground products which in the United States alone, in 1899, had
a value approximating $500,000,000, but the twelve metals—precious
and useful—whose value in the same year approximated $270,000,000.
Around his gold mines—deep and placer—have grown California, Nevada,
the Dakotas, Colorado, and even Alaska; while empires have sprung up
at the sound of his pick and the introduction of his mighty machinery
in Australasia and South Africa. In the development of silver he
has contributed wealth, population, and institutions to Colorado,
Nevada, Utah, Montana, and Arizona. His iron and copper mines have
transformed the barren coasts of the Great Lakes. The quicksilver mines
of Southern California brought San José and other towns to wealth and
importance. In the history of Ureka and Leadville, Col., we have the
romance of both the gold and lead mine. And so, whether the miner
unearths the ores, the coals, the wonderful variety of buried materials
which nature has provided for the use and comfort of mankind, he so
frequently becomes the source of wealth, population, and permanent
civic organization as to give him high rank among the “true pioneers of
civilization.”

ART PROGRESS OF THE CENTURY

BY JOHN V. SEARS,

_Art Critic Philadelphia “Evening Telegraph.”_

I. PAINTING

At no period since the Renaissance has there been such marked progress
in certain walks of art as during the period of reconstruction in the
political, social, economic, and æsthetic world immediately following
the French Revolution of 1798. The armies of France, returning from
the conquest of Europe, brought home to Paris the treasures of art
ravished from the great capital cities. The vast public galleries
and numerous private collections established under the first Empire
contained accumulations of pictures, marbles, bronzes, tapestries,
decorations, and bric-à-brac brought from Italy, from Germany, from
the Low Countries, from Spain, and even from Russia and Egypt, of
extent and value unparalleled in the history of the human race. These
treasures were dispersed under the Restoration and returned to their
former owners; but, in the meantime, their educational influence upon
the people of France, and especially of Paris, had produced profound
and permanent impressions which abide to this day. To this practical
education afforded by the models and examples of all that is noble and
exalted, gathered from the galleries and safe deposits of the civilized
world, France is primarily indebted for that cultured skill and that
refinement of good taste which have enabled her to take and hold her
acknowledged position as the leading nation in the realm of art in the
nineteenth century.

At the beginning of the century the art of France was resting inert in
the bonds of classic tradition. Academic conventionality held almost
undisputed sway; only a few painters of portraits, as, for example,
Madame Vigée-Lebrun, Isabey, and decorative artists like Greuze,
venturing beyond the limits of the hard and fast rules prescribed
by scholastic pedants. The only subjects regarded as legitimate for
artistic treatment were illustrations of mythology or of Greek or
Roman literature. Sacred pictures illustrating the Biblical narratives
and lives of the saints were permitted for church adornment and
for religious purposes; but historic and story-telling pictures of
the order now known as genre were classic in subject and academic
in treatment. Even in portraiture, where a likeness was the main
consideration, military heroes were represented in Greek armor and
distinguished civilians were invested with the dignity of the Roman
toga.

The high priest of ancient pagan worship in France during the first
quarter of the century was Jacques Louis David (1748–1825). David was
a master of such real power that he was court painter to Louis XVI.,
director of Fine Arts under the Republic, and again court painter to
the Emperor Napoleon. His great work, “The Oath of the Horatii,” now
in the Louvre, first exhibited in 1784, was universally admired and
is still highly esteemed. This was followed by a triumphal procession
of classic compositions, the most notable of which were “The Rape of
the Sabines,” usually considered to be his masterpiece, “The Death of
Socrates,” “Paris and Helen,” and “Brutus and His Sons,” all of which
have been reproduced many times in prints. David was influenced, late
in his career, by the romantic reaction, as shown by his “Napoleon
Crossing the Alps” and his “Floating Martyr,” but he championed classic
art all his life, his last words expressing an aspiration to paint the
head of Leonidas.

The downfall of the classic dominion in France was brought about by the
revolt of Géricault and Delacroix, about 1820. Jean Louis Géricault
(1791–1824) was declared by Viardot to have revealed an era when
liberty in art was revived together with political liberty, joining the
general movement of the human spirit in the march of progress toward
independence. His epoch-marking picture, “The Raft of the Medusa,” in
the Salon of 1819, created an intense excitement not only in artistic
circles, where it opened the battle between romance and classic
tradition, but also among the people. Instead of Greek heroes, posing
like antique statues, this thrilling picture portrayed a group of
French sailors, perishing amid the horrors of shipwreck and starvation,
the subject being a scene in the awful tragedy incident to the loss
of the frigate Medusa in 1816, a calamity which the nation was then
mourning with unspeakable grief. Women wept and strong men paled before
this terrible illustration of human agonies endured unto death, but the
academicians attacked the work and the artist with almost savage fury.
Géricault, a genius, sensitive and nervous, quailing before the storm
which beat upon him, fled to England, but, pining in exile, returned
home, only to die, crushed and broken-hearted.

Ferdinand Victor Eugène Delacroix (1798–1863) was a man of firmer fibre
than his friend and fellow-student, and his was the strong hand to take
up the gage of battle when Géricault fell in the fight. For daring to
depart from the classic traditions, these two young painters of the
commonplace subjects of every-day human tragedy and romantic drama were
savagely denounced by the academicians as traitors, as charlatans, as
assassins seeking to murder art. The persecution killed Géricault,
but Delacroix laughed at it. As Théophile Souvestre said of him: “The
blindness of ignorance, the intrigues and clamors of envy, have not
arrested him for an instant in his valiant and glorious course.” By the
splendor of his genius and the virility of his work, as shown in his
great pictures, “The Bride of Abydos,” “The Two Foscari,” “The Amende
Honorable,” and the magnificent series of Oriental studies by which he
is best known, he established the romantic school on a firm basis and
attracted to it nearly all the talented and promising young painters of
Paris.

Among these students and unknown painters were many whose names
subsequently became famous, as Horace Vernet, Paul Delaroche, Baron
Gros, Ary Scheffer, Alexandre Decamps,—artists whose noble productions
gave to the romantic school its finest triumphs. In the mean time,
classic art was ably and effectively supported by the distinguished
labors of Doménique Ingres, pupil and successor of David, Guillaume
Guillon-Lethière, Hippolyte Flandrin, and Jean Baptiste Regnault. The
Academy, though defeated, still lives, and modern lovers of art find
that, especially in decorative design, there is much to admire in
classic subjects.

After the revolt of the romanticists the most important movement in
the world of art also took place in France, and is known as the
“Revolution of 1830.” To understand this movement it is necessary to
consider the state of art in England, as the “men of 1830” in France
derived their inspiration from John Constable, an English landscape
painter. At the beginning of the century the two great artists of
England were Sir David Wilkie and J. M. W. Turner. David Wilkie
(1785–1841) was a portrait, historic, and genre painter, and no English
artist up to his time had ever attained such wide popularity as he
enjoyed. His pictures are all known the world over, as witness such
titles as “The Rent Day,” “Village Politicians,” “The Blind Fiddler,”
“King Alfred in the Neatherd’s Cottage,” “The Village Festival,”
“Reading the Will,” “The Chelsea Pensioners,” “Blind Man’s Buff,” “The
Village School,” and “John Knox preaching.”

[Illustration: THE HOLY WOMEN AT THE TOMB.]

Joseph Mallord William Turner (1775–1851) was one of the most
remarkable artists that ever lived; a most original genius, “without
ancestors and without heirs.” He was a landscape painter and a most
earnest and faithful student of nature, as shown by his wonderful
illustrations, in black and white, of the scenery of England and
Wales. In his paintings, however, he interpreted rather than portrayed
nature, investing his subjects with the grandeur and glory of his
imagination. His pictures were “golden dreams,” revealing the beauty,
the majesty, the sadness, and the terror inspired by nature, not from
observed details “but from the image or ideal in his own mind.” Of
his many masterworks mention can only be made here of “Crossing the
Brook,” “Dido in Carthage,” “Palestrina,” “The Golden Bough,” “Hannibal
Crossing the Alps,” “The Slave Ship,” “Battle of the Nile,” “Burial
of Sir David Wilkie at Sea,” and perhaps the greatest of all, “The
Fighting Téméraire.”

Turner created no school and left no successor, but he made a distinct
impression on the art of England by stimulating an active interest
in landscape painting. Patrick Nasmyth, Augustus Wall Callcott, John
Linnell, and a score of artists turned to the study of rural scenery,
with the result that they succeeded in establishing what is known as
the Norwich school of landscape art. By far the most important name in
the annals of this period, after Turner’s, is that of John Constable
(1776–1837). Constable presents the contrast of diametric opposition
to Turner. His pictures, so far from being “golden dreams,” are more
like cast-iron realities. When Turner was an idealist, Constable
was an uncompromising realist. If the one painted poetry, the other
painted prose, and often very rugged, plain prose indeed. While Turner
subordinated fact to fancy, illuminating his subjects with the glow
of his fervid imagination, Constable devoutly stood before nature in
the attitude of a worshiper, and faithfully labored to represent as
truthfully as his powers permitted exactly what he beheld. In contrast
with the shining canvases of his brilliant contemporary, Constable’s
pictures seemed dark, dull, and heavy to the British public, and the
original genius of the conscientious artist was not recognized. His
greatest works, “Dedham Vale,” “The White Horse,” “The Hay Cart,”
“Stratford Mill,” “Salisbury Cathedral,” “The Rainbow,” and others were
exhibited in succession during the second decade of the century, before
an indifferent public, only his fellow artists and a few connoisseurs
caring for them, the painter meanwhile starving in neglect.

In 1824 two of his pictures were shown in Paris, and were then
instantly understood and appreciated. They created a profound
impression and, as has been justly said, inaugurated the second
revolution of the century in the realm of art. By this revolution the
artists were driven out of their studios and out of the city, to study
nature in the spirit of humble sincerity shown by John Constable. Among
the young students who went forth to encounter poverty, hardship,
and the severest toil were the “men of 1830,” the founders of the
Barbizon school of painting. Millet, Rousseau, Diaz, Corot, Troyon,
Daubigny, and Dupré left Paris and the ways that then led to success,
and sacrificed themselves to what they saw to be the truth in art. They
carried the study of out-door nature further than ever before; created
the standard of modern landscape art, and attained immortal fame,
though not until their leader and prototype had perished in poverty.

[Illustration: CHRISTMAS CHIMES. (BLASHFIELD.)]

[Illustration: WHISPERS OF LOVE. (BOUGUEREAU.)]

Jean François Millet (1815–1875) has been called the greatest painter
of the nineteenth century, and his masterpiece, “The Angelus,” is
regarded by many as second only to the “Sistine Madonna” of Raphael in
the brief catalogue of the world’s artistic treasures. He lived the
life of a poor peasant in the rural village of Barbizon, attracting
around him, late in life, the ablest of the “men of 1830,” and
producing there those works which have placed his name first on the
annals of our time: “The Sower,” “Waiting,” “Sheep-shearers,” “Woman
Carding,” “The Gleaners,” “Shepherdess and Flock,” and the few others
that constitute the tale of his exceedingly careful and long-considered
compositions.

Théodore Rousseau (1812–1867) was declared, by Edmond About, to be the
Moses who led the landscape painters of France out of the Egyptian
bondage of academic convention into the promised land of liberty,
where rivers ran water, where trees were rooted in the ground, and
where animals lived, moved, and had their being. As late as 1848 the
Salon rejected Rousseau’s noble work, “The Alley of Chestnut Trees,”
one of the finest landscapes ever painted; but this was the last act
of the academic tyrants, the foolish offense against the great master
causing the old classic pedants to be relegated to oblivion. Rousseau
took up his residence in Barbizon, and in the forest of Fontainebleau
and the adjoining country studied those rural and pastoral scenes that
have given him his place as one of the first, if not the very first,
of landscape painters. Of these magnificent examples of landscape art,
mention can only be made here of “The Village,” “A Pool under Oaks,”
“Edge of the Forest at Barbizon,” “A Forest Interior,” “Water Course at
Sologne,” and “Hoar Frost,” these being the pictures best known to the
public through reproductions in black and white.

If Turner was a painter of “golden dreams,” Corot was a painter of
silver dreams; the pearly haze of early morning, the pale sky and
misty tree-forms of a gray day, and the soft, low tones of a still,
cloudy afternoon attracting his loving devotion and commanding the
conscientious exercise of his skill. Jean Baptiste Camille Corot
(1796–1875) was certainly one of the happiest artists that ever lived.
Like the other “men of 1830,” he was ostracized by the Academy, and
he was never allowed to receive the first medal of the Salon, but he
had every other honor and compensation, and, late in life, was given
a magnificent gold medal by popular subscription. For many years he
could not sell a single picture, but, being fortunately independent,
in a modest way, he continued to paint the subjects which, as he said,
delighted his heart, and to treat them, as he again said, “with truth
to your own instincts, to your own method of seeing, with what I call
conscientiousness and sincerity.” In due time Corot conquered his world
and, in the height of his career, was earning not less than $50,000 a
year by his brush. He was a constant visitor at Barbizon, maintained
a close intimacy with his friends, there, and studied in the vicinity
many of the hundreds of landscapes his industrious and tireless hand
rejoicingly produced.

Jules Dupré (1812–1889) and Charles François Daubigny (1817–1878)
are distinguished members of the “1830” group, each standing at the
head of the department of landscape art to which he was especially
devoted. Narcisse-Virgil Diaz de la Peña, called Diaz (1807–1876),
another of the fraternity, was not technically so thoroughly trained
as his fellows, but he was a stronger colorist than any of them and a
romanticist of the most pronounced type. Constant Troyon (1810–1865)
was the most eminent cattle-painter of the century. He came on the
scene after the revolt of Géricault was accomplished, but was in
full sympathy with the movement, and is usually accounted as one of
the revolutionists. So also with Jean Leon Gérôme (1824), an artist
surviving to the close of the century.

He first exhibited in 1847, but he took up the line of Oriental
romance, following Delacroix, and made so strong an impression with
his illustrations of the splendors and glories of the East that his
influence in art will be felt for generations to come. After attaining
fame as a painter, Gérôme also developed marked ability as a sculptor.

In strict chronological order the birth of the pre-Raphaelite movement
in art preceded the “revolution of 1830,” as the event actually
occurred in Rome, about 1812. The movement was not originally known
by the name subsequently given it, and it did not attain to more than
local importance until it was fully developed in England, about 1850.
It is to the great German artist, Peter von Cornelius (1783–1867), that
the honor of originating the pre-Raphaelite revolution must be given.
In 1811 Cornelius went to Rome and soon became the master spirit of
the “Brotherhood of Painters,” popularly called “Nazarites,” banded
together for the study of the thirteenth-century Italians, Cimabue and
Giotto, and their successors in the century following, Gaddi, Simoni,
and Orcagna. This Brotherhood was afterward imitated by Rossetti in
London, and its purposes more fully developed; but it was the young
German enthusiasts of the previous generation who affected a revival
of the pure religious spirit, the devout simplicity, and the absolute
sincerity of the Italian artists before the era of Raphael.

[Illustration: GREEK GIRLS PLAYING AT BALL. (LEIGHTON.)]

Cornelius returned to Germany in 1816, became the founder of what is
known as the Munich school of painting, and was made director of the
Art Institute of that city. He exercised a controlling influence in the
evolution of modern German art and, indirectly, on art in England and
in America. His pupil and successor, Wilhelm von Kaulbach (1805–1874),
imparted vitality and power to the Munich school, attracting to his
classes students from all civilized countries. During the second and
third quarters of this century, Kaulbach reigned as the first artist of
Germany and one of the first in the world.

Dante Gabriel Rossetti (1828–1882) founded his pre-Raphaelite
Brotherhood in London, with John Everett Millais—subsequently
president of the Royal Academy—and William Holman Hunt, in 1848. The
pre-Raphaelite movement gave a richer and stronger color to English
painting in the latter half of the century, and also awakened general
interest in early Christian art, that is, the art of the Italian
Renaissance. Beyond this, Rossetti’s new departure, though widely
advertised by John Ruskin, had very little permanent effect. Millais
soon left the Brotherhood and produced his master-works, the greatest
historic-genre pictures of his time, in England, after outliving
pre-Raphaelite influences.

Little known outside of England, that movement did not entirely absorb
British art, as proved by such a man as G. F. Watts, a master of
portraiture, who made studies of many of the most notable men of the
century in England, besides many imaginative works of great interest.
Others were Holman Hunt, with his powerful religious conceptions, and
the talented Landseer family, the youngest member of which, Edwin, is
world-famous for his animal pictures. The critic and philosopher, John
Ruskin, studied art and became a proficient draughtsman, although never
using his skill professionally. His literary works on art, however,
have had so wide an influence that it seems just to include him in
the list of contributors to art’s progress in this era. His criticism
of the fantastic productions of James McNeill Whistler brought forth
a controversy and law suit, resulting in a verdict of damages of one
farthing to the injured artist, and enough advertising gratis to secure
his fame. The genius of the latter for achieving artistic effects and
personal notoriety are equal to his skill in avoiding oblivion. He is
a unique and interesting figure, despite his abnormal vanity, for his
unquestionable talent in many lines of art, and is American by birth,
English by adoption, and now French by force of circumstances. Edwin
Abbey is also an adopted son of Britain, although born in America.
He is better known through illustrative work in black and white, but
his superb decorations in the Boston Public Library testify to his
great skill as a colorist. The most illustrious growth of foreign
seed on British soil has been Lorenz Alma Tadema, whose wonderful
representations of Greek and Roman life place him _hors concours_ as
an artist, and hold before our eyes a mirror of ancient days. Sir
Frederick Leighton, the recently deceased president of the Royal
Academy, was a true Briton and a leader of modern art in England,
as also was Mrs. Elizabeth Thompson Butler, with her patriotic war
pictures, as vigorous as any man’s could be. A talented young artist,
whose untimely death cut short a promising career, was Frederick
Walker, who is said to have been the original of “Little Billee” in Du
Maurier’s famous novel of student life in the Latin Quarter, “Trilby.”
That masterpiece takes us into the art atmosphere of Paris, and we
readily understand why there is the centre of the artistic circle.

[Illustration: LANDSEER AND HIS FAVORITES. (BY HIMSELF.)]

From thence have risen most of the great modern names, one of the
greatest and most honored being that of Rosa Bonheur, who has received
all possible distinction as an artist and reverence as a woman. Her
animal pictures, especially horses and cattle, are known the world
over, and the story of her early struggle for study, disguised as a
boy, that she might work unmolested where a girl could hardly have
gone, is well known, yet she never renounced an atom of her womanliness
in adopting masculine attire. It is hard to avoid dwelling on the lives
and works of the modern masters, but we must pass over the intermediate
period between the revolt of 1830 and our own day, touching only an
especially shining light here and there, such as Jules Breton, with his
sturdy peasants; Léon Bonnat, Alexandre Cabanel, and Carolus Duran,
with their elegant distingué portraiture. Besides these are Edouard
Détaille and Alphonse de Neuville, showing faithful studies of soldier
life and action; Eugène Fromentin, with his picturesque Arabs; and the
decorative allegories of Puvis de Chavannes. The brilliant Spaniards,
Mariano Fortuny and Don Frederick Madrazo, are practically Frenchmen
in their art, although each is distinctly individual in manner. We
must also mention Vibert, with his delightful little satires on the
human frailities of the holy fathers of the Church, and Meissonier,
the master of exquisite finish in detail, and Passini, with his small
canvases crowded with Oriental figures glowing with color. In addition
to the great French names of this time are Defregger, of the Munich
School; Israels of Amsterdam, Schreyer of Frankfort, whose works all
hold that quality dear to the popular heart, but despised by the high
priests of lofty criticism nowadays, that is, they have a story to
tell, and they tell it.

At the time these men were telling their artistic tales in Europe,
such men as Washington Allston, the first great painter in this
country; Thomas Sully, whose rare works in portraiture entitled him
to paint the Queen of England, Victoria, when a girl; Henry Inman,
also a great portrait painter; George Fuller, a painter of poetic
dreams; and many others of talent, had said their say in America.
Almost with the beginning of the new country, public interest had been
roused in the fine arts by the efforts of such men as Gilbert Stuart
and the Peales, Charles and Rembrandt, who bridged the eighteenth and
nineteenth centuries together, and labored to advance the cause of art.
Schools and academies, with adequate galleries for exhibition purposes,
became necessary; and such institutions as the Pennsylvania Academy
of the Fine Arts and the National Academy of Design in New York were
established. The latter was started in 1802, but did not receive its
charter until 1808; so the Pennsylvania Academy, which was incorporated
in Philadelphia in 1806, was really the first of its kind in the
country. In 1807, the minutes bearing the date of October 8 record as
follows: “Until the funds of the institution will admit of opening a
school on a more extended plan, persons of good character shall be
permitted to make drawings from the statues and busts belonging to
the Academy,” thus showing the humble beginning of art education in
America. Naturally, for many years the facilities for learning were too
limited to supply more than rudimentary instruction, and the pilgrimage
to Paris was a necessity before an artist could feel qualified to
launch out professionally. In these latter days that need no longer
exists, for the great art schools of New York, Philadelphia, Boston,
Chicago, and St. Louis can amply provide all that is required; but the
charm of the Latin Quarter still draws as a magnet all who can afford
to go there.

[Illustration: THE HORSE FAIR. (ROSA BONHEUR.)]

In that centre is a constant mingling of ideas from all sources
seeking new forms of expression, out of which proceed the impulses
that vibrate through the world of current art. Naturally enough many
of the new departures are futile experiments, short lived and not
sufficiently important to discuss; but within recent years the movement
known as impressionism has been so widespread in influence, so radical
in method, and so vital in result, that it has doubtless produced a
permanent effect on art. Like its predecessor, the renaissance after
the dark ages, this _mouvement moderne_ was an upheaval of all forms
of expression; and in painting it seemed as if a wave of dazzling
color had burst over the studios, drenching the canvases with rainbow
tints, flooding the exhibition galleries with bewildering brilliance.
The unaccustomed eye was overwhelmed, and the confused and wondering
public burst into loud outcry against the insane folly of these mad
young painters, who showed purple and green gridirons, speckled with
green and streaked with scarlet, and called them landscapes, marines,
and figure studies as they chose. Of course the pendulum swung to its
limit, the radicals carrying things to extremes after the fashion of
their kind, and making foolish caricatures of work that was really
great. By degrees, however, sober sense prevailed, the new ideas became
better understood, the public point of view changed, and it was seen
that there was method in this madness. The new movement was intended
simply to interpret what the artist saw most forcibly expressed by any
given subject, or, as the name implies, to record his first impression
and convey the idea rather by suggestion than by explicit statement
and detail. Applied to out-of-door subjects, these principles were
carried out by the _plein air_ colorists, as they were styled, from
their efforts to suggest atmosphere glowing with light, a feeling of
space and sunshine. Edouard Manet was the leader of the new school in
figure work, and Claude Monet in landscape. No two styles could be more
widely different save in their mutual abhorrence of detail; the first
dark, heavy, and sombre in color; the latter luminous and palpitating,
every conceivable tint vibrating into harmony, an example which is
followed in this country by Childe Hassam, often successfully, but
sometimes with extravagance. After reaching extreme high-water mark,
the flood of brilliance has somewhat subsided, and latter-day painters
do not find it necessary to observe the world through a prism. While
returning to more sober statements of simple truth, without trying to
copy a kaleidoscope, the vision men have had of pure color sparkling
with light has given them an insight into Mother Nature’s method that
has left a lasting impression upon the minds and manners of the best
workers and lifted the whole tone of modern painting. Whether one was
prepared to enjoy truly impressionistic pictures or not, the force
of them in a collection of works in the old manner of hard outline
and heavy shadow could not fail to be felt like a beam of light in
a dark room. However one might protest against the invader, the old
friends looked dull and flat after a time, in spite of the most
determined loyalty. The style of the Hudson River school was narrow
and petty, full of trifling little details, the color often being
forced and theatrical in effect. The striking scenery of that noble
stream inspired the efforts of American landscape painters of the two
decades from 1830 to 1850. Asher B. Durand was a leader among them,
and for many years the manner of a generation past held sway until the
new method forced a place for itself. It was an amusing experience in
following exhibitions of late years to see, one after another, the
leaders, long established in their own particular methods, finally
breaking away from lifelong habits and coming into line with the new
movement, some keeping step bravely with the vigorous newcomers, some
halting along with pitiful attempts at a jaunty stride. The strong men
neither hung back in sulky indifference nor flung themselves wildly
about in exuberant freedom, but kept quietly on the even tenor of their
way, absorbing what was best in the new, holding fast to what was
best in the old, and producing the kind of work that is independent
of schools and eras, but intrinsically great in itself. In Paris, the
younger workers who began sending strange wild landscape and figure
pictures to the exhibition at the Salon of the Champs Elysées, the most
important annual exhibition in the world, were indignantly rejected by
the horrified jury of selection. Equally indignant at their treatment,
the young painters, who felt themselves to be the coming men, gathered
their rejected treasures together in an independent exhibition of their
own, and established a rival salon in the Champ de Mars, which has come
to hold an equal footing in the world of art with the older institution.

By reference to “men” we do not at all exclude women, for there is no
sex in art, and women of our time paint as well as men, folding equal
rank in the exhibitions, equal places on the juries of selection, and
receiving equal honors and awards. One of the foremost women of the
day is a Philadelphian, Miss Cecilia Beaux, whose portraiture ranks
among the highest. Miss Mary D. Cassatt is also a Philadelphian,
although long resident in Paris, and highly esteemed there. Her name
is mentioned in a recent notice of a Salon exhibition among those of
distinguished men, which concluded with the words “and other strong
men,” meaning thereby no grain of disrespect to the woman, but only
honor to the artist, classifying her as among the first painters of
the time. Important exhibitions nowadays are likely to contain strong
works by many women, such as portraits by Mrs. Sarah Sears of Boston
or Mrs. Rosina Emmet Sherwood of New York, child studies by Ellen K.
Baker, or animal studies by Mrs. Helen C. Hovenden, widow of the late
master of modern genre, Thomas Hovenden, whose untimely death the
art-loving public of this country has not ceased to mourn. His faithful
studies of American domestic life have touched the people, who are,
after all, the final art critics, despite the claims of those who feel
themselves especially qualified by taste and training to tell others
what they must and must not like. Many times public opinion has been
unduly slow in setting the seal of its approval on worthy works, but
once established in the heart of the populace, immortality is assured,
and that place belongs preëminently to Thomas Hovenden, as proved by
the throngs that stood before his picture “Breaking the Home Ties,”
at the World’s Fair in Chicago. That cosmopolitan collection showed,
among other interesting developments, a strong school of vigorous young
Norsemen, hardy vikings of art from Scandinavia, of whom Anders Zorn
was the leader, with a variety of figure subjects, studied indoors
and out, with an unconventional freedom and dash as inspiring as the
breezes of his native fjords. Prince Eugene, the handsome popular
second son of the King of Sweden, was no mean contributor to this
school. Fritz von Thaulow is a Norwegian by birth, but being well
recognized in France he has taken up his abode at Dieppe, although
still finding inspiration in his native land. He is an exponent of the
theory of tone in painting, as it is technically termed. This refers
to the quality of harmony, or perfect balance of light and shade and
color. It does not depend upon the key of the picture, whether light
and bright or dark and sombre, but consists in keeping the relations
of the different masses of color true to each other, the small details
subdued to their proper places, yet each having its correct value in
the whole.

The Scotch painters, stimulated no doubt by the success of their
literary brethren, have established the Glasgow school of art, most
original in its methods, and in some cases highly peculiar in its
results, but with unquestionable strength in its more serious and less
fantastic work. John Lavery is a leader among these men. Germany prides
herself on one of the greatest painters of modern times in the person
of Adolph Friedrich Menzel, a Prussian, born 1815, contemporary with
Meissonier. As the latter was devoted to the Emperor of the French, so
was Menzel to his hero, Frederick the Great, and their vivid portrayals
of their respective sovereigns will keep the personality of these
conquerors fresh as long as art lasts. For many years Menzel has been
artist laureate to the court at Berlin, painting Hohenzollern family
portraits, battle pieces and scenes of court splendor in the most
masterly manner. The Hungarian, Munkacsy, has been widely known by
his huge religious works, lately exhibited in this country,—“Christ
before Pilate” and the “Crucifixion.” His work shows great power and
much originality in conception, although often somewhat morbid, a not
unnatural condition, as the unfortunate artist has become hopelessly
insane. The opposite extreme of expression is to be found in the
gorgeous coloring and superb compositions of Hans Makart of Vienna,
notably his “Coronation of Catherine Cornaro at Venice.” A revival
of interest in religious subjects has recently appeared, possibly
stimulated by the work of Mr. James Tissot, a Parisian, who has given
ten years to the production of a series of careful studies of the life
of Christ. These little paintings, numbering some five hundred in all,
are the result of close research in the Holy Land into the conditions
of life and customs which prevailed at the time of Christ, and are a
tribute of religious devotion. Whether through this influence or not,
Dagnan-Bouveret has been inspired to paint a number of strong scenes
of biblical subjects, two conceptions of the Last Supper being very
powerful. A young colored man, H. O. Tanner, has achieved success on
similar lines, an “Annunciation” recently shown giving evidence of
deep and original thought. Curiously enough, the women painters of
distinction do not seem to be given to religious subjects. One serious
lack in most of the work exhibited in recent years is the absence
of any importance in subject. The artists have been so concerned to
express what they saw in the simplest manner, that they have carefully
avoided seeing or thinking about anything but the simplest things to
be expressed. While some powerful work has resulted, it has often been
labor worthy of a better cause, for the pictures produced have had
little to tell beyond the skill of the painter. A nobly painted cabbage
field, or a superbly handled stone wall with the tail of a woman’s
skirt disappearing around a corner, may be masterly painting, but it
is not great art; and it is to be hoped that the day of meaningless
canvases will soon pass, and the coming painters will not be content to
discourse grandly about nothing.

[Illustration: AT THE SHRINE OF VENUS. (ALMA TADEMA.)]

Among the leaders of current art in America, the place of honor in
portraiture belongs to John S. Sargent, who easily ranks with Boldini
and Benjamin Constant in Paris. He is closely followed by Edmund C.
Tarbell, John H. Alexander, with his love for long flowing graceful
lines of drapery, Robert Vonnoh, and William M. Chase. John McClure
Hamilton has made some striking studies of some of the most prominent
people of our time, among them Gladstone and Pope Leo XIII. Elihu
Vedder, John LaFarge, Will H. Low, Carroll Beckwith, Abbott Thayer,
and E. H. Blashfield are figure painters whose subjects are frequently
of a decorative or semi-religious character. The latter is noted for
his literary as well as artistic ability. George H. Boughton, though
called an American, really belongs to England, where he paints interior
genre subjects usually of olden times. John Swan, the animal painter,
is also English. The names of Moran and Sartain are distinguished in
the history of American art, each family having contributed several
generations of talented painters. The elders were contemporary with
Daniel Huntington, long president of the National Academy of Design,
and Eastman Johnson, whose “Old Kentucky Home” was famous. William
T. Dannat, Herbert Denman, Frederick Bridgman, and F. L. Weeks are
all strong figure painters, the last two being especially given to
Oriental subjects. Winslow Homer includes figures with his marine
studies, often presenting groups of peasants on a stormy shore, while
Alexander Harrison and W. T. Richards usually confine themselves to
marines pure and simple. The ragged, dirty little street Arabs of J. G.
Brown have been exceedingly popular, and so have the landscapes of H.
Bolton Jones. The list of modern landscape painters really deserving of
mention is far too long to give in anything like complete mention. A
few leaders, such as Charles H. Davis, Homer Martin, the late William
T. Picknell, and George Inness must suffice to close our talk on the
painters of this century.

II. SCULPTURE.

Human progress seems to advance in waves, sending forerunners to
announce the gathering tide; and the ebb and flow of force is felt
in all manner of endeavor, but in nothing so instantly or accurately
as in the fine arts, the most sensitive and subtle forms of human
expression. The plastic arts are as keen to record these changes as
the pictorial, and the coming power of the nineteenth century found a
few prophets in the dying years of the century passing away. Antonio
Canova (1757–1822), born near Venice, left many graceful and delicately
finished works. His “Three Graces” and group of “Cupid and Psyche” are
well known, also his colossal bust of Napoleon and seated statue of
Washington for the State of Carolina. France produced a master in Jean
Antoine Houdon (1741–1828), more vigorous than his contemporaries, as
seen in his powerful work, the seated statue of Voltaire. His statue
of Washington, in the state capitol of Virginia, while preserving a
faithful likeness, has a singular air of French elegance. Despite his
strength, Houdon was not more accurate in study than the great Dane
Thorwaldsen, born at Copenhagen, 1770. His famous “Lion of Luzerne”
is known to all tourists, and his bas-reliefs are familiar the world
over. His chief religious works, the colossal figures of Christ and
the twelve apostles, are in the church at Copenhagen, where he died
in 1844. The greatest name of this period in England was John Flaxman
(1755–1826), who was as successful a teacher as he was a worker in his
art. He was the originator of the cameo designs on the Wedgwood ware,
being particularly happy in delicate reliefs. Christian Daniel Rauch
(1777–1857) achieved the place of honor among German sculptors of this
time by his heroic imperial monuments, of which the most important is
the equestrian statue of Frederick the Great.

Although, for many generations, Rome was the Mecca of artistic
pilgrims, and most of the great names have at one time or another
been enrolled upon the list of students sojourning within her gates,
the race characteristics of each strong mind were liable to find
expression in spite of classic training; and when the mature artist
brought forth his own creations independent of the touch of school or
master, they were likely to present his own national tendencies of
thought. Of late years, with increased facilities for studying other
art centres, of intercommunication of ideas by travel and increasing
duplication of works of art by various reproductive processes, the
“art atmosphere” seems to have extended so as to absorb, and in a
great measure obliterate, distinct lines of racial difference in
manners of expression, the fundamental principles of truth being more
generally sought for and applied. Thus, the unmistakably Teutonic
aspect of German sculpture in the early half of this century shows in
the great monument to “German Unity,” by Schilling, at Niederwald on
the Rhine, and the Walhalla decorations, by Ludwig Schwanthaler, for
King Louis of Bavaria. German seriousness of purpose lends a dignity of
appearance, even if it becomes somewhat grandiose at times, and German
painstaking accuracy perfects the technique even to the finish of small
details. During the same periods, in Italy, the classic influence was
more dominant where the Roman school still held sway, and delicacy
deteriorated into insipidity, and finish became finical. Religious
and classic subjects were most frequently produced, beside more vital
work in portraits, statues, and busts. Some there were who struggled
for freedom, among them Lorenzo Bartolini (1777–1850), a Florentine
professor, whose group, entitled “Charity,” is in the Pitti Palace.
Luigi Pampaloni achieved a surprising fame for his figures of children,
one of which, from a monument on a Polish sepulchre, has been widely
copied in cheap plaster under the erroneous title of “The Praying
Samuel.”

[Illustration: NAPOLEON I. (CANOVA.)]

In France, the advance of sculpture has been more continual and
consistent, the national artistic temperament finding abundant means
of expression in the plastic art. The French dramatic instinct has
a sure perception of the effect of a pose, the value of graceful or
vigorous lines and the balance of proportion, so that whether under
bonds to academic tradition in matters of technique, or broken loose
and working under individual inspiration, the French sculptor is likely
to create an artistic result. The minds of the common people are more
awakened to artistic impressions through the general excellence of
the public monuments and sculptural decorations, so freely displayed
throughout the land, than are the masses in countries where art is at a
low standard. Until after the middle of the century, French sculpture,
like the rest, was mainly of smooth and delicate finish and inclined to
be romantic, though François Rude was powerful and vigorous, as shown
in his patriotic group “Le Chant du Départ” on the Arc de Triomphe. In
England, the seeds of Flaxman’s sowing slowly began to bear fruit in
an awakening public interest, though the earlier efforts were sedate
and conventional rather than spirited, the most important works being
dignified and stately monuments and memorials. Westmacott (1777–1856),
Francis Chantrey (1782–1841), whose large fortune was bequeathed to
the Royal Academy as the “Chantrey Fund;” John Gibson (1791–1866), a
pupil of Canova; Henry Weeks (1807–1877), who made the first bust of
Victoria as Queen; and Alfred G. Stevens (1817–1875), are a few of the
more notable men of the past generation. Thomas Woolner (1825–1892)
expressed the feeling of the pre-Raphaelite movement in sculpture, as
did Hunt, Burne-Jones, and Rossetti in painting.

[Illustration: STATUE OF BENJAMIN FRANKLIN. (BOYLE.)]

American sculpture began with the new century and, like most American
growths, began in a very small way; for although Rush had made a few
figures, notably a fountain now in Fairmount Park, one of the first
pieces of sculptural work in the country was that of a poor New
Jersey stone-cutter, John Frazee, who tried to comfort himself for
the death of his child by making a memorial figure of him, although
he had never seen a statue. From this meagre beginning started a line
of ever-increasing strength, until now, in the plastic arts, as in
all others, we can hold our own with the best in the world. Of course
the earlier students, led by Horatio Greenough, of Boston, Hiram
Powers, of Vermont, and Thomas Crawford, of New York, made their way
to Rome, where they applied the traditional methods to traditional
subjects with conventional results. Greenough’s colossal statue of
Washington is in the Capitol grounds; Powers’s “Greek Slave” is owned
by the Duke of Cleveland; and Crawford’s “Orpheus seeking Eurydice,”
now in the Boston Museum, and “Colossal Liberty” in the Capitol,
are his best-known works. Erastus Palmer, of Albany, contemporary
with these, developed his talent at home, and secured models and
subjects from his own neighborhood, giving a distinctly American
character to his work. Among the most noted of the American colony
at Rome, although not particularly given to American subjects, was
William Wetmore Story, of Salem, Mass., born in 1819. Thomas Ball,
born in the same State in the same year, was of the same class in
Rome; but his themes are more patriotic, notably the “Emancipation”
group in Washington. Harriet Hosmer is the first feminine name on
the American list of sculptors. She also settled in Rome, where she
completed many works. William Henry Rinehart and Randolph Rogers
were both of the idealist school, the latter completing Crawford’s
unfinished Washington monument at Richmond. The name of Rogers is
more commonly connected with the familiar little statuette groups
of every-day domestic scenes so appealing to the popular taste. The
sculptor John Rogers, of Massachusetts, has also made a few large
works, among them the equestrian statue of General Reynolds, before
the City Hall, Philadelphia. Henry Kirke Browne (1814–1886) made a
number of equestrian statues of note, one of Washington being the first
bronze actually cast in America. His figure of General Scott was cast
from captured cannon, relics of the Mexican war. His pupils, Larkin
Meade and J. Q. A. Ward, both attained high places, the latter being
especially prominent in the progress of American sculpture through such
works as his colossal Washington for the New York Treasury Building,
and his “Indian Hunter,” “Pilgrim,” and “Shakespeare,” in Central Park.

After the middle of the century, French art became emotional and
dramatic, the notorious “Dance” for the Paris Opera House, by J. B.
Carpeaux, being one of the first of the new utterances. Paul Dubois was
less astonishing in manner, and Henri Chapu was still more restrained,
although far more vital than the old conventional school. The name
of Frédéric Auguste Bartholdi should be known to every American by
reason of his colossal statue of “Liberty Enlightening the World,” now
standing sentinel in New York harbor. This, and his figure of Lafayette
offering his services to Washington, were presented to America by the
French government. Antoine Louis Barye (1795–1875) was a sculptor _sui
generis_, a law unto himself of his own development; and though he has
many followers, as a sculptor of animals he has no rivals. In many
branches of art he was proficient, but his best-known works are the
marvelous studies of animal life, modeled with infinite skill.

When the great wave of impressionism rose and flooded the land,
carrying music, literature, and the drama before it, plastic art as
well as pictorial was caught up too, and whirled into a variety of
strange forms. Auguste Rodin led the new movement in sculpture, his
manner being copied with varying degrees of success by lesser lights,
and like all new movements run to foolish extremes by incompetent
followers. His heroic group, “The Bourgeois of Calais,” will indicate
his style. From extreme realism on one side, with portrait statues in
the last detail of modern costume, silk hats, kid gloves, and in one
case holding a cigar, to the vague suggestions of a shapeless mass
of marble, out of which protrude unfinished limbs and half-developed
heads, sculpture has been pushed from side to side, but is settling
into a vigorous, steady, onward movement, in which the best men of all
nations stride along together. In the limits of a short article it is
impossible to mention all deserving names, but a few will serve as
types, and the Americans are well worthy to head the list.

Daniel French’s grand majestic golden figure of Liberty, towering
above the Court of Honor, the imperial hostess of the World’s Fair at
Chicago, placed him at once on a pedestal of fame. From the prominence
of his beautiful Columbian Fountain opposite the golden Goddess,
Frederick MacMonnies became known the land over. His greatest late
work is the crowning of the soldiers’ and sailors’ memorial arch for
Prospect Park, Brooklyn, with a colossal quadriga of Triumph and groups
of the army and navy. Augustus St. Gaudens, though a cosmopolitan,
is truly an American sculptor of the first rank, whose statues of
Admiral Farragut in New York, Lincoln in Chicago, and the sturdy
Puritan, Chapin, in Springfield, Mass., are well known. Olin Warner is
another distinctively American product, although he had the advantage
of some training in Paris. His work is French in technique but not
French in spirit, having the native traits of freedom and originality,
as shown in his figure of William Lloyd Garrison, and later in his
relief portraits on the art building at the Columbian Fair. This
great occasion offered opportunities to American sculptors of which
they took full advantage, showing the high rank to which they were
entitled. It made an American of Carl Bitter, the talented Austrian,
whose decorations on the Pennsylvania Railroad Station, Philadelphia,
are well known. It added further lustre to the name of John J. Boyle,
whose heroic “Indian Mother” in Fairmount Park, and seated statue of
Benjamin Franklin, are matters of just pride to Philadelphians. It gave
prominence to such men as Lorado Taft, with his graceful work on the
Horticultural Building; Philip Martiny, on the Agricultural Building;
the great Columbus quadriga, by E. C. Potter and Daniel French, whose
beautiful relief of “Death Staying the Hand of the Sculptor” is a
masterpiece. All visitors to the White City will remember the vigorous
animal studies by Edward Kemys, and the Indian figures of A. C.
Proctor. The sculptural commissions of the Congressional Library in
Washington have produced a remarkable collection of works by talented
Americans, and every great exhibition brings interesting examples from
those already named, and such others as Herbert Adams, Edwin Elwell,
Bessie Potter, with her dainty little statuettes, portrait work by
Charles Grafly, Catherine Cohen, C. E. Dallin, strange visionary
suggestions, in the Rodin manner, by George Bonnard, and an array of
lesser names too numerous to mention.

[Illustration: THE WASHINGTON MONUMENT, FAIRMOUNT PARK.]

For this reason, but few of the notable names of modern foreigners
can be given. However, Hamo Thornycroft, of England, must not be
overlooked, whose famous “Mower” is much admired; nor Onslow Ford, more
youthful and romantic in style. John Henry Foley, of Dublin, has had
a pronounced effect on English sculpture, being a successful teacher,
including among his pupils several distinguished women, among them the
Princess Louise and the Earl of Elgin’s granddaughter, Miss Grant.
George Tinworth’s terra cotta reliefs must conclude the list of English
works. A few Russians have reached eminence, mainly by animal studies.
Antocolski, a Jew of Wilna, of poorest parentage, has done powerful
figure work of a serious, rather melancholy sort, the most important
being a “Christ Bound.” What is best in modern Italian and German work
is practically French, and of the French themselves the list is too
long to complete. A few must suffice, such as Jean Alexandre Falguière,
who aspires, like Carpeaux, to give vitality by means of vigorous
action to his figures. Emanuel Frémiet has worn with some distinction
the mantle descended from Barye’s shoulders. Vidal, another pupil of
Barye, was blind for twenty years, yet gained two medals for correct
anatomy in his modeling. Carrier Belleuse’s “Hebe Asleep” is an example
of the delicate style, and Alfred Boucher shows the other extreme in
his rendering of sturdy masculine figures, toiling or racing, striving
to present in sculpture the picture of human struggle for existence,
as did Millet in his paintings. These materialistic studies represent
the fight for the bread and breath of life, while the impressionist
contortions of the Rodin school try to suggest the conflict of
emotions, good and bad, and the battle of spiritual and physical
desires and development.

III. CERAMICS AND GLASS WORK.

From time immemorial to the present day men have been fashioning shapes
of clay, experimenting with different kinds, different degrees of heat,
and different chemical combinations to form glazes and colorings. The
fundamental processes of pottery making have changed but little since
prehistoric times, and wall pictures of the days of the Ptolemies show
the potter’s wheel whirling much as it does at present, although, of
course, many modern inventions have been made to facilitate different
forms of work. In the famous Sèvres factories in France, established
under royal patronage and still remaining government property, a modern
device has rendered possible the making of large vases of extremely
thin ware. To prevent the delicate paste of which these are made from
collapsing by its own weight before it can harden, the vase or jar is
moulded in an air-tight chamber, the mouth of the object sealed, and
the air exhausted from the chamber, leaving the object in a vacuum. The
air contained in itself is sufficient to hold up the sides until they
harden and danger of collapse is over, when it can be fired. Attempts
were made in vain to equal the delicacy of the Chinese egg-shell ware,
when, one day an educated Chinese visitor to the factories observed the
method employed, and exclaimed, “This is the way we make those cups,”
and, taking a mould, he dipped it into the liquid paste, rinsed it
around and emptied it at once. A thin film like a soap bubble remained
in the mould, which hardened enough to form the dainty ware the workers
had been trying without success to produce; so the Chinese method was
at once adopted. About the middle of the last century an impetus of
development in ceramic art appeared all over the continent of Europe
and in England. This was probably due to the discovery, in different
places, of kaolin or the fine clay of which porcelain is made, which
stimulated the pottery industry and caused the establishment of many
factories which are still working to-day. The Dresden works, founded
in 1700, were hidden in an old fortress, and their secrets jealously
guarded. After about a century they went into decay, but in 1863 were
revived and reëstablished in large new buildings of their own, where
dainty flowered ware is produced, which has again come into popular
favor. Italian ceramics are apt to be florid and overloaded with
decoration, that called “majolica” deriving its name from the island
of Majorca, where it was first made. “Fayence” comes from Faenza, and
the French form of the name, “faïence,” has been used to designate
porcelain in general. The town of Limoges, in France, has been a centre
of ceramic art since 1773, when a French firm established a factory for
the production of a peculiarly fine ware, made possible by the superior
quality of the kaolin found in the neighborhood. In 1839 a lady in
New York showed the Haviland firm a cup of delicate ware, asking them
to match it for her. It was so much finer than anything they had seen
that they desired to import some for their own business. With this end
in view, Mr. David Haviland took the cup and went to France trying to
find where it had been made. He was directed to Limoges and, in the
factories there, he tried to have English shapes and decorations copied
in the exquisite ware. The conservatism and slow methods of the place
were not equal to his demands, and he therefore established a factory
of his own, which, since the middle of the century, has been the most
important in the town.

In England, the most celebrated potteries are all over a century old,
and the ceramic art has been developed to the highest degree both in
technical and artistic directions. The works of the Doulton firm, who
own many potteries, are particularly rich in color, and decoration,
those from their factory at Lambeth being especially fine. So also
are the Coalport wares, celebrated for their rich blue color, the
Royal Worcester and the Crown Derby. In these English factories, and
also in those on the Continent, artists of great skill are employed
as decorators, and in the Wedgwood works the delicate cameo figures
in white relief on a tinted ground were originated by the famous
sculptor, John Flaxman. In America, the Trenton potteries turn out
a vast quantity of wares of varying degrees of artistic excellence,
and one factory has the secret of an old Irish ware, the Belleek, of
indescribable delicacy, like an iridescent sea shell, long thought
to be a lost art. The Rookwood pottery, of most artistic quality
in design and color, is made in Cincinnati, and was the invention
of a woman who has trained a school of girls as decorators; as has
also the Tiffany firm in New York for their marvelous glass work. An
adequate description of the work of this firm would fill a book, as
they have developed undreamed-of possibilities in the use of glass
for decorative purposes. They have revived forgotten arts of coloring
and invented new processes of treatment, that give results like
fairy work, no two pieces being alike. These and many other forms of
industrial art products are brought to a high plane of perfection
nowadays, although the word “art” is grievously abused, being applied
to everything salable, from writing paper to soap. The great schools
and institutions which teach the arts and industries combined are doing
vast good, however, in improving public taste and teaching the world
to discriminate between true art and false, and their influence can
already be felt in higher standards of decoration in articles of common
daily use.

IV. INDUSTRIAL ARTS.

Closely following painting comes black and white art in various
forms, either reproductive or original work, and it is difficult to
discriminate between fine art and handicraft in the many processes
employed. Engraving on metal has long been known, and steel was
considered an especially valuable method of reproducing paintings
until within a generation. Etching is another old form of black and
white work, and is still popular, though less so than formerly.
Wood engraving during this century has passed through many stages
of development, and in the illustrations of books and magazines has
been brought to a high standing as a fine art. It is still used in
many ways, but all those processes that require line work by hand are
being superseded by the photo-type processes, of which there are many
kinds. The making of plates or blocks for printing required skilled
hand work, and the engravers and wood-cutters were necessarily artists
themselves, so that while they were copying the work of others they
were also producing works of art themselves. The plates and prints
were, therefore, valuable and expensive, and, as modern haste grew more
and more to demand cheap quick work, the old careful style of working
gave way to mechanical methods of greater speed. With the development
of photography and its application to the engraver’s art, while a
certain individual artistic character in the work was lost, the actual
copying of painting in all the details of light, shade, and half tones
has been carried to a high degree of perfection. By what is known as
photogravure, every tiny brush mark and every different tint of color
is reproduced with scientific accuracy in black and white. This is
accomplished by having a photograph of the painting taken on a gelatine
film, which is suspended in a bath of acid in the line of an electric
current. This current, playing over a sheet of copper, sets free the
molecules of metal that are deposited upon the film, and filling all
the little inequalities of the surface, produce what is practically
a cast of the photograph in copper. The plate, thus secured, is gone
over by hand and finished here and there with engraver’s tools, and
from this prints may be duplicated to any extent. In engraved plates
the design is cut into the metal, incised lines being either drawn by
hand with a sharp point, called “dry point” work, or eaten in by acids,
the remaining surface of the plate being protected from the acid by
a greasy film. In wood-cutting, the blocks show a reverse process,
the design being left standing in fine lines, while the remaining
surface is cut away, so that a wood-cut is in reality a carving in low
relief. The modern electrotype processes produce a similar result on
a metal block by the action of acid, a method capable of most speedy
work and therefore in demand among the multitude of daily publications
illustrating current events. Of course these hasty results can scarcely
be called fine art, but they are developments of artistic industries,
calculated to meet certain needs of our busy civilization.

[Illustration: PHOTOGRAPHIC VIEW OF NEW YORK CITY AND HUDSON RIVER,
TAKEN FROM 26TH STORY OF PARK ROW BUILDING.]

For more artistic effects, various forms of lithography have given
beautiful results. This valuable process was accidentally discovered in
1796, by a young Bohemian, Aloys Senefelder, of Prague. Desiring to
write a list, and having no paper, he scrawled on a fine stone floor
tile a few words, and later on, coming to remove them, he bethought
him of an experiment with acid on the stone. This he tried, finding
the stone eaten away all around his writing, leaving that raised in
sufficient relief to print from, the lettering being done with a greasy
writing substance that repelled the acid. Later experiments proved
that the eating away of the stone was not necessary if the design were
made with an oily material and the rest of the surface kept moist with
a weak solution of acid. A greasy printing ink being applied would
stick only to the oily design and not to the acidulated surface, which
process made possible the printing from flat stones, which were not
so liable to wear out as the relief designs. Senefelder died in 1824,
living long enough to see his invention in use throughout the world,
although of course he could not know the improvements that photography
would bring. On the centennial anniversary of this great discovery
in 1896, exhibitions of lithographic works were held in London and
Paris, and the possibilities and developments shown. Mr. James McNeill
Whistler has made many very interesting experiments with it, as have
also Mr. Joseph Pennell and Mr. Hubert Herkomer. The latter has made
innumerable experiments and inventions in his busy artistic career,
and has just recently perfected an improvement on lithography which he
calls “plate printing,” and which has been dubbed by the irreverent
the “Herkotype” process. It is simply painting in a peculiar oily ink
on a metal plate, which, while the ink is moist, is dusted over with
a fine powder which adheres to every brush mark on the surface. One
ingredient of this powder is a metal that is electrically conductible,
and, after the excess of powder is brushed off, the plate, with what
remains sticking on the oily surface, is placed in an electrotype
bath. The copper deposited thereon by the electric current hardens
and forms a negative of the original painting, which can be stripped
from the plate and used in a printing-press, giving an absolutely
faithful reproduction of the artist’s handiwork. A similar process,
called “algraphy,” has been invented by Mr. Scholz, of Mayence, who
has developed the possibilities of aluminum for plate work, the
advantage of this material over stone or other metal being its extreme
lightness. These processes are especially valuable to artists who can
work in black and white, as their own original conception is perfectly
reproduced without the possibility of misconception by some copyist, as
exists where a painting is interpreted by an etcher or engraver.

Of the new processes or improvements on the old, that have arisen
because of the discovery of photography, it may be said their name is
legion. Photography itself is rapidly being developed into a fine art,
and has become one of the most important factors of modern existence.
It combines science, art, and industry, and is equally necessary to
all these occupations. While it is difficult to state what was the
first attempt that led to the suggestion of photography, it may be
supposed the experiments of the Swedish scientist Scheele were among
the first. He found that the action of the sun’s ray blackened silver
chloride, and others experimenting after him, at the beginning of
the century, had glimmering ideas of the possibility of a new art.
As has so often happened with the dawning of some great idea, some
new appreciation of a great natural law, the thought was working in
many minds, and the discovery seemed to be almost simultaneous in
several places. As early as 1802 Wedgwood published in the “Journal
of the Royal Institute” an “account of a method of copying paintings
on glass and of making profiles by the agency of light on nitrate of
silver, with some remarks by Sir Humphry Davy.” These gentlemen were,
however, unable to fix the impressions they procured, and a Frenchman,
De Niepce, seems to have been the first to succeed in this direction.
In 1826, learning that M. Louis Jacques Daguerre was experimenting on
the same lines, he conferred with him and they formed a partnership.
The latter seems to have been the more businesslike of the two, and
the process they evolved became known as the “Daguerreotype.” De
Niepce died in 1833, and Daguerre continued the partnership with his
son Isidore, making many improvements, and becoming really the pioneer
of modern photography. The extent of advance may be calculated from
Daguerre’s own remark, that “a landscape requires seven or eight hours
to be photographed, but a single statue or monument, if strongly
lighted, can be taken in about three hours.” Comparing this with the
instantaneous camera work of to-day, that gives us the lifelike moving
figures of the kinetoscope, will illustrate the change wrought in two
thirds of a century. The earliest portrait work was slow and tedious,
the first portrait in New York probably being produced by Dr. Draper,
the scientist, although the celebrated Professor Morse was vastly
interested in the new science or art, and advanced its cause in this
country.

From the beginning of photographic experiments, the greatest desire has
been felt to photograph in color, and numberless attempts with more or
less success have been made, but the processes are mainly slow and
very expensive. A new method of photo-printing in color, however, has
recently developed very artistic possibilities. This is accomplished
by means of three plates, one for each of the three primary colors;
the negative having been made and the plate prepared for printing in
each color, the inks of each color are applied separately. One printing
produces a red impression, directly on this comes a yellow impression,
and on top of that is put a blue; and as all gradations of color are
composed of various proportions of these three primary tints, the
“overlaying” of the three inks produces a picture containing all the
variety of the original subject. A still more recent discovery makes an
impression upon a glass plate that gives all three colors on the same
plate; but this process is a secret, and is too new to be classed among
the successes of industrial art as yet.

One of the later and more notable uses of photography is found in
its application to the purposes of astronomy, an evolution in modern
science, which, although still in its infancy, has already produced
wonderful results. About the middle of the century photographs of the
moon were secured by Warren De la Rue and other astronomers, which
greatly facilitated studies of the earth’s satellite, and these were
followed by photographs of the sun and the sun’s corona during eclipse.
It was not, however, until Professor Henry of the Smithsonian Institute
originated the idea of uniting the camera with the telescope that
the marvelous possibilities of stellar photography were discovered.
It is not too much to say that this discovery has revolutionized
the science of astronomy, extending the field of human observation
into the realm of the infinite. By the aid of clockwork attachments,
the telescope is made to follow the apparent motion of the star to
which it may be directed, throughout the night, if desired, and the
sensitive photographic plate is exposed to the action of light during a
corresponding period. “Each image, however faint, has a comparatively
long time on the sensitive surface, and therefore exerts a cumulative
action.” The result is that stars are pictured by the camera which no
human eye has ever seen. It is estimated that the camera has revealed
double the number of stars discovered by the most powerful telescopes.
In 1887, at a convention of astronomers held in Paris, it was resolved
to photograph the entire skies, with the purpose of making a new
stellar atlas to include the latest discoveries among the heavenly
hosts. With this object the firmament was charted in squares, and each
observatory of importance throughout the world was assigned certain
of these squares to work on. This monumental labor is still going on,
and it will necessarily be extended well into the first quarter of the
twentieth century.

The epoch-marking paper of Dr. Röntgen, in which he announced the
discovery of the X-ray, was made public in the latter part of 1895.
It immediately attracted the attention of the scientific world, and,
since that date, endless successions of experiments have been made with
the marvelous ray in all civilized countries. The X-ray produces no
noticeable effect on the retina of the eye, and we therefore acquire
knowledge of it through indirect agencies. One of these agencies is the
photographic plate, on which, under certain conditions, the ray acts
somewhat in the same manner as does a ray of light. It is not a ray of
light, in the ordinary sense, as it penetrates opaque bodies which
light cannot traverse. Just what it is scientists are not yet ready
to state, but its discoverer defines it as “a longitudinal vibration
of luminiferous ether.” This vibration will traverse many substances
opaque to light, as wood, paper, vegetable and animal tissues and
fabrics, as wool, cotton, silk, etc.; and, if then directed upon a
photographic plate, will produce an image there. The resulting picture
is not of the object traversed by the ray, but of any intervening
object which it does not pass through. As a consequence, the picture
is the image, so to speak, of a shadow, and, hence has been called a
“shadowgraph.” To illustrate, if the ray is directed through a human
body, it will give a “shadowgraph” of the bones, or of a bullet or
piece of metal, if such foreign substance be encountered on its way.
Again, the ray will traverse a diamond and cast no shadow, but it will
not pass through the finest imitation ever made, the “shadowgraph”
showing the manufactured article.

THE CENTURY’S ADVANCE IN SURGERY

BY J. MADISON TAYLOR, M.D., and J. H. GIBBON, M.D.,

_Surgeon in Pennsylvania and Children’s Hospitals_.

AT THE DAWN OF THE CENTURY.—In the year 1579 the celebrated French
surgeon, Ambroise Paré, probably the greatest of his day, in completing
his work on “Chirurgery,” made the following statement, which to us of
to-day is both amusing and pathetic. He says: “For God is my witness,
and all good men know, that I have labored fifty years with all care
and pains in the illustration and amplification of Chirurgery; and that
I have so certainly touched the work whereat I aimed that antiquity
may seem to have nothing wherein it may exceed as beside the glory of
invention, nor posterity anything left but a certain small hope to add
some things.” This great man had scarcely passed away when the practice
of surgery of his day was a thing of the past, due to the realization
of that “certain small hope” which he allowed as possible to posterity.
Every reader, when he reflects upon the crude surgery practiced in
those days, when the operations were those of necessity and not
election,—that is, were done for injuries and not for disease, done to
relieve and not to cure; when he remembers that not only antiseptics
but also anæsthetics were unknown, must be filled with sympathy for
this old gentleman, and wonder what he would think _now_ were he to see
what progress posterity has made and is still making.

It is not our purpose, however, to carry our researches so far back as
Paré’s time, but to begin with our own century and bring before the
reader the advances in surgery since the day of our grandfathers.

In the beginning of this century surgery was practiced by many great
men, men who did not enjoy the self-satisfaction of their predecessor,
Paré, but who accomplished much by constant endeavor and faithful
application to advance this art and science. They, too, realized
manifold “hopes,” and their children and grandchildren have moved
on, and to-day are still pressing forward in the line of invention
and discovery. But to us, the art of an hundred years ago appears
widely different from that of our day. Anæsthesia had not then been
discovered, no germ theory had been evolved, and, consequently, no
such thing as antiseptic or aseptic surgery was known. The abdomen
was opened for disease only, and rarely; and brain surgery consisted
solely in trepanning for fractures of the skull. Surgery was not
regarded as a specialty, but every surgeon was also an obstetrician
and a practitioner of general medicine. Outside of the treatment of
broken bones, dislocations, gunshot wounds and injuries, the surgeon
at that time operated for strangulated hernia, for stone in the
bladder—“cutting for stone,” as it was called; for cataract and for
cancer. Dentistry was just beginning to be taken up as a specialty,
and all medical men extracted teeth, and many filled their cavities.
Ophthalmic surgery consisted largely in operations for cataract, and
was done by the general surgeon. One department of the surgeon’s
education at this time was well attended to, and that was his anatomic
knowledge. Our bodies were the same then as now; and although the
surgeon dared not trespass in anatomical fields which are familiar
ground to the student of to-day, he did study the body after death, and
was quite as well informed regarding the gross anatomy of the human
body as the surgeon of to-day; and, had anæsthesia been known to him,
he would probably have accomplished nearly all that was done during the
middle of the century by his successors.

During the first quarter of the century no great advance was made in
surgery, that is, nothing revolutionizing; but many minds and hands
were at work perfecting old methods of operation and devising new
ones. They had to trust to whiskey and opium to control the pain of
the patient, and consequently operations requiring much time in their
performance were avoided when possible, and, when necessary, had to be
performed with such rapidity that the essential object aimed at was
often missed. The patient was given a large dose of laudanum and a huge
drink of whiskey or brandy, and was then held or tied on the table
while the surgeon proceeded with his work. One can readily understand
the torturing pain the poor patient had to endure, and the hurried and
often unsatisfactory operation which the surgeon had to perform. The
endurance of pain was not the worst part of the patient’s lot, for
afterward he ran the greatest risk of blood-poisoning and gangrene,
which were common complications in those days. It was the rarest thing
for even the simplest operation wounds to heal by “primary union,” as
it was called,—that is, without the formation of pus. Every wounded
surface was expected to go through a certain amount of suppuration.
Many patients lost their lives from compound fractures of their bones;
and a compound fracture, that is, where there was a wound connecting
the seat of fracture with the skin, usually meant many months in bed,
and very often the loss of the limb.

Excepting for the purposes of removing a fœtus from the womb (the
so-called Cæsarian operation, because Cæsar was from “his mother’s
womb untimely ripped”), the abdominal cavity was practically never
opened, and when it was the patient nearly always died. The operation
for the radical cure of hernia was seldom resorted to, excepting when
strangulation of the intestine necessitated operative interference
to save the patient’s life. During the latter part of the eighteenth
century the quacks, calling themselves “rupture cutters,” were not
scarce; but the great mortality of their practice produced a wholesome
fear among the people. The operation was so often fatal that most
of the best surgeons would only perform it under unusually urgent
circumstances. What caused the deaths was peritonitis, or gangrene of
the intestine, and not the method of operating; for at this time nearly
every method of operating had been devised that was in vogue fifty
years later.

Bone surgery, the treatment of fractures, dislocations, and diseases of
the bones, was greatly improved in the first half of the century, this
subject receiving more attention at the hands of surgical writers than
any other.

[Illustration: SURGICAL OPERATING ROOM, HOWARD HOSPITAL, PHILADELPHIA,
PA.]

ANÆSTHESIA.—Anæsthesia may, certainly from the patient’s point of
view, be looked upon as the greatest advancement ever made in surgery.
It was great not only for the reason that it gave the patient absolute
unconsciousness during the time of the operation, but because it
enabled the surgeon to work with greater exactness and less hurry.
The conception of the anæsthetic state did not, however, come into
being for the first time in our century, for, like most great ideas,
it agitated the minds of medical and scientific men for centuries.
Gross tells us that Theodoric, in the thirteenth century, recommended
the inhalation of a certain combination of opium, hemlock, and
other vegetable derivatives for the purpose of producing sleep, and
that in India similar combinations were for centuries in use. It is
needless, however, to say that the effect produced was nothing like
that following the use of nitrous oxide, “laughing gas,” ether, or
chloroform, and that their use never became general. Toward the close
of the last century Sir Humphry Davy and others performed repeated
experiments with nitrous oxide gas, but finally gave up in despair.
In the early part of our own century several methods of producing
insensibility to pain were recommended, such as pressure on nerves and
bleeding to the degree of producing unconsciousness, but none of them
was ever sufficiently successful to render their adoption general; and
it remained for a New England dentist, Dr. Horace Wells, in 1844, to
first use satisfactorily upon himself and his patients the complete
state of unconsciousness produced by nitrous oxide gas. This poor man,
however, failed signally when he endeavored to demonstrate its powers
before a body of medical men, and was subjected to the most unwarranted
ridicule. However, a pupil of this man, another dentist, named Morton,
two years later, experimented with ether, and finally proved upon
himself and on patients the wonderful power of the vapor. He exhibited
his discovery at the Massachusetts General Hospital at Boston, where
Dr. Warren performed an operation upon a patient etherized by Dr.
Morton. The fame of this man and his great discovery spread rapidly
over the continent and into the Eastern Hemisphere, and in 1847 Sir
James Y. Simpson in Edinburgh discovered the anæsthetic powers of
chloroform. These two agents, ether and chloroform, have existed as
rivals for professional favor for nearly half a century, one being
more popular and more generally used in one country and the other in
another. There is, however, a field for the use of both, the operator
choosing the anæsthetic to suit the individual case. In our own country
ether is more generally used in the North and East and chloroform in
the South and West. Chloroform has had more deaths attributed to its
use, but in many cases is a much safer anæsthetic than ether. It is
most amusing to observe the attitude of the so-called conservative
surgeon toward the use of anæsthetics soon after their discovery;
this is particularly true of their employment in obstetric practice,
many eminent obstetricians maintaining that the parturient woman
was intended to suffer, and referring triumphantly to the Bible for
authority. It is, however, needless to say that although many men were
at first uneasy in the use of these new-found agents, those who did
not take advantage of their wonderful powers found themselves rapidly
becoming out of date and deserted by their patients, who preferred
unconsciousness to the older method of using opium and whiskey.

Notwithstanding the great step made by the introduction of ether
and chloroform, the medical man is to-day still dissatisfied and is
continually endeavoring to discover some agent or combination of agents
which will produce insensibility to pain without unconsciousness
and without the slight danger and the uncomfortable after effects
of chloroform and ether. An ideal anæsthetic then must be a local
anæsthetic, one that will render the field of operation insensible and
be without the slightest danger to the patient.

LOCAL ANÆSTHESIA.—At the beginning of our century freezing with ice
alone, or with ice and salt, was the only method employed for producing
local insensibility. Freezing as a local anæsthetic was, however, not
extensively used until fifty years later, when Dr. Richardson of London
showed the anæsthetic effect of spraying the surface of the tissues
with ether. During the late sixties this method of freezing became
quite popular for producing local anæsthesia for small operations such
as extraction of teeth, removing nails, opening abscesses, etc., and
occasionally was employed for more protracted operations, Cæsarian
section having been performed a number of times by the aid of this
agent. The rhigolene spray was found later to be more satisfactory than
ether in many respects, and the two together were frequently used.

Another freezing agent which is now used very extensively and has
entirely supplanted those just mentioned is the chloride of ethyl.
This, when applied to the dry skin, produces in a few seconds complete
freezing, and renders the surface comparatively painless for many of
the minor surgical operations.

The properties of cocaine as a local anæsthetic were known thirty years
ago, but it was not until 1884 that Dr. Kohler of Germany demonstrated
its practical applicability. To-day most of the operations on the eye,
nose, and throat are performed under the pain prevention afforded by
this drug, and in general surgery it has an extensive field, being
found satisfactory where freezing is inapplicable or general anæsthesia
not desired, as, for instance, in removing small tumors, splinters,
ingrowing nails, etc. In the eye, nose, and throat it is applied simply
in solution to the mucous membrane, but where anæsthesia of the skin is
desired, it is necessary to inject it under the skin with a hypodermic
syringe. When used in strong solutions this remedy is dangerous, and
it has lately been shown that weaker solutions when used in larger
quantities are just as satisfactory and less dangerous.

A recent substitute for cocaine is eucaine; but, although less
dangerous, it is less satisfactory and not harmless to the tissues
themselves.

ANTISEPTIC AND ASEPTIC SURGERY.—Excepting the introduction of
anæsthesia, no greater step has ever been made in surgery than that
which was brought into use by the antiseptic and aseptic method of
treating wounds. It is now about thirty years since Sir Joseph Lister,
believing in the so-called “germ theory,” evolved by Pasteur, Virchow,
and others, advocated the use of agents which were destructive to germ
life in the treatment of wounds. At first the great antiseptic, and the
one used most generally by Lister, was carbolic acid, which was applied
to the wound in solution, and used as a spray during the performance
of operations, to protect the wound from infection by germs in the
atmosphere. It was not long, however, before it was discovered that the
danger lay not in the atmosphere but in the skin of the patient and
in the hands of the surgeon and in the condition of his instruments
and dressings; and to these sources attention was given with results
known to us all. Other antiseptics, such as bichloride of mercury and
boric acid, afterward came into use, and within the past ten years the
first of these two has largely supplanted carbolic acid, and is the one
reliable and practical destroyer of germs. The antiseptic treatment
of wounds was probably not in full swing until about 1885–1890, and
was quickly followed by the more recent aseptic method. These two can,
however, never be successfully separate, as the latter is dependent
entirely upon the former; that is, in order to render the field of
operation and the hands of the surgeon aseptic, the antiseptics must
be used. Asepsis means without poisonous germs, and, as applied to
surgical treatment, it is essential that, after the instruments, the
dressings, the patient’s skin, the surgeon’s and his assistants’ hands
have been thoroughly cleaned with soap and water and rendered free
from germs, there be use of antiseptic solutions in the wound or on
the dressings. This has been a great step forward, this discovery that
it was in the skin that the germs lurked, and that soap and water
and a scrubbing brush were as necessary as antiseptics. Few surgeons
to-day employ antiseptic solutions in wounds unless the wound itself is
already infected, when it becomes necessary. In wounds which are clean
and made by the surgeon under aseptic conditions, no antiseptic drug
is required which may indeed be actually harmful, for these chemicals
which destroy germs are not altogether harmless to healthy tissue,
particularly when used in strong solution.

The discovery of anæsthesia and the promulgation of the germ theory
of inflammation, together with the subsequent perfection of the means
of destroying microbes, all within the memory of many now living,
have revolutionized surgery to such an extent that the surgeon
reaches fearlessly into regions which before were impracticable, and
undertakes operations which were never even dreamed of a generation
ago. One can readily imagine that no surgeon would care to undertake,
and no patient would endure, the agony of an operation lasting for
several hours without an anæsthetic; and that it must have been only
an immediate and certain danger of death that compelled a surgeon, in
pre-antiseptic days, to open an abdomen or brain when he realized the
great probability of subsequent inflammation and death.

Let us look at some of the individual advances of surgery since the
introduction of anæsthesia and of the use of germ-destroying agents,
considering first, simple fractures.

OF SIMPLE FRACTURES.—Anæsthesia was the means of permitting surgeons
to “set” fractures in a satisfactory manner and without pain; and the
use of antiseptics has prevented many of these fractures from becoming
compound fractures. Lately there has been a change in the general
treatment of fractures which is proving a great advancement. Formerly
it was the custom to keep not only the broken bone itself perfectly
quiet on a splint until union had taken place, but also to immobilize
all the neighboring structures, joints, muscles, and tendons. This
meant that when the limb was taken off the splint, not only would the
bone be “solid,” but there was also a tendency to fixation of the
muscles and joints, so that it took the patient as long to get back
the use of the limb as it did to unite the broken bone. This is now
obviated in many fractures by beginning both the passive and active
motion of the neighboring muscles and joints at a much earlier period
than heretofore; in fact, in many fractures, such as those near the
wrist, by never allowing these adjacent structures to get stiff at all,
but keeping up the passive motion (while the fragments are held firmly
together) from the very first dressing. In other more complicated
and serious fractures where motion is contra-indicated, the use of
carefully applied massage prevents largely the stiffness and the
wasting of the muscles which results from long confinement on splints.

COMPOUND FRACTURES.—In pre-antiseptic days compound fractures were one
of the greatest causes of the amputation of limbs; and yet, to-day,
these same breaks, which twenty-five years ago would have cost the
patient his limb, are, by means of antiseptics, rendered aseptic and
converted into a simple fracture by the closing of the wound, and the
part is not only saved but fully restored to function.

BONE DISEASES.—Diseases of the bones, as inflammation, caries, and
necrosis, are now dealt with very differently from of old. The diseased
structures are now thoroughly removed; and the inflammation which at
one time kept the patient in misery and danger for a long time is
subdued from the start.

OSTEOTOMY.—This term, which means the division of a bone, is generally
applied to the correction of deformities, such as bow-legs. This
operation fifty years ago was not frequently resorted to, and then
only in severe cases, the milder ones being left alone or treated with
braces, which at best could do little more than prevent increase in
deformity. When the operation was performed on the bone, it was then
divided, usually with a saw. The operation nowadays for this condition
is what is called subcutaneous osteotomy; that is, the wound made is
only as large as the chisel used for severing the bone, about one
half inch, and owing to our knowledge of microbes and our means of
destroying them and preventing their ravages, hundreds of legs are
made straight every year which a generation ago could not have been
safely touched.

[Illustration: CLINICAL AMPHITHEATRE. GARRETT MEMORIAL BUILDING,
PENNSYLVANIA HOSPITAL, PHILADELPHIA, PA.]

AMPUTATIONS.—The first successful amputation at the hip joint, for
either injury or disease, in the United States, was done in 1806 by
Dr. Brasheur; the next was not accomplished until 1824. As late as
1882, the great American surgeon, Gross, wrote in his “System of
Surgery:” “To no operation that can be performed on the human body is
the oft-repeated maxim, ‘_Ad extremos morbus extrema remedia_,’ more
justly applicable than to amputation at the hip joint. The operation
may become necessary both on account of disease and accident; but
it is of so formidable a nature and so fraught with danger, that it
should never be undertaken unless the patient has no other chance
of escape. The great risk which attends it is chiefly due to shock,
loss of blood, suppuration, erysipelas, and pyaemia.... Under highly
favorable circumstances, much of the enormous wound may unite by the
first intention; but, in general, more or less suppuration takes place,
and in some instances the discharge is so copious as to lead to fatal
exhaustion. The greatest danger of all, however, is the occurrence of
pyaemia, or secondary abscess, especially in amputations at the hip
joint in consequence of injury, as a compound fracture or a gunshot
wound.” This gives the attitude of the profession toward this operation
a little more than fifteen years ago, and the dangers which attended
its performance. Let us add that the mortality at this time may be
expressed in the following figures. (Dr. F. C. Sheppard prepared these
statistics for Dr. Ashhurst.) Of 613 cases in which the results are
known, “237 occurred in army practice, of which 30 recovered and 207,
or 87.3 per cent died; 71 were performed in civil life for injury, with
the result of 47 deaths, or a mortality of 66.1 per cent; 261 were
practiced for disease, with 105 deaths, or a mortality rate of 40.2 per
cent; and of 44 amputations for unknown causes 34, or 77.2 per cent
were fatal.”

In 1890, Dr. John A. Wyeth of New York introduced his “bloodless
method” of amputation at the hip joint, and he recently reports 69
operations performed after this manner by himself and others, in which
there were 11 deaths, 5 of which occurred in cases of extreme injury,
where the patients had lost a large amount of blood and vigor before
operation. In 40 cases the operation was done for malignant growth,
and 4 deaths occurred, 10 per cent. In 22 the amputation was made
for inflammatory disease of the bone, and 3 died, 13.6 per cent. One
has but to contrast these statistics to understand what antiseptic
methods and recent improvements in the control of hemorrhage have done
to lessen the mortality of amputations. The still more recent use of
salt solution injected into the circulation of patients suffering from
profuse hemorrhage has lately been the means of saving many lives
which would have otherwise succumbed to the loss of blood and the
shock subsequent to injury and operation. As illustrating the contrast
between the septic and antiseptic methods, let us consider the surgery
of our Civil War and compare with that of to-day, and we shall see the
enormous differences in methods, and particularly in economy of limbs
and organs as well as mortality.

[Illustration: PENNSYLVANIA HOSPITAL, PHILADELPHIA.]

HEMORRHAGE.—The arrest and control of hemorrhage has greatly improved
within the past twenty-five years. The making of an aseptic wound
does away largely with the much dreaded secondary hemorrhage of a
generation ago, by preventing suppuration, which is usually the
cause of secondary hemorrhage. The clumsy and complicated apparatus
of former days for controlling hemorrhage has been superseded by the
use of the Esmarch rubber tourniquet, the neat hemostatic forceps,
and the sterile animal ligature. No surgeon thinks to-day of applying
a silk ligature to a blood vessel and allowing it to hang out of the
wound until it separates, so that in case of secondary bleeding he
could readily find the vessel; but he applies an absorbable ligature,
usually of catgut, which is sterile, and which is entirely absorbed by
the tissues after it has done its work. Much suffering has been saved
patients by the introduction of absorbable materials for ligation of
vessels and sewing of wounds. Formerly one of the great dreads of
wounds was the “taking out of the stitches.” To-day where the wounds
are not inflamed this is little complained of, and where the animal
suture is used there is no discomfort whatever. Many means have, during
the past century, been employed for the resuscitation of patients
suffering from profuse hemorrhage and shock. The idea of injecting
into the veins of the patient thus affected blood from another person
or from an animal is not new, and has at times been quite successful.
The most generally used method was to draw the blood from a healthy
person or animal and inject it into the vein of the patient with a
syringe: however, so-called “direct transfusion” was also employed,
and consisted in pumping the blood direct from the vein of the healthy
individual into that of the patient. Other materials than blood have
been injected into the blood vessels of persons suffering from great
loss of blood, notably milk. All of these methods have been put upon
the shelf, never to be called into use again. The ingenuity of the
nineteenth century suggested the substitution of a solution of common
salt for blood and, to-day, the intra-venous injection of normal salt
solution saves hundreds of lives. The solution is made to resemble
as closely as possible the liquid portion of the human blood (the
_liquor sanguinis_), especially as to specific gravity; and as it is
always sterilized by boiling before being used, it is free from all
the dangers which accompany the transfusion of one person’s blood into
another. No well-appointed operating room is without its transfusion
apparatus and its salt solution ready for use.

WOUNDS.—Reference to the remarks on asepsis and antisepsis will show
the reader that the treatment of wounds has undergone a complete change
in the past quarter of a century; but probably the modern treatment of
gunshot wounds illustrates this better than anything else. Until 1885,
only six cases were recorded where the abdominal cavity was opened
for gunshot wounds, but since that time hundreds of cases have been
treated in this way every year. The injuries were formerly considered
almost certainly fatal, and if the intestine was injured the patient
assuredly died. Now the abdomen is opened, hemorrhage controlled,
wounds—often to the number of six or eight or even thirty or more—of
the intestines closed, or an injured section of the intestines removed
and the abdominal cavity cleansed and closed, with many favorable
terminations to make the operation not only a justifiable one, but one
of necessity and safety. There is no comparison with the present-day
results of gunshot wounds of either abdomen or chest and those of a
generation ago. It is the duty of the surgeon, in case of gunshot wound
of abdomen, to open, explore, and repair, whereas formerly it was
considered the part of wisdom to leave the patient without radical
treatment and only to make him comfortable with opiates. Thus cases
of damage to the intestines and viscera did occasionally recover in
pre-antiseptic days, but it was the rarest occurrence.

What has been said of gunshot wounds applies also to stab wounds of the
chest and abdomen.

THE ALIMENTARY CANAL.—Probably the surgery of no portion of the body,
unless it be the brain, has been so much improved during the past
fifteen years as that of the alimentary canal. The esophagus or gullet
is now opened with impunity for both disease and injury. This organ is
not only approachable through the neck but also through the back part
of the chest, by resection of the ribs; and the latter operation is
frequently made necessary by the lodgment of foreign bodies,—buttons,
false teeth, etc.—so low down in the esophagus that they cannot be
reached through the mouth or through an opening made in the neck.

THE STOMACH.—This organ, which was formerly a forbidden field to the
surgeon, is now subjected to the most varied surgical operations,
from simple opening for the purpose of removing a foreign body or
establishing a fistulous tract to the resection of a portion of it
or to its complete resection, as has been successfully accomplished
several times within the past year or two for malignant disease. The
removal of the smaller end of the stomach for cancer is now a frequent
operation. During the war of the rebellion there were sixty-four cases
of wounds of the stomach, and only one recovered. In over six hundred
and fifty cases of wounds of the intestines there were recorded only
five cases of recovery from wounds of the small and fifty-nine from
wounds of the large intestine.

THE INTESTINAL TRACT.—What has been said of the stomach applies also
to this portion of the alimentary canal. No surgeon can nowadays call
himself such if he is incapable of removing a diseased portion of
intestine, it may be only a few inches or several feet, and bringing
the dividing ends of remaining intestine into such apposition that
healing takes place and the function is restored. Until recently, when
the means of anastomosing the intestinal canal were perfected, it was
the custom of the surgeon to bring the severed ends of the intestines
into the abdominal incision and suture them there, establishing in this
way an artificial anus with all its accompanying discomforts. This was
certainly better than allowing the patient to perish from his disease,
but how infinitely preferable is the present method of bringing the
healthy cut ends of the intestine into apposition and reëstablishing
the calibre. It is this operation which has so much reduced the
mortality of intra-abdominal injuries, gunshot wounds, stabs, etc., and
has made hundreds of sufferers from intestinal cancer either well again
or comfortable for years. The perfection of the operation of joining
one part of the alimentary canal to another has been due largely to the
ingenuity and perseverance of American surgeons, who have devoted years
to experimentation and practice upon the cadaver and upon animals.

THE KIDNEYS.—The kidney has not been behind the other organs of the
body in reaping the benefits of modern surgery. The first case of
removal of the kidney was done in 1869 by Simon, and was successful. It
was done only after a number of dogs were operated on successfully to
demonstrate that life and health are compatible with only one kidney.
Since this time the removal of a kidney for disease or injury, when its
fellow of the opposite side is healthy and performing its function, has
been looked upon as an entirely justifiable operation. The surgery of
this organ has lately so far advanced, however, that many kidneys are
now treated by more curative operations. In 1880 the first operation
was done for the removal of a stone from the kidney, an operation
which now nearly every surgeon of much experience has performed. The
operation for the fixation of a floating kidney, which is now so
common, was first done in 1881. Now, since Simon’s bold experiment the
lives of between two thousand and three thousand persons have been thus
saved who had otherwise certainly died.

THE BLADDER.—For generations the bladder has been considered a
legitimate field for surgery, but modern methods and technique have
greatly extended the domain. One of the greatest advances in bladder
surgery has been the crushing of stone and its immediate removal.
Until 1825 the treatment of all stones in the bladder was their
removal through an incision made in the organ. At that time Civiale
first performed the operation of passing a bladed instrument into the
bladder and crushing the stone, then allowing the patient to pass it
subsequently at urination. The operation became quite popular with
certain surgeons as early as the middle of the century. The cutting
operation has, however, never been entirely put aside, and even to-day
it is, in many cases, the best and only procedure. In 1878 Bigelow, of
Boston, devised the method which is now universally used, of crushing
the stone and washing it out at once through a silver tube. This was a
great stride ahead of the old method.

One of the great difficulties in deciding upon the removal of a kidney
has been the trouble of finding out whether the other kidney is doing
its work, and this Kelly, of Johns Hopkins University, has done much to
overcome in devising his method of examining by looking at the openings
of the tubes of the kidneys where they empty into the bladder. If the
kidney is performing its function the urine will be seen flowing from
its tube into the bladder.

HERNIA OR RUPTURE.—Probably the treatment of no condition has received
more consideration from the surgeon of the nineteenth century than that
of rupture, and it was not until 1891 that an operation was devised,
simultaneously by an Italian and an American surgeon, which has proved
for itself all that its originators claimed. Hundreds of operative
methods have been brought forward for the cure of this troublesome and
dangerous condition; but, until the operations of Halstead and Bossini
were brought forward, little prospect of an absolute cure could be
promised a patient, and the conservative surgeon would only undertake
to operate upon very troublesome cases such as could not be controlled
by a truss. Now nearly every case of hernia may be looked upon as
curable by an operation.

OPERATIVE GYNÆCOLOGY.—The operative treatment of the disease of the
female generative organs has been revolutionized in our century,
and its revolution has been largely due to American surgeons. The
first ovariotomy ever performed was done in Kentucky, by Dr. Ephraim
McDowell, in 1809. In the fifties, Marion Sims won great renown for
himself and his country by his wonderful ingenuity and boldness in
this line of work. The greatest advance here, as in all departments
of surgery, has been made since the introduction of antiseptic and
aseptic principles. To-day there is no disease or condition which, if
seen early enough, cannot be cured, or essentially relieved at the
hands of an expert abdominal surgeon. Thousands of women are now saved
every year by these means who formerly would have certainly died or
remained hopeless invalids.

APPENDICITIS.—This condition must seem to the ordinary reader to be
either a new disease or one much more prevalent than in days gone by,
but it is not the case. The cause of this appearance is the fact that
in former times the condition was not recognized in its incipiency, and
the exact cause of the trouble was unknown. The condition then advanced
until it was called typhlitis, peritonitis, and obstruction of the
bowels, etc., all of which would to-day occur if the conditions were
not recognized early and treatment immediately instituted before the
inflammation and infection extended from the appendix to neighboring
tissues.

BRAIN SURGERY.—This branch of surgery is practically a triumph of
recent years. Formerly the brain was never interfered with except
for injury (traumatic), and even then nothing was done excepting for
the removal of pressure, as from a piece of depressed bone, and the
institution of drainage. To-day the skull is opened for epilepsy;
abscesses of the brain are opened and drained successfully, and tumors
of the brain are removed, thus not only in numberless instances saving
life but—what is equally important—saving the usefulness of the
life and mind. The first actual successes in this line are recorded
by Bennett and Godlee in 1884, who localized and operated on and
ultimately found a tumor. The patient died, but the bold beginning
was followed by a number of other surgeons, till this new region for
exploration, hitherto untouched, has become a fertile ground for
successful efforts. Abscess of the brain, until twenty years ago, was
almost invariably fatal. MacEwen in 1879 located an abscess of the
brain and begged to be allowed to operate, but was refused by the
family of the patient. After the death of the patient he operated
precisely as he would have done in life, evacuated the pus and
demonstrated that had he been permitted to do so he could have saved
life.

Where the cranium is wounded surgeons nowadays will not hesitate to
open the skull, secure the bleeding vessels, remove clots, and thus
many lives are saved. Even comparatively slight injuries to the skull,
where the brain is damaged, involve oftentimes destruction to the
arteries and blood is effused, producing such destructive pressure
as causes very serious symptoms or even death. In other instances,
the results of a blow or a fall without injuring the skull may cause
profound damage and subsequent hemorrhage. In all these cases operative
interference, now extremely safe and easy, may readily save life.
Gunshot wounds of the brain are now only occasionally fatal, provided
opportunity offers for prompt and clean operative work. Even where the
ball has traversed the entire length of the cerebrum, recovery has
followed operation. The results of brain surgery in relieving certain
forms of epilepsy are occasionally most brilliant and frequently much
relief is afforded. Where the epilepsy is of the character known as
focal, and where there is evidence of irritation of the brain, due to
a local pressure, whether of the cranial walls or of some new growth
within the brain tissue, the removal of these sources of irritation
has in many reported instances been most satisfactory. Again,
certain cases of protracted headache, so severe as to render life
insupportable, have been cured by trepanning the skull. Certain forms
of insanity have been modified and relieved where this had followed
upon brain injuries. It is of great interest to reflect upon the
methods by which students of brain disease are enabled to determine so
exactly the location of tumors, abscesses, hemorrhages, clots, scars,
and other alterations of tissue giving rise to epilepsy and brain
disorders, and which afford no indication of the diseased locality
by any changed condition of the surface. In dealing with other parts
of the body, if the precise locality of the part to be operated on
cannot be at first determined, there is no hesitation in the minds of
the surgeons in cutting down upon, and searching for, that which he
proposes to remove. In dealing with so delicate an organ as the brain,
however, this cannot be permitted; for a variation of the very smallest
dimension will sometimes change the manipulations from those of perfect
safety to the most fatal results. Our knowledge of the location of
the functions of the brain and the areas from whence arise governing
influences has been derived almost solely from experiments upon living
animals. Among the names of the great pioneers in this direction must
be mentioned those of Ferrier and Horseley, of England; Fritsch,
Hitzig, and Goltz, of Germany. The researches which have thus opened
up a new realm of operative possibility are among the very greatest
triumphs in our means of saving life and affording opportunity for
relief of the most serious disablements known to modern times.

For illustration of how these studies are pursued, it may be of
interest to review the method used by Horseley.

The brain of a monkey having been exposed at the part to be
investigated, the poles of a battery are applied over squares one
twelfth of an inch in diameter, and all the various movements which
occur (if any) are minutely studied. One square having been studied,
the next is stimulated, and the results are again noted, and so on from
square to square. These movements are then tabulated. For example, all
those adjacent squares which, when stimulated, produce movements of
the thumb are called the region for representation of the thumb, or
“the thumb centre;” and to all those squares which produce movements
of the hand, the elbow, the shoulder, or the face, etc., are given
corresponding names. In this way the brain has been mapped out, region
by region, and the same minute, patient study given to each.

These animals are etherized so that they do not suffer the least pain.
Such operations, with few exceptions, even without ether, are not
painful. The brain itself can be handled, compressed, cut, or torn
without the least pain. A number of cases have already been reported
in which a considerable portion of the human brain has been removed by
operation, and the patients have been about their ordinary avocations
within a week or two.

Studying in this way the brain in the lower animals, it is now possible
to get a very fair knowledge of the localization of many of its
functions in man.

Moreover, portions of the body can be entirely severed, and, if
suitably preserved, can be replaced, and they will adhere and grow as
if nothing had happened. When a wound is slow in healing, we now take
bits of skin, either from the patient’s own body or provided by the
willing family or friends, or even from frogs, and “graft” them on the
surface of the wound. They usually adhere, and as enlargement takes
place at their margins, they coalesce by one half the time required for
healing. Even a large disk of bone, one or two inches in diameter, when
removed from the skull, can be so saved and utilized. It is placed in
a vessel filled with a warm antiseptic solution, which is again placed
in a basin of warm water, and it is the duty of a special assistant to
see that the thermometer in this basin shall always mark 100° to 105°
Fahr. The bone may be separated from the skull so long as one or two
hours, but if properly cared for can be replaced, and will grow fast
and fulfill its accustomed but interrupted duty of protecting the brain.

[Illustration: X-RAY PICTURE OF A COMPOUND FRACTURE AND DISLOCATION OF
THE FOREARM.]

RÖNTGEN RAYS.—One of the most recent advances in the art of surgery
is the discovery and use of the X-rays. In December, 1895, Professor
Röntgen, of Würzburg, announced his discovery, and since then its
utility has continually increased, until to-day no large hospital or
properly equipped teaching institution, indeed no first-rate surgeon,
is without the X-ray apparatus. By its use many doubtful cases of both
injury and disease in surgical practice are thus entirely rendered
clear. In the diagnosis and treatment of many fractures it is nearly
indispensable, showing the exact location of the break and the position
of the fragment before and after dressing. Probably in no other
condition, unless it be in fractured bones, has the X-ray proved itself
of so much value as in the location of foreign bodies lodged in any of
the organs or tissues of the body. Before Professor Röntgen’s discovery
it was not of infrequent occurrence that an exploratory operation was
necessary to positively prove the presence of a foreign body, and even
this was at times of necessity a failure. To-day the X-ray picture
enables the surgeon to learn the exact location of the foreign body and
indicates to him the best point from which it may be attacked. With
repeated improvements in apparatus the time of exposure required for
making the picture of the part has been greatly reduced. The advantage
of this was made manifest when it was discovered that destruction of
the skin, the so-called “X-ray burns,” might follow long and repeated
exposure to the rays. It is not always necessary to make a plate of
the part to be examined, since by simply studying the parts by the
eyes through the fluoroscope or the fluoroscopic screen the surgeon
can readily see everything that a photographic picture could show him.
The fluoroscope or screen is now often used during the operation of
removing foreign bodies; through it the surgeon can watch the various
steps of his operation, his approach to the foreign body and its final
removal.

[Illustration: X-RAY PICTURE OF A DISLOCATED ELBOW.]

If the field of its usefulness continues to expand at its present rate,
it will not be long before its use as a diagnostic measure will be as
valuable to the medical man as it now is to the surgeon.

By such instruments of precision as this, and others less conspicuous,
the old elements of intelligent inference and argument by analogy and
exclusion are rendered of less value, and a rapid approach is made to
scientific exactitude in surgery as well as medicine. All this has
attained a far higher quality and scope in the last quarter of this
century than in any other period of the world’s history, and we may
look to great advances in the coming century, in all life-conserving
and remedial measures whereby the race may enjoy a larger measure
of relief as well as immunity from the onslaught of disease and the
results of accident.

There is shown here for illustration a photographic picture of a
limb, taken by the X-ray now growing familiar to every one. It should
be borne in mind that while it is a simple matter for the casual
observer to note obvious solutions of continuity in bones, or the
presence of foreign bodies, this is not the chief item of usefulness
to the surgeon, and certainly not to the medical practitioner. A
special training is required to study and interpret the findings and
appearances of the tissues, their altered relationships, densities,
and many other matters entirely insignificant to the uneducated among
medical men or laity.

Again, the picture here shown is similar in outline to but a reversal
of the shading seen through the fluoroscope by direct vision, when the
greatest skill is required in noting the significance of altered states
in the denser or softer tissues.

When suits for malpractice are instituted against surgeons it is not to
be admitted that the evidence or findings of the “highly intelligent”
but not technically skilled witness can have the slightest weight as
proving the condition of tissues of which they are very ignorant, not
only physiologically but more so pathologically.

PROGRESS OF MEDICINE

BY FRANK C. HAMMOND, M.D.,

_Instructor in Gynecology, Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia_.

“As a point of history pregnant with valuable deductions, it is good
to look back upon the conditions of medicine in former times and find
that it has always kept pace with the progress of the physical and
moral sciences. Where these, however, have been marked by folly and
credulity, medicine has exhibited the same imperfections.”

It is difficult to trace the improvement in successive eras, because
they melt into one another by indefinable gradations. During the
earliest period it was believed that physic was an art which was
supposed to be most mysterious, and it was presumed that the practicers
held communion with the world of spirits. The practice of medicine in
those days consisted in the usage of agents necessarily unreliable, as,
for instance, the word abracadabra hung around the neck as an amulet to
chase away the ague, etc.

Much time has been wasted in attempting to portray the first origin
of medicine. Bambilla, a surgeon of Vienna, has asserted that Tubal
Cain was the inventor of cauterizing instruments, apparatus for
reducing fractures, and other instruments for surgical procedures, thus
endeavoring to prove that surgery antedated medicine. It is evident
that medicine must have had a very early origin, for mankind even in
the earliest ages suffered pain and the train of sequences due to
exposure, and hence soon discovered a method of alleviation. Their
category probably consisted of herbs. Unacquainted, however, with the
construction and function of the human economy, practitioners were
unable to trace the progress of disease, and the more fatal internal
maladies were ascribed to the deities whom they feared. Hence, various
superstitious practices would arise and be handed down from one
generation to another. We may imagine this to have been the origin of
the healing art, and such is nearly its present condition amongst the
savages of Africa, Australasia, Polynesia, Sumatra, etc.

Later on, the priests became the physicians, from being the oracles of
the divinity whom the people wished to consult. The various remedies
were handed down from one to another, as medical science did not
exist at that time. Herodotus informs us that even in his time the
Babylonians, Chaldeans, and other nations had no physicians. When any
one was attacked with disease the patient was carried into the public
street, and passers-by who had suffered from a similar affection, or
nursed one who had, advised the sufferer to employ the measures that
proved successful in former cases.

The earliest writers on medicine trace its origin, in common with
that of most other branches of knowledge, to the Egyptians. They
appear to be the first nation that cultivated medicine and furthered
its progress. Many peculiar medical properties were attributed to
the deities. All diseases were supposed to originate from the anger
of Isis. Resin was burned in the morning, myrrh at noon, and a
composition termed cyphy in the evening, in the temples of Isis, and
the sick were taken there to sleep, during which the oracles might
reveal to them the means which they should employ to effect a cure.
This is an illustration of the superstitions which prevailed at that
time.

The earliest authentic records which we can ascertain from collateral
reading are to be found in the Scriptures. Here it is stated that
Joseph commanded his servants and physicians to embalm him (1700
B. C.). This shows that Egypt at that time possessed a set of men who
practiced the healing art, and that they embalmed the dead. This must
have required an idea of anatomy, which, needless to say, was crude
and unscientific, as dissection of the human body at that time was
prohibited, the penalty being death.

According to Pliny, the Egyptian kings encouraged post-mortems, for
the purpose of ascertaining the cause of diseases; and this method was
fostered by the Ptolemies, during whose reigns anatomy was raised to a
higher standard.

Through the writings of Moses in the sacred Scriptures, we learn that
the medicine of the Hebrews appertained mostly to public hygiene. Meat
of the hog and rabbit was forbidden, as being injurious in the Egyptian
and Indian climate. The relation of man and wife and the purification
of women were regulated. The measures suggested by Moses for the
prevention of the spread of leprosy have not yet been surpassed. Next
to Moses, Solomon acquired quite an efficient knowledge of compounding
remedies.

The Indian races were divided into castes, the priests alone enjoying
the privilege of practicing medicine. Their medical knowledge was
condensed in a book which they called _Vagadasastir_. They believed
the body gave rise, through seventeen thousand vessels, to ten species
of gas which conflicted and engendered disease. So far as we know,
they were the first to record a way of testing the specific gravity of
urine. Though accused of many absurdities, they claimed to cure the
bites of venomous snakes and compounded an ointment which eradicated
the cicatrices of smallpox,—a result which has not as yet been
attained in the present epoch. The Chinese attribute the invention of
medicine to Hoâm-ti, one of their emperors, who lived about 2687 B. C.;
but possessing no anatomical knowledge, their surgery, to say the
least, was barbarous. For over four thousand years the Chinese were not
allowed to communicate with foreigners, and naturally their progress
was at a standstill. They used cups, acupuncture, fomentations,
lotions, plasters, baths, etc. Their midwifery practice consisted
mainly of murderous principles, and it is only since the introduction
of missionaries that a reformation in the medical practice of the
Chinese empire has been accomplished.

The condition of medicine in Greece did not differ from that of the
“rude and uncivilized nations.” But later, Greek physicians are
credited with the most brilliant discoveries. The most distinguished
of Chiron’s pupils was Æsculapius, who occupies the most conspicuous
place in the history of medicine. Æsculapius is always painted with
a staff, because the sick have need of a support; and the serpent
entwined around it is the symbol of wisdom. The sons of Æsculapius
are considered the fathers of surgery, and, for their distinguished
valor at the siege of Troy, have been classed by Homer among the Greek
heroes.

The first operation of venesection, or blood-letting, formerly so
promiscuously done, with at times good, but oftener disastrous,
results, and now rarely resorted to, is attributed to Podalirius, of
recognized Grecian medical skill, the patient being a princess.

The early Greeks above all recognized the value of physical culture,
which to-day occupies a prominent place in our curriculum. Were the
children of to-day, like those of the ancient Greeks, compelled to
follow a routine of physical training, a rugged constitution would
replace many a “delicate” and “infirm” one, and the race propagated
would tend to develop a stronger character. Then the weak-minded,
now so conspicuously present, would be eradicated, and many diseased
conditions fostered by an “inanimate” race would disappear.

Hygeia, from whence comes Hygiene, or the art of preserving health, was
a pretended sister of Æsculapius. Anatomy could not flourish in Greece,
because a most exemplary punishment awaited any untoward conduct toward
the dead. Their peculiar religious beliefs regarding the rest of the
soul were responsible for this.

The knowledge of the functions of the body in health and disease was
appreciated by Pythagoras. Diogenes asserts that Alcmæon, one of
the Pythagoreans, wrote a work on the functions, which work would
consequently be the most ancient known treatise on physiology.

The age of Hippocrates (B. C. 460–370) was marked by a revolution in
medical science. “This central figure in the history of medicine”
was descendant of a family in which the practice of medicine
was hereditary. He was an extensive writer on such subjects as
epidemics, acute diseases, dislocations, fractures, etc. Owing to
the impossibility of establishing a physiology without an anatomical
basis, his references to these subjects are crude and incorrect.
To Hippocrates we owe the classification of endemic, sporadic, and
epidemic forms of disease, and their division into acute and chronic.
He wrote on diseases of women and epilepsy, and his therapeutics,
though crude, were a marked improvement on what had preceded. He wrote
fully on external diseases and surgical therapeutics. In obstetrics he
was a close observer and a thoughtful teacher. The brilliant theories
and practices so diligently observed and urged by this master were
thrown in the shadow by his thoughtless followers. The well-instructed
physician is not ignorant of the opinions of Hippocrates, for truly
the “divine old man” is the “Father of Physic.” He caused a revolution
in the practice of medicine, semeiology, pathology, and dietetics. He
taught physicians to observe attentively the progress of Nature, proved
the inutility of theories, and showed that observation is the basis of
medicine.

An important age, and one of marked progress in medicine, is from the
foundation of the Alexandrian Library (320 B. C.) up to the death of
Galen (A. D. 200). Under the Ptolemies dissection of human bodies was
allowed, and hence, as already stated, the science of medicine received
quite an impulse. Herophilus deserves first mention as a dissector. He
described the brain and its vessels, the eye, the intestinal canal, and
parts of the vascular system. The valves of the heart were more exactly
described by Erasistratus, who discovered the lymph vessels and pointed
out that the epiglottis prevents the entrance of food into the lungs.

Aretæus, more than any other up to his time, attempted to found
pathology upon a sound anatomic basis, an effort which shows the
scientific progress of his age.

Of all the physicians of antiquity, Galen was probably the most
brilliant genius. In the midst of disorder he led back to the safer
road of sound doctrine and accurate observation which distinguished
the Hippocratic school. He wrote extensively on anatomy, especially
regarding the muscles. He was the first vivisector, by exposing
the muscles of animals and demonstrating their functions, and his
classification according to their use is at present in vogue. Carefully
regulated vivisection has been, and always will be, of incalculable
benefit to the development of accurate medical knowledge, and an
indirect aid in the alleviation of human suffering. Galen divided the
body into cranial and thoracic cavities, and described the organs,
etc., contained therein. Anatomy and physiology, the fundamental bases
of medicine and surgery, made the most progress during the period just
reviewed, and next came the description of diseases, their medical and
surgical therapeutics.

After the sixth century medicine was exercised almost exclusively by
the monks of the West. They were unworthy the name of physicians, as
they resorted more to prayers, and were retarded by ignorance and
prejudice.

During the seventh and eighth centuries there were among the monks a
few traditionary remains of science, originating from the East. The
prelates, archdeacons, etc., though continuing the practice of the
healing art, were gradually discouraged by the church, but as late
as the middle of the fifteenth century the Bishop of Colchester was
chaplain and first physician to Henry VI. In 1452 physicians of the
University of Paris were not allowed to marry, the applicant, prior to
admission, taking the oath of celibacy.

During the twelfth century the school of Salernum, through the personal
interest manifested by Emperor Frederick II., acquired a degree of
reputation attained by few similar institutions in ancient times.
Schools in Paris and England were placed on an advanced standing,
the professors being salaried; and about this period the titles of
bachelor, licentiate, and master, were granted to the physicians.

During the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries medicine made remarkable
progress in France under St. Louis. During the reign of this prince the
teaching of medicine and surgery was divided into separate and distinct
classes. Medical institutions now became greatly encouraged, and in the
leading cities of Europe universities were erected under the auspices
of royalty.

Medical instruction experienced an important revolution in the European
countries during the fourteenth century. For the first time in Europe
anatomy was taught by dissection of the human body. Guy de Chauliac,
who lived at the end of this century, wrote a treatise on surgery which
served as the basis of European instruction until Ambroise Paré of
France published his celebrated work upon the same subject.

The fifteenth century was also one of improvement. The Arabs added
a few observations on pathology, especially of the eruptive fevers.
Some useful works on pharmacy and materia medica were published during
this epoch. During this era the operation was devised for replacing
the nose when removed by accident or disease, by using for the purpose
a piece of flesh taken from the arm, and applying it by a grafting
process. About the middle of this period the internal administration of
metallic drugs was introduced. Towards the latter end, the invention of
printing tended to assist the progress of medicine. Near the close of
this century scurvy was first noticed in Germany. During this period
more energy was devoted to postmortem demonstrations and the study of
symptoms of diseases.

To Benevieni we owe the commencement of the study of gross pathology
and pathological anatomy. Malgaigne remarks of him: “A eulogy which he
merits, and which he shared with no other person, and which has not
been accorded to him up to this time by the many historians of surgery,
who have superficially searched among these precious sources, is that
he was the first who had the habit, felt the need, and set the useful
example, which he transmitted to his successors, of searching in the
cadaver, according to the title of his book, for the concealed causes
of disease.” His observations on anatomical heart lesions, gall-stone,
and presence of parasites in the body, were original. John Fernel, who
has been surnamed “the modern Galen,” divided medicine into physiology,
pathology, and therapeutics. The fundamental maxim of therapeutics,
that every disease must be combated by contrary remedies, was early
laid down by him, and he claimed that anything that cured a disease
was contrary to it. Surgery was placed on a high scale during this
era, as thorough a course as the time afforded was given, and a rigid
examination held at its termination. Ambroise Paré contributed largely
toward making this a glorious century. He rose from the lowest walks
of life to the highest professional attainments and honors. He was the
first to control hemorrhage by tying the bleeding vessels, thus doing
away with the former crude and painful method of pouring on hot oil.
This procedure proved quite a boon to surgery; as an instance it may be
mentioned that prior to the introduction of this method in amputations
the bleeding was controlled by means of a hot iron, and this before the
days of anæsthesia.

Every age of ancient, mediæval, and modern medicine has had its
charlatans, and the more civilization progresses, the more popular
these quacks become with certain types of people, particularly those of
the middle and lower classes, although no class appears to be exempt.
Latent, unscrupulous, and unprincipled, they play upon the credulity of
the ignorant.

The central figure of the mediæval charlatans was Paracelsus, who was
given to drink and debauchery. He advertised extensively, similar
to the charlatans of to-day, and exerted an influence in his time.
“The school which he would have founded was nothing but a school of
ignorance, dissipation, and boasting—a school of medical dishonesty.”

During the sixteenth century the greatest discoveries took place
in anatomy, based upon dissections, the only rational method of
ascertaining anatomical knowledge. The lesser circulation of the blood,
or that through the lungs, was appreciated.

The officers of the universities were chosen by the students, who
assisted in laying out the curriculum. Compare this with the rigid
methods of medical instruction now in vogue. The practitioners were of
roving habits, which were evidently contracted during their student
days, as it was customary for them to go from one school to another,
the poor classes defraying expenses by begging and singing.

There was evident improvement in the social and mental status of
medical men upon the approach of the seventeenth century, and this
period is signalized by the discovery of the circulation of the blood,
one of the most important ever made in medicine. Chemistry now assumed
the dignified aspect of a science, which fact benefited the progress of
medicine.

It is difficult for us at the present time to understand why the
circulation of the blood was not discovered prior to this period, but
to the ancients it was incomprehensible. They believed the arteries
contained air, because after death they were found empty. William
Harvey, the discoverer of the circulation of the blood, did not publish
the results of his investigations until 1628, first submitting them to
fifteen years of proof. This naturally revolutionized physiology. The
capillary circulation, or that intermediate between the arteries and
veins, was described by Malpighi in 1628. Of course this was possible
only through the means of a microscope. No less remarkable was the
discovery of the lymphatic vessels. Peruvian bark (the alkaloid quinine
being more commonly employed) so universally employed as a specific for
malaria, was first used in the early part of this epoch.

During this period ophthalmology (which treats of the diseases of the
eye) was cultivated in France, cataract was first recognized, and
the diseases of the ear first systematically described. Altogether
the century showed marked progression, closing with the teachings of
Sydenham, “the English Hippocrates.”

The eighteenth century was one of continued progress. The eminent
observers devoted more time to microscopical work, studying the
minute structure of the tissues and cells. One of the most prominent
is Lieberkühn, who invented the solar microscope, with which he was
enabled to exhibit the circulation of the blood. The systematic
practice of the preventive inoculation against small-pox by vaccination
originated in this decade. The first inoculation with cow-pox was
in 1774. Edward Jenner, the English surgeon, was “the father of
vaccination,” which he first did in 1796. About 1800, Dr. Waterhouse,
then professor of medicine in Harvard College, performed the first
vaccination in America, the patients being his four children.

The treatment of the insane was changed from one of torture and
barbarous methods to a more scientific one, conducive to the comfort
and return to health of the patient.

This period marks the earliest example of medical teaching in this
country, consisting of the demonstrations of anatomy in Philadelphia by
Dr. Thomas Cadwalader, upon his return from Europe. This was previous
to 1750, about which time a body was dissected in New York. In 1754–56
Dr. William Hunter of Scotland delivered a series of lectures on
anatomy, accompanied by dissections, at Newport, R. I.

In 1762 Dr. Shippen laid the foundation of a medical school in
Philadelphia, which finally developed into the Medical Department of
the University of Pennsylvania. This was the first medical school
established in this country. In 1768 a school of medicine was organized
in New York, and the next in succession was the Medical Department of
Harvard College in 1782. The fourth was established at Hanover, 1797,
being connected with Dartmouth College. These were the only medical
colleges instituted prior to the present century. The first book on
American surgery was written in 1775 by Dr. John Jones, the title being
“Wounds and Fractures.”

“The tendency of the nineteenth century seems to be a continuation,
and, perhaps, in some respects an exaggeration of the condition that
obtained in France during the previous century; in other words, the
world has become practically an enormous school of pathological
anatomy and diagnosis—a school inaugurated by Bichat, as representing
so-called scientific or exact medicine.”

[Illustration: DR. OLIVER WENDELL HOLMES.]

Darwin has promulgated “the most influential philosophic doctrine
of this or any other century.” Our materia medica and the laws of
physics have been enriched by botanical discoveries, aiding greatly the
experimental researches of to-day. Helmholz has given us an instrument
called the ophthalmoscope, containing a series of numbered magnifying
lenses, with which the interior of the eye can be explored by looking
directly through the pupil of the eye, similar to looking through a
door into a room. Through his knowledge of physics, Seebach was able
to make fame through his discovery of thermal electricity. Daguerre,
who invented photography, must not be overlooked, as by means of this
process, many conditions are directly appreciated by the eye which
could not be told in words and still convey an idea of the tumor, etc.,
being described. It may not be amiss to mention here that the biograph
will in a few years prove an important factor in teaching the various
operations. One surgeon in France is now employing it. We must not
overlook Edison and his electrical achievements which directly and
indirectly affect medicine; nor Bell’s telephone, which is sometimes
used to locate a bullet. By placing the receiver to the ear and probing
for the bullet with electric conductors, the making and breaking of the
circuit upon contact with the missile is transmitted to the receiver
and distinctly heard. This procedure, however, has been discarded since
the introduction by Röntgen of the X-ray.

A very significant feature of the age has been the extraordinary
development of associations devoted to scientific discussions and
the publication of medical literature and journals. The formation of
medical societies, especially in the United States, has been quite
active. But few counties are without a medical organization, referred
to as “The ... County Medical Society.”

The American Medical Association was established by Dr. Nathan Smith
Davis in Philadelphia fifty-two years ago (1847). The first two years
no meetings were held, but since then regular annual meetings have been
in progress, the place of assembly being decided upon by a majority
vote of its members. It has met in the city of its birth five times,
the founder has been elected president twice, and is still (1900) in
active practice at the age of eighty-two. He has attended all its
meetings held in various cities from Boston to San Francisco.

The first medical journal in this country appeared in New York, 1797.
It was called “The New York Repository,” was published quarterly, and
managed to reach its twenty-third edition. Fifty years ago there were
about twenty journals published in the United States. At the end of the
century there are two hundred and thirty.

In 1810 there were six hundred and fifty students of medicine in
America, and one hundred graduates. At the present writing about twenty
thousand medical students are enrolled in our various colleges, and
during the spring of 1899 about three thousand five hundred received
the degree of M. D.

[Illustration: STARLING MEDICAL COLLEGE AND ST. FRANCIS HOSPITAL.]

The original branches, practice of medicine, surgery, obstetrics,
physiology, anatomy, therapeutics, and chemistry, have been subdivided
and specialized. Among the chief of these specialties are gynecology,
which treats of diseases of women; pediatrics, which treats of diseases
of children; dermatology, which treats of diseases of the skin;
ophthalmology, which treats of diseases of the eye; laryngology, which
treats of diseases of the throat and larynx; otology, which treats of
diseases of the ear; neurology, which treats of diseases of the nerves;
medical jurisprudence, which treats of the relation of medicine to law;
pathology, which treats of diseased tissues and organs; bacteriology,
which treats of the microbes; and physical diagnosis, which treats of
the art of discriminating disease by means of the eye, ear, and
touch. The nucleus of the teaching regarding the latter subject is due
to the efforts and observations of Corvisart, of France. He was the
first to ascertain the diseased areas of the lungs, by tapping on the
chest with the fingers, and listening to the pitch of the note thus
elicited. A low, dull note indicates that the lung is solid, as in
pneumonia; a flat note that fluid is present, and so on. By placing the
ear to the chest wall, sounds in health and disease are heard, which
vary in intensity, degree, etc. Laennec discovered by accident that
this method was greatly improved and the sounds more distinctly heard
if a cylindrical tube was interposed between the ear and the chest
wall. The outcome of this principle is the stethoscope.

[Illustration: DR. NATHAN SMITH DAVIS, OF CHICAGO.]

The name of Pravaz, the Lyons surgeon, has been perpetuated by the
hypodermic syringe which he devised. The employment of suitable drugs
in this instrument is the method par excellence for relieving pain.
With it drugs can be injected into unconscious patients. Suicides
who refuse to swallow emetics can have their stomachs emptied
most effectually of their contents by a hypodermatic injection of
apomorphine.

The thermometer used for taking the temperature of the human body is so
arranged that the mercury does not descend into the bulb until shaken
down, hence after taking the temperature it remains uninfluenced until
shaken down. Were an ordinary thermometer used, by the time it was
removed from the patient to the light the mercury would descend several
degrees.

Pasteur began the studies of fermentation in 1854. Through his
observations, aided by the microscope, the opinion was reached that
micro-organisms played an important role in the causation of disease.
Many of the laboratory investigators became imbued with the spirit,
and through their diligent observations the microbes causing many
diseases have been isolated. It remained for Koch to discover the
tubercle bacillus, or _Bacillus tuberculosis_, which is the cause of
consumption. The sputum of a patient, properly stained, and examined
under the microscope, will at once decide whether that individual has
consumption.

Having ascertained that bacteria were the cause of disease, sepsis
(blood poisoning), etc., it then remained to discover a method of
killing them, without any undue injury to the patient. Sir Joseph
Lister began experiments upon this hypothesis, and in 1867 was able to
publish favorable results. But lo! the world was slow to bend to a new
thought ably demonstrated, and for a score of years he was bitterly
opposed.

It was Crawford W. Long, in a little village of Alabama, who, in 1842,
was the first to put to sleep a patient with ether, and remove a small
growth. The patient, upon awakening, had experienced no pain. This
method of relieving pain was christened “anæsthesia” several years
later, by the distinguished Dr. Oliver Wendell Holmes, whose writings
did more than those of any other American to eradicate “child-bed
fever.” Every woman in the land owes him an eternal debt of gratitude.
To Guthrie, of Sackett’s Harbor, New York, is due the credit of first
discovering chloroform, but Sir James Simpson, of Edinburgh, deserves
the credit of first employing it in medicine.

The surgeons of America laid the foundation of gynecology, the progress
of which has been more marked than any department of medicine. The
first ovariotomy in the world was performed by Dr. Ephraim McDowell
in Kentucky, December, 1809. This was prior to the days of anæsthesia
and antisepsis, and a howling mob awaited outside, ready to murder the
brave surgeon should his patient die during the operation. “In five
days,” says Dr. McDowell, “I visited her, and much to my astonishment
found her engaged in making up her bed.” Dr. J. Marion Sims, our
illustrious genius who established an international reputation, did
much to promulgate plastic work on the female genitalia. The deeds
of medical men are soon forgotten by an ungrateful public, and the
sons of Æsculapius are the last to have monuments erected to their
memory. But four exist in America; one, in New York, to that grand old
gynecologist, Dr. J. Marion Sims; one in Washington, to Dr. Samuel
D. Gross, “the Nestor of American Surgery;” one in Bushnell Park,
Hartford, Conn., to Dr. Horace Wells, the discoverer of anæsthesia; and
one in the Public Garden in Boston to the discoverer of anæsthesia.
This last bears no name. Antisepsis and anæsthesia have played an
unusually important role in obstetrics, by alleviating the sufferings
of childbirth and eradicating child-bed fever, thus reducing the
mortality of both mother and child.

Physiology has made very rapid strides during this era. Beaumont, in
his famous work, describes digestion in the stomach and experiments on
the gastric juice. He was enabled to observe this in a voyageur who
was accidentally wounded in the stomach by the discharge of a musket,
June, 1822. Quite a large opening remained, which Nature closed with
a valve. By pushing the valve to one side, the interior of the stomach
could be explored.

Through the work of the experimental physiologists in the laboratories,
the study of the action of drugs on the lungs, heart, liver, stomach,
nerves, etc., has been greatly enhanced.

Anatomy is now being taught by the only true method, and that is
dissection. Didactic lectures are given, but the student must dissect
every part of the human body before he can receive his degree. Formerly
graves were robbed, and the bodies sold to the colleges. Now, however,
through legislative enactment, unclaimed bodies are turned over to the
colleges, where they are preserved either by injection, a pickling
process, or by cold storage.

[Illustration: J. MARION SIMS, A.B., M.D., (Late Surgeon to the Woman’s
Hospital, New York.)]

The ophthalmologists of to-day fear nothing inside nor outside the eye.
Cross eyes are straightened, cataracts removed, eyeballs taken out and
glass eyes inserted.

This article would be incomplete, were not a few remarks directed
toward the trained nurse.

The first training school for nurses in America was established in
connection with the Lying-in Charity Hospital of Philadelphia in 1828.
This school, still in existence, thus has the honor of being the oldest
in this country, and is antedated by only one abroad.

The generally recognized profession for women, that of the trained
nurse, is practically of recent development. Twenty-five years ago
the training school connected with the Bellevue Hospital, New York,
graduated a class of five nurses. This was a marked departure in the
medical history of this country. Since then the demand for the trained
nurse has been great, and no hospital is complete without such a
training school.

The progress of medicine in the nineteenth century has been far
more rapid, creditable, and momentous than during any like period
of the past. This is true not only in the United States, but in
every civilized country. Its entire scope, meaning, and purpose have
undergone changes equivalent to revolution. Antique superstitions,
idle theories, foolish speculations, absurd practices, the ridiculous
jealousies and incriminations of opposing schools, have been largely
eliminated. Medical institutions are upon the loftiest plane in their
history. Teachers are better endowed than ever before. Periods of
scholastic preparation have been lengthened and curriculums enlarged,
thus securing for the fields of practice a higher mental equipment and
more conscionable devotion to duty. Never before have the auxiliary
and material agencies been turned to so frequent and preventive
account. Electricity, the microscope, anæsthesia, antisepsis,
laboratory experiment, hospital opportunities, etc., are ever constant
inspirations to skilled treatment and fresh researches. As the grand
army of humanitarian workers was never so large as at the end of the
century, so it was never better fortified for attack upon the enemies
of health, fuller of enthusiasm or more deeply established in the
public confidence. One may not, as yet, assert that medicine is ridding
itself of empiricism with a satisfactory degree of rapidity, or that
it has arrived at the stage of an exact science, but it surely has
approached such a stage as nearly as conditions will allow.

EVOLUTION OF THE RAILWAY

BY E. E. RUSSELL TRATMAN, C.E.,

_Assistant Editor of “Engineering News,” Chicago_.

The railway as a means of rapid transportation and general
intercommunication is one of the most important factors in the
development of modern commerce and civilization, and, after reviewing
what it has done and become in the nineteenth century, one cannot
help wishing for the opportunity to review the railway wonders of the
twentieth century.

While the history of the railway dates back far beyond the nineteenth
century, yet the railway, as we know it to-day, is essentially a
product of this century. It dates, in fact, from England in 1830, when
the Liverpool & Manchester Railway, 31 miles long, was opened, and
was operated from the beginning by steam locomotives. The Stockton &
Darlington Railway, 37 miles, was opened in 1825, but this line was
intended only for private coal traffic, while the other line was built
for general passenger and freight service, and for the use and benefit
of the public.

The United States followed this lead very closely. In 1828 the Delaware
& Hudson Canal Company built a line from its mines to its canal at
Honesdale. This was a private coal road, however, and may best be
compared to the Stockton & Darlington Railway. The first public railway
operated by steam was the Mohawk & Hudson Railway, from Albany to
Schenectady, 16 miles, which was opened in 1831. The Baltimore & Ohio
Railway was the first railway enterprise of more than local character,
being designed to open communication with the Ohio River, a distance of
400 miles. It was chartered in 1827, commenced in 1828, completed to
Ellicott’s Mills (13 miles) in 1830, and to Washington (40 miles) in
1834. It is one of the great monuments of the American railway system,
and it was examined by government commissions from Russia and Austria
in 1831 and 1849.

In speaking of the railway we unconsciously associate with it the steam
locomotive, since the two are so entirely interdependent. Railways
operated by horses, or by cables and stationary engines, could never
have become the great civilizing and commercial medium which the
railway operated by swift locomotives has become. Similarly, the
development of the locomotive grew apace, as soon as it was recognized
that the smooth track of the railway—and not the rough track of the
highway—was to be its field of operation.

At the end of the nineteenth century, after seventy years of
development, the world has nearly 500,000 miles of railway, on which
locomotives of 80 to 110 tons in weight (without their tenders) haul
freight trains of 1000 to 3000 tons. Passenger trains, too, are run
at speeds of 40 to 75 miles per hour in regular daily service, and
even make bursts of speed at 80 to 100 miles per hour. The fact that
in 1890 Europe and North America had about 320,000 miles of railway
out of a grand total of 370,000 miles, indicates that this phase of
nineteenth-century progress has been due mainly to peoples of Christian
civilization, and besides this, it must be remembered that the
railways of Asia, Africa, Australia, and South America have been mainly
built by the same peoples. The central regions of these four latter
geographical divisions are fields for twentieth-century development.

The great trunk lines of railway communication are hardly more
important than the vast network of branch and minor lines which connect
and intersect them. These latter lines bring the people of smaller
towns and country districts into closer relation with the large cities,
the centres of industrial and intellectual energy, enterprise, and
wealth. They thus tend to reduce isolation and dependence upon purely
local resources.

[Illustration: THE OLD STAGE COACH.]

Railways also serve important military and strategic purposes. In India
many of the railways have been built with a view to the defense of the
northeastern frontier, and many European governments assume certain
military authority over the railways. The first trans-continental
railways of the United States and Canada were largely assisted by
government subsidies on account of their great importance for the
transportation of troops. The railway also serves purposes of pleasure,
as well as of commerce and war. Not only do the ordinary railways carry
much tourist and pleasure travel, but lines are built exclusively for
such travel. Some of these take people to the summer and pleasure
resorts, while others cater to the inherent desire of man to ascend
great altitudes and to behold the world in its beauty and grandeur
spread below them. For this purpose alone have railways been built to
the summits of the Rockies, the Alps, and other mountain ranges.

At the end of the century the United States has about 185,000 miles
of railway, which have cost about $53,000 per mile and earn $6500 per
mile. Great Britain has about 22,000 miles, which have cost $225,000
per mile and earn about $20,000 per mile. A large proportion of this
high cost of construction is due to the high prices for land and to the
preliminary parliamentary proceedings which are necessary in securing
the right to build railways. The average cost per mile of railways in
different countries is as follows:—

United States $53,000
India 75,000
Japan 92,000
France 100,000
Germany 101,500
Switzerland (ordinary) $119,300
Do (mountain) 162,500
Russia 122,000
Austria-Hungary 125,400
Great Britain 225,000

One of the great economic purposes of railways in new countries is
to reduce the cost of rapid transportation in bulk far below that of
slow transportation in small quantities. Train speed is a matter of
secondary importance in such cases, the traffic accommodation and
capacity of the slowest train being far beyond that of road or canal
transportation. Traffic will be served better and at much less cost by
being carried in bulk on 500 miles of railway at 10 miles per hour,
than on 100 miles of railway at 35 miles per hour, and then in small
lots on wagons or canal boats at 3 miles per hour for 400 miles.

The advantages of the rapid transportation of perishable freight by
rail, especially in regard to food supplies for cities, were early
recognized, and by 1854 the trains brought car-loads of country milk
into London every day. Previous to this, the supply was obtained from
cows kept in stables, which was an unsanitary and expensive plan.
Another immediate result of railway service was that people began
to live farther out of the towns, and then began the growth of the
suburban residence districts, which are such a feature of modern cities
and city life.

[Illustration: FIRST TRAIN OF STEAM CARS.]

The early railways were built merely as local lines, and there was
little idea of their ultimate connection or extension. These small
individual lines, however, with their own rate-making powers and
systems of management, have been consolidated into great systems, thus
effecting material economies and facilities in operation. Thus the
Mohawk & Hudson Railway of 1831 was the first of a series of lines
now consolidated to form the New York Central Railway; while the
Liverpool & Manchester Railway of 1830 was the beginning of what is
now the London & Northwestern Railway system. Not only is there this
consolidation, but also a most comprehensive system for the interchange
of traffic between different systems. Thus passengers can purchase
through tickets and travel through from Paris to St. Petersburg, or
from Boston to San Francisco, while freight cars can be sent through
in a similar way. This is really a wonderful feature of railway
development. The following are a few examples of the great railway
systems of the world:—

-------------------------------------+------+--------+---------+-------
Railway. |Miles.| Loco- |Passenger|Freight
| |motives.| Cars. | Cars.
-------------------------------------+------+--------+---------+-------
Pennsylvania (U.S.A.) | 8882 | 3594 | 3847 |146,060
Chicago & Northwestern (U.S.A.) | 7996 | 1380 | 1176 | 49,484
Chicago, Burlington & Quincy (U.S.A.)| 7462 | 1205 | 936 | 40,720
Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fé (U.S.A.) | 7120 | 1036 | 655 | 29,837
Great Western (England) | 2576 | 1837 | 6201 | 53,156
London & Northwestern (England) | 1912 | 2851 | 8446 | 65,456
Paris, Lyons & Mediterranean (France)| 5594 | 2624 | 5837 | 87,320
Western (France) | 3464 | 1492 | 4378 | 26,487
Mediterranean (Italy) | 3568 | 1314 | 3706 | 23,077
Northwestern (India) | 3371 | 602 | 2121 | 10,312
-------------------------------------+------+--------+---------+-------

In some countries the government owns and operates all, or nearly
all, of the railways, as in Germany, Belgium, and the African and
Australian colonies. Switzerland, in 1898, decided that its government
should acquire the railways. In Holland and Italy the government owns
the railways, but leases them to operating companies. France, Brazil,
and the Argentine Republic have both state and private lines, with a
greater or less degree of state assistance and control of the latter.
In Great Britain the railways are owned entirely by private companies,
but their operation is subject to government supervision in the public
interests. In the United States there was at first almost absolute
freedom of construction, but the consequent abuses and financial
disasters, owing to unnecessary lines and cut-throat competition,
have led some of the States to wisely exercise some degree of control
over railway affairs. The interference of the federal government in
railway affairs has been slight but important. In 1862 it aided the
construction of the first transcontinental railway; in 1887 it passed
the act for the regulation of rates, etc., in interstate traffic; and
in 1893 it passed the act making compulsory the use of power brakes and
automatic couplers on freight cars.

Government ownership and operation of railways is rarely satisfactory
from a financial or a traffic point of view, but, on the other hand,
an absolutely unrestricted railway element is liable to become a
serious evil. The best system is undoubtedly that in which the railways
are owned and operated by private enterprise, but subject to state
supervision, like steamships, factories, etc. It must not be forgotten,
however, that private enterprise is not always available. In Russia,
for example, the development of railways would have been but slow on
such a basis; and in India, government backing was needed to induce
British capitalists to enter the field. It is unfortunate for China
that neither the government nor the people have been competent or
enterprising enough to deal with the railway question. The present
system of development by rival interests of various nationalities
seems almost certain to lead to the eventual dissolution of the empire
and its partition among other nations, as Africa is already in large
measure partitioned.

In the United States railway construction has gone by leaps and bounds,
and there is now a vast network of lines,—main, secondary, branch, and
local. The highest records of construction within the past twenty years
were 12,800 miles built in 1887, and 11,600 miles in 1882, while the
lowest record was 1750 miles in 1896. The growth from 1886 to 1899 has
been as follows, the relatively small increase in number of locomotives
being due to the greater power of modern engines:—

---------------------+-------------+--------------+----------
| | | Increase,
| 1886. | 1899. | per cent.
---------------------+-------------+--------------+----------
Mileage | 133,600 | 185,000 | 88.47
Tonnage carried |482,000,000 | 780,000,000 | 62.00
Number of cars | 871,500 | 1,330,000 | 52.61
Number of locomotives| 26,400 | 36,000 | 36.30
---------------------+-------------+--------------+----------

Perhaps the railway of most recent interest is the first line in
Alaska, which is twenty miles long, and was built as a result of
the rush to the Klondike gold fields. This was opened on February
20, 1899. The great transcontinental railways, however, are of much
broader interest. In 1835 the Rev. Samuel Parker, a missionary in
the Northwest, suggested a railway from the Atlantic to the Pacific,
and Dr. Samuel E. Barlow proposed one from New York to the Columbia
River, 2000 miles, to cost $10,000 per mile, and to carry traffic at
about seven miles per hour. From 1844 to 1849 Mr. Asa Whitney urged
Congress to grant land to aid him in building a line from Lake Michigan
to San Francisco, 2030 miles, to cost $20,000 per mile. Between 1853
and 1861 Congress had surveys made of five routes, but no definite
action was taken until after the outbreak of the Civil War, in 1861,
when the federal government soon recognized the importance of having
direct communication with the Pacific States, which were at that time
isolated. Companies were organized in 1862, and work commenced in 1864,
under government subsidies and military aid and protection. On May 10,
1869, the Union Pacific Railway (from the east) and the Central Pacific
Railway (from the west) met at Promontory Point, Utah, 1186 miles from
the Missouri River and 638 miles from Sacramento, Cal.

[Illustration: A RAILWAY TRAIN IN BELGIUM.]

Now, thirty years later, we have six so-called transcontinental
railways, no one of which, however, has its own line from ocean to
ocean, and none of which run through trains or cars. In Canada,
however, the Canadian Pacific Railway (opened in 1887) has a through
line from St. John and Montreal to Vancouver, with through trains daily
between the latter points, 2905 miles. The principal transcontinental
lines, with the total distances from ocean to ocean, are shown on the
following page.

-------------------+-------+------------------------+-------+---------
| | | | Total
Railway. |Opened.| Route. |Length.|Distance.
-------------------+-------+------------------------+-------+---------
1. Canadian Pacific| 1887 |Montreal to Vancouver | 2905 | 2905
2. Great Northern | 1893 |St. Paul to Seattle | 1827 | 3157[6]
3. Northern Pacific| — |St. Paul to Tacoma | 1912 | 3242
4. Union Pacific | 1869 |Omaha to San Francisco | 1928 | 3340
5. Union Pacific | — |Omaha to Portland | 1823 | 3235
6. Atchison, Topeka| | | |
& Santa Fé | — |Chicago to San Francisco| 2577 | 3497
7. Southern Pacific| 1883 |New Orleans to San | |
| | Francisco | 2489 | 4164[6]
-------------------+-------+------------------------+-------+---------

[6] In Nos. 2 and 7 the total distance is given from New York.

Of the various completed and partly completed interoceanic railways
across Central America, the most important by far is the Panama
railway, in Colombia, 47½ miles long. This was opened as long ago as
1855, and was originally intended as a link in a route between New
York and San Francisco, 5450 miles. In South America there are few
railways of great importance, and the interior yet remains undeveloped,
with the exception of the great plains of the Argentine Republic. A
transcontinental line between Buenos Ayres and Valparaiso, 850 miles,
is nearly completed, but work has been stopped for some years, leaving
50 miles yet to be built at the summit of the Andes. An interesting,
but as yet visionary, scheme is that for an intercontinental railway
through Central and South America. The distance from the southern
frontier of Mexico to Buenos Ayres would be 5500 miles. About 1280
miles of this are built, but comprise many small lines which would have
to be rebuilt. The total cost would be about $220,000,000, at a low
estimate, and the total distance from New York to Buenos Ayres would be
10,300 miles by rail.

In Europe there is a vast and comprehensive network of railway lines,
but the distances are less, even St. Petersburg and Constantinople
being but about 1600 and 1800 miles from Paris. While the development
of railways has been remarkable, the most striking features are
the lines which cross the Alps to connect the interior with the
Mediterranean ports. The first of these was the Semmering railway, on
the route between Vienna and Trieste (1854). The Mont Cenis railway
(1867) was mainly a surface line, with heavy inclines operated on the
Fell grip-rail system. Its route followed the great carriage road built
by Napoleon in 1803–10. The railway over the Brenner Pass was opened
in 1868; in 1871 the Mont Cenis tunnel superseded the high-level line,
and in 1880 the Great St. Gothard railway was opened. This was followed
by the Arlberg railway in 1884, and the Simplon railway is now under
construction.

Europe has the only railway within the Arctic Circle. It runs from
Lulea, on the Gulf of Bothnia, northwest to the Gellivara iron mines,
44 miles within the circle. As the port is closed by ice during the
winter, the line is to be extended to the Atlantic coast at Ofoten, 69°
north latitude, where the influence of the Gulf Stream keeps the ports
open. This end of the line will be 130 miles north of the Arctic Circle.

[Illustration: LOOP IN THE SELKIRKS, SHOWING FOUR TRACKS.]

The countries of Asia (with the exception of India) are but scantily
supplied with railways. Even Palestine—the Holy Land—has, however,
been invaded, and has now two railways. One of these is from Jaffa
(the biblical Joppa) to Jerusalem, 54 miles (1892); the other
is from Beirut to Damascus, 70 miles. British interests have long
advocated an “all-rail-to-India” project. The line would start opposite
Constantinople, pass down the Euphrates valley, across Persia, and
along the coast of Baluchistan to Kurrachee, connecting there with
the Indian railway system. This great system aggregates 25,000 miles,
and extends up to the Bolan Pass and the Khyber Pass, on the Afghan
frontier. Southward, it has been proposed to connect with the Ceylon
railways by a line of bridges and embankments along the reefs and
shoals known as Adam’s Bridge.

Owing to the vigorous opposition of the government and people, China
has but 350 miles of railway to its 4,200,000 square miles and its
population of 420,000,000. Many lines are projected, but are all in
the eastern portion, and the twentieth century will be well advanced
before the railway opens up the heart of the country to civilization.
Japan, the very opposite of China, has encouraged railway construction,
and now has 3000 miles of railway to its 147,600 square miles and its
population of 45,000,000.

The most notable of all the railways in Asia is the great
Trans-Siberian railway, now being built by the Russian government. It
was commenced in 1891, and may be completed by 1903, the distance from
St. Petersburg to Vladivostok, or Port Arthur, being then about 5670
miles. There are several large cities on the route, and the line does
not pass through such a wild and uninhabited country as that through
which the Union Pacific Railroad was built thirty years ago. It is
now open to Lake Baikal, the trip of 3230 miles being made in about
12 days by the slow train, or 8 days by the less frequent fast train.
The road is roughly and lightly built in many respects, so that high
speeds cannot be maintained. The eastern end of the road will pass
through Chinese territory, thus giving Russia a firm foothold in that
empire. Hardly less interesting is the Trans-Caspian railway, from the
Caspian Sea to Samarcand, 885 miles, with a branch from Merv to within
95 miles of the Afghan city of Herat. An extension to the Persian Gulf
is also projected. As the Trans-Siberian railway has developed a new
wheat-growing region, so the Trans-Caspian railway is developing a new
cotton-growing region.

In Africa the railways already extend northward from Cape Town, through
the land of the Boers and up to Buluwayo, the old Zulu stronghold,
1400 miles. There is a picturesque project for carrying the line
on to the Mediterranean, a total distance of 5500 miles, but this
will not materialize for many years. The Congo railway, passing the
rapids, opens communication between the coast and a long stretch of
inland navigation. Several lines are being pushed from the east coast
into the interior, and a transcontinental railway from St. Paul de
Loando, on the west, has been commenced, but there is not now much
life in this latter project. The French have two favorite schemes for
railways,—from Algeria to Timbuctoo, and from Tunis to Lake Chad, the
latter line being about 1600 miles in length.

In Australia, the lines of the different colonies are gradually
extending and connecting to form a continuous system, which is
hampered, however, by differences of gauge. There is railway
communication between the capitals of Queensland (Brisbane), New South
Wales (Sydney), Victoria (Melbourne), and South Australia (Adelaide).
The great stretch westward to the coast cities of Western Australia is
yet in the future, as is also the South Australian transcontinental
line from Adelaide northward across vast deserts (already crossed by
the telegraph) to Palmerston.

[Illustration: ENTRANCE TO ST. GOTHARD TUNNEL, SWITZERLAND.]

Great bridges and tunnels are among the prominent features of the
railways of the world, but space forbids entering into details of these
works. They are in principle similar to those required for highways,
but many of these great works would never have been undertaken for
such traffic as is carried by a highway. The only railway suspension
bridge ever built was the Niagara bridge, opened in 1855, and replaced
by a steel arch in 1898. The development of bridges and traffic may
be judged from the fact that the Victoria single-track tubular bridge
over the St. Lawrence, at Montreal, which was opened in 1859, was
replaced in 1897–98 by a double-track railway and roadway truss bridge
on the same piers. The steel arch bridge, 1700 feet long, across the
Mississippi, at St. Louis, cost $5,300,000. The tubular bridge, 6592
feet long, over the St. Lawrence, at Montreal, Canada, cost $7,000,000.
The cantilever bridge, 8925 feet long, over the Firth of Forth,
Great Britain, cost $13,000,000. The cost of the proposed suspension
bridge, 3000 feet long, over the Hudson, at New York, is estimated
at $13,000,000. The first railway tunnel was the Portage Tunnel, in
Pennsylvania, built in 1831. The longest railway tunnel is the Simplon,
in Switzerland. It is 12.25 miles in length, and is still under
construction. The next longest is the Gothard, Switzerland. It is 9.30
miles long, and was opened in 1881.

In track construction, cast-iron rails began to be superseded by
wrought iron in 1820, and many of the early American railways had
strap iron laid on timber stringers. Within the past twenty years steel
has been used almost exclusively. In place of rails weighing 25 to 35
lbs. per yard, and 3 to 15 feet in length, we now use rails of 80 to
100 lbs. per yard, 30 to 60 feet long. Stone blocks and wooden ties
were first used to support the rails, and the latter are now generally
used, although metal ties are extensively used and date back to 1846.
In 1894 there were thirty-five thousand miles of railway laid with this
form of track. The next development will probably be a permanent and
continuous concrete bed for the rails; as the present construction,
with wooden ties laid in stone or other ballast, requires continual
attention and repair under the effects of heavy traffic.

[Illustration: RAILWAY SIGNALS.]

The semaphore signal was introduced in England by Mr. C. H. Gregory in
1841, and is now used in all parts of the world, to govern and protect
train movements. The first interlocking plant was erected in 1843, and
the complete plants—as used to-day—date from 1856. Now, practically
all important junctions are equipped with interlocking plants, which
prevent conflicting signals and switches being so set as to lead to
accident. The electric telegraph was patented by Cooke and Wheatstone
in 1837, and in 1839 they secured its introduction to govern the train
service on the Great Western Railway (England). The movements were
telegraphed from station to station, and a train was not allowed to
leave a station until the preceding train had passed the next station
in advance. This was the beginning of the “block system,” which is a
great element in the safe operation of traffic, since it maintains an
interval of space between trains. Mr. Edwin Clark’s telegraph block
system was introduced in 1853, and as traffic increased intermediate
block signal stations were established between the regular stations, so
as to shorten the distances between trains. This system is compulsory
in Great Britain and is already largely used in the United States.
It was at first held that it was not adapted to conditions in this
country, where so many lines have but a single track, but experience
has shown that it increases the facility as well as the safety of
operating traffic on single and double track lines alike.

[Illustration: AN AMERICAN EXPRESS LOCOMOTIVE.]

Steam locomotives were used on colliery railways in England as early
as 1804, when Trevithick built an engine, which was the first to haul
a train on rails. George Stephenson built his first locomotive in
1814, and in 1825 built the “Locomotion” for the Stockton & Darlington
Railway. Horses, stationary engines, and steam locomotives were all
proposed for the Liverpool & Manchester Railway, and in 1829 the
directors offered a premium of $2500 for the best locomotive. Each
engine was to consume its smoke, weigh about 6 tons, cost not more than
$2750, and be capable of hauling a train of 20 tons at 10 miles per
hour. This led to the now historical trials at Rainhill, in October,
1829, between the “Rocket” (Stephenson), the “Novelty” (Braithwaite
and Ericson), and the “Sans Pareil” (Hackworth). The award was made
to the “Rocket” as the most practicable machine, although the
“Novelty” attained a higher speed, and the “Sans Pareil” was also a
good engine and continued in use for several years. Seguin introduced
the locomotive in France in 1827, having modified and rebuilt an old
Stephenson engine.

The first locomotive operated in the United States was the imported
“Stourbridge Lion,” on the Delaware & Hudson Canal Co.’s line, in
1829. Cooper’s “Tom Thumb” was run on the Baltimore & Ohio Railway
in 1830, and in 1831 the directors of this road offered premiums of
$4000 and $3500 for locomotives. Each engine was to weigh not more
than 3½ tons, to have four wheels, and to haul loads of 15 tons at 15
miles per hour for 30 days. Five engines were presented, by Davis,
Costell, Milholland, Childs, and James. The prizes were awarded to the
first two, the Davis engine “York” being rebuilt under the direction
of its inventor and Mr. Ross Winans, while the “Costell” was put in
switching service. In 1831 the “John Bull” was built by the Stephensons
in England, and was put in service on the Camden & Amboy Railway
(U. S. A.) in the same year. In 1893 this old engine was readjusted and
ran from New York to Chicago, 912 miles, under its own steam, hauling
two cars of the type of 1836.

In 1898 there were about 19,500 locomotives in Great Britain and 36,500
in the United States. As a comparison between the little engines of
early days and the huge and swift engines of to-day, it may be stated
that modern passenger locomotives are now constructed with as many as
six driving wheels, and ten wheels in all. Some of those in use on the
Great Northern Railway, Great Britain, have driving wheels of 97 inches
in diameter. On the Fitchburg Railway, U. S. A., locomotives are in use
which weigh 75 tons. Some modern freight locomotives have as many as
ten driving wheels, and twelve wheels in all, and a total weight of 115
tons.

Since the application of electric traction to street railways, it has
frequently been said that it would eventually supersede the steam
locomotive. In no instance, however, has it yet been applied to regular
railway service, with heavy trains and long runs, nor is there yet
any indication of increased economy or efficiency due to its use in
such service. It is successfully used for local and suburban lines,
but these form a class in themselves, and the conditions of operation
are very different from those which obtain in ordinary service. The
Baltimore & Ohio Railway has some heavy electric locomotives, but these
are for hauling trains through a tunnel, to avoid the trouble and
discomfort from the smoke and gases from the steam engines.

The early passenger cars were either open cars with cross seats, or had
coach bodies on four-wheel platform cars. The coach-body cars on the
Mohawk & Hudson Railway, in 1831, were 7 ft. 4 in. long and 5 ft. wide.
In 1836 the American type of car was introduced on the Camden & Amboy
Railway, having a long body mounted on two four-wheeled trucks. These
cars seated 48 passengers, and cars for 60 passengers were in use in
1839, their cost being $2400. American day cars are now 60 to 80 ft.
long, seating 60 to 84 passengers, and weighing from 30 to 47 tons. The
standard day car of the Pennsylvania Railway is 60 ft. 7 in. long over
all, and seats 66 passengers. Dining and sleeping cars weigh from 45 to
65 tons, much of the weight being due to the special equipment for the
comfort and convenience of passengers, and consequently so much dead
weight to be hauled. It can be said without dispute that in no other
country have the railways done so much for the comfort and convenience
of their passengers, and have charged so little therefor.

In Europe, the cars developed into the compartment system, with side
doors, there being high transverse partitions with seats on each side,
so that in a full compartment half the passengers must ride backward.
The cars are usually short, with two or three axles, but about 1872 the
American system of mounting cars on trucks was introduced, and longer
cars on trucks are now somewhat extensively used. Within later years
corridor cars have been introduced, with a corridor connecting the
compartments. Such details as steam heat, toilet arrangements, ample
light, luxurious finish, etc., which have long been a matter of course
in this country, are quite “end of the century” improvements in Europe,
and generally below the standards observed in this country.

[Illustration: AN AMERICAN FREIGHT LOCOMOTIVE.]

Sleeping cars were used on the Cumberland Valley Railway (U. S. A.)
in 1836. In 1856, Mr. T. L. Woodruff built a sleeping car, and in
1857 two were built by Mr. Webster Wagner and operated on the New
York Central Railway. Mr. George M. Pullman began his experiments in
1859, and in 1864 he put in service on the Chicago & Alton Railway the
first sleeping car with the berth arrangements now almost universally
used. He pushed the business more vigorously than his predecessors
and acquired many of their patents. The Pullman Palace Car Co. was
organized in 1867, and in 1879 its various works were all concentrated
in a new industrial town—called Pullman—near Chicago. In 1898 the
company owned 2,428 cars, which were operated on 121,236 miles of
railway, ran 190,562,758 miles, and carried 4,852,400 passengers.
Most of the cars are in the United States, but some are in Europe and
Australia. The Wagner Palace Car Co. owns 560 sleeping cars and 143
parlor cars. In Europe most of the long distance sleeping and dining
car service is operated by the International Sleeping Car Co., which
runs cars between Paris and Constantinople (72 hours), Paris and St.
Petersburg (120 hours), Calais and Brindisi (25 hours).

Passenger cars are now usually lighted by oil, the mineral oil used in
America being superior to the vegetable oils commonly used in Europe.
Oil gas, compressed in tanks, is very extensively used, and gives an
excellent light. The system was invented by Mr. Julius Pintsch, and was
introduced in Germany in 1873, and in the United States in 1881. It is
now applied to about 85,000 cars in 22 countries; 32,000 of these cars
being in Germany, 17,000 in Great Britain, and 15,000 in the United
States. The electric light is as yet used only on a few of the finest
express trains, the current being generated either from a steam engine
and dynamo in the baggage car, or from a dynamo on each car, driven
from one of the car axles. Storage batteries maintain the light when
the cars are at rest. American cars were heated by stoves at a very
early date, and this developed into the hot water system, with a stove
and circulating pipes in each car. Steam from the locomotive, however,
is now generally employed, and its use is compulsory in some States.
In Europe the passengers have to rely largely upon their own wraps and
rugs.

[Illustration: EXTERIOR OF LATEST SLEEPING CAR.]

In American freight cars, great improvements have been introduced,
increasing the carrying capacity while reducing the weight. The
capacity has been increased from 10 tons of load in 1870, to 30, 40,
and even 50 tons in 1899 (an increase of 300 to 500 per cent). The
weight has increased only from 10 to 15 or 17 tons (or 50 to 70 per
cent). Cars are now being built entirely of steel, and while their
first cost is greater, the cost per ton and the expenses of maintenance
are less than for wooden cars of similar capacity. As sleeping, dining,
parlor, tourist, and other special cars have been introduced for
passenger traffic, so refrigerator, stock, horse, fruit, poultry, and
furniture cars have been introduced for special requirements in freight
traffic. In other countries, however, the use of such special equipment
is much more limited. The ordinary foreign freight cars are the same
as those of 30 or 40 years ago, being short four-wheel cars, weighing
5 tons, and carrying 8 to 10 tons. These are not well adapted to the
handling of bulk freight, and greatly increased economy and facility
in such traffic would result from the introduction of the American
system, as has been done in Australia. In modern American practice,
too, the cars are equipped with automatic couplers and power brakes,
thus greatly increasing the safety and facility of operating heavy fast
trains. In 1893, Congress passed a law requiring that by January 1,
1898, all freight cars should be equipped with automatic couplers and
enough cars equipped with power brakes (operated from the engine) to
put the trains entirely under the control of the enginemen. The date
was afterwards extended to January 1, 1900.

[Illustration: INTERIOR OF A PULLMAN SLEEPING CAR.]

As the speed and weight of trains increased, the dangers due to lack
of brake power soon became alarmingly apparent, and numerous forms
of continuous brakes were devised, to be applied to the wheels of
every car, under the control of the engineman. In 1889, the British
government passed the Railways Regulation Act, making compulsory the
use of the block system, the interlocking system, and continuous
brakes. In England and some other foreign countries, the vacuum brake
(introduced about 1871) is largely used, but it is slower in action
than the compressed air brake, and is therefore less efficient for
long, heavy, and fast trains.

The Westinghouse brake is one of the most important factors in the
safe and efficient handling of heavy and fast trains. Mr. George
Westinghouse patented his straight-air brake in 1869, his plain
automatic brake in 1872, and his quick-action freight train brake in
1887, while in 1892 he introduced his high-speed brake for express
trains. Up to the opening of 1899, the Westinghouse brake had been
applied to about 55,500 locomotives and 912,000 cars, of which 34,300
locomotives, 50,000 passenger cars and 750,000 freight cars were on
American railways. With this brake, a passenger train of 300 tons,
traveling at 60 miles per hour, can be stopped in about 4500 feet
and about 90 seconds, or in 1200 feet and 31 seconds in case of
emergency. A freight train of 800 tons, running at 30 miles per hour,
can be stopped in about 950 feet in 32 seconds, or in 300 feet and 11
seconds by an “emergency” application. Very few countries have applied
continuous brakes to freight cars, except the United States and Canada,
and (to some extent) Russia and New South Wales.

The improvement in train service has been even greater than that in
train equipment, and this improvement has been in speed, accommodation,
and number of trains. Among the notable runs are those across the
American and European continents. The Canadian Pacific Railway starts
a train daily from each end of the line for a through run of 2900
miles. In 1888, a through train service (with sleeping and dining
cars) was instituted between Paris and Constantinople, about 1800
miles, and through trains are run twice a week between Paris and St.
Petersburg, 1600 miles. There is also a similar service between Calais
and Brindisi, 1200 miles, in connection with the mail steamers between
England and India. In 1898, the Trans-Siberian Railway was completed to
Irkutsk, and a through train service between St. Petersburg and that
city, 3230 miles, was commenced.

Railway trains were at first intended to have speeds of about 10 to 20
miles per hour, the latter being looked upon as almost excessive, but
much higher speeds were very soon attained. There has been almost from
the earliest days a public demand for higher and higher speeds, with
consequent rivalry between the railways. The United States and Great
Britain (and France within the past few years) have the fastest trains
and by far the greater number of fast trains. The highest recorded
train speed is that of the Exposition Flyer, 270 tons total, upon the
New York Central Railway, May 10th, 1893. It ran a distance of one
mile at the rate of 112 miles per hour, and again, on the same date,
maintained a speed of 100 miles per hour, through a distance of five
miles. As a daily train between New York and Chicago, it maintained
a rate of 60 to 75 miles an hour, throughout the entire 980 miles of
distance.

[Illustration: RAILWAY SUSPENSION BRIDGE, NIAGARA FALLS.]

It will be seen that the speed of “100-miles-an-hour,” which is
popularly looked upon as a sort of ideal, has been more than once
exceeded, but it may be well to explain that such spectacular bursts
of speed are really less important and less wonderful than the trips
of 50 to 1000 miles at speeds averaging 50 to 65 miles per hour for
the entire journey. Taking into account the loss of time by stops at
stations, by changing engines, by the resistance of long grades,
etc., it will be easily understood that in order to maintain the
average speed from start to finish, the actual speeds must often
range from 60 to 75 or even 80 miles per hour. The regular daily
transcontinental train of the Canadian Pacific Railway has an average
speed of 30 miles per hour, but maintains this for the trip of 2906
miles, which occupies 94½ hours. This is a train and a record of which
railway men in general, and those of the Canadian Pacific Railway in
particular, may well be proud. There are no such through trains in the
United States, but in 1876 a special theatre train was run from New
York to San Francisco in 3 days 7⅔ hours. In 1889, the time of the
transcontinental mails was 5 days 8¼ hours, but that same year it was
reduced to 4 days 12¾ hours, which schedule continued in force until
1899. On January 1, 1899, a new mail service was inaugurated, making
the 3408 miles in 98½ hours, or at an average of 34½ miles per hour,
including all stops, and the transfer of mail bags across Chicago by
wagon from one station to another. The actual running speed is often 60
to 75 miles per hour for long stretches. Engines are changed 18 times
and postal crews 7 times.

Fast passenger trains are a popular attraction, but only railway men
can fully appreciate the advantages and economies of heavy trains for
handling freight traffic. In Europe coal trains weigh from 300 to 400
tons, but in the United States the weight of coal, ore, and freight
trains is from 800 to 2000 tons. Automatic couplers and power brakes
enable the freight trains to be run as fast as passenger trains, with
entire safety; improved cars carry greater loads, and more powerful
locomotives are continually being put in service to haul heavier
trains. The heaviest trains on record are as follows: (1) Pennsylvania
Railway, 130 cars, 5213 tons, or 5560 tons with engine and tender; (2)
New York Central Railway, 81 cars, 3478 tons, or 3595 tons with engine
and tender. Both these were run in 1898, the length of journey being
160 and 140 miles.

The mails were carried by rail between Baltimore and Washington in
1834, on recommendation of the Postmaster-General. The U. S. railway
service was instituted in August, 1864, between Chicago and Clinton,
and the following figures indicate its wonderful development:—

-------------------------------+------------+-------------
| 1880 | 1898
-------------------------------+------------+-------------
Mileage run by mail cars | 65,763,993 | 187,483,187
Number of mail cars | —— | 3,649
Number of mail clerks | 2,946 | 7,999
Miles of railway operated over | 85,320 | 174,777
Tons of mail carried | 368,000 | 1,432,050
-------------------------------+------------+-------------

The railway express business was started in 1838 by Mr. W. F. Harnden,
on a suggestion from Mr. Josiah Quincy, who had to travel weekly from
Boston to New York, and was in the habit of taking small packages for
business acquaintances. Mr. Alvin Adams became associated with Mr.
Harnden, and in 1845 formed the Adams Express Co. In Great Britain,
this business is conducted by the parcels-post and the railway
companies, but in other European countries it is mainly in the hands of
the post-office department.

A very remarkable feature of railway development is that from the
beginning there has been a tendency to increased traffic, better
service, and a steady reduction in rates. In the United States the
average rates per mile since 1867 have been as follows:—

-----+------------+----------
| Passenger, | Freight,
Year | cents | cents
-----+------------+----------
1867 | 1.994 | 1.925
1870 | 2.392 | 1.889
1875 | 2.378 | 1.421
1880 | 2.442 | 1.232
1885 | 2.216 | 1.011
1890 | 2.167 | 0.941
1895 | 2.040 | 0.839
1896 | 2.019 | 0.806
-----+------------+----------

[Illustration: HAGERMAN PASS ON COLORADO MIDLAND R. R.]

While the reduction in passenger rates has been comparatively small,
it must be remembered that the safety, speed, comfort, and service
have greatly improved. The marked reduction in freight rates has been
made possible only by a still greater and more remarkable reduction in
the cost of transportation. This has been effected by consolidation
of companies, by improvements in roadway, bridges, etc., and by the
introduction of heavier trains, with engines of greater power and cars
of greater capacity. This economy can be still further extended. The
reduction in rates has been much greater than that in the prices of
commodities. Rates for wheat and hay, for instance, have decreased 23
and 20 per cent more than the market prices, and the rate for shipping
anthracite coal to tidewater has decreased 50 per cent in the past ten
years, while the price of the coal has decreased only 10 per cent. The
average freight rate on the Pennsylvania Railway in 1898 was 0.536
cent per ton per mile, while the cost was 0.369 cent. The cheapness of
transportation in the United States is shown by the following figures
for 1898:—

Passengers carried one mile 13,000,000,000
Tons of freight carried one mile 95,000,000,000
Revenue from passenger service $26,000,000
Revenue from freight service $62,000,000
Distance railway carries 1 passenger to earn $1 profit 500 miles
Distance railway carries 1 ton to earn $1 profit 1530 miles
Average profit per passenger (including baggage) per mile 2-10 cent
Average profit per ton per mile 1-15 cent

The lowest passenger rates in the world are on the Indian railways. In
Europe the passenger rates average higher than in the United States,
though the accommodation is inferior.

Railway transportation has almost entirely superseded barge, canal,
and river transportation, except in special cases. This is due to the
greater speed, the greater efficiency of service, the greater carrying
capacity, and the extent to which spurs and branches are built to
enable cars to reach mills, factories, and other industrial plants. It
was for a long time held that the low rates of water transportation
exerted an influence in keeping railway rates down, but with the
present condition of the latter this no longer holds good as a general
proposition, especially for the limited capacity of barge canals.
The rates established for wheat and corn from Buffalo to New York by
rail in 1899 are about 0.23 and 0.18 cent per ton per mile, which is
but little above the canal rates, while rail shipments are much more
advantageous.

The railway system is a vast employer of labor, directly and
indirectly, and several million persons in the United States derive
their support from the various railway industries, without taking into
account such allied industries as rail mills, bridge works, locomotive
works, and car works, etc. The number of direct railway employees
(exclusive of the employees of terminal and sleeping-car companies,
fast freight lines, etc.) is over 820,000, or over 1.2 per cent of the
total population. A large proportion of these represent skilled labor
of a high degree of intelligence. France has about 1110 employees per
mile of railway, and 10 per cent of these are women. The figures for
the United States and Great Britain are as follows:—

-----------------------+-----------------+--------------------------
| United States | Great Britain
+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------
| 1890 | 1897 | 1857 | 1889 | 1895
-----------------------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------
Miles of railway |163,597 | 184,428| 8,942| 19,943| 21,174
Number of employees |749,301 | 823,476| 109,660| 381,626| 465,412
Number of employees per| | | | |
100 miles | 479 | 449| 1,230| 1,900| 2,197
Number of employees per| | | | |
cent of population | 1.2 | 1.2| 0.4| 1.0| 1.2
-----------------------+--------+--------+--------+--------+--------

The railway service especially demands some better and more intimate
relation between the employers and employees than that of the
mere buying and selling of labor for a price. Both humanity and
self-interest have led several railways in this country and abroad to
establish relief departments, providing temporary financial aid in case
of accident or sickness, with other forms of benefits in addition, the
object being to induce men to continue permanently in the employ of the
road. Such associations have existed in England since 1850, in Canada
since 1873, and in the United States since 1880, when one was started
by the Baltimore & Ohio Railway. In 1896 there were six of these
associations in the United States, with an aggregate of about 125,000
members. The six railway systems owned 15 per cent of all the mileage
and had 20 per cent of all the railway employees in the country.

Before closing this review of railway development, brief reference may
be made to certain special classes of railways.

[Illustration: VIEW NEAR VERRUGAS, ON LINE OF OROYA RAILWAY, PERU.]

MOUNTAIN RAILWAYS.—These include lines either isolated or forming part
of main lines, having grades so steep as to require special means of
traction. They may be operated by (A) cables, (B) grip rails, or (C)
rack rails. Cables are used for many short lines, but are now rarely
adopted for regular railway working. The grip rail system was first
used on the Mont Cenis railway in 1867, and has been used in later
years in Brazil and New Zealand. Rack rails were used in 1848 on the
incline near Madison, Indiana (U. S. A.). In 1866 they were used on the
Mount Washington railway (U. S. A.), (with the Marsh rack), this being
the first mountain-climbing railway. In 1885, the Abt rack-rail system
was introduced, and is a great improvement. It has been used both for
ordinary railway service and for special mountain lines.

RAPID TRANSIT.—Street or surface railways for city traffic date
from 1831, in New York, and were operated by horses until 1873, when
cable traction was introduced. Electric traction was introduced in
Germany in 1881 and in the United States in 1884, and the growth
of this system was such that in 1894 it was in use on 9000 miles in
this country and 195 miles in Europe. Locomotives operated by steam,
gas, compressed air, etc., have been used to a limited extent. For
high speeds it was necessary to remove the railway from the street
surface. The first elevated railway was built in New York in 1869, and
now New York, Brooklyn, and Chicago have about 100 miles, operated
by electricity and steam. The only foreign railway on this system is
at Liverpool (England), the line being 5 miles long, and operated by
electricity. The first underground railway was opened in London in
1863, and that city now has several miles of such railway, mostly
operated by steam locomotives. Two underground electric lines are in
operation and another is being built. Budapest (Hungary) and Boston
(Mass.) have also underground electric railways. New York has for
years needed and demanded a railway of this character, but political
methods and extravagant demands for franchise rights have prevented the
commencement of work upon the line.

MILITARY RAILWAYS.—Railways cannot be made available to any extent for
tactical purposes, but are of great importance as a means of supply
and communication. They were used by the Russians in the Crimean war
(1854), and were prominent features in some of the campaigns of the
American Civil War (1861–65). In the Franco-German war (1870), the
German army advancing on Paris was closely followed by a military
railway, and in the Soudan campaign of 1898–99, the British army
carried with it the head of a railway communicating with the base of
supplies on the Nile.

PORTABLE RAILWAYS.—These are narrow-gauge lines of light construction,
for use on plantations, in lumbering operations, on engineering
construction works, and for pioneer railways. The rails are riveted to
steel ties, forming complete sections of track, straight or curved,
which can be laid down, taken up, or shifted, as required. Such a line,
of 24 inches gauge, was used to carry passengers around the grounds of
the Paris Exhibition of 1889.

SHIP RAILWAYS.—These are projected as substitutes for ship canals, but
none have been built in modern times, if we except a few small ones
for canal boats, including one at the Columbia River rapids, in Oregon
(U. S. A.). One was proposed for the Isthmus of Suez in 1860, and in
1879 Captain Eads strongly advocated one across Tehuantepec (Mexico),
to connect the Atlantic and Pacific oceans. This line would be about
150 miles in length, and the cost is estimated at $50,000,000. In 1888
work was commenced on the Chignecto ship railway (Canada), at the head
of the Bay of Fundy, but it has never been completed. The general
principle of the system is to float the ship into a dock and deposit it
upon a wheeled cradle of suitable form. This would then be raised by
machinery and hauled along the railway by a number of locomotives.

ADVANCE IN LAW AND JUSTICE

BY LUTHER E. HEWITT, L.B.,

_Librarian of Philadelphia Law Association_.

I. INTERNATIONAL LAW.—Exclusive rights asserted in past centuries have
been succeeded by freedom of the seas and privileges on the rivers.
The principle back of the American guns off the Barbary coasts has
prevailed. Crimes of one country against another are punishable in
either. Extradition for nonpolitical crimes is general. Expatriation
has been won for those who would change their country. Internal
affairs of countries are free from interference; but a rule may be
so revolting, or so hurtful to foreign interests, as to justify
intervention. The Monroe doctrine was intimated in the Declaration of
Independence, and has developed with our country. Regard for other
nations has increased. Protectorates and spheres of influence are
respected, while recognition of insurgent States will not be hurried.
Devastation and weapons causing needless pain are condemned, while
guerillas are regulated by requirement of a responsible head, a badge
recognizable at a distance, and subjection to rules of war. The sick
and wounded, attendants, and appliances are protected from intentional
attack.

Open, unfortified places are in practice spared, and ransoms no
longer extorted. Twenty-four hours are allowed for withdrawal of
noncombatants from places to be attacked. Military occupation no longer
confers sovereign power; and compensation on the closing of war has
been recommended for private property of an enemy used in military
operations.

Impartial neutrality is demanded. Nations once bound themselves for
troops in case others went to war. This has ceased. Passage of troops
through neutral territory is not allowed. Even sick and wounded will
be denied if their passage would relieve a combatant’s own lines; but
neutrals have interned such refugees. The neutral cannot allow fitting
out of armed expeditions or enlistment of troops. Jefferson advanced
international law by demanding Genet’s recall for such offenses.
Carriage of signals, dispatches, or persons in military operations is
unneutral, and the United States insisted that this ruled the Trent
affair. A belligerent’s ship of war can remain in port but twenty-four
hours, unless in an emergency, like need of repairs. Coal will be
afforded only to the nearest port, nor will a new supply be furnished
within three months. Statutes enforce some of these rules. Neutral
trade is not lost except on blockade, although goods which may be put
to military uses are liable to seizure as contraband. “Free ships,
free goods,” was long contended for; and at last the Declaration of
Paris, in 1856, provided even further, as follows: (1) Privateering
is and remains abolished. (2) The neutral flag covers enemy’s goods,
with the exception of contraband of war. (3) Neutral goods, with the
exception of contraband of war, are not liable to capture under an
enemy’s flag. (4) Blockades, in order to be binding, must be effectual.
Spain, Mexico, Venezuela, and the United States declined to adhere to
the Declaration. The United States adopted 2, 3, and 4, and offered
to agree to the abolition of privateering if noncontraband property of
the enemy were exempted under its own flag. The United States and Spain
refrained from privateering in the recent war. Private property of the
enemy on land has long been exempt from capture.

[Illustration: INDEPENDENCE HALL AND SQUARE. WINTER SCENE.]

II. LAW-MAKING BODIES.—State legislators were originally chosen from
landed proprietors, except, perhaps, in Pennsylvania. Legislatures
frequently had the selection of governors, judges, and other high
officials, but the Ohio constitution in 1802 foreshadowed the coming
democracy. Distrust has followed reliance on legislatures. Their
sessions have been limited in about half the States to an average
of less than ninety days, and almost everywhere made biennial.
Increase of the members’ own compensation is forbidden. Their duties
are carefully prescribed. Common requirements are, reading of
bills on three days; one subject for a bill, and that expressed in
title; recital of old law, upon revision; prohibition of riders on
appropriations. Nearly half the States require a majority in each
house of all members elected thereto. Constitutional restrictions
on state and municipal indebtedness and loan followed the burdens
assumed in the first exultation over inventions in transportation. The
Pennsylvania constitution, for instance, prohibits “local or special
laws” in about thirty cases, such as in municipal affairs, descent of
property, judicial proceedings, remitting penalties, exemption from
taxation, regulating labor, chartering corporations. Boundaries between
legislative and judicial proceedings have been simplified; special
legislation in marriage and divorce has been forbidden; appellate
jurisdiction has been taken from Senates once possessing it. The
British House of Lords retains such jurisdiction, but within it sit the
great judges, and the lay lords almost never vote on appeals.

Payment of expenses of members was derived from England, and although
abandoned there has continued here. Members of Congress give
attendance remote from home, so that they receive salaries rather than
compensation. Sums for expenses are allowed in the other American
republics, in France, Australia, Sweden, Switzerland, chiefly in the
lower houses. Some are paid by the local constituency, but this tends
to create classes. Representatives to Congress were generally elected
at first on the State ticket, and in some States this continued until
the Congress in 1872 required district election. The Revised Statutes
appoint the day of their election, and require a printed or written
ballot.

III. THE COURTS.—A feature of American jurisprudence which excites the
wonder of foreigners is the power in the courts to declare legislative
or executive acts void because unconstitutional. Before the Revolution
the Rhode Island court struck down a statute contrary to the provincial
charter; and a recent instance is the decision of the U. S. Supreme
Court on the income tax. The power is exercised on individuals,
without direct conflict between the great departments of government.
The judicial power has otherwise widened. Civil trials without jury
are frequent. In the counties judges exercise much administrative
power. Road and bridge cases, grants of liquor licenses, appointments
to educational and other offices, are illustrations. In what has been
termed “government by injunction,” functions both of the executive and
of the jury have been assumed. Perhaps this justifies the demand that
all judges shall be elected by the people. Frequently the choice of
judges was originally by the legislature, or by the governor, alone
or with the approval of the senate. The judicial tenure of office
has generally been lengthened to a term insuring a long service. In
Pennsylvania, a supreme court judge holds office twenty-one years,
a county judge ten years. Age limit prevails in some States. In a
democracy, it is not surprising to find the doctrine sometimes asserted
that juries in criminal cases are judges both of law and fact. In
certain civil cases, the jury is a crude but powerful engine for
holding corporations to strict responsibility for the citizens’ safety,
although excessive or unfounded verdicts are to be deplored. Much of
the old law of deodands has force to-day in subtler form. A feature to
note in passing is the duty imposed on the judge to answer before the
jury points of instruction framed by counsel.

IV. CIVIL PROCEDURE.—Twenty-nine States and Territories rejoice
in escape from puzzling classifications by substitution of simple
statements. Extreme separation of law and equity had made the old
condition worse. Equity might often soften legal principles, or
law lend vigor to equity. Much of this has now been done; had been
done, in fact, in Pennsylvania, from early days. Its enforcement of
equitable rights through remedies at law was largely followed in the
English Judicature Act of 1873 abolishing forms of actions at law and
interblending law and equity. This statute has been copied largely in
British colonies. England abolished the cumbrous system of real actions
in 1834, and substituted simpler remedies for assertion of title.

The simplicity of present procedure is accompanied by ability to reach
decision more promptly, and an old reproach has been greatly lessened.

V. CODIFICATION.—The New York Revised Statutes of 1828 embraced
nearly the entire civil procedure, and in 1848 a “Code of Procedure”
was adopted, although the original draftsman, David Dudley Field,
complained bitterly of changes. Forty-two States now have more or less
complete codes of practice; and criminal codes likewise are numerous.
Codification of the branches of substantive law may be anticipated.
Something of this is going on in England. The Bill of Sales Act, the
Employers’ Liability Act, the Bills of Exchange Act, the Public Health
(Scotland) Act of 1897, the Land Transfer Act of the same year, are
instances. In Pennsylvania, there are codelets like the Evidence Act
of 1887, or the Building Law for Philadelphia of 1893. Instances
could be multiplied. A code intended for all the States on Negotiable
Instruments has been prepared by commissioners, and has been adopted in
New York, Connecticut, Colorado, and Florida. In Great Britain there
has not been general codification, whereas the continental systems run
largely that way, even in substantive law, being based on the Roman law.

VI. CRIMINAL JURISPRUDENCE.—The grand jury is no longer grand in
many States; indeed, less than twelve members suffice in some;
and their service may even be dispensed with under some Western
constitutions. Individual malice has been avoided by the creation of
public prosecuting attorneys. “Standing aside jurors” resulted from
33 Edward I., denying government challenge except for cause. It has
been generally abolished, and the prosecution equalized by a number
of peremptory challenges. Pennsylvania retains the old practice.
Prisoners may now testify, but refusal is not to weigh against them.
The statute 7 William III. allowed counsel in treason cases, but
England did not extend the privilege to trials for other felonies until
1836. The courts in mitigation permitted counsel to prompt prisoners
with questions. Penn’s charter gave prisoners privileges of witnesses
and counsel, and this is now universal in American constitutions.
Many States provide counsel for prisoners without means, some with
compensation. “Standing mute” has become equivalent to a plea of not
guilty. Unanimity in a verdict is essential to conviction of crime
above misdemeanor, except in Utah, and there it is limited to capital
cases. In civil and in minor criminal cases about a dozen constitutions
in the far West or Southwest either recognize verdict by proportion
of jury or else empower the legislature so to do. England refuses
criminal appeals, but in this country they are allowed. The courts of
this country have never been subservient to military passion, and all
friends of the great French Republic must rejoice at the courage of
the Court of Cassation in the Dreyfus case. The English law inflicted
death for 160 crimes, some great and many otherwise, about the period
of our Revolution, and in 1819 this number had become 200. American
jurisprudence never had such stain of blood, yet 10 crimes were
punishable with death in Massachusetts, and 20 in Delaware, at the time
of the Revolution, and the pillory, stocks, shears, branding-irons, and
lash were busy. Horrible prisons existed, filled with every foulness
and immorality. The older penitentiary system has been modified in 20
States by the parole system under police supervision, and in 4 the
policy of indeterminate sentences within fixed limits and ages has been
adopted. Bertillon and other methods of identification have greatly
lessened crime in England. The law of deodand, whereby the value of
an object causing accidental death was forfeited for charities, was
abolished in England in 1846. Societies to prevent cruelty to children,
or to animals, attest the advance of refinement and humanity.

[Illustration: HON. MELVILLE W. FULLER.

(Chief Justice U. S. Supreme Court.)]

VII. CAPITAL PUNISHMENT.—In England, treason and felony, except petty
larceny and mayhem, were punishable with death. The fiction by which
males who could read were supposed to be of the clergy saved first
offenders, who escaped with branding. In the eighteenth century, the
fiction was forbidden, and death imposed on additional offenses, so
that 160 crimes were so punishable. In 1826, the efforts of Sir Samuel
Romilly and Sir James Mackintosh, and later of Sir John Russell,
resulted in a more merciful spirit, and since 1861 murder, treason, and
firing of the great dock yards, have been the only capital offenses.
The American colonies were more humane, yet Massachusetts punished 10
and Delaware 20 crimes with death. Since the Revolution imprisonment
has been the general penalty. In Maine, Wisconsin, and Colorado
capital punishment has been abolished altogether; in Rhode Island,
except where murder is committed by a life prisoner; in Michigan,
except for treason. In some States, as in Ohio, the jury may avert the
death penalty. New York and Iowa, after experiments, restored capital
punishment. The federal law imposes death for murder, piracy, robbery
on the high seas, rape, treason. The introduction of degrees of murder
has reduced the number of executions. In New York, electrocution has
been substituted for hanging. Capital punishment has been abolished
or qualified in the Argentine Republic, Belgium, Brazil, Chile, Costa
Rica, Guatemala, Holland, Italy, Norway, Portugal, Russia, Switzerland
(in eight cantons), and in Venezuela.

VIII. POLICE POWER.—The citizen of the present day is protected by the
police power to a degree which, perhaps, would have seemed marvelous a
century ago. The sale of food is governed both in quality and quantity;
building laws prescribe yards for light and air, height and thickness
of walls, and forbid wooden buildings in many populous centres.
Explosives are placed under strict regulations. Health laws protect
from impurity of food and from pestilence, establish quarantines,
deny the importation of rags, cattle, etc., likely to breed disease;
medicine, pharmacy, dentistry, and nursing are protected from
ignorance; immigration laws exclude persons or races deemed uncongenial
or objectionable; railroads are subjected to provisions promoting
safety, comfort, and impartiality of service; lotteries, gambling,
threatening letters are forbidden; game laws preserve the various
species from extinction; women and children are guarded by special
laws. Almost the entire body of this division of law is new to this
century, and much of it is recent.

IX. MARRIED WOMEN.—In 1800, a husband could appropriate his wife’s
personal property not held in trust, and use her realty while he
lived. Except for necessaries or for her separate estate, she could
not contract. Her emancipation began in 1839, in Mississippi, and now
her property, under the statutory interests secured to her by laws
generally prevailing, is hers free from control or interference. This
statutory estate includes property inherited, or derived by purchase
or gift, or in some States by labor. The wife’s power to contract has
been extended, and in some States has little restriction beyond perhaps
inability to become surety. Before this era, some States, acting on
a London custom, had allowed feme sole traders in cases of mariners’
wives, or of desertion or neglect.

X. CHILDREN.—Regulation of the labor of children in hours and
employments is usual, debarring them from workshops and factories at
certain ages and from occupations dangerous to their morals, as in
theatricals, circuses, rag picking, mendicancy, street music. Laws
prohibit their entrance into gambling, or worse, houses, into pool
rooms, or unaccompanied into dance or concert halls, roller rinks,
vaudeville theatres. Minnesota excludes them from criminal trials. Sale
of liquor to minors is prohibited. Numerous recent statutes prohibit
sales of cigarettes, cigars, or tobacco, and Utah and West Virginia
forbid sales of opium. Oregon and Rhode Island prohibit their public
use of tobacco. New Hampshire, Indiana, and Connecticut forbid children
over three in almshouses. North Carolina makes it a misdemeanor to
leave a child under seven, and unattended, exposed to fire. Prohibiting
employment inconsistent with school attendance is usual. Compulsory
education exists in twenty-nine States and two Territories, and largely
throughout Europe and the colonies. Fourteen is the more frequent limit
of age. Children’s welfare now determines their custody, rather than
the rights of either parent. Laws in some States protect children more
or less from wills made before their birth by parents. Many States
provide that bastards may inherit from their mother or from each other,
and she from them, and that their parents’ marriage legitimates them.

XI. REAL ESTATE.—Ownership of land is no longer embarrassed by
joint tenancies, nor need conveyancing resort to cumbrous fine and
recovery; while transfer has been further lightened by title companies
pending the adoption, likely, of the Torrens system of registration
and certificate. Democracy has rejected distinctions of sex or age in
inheritance, and the half-blood may share in many States after certain
degrees. Disability of aliens to hold lands has been removed in some
States, in others there are limitations in acres, value, or time, while
in some disability ceases on declaration of intention to become a
citizen. The English doctrine of tacking, whereby ownership of earlier
and later incumbrances cut out intermediate titles, mortgages, etc., is
inconsistent with the American recording acts.

XII. COPYRIGHT.—After printing became general, the author received
some, if inadequate, protection, in England through the Stationers’
Company, or sometimes through particular privilege; in continental
countries, through such privilege. The statute of Anne confined him to
such years, etc., as it specified, and the courts have decided with
hesitation that there was no copyright at common law. The statutory
rights have varied. Since 1831 the copyright period in this country
is 28 years, with 14 more if author, widow, or children are living at
expiration of first term; and in England since 1842 it is 28 years or
author’s life, whichever is longer.

The first known copyright directed to an author was granted by Venice
in 1491. In 1791 France allowed copyright to all dramatists, extending
it in 1793 to authors in general. Countries in sympathy with France
adopted the policy. Prussia in 1794 extended copyright to authors
represented by publishers at the Frankfort and Leipzig book fairs.
General protection has now come about, aided by consolidation of
European states into great nations. International copyright began with
separate treaties; and the movement culminated in the Berne Convention
of 1887, participated in by Germany, Belgium, Spain, France, Hayti,
Italy, Switzerland, Tunis, Great Britain, Liberia. Authors resident
in any country which was a party to the Convention may have copyright
in the other countries. The United States did not join, although it
had and since has had treaties with a few nations exchanging such
protection. The International Copyright Law of 1891, however, protects
foreign authors but not foreign publishers, it being required that the
printing shall be done in this country.

XIII. ADMIRALTY.—The difference between the majestic rivers of
America and English streams was recognized in the case of “The Genesee
Chief,” wherein the Supreme Court rejected the English doctrine that
admiralty has no jurisdiction except on the seas or where the tides
ebb and flow. This has insured uniformity in the regulations of travel
and commerce, and has protected such waters from local interference.
International rules to prevent collisions at sea have been joined in
by the United States. By acts of 1851 and 1884, Congress relieved
innocent shipowners of liability for merchandise destroyed by fire, and
provided that liability in case of collision, embezzlement by crew,
etc., shall not exceed the owner’s interest. The Harter Act of 1893
provides that on due diligence neither owners nor charterers shall be
liable for faults in navigation or in management, nor for perils of the
sea, defects in goods, etc., but prohibits agreements relieving from
liability for injuries caused by neglect in fitting out, provisioning
and manning the vessel, stowing the cargo, or in caring for or delivery
of the same. Parliament, in 1890, protected seamen from commercial
greed by requiring load lines to be marked on vessels at a height fixed
by the Board of Trade.

XIV. CORPORATIONS.—The source of corporate life was formerly the king;
to-day, the charters are virtually the general corporation law, and
special incorporation is forbidden. For a season, minor amendments for
particular companies were tolerated, but constitutions are forbidding
even these. Applications for charters must state such particulars
as name, nature, and place of business, amount of stock, limit of
indebtedness, number and names of directors. Annual reports must be
lodged with the tax authorities.

Doctrines respecting corporations have wonderfully changed. The
Dartmouth College case held that charters were contracts and could
not be impaired; and thereafter, by constitution or otherwise, the
States provided that all new charters should be subject to alteration
or repeal, although even this does not authorize radical change
of corporate character. American law has recognized advantage of
freedom in execution of corporate affairs. It has dispensed with the
burdensome requirement of seal to contracts, and even in England the
corporate seal is unnecessary, unless in unusual transactions. The
American courts uphold negotiable notes and bonds given in authorized
business. The company is confined to the business for which it was
created, although a cautious tolerance exists in respect to related
enterprises; and mortgages may be acquired if for debts contracted
previously and not as a device. The old theory was that a company
could not be held for misfeasance, since it could not authorize its
agents to commit wrong; but corporations are now held for many torts
sanctioned by them, such as trespass, assault and battery, infringement
of patents, negligence, and even fraud and libel. Exemplary damages may
be awarded against them. One or another kind has even been subjected to
indictment, in cases of nuisance, violation of Sunday law, maintenance
of disorderly house, habitual omission of lights or signals, etc.
They may be guilty of contempt. They may be punished by penalties and
forfeitures.

A corporation outside its own State cannot exceed either its own
charter or the power granted like companies of the other State.
Connecting railways are sometimes adopted in each of several States,
but the parts remain foreign to each other as respects jurisdiction
in the federal courts. Foreign corporations are subject to the police
power, but not to interference by the State in their interstate
commerce, except Congress so authorizes. Companies not engaged in
interstate commerce nor in governmental service may have conditions
placed upon their entry into a State, and may be practically excluded
by taxation. Property within the foreign State is alone taxable there,
but the value of the franchise may be considered. Usually, statements
are required showing location of agent, names of officers, etc.
Contracts made before compliance are differently regarded, being void
in some States, and only until compliance in some others, and in some
not void at all where penalty is imposed. Some States seek revenue by
lax laws inviting outside companies. Thus, by Delaware law of 1899,
companies need not oblige themselves to keep their original books nor
hold their meetings there, assessment beyond subscription is forbidden,
and taxation is light.

[Illustration: STATE, WAR AND NAVY BUILDING, WASHINGTON, D. C.]

In 1825 and 1827 the free organization of trades-unions and banking
associations was authorized, and thus was introduced into English
jurisprudence the principle of free association familiar to the Roman
Republic. In 1838, but more especially in 1844, limited partnerships
with transferable shares were authorized by general law; and in 1862
freedom from liability beyond subscription was somewhat recognized.
A form of partnership, _société anonyme_, has been known in France
for six hundred years, and by law of 1867 may be organized without
special leave. The managers alone assume full responsibility, and the
association bears now a company name. Germany adopted the principle of
general incorporation in 1870, as have the greater nations, excepting
Russia and Austria.

So early as 1784 New York enacted a general incorporation law for
churches, and for libraries in 1796. In 1811, woolen, glass, and some
other manufactures were thus favored. The principle widened out, was
adopted elsewhere, and became quite general by 1850. Pennsylvania
adopted the policy in 1874, although its religious, library and
charitable organizations had enjoyed such law since 1791.

XV. RELIGION.—Scorned, lashed, thrown into prison, his tongue cut out,
banished to savage woods, such was the fate of the Massachusetts Quaker
among the first settlers, and Roger Williams shared little better. A
long stride had been taken when, in 1691, the Massachusetts charter
proclaimed liberty of conscience for all “except papists.” Then was
the brave and gentle Penn securing religious liberty to all confessing
one God. Yet much further progress was essential. Roman Catholics were
excluded from office except in New York and Maryland; while even in
Pennsylvania no Jew could sit in the legislature. Most of the States
required some religious test for higher offices; Massachusetts allowed
no voters or officials outside of the Congregational church; and church
membership was essential in Connecticut and New Hampshire. In 1776
Pennsylvania admitted to the legislature any who believed in God and
in a future state of rewards and punishments. Massachusetts threw down
the barriers to office in 1780, except that until 1821 the governor
should be of the Christian faith; but office-holding was limited to
Protestants in North Carolina until 1835, and in New Hampshire until
1877. Jews received the same rights as other sects in Connecticut in
1843, in Maryland in 1825. The Virginia Bill of Rights declared that
all are entitled to the free exercise of religion, and a few years
afterwards, in 1786, proclaimed further in words written by Jefferson
that religious opinions shall never affect civil capacities, and that
no man can be compelled to support religious worship. The Lake region
was secured from molestation for religious sentiments by the Northwest
Ordinance of 1787, and the Constitution not only secures all from such
interference by Congress, but prohibits religious test for federal
offices or establishment of religion by Congress. South Carolina made
the Episcopal the State church in 1776, but dropped establishment
in 1790. Support of religion was likewise abolished in Maryland in
1810, but continued in Massachusetts until 1833; and New Hampshire
authorizes public Protestant teachers of religion. Maryland, Kentucky,
and Tennessee exclude clergymen from office. Political hierarchies
and polygamy are not within constitutional protections. Courts have
declared Christianity part of the common law; but in present law its
force is in its principles. Christian institutions, in common with
other religious or charitable agencies, are favored in policies and
exemptions; and blasphemies, like railings in general, are forbidden.
Bible reading in public schools is generally discretionary with the
school board, although held illegal in Wisconsin; but religious garbs
may not be worn in such schools by teachers. A public hospital may not
be erected on sectarian ground.

The English corporation and test acts excluded from office all without
the established church, until 9 George IV.

XVI. SUMMARY OF ADVANCE.—Increased respect for the rights of others,
both individually and as nations, characterizes the law of this
century, and may be perceived in every direction. It has created a
new international law, developed democratic institutions at home and
abroad, almost revolutionized criminal jurisprudence, extended the
police power in every direction, and secured freedom of conscience
and separation of church and state. It has emancipated woman, thrown
a protecting care over children, and favored charities, asylums,
houses of refuge. Imprisonment for honest debts has been abolished,
and the wretched sight of debtors imprisoned for paltry sums no
longer reproaches society. Homestead and exemption laws preserve the
family. Honest bankrupts are again lifted up in hope. The legal means
of settlement and recovery of rights has been greatly expedited.
England has followed America in making lands assets for payment of
debts; and claims against the State have received recognition in some
of the States and under act of Congress, and likewise in England.
Barriers excluding persons as witnesses have been broken down, first
in Connecticut in 1848, next in England in 1851, and now there is
little exclusion unless the adversary has died. Something had been
done before in compelling answers to written interrogatories, but with
a weakness and lack of logic that should have ridiculed the whole
exclusion. Promotion of uniformity of laws has engaged the attention
of State commissioners, who have drafted a code concerning negotiable
instruments which has been adopted in four States. Constitutional
amendment has afforded an entire race opportunity to develop from
the low estate of slavery into such condition as the future shall
manifest. Questions of civil rights, due process of law, and of equal
protection and privilege, are constantly bringing State laws before the
federal courts, as do questions of interstate commerce. Anti-pool and
anti-trust enactments mark both federal and State law, and lately have
broken up the alliance of the trans-Missouri transportation companies.
Inheritance and succession taxes were imposed in Pennsylvania in 1826,
and now are found in some dozen States. The progressive feature, or
increase of rate with increase of estate, has been sustained by high
authority. Congress has imposed such taxes, but its power to do so is
in dispute before the United States Supreme Court.

[Illustration: PORTIA AND BASSANIO.

(Trial Scene from “Merchant of Venice.”)]

In the early days of the republic property requirements existed both
for office and for voting. New States came in with manhood suffrage
established either by law or custom. Original States threw open the
polls,—Maryland in 1810, Connecticut in 1818, New York in 1821,
Massachusetts in 1822. The white labor of Virginia was denied the
suffrage in 1830, but gained it in 1850. Similar movement in England
is marked by the Reform Bill of 1832; and now manhood suffrage is
universal in Germany, France, and Greece, and wellnigh so in England.

EVOLUTION OF BUILDING AND LOAN ASSOCIATIONS

BY MICHAEL J. BROWN,

_Secretary of Building Association League of Penna._

I. GENERAL PRINCIPLES.

“Do not forget to pay your dues to-night,” is an expression familiar
to the occupants of fifty thousand Philadelphia homes, one hundred and
fifty thousand Pennsylvania homes, and six hundred and fifty thousand
households in the United States. This means that nearly seven hundred
thousand families are contributing towards gaining homes of their own
through Building and Loan Associations. The entire membership is nearly
seventeen hundred thousand, of whom fully four hundred thousand are
women and children.

The picture “Paying their Dues” is a representative one, and in
Philadelphia there are four hundred and seventy-five such gatherings
every year. The Philadelphia associations generally meet once every
month, but in some parts of the State, and in other States, many
societies meet weekly, so there are fully ten thousand such gatherings
every twelve months in the United States.

The women have shares in their own right, and the children are either
paying dues for their parents or for themselves, the father or mother
acting as trustee. The boys and girls know exactly what nights the
associations meet, and are generally on hand with their money long
before the officers are ready to receive the funds and give receipts in
the pass books.

What is the meaning of these gatherings? To enable every member to
become his own landlord—to purchase homes for themselves, by paying
their money into a joint concern for a few years until each one has
saved enough, with gains added, to buy a home, and in the meantime the
entire receipts being loaned to the members to gain homes in advance of
the final reckoning or maturity of the shares.

The members have well learned the principle that money makes money if
well used, that if many pay rent for the benefit of the few, through
the building association the many may combine together so as to put the
rents into their own pockets.

II. THE SYSTEM.

For convenience, “a share” is the payment of $1.00 a month, five shares
$5.00, and so on. The final value of a share is arbitrarily fixed at
$200. The money received is promptly loaned to the members, on which
the borrowers pay $1.00 per month interest on every $200 borrowed,
until the final value of $200 is reached, which occurs in twelve years
or less.

Payments $144.00
Gains 56.00
-------
Final value $200.00

A member may have borrowed $2000 from the association on ten shares
of stock ($200 being the limit loaned on each share), and the shares
having matured, or become worth $2000, his loan of $2000 is canceled
and his home is free. The member who has not borrowed receives $200 in
cash for every share he holds.

The building association in its simplest form, and as it existed in
Philadelphia for many years, took all its members in at one time, and
the members paid from $2 to $20 each every month until the shares
matured. At maturity all the borrowers received canceled mortgages, and
the non-borrowers cash for their shares, and the society then closed
its affairs. Hundreds of such associations have wound up their affairs
successfully.

Very many associations are now working on the permanent plan; that is,
they admit new members every six months or every year, the first set
being the first to mature, and so on, one set going out every year and
a new batch coming in.

Each series is a separate association so far as the dues are concerned,
but the total gains are divided so as to give each dues dollar invested
a like rate per cent per annum for the time of investment. There is
really no positive or final division of profits. The gains are kept
in a lump sum, and the division is on paper only for the purpose of
showing the progress made towards maturity. When a set of shares
matures, its portion of the gain is taken from the accumulated profits
and divided to the stock that has reached its final value.

Some associations count all the loans as assets and all the dues and
gains as liabilities. In such societies the borrower pays interest on
his full loan until the end, and gets credit for profit on his dues
until one account cancels the other.

Other associations, at the end of each year, deduct the dues paid in
from the loans and charge interest on the net amount only of the loan.
By the latter system the borrowers’ payments decrease every year, but
it requires a longer time to finally cancel the loan than by the former
system.

When there is a demand for money, and more than one member is anxious
to secure it, the funds are offered at auction, and the member who bids
the highest premium secures the prize.

The bidding is generally done by offering so many cents per share per
month above the required interest. If a member secures $2000 at 10
cents per share premium on ten shares, his monthly payments are:—

Dues per month $10.00
Interest per month 10.00
Premium per month 1.00
------
Total $21.00

These payments continue until the shares mature. The dues are the
contributed capital, and the interest and premiums are the gains.

III. THEIR EARLY HISTORY.

Their early history in England seems to date back as far as 1781. In
Mr. Langford’s “Century of Birmingham Life” mention is made of certain
proposals for establishing a society for building on lands belonging to
William Jennings, Esq. The society was organized by rules or articles,
similar in some respects to those employed by the building societies of
to-day.

[Illustration: PAYING THEIR DUES.]

Dr. John Henry Gray, in his “History of the Laws, Manners, and Customs
of the People of China,” describes some money-lending societies
which seem to partake in some measure of the character of building
associations, at least in their coöperative and equitable features.
He tells us that these societies are called “Lee Woee,” and were
instituted by a person named Pong Koong, an official of great wealth,
who flourished 200 B.C. during the Han dynasty. The money was loaned to
members and returned in monthly installments with interest. Each member
was compelled to contribute to the fund a sum equal to that which he
contributed at the first meeting. One of the rules was, “Each member
shall deposit in a lottery box, placed on a table, a tender or bid for
the money, setting forth the rate of interest which he is disposed to
pay on the amount in question; that the tenders shall be taken out of
the box by the president, and the highest bidder takes the loan.” When
two bids were alike the first bidder took the loan. A fine was charged
for non-payment of dues.

IV. AMERICAN ASSOCIATIONS.

There is no evidence other than that Frankford, now a part of
Philadelphia proper, saw the first building society that was organized
in the United States. It was called the “Oxford Provident Building
Association,” and was started in 1831, sixty-eight years ago. It
closed its affairs in June, 1841. The second Frankford society, of the
same name, was organized in February of 1841, and ran out in August,
1852. Isaac Whitelock was president, Samuel Pilling treasurer, and
Isaac Shallcross secretary, of the first association; and Henry Taylor
president, Isaac Shallcross secretary, and William Overton treasurer,
of the second association.

The Holmesburg Building Association was organized in January, 1842,
and closed its business satisfactorily to the members, June 25,
1853. John B. Duff, a lumber counter by trade, was instrumental in
organizing the first building society within the compactly built up
city of Philadelphia, in the year 1847. The name of the society was
the “Kensington Building Association.” The society issued five hundred
shares of stock in one series, and wound up its affairs in ten years
and two months after it was organized. The first advertisement of any
building and loan association, so far as can be ascertained, appeared
in the Philadelphia “Public Ledger,” February 5, 1847, and called for
a meeting of the “Kensington.” Mr. Duff died in 1883, and a few months
before that event he presented to the writer a document now known as
“The Old Yellow Poster.” It is the call for the first building society
in Old Philadelphia, a copy of which is herewith presented.

Mr. Duff seldom, if ever, held forth in public, but his efficient work
was done by taking individual cases and converting them to the benefits
of obtaining homes for themselves. Frequently he has been seen on a
pile of lumber with chalk in hand, demonstrating a problem in building
society arithmetic to converts to this system of saving.

[Illustration:

MEETING!

KENSINGTON
BUILDING ASSOCIATION

The Subscribers being desirous of forming an Association for the
purpose of assisting the members thereof in the erection of Dwelling
Houses, or such other Real Estate as they shall deem most advantageous,
have concluded to hold a Meeting for that purpose

ON FRIDAY EVENING, 22D JAN’Y, 1847,
AT 7 O’CLOCK,
_At the Kensington Engine Hall_,
On Queen Street, above Marlborough St.

Where the objects of the Association will be laid before the Meeting.
Citizens generally, are invited to attend.

Ralph Pilling,
Joseph Smith,
John Bierly,
John B. Duff,
Henry Shermer,
John Verdear,
Samuel Wensell,
Samuel T. Hay,
Henry Lane,
Howard Bowman,
Andrew Himes,
Rich’d. Fordham,
David Guyant,
Geo. Fordham,
Henry Kriener,
Abr. P. Eyre,
Ed. W. Gorgas,
Alfred Fitler,
Alb’t T. Eggleton,
Albert Engle,
And. Flanders,
Thomas Bennett,
J. R. Fullerton,
Charles Tryon,
Samuel Parcels,
Edward Owens,
Jacob Jones,
John Nevling,
Henry Mosser,
Geo. Kennerd,
Henry Mercer,
George Mattis,
Michael Collar,
Edward Wester,
Henry Miller,
William Ellis,
John Hearney,
Jos. B. Matlack,
Saml. Biedaman,
J. Shilingburg,
James Hill,
George Cramp,
George Coleman,
John Fordham.

January 21, 1847.

Printed at Boyle’s cheap Printing Establishment, corner of Second and
Brown streets.

CALL FOR FIRST BUILDING ASSOCIATION IN PHILADELPHIA.]

There has been scarcely a great mind in the country that has not moved
the lips to say some good word for the building society cause. Henry
Ward Beecher in a sermon said,—

“I think that a young man who places before himself not a speculation,
not a fortune, but some object that he means to achieve, who selects
a particular piece of property that he would like to own, and aims
steadily at acquiring it and works diligently for it, and saves for
it, will be almost sure to succeed. I will say that every young man in
a city, either through the instrumentality of a building association
when there is one, or independently, when such an association does not
exist, and when at last, having toiled and waited patiently, the debt
is paid and the piece of property is earned, is a great deal richer
than the assessor knows him to be. The assessor goes around and puts
a valuation upon his property for the purpose of taxing it. But, ah,
those habits of industry and self-control; those wise measurings,
which we call economy,—all these the man has gained over and above
the property. He has saved himself from a thousand temptations. He has
protected himself against remorseless vices, which would have gnawed
out his marrow. And though you call it merely amassing property, it may
be amassing manhood. It is one step on the upward way.”

State officials who closely examine the workings of these societies
never seem to tire in their praise. Superintendent Kilburn, of New
York, in his last annual report, refers to the conservative and
honestly managed building association as follows:—

“During the past year associations of this class alone have returned to
withdrawing members dues and profits amounting to $8,014,039. During
the same period no less than fifty-seven associations were engaged
in the payment of matured shares, and $829,752 were paid to members
who had faithfully continued payments through a series of years, and
at last saw their confidence justified. But these sums are of small
consequence when we consider the comfortable homes that have been
erected, and the families that have been permanently and comfortably
housed through the facilities for frugality and thrift, for self-denial
and saving afforded by them. My attention was recently called to a
village of the State in which it was said that nearly one-third of the
houses had been erected through the agency of a small local association.

“Nor is this an exceptional case, unless the element of proportion be
taken into consideration. In nearly all the cities of the State, and in
many of the large villages, there are associations that are models of
their kind, and are worthy of the admiration and support of every good
citizen.

“Their educational influence, too, can hardly be over estimated.
The workingman who joins such an association takes part in the
administration of its affairs and learns his first lesson in finance
from those of larger experience, and, who perhaps, touches elbow with
the lawyer, the merchant, and the minister as they discuss the safety
of an investment, or proper amendment to the articles of association,
and will not lend a ready ear to teachers of socialism, of class
hatred, or of financial heresies.”

As shown elsewhere, the members of the New York societies have over
$37,000,000 invested. The Building Association League of Pennsylvania,
an organization of twenty-six years’ standing, composed of the
most active associations in the State, some years ago proclaimed a
“Declaration of Principles,” from which we quote:—

“The local building societies of the State of Pennsylvania are
true coöperative organizations, transacting no business with the
public, and not amenable to laws affecting financial institutions
that have dealings with the public. They encourage thrift among the
wage-workers, help to create taxable property in its best form—real
estate, educate their members in business methods and teach them both
how to save and how to invest money.

“By this service they have created a state police of tens of thousands
of home owners, more efficient for the protection of life and property
than a standing army.

“They have lessened the cost for the maintenance of alms-houses,
prisons, and asylums, by teaching men and women to be self-helpful and
self-reliant, and in that way have benefited the State to an amount far
exceeding any sum that could be gathered by taxation.

“The work of the societies is done gratuitously by the directors,
and in no other way could they be maintained, the profits resulting
from the services of men who, though they have never posed as
philanthropists, are engaged in the best kind of charity, helping men
and women who help themselves.”

Joseph H. Paist, a prominent Philadelphia building association expert,
has been president of the league since it was organized.

Other States have leagues, and they are all combined as a National
League, whose motto is “The American Home is the Safeguard of American
Liberty.”

At certain intervals the national government, States, cities, and
hundreds of industrial enterprises distribute earnings and accrued
interest to those entitled to the same. The vast sums of money
drawn out of thousands of banks and banking institutions represent
millions of dollars of canceled debts. Within a few days after these
distributions take place, at least nine tenths of this money finds its
way back into the strong boxes that parted with it. One tenth of the
money is, perhaps, held in the pockets of the people, to be gradually
disbursed for current needs until the next pay arrives. I do not
remember having received a statement or statistical report referring to
the building association share in these distributions.

True, there are no set dates for building societies to part with money,
but in Pennsylvania alone these coöperative companies distribute
$20,000,000 annually in matured shares and withdrawals. This is no
insignificant sum. To-day their accumulated wealth (mostly savings of
people in the humbler ranks of life) is over $107,000,000, and in the
United States fully $600,000,000. The annual outgo for canceled shares
is about $100,000,000, or fully $8,000,000 every month.

Since these associations were organized, quite one thousand five
hundred million dollars have been returned to the members in the value
of homes clear of debt and in cash for withdrawn and matured shares.
Despite these vast disbursements, there has been a gradual increase in
their assets from year to year.

Beginning with one association in 1831, their number increased in a
small way until probably not over two hundred societies existed in
1800. From that date until the present moment it is estimated that over
8000 have been organized throughout the land, increasing at a rapid
rate every year, and leaving at present, after closing out a great
number, nearly 5000 active associations distributed among the States as
follows:—

--------------+------------+-------------+-------------
| No. of | |
States. | Societies. | Membership. | Assets.
--------------+------------+-------------+-------------
Pennsylvania | 1200 | 300,000 | $111,714,871
Ohio | 761 | 297,787 | 99,770,161
Illinois | 682 | 180,000 | 73,309,192
New Jersey | 300 | 116,739 | 41,038,934
Indiana | 492 | 137,510 | 37,624,418
New York | 317 | 102,902 | 37,385,642
Massachusetts | 123 | 65,419 | 24,507,843
Missouri | 255 | 49,462 | 22,497,700
California | 138 | 19,153 | 17,938,100
Iowa | 87 | 25,000 | 6,594,778
Michigan | 70 | 20,497 | 6,495,307
Minnesota | 69 | 9,000 | 4,260,666
Tennessee | 34 | 6,166 | 3,771,354
Nebraska | 68 | 11,821 | 3,554,788
Connecticut | 15 | 11,208 | 3,243,935
Maine | 33 | 8,230 | 2,912,963
Other States | 228 | 281,284 | 104,320,367
| | +-------------
Totals | 4872 | 1,642,178 | $600,941,019
--------------+------------+-------------+-------------

It is estimated that of the above named membership over 325,000 are
women. Of the $600,000,000 of assets, at least $100,000,000 is a gain
credit to the sharer. It is believed that an average of at least three
members of a family contribute toward the payment of the dues and
interest, and although seventeen hundred thousand names are on the
books, nearly five million persons actually contribute.

These societies have done more to teach the people practical thrift
than any known device ever promulgated. Thrift is described as “good
husbandry, economical management in regard to property, success and
advance in the acquisition of property, increase of worldly goods,
vigorous growth, as a plant.”

“He is a good wagoner that can turn in a little room.”—Bishop J. Hall.

“Economy is the parent of integrity, of liberty and of ease, and the
beautiful sister of temperance, of cheerfulness and health. Without
economy none can be rich, and with it few can be poor.”—Dr. Johnson.

While these literary economical truths proclaimed in all ages by wise
men, which they themselves very seldom knew how to put into practical
use, have no doubt caused millions to think and wonder how to do it,
they, altogether, have not built half as many rounds in the practical
ladder of “thrift” as the poor workingman who successfully induces his
next door neighbor to save one dollar a month out of his _waste_ money,
and with it subscribe for one share of stock in a well-managed building
society. Building society advocates have done much inducing, but always
in a practical way. They have not merely proclaimed that “economy is
wealth;” that “the best security for civilization is the dwelling,” but
they have taken the arm of their friend and neighbor and have led him
to the society meeting-room and shown him just how they saved their own
money. They have also taken them into their own homes and told them,
“This is my own home, paid for, or nearly so, through the aid of the
building society.” In this way lessons in the practical benefit of
thrift are daily given.

“Examples demonstrate the possibility of success,” said Colton many
years ago.

Alexander Dumas brought the matter home to the door of every man when
he said, “All the world cries, ‘Where is the man who will save us?
We want a man!’ Don’t look for this man, you have him at hand. This
man—it is you—it is I—it is each of us.... How to constitute one’s
self a man? Nothing harder if one knows not how to will it; nothing
easier if one wills it.”

It would seem that building society advocates were created to teach men
how to will it. In this line of work they have certainly been eminently
successful. To what class of citizens do these advocates belong, good,
better, or best? In the early history of these associations they were
organized and almost wholly managed by mechanics and laboring men;
managed honestly, conservatively, and successfully; and to this “class”
belongs the honor of organizing, conducting, and carrying to a point of
magnitude and usefulness, that commands the admiration of financiers
the world over, the building societies as conducted in Pennsylvania and
other States.

The honest, thrifty home-seeker has proved himself to be the “best”
citizen so far as managing a building society is concerned. When
failures have occurred, the main causes have been the introduction
into the management of financial ideas emanating from the brains of
theoretical bankers and literary economists.

The man who works at the bench mending shoes has a better idea of
what a dollar will do than the man who has at his command hundreds
of thousands of dollars belonging to other people, but who never was
blessed with the necessity of earning a real dollar by his own labor.
The conservative building society is one of good common sense and
not of class. It would be difficult to bankrupt a building society
conducted by men endowed with honesty and good common sense. The
“better citizen” is the man who spends less than he earns, pays his
debts promptly, would rather give his neighbor a dollar than steal a
dollar from him, looks upon the home institution as holy and sacred,
strives to own a home of his own, obeys the laws and looks the world
straight in the face. This “class,” without a penny to begin with,
caused Philadelphia to be known the world over as “the City of Homes.”

In the many interesting cases of men redeemed from the habit of
unthrift through the agency of building associations, and placed on
the road to moderate fortunes, there are sometimes two sides to the
story. One side is that related by the individual who has been saved
from future poverty, and the other side that which could be related by
the wife and mother, if she did not prefer and really strive to hide
from the outside world the life she had been leading, its trials and
gloom. The man simply tells how many days in the week he preferred not
to work, and how he never tried to save a penny. The wife could tell
how little the husband brought into the home in the way of money, and
what her awful anxiety had been. One side is public property, for it
is told by the husband for the purpose of inducing others to make a
new departure on the road to thrift and home-ownership. The other side
is supposed to be sacred, but it is only a secret in a sense that it
is not proclaimed. No man who is often voluntarily away from his work,
having a “good” selfish “time,” spending the earnings of days of
actual work, need imagine that his friends and neighbors are ignorant
of what the life in his home is, for it is as plain to all as if the
house was constructed of clear glass.

Every man of good health, who will make an honest and determined
effort, has it in his power to change such a home as has been described
into a palace of joy, comfort, and happiness, and even beauty.

There are many thousands of men and women throughout the land who would
not to-day have their own roof over their heads but for the building
society and the thrifty habits acquired through it.

[Illustration: ROW OF $1400 HOUSES.]

The officers and members of these societies are men who have, by
degrees, worked their way on the path to independence, and they are
highly respected by all who know them, and pointed out as examples by
their neighbors.

Members of these societies, after becoming firmly established in
thrifty habits, delight in relating their own experience as well as
that of others. There are thousands of interesting cases on record, of
which samples are given below:—

A short time ago, at a house of mourning, the members of the family
called the writer’s attention to a girl about fifteen years of age, who
had volunteered her services to the family until after the funeral.
This remark was made: “Our case is sad enough (the death of a father),
but the child you saw at the door has a father who has been confined to
the house with a lingering illness. There are several younger children,
and one girl older than the one you saw. The two girls have been
working in a mill, but on short time. Their case is sadder than ours,
and they were the first to volunteer to help us.” The above is the sad
part of the story, but there is a silver-lined side, since ascertained.
The father joined a building society some years ago and bought a house
for $2000, and while on his sick bed received a paid-up deed for his
home, the building society shares having matured.

It is now twenty years since a big, strong man, under the influence
of strong drink, visited the office of a building society secretary
and asked if a Mrs. —— had any shares in the society. The books were
examined and an affirmative answer was given. The next question was,
“How much has been paid in on the shares?” Answer, “Three hundred and
sixty dollars.” The inquirer brought his fist down on the secretary’s
desk and exclaimed:—

“So it is true, is it? I will stop that game; that woman is my wife,
and I have just heard that she is going to draw out the money and run
away.”

The secretary measured the man, and, risking a fight, determined to
hasten a climax.

“So you are the husband of Mrs. ——, are you?”

“Yes, I am.”

“And you are drunk?”

“Yes, sir.”

“How long have you been drinking?”

“For a long time.”

“Have you given your wife any money lately?”

“No, sir.”

“Have you given her any of the money in this society?”

“I don’t think I have.”

“Your wife takes in washing and goes out house-cleaning, does she not?”

“Yes, sir.”

“You eat at home without paying anything towards the support of the
house?”

“Yes, sir.”

“You have nice children, and your wife takes good care of them?”

“Yes, sir.”

“You admit that all this is true?”

“Yes, sir.”

“Now, will you answer me an honest question?”

“I will.”

“Don’t you think that you are just the kind of a man that a good woman
like your wife would be justified in running away from?”

“I do.”

The secretary asked who told him that his wife was going to run away;
and he answered that it was a friend.

[Illustration: PLAN OF $1400 HOUSES.]

The secretary then addressed him as follows:—

“When your wife comes to the society, I have noticed that her hands
were sometimes split and bleeding from hard work, and I know that she
is saving this money to keep you and the children from the almshouse.
In the first place, you should give up drinking and keep away from the
people who have been talking against your wife; and then I would advise
you to go home at once and tell all to your wife, and get down on your
knees before her and ask her pardon.”

To the utter surprise of the secretary the man shook hands with him and
emphatically gave his word that he would act on the advice given.

Not the strangest part of the incident is that the advice was exactly
followed. From that time until now the man has abstained from drink. As
soon as he got work he took shares in the society, and in a few years
three of his children had subscribed for shares. Only recently two of
the children withdrew shares to buy homes of their own. This is the
kind of practical work done by every building society in every State
in the Union, and the State as well as the entire country is the gainer
by it.

Of course it goes without saying that the building society knows no
secret plan for the payment of dues and interest greater than the
borrower can afford. It does, however, point out a way for every man to
gain a home of his own, but the price of the house must be in keeping
with his income. If this rule is not observed the result is almost
always failure to gain the desired object. It is an old saying that it
is almost wise to go in debt for a home, but it is decidedly unwise to
contract for a home that requires every dollar of income to keep it up.

Every home buyer should allow himself some margin in order to provide
for the possible rainy day. The man who cannot save over twenty dollars
a month outside of actual living expenses commits a serious error when
he signs a contract requiring him to pay twenty-five dollars every four
weeks. In doing this he robs himself first, and, second, is unfair to
his family. It would be to his advantage to place aside three or four
dollars out of the twenty dollars named as a nest egg.

This applies in particular to the careful man, who has been taught in
the school of thrift. The man who has been unthrifty may be able (when
he graduates) to save thirty dollars a month even when he thinks he
cannot save anything. Building society managers make it their business
to warn the thrifty not to undertake too much, and also to lead the
unsaving into habits of economy.

Only recently a judge on the bench said, “Such associations, when
properly conducted under judicious restrictions and management, are a
helpful blessing and encouragement to any community. But the ambitions
and extravagance of some borrowing members place themselves in a
burdensome condition.... Far better for the public, the associations,
and their membership, that many small loans be made rather than a few
in number and large in amount. Moderate homes and a moderate price
should be the criterion.... Their primary purpose was and should
continue to be to promote industry, frugality, and saving, and convert
the shiftless and discouraged tenant into a self-reliant and contented
home-builder.”

Building societies since their inception have supplied the means for
home purchasing, but these companies do not generally take any part in
the erection of houses. Most of the small homes in Philadelphia have
been built by those engaged in the business of building houses for sale.

Here is a picture of a row of houses containing seven rooms each. The
purchase price is $1400 each. The lots are 14 feet wide and 60 feet
deep. The houses are brownstone and brick. They have good cellars,
portable heaters, and range in kitchen, hot and cold water in kitchen
and bathroom. On the first floor there are three rooms,—parlor,
dining-room, and kitchen, and outside shed. Front door opens into
vestibule; entrance to parlor from entry, and also from dining-room.
Two front bedrooms over the parlor, bathroom in centre, and
sitting-room back of the bathroom. The dining-room extends over the
width of the lot less stairway room, and receives light from skylight.
The kitchen has a window opening towards the back shed or backyard. A
small toilet room occupies a small portion of the back shed.

[Illustration: BUILDING ASSOCIATION BANQUET.]

Any person known to be prompt in the payment of dues and interest
may purchase such a home by the payment of $200 in cash, and giving
a building society mortgage for the balance of the purchase-money,
namely, $1200.

The monthly cost would be about as follows:—

Monthly dues $6.00
Monthly interest 6.00
------
Monthly total $12.00

A fairly prosperous building society will mature its shares in twelve
years, and at the end of that period the home would be free from debt.
During this time the borrower must pay taxes and water rent, amounting
to some $25.00 per year. The total payments would be about as follows:—

First payment $200.00
Dues and interest 1728.00
Taxes and water rent 300.00
--------
Total $2228.00

This seems like a considerable sum of money for a house worth $1400.
But it must be remembered that the borrower has lived in the house
during these twelve years, and that he has saved in rent that he would
have paid elsewhere, at least $1800.

He has paid $2228.00
He has saved 1800.00
--------
Real cost of house $428.00

Now he is the full owner of his own home. During the next twelve years
he will have nothing to pay but taxes and water rent, and possibly some
slight repairs, at the most not over $400 all told.

His next door neighbor is still a renter, and pays $1800 to his
landlord during the second period named; and the two accounts compared
show:—

Rent payer $1800.00
House owner 400.00
--------
Saving $1400.00

This is equal to a saving of, say, $10.00 a month for 144 months,
and if used in the purchase of ten shares of building society stock
would be worth at the time named $2000, instead of $1400 merely saved.
The neighbor who is a tenant is still paying rent and owns neither a
stick nor a stone, while the building society borrower owns one house
free and also has the command of $2000 in cash, all on account of his
house-owning experiment.

V. THE BANQUET.

It is customary for the directors of these societies, at their own
expense, to celebrate the closing of a successful year, and have as
their guests representatives from other societies. “The banquet”
includes officers from fully fifty companies, some being directors of
four or five associations. At these gatherings experiences are related
and subjects for the advancement of the cause are discussed. Every
individual present on these occasions volunteers the information that
he owed all he possessed to the building society and its teachings.

What the bottles on the table may have contained, it matters not now,
for they are empty and are not capable of doing any harm.

EPOCH-MAKERS OF THE CENTURY

BY REV. A. LEFFINGWELL,

_Rector of Trinity Church, Toledo, Ohio_.

Every century has had its epoch-making characters,—men and women
who dominated and directed the thoughts, purposes, activities, and
achievements of their times. The nineteenth century is distinguished
above all others by the number and quality of those who came to stand
for the inception, advance, and culmination of the world’s great
movements and who highly exemplified in their careers the enterprise
and genius of their day.

[Illustration: ABRAHAM LINCOLN.]

The object here is to designate, and make brief mention of, some of
those who have fairly earned the title of epoch-maker, with the hope
of providing a delightful historic study, and further enhancing the
instructive value of a volume addressed to the triumphs and wonders of
the century.

STATESMEN, ORATORS, AND JURISTS.—Abraham Lincoln (b. February 12,
1809; d. April 14, 1865) sprang from the masses, and grew up with
their institutions rather than with the learning of the schools. He
grew into leadership because he was one of the “million,” had hard
sense and was true. As a forcible exponent of the sentiment of his
party he was elected President in 1861. His election was the signal
for secession and war. His mastery of the most delicate situation in
the history of his country was superb. His patience, his perseverance
amid hard trials, his wisdom of administration, his adaptation to the
march of events, his striking and educative speech, his determination
to preserve a union of States, all led grandly and inevitably to the
crowning act of his noble career,—the abolition of slavery in the
United States in 1863.

There is no sadder chapter in history, and no greater loss for any
nation or time, than that of his taking off (after being a second time
honored by the presidency) at the hands of an assassin, on the night of
April 14, 1865.

[Illustration: JEFFERSON DAVIS.]

Jefferson Davis (b. June 3, 1808; d. December 6, 1889) stood for the
cause of the South against the Union, as it took concrete political
form in the shape of the Confederacy, of which he became the only
President. Though, perhaps, lacking the ability of such leaders as
Calhoun and Stephens, he was a conscientious and persistent advocate
of the doctrines which culminated in war, and as chief executive ruled
with energy and firmness.

Henry Clay (b. April 12, 1777; d. July 29, 1852) was a born orator
and natural party leader. In statesmanship he was intensely patriotic
and always able, being highly informed and skillful in debate. He
came to stand as the champion of those doctrines which the Whig
party supported, such as protection to home industries, internal
improvements, and reciprocity. Upon the question of slavery which
agitated Congress during most of his career he generally assumed an
attitude of compromise, and fathered so many measures of a pacifying
nature that he was called “the great pacificator.”

Daniel Webster (b. January 18, 1782; d. October 24, 1852) typifies
the gigantic and imposing in New England intellect and physique. As
early as 1820 he stood at the very head of American orators, a fame
soon to be followed in the ranks of law and statesmanship. At first he
opposed the doctrine of protection, but subsequently gave his support
to Henry Clay’s “American policy.” In the United States Senate, he
won the titles of “expounder of the Constitution” and “supporter and
defender of the Union,” by his masterly denunciations of the doctrine
of nullification.

James Monroe (b. April 28, 1758; d. July 4, 1831) reached the
presidency twice, once in 1817, and again in 1820. His last
administration was characterized as “the era of good feeling,” during
which new States were admitted, Florida was acquired, the Louisiana
boundary defined, slavery prohibited north of certain lines, and
many provoking controversies with England were settled. In 1823 he
signalized his administration by promulgating the now famous “Monroe
Doctrine,” which was a warning to Europe that monarchical governments
would not be allowed to interfere in the affairs of either North or
South America.

[Illustration: WILLIAM E. GLADSTONE.]

John Quincy Adams (b. July 11, 1767; d. February 23, 1848) typed the
Federalism of the early part of the nineteenth century, and won the
highest place in scholarly statesmanship. In diplomacy he filled
many prominent and difficult positions at home and abroad. As sixth
President of the United States, he was opposed by a majority in
Congress, and consequently failed to distinguish his administration. He
was the forerunner of those sentiments which culminated in organized
opposition to the doctrine of human slavery.

John C. Calhoun (b. March 18, 1782; d. March 31, 1850) was twice
Vice-President of the United States, and as Senator became the leading
exponent of the doctrine of States’ rights and nullification of
federal tariff laws. He ranked with Clay and Webster as a debater and
constitutional expounder, and the three were known as “the Great Trio.”
In him the pro-slavery cause found its subtlest, ablest, and most
logical defender. With a fully stored mind of highly metaphysical turn,
a fearlessness and persistency that were matchless, and a character
above reproach, he greatly endeared himself in the South, and his
writings are held in high esteem by men of his school of politics.

Rufus Choate (b. October 1, 1799; d. July 13, 1859) was probably
the best-equipped scholar of the public men of the century, and was
unusually brilliant as orator, lawyer, and publicist. Next to Mr.
Webster he was the greatest member of the Massachusetts bar. He may be
called the American Lord Erskine.

Count Camillo Benso di Cavour, of Italy (b. August 10, 1810; d. June
6, 1861), found a life-work in the unification of the Italian States.
By pursuing a masterly course in European diplomacy he brought the
states of North Italy into unity, and finally, through the efforts
of Garibaldi, those of Southern Italy became united with them in one
kingdom under the rule of Victor Emmanuel in 1860. Though not a man of
“blood and iron,” like Bismarck, he was the equal of his great German
contemporary in diplomacy.

William Ewart Gladstone (b. December 29, 1809; d. May 19, 1898)
was four times premier of England. As orator, political leader and
statesman, and critic in the immense range of subjects he covered, his
genius was without parallel. It may be said that his was the mightiest
personality and most catholic and powerful intellect of any Englishman.
He championed the cause of Christianity among all nations, sounded the
first trumpet call of Italian liberty, opposed Turkey as a Mohammedan
power, raised England’s commercial prosperity to the highest notch,
unraveled the entanglements of Beaconsfield’s ministry, inaugurated
the most astonishing reforms in all directions, but especially in the
church, education, army, and among the labor unions. It is almost
impossible to name any matter of national or international importance
in which his personality and genius were not felt for good.

Alexander Hamilton (b. January 11, 1757; d. July 11, 1804) was by all
odds the ablest jurist and statesman of the early constitutional era of
the United States. He became the first Secretary of the Treasury, and
lifted the finances of the government from utter prostration to high
prosperity. As fiscal organizer his success was unparalleled, and all
after administrations of the Treasury have been practically along the
lines he first laid down. He was easily the leader of that party which
looked with disfavor on “States’ Rights,” and favored a strong central
government.

Benjamin Disraeli, Earl of Beaconsfield (b. December 21, 1804; d. April
19, 1881), stood, as premier, for English “territorial aristocracy” and
for that “territorial expansion” which fixed the wide boundaries of
the Indian Empire, made Queen Victoria Empress of India, taught both
Russia and India to refrain from meddling with England’s possessions,
made the English voice preëminent in the disposition of Continental
territory, and completely defeated the schemes of Russia against
Turkey. Under him the middle classes lost, and the laboring classes
gained, political power. His career greatly heightened the national
institutions and character, as well as the international reputation and
power, of his country.

[Illustration: THOMAS JEFFERSON.]

Thomas Jefferson (b. April 2, 1743; d. July 4, 1826) stood in the past
century as an able exponent of American rights, and his views were
incorporated into the Declaration of Independence, of which he was
the acknowledged author. He equally stood as the leading exponent of
that political school of thought which favored decentralization, or
limitation of the powers of the central government. After his election
to the presidency in 1800, he signalized his administration by what is
known as the Louisiana purchase, for $15,000,000. In thus enlarging
the area of the country by boundaries of vast extent, he became one of
the earliest and most enthusiastic of expansionists, and that without
reference to the modernly mooted question of “government without the
consent of the governed.”

Richard Cobden, of England (1804–1865), was a humanitarian of great
native breadth and liberality, largely increased by travel and constant
observation. He was a powerful leader in the famous Manchester School
of English statesmen. His share in modern progress was fourfold;
first, in securing the repeal of the odious tax on corn in 1846;
second, in urging arbitration rather than arms as a final resort to
settle international disputes; third, in negotiating with France the
Commercial Treaty of 1860, which Mr. Gladstone said no other living man
could have secured; fourth, in his vigorous and successful opposition
of all efforts to enforce England’s recognition of the Southern
Confederacy during the late civil war.

Prince Otto E. L. Bismarck, of Germany (b. April 1, 1815; d. July 30,
1898), blended the unerring instinct, great far-sightedness, fertility
in invention and expedients, and adroit diplomacy of a statesman, with
absolute fearlessness, inflexible purpose, indomitable energy, and
resistless force. Thoroughly German, he was preëminently and always
Prussian, and his great life-work was the accomplishment of German
unity with Prussia at the head. This he achieved by the humiliation of
Austria and France, and the gradual accession of all the distinctively
German states.

Wendell Phillips (1811–1884) exemplified the wonderful power of the
skillfully colloquial in public speech, and is a type of the American
orator who devotes his ability to correct public abuses, right public
wrongs, and educate the public mind and taste. Chiefly as an avowed
abolitionist, as advocate of the temperance cause, as champion of the
Indians and of woman’s rights to the ballot, and as untiring mover in
improving the nation’s penal institutions, Mr. Phillips most largely
contributed to public weal and progress.

James Gillespie Blaine (b. June 31, 1830; d. January 27, 1893),
whether serving in the House, Senate, or Cabinet, had few equals as a
statesman, debater, parliamentarian, or enthusiastic political leader.
Though often disappointed in his aspirations for the presidency, he
lost none of that wonderful power which he had acquired by reason of
his energy, tact, skill, personal magnetism, and knowledge of public
men and measures. He became the special champion of the doctrine of
reciprocity, and by its practical application during Mr. Harrison’s
administration proved its benefits to commerce and international trade
relations.

By his splendid series of decisions and opinions, Joseph Story
(September 18, 1779; September 10, 1845) shares with John Marshall
the merit of determining and of developing towards its fullest
capacity the power of the United States Supreme Court, as set forth
in the Constitution, over state courts and state legislation. He also
practically constructed the United States Admiralty Law and, even
to-day, his “Commentaries on the American Constitution,” in connection
with both of his foregoing services, is a standard work. He represents
the broad and powerful American judicial mind, which has contributed so
largely to the integrity of the Union.

James Kent (b. July 31, 1763; d. December 12, 1847) was professor, judge
of chancery, justice and chief justice of the N. Y. Supreme Court, and
chancellor of New York. He possessed immense legal learning, and to
him is primarily due the creation of New York courts of equity. His
exhaustive “Commentaries upon American Law” is accepted at home and
abroad as one of the great classics of American law literature.

Francis Wharton was born March 7, 1820, and died February 21,
1884. Although at the age of forty-three he exchanged law for the
ministry, he still showed the legal tendency of his mind in a long
career as professor of ecclesiastical and international law in Boston
institutions. He enriched the literature of his profession by many
valuable and standard works on law, municipal, state, national, and
international, and, under Mr. Cleveland, was of great service to the
administration as United States Examiner of International Claims in the
Department of State.

[Illustration: OTTO E. L. VON BISMARCK.]

Louis Adolphe Thiers, of France (b. April 16, 1797; d. September
3, 1877), was editor, historian, and statesman, and in the latter
role became a distinguished leader of French thought and polity. His
greatest service to his country was after the Franco-Prussian war,
when the Assembly elected him chief of the executive, with the title
of “President of the Republic.” In this capacity he was particularly
successful in negotiating the terms of peace with Germany, and in
fulfilling all the conditions of peace.

[Illustration: HON. WILLIAM McKINLEY.

(Copyright, 1896, by F. Gutekunst.)]

William McKinley (b. January 29, 1843) became a leading champion
of the doctrine of industrial protection at an early period in his
congressional career. In 1883 Hon. W. D. Kelley said of him: “He has
distanced all his colleagues in mastering the details of the tariff.”
The Tariff Act of 1890 came to be popularly known as the “McKinley
Bill.” Elected President in 1896, his administration was signalized
by that humanitarian interference in behalf of struggling Cuban
patriots, which culminated in the Spanish-American war, and the most
unprecedented triumph of modern times. It had the added distinction of
rounding out the nineteenth and introducing the twentieth century.

WARRIORS.—Napoleon Bonaparte (Napoleon I.), soldier, statesman,
and Emperor of the French (b. August 15, 1769; d. May 5, 1821), was
the greatest of the world’s masters in the art of war. His numerous
campaigns, conducted with a brilliancy never before equaled, had for
their object the humiliation of the countries of Europe, and the
establishment of an imperial policy in which France should be supreme.
This he came very near to effecting, in spite of closely combined and
persistent opposition. None of the frequent coalitions formed to thwart
his ambitions and stay his martial progress proved absolutely effective
till that of March 25, 1815, was formed, which put an army of 700,000
men in the field against him. It was a part of this army that he met at
Waterloo, June 18, 1815, where defeat awaited him, together with the
eclipse of his gigantic influence and phenomenal genius.

[Illustration: GRANT’S TOMB, RIVERSIDE DRIVE, NEW YORK CITY.]

Ulysses Simpson Grant (b. April 27, 1822; d. July 23, 1885), graduated
at West Point and had a brief military experience in the Mexican war.
On the breaking out of the Civil War he reëntered the Federal service
from civil life, and by exceptional fertility of resource achieved a
series of victories in the West which led to his command of all the
Union forces, with the specially conferred title of lieutenant-general,
a title subsequently raised to that of general. By the brilliant,
persistent, and simultaneous campaigns he carried through in the East
and West, he further clinched his title as one of the world’s greatest
generals, and ended the conflict with honorable peace. He was honored
twice with the presidency of the nation, and through the trying period
of reconstruction his wise statesmanship cemented the Union his sword
had preserved.

Arthur Wellesley Wellington of England (b. May 1, 1769; d. September
22, 1852), attained his first real military distinction in the
campaigns of the English in India. He further added to his fame in the
campaign against France in the Spanish peninsula. But his greatest
glory as a warrior was reached in 1814, when, with the aid of the
Prussian marshal Blücher, he defeated Napoleon at the decisive battle
of Waterloo. He was afterwards honored with a seat in the House of
Lords, and as Prime Minister of the Tory party, but his statesmanship
proved to be of an inferior and unpopular order.

[Illustration: DUKE OF WELLINGTON.]

Helmuth Karl Bernhard von Moltke, of Germany (b. October 26, 1800;
d. April 24, 1891), was the world’s greatest exponent of strictly
scientific warfare. He made the Prussian army a most powerful and
dangerous machine, and led it triumphantly against Denmark and
Austria. By dint of strict organization and drill he made the armies
of the German Confederation equally effective, as was shown in
the Franco-German war (1870–71), which was a series of brilliant
victories, ending with the capitulation of Paris and the downfall of
Napoleon III. and his empire. His greatness lay in the fact that cool,
sober calculation always dominated his greatest audacity of plan.

Simon Bolivar, or Bolivar y Ponte (b. July 25, 1785; d. December 17,
1830), justly earned the surname of “The Liberator.” The first and
greatest of those South American patriots who struck against the
tyrannical colonial system of Spain, he achieved the independence
of the three States of Colombia, Bolivia, and Peru, secured their
recognition by the civilized world, and lived to govern them with the
wisdom and moderation of a wise executive.

[Illustration: COUNT VON MOLTKE.]

Robert E. Lee (b. January 19, 1807; d. October 12, 1870), graduated
at West Point, and was in the constant military service of the United
States till the breaking out of the Civil War. He then transferred his
services to the Confederacy, and speedily became the highest exponent
of its military powers. Honorable, just, energetic, persistent,
skillful in offensive or defensive warfare, schooled in strategy,
full of devices and combinations to overcome desperate situations, he
prolonged a hopeless struggle to an astounding degree, and met defeat
and surrender without dishonor. He readily ranks as one of the world’s
greatest generals.

Lajos (Louis) Kossuth of Hungary (b. April 27, 1802; d. March 20,
1894), as writer, lawyer, and statesman, came to stand for Hungarian
freedom. After the declaration of independence of his country in 1849,
he became its military and political ruler, but was forced by Russian
intervention and domestic rivalry from his high place, and escaped to
foreign lands to pass the balance of his life in eloquent but fruitless
appeals in behalf of his cause and people.

Giuseppe Garibaldi, of Italy (b. July 4, 1807; d. June 2, 1882),
typed the restless, daring soldier, the impulsive statesman, and the
energetic defender of freedom. He shared Count Cavour’s desire for a
free and united Italy, and grew to be a great popular hero. Upon his
capture of the two Sicilies, he presented them to Victor Emmanuel,
thus consummating his life dream of unification, and his desire for
a government in which the wishes of the people were, to some extent,
recognized.

NAVAL HEROES.—Stephen Decatur (b. January 5, 1771; d. March 22, 1820)
attained the rank of captain in the U. S. Navy for his gallant exploit
of burning the frigate Philadelphia in the harbor of Tripoli, after she
had been captured by the Tripolitans. He won further fame as commodore
in the war of 1812, and again in the war with Algiers, Tunis, and
Tripoli. Quick to comprehend emergencies and prompt in action, he was
a type of the dashing and absolutely fearless American seaman. True to
his fiery nature, he found his death in a duel with Commodore Barron.

Oliver Hazard Perry (b. August 23, 1785; d. August 23, 1819) was
rewarded with the rank of captain in the U. S. Navy for the remarkable
courage and dash which eventuated in the memorable victory over the
British fleet in Lake Erie, September 10, 1813. This victory gave the
Americans control of the Great Lakes and hastened, more than any single
event, the conquest of the Northwest and the end of the War of 1812.
He saw further honorable service as commander of the Mediterranean
squadron, and died at Port Spain, on the island of Trinidad, of yellow
fever.

David Dixon Porter (b. June 8, 1813; d. February 13, 1891) grew
and ripened gradually into one of the great naval captains of the
nineteenth century. His courage and energy, large experience, and
intimate knowledge of the rivers and seacoasts of the country fitted
him for the great emergencies of the Civil War. Many of the victories
of the Union armies in the West were due to his cöoperation with
gunboats. He greatly aided in the initial success of Farragut’s
expedition up the Mississippi, the reduction of Vicksburg, and other
strongholds upon Western waters. The greatest victory of his life
was the capture of Fort Fisher. He wrote a history of the U. S. Navy
during the war, a work commended by all naval nations. On the death of
Farragut, 1870, he reached the high rank of admiral.

David Glascoe Farragut (b. July 5, 1801; d. August 14, 1870) supplies
the highest type of the skillful, cautious American naval commander,
backed up by extraordinary dash and boldness. His signal achievements
during the Civil War were the destruction of the Confederate fleet
in the Mississippi, the capture of New Orleans, the passage of the
forts at Port Hudson and the batteries at Vicksburg, and the capture
of Mobile. For his brilliant and successful services the rank of
vice-admiral was especially created for him by the government, and
afterwards that of admiral.

John Adolf Dahlgren (b. November 13, 1809; d. July 12, 1870) was a
prime agent in developing the Naval Ordnance Department and its
works at Washington. He invented and made the well-known Dahlgren
guns. During the Civil War he commanded the South Atlantic blockading
squadron, of some ninety vessels, and did splendid service for the
Union cause. He was author of many naval articles and books, some of
the latter being used as text books by the government.

[Illustration: GEN. GIUSEPPE GARIBALDI.]

Raphael Semmes (b. September 27, 1809; d. August 30, 1877) types more
fully than any other the naval dash and efficiency of the Confederacy.
In him, as commander of the Sumter and Alabama, the merchant marine of
the United States found its direst enemy, and his exploits upon the
ocean won for him a fame which overshadowed those of even higher rank,
but whose services were limited to narrower fields of naval activity.

Admiral George Dewey (b. December 26, 1837) acquired considerable
naval experience in the Civil War. At the breaking out of hostilities
with Spain (1898) he was in command of the U. S. squadron in Eastern
waters, and was ordered to destroy the Spanish fleet in the harbor of
Manila. His attack was prompt and daring, and it ended in one of the
most notable victories in the history of naval warfare. In a few hours
the entire fleet of Spain in the Orient was swept away, together with
her power, and the United States was placed in possession of a new and
magnificent island empire whose maintenance and government may change
the whole history of the Orient, if not of the world.

Admiral Sampson’s contribution to the century’s progress lies in the
line of skillful preparation for emergencies, and promptitude in
meeting them. He became an epoch-maker in the history of the United
States by means of the great and decisive victory over the Spaniards,
won by the fleet under his command in the waters off Santiago.

PREACHERS AND TEACHERS.—The Rev. James McCosh (b. April 1, 1811; d.
November 6, 1894) was an able leader of that great school of literary
men, scholars, educators, and aggesssive practical thinkers which this
century chiefly seems to have produced.

His contribution to modern progress lies mainly along three lines:—

First, in his efforts to obtain the Free Church of Scotland, and
establish it.

Second, in his most successful administration of the affairs of
Princeton College while he was president of that institution.

Third, by his numerous, original, and powerful writings, chiefly
controversial and philosophical.

The Rev. Charles Hodge (b. December 28, 1797; d. June 19, 1878) was a
fine example of the modern expositor of the dogmas of Calvinism. Strong
in conviction and persistent in purpose, a clear, logical thinker and
writer, he naturally became a very powerful leader, his influence being
particularly felt in establishing the present exalted position of the
Presbyterians, especially of the old school division. This influence
was wielded partly from his chair as Professor of Didactic, Exegetic,
and Polemic Theology, and especially in the famous Princeton Review,
which owes its greatness chiefly to his editorship and contributions.

Philip Schaff (b. 1819; d. October 20, 1893) is a type of the scholar
who, through profound research and interpretation, has created an epoch
in theology by his contributions to the nineteenth century, mainly in
historical and exegetical branches.

Henry Ward Beecher (b. June 24, 1813; d. March 8, 1887) easily earned
the reputation of the greatest pulpit orator of his day. As pastor of
Plymouth (Congregational) Church in New York, his genius and remarkable
eloquence attracted and held one of the largest congregations in the
United States. Spontaneity, tact, emotion were elements of his oratory,
and these were always supplemented by force, depth, subtilty, and
quick grasp of intellect and heart. His versatility was phenomenal.
Journalism, literature, politics, social life, philanthropy, parochial
organization, and even agriculture and many other branches were
touched upon by him, and all with results varying from excellent to
extraordinary.

Ralph Waldo Emerson (b. May 25, 1803; d. April 27, 1882) passed through
the career of teacher and preacher to that of general writer, lecturer,
and poet. He should probably be classed with the metaphysicians or
philosophers. His publication of “Nature” in 1835 marked a new era in
American thought. From subsequent addresses and works may be dated the
intellectual movement which was called _Transcendentalism_, and which
was a reaction against formalism and tradition. He lacked the method
essential to the foundation of a new philosophy, but his works form a
permanent addition to the highest literature of the human race.

Phillips Brooks (b. December 13, 1835; d. January 23, 1893) was one
of those phenomenal preachers of the century who won the hearing
and hearts of his auditors by largeness and liberality of thought;
spirituality, earnestness, self-sacrifice, and great love; and by
beauty and poise of character. He seldom preached doctrine, but relied
on the efficacy of ardent exhortation, and the finding and kindling of
the good in each auditor.

[Illustration: CHARLES H. SPURGEON.]

Charles H. Spurgeon (b. June 19, 1834; d. January 31, 1892) stands as a
type of the great popular preacher and leader in charitable work. With
Baptist view’s, he revived his own denomination and exerted a helpful
influence on all others. No divine of his time swayed so resistlessly
the immense audiences he attracted. His plain sermons were always
lightened with happy illustrations and delivered with rare power and
personal magnetism, and they had the exceptional quality of retaining
much of their charm and persuasiveness when in print.

Friedrich Froebel of Thuringia, Germany (b. April 21, 1782; d. June
2, 1852), was a born educator, and his great life-work lay wholly in
that direction. He studied not so much to get knowledge of particular
branches as to discover their natural unity and hidden connection.
He was the advocate of the new education, and pushed the system of
Pestalozzi far beyond its author’s dreams. According to Froebel, man
and nature are governed by the same laws; and, by his observation of
both, he reached his idea of what man’s development should be, and how
to accomplish it. True development must of course proceed from within,
from self activity. And as every age of man is complete in itself,
its perfect development can come from only such development in the
preceding age. Hence, the necessity of properly training and educating
young children. This course of reasoning resulted in his invention of
the kindergarten system, together with his self-sacrificing devotion
in training teachers, and in his heroic perseverance notwithstanding
bitter opposition, or indifference.

Victor Cousin, of France (b. November 28, 1792; d. June 15, 1867),
was a renowned epoch-maker of the century in founding the school of
systematic eclecticism in philosophy. His system sets forth a doctrine
of catholic comprehension and toleration of others. Few men did more in
official and private life to advance the cause of general education in
France.

William Wilberforce, of England (b. August 24, 1759; d. July 29, 1833),
with Pitt and Clarkson, led in the cause of freeing the slaves, being
himself the greatest type of the English abolitionist. For forty-six
years he maintained unceasing and relentless warfare against slavery,
and his priceless gift to the present century was the final and
complete extinction of slavery and of the slave-trade in the British
possessions.

HISTORIANS.—William H. Prescott (b. May 14, 1796; d. January 27, 1859)
proved himself to be an epoch-maker in the sense that he combined the
worth of history with the brilliance and fascination of the novel, and
developed the entirely new field of Spain’s career at home and in her
colonies. His “Ferdinand and Isabella,” “Conquest of Mexico,” “Conquest
of Peru,” and “History of Philip II,” all obtained a world-wide
circulation, and both placed and kept their author in the highest rank
of modern American historians.

[Illustration: WILLIAM WILBERFORCE.]

François P. G. Guizot, of France (b. October 4, 1784; d. September 13,
1874), was both statesman and historian. In the former capacity he
held several important public positions, and from 1840 to 1847 was,
as Minister of Foreign Affairs, really at the head of the government.
His many proposed reforms brought on the revolution of 1848 and the
dethronement of Louis Philippe. Though ranking as one of the greatest
of French statesmen, his highest and most enduring reputation rests
on his historical writings, which are very numerous, and the chief of
which is his “General History of Civilization in Europe.” His works
are classics of historical research, and inspiring forerunners of the
modern method of treating history.

James Anthony Froude (b. October 23, 1818; d. October 20, 1894) ranks
as one of the brightest of England’s writers and historians, though not
one of the most reliable. His writings are characterized, in the main,
by ultra-Protestantism; and in his two most important works, “The
English in Ireland in the 18th Century,” and “The History of England,”
he endeavors to justify his country’s severe treatment of the Irish
Romanists, to establish Henry VIII. as the chief champion of English
independence, and also to bestow upon her ministers much of the credit
popularly supposed to belong to Queen Elizabeth.

John L. Motley (b. Massachusetts, April 15, 1814; d. England, May
29, 1877) typifies the patient and painstaking searcher for truth
in the development of national history; and also the sympathetic,
graphic, and spirited painter of the scenes, events, and characters
which he presents. His “Rise of the Dutch Republic,” “History of the
United Netherlands,” and “Life and Death of John of Barneveld” are
all undeniably great contributions to the historical literature of
the present century, besides being monuments to the exacting toil and
research of years.

[Illustration: THOMAS B. MACAULAY.]

Henry Thomas Buckle, of England (b. November 24, 1822; d. May 29,
1862) is a conspicuous type of the patient and learned historian. His
principal donation to modern progress is “The History of Civilization
in England,” a work whose novel theories created an epoch in the
philosophy of history, and called forth much controversy. According to
him, civilization was due not so much to moral or religious influence
as to material causes,—soil, climate, food, atmosphere, etc.

George Bancroft (b. October 3, 1800; d. January 17, 1891) was equally
renowned as statesman and historian. As a member of President Polk’s
cabinet, he was instrumental in founding the Naval Academy at Annapolis
and the Naval Observatory at Washington. As minister to Prussia he
negotiated several foreign treaties, and ably conducted the settlement
of the “Northwest Boundary” question. But his great life-work was his
“History of the United States,” on which he labored untiringly till his
death. It is the most exhaustive, philosophic, and inspiring of our
national histories.

Richard Hildreth (b. June 28, 1807; d. June 11, 1865) was one of the
century’s valuable contributors to the welfare of the United States
by his “History of Banks,” his many works on morals and politics, and
chiefly by his great life-work, “The History of the United States,” a
production of great labor and masterly detail, but somewhat heavily
written.

Thomas Babington Macaulay, of England (b. October 25, 1800; d. December
28, 1859), was noted as essayist and statesman. But his genius lay
especially in history, in which line he was enabled to furnish the
world with his great life-work, that most remarkable and valuable
“History of England,” which quickly attained a circulation never before
equaled by any similar publication. Though at times partisan and
partial, he was still fortunate in throwing his great strength on the
side of right.

EDITORS.—Horace Greeley (b. February 3, 1811; d. November 29, 1872)
was founder of the “New York Tribune.” He took rank as one of the
ablest editors of his day, and stood the foremost political advocate
and controversialist of his time in America. He made of his paper a
splendid property, and through it exercised an influence that reached
far down among the masses. He lost much of his popularity by his
advocacy of universal amnesty and impartial suffrage, after the close
of the Civil War, and gradually drifted into the Liberal Republican
party. This party, in alliance with the Democrats, placed him on the
presidential ticket in 1872. He was disastrously defeated, and died
from the effects of hard campaign work and grief.

James Gordon Bennett (b. September 1, 1795; d. June 1, 1872), founder
of the “New York Herald,” was the most spirited and daring of those
pioneers who revolutionized the journalism of the century. In his paper
he broke away from high prices and prosaic methods, and inaugurated
the era of cheap prices, racy news, and independent expression. He
practically developed the present organization of newsboys, the use of
the telegraph in securing news, and the American system of European and
war correspondence.

William Cullen Bryant (b. November 3, 1794; d. June 12, 1878) united
the scholarship of the general literature and the grace of a poet with
the genius of a high-toned and brilliant editor. He gave to his paper,
the “New York Evening Post,” a rank and influence seldom attained in
journalism, especially when it is considered that its patrons were
chiefly of the educated and higher business classes. He represented the
cleanest and most intellectual journalism of the century.

John W. Forney (b. September 20, 1817; d. December 9, 1881) was
founder and owner of “The Philadelphia Press.” The journalism of the
century can boast no more indefatigable and brilliant pen than his,
nor did any journal of his day occupy a more commanding place amid
the discussions incident to the Civil War and subsequent periods of
reconstruction. He was also editor and owner of the Washington, D. C.,
“Chronicle.”

Charles Anderson Dana (b. August 8, 1819; d. October 17, 1897) is an
instance of a scholar and publicist who found a true, though late,
outlet for his genius in the realm of independent journalism. Under
his editorship and management the “New York Sun” became the model
news medium of the country, and its editorial, financial, and other
departments were conducted with an ability and conscientiousness that
commanded the widest confidence. He was associate editor of “The New
American Cyclopædia,” and compiler of the admirable “Household Book of
Poetry.”

Joseph Medill (b. April 6, 1823; d. March 16, 1899) rose to the high
rank of editor-in-chief and principal owner of “The Chicago Tribune,”
through the schooling afforded by connection with several minor
papers. No man of the century was more thoroughly imbued with the true
editorial instinct. Of dignified and prudent expression, broad and keen
thought, ever alive to the privileges and power of the press, he made
his journal a model of excellence in all its varied departments as well
as a colossal property.

Joseph Pulitzer (b. 1847) was founder and editor of “The St. Louis
Post-Dispatch,” and afterwards became owner and editor of “The New
York World.” Like the elder Bennett he ranks as one of the dashing,
daring editors of the century, whose aim is to gain notoriety and
extraordinary circulation for his journal by strong, and often
vituperative, attack upon public men and things, and by tireless
efforts to secure general news of a unique and sensational character,
at whatever cost.

Murat Halstead (b. 1829) rose to editorial distinction, and became a
strong factor in the life of the middle West, through his connection
with the “Cincinnati Commercial,” which he raised to a flourishing
financial condition, with immense power in municipal, state, and
national politics. In 1890 he became editor of “The Standard-Union,”
Brooklyn, N. Y.

Whitelaw Reid (b. October 27, 1837) is a type of the highest class of
American political editors, and represents the best in that kind of
American journalism which aims to be both alert and catholic in its
efforts, without the sensationalism of personality, exaggeration, or
the horrible. Next to Mr. Greeley, whom he succeeded as editor, he will
best be remembered in connection with “The New York Tribune,” and has
made his journal a great power along nearly all lines, particularly
those political.

SCIENTISTS.—Sir Charles Bell, of Scotland (b. November 17, 1774;
d. April 29, 1842), is a shining example of patience and genius for
investigation, discovery, and deduction in medical science. The nervous
system was his particular forte; and he discovered the most important
principle that the brain is divided into two parts, each having its
corresponding division in the spinal marrow, and that one set of nerves
conveys sensations from the body to the brain, another carrying back
to the body and its muscles the command of the brain, and finally that
nerves conveying different sensations are connected with different
parts of the brain. He was a remarkable surgeon, a brilliant lecturer,
and a medical author of universal fame.

Samuel D. Gross (b. July 8, 1805; d. May 6, 1884) ranked as one of the
epoch-makers in his profession. As physician, surgeon, and medical
author he showed a lofty aim, strict devotion, marked originality, and
powerful intellect. His numerous works commanded world-wide attention
and became accepted standards. Two of them, at least, were the first of
their kind ever published in America.

George C. L. F. D. Cuvier, of France (b. August 23, 1769; d. May 13,
1832), exhibited in his career the immense reformation and advance
in natural history during the first three decades of the nineteenth
century. He expanded the system of comparative anatomy as the only
true basis of natural history, and from an utterly chaotic and
unintelligible heap of dry facts concerning animal structures he
finally deduced the underlying, natural principles of unity, in their
classification and division. He also established many positive laws
of geology and paleontology and, by his vast discoveries and daring
conceptions therein, developed the comparatively new science of fossil
animal-life to an extent hitherto undreamed of.

Charles Robert Darwin, of England (b. February 13, 1809; d. April 18,
1893), was one of those well-equipped and persistent scientists whose
investigations led to the modern doctrine of the origin and evolution
of species by means of natural selection and preservation of favored
races in the struggle for life. His conclusions were at first bitterly
rejected, especially by religious scientists, but ere the end of the
century came they met with wide acceptance. Only such a genius and
patience as his could have collected, arranged, and interpreted the
gigantic mass of facts out of which he slowly deduced his conclusions.

Louis J. R. Agassiz (b. May 28, 1807; d. December 14, 1873), was the
premier of his day as a scientist and naturalist. Of wonderful physical
and mental power, vast enthusiasm, untiring industry, and exceptional
propensity for research and orderly arrangement, he developed the
modern science of ichthyology, propounded new and accepted theories of
geology and of glacial systems, and established the magnificent Museum
of Natural History at Cambridge, Mass. Astonishingly prolific as a
writer, he remains a constant source of inspiration to naturalists and
scientists.

Samuel C. F. Hahnemann, of Germany (b. April 11, 1755; d. July 2,
1843), was an epoch-maker in the field of medicine. By 1820 his
theories and publications had awakened universal interest, and the
homœopathic system had become an established school. Despite the
long and bitter war between allopathy and homœopathy, it is certain
that the latter has contributed largely to render medicine free from
many old-time methods of an indefensible, if not actually harmful or
dangerous kind.

Horace Wells, of Hartford, Conn. (b. January 21, 1815; d. January 14,
1848), was a dentist. His use of nitrous oxide (laughing gas) to render
the extraction of teeth painless led to its fuller application as an
anæsthetic in surgery, and hence to the discovery of modern anæsthesia
by ether and chloroform. Though robbed of the honor of his discovery by
others, the dentist Wells is no less a contributor to mankind of one of
the greatest boons of the century.

Louis Pasteur, of France (b. December 17, 1822; d. September 28, 1895),
gave new direction and impulse to chemistry and pathology by the
discovery that fermentation arose from micro-organisms, and also that
disease was, in many instances, due to the presence of bacilli in blood
or tissue. He followed this with his system of culture and inoculation,
by means of which he performed most miraculous cures of even such a
vicious disease as hydrophobia. The Pasteur Institute in Paris stands a
monument to his genius and philanthropy.

PHILANTHROPISTS.—Stephen Girard (b. May 24, 1750; d. December 26,
1831) was crabbed, unapproachable, penurious, irreligious, yet
strangely liberal in large public or charitable affairs. Twice
he helped the government with large loans. Public charities and
improvements, hospitals, and paradoxically enough, even churches, were
indebted to him for munificent gifts. The greatest monument to his
philanthropy is Girard College, founded by a bequest of $8,000,000, for
the education of poor white male orphans.

James Smithson, of England (b. about 1765; d. June 27, 1829), was
possibly the first philanthropist to bestow a large endowment upon the
United States. With the sum of $500,000 to $600,000, which came to it
from this benevolent foreigner, the young republic founded and endowed
the splendid Smithsonian Institute at Washington for the spread and
increase of knowledge, thus putting Mr. Smithson in the highest rank
of the world’s benefactors, and erecting an imperishable monument at
another turning-point in the progress of civilization.

George Peabody (b. February 18, 1795; d. November 14, 1869) ranks as
one of the century’s greatest philanthropists. Among his noblest gifts
were $3,500,000 for free education and the training of teachers in the
Southern States, $1,000,000 for a scientific institute at Baltimore,
large sums to Harvard University, and a great amount to his native
town, Danvers, Mass., for educational purposes. Dying in England, he
left $2,500,000 to London, to found workingmen’s homes.

John Jacob Astor (b. July 17, 1763; d. March 29, 1848) used much of
his colossal fortune in philanthropy. Perhaps his largest single gift,
at least that by which he is best known as a benefactor, was the sum
of $400,000 to found the Astor Library of New York city. This noble
institution is conducted on the public plan, and contains nearly
300,000 volumes.

James Lick (b. August 25, 1796; d. October 1, 1876) amassed a fortune
in California, out of which he provided a trust fund for certain public
and charitable purposes. This fund amounted to $5,000,000 at the time
of his death. To him is due the famous Lick Telescope in the University
of California, which cost $700,000; the California School of Mechanic
Arts, costing $540,000; the free public baths of San Francisco, costing
$150,000; and numerous other charities and benefactions.

Leland Stanford (b. March 9, 1824; d. June 20, 1893) acquired a
great fortune in California. Inspired by a dream at the time of his
little son’s death, he determined to found and endow an institution
of learning in his State. The result was the Leland Stanford Junior
University, whose direct endowment was princely, and whose indirect
endowment is expected to amount to $20,000,000 or more.

[Illustration: FLORENCE NIGHTINGALE.]

Florence Nightingale was born, May, 1823, in Florence, Italy, of
English parents, and, prompted by philanthropic instincts, turned her
attention to the relief of humanity. After study in various nursing
schools, she was sent at the head of a corps of trained nurses to
care for the sick and wounded soldiers of the Crimean war, in which
position she displayed marvelous energy and ability. A grateful public
subscribed for her a testimonial of $250,000, which she devoted to the
founding of a training-school for nurses.

Clara Barton (b. about 1830) left a clerkship in Washington to
engage in the work of alleviating the sufferings of the soldiers
of the Civil War, on the battlefields and in hospitals, a work she
performed with rare energy and self-sacrifice. She afterwards aided
the Grand Duchess of Baden in establishing her hospitals during the
Franco-Prussian war, and was decorated with the Golden Cross of Baden
and the Iron Cross of Germany. In 1881 she organized the American Red
Cross Society, for which she secured an international treaty giving it
protection. She performed splendid service in camp and field during the
Spanish-American war.

John D. Rockefeller (b. 1839) is a splendid example of those many
and noble American millionaires who have responded with astonishing
liberality to the promptings of their philanthropic natures. The
reconstruction of the Chicago University, the founding or endowment of
other public institutions, and of numerous charitable benefactions,
together embracing the expenditure of many millions, are magnificent
monuments to Mr. Rockefeller’s share in promoting the progress of his
country during the last quarter of the nineteenth century.

Matthew Vassar (b. April 29, 1792; d. June 23, 1868) founded Vassar
College, N. Y., in 1861. A brewer of large fortune, he conceived the
idea of erecting and endowing a college for women, wherein education
could be obtained either moderately or gratuitously, and which should
be undenominational. To this end he gave land and $428,000 for
buildings and equipment. Again he gave $360,000. Other members of his
family added to his gifts, till $1,000,000 and more were expended
in buildings, apparatus, etc., and the endowment amounted to over
$1,000,000.

INVENTORS.—George Stephenson, of England (b. June 9, 1781; d. August
12, 1848), was the first (1814) to construct a satisfactory locomotive
steam engine. In 1815 he introduced the steam blast into his second
locomotive. In 1822 he built and operated his first railway, eight
miles long. In 1829 his engine, named the Rocket, was driven at the
rate of twenty-nine miles an hour. He invented a safety lamp, which is
still in use in English collieries. A natural genius and self-taught
mechanic, he refused knighthood, but has received by common consent the
title of the father of railways.

Richard M. Hoe (b. September 12, 1812; d. June 7, 1886) completely
revolutionized the art of printing by the invention of his “lightning”
rotary press, in 1846. This marvel was capable of printing 20,000
impressions an hour. After many costly experiments, with a view to
printing both sides of a sheet at once, he evolved his web-perfecting
press, which drew the paper from a roll, perhaps miles in length, at
the rate of 1000 feet a minute, printed both sides simultaneously, and
cut and folded the sheets at the rate of 20,000 per hour. Subsequent
improvements have given his machines a much larger hourly capacity.

[Illustration: CLARA BARTON.]

Elias Howe (b. June 9, 1819; d. October 3, 1867) contributed the
sewing-machine to the century’s triumphs and wonders, though it is
alleged that the honor of inventing both the eye-pointed needle and
the lock-stitch belongs to Walter Hunt, between whom and Howe long
litigation prevailed, finally resulting in the recognition of the 1846
patent of the latter. Modifications and improvements by more recent
inventors have made the sewing-machine the household boon of to-day.

Cyrus W. Field (b. November 30, 1819; d. July 12, 1892) made the
problem of a telegraphic cable across the Atlantic an aim of his life.
For thirteen years he labored with wonderful faith and perseverance,
and at last, after a series of defeats and mortifying failures,
succeeded (1866) in laying a cable that thoroughly solved the problem.
Since then submarine telegraphy has become one of the most useful and
powerful factors in the private and public life of the world.

Samuel F. B. Morse (b. April 27, 1791; d. April 2, 1872) contributed
to the century’s triumphs and world’s civilization by that brilliant
and persistent series of investigations, which resulted in the first
practical telegraph. He brought his invention before the world in 1844,
and with the aid of the government set up a line of forty miles between
Washington and Baltimore, over which dispatches successfully passed,
May 24, 1844. From this moment his triumph was complete, and he became
the recipient of many flattering distinctions at home and abroad.

John Ericsson (b. July 31, 1803; d. March 8, 1899) either invented, or
first made practical, the steam fire-engine, the artificial draught for
locomotives, the reversible locomotive, the “link-motion,” the caloric
engine, and the screw propeller. Discouraged in England, he came to
the United States in 1839, where he revolutionized naval warfare by
applying the screw propeller to the U. S. S. Princeton, and employing a
range finder. In 1854 he invented the Monitor iron-clad on principles
first applied in the Monitor which defeated the Merrimac in Hampton
Roads, Virginia, March 9, 1862. His career was signalized by many other
valuable inventions.

Alexander Graham Bell, born March 3, 1846, besides exploiting in
America his father’s valuable system of instruction to deaf mutes,
typifies the inventive spirit of his age by his contribution to
public progress through the material side, as exemplified in that
indispensable aid to modern life, the telephone, with the invention of
which he is generally, but by no means undisputedly, credited.

Thomas Alva Edison (b. February 11, 1847) is a splendid example of the
tireless, acute, and practical scientific inventor, and is well named
the electrical “wizard.” Among the triumphs of his skill and genius are
the automatic telegraphic repeater; the duplex telegraph, afterwards
developed into the quadruplex and sextuplex transmitter; the printing
telegraph for stock quotations; the carbon telephone transmitter; the
aerophone; the megaphone and microphone; the phonograph and photometer;
the incandescent lamp; and many other devices for electric lighting.

Nicola Tesla (born 1858), a former pupil and assistant of Edison,
shares with his master the honor of representing the world’s greatest
and most practical of scientific inventors and discoverers. His most
noted investigations and discoveries have been along the line of
arousing luminous vibrations in matter, without, at the same time,
setting in action heat-vibrations. He has made the remarkable discovery
that 200,000 volts may pass harmlessly through that body which 2000
would kill, and is experimenting to produce 3,000,000 vibrations a
minute in matter. He has also shown that both motors and lights can be
operated on one wire without a circuit. His rotary motor is used in
conveying power from the great plant at Niagara Falls.

NOVELISTS.—Sir Walter Scott, of Scotland (b. August 15, 1771; d.
September 21, 1832), exerted a powerful influence on the literature of
the century through the medium of his stirring poetry and delightful
fiction, in both of which he was most ready and prolific. His numerous
works, teeming with striking situations, strong and noble in style, are
models of literary excellence, and are as captivating to readers of
to-day as they were half a century ago.

[Illustration: SIR WALTER SCOTT.]

Charles Dickens, of England (b. February 7, 1812; d. June 9, 1870),
ably exemplified that school of novelists who paint homely social
life with all its innocent, clumsy efforts at humor; its sorrows,
vanities, and weaknesses; its selfishness, malice, and vice; its
wrongs, sufferings, and goodnesses. Though faulty in plot and style
and ridiculous in their exaggerations, his novels marked a new era in
literature, and no books ever so appealed to the sympathies and good
impulses of readers.

James Fenimore Cooper (b. September 15, 1789; d. September 14, 1851)
typifies a large and apparently enduring class of fiction writers
of which he was a remarkable forerunner; that school of novelists
who deal with stirring, bold, and healthful adventure, in which the
Anglo-Saxon mind particularly seems to find unfailing delight. Both at
home and abroad, his novels attained a wide, sudden, and well-deserved
popularity. And to this day no library of fiction is complete without
them.

[Illustration: CHARLES DICKENS.]

Nathaniel Hawthorne (b. July 4, 1804; d. May 18, 1864) exhibits in his
numerous fictional works a man’s breadth and strength of imagination
and a woman’s quick perception and spiritual insight. Almost gloomy in
color, overhung with impending fate, and often uncanny, his stories
are yet always fascinating. As has been well said, one catches in them
“gleaming wit, tender satire, exquisite natural description, subtle and
strange analysis of human life, darkly passionate and weird.”

Count Leo (or Lyoff) Alekseevich Tolstoi (b. August 28, 1828) is a
Russian aristocrat by birth, but has assumed the dress and life of a
peasant, the better to exploit his doctrines respecting non-resistance,
communism, labor, religion, politics, government, and society. His
numerous writings show a combination of keenness of realistic insight
and wealth of poetical imagination, of a wonderful breadth of view with
perfect handling of minute detail, seldom rivaled in all literature.
Whether or not he will prove to be the forerunner of a great revolution
in the world’s national and social life, there is no disputing his
genius and pertinacity.

Edward George Earle Bulwer (Baron Lytton), of England (b. May 25, 1803;
d. January 18, 1873), was novelist, poet, dramatist, and essayist,
and ranked as one of the most versatile and classical authors of the
century. Through his plays, poetry, and novels he introduced a new
literary era, and was the leader, if not actual founder, of the school
of melodramatic romance.

Harriet Elizabeth Beecher Stowe (b. June 14, 1811; d. July 1, 1896)
acquired great fame as authoress of the epoch-making book, “Uncle Tom’s
Cabin.” It proved to be a powerful contribution to the anti-slavery
cause, and served to electrify readers in twenty different languages.
In dramatized form it has delighted millions of auditors. The authoress
represents woman’s efforts for the overthrow of slavery; efforts she
put forth modestly, completely unconscious of their great power and
future influence.

George Eliot, pseudonym of Marian Evans, afterwards Mrs. Lewes, then
Mrs. Cross, of England (b. November 22, 1819; d. December 22, 1880),
was one of the ablest of the world’s female novelists, and had but few
equals among men. She was a leading epoch-maker in that introspective
school which always with astonishing skill uses the “plot” in all its
events, environments, and circumstances to develop each character in
strict logical accord, whether for good or evil.

Victor Hugo, of France (b. February 20, 1802; d. May 22, 1885), was,
in his day, the most popular author who has ever lived. Few poems, no
drama, and absolutely no novel have ever produced the immediate and
tremendous effect of his earlier poems, his “Hernani,” and his “Les
Misérables.” Through “Hernani” he completely defeated the classic
school and became the leader of the romantic school of revolutionary
individualists, thus creating a new epoch in literature. He invented
novelties in poetry and prose which produced strength, variety,
delicacy, harmony, and richness of imagery and coloring, absolutely
unparalleled and original.

[Illustration: LORD BYRON.]

POETS.—Lord George Gordon Byron, of England (b. January 22, 1788;
d. April 19, 1824), is a remarkable instance of a poet of marvelous
natural powers, mingling good and evil in accordance with the whim
that took him; yet exhibiting distinctly, through it all, evidences
of a great soul and genius. He created an epoch in the world’s poetic
literature. Skeptical, cynical, melancholy even to sentimentality, and
skillfully manipulating the public side of his affairs to keep up a
most fascinating air of romantic mystery about them all, he succeeded
in affecting public thought with these characteristics to a wonderful
extent. As a result, “Byronism,” for a time, was the absorbing rage in
all prominent circles, literary and even social.

Henry W. Longfellow (b. February 27, 1807; d. March 24, 1882) is
possibly the century’s finest type of the people’s poet. Though by
no means a poet of great imaginative or creative powers, yet few
reached his perfect skill as a painstaking and unerring artist; while
none have ever surpassed him in creating that atmosphere of subtile
beauty which always seems to surround and penetrate his verse. As an
epoch-maker his influence extended even to Europe, and especially to
England, securing him a fame wider and greater than that of any other
American poet, and rarely failing to win the enduring affection of all
kinds of readers.

John Greenleaf Whittier (b. December 17, 1807; d. September 7, 1892),
as an editor and poet contributed no little to the cause of the
abolitionists. Together with Longfellow, Holmes, Lowell, Hawthorne,
and Emerson, he may be considered an epoch-maker in the development of
American literature as guided by the spirit of New England. He types
the sweet, simple, and absolutely sincere poet whose verse breathes
forth a strong patriotism, and is redolent of the healthful home life
of the Eastern States.

Sir Alfred Tennyson, of England (b. August 6, 1809; d. October 6,
1892), was by far the leading representative of those English poets
who, while not wanting in the fire and spontaneity of true genius,
nevertheless wrote carefully, after long reflection, with calculation
and toil, as to diction, polish, and arrangement of sentences and
thoughts. His highly-wrought “In Memoriam” and his exquisite, though
somewhat sensuous “Idylls of the King” were absolutely novel, and mark
an epoch in the history of the world’s poetry.

Elizabeth Barrett Browning (b. 1809; d. June 29, 1861) is, without
doubt, the greatest poetess of the present century and probably of
any other. She presents an extraordinary instance of the grasp,
comprehensiveness, and logic of man’s intellect, united with the
intuitions, deep emotions, impulses, and visions of woman. Her especial
contribution to the progress of this century is not only to the wealth
of its poetry, but also to the careful and discriminating consideration
of many of its social problems.

Robert Browning (b. in London, May 7, 1812; d. in Venice, December
12, 1889) was the foremost of psychological poets. Belonging to “The
Romantic School,” he created an epoch in literature by carrying his
high ideals and wonderful efforts of genius over into what became known
as “The Spasmodic School.”

ACTORS.—Edmund Keene, of England (b. 1787; d. May 15, 1833), was one
of the greatest and most popular actors of all time. He typified, and
greatly contributed to the success of, that school of actors who rely
almost solely on their own native genius and acquired powers, rather
than on the aid of externals. He has been called both the “Byron” and
the “Napoleon” of actors, and seemed to have the most extraordinary
power both of catching and revealing the meaning of Shakespeare, with
the quickness and vividness of the lightning flash.

Edwin Forrest (b. March 9, 1806; d. December 12, 1872) was a tragedian
of the robust type. His success upon the stage was signal, owing to
natural genius, superb form, and noble presence. For more than a
generation he rendered effective and kept popular the leading tragedies
of Shakespeare, and others suited to his powers. The Actors’ Home at
Philadelphia was endowed by him, and stands as his monument.

Edwin Booth (b. November 13, 1833; d. June 7, 1893) stood as the
exponent of the refined and lofty in drama. Through his rare
histrionic powers he became a recognized interpreter of such
characters as Richard III., Shylock, Lear, Iago, Othello, Brutus, etc.,
but he never appeared to better advantage than in Hamlet. His ability
was as fully recognized abroad as at home. He expended $175,000 in
establishing the Players’ House and Club in New York.

Charlotte S. Cushman (b. July 23, 1816; d. February 18, 1876) first won
her histrionic honors in opera. Her voice failed, and then she began
her memorable career as actress, her most famous personations being
Lady Macbeth, Bianca, Julia, Beatrice, Lady Teazle, Queen Katharine,
and Meg Merrilies. She readily ranked with the great dramatic artists
of the century, and her skill, native and acquired, divided with her
own splendid character the admiration of the general public.

Tommaso Salvini (b. January, 1830) demonstrates that now very rare and
severely tragic school of the stage in which the actor appeals to the
public through his genius and art, rather than through his environments
and accessories. He thus belongs to an apparently closing era in
the history of the stage. Powerful, passionate yet self-controlled,
magnificent in physique, in elocution, in reading and in deportment,
as an actor he really belongs to the world, although Italian in both
spirit and training.

Sir Henry Irving (or really John Henry Broadrib), of England, was born
in 1838, and is the leader of that modern school of actors, who depend
not so much on good reading, acting and general elocution as upon
careful attention to details in stage-setting and presentation. As an
epoch-maker in the history of the modern drama, he marks that point
where the actor begins to look away from his own personal art to that
displayed in his surroundings and accessories.

LYRIC DRAMATISTS.—Ludwig van Beethoven, of Germany (b. December 17,
1770; d. March 26, 1827), is widely held to be the most colossal of
musical geniuses, in breadth and grasp of intellect, in vastness and
boldness of imagination, and in depth and tenderness of emotion.
His one opera, “Fidelio,” is by many considered to be unrivaled in
the realm of pure dramatic music. His sonatas and chamber music are
generally conceded easily to lead in those two departments, while his
symphonies are universally believed to have reached the utmost limit of
development which is possible in the field of orchestral composition.

Charles F. Gounod, of France (b. June 17, 1818; d. October 18, 1893),
is an instance of a composer whose permanent fame must rest on but
one work, the opera of “Faust,” in which he reached the utmost height
of his powers and success. No opera has ever had such instant,
universal, and constant popularity. Eclectic in style, and faithful
and enthusiastic in his art, he did much to advance the progress of
religious and operatic music in France.

Robert Schumann, of Saxony (b. June 8, 1810; d. July 29, 1856) was one
of the creators of the romantic school of music. He was not a piano
player, but a teacher and composer. His symphonies have been accorded
a rank next to those of Beethoven, and for their deep pathos, fine,
intense passion and wild, mournful beauty many of his compositions are
almost peerless.

Felix Mendelssohn-Bartholdy (b. February 5, 1809; d. November 4, 1847)
was as lovely in character as in works. In symphony, song, piano-forte,
organ, or oratorio, he showed himself worthy of being classed with the
great musical masters. His compositions suffered eclipse for a time by
those of a stronger school, but his true position in the musical world
is once more becoming recognized.

Franz Schubert, of Austria (b. January 31, 1797; d. November 10, 1829),
has been called “the immortal melodist.” His fecundity was marvelous,
and he is best known by his songs, several hundred in number, and
nearly half of which have immortal quality. He also composed many
charming symphonies and operas. His chief characteristics are the
freshness of his delightful melodies supported by harmonies of equal
interest.

Anton Gregor Rubinstein, of Russia (b. November 30, 1830; d. November
20, 1894), combined the brilliant pianist with the composer of
genius. Had he not been preceded by Liszt as an epoch maker, he would
undoubtedly have had the honor of being first of all great pianists.

Frederic F. Chopin, of Poland (b. March 1, 1809; d. October 17, 1849),
was one of the first of pianists and musical composers. His playing,
like his music, was marked by a strange and ravishing grace, and he was
the great interpreter of the music of his native country. He composed
concertos, waltzes, nocturnes, preludes, and mazurkas abounding in
poetic fancy and subtle harmonic effects.

Jacques Offenbach, of France (b. June 21, 1819; d. October 4, 1880),
was the chief creator of the opera bouffe, and was an astonishingly
prolific composer. He stands for the clever, tactful musician, shrewd
to perceive and quick to seize what catches the public ear for the time
being.

Franz Liszt, of Hungary (b. October 22, 1811; d. July 31, 1886), ranks
as one of the world’s phenomenal pianists. His strength and technique
were prodigious, his magnetism irresistible, and his power over
audiences unequaled. By his free, fantastic compositions he created a
new school of composers. He gave extraordinary aid and inspiration to
other musicians, and in reality brought Richard Wagner into prominence
before the musical world.

Richard Wagner, of Germany (b. May 22, 1813; d. February 13, 1883),
early abandoned Beethoven as an operatic model, and felt that a new
era in music was about to dawn. His musical theories first found full
swing in his famous opera of the “Nibelungen Ring,” with which, and
kindred productions, he practically created the modern music-drama. In
his operas he was sole author of their wonderful wealth of true poetry,
stage effects, dramatic action, and endless melody. No musician has
ever made such bitter foes and warm friends, and none ever had to fight
his way so stubbornly to recognition.

Giuseppe Verdi, of Italy (b. October 9, 1813), is one of the most
remarkable musical composers of the century, in the respect that his
talent has not failed with age, but has kept pace with the great
changes which have affected the dramatic stage since his youth. In
the beauty of his melodies and the intensity of his dramatic powers
he is unsurpassed. Very few, indeed, of his numerous productions have
failed to hold exalted place in public estimation. His best-known works
are “Il Trovatore,” “La Traviata,” “Rigoletto,” “Ballo in Maschera,”
“Aïda,” “Otello,” and “Falstaff,” the latter written in 1893, when the
author had reached the age of eighty.

SOVEREIGNS.—William I., King of Prussia and Emperor of Germany, was
the epoch-maker of the 19th century for his realm. He was son of
Frederick William III., and born March 22, 1797. In 1849 he was made
commander-in-chief of the Prussian army. He succeeded to the throne of
Prussia in 1861, and immediately under the guidance of Bismarck set
about those measures which were to end in the unification of the German
states. These involved the war of 1866 with Austria, after which,
in 1867 he became head of the powerful North German confederation,
comprising 22 states, and a population of 29,000,000. Then followed the
successful war with France, in 1871, which resulted in the complete
realization of his idea of a united Germany, and on January 28, 1871,
King William of Prussia was proclaimed Emperor of Germany, in the
palace of the French kings, at Marseilles. He died March 9, 1888.

Victor Emmanuel. At the birth of Victor Emmanuel in 1820, Italy was
a segregation of states or provinces, owned and played against one
another by the chess-players of Europe. The policy of ambitious
sovereigns to the north was to keep it divided and discordant. Victor
Emmanuel became king of Sardinia at a time when Austria’s power was
well-nigh supreme in the belligerent Italian states. His plea with
Austria that the Sardinian constitution should be protected, and its
success, aroused for him the confidence of the Italian people, and
paved his way to the Italian crown. In 1852 he secured the services
of the masterly Count Cavour, the Bismarck and Gladstone of Italy,
for his premier and guide. Through Cavour’s influence France united
with Sardinia against Austria. The war which followed and the peace of
Villafranca completed Emmanuel’s task, and made him king of a united
Italy, over which he reigned successfully for eight years, dying on
January 9, 1878.

Czar Alexander II. The epoch-maker of Russia during the 19th century
was Alexander II., born April 29, 1818. Of the many important events of
his reign, which began in 1855, the most illustrious was the abolition
of serfdom in his dominions, which gave freedom to 23,000,000 subjects.
He was killed by anarchists in 1881.

Francis Joseph. This emperor of Austria-Hungary was born August 18,
1830, and succeeded to the throne of Austria in 1848, and of Hungary
in 1867. Though defeated in wars with France, by which he lost Italian
provinces, and with Germany by which he lost Schleswig-Holstein, he
managed through an unprecedently long reign, in some part of which he
was both emperor and legislature, to hold together an empire composed
of heterogeneous Germans and Slavs, a task that would have proved
impossible with a less wise and respected ruler. He survived the
century, and the question also lived, what of the empire after his
death?

Victoria, Queen and Empress. Alexandrina Victoria Guelph, whose reign
was the longest in English annals, and covered the epoch-making time
of Great Britain during the nineteenth century, was born in London,
May 24, 1819. She was the daughter of the Duke of Kent, fourth son
of George III. She became next in succession to the throne on the
death of her uncle, King William IV., which occurred June 20, 1837.
Her ancestry dated back to Egbert, A. D. 827. To the wisdom of her
mother she owed a well-ordered, peaceful, and happy childhood, with a
view to the possibility of the English throne. Special teachers were
employed as her instructors, and she became proficient in music and
drawing, as well as in the classic and modern languages. She became
equally proficient in the English constitution and general history. In
1831, when, at the age of twelve, it was deemed necessary to acquaint
her with the fact that she was heir presumptive to the throne, the
genealogical table of the royal family was placed in her book of
history. After a study of it, she remarked that she was nearer the
throne than she had thought, and that the reasons for her course of
mental training had become obvious.

About this time the young princess made her first appearance at court,
and Parliament voted her an additional appropriation of $50,000 a
year for her expenses. But as a rule her mother made use of the fast
vanishing possibility of the birth of other heirs who would take
precedence of her, to keep the child, as long as propriety would
permit, out of the whirl of court life, and to allow her education
to proceed without interruption. The consequence of this maternal
discretion was that Victoria came to the throne in excellent physical
and mental health.

She attained her legal majority—eighteen years—on May 24, 1837,
and her birthday was celebrated throughout the country. On June 20,
1837, King William died childless. It became the immediate duty of
the Archbishop of Canterbury and Lord Conyngham to inform the young
princess of her uncle’s death and her own right of accession. She held
out her hand to the Archbishop to be kissed, and said, “I ask your
prayers on my behalf.” A meeting of the privy council was called for
eleven o’clock. The princess was known to but few of the members, and
there was a universal desire to ascertain what manner of person she
might be. She appeared before this august body of a hundred leading
nobles and statesmen with modest composure, bowed to the lords, took
her seat, and read her declaration. The members of the council were
then sworn to allegiance, kneeling and kissing her hand. The foreign
ambassadors were then received one by one. All were captivated by the
easy dignity of their girl-queen. Her speech was generally remarked
upon for its perfect elocution. Of her speech a few months after,
upon the dissolution of Parliament, Charles Sumner, who heard it,
said, “I was astonished and delighted. I think I never heard anything
better read.” And of the same speech Fanny Kemble said: “I think it is
impossible to hear a more excellent utterance than that of the Queen’s
English by the English queen.”

Victoria promptly reformed her court, which was sadly in need of
correction, and removed the royal residence to Windsor Castle. Public
admiration for her ability and grace of manner grew into enthusiasm, so
that on the day of her coronation at Westminster Abbey, June 28, 1838,
the pageant was not only one of unsurpassed splendor, but the populace
were described as “coronation mad.” This was the manifestation of a
radically changed public sentiment as to royalty, for the eclipse of
monarchy under the four Georges had long been accepted as a humiliating
fact, and respect for the throne had been well-nigh lost during
William’s reign. Altogether it was a bad time for a girlish queen to
assume power; yet her guiding hand was soon favorably and powerfully
felt, and it has been said by more than one good authority that her
accession at that special crisis was the salvation of monarchy in Great
Britain.

[Illustration: QUEEN VICTORIA IN 1840.

(After a painting by Wm. Fowler.)]

Her prime minister, Lord Melbourne, received at an early date a touch
of her quality, when, after vainly urging her to sign a certain
document, he testily withdrew it with the remark that it was not of
paramount importance. “Sir,” replied the queen instantly, “it is with
me a matter of the most paramount importance whether or not I attach
my signature to a document with which I am not thoroughly acquainted.”
And on another occasion, when her signature was asked to a document
on the ground of “expediency,” she replied, “I have been taught, My
Lord, to judge between what is right and what is wrong, but expediency
is a word I neither wish to hear nor to understand.” The beginning of
her reign was coincident with the inauguration of transatlantic steam
navigation. In the second year of her reign the Whig ministry, at whose
head stood Lord Melbourne, lost its working majority in Parliament.
The queen immediately summoned the Tory leader, Duke of Wellington, to
form a new government. Wellington suggested Sir Robert Peel as better
qualified for the task. He accepted, but when the queen found that the
change would affect all the ladies of her Bedchamber and household
she repudiated Peel, and recommissioned Melbourne. For this she and
her premier were taunted as being at the head of what was called the
“Bedchamber Plot.” Subsequently, when Peel succeeded Melbourne, the
queen found in him and Wellington warm friends and trusted advisers.
Among the other notable events of this year (1839) of her reign, were
the formation of the Anti-Corn Law League, and the occupation of Cabul
and Aden by the British forces.

The queen’s hand was sought in marriage by many kings, dukes, and
princes of Europe. Her choice fell upon her cousin, Prince Albert of
Saxe-Coburg and Gotha. It was a love-match, mingled with not a little
diplomacy on the part of her aunt, the Duchess of Gloucester, and
Albert’s uncle, King Leopold. The wedding was celebrated with stately
splendor at the Chapel Royal in St. James’s Palace, on February 10,
1840. The marriage proved a happy one. All that the most affectionate
and unselfish wife could be, she was to her husband. And the Prince
Consort not only returned her affection in full, but became her
faithful, laborious, vigilant, discreet adviser and helper, lifting
from her shoulders the crushing load of state affairs, and opening a
new era in her life. Careful and well informed observers have ranked
Prince Albert among the statesmen of his day, and some have said that
for the greater part of his twenty-one years of married life he was
practically King of England.

On November 21, 1840, their first child, afterwards Empress Frederick
of Germany, was born. An economic triumph of the year was the
introduction of cheap postage in England. In 1841 Sir Robert Peel
succeeded Lord Melbourne as premier. British arms greatly extended
political and commercial influence in the Orient by the taking of
Canton and Amoy. On November 9 the Prince of Wales, who, January 23,
1901, succeeded to his mother’s throne, was born. In 1842 two attempts
were made to assassinate the queen. It became the foreign policy of the
government not to further complicate the Indian question by pushing
conquest in Afghanistan, so the British forces were withdrawn. The
commercial prestige of England was greatly advanced in the Orient by
the acquisition of Hong Kong as a port, and the general opening of
all the Chinese ports to foreign trade. This year also witnessed the
permanent foothold of Great Britain in South Africa, by absorbing the
Boer republic of Natal.

On April 25, 1843, Princess Alice was born. British possessions in
India were enlarged by the annexation of Scinde. The queen and her
husband paid a friendly visit to Louis Philippe of France, and received
a return visit. In 1845 Mr. Gladstone became premier. England and
France joined in war against the Argentine republic. The year witnessed
the outbreak of the formidable Sikh rebellion. In the following year,
1846, this rebellion was suppressed and the Sikh territory was ceded
to the East India Company. The aggravated question of the Northwest
boundary of the United States was settled by treaty. The great famine
in Ireland, and a somewhat indignant public sentiment in England,
conduced to the repeal of the Corn-laws. For several years the Irish
situation was serious, famine and insurrection going hand in hand. In
1848 Princess Louise was born. The Sikh rebellion was renewed. The Boer
territory in South Africa was further trenched upon, and the farmers
trekt across the Vaal River to establish the Transvaal republic. In
1849 the queen paid her first visit to Ireland, the Sikh rebellion
was suppressed, and the Punjaub was annexed to British India. 1850
witnessed the conclusion of the Clayton-Bulwer treaty with the United
States. In 1851 the queen opened the great Exposition in London. In
1852 the first Derby ministry came into power. In 1854 Great Britain
participated with France in the Crimean War against Russia. For several
years the vigorous foreign policy of the government led to serious
complications. In 1860 the Prince of Wales visited America. During the
Civil War in the United States, the queen’s sympathies were with the
Union cause, and the very last public act of the Prince Consort was to
sign in the name of the queen the paper which modified the demand of
the ministry upon the United States with reference to seizure of the
Confederate envoys Mason and Slidell. The paper in its unmodified form
would have been equivalent to a declaration of war by England.

Toward the end of 1861 Prince Albert’s strength began to fail, and on
December 14 he passed away. His death was a severe blow to the queen
and to the nation. Two years afterwards she wrote in a letter to Dean
Stanley, “I can never be sufficiently thankful that I passed safely
through those two years [the two first years of her reign] to my
marriage. Then I was in a safe haven, and there I remained for twenty
years. Now, that is over, and I am again at sea, always wishing to
consult one who is not here, groping by myself, with a constant sense
of desolation.”

In 1863 the Prince of Wales was married. For several years the
government had serious trouble with the Fenian uprisings in Ireland and
America. In 1867 the Dominion of Canada was constituted. 1868 witnessed
a cabinet change from Derby to Disraeli, and from him to Gladstone;
and the passage of a reform act for Scotland and Ireland. In 1874
Disraeli succeeded Gladstone as premier. In 1875 Great Britain acquired
control of the Suez canal, and in 1876 the queen was proclaimed
Empress of India. In 1879 Great Britain was carrying on war in India
against revolting tribes, and in South Africa against the Zulus. Two
years later (1881) she attacked the Boers of the Transvaal, but met
with defeat. In 1885 there was a further loss of military prestige
by withdrawal from the Soudan campaign. In 1887 the queen celebrated
her semi-centennial jubilee, and ten years later (1897) her diamond
jubilee. In 1900 she witnessed the consolidation of her Australasian
colonies, and in 1901 the establishment of the Commonwealth of
Australia. The closing years of her life were clouded by the attitude
of her country in South Africa, and the losses of life and treasure
entailed by the war with the Boers. It was said by many that her
anxiety and grief over this situation hastened her death. Her last
illness was brief and painless, and her death took place at Osborne,
Isle of Wight, surrounded by her family, at 6.55 P.M. on January 22,
1901, in the eighty-second year of her age, and sixty-fourth of her
reign.

Her death occasioned sincere mourning throughout the civilized world.
She was succeeded by her oldest son, the Prince of Wales, who ascended
the throne on January 23, 1901, and assumed the title of Edward VII.
The queen and Prince Consort were ever anxious as to the education
of their children. They were trained to industry and economy. The
daughters were taught accomplishments as well as sewing and cooking,
and were given to understand that they were not to marry without
affection, nor for mere money or reasons of state. Victoria was herself
a careful manager in pecuniary affairs. By thirty she had saved enough
from her income to provide for the whole expense of her new place at
Osborne, where she died,—about $1,000,000,—while for the Prince she
had already saved from the revenues of her Cornwall estate, $500,000.
The Prince left her a valuable estate which at her death had come to be
estimated at $25,000,000. This, added to her own judicious investments
through the sixty-four years of her reign, gave her rank as one of the
wealthiest of sovereigns, as well as of the world’s persons.

Already the “Victorian era” is being celebrated as the greatest period
of progress that Britain ever knew, as the golden age of England.
And this with much propriety and truth, for her reign teemed with
instances of the exercise of power in the form of moral influence,
with results important and far reaching. Some of these instances
showed statesmanship of a high order. She never took sides in partisan
politics, nor antagonized the policy of her responsible ministers,
though often advising them and even at times correcting their serious
mistakes, never cheapening her advice by offering it in affairs of
little moment, always straightforward, self-reliant, vigilant for the
rights of the people, yet strenuous of law, neither misled by flattery,
nor coerced by fear, a hater of evil, a maker of peace. More than
once, in hours of crisis, did she exercise a moral influence whose
weight turned the course of events in both Europe and America. As an
instance of this, the modification of Lord Palmerston’s action in the
Trent affair, already mentioned, may be referred to. And when Bismarck,
surprised at the rapid recovery of France from the effects of the
Franco-Prussian War, had resolved on a second invasion and humiliation,
it was through Victoria’s intervention that the aged German emperor was
influenced to refuse a renewal of hostilities.

If her reign pass into history as the “Victorian Era,” then it
will truly have many interesting chapters, some grandly inspiring,
others—for such there must be—widely open to the criticism and
judgment of posterity. It witnessed the greatest achievement in
invention, the greatest advancement in science and art, and the most
remarkable evolution in the relations of capital and labor that the
world has ever seen. No equal period of world-history has seen such
unparalleled growth of a people, and such unexampled expansion of
national territory. At the beginning of her reign the population of
the Empire was 127,000,000. At her death it embraced 11,334,000 square
miles and 384,000,000 people. The United Kingdom itself grew from
16,000,000 to 40,000,000 besides sending out its swarms of emigrants
to people continents and isles. Commerce kept even pace with this
advancement. British ships sailed every sea. England’s flag was known
in every port of the world. During Victoria’s reign the foreign trade
of Great Britain increased 420 per cent. The great cloud on the
Victorian era was England’s wars,—the questionable Crimean War of
1853–55; the Indian mutiny of 1857, which ran a frightful course of
rapine and bloodshed; the Soudanese campaign; the Boer War in South
Africa.

Transcriber’s Notes

Punctuation and spelling were made consistent when a predominant
preference was found in this book; otherwise they were not changed.

Simple typographical errors were corrected; occasional unbalanced
quotation marks retained.

Ambiguous hyphens at the ends of lines were retained; occurrences of
inconsistent hyphenation have not been changed.

Many of the original illustrations were grainy and faded. In this
eBook, the graininess has been reduced, when possible, and the contrast
has been increased, when necessary.

Text frequently uses either “De” or “de” in people’s names.

The List of Illustrations had “Christmas Chimes” and “Whispers of
Love” in the wrong sequence; corrected here.

The List of Illustrations omitted the portrait of Queen Victoria. It
has been added by the Transcriber.

“Van’t Hoff” is consistently printed that way in the original book,
and is shown that way here. It should be “Van ’t Hoff” with a space.
There may be similar misprints of other names.

Page 109: “growth—force” may be a misprint for “growth-force”.

Page 192: Most of the illustration’s handwriting on this page is
illegible.

Page 199: In the chemical formula “CH2”, the “2” is subscripted.

Page 403: “Bauken” was printed that way; probably refers to “Bautzen.”

Page 527: The illustrated examples of the letters of the alphabet in
the “Child’s Guide” were not in alphabetic order, and there was no
example for “J”. In this eBook, the text accompanying those examples is
presented in alphabetic sequence.

Page 721: “Marseilles” was printed that way; must be a misprint for
“Versailles.”

The tables on pages 445, 450, and 467 have been split in this version
of the eBook to keep their widths within 72 characters.

*** End of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "Triumphs and Wonders of the 19th Century - The True Mirror of a Phenomenal Era" ***

Home